Installation Manual G600

G500/G600
AML STC Installation Manual
190-00601-06 July 2022 Revision V

© 2006-2022 Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded, or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose, without the express prior
written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and
of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and to
print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this
manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any
unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These
trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
GDU™, GDL™, and SVT™ are trademarks of Garmin International, Inc., or its subsidiaries.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.
ChartView™ is a trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.
Skywatch® and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications.
MATLAB® is a registered trademark of The MathWorks, Inc.
Sirius®, XM®, and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc.
©1984 – 2022
At Garmin, we value your opinion.
Refer to flyGarmin.com for aviation product support.
For information regarding the Aviation Limited Warranty, refer to Garmin’s website.Garmin Interna-
tional, Inc.
1200 E. 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062 USA
Telephone: (913) 397-8200
Aviation Dealer Technical Support Line: (888) 606-5482
flyGarmin.com
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House
Bull Copse Road
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9LR, UK
Telephone: +44 (0) 23 8052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 23 8502 4004
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Rd. SE
Salem, OR 97302 USA
Telephone: (503) 581-8101
190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. V Page A
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Revision Revision Date Description
S 04/29/19 Added data for GDU 620 software v7.36 functionality.
T 08/05/20 Added statement for GI 275 approved as a standby.
Added data for GDU 620 software v7.40 functionality. Added GWX 75 as
U 09/03/20
compatible weather radar interface.
V 07/07/22 Added GFC 600 to TBM700 RVSM Group Approval.
CURRENT REVISION DESCRIPTION

Section Description
Corrected trim plate descriptions and part numbers in Figure 3-5 Trim Plate
3.2.1.5
Installation, Thin and Figure 3-6 Trim Plate Installation, Thick.
P.2.1 Combined sections under Architecture 1 (KFC 275/325).
P.2.2 Added section for Architecture 2 (GFC 600)
P.2.3 Added GMC 605, [6], and [7] to Table P-1 Required Equipment.
P.2.4 Created subsections for existing Architecture 1 and new Architecture 2.
Created subsections for existing Architecture 1 and new Architecture 2.
P.2.5 Corrected Figure P-3 ADC/AM-250 Interconnect: Architecture 1 to show GSU 75B
and GDC 74B instead of GSU 75 and GDC 74, respectively.
P.3.1 Added reference to Table P-4 RVSM Required Interfaces: Architecture 2.
P.3.2.1 Updated Table P-5 Air Data Test Points.
P.4 Updated revision level for TBM700/850 RVSM G600 AFMS.

Rev. V Page B
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information that is subject to the Export Administration Regulations (EAR)
issued by the United States Department of Commerce (15 CFR, Chapter VII, Subchapter C) and may not
be exported, released, or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside of the United States without first
obtaining an export license. A violation of the EAR may be subject to a penalty of up to 10 years
imprisonment and a fine of up to $1,000,000 under Section 2410 of the Export Administration Act of 1979.
Include this notice with any reproduced portion of this document.
DEFINITIONS OF WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING
A Warning means injury or death is possible if the instructions are not
obeyed.
CAUTION
A Caution means that damage to the equipment is possible.
NOTE
A Note provides additional information.
WARNING
This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being
provided in accordance with California's Proposition 65. If you have any questions or
would like additional information, please refer to our website at www.garmin.com/prop65.
WARNING
Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
Refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov./hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
CAUTION
The G500/G600 has a display that is coated with a special anti-reflective coating. The
display is sensitive to waxes and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING
AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. Clean the display with a
clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is safe for anti-reflective coatings.
NOTE
All screen shots shown in this document are current at the time of publication. Screen
shots are intended to provide visual reference only. All information depicted in screen
shots, including software file names, versions, and part numbers, is subject to change and
may not be up to date.

Rev. V Page i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ...............................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Abbreviations ...........................................................................................................................1-4
1.3 Scope ........................................................................................................................................1-6
1.3.1 Approved Aircraft with Systems Not Covered by the STC .............................................1-6
1.3.2 Class I/II Aircraft Not Identified on the AML .................................................................1-6
1.3.3 Class III Aircraft Not Identified on the AML ..................................................................1-6
1.3.4 Other Aircraft Not Covered by the G500/G600 AML STC .............................................1-7
1.3.5 Required Documentation for All Installations .................................................................1-7
1.4 G500/G600 System Overview .................................................................................................1-8
1.4.1 G500/G600 LRU Descriptions .........................................................................................1-8
1.4.2 Required GPS Navigator ................................................................................................1-10
1.4.3 Required Standby Instruments .......................................................................................1-10
1.4.4 Interface Summary .........................................................................................................1-11
1.5 G500/G600 Installation ..........................................................................................................1-15
1.5.1 Installation Overview .....................................................................................................1-15
1.5.2 Installation Configurations .............................................................................................1-16
1.5.3 Pre-installation Checklist ...............................................................................................1-16
1.6 Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................1-17
1.6.1 EQFs ...............................................................................................................................1-17
1.6.2 Physical Characteristics ..................................................................................................1-17
1.6.3 Power Requirements .......................................................................................................1-18
1.7 Certification ............................................................................................................................1-19
1.8 G500/G600 System Documentation ......................................................................................1-20
1.9 Databases ................................................................................................................................1-22
1.9.1 Basemap Land Database ................................................................................................1-22
1.9.2 Aviation Database ..........................................................................................................1-22
1.9.3 FliteCharts® Database ....................................................................................................1-23
1.9.4 ChartView™ Database ...................................................................................................1-23
1.9.5 SafeTaxi® Database .......................................................................................................1-23
1.9.6 Terrain and Airport Terrain Databases ...........................................................................1-24
1.9.7 Obstacles Database .........................................................................................................1-24
1.9.8 IGRF Model ...................................................................................................................1-24
1.9.9 Airport Directory Database ............................................................................................1-25
1.10 Terminology ...........................................................................................................................1-26
2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW..........................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Pre-installation Information .....................................................................................................2-2
2.3 Available Equipment ................................................................................................................2-3
2.3.1 G500/G600 Databases ......................................................................................................2-5
2.4 Installation Materials ................................................................................................................2-6
2.4.1 Accessories Available from Garmin ................................................................................2-6
2.4.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied ...............................................................................2-9
2.4.3 Software Loader Card ....................................................................................................2-16
2.5 Installation Considerations .....................................................................................................2-18
2.5.1 Minimum System Configuration ....................................................................................2-18
2.5.2 Standby Instruments .......................................................................................................2-18

Rev. V Page ii
2.5.3 Placards and Labels ........................................................................................................2-20
2.5.4 Power Distribution .........................................................................................................2-23
2.5.5 Pitot-Static Plumbing .....................................................................................................2-24
2.5.6 External Annunciators ....................................................................................................2-24
2.5.7 External CDIs .................................................................................................................2-24
2.5.8 External Sensors .............................................................................................................2-25
2.5.9 Autopilot/Flight Director Interface ................................................................................2-29
2.5.10 Part 121/Part 135 Considerations ...................................................................................2-34
2.5.11 Mounting Considerations ...............................................................................................2-34
2.5.12 Cable and Wiring Considerations ...................................................................................2-60
2.5.13 Cooling Requirements ....................................................................................................2-60
2.5.14 Magnetic Compass Recalibration ...................................................................................2-60
2.5.15 RVSM Considerations (G600 System Only) .................................................................2-60
2.5.16 GPSS (Roll Steering) Considerations .............................................................................2-61
2.5.17 ADI Replacement Considerations ..................................................................................2-61
2.5.18 Aerobatic Aircraft Considerations ..................................................................................2-61
2.5.19 Altitude Encoder Function (GDU 620 Software v3.00 or Later) ...................................2-62
2.5.20 Equipment Bonding Considerations ...............................................................................2-62
2.5.21 Nonmetallic Aircraft Considerations ..............................................................................2-62
2.5.22 VFR-Only Installation Considerations ...........................................................................2-63
2.5.23 Airspeed Warning Device Considerations .....................................................................2-64
2.5.24 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Considerations ..................................................................2-64
2.5.25 HSDB Ethernet Architecture Requirements ...................................................................2-65
2.5.26 Dual G500/G600 Installation Considerations ................................................................2-72
2.5.27 GDU 620 Discrete Output Considerations .....................................................................2-72
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Special Tools Required ............................................................................................................3-2
3.1.1 Tools Needed for Magnetic Interference Survey .............................................................3-3
3.2 Equipment Installation .............................................................................................................3-4
3.2.1 GDU 620 ..........................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.2 Standby Instruments Location and Mounting ................................................................3-13
3.2.3 AHRS .............................................................................................................................3-17
3.2.4 GMU 44 Magnetometer Location and Mounting ...........................................................3-45
3.2.5 ADC Mounting ...............................................................................................................3-87
3.2.6 GTP 59 Temperature Probe Mounting ...........................................................................3-98
3.2.7 GAD 43/43e Adapter Mounting ...................................................................................3-107
3.3 Construction and Validation of Structures ...........................................................................3-112
3.3.1 G500/G600 Static Test Loads ......................................................................................3-112
3.3.2 Test Procedures ............................................................................................................3-115
3.4 Cabling and Wiring ..............................................................................................................3-117
3.4.1 Wiring Harness .............................................................................................................3-117
3.4.2 Backshell Assembly and D-Subminiature Connectors ................................................3-122
3.4.3 TVS, Fuse, and Inline Resistor Installation (Nonmetallic Aircraft Only) ....................3-137
3.4.4 TVS 2 Assembly (Nonmetallic Aircraft Only) ............................................................3-138
3.4.5 Inline Component Installation ......................................................................................3-140
3.5 Unit Replacement .................................................................................................................3-141
3.5.1 GDU 620 Unit Replacement ........................................................................................3-141
3.5.2 GSU 75(B) Unit Replacement ......................................................................................3-142
3.5.3 GRS 77 Unit Replacement ...........................................................................................3-144

Rev. V Page iii
3.5.4 GMU 44 Unit Replacement ..........................................................................................3-146
3.5.5 GDC 74( ) Unit Replacement .......................................................................................3-147
3.5.6 Mid-Continent Electric Standby ADI System Replacement (if installed) ...................3-148
3.5.7 GAD 43/43e Unit Replacement ...................................................................................3-149
3.6 Weight and Balance .............................................................................................................3-150
3.7 Electrical Load Analysis ......................................................................................................3-152
3.7.1 Aircraft with Existing Electrical Load Analysis ..........................................................3-153
3.7.2 Aircraft without Existing Electrical Load Analysis .....................................................3-153
3.7.3 Performing an Electrical Load Analysis by Measurement ...........................................3-154
3.8 Equipment Bonding ..............................................................................................................3-164
3.8.1 Metal Aircraft ...............................................................................................................3-164
3.8.2 Nonmetallic Aircraft .....................................................................................................3-165
3.8.3 Aluminum Surface Preparation ....................................................................................3-173
4 SYSTEM INTERCONNECT..............................................................................................................4-1
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CHECKOUT ...................................................................................5-1
5.1 System Configuration Overview ..............................................................................................5-3
5.2 Required Airframe-Specific Information .................................................................................5-4
5.2.1 PFD ...................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2 MFD .................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.3 GDL 69A (SXM) Audio Mute Speed ..............................................................................5-4
5.2.4 Airspeeds ..........................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.5 Airport Criteria (GDU 620 Software v3.00 or Later) .......................................................5-7
5.2.6 Altitude Alerter .................................................................................................................5-7
5.3 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks .....................................................................................5-8
5.4 Software Loading .....................................................................................................................5-9
5.4.1 GDU 620 Software Loading .............................................................................................5-9
5.4.2 LRU Software Loading Procedure ...................................................................................5-9
5.4.3 Software Load Verification Procedure ...........................................................................5-11
5.5 System Setup ..........................................................................................................................5-12
5.5.1 System Configuration .....................................................................................................5-12
5.5.2 Airframe Configuration ..................................................................................................5-23
5.5.3 Lighting Configuration ...................................................................................................5-23
5.5.4 Manifest Configuration ..................................................................................................5-26
5.5.5 Optional G500/G600 Feature Activation .......................................................................5-26
5.5.6 Audio Alert Configuration .............................................................................................5-36
5.5.7 Terrain/Garmin SVT Setup ............................................................................................5-36
5.5.8 Video Configuration .......................................................................................................5-38
5.5.9 Discrete Output Configuration .......................................................................................5-39
5.5.10 ADC Configuration ........................................................................................................5-40
5.5.11 GDL 69 Series Configuration .........................................................................................5-41
5.5.12 Autopilot Configuration .................................................................................................5-41
5.5.13 Flight Director Configuration .........................................................................................5-51
5.5.14 GAD 43/43e Configuration ............................................................................................5-57
5.5.15 Weather Radar Configuration ........................................................................................5-63
5.5.16 GTS 8XX Configuration ................................................................................................5-67
5.5.17 GSR 56 Configuration ....................................................................................................5-70
5.5.18 AHRS Configuration (GSU 75(B) Only) .......................................................................5-71
5.5.19 Miscellaneous System Interfaces ...................................................................................5-73
5.5.20 Updating the Configuration Module ..............................................................................5-74

Rev. V Page iv
5.5.21 Miscellaneous GDU Configuration ................................................................................5-75
5.6 AHRS Calibration and Check ................................................................................................5-78
5.6.1 AHRS Pitch/Roll Offset Compensation .........................................................................5-79
5.6.2 AHRS/GMU 44 Magnetometer Calibration ...................................................................5-80
5.6.3 Compass Swing ..............................................................................................................5-82
5.6.4 Heading Offset Compensation .......................................................................................5-85
5.6.5 Engine Run-Up Vibration Test .......................................................................................5-86
5.6.6 Magnetometer Interference Test .....................................................................................5-88
5.6.7 Site Evaluation of Magnetic Disturbances (Optional) ...................................................5-90
5.7 External System Adjustments ................................................................................................5-91
5.7.1 ARINC 708 Weather Radars ..........................................................................................5-91
5.7.2 Honeywell (Bendix/King) Autopilot Adjustments .........................................................5-94
5.7.3 Cessna 300B/400B/800B Autopilots ............................................................................5-106
5.7.4 Cessna 1000A Autopilots .............................................................................................5-106
5.8 Ground Checks .....................................................................................................................5-107
5.8.1 Database Check ............................................................................................................5-107
5.8.2 Pitot-Static, ADC, OAT, and Airspeed Tape Settings Checks ....................................5-107
5.8.3 GPS Receiver Interface Test ........................................................................................5-111
5.8.4 Navigation Receiver Interface Test ..............................................................................5-111
5.8.5 Autopilot Interface Test ................................................................................................5-113
5.8.6 Traffic System Interface Test .......................................................................................5-132
5.8.7 Garmin GDL 69 Series Checkout Procedure ...............................................................5-135
5.8.8 ADF Interface Checkout Procedure .............................................................................5-136
5.8.9 GDU 620 Crossfill Checkout Procedure (Dual G500/G600 Installations Only) .........5-137
5.8.10 EMI/RFI Check ............................................................................................................5-137
5.8.11 GAD 43/43e Adapter Interface Check .........................................................................5-139
5.8.12 Weather Radar Interface Check ....................................................................................5-141
5.8.13 Synthetic Vision Check (If SVT Enabled) ...................................................................5-144
5.8.14 TAWS Check (If TAWS Option Enabled) (G600 System Only) ................................5-145
5.8.15 Transient Voltage Suppressor Checks (Nonmetallic Aircraft Only) ............................5-145
5.8.16 External Video Check ..................................................................................................5-146
5.8.17 Radar Altimeter Check .................................................................................................5-147
5.8.18 GSR 56 Iridium® Check ..............................................................................................5-148
5.8.19 Miscellaneous System Checks .....................................................................................5-150
5.8.20 DME Distance Display Test .........................................................................................5-150
5.8.21 Marker Beacon Display Test (Through a GAD 43e) ...................................................5-154
5.8.22 ADS-B In Interface Test ...............................................................................................5-155
5.8.23 Final G500/G600 System Check ..................................................................................5-157
5.9 Placards and Switch Labeling ..............................................................................................5-158
5.10 Flight Checks ........................................................................................................................5-159
5.10.1 General System Flight Check .......................................................................................5-159
5.10.2 Autopilot Flight Checks and Final Adjustments ..........................................................5-159
5.11 Documentation Checks ........................................................................................................5-169
5.11.1 AFMS ...........................................................................................................................5-169
5.11.2 ICA ...............................................................................................................................5-170
5.11.3 Configuration and Checkout Log .................................................................................5-170
6 TROUBLESHOOTING.......................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 GMU 44 Magnetometer Troubleshooting ................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Common Causes for Failures of the Magnetometer Interference Test .............................6-2

Rev. V Page v
6.1.2 Examples of Magnetic Interference Problems .................................................................6-3
6.2 G500/G600 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................6-5
6.3 G500/G600 Alerts ....................................................................................................................6-8
6.4 Autopilot Troubleshooting .....................................................................................................6-17
6.5 Mid-Continent Standby ADI System (if installed) ................................................................6-22
6.6 Contacting Garmin for Assistance .........................................................................................6-23
7 LIMITATIONS ....................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Operation ..................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 STC Installations ......................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.1 Penetration of Aircraft Pressure Vessels ..........................................................................7-3
7.2.2 Equipment Interfaced to the G500/G600 System .............................................................7-4
7.2.3 Major Alterations .............................................................................................................7-5
7.2.4 ICA ...................................................................................................................................7-5
7.2.5 Installations with External TAWS ...................................................................................7-5
7.2.6 Installations with Existing Overspeed Warning System ..................................................7-5
7.2.7 Airspeed Indication ..........................................................................................................7-5
8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Cleaning ...................................................................................................................................8-2
8.2 ADC .........................................................................................................................................8-2
8.3 Lightning Protection (Nonmetallic Aircraft Only) ...................................................................8-3
8.3.1 Transient Voltage Suppressor (TVS) ...............................................................................8-3
8.3.2 Aluminum Foil Tape (if Installed) ...................................................................................8-8
8.3.3 Bonding Straps (if Installed) ............................................................................................8-8
8.4 Lightning Protection (Metal Aircraft Only) .............................................................................8-9
8.4.1 Lightning Strike Inspection (GMU 44 Installed in a Nonmetallic Wingtip) ...................8-9
8.4.2 Lightning Strike Inspection (ARINC 708 Weather Radar Overbraid) ...........................8-10
APPENDIX A NOT USED .....................................................................................................................A-1
APPENDIX B CONNECTOR INFORMATION ................................................................................. B-1
B.1 GDU 620 PFD/MFD ............................................................................................................... B-2
B.1.1 J6201/P6201 Connector .................................................................................................. B-3
B.1.2 J6202/P6202 Connector .................................................................................................. B-4
B.1.3 J6203/P6203 Connector .................................................................................................. B-5
B.2 GSU 75(B) ADAHRS ............................................................................................................. B-6
B.2.1 J751/P751 Connector ...................................................................................................... B-6
B.3 GRS 77 AHRS ...................................................................................................................... B-11
B.3.1 J771/P771 Connector .................................................................................................... B-11
B.4 GMU 44 Magnetometer ........................................................................................................ B-15
B.4.1 J441/P441 Connector .................................................................................................... B-15
B.5 GDC 74( ) .............................................................................................................................. B-16
B.5.1 J741/P741 Connector .................................................................................................... B-16
B.6 GAD 43/43e Adapter ............................................................................................................ B-20
B.6.1 J431/P431 Connector (GAD 43/43e) ............................................................................ B-20
B.6.2 J432/P432 Connector (GAD 43e Only) ........................................................................ B-27
B.6.3 J433/P433 Connector (GAD 43e Only) ........................................................................ B-28
APPENDIX C OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS.......................................................C-1
APPENDIX D SAMPLE INSTALLATIONS ....................................................................................... D-1

Rev. V Page vi
D.1 Sample Instrument Panel Layouts ...........................................................................................D-2
D.2 GMU 44 Installation Examples .............................................................................................D-10
D.3 GDC 74( ) Installation Examples ..........................................................................................D-14
D.4 GAD 43/43e Installation Examples ....................................................................................... D-17
APPENDIX E EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION ................................. E-1
E.1 Electronic and Electromechanical Standby Indicators ............................................................ E-2
E.2 GPS Source ............................................................................................................................. E-4
E.3 Autopilot .................................................................................................................................. E-5
E.4 External Flight Directors ......................................................................................................... E-9
E.5 Navigation Receivers (ARINC 429) ..................................................................................... E-11
E.6 Traffic Source ........................................................................................................................ E-12
E.7 Data Link ............................................................................................................................... E-14
E.8 2 ¼-inch Standby Airspeed Indicators and Altimeters ......................................................... E-15
E.9 ADF Receiver (Interfaced to GDU 620) ............................................................................... E-16
E.10 Weather Radar Source ........................................................................................................... E-17
E.11 Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source ................................................................................. E-18
E.12 External TAWS Source ......................................................................................................... E-18
E.13 GDU 620 Serial Altitude (RS-232) ....................................................................................... E-18
E.14 GAD 43/43e – Autopilot Compatibility - Attitude Source ................................................... E-19
E.15 Radar Altimeters ................................................................................................................... E-21
E.16 External Video Sources ......................................................................................................... E-22
E.17 Audio Panels ......................................................................................................................... E-23
E.18 Miscellaneous Systems ......................................................................................................... E-24
E.19 GAD 43e – Analog Navigation Receiver Compatibility ...................................................... E-24
E.20 GAD 43e – Autopilot Compatibility – Altitude Preselect/Vertical Speed Select ................. E-25
E.21 GAD 43e – Analog Radar Altimeter Compatibility .............................................................. E-26
E.22 GAD 43e – Synchro ADF Receiver Compatibility ............................................................... E-26
E.23 GAD 43e – DME Compatibility ........................................................................................... E-27
E.24 GAD 43e – Marker Beacon Receiver Compatibility ............................................................ E-28
E.25 Stall Protection and Warning Unit (Fast/Slow Indication) Compatibility (G600 Only) ....... E-28
APPENDIX F INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS .................................................................................. F-1
APPENDIX G MAGNETIC INTERFERENCE SURVEY.................................................................G-1
G.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................G-2
G.1.1 Required Materials ..........................................................................................................G-2
G.2 GLS Software Installation Procedure ......................................................................................G-4
G.2.1 New MATLAB Installations ..............................................................................................G-6
G.2.2 Existing MATLAB Installations ........................................................................................G-6
G.2.3 Completing the GLS Tool Software Installation .............................................................G-7
G.3 Conducting the GMU 44 Location Survey .............................................................................G-8
G.3.1 Aircraft and GMU 44 Setup ............................................................................................G-8
G.3.2 GLS Tool Setup Procedure ............................................................................................G-10
G.3.3 GLS Tool Operation ......................................................................................................G-12
G.3.4 GLS Data Analysis Procedure ....................................................................................... G-15
APPENDIX H MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTALLATIONS..........................H-1
H.1 Panel Patches for GDU 620 and Accommodation of Oversize Indicators .............................H-2
H.2 Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments ........................................................................H-5
APPENDIX J LIGHTNING ZONING...................................................................................................J-1

Rev. V Page vii
J.1 Purpose ..................................................................................................................................... J-2
J.2 Severity of Lightning Zones ..................................................................................................... J-2
J.3 Aircraft Zoning Diagram .......................................................................................................... J-3
J.3.1 Wings ................................................................................................................................ J-3
J.3.2 Fuselage ............................................................................................................................ J-7
J.3.3 Empennage ..................................................................................................................... J-17
J.4 Example Lightning Zoning Diagrams .................................................................................... J-18
APPENDIX K MODEL-SPECIFIC INFORMATION........................................................................K-1
APPENDIX L GMU 44 MOUNTING IN NONMETALLIC WINGTIP ........................................... L-1
L.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................. L-2
L.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied ...................................................................................... L-2
L.3 Overbraid Fabrication and Installation .................................................................................... L-3
L.3.1 Overbraid Termination Methods ..................................................................................... L-3
L.3.2 Overbraid Terminal Bonding .......................................................................................... L-4
APPENDIX M ADVANCED AIRSPEED SETTINGS....................................................................... M-1
M.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................ M-2
M.2 Configuration Page Layout .................................................................................................... M-2
M.3 Arc Ranges ............................................................................................................................. M-3
M.3.1 Configuration .................................................................................................................. M-3
M.3.2 Example .......................................................................................................................... M-5
M.4 Markings and Bugs ................................................................................................................. M-6
M.5 Overspeeds ............................................................................................................................. M-8
M.5.1 Configuration .................................................................................................................. M-8
M.5.2 Overspeeds Configuration Examples ............................................................................. M-9
M.6 GDU 620 Airspeed Tape Configuration Examples .............................................................. M-10
M.6.1 Beechcraft Bonanza A36 (example) ............................................................................. M-11
M.6.2 Columbia 400 (example) .............................................................................................. M-12
APPENDIX N HIRF AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION..................................................................N-1
N.1 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Interface (Metallic Aircraft Only) .............................................N-2
N.1.1 Materials Required but Not Supplied .............................................................................. N-2
N.1.2 Overbraid Installation Procedure .....................................................................................N-2
N.1.3 Overbraid Terminal Bonding ..........................................................................................N-3
N.2 Stick Pusher and Warntone Generator Interface (PC-12) (G600 System Only) .....................N-6
N.2.1 Materials Required but Not Supplied .............................................................................. N-6
N.2.2 Overbraid Installation Procedure .....................................................................................N-7
N.3 GSU 75(B) Grounding Strap (Composite Aircraft Only) .....................................................N-13
N.3.1 Materials Required but Not Supplied ............................................................................ N-13
N.3.2 Grounding Strap Installation Procedure ........................................................................N-13
APPENDIX P RVSM GROUP AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR TBM 700 SERIES
AIRCRAFT (G600 ONLY)........................................................................................... P-1
P.1 Group Approval ........................................................................................................................P-2
P.2 System Description ..................................................................................................................P-3
P.2.1 Architecture 1: G600 & KFC 275/325 .............................................................................P-3
P.2.2 Architecture 2: G600 & GFC 600 ....................................................................................P-4
P.2.3 RVSM Required Avionics Check ....................................................................................P-5
P.2.4 Required Interfaces and Functions for RVSM .................................................................P-6
P.2.5 AM-250 Implementation ..................................................................................................P-7

Rev. V Page viii
P.2.6 Pitot-Static Connections ...................................................................................................P-9
P.2.7 Transponder ....................................................................................................................P-10
P.3 Checkout .................................................................................................................................P-11
P.3.1 Electrical System ............................................................................................................P-11
P.3.2 Pitot-Static Systems ........................................................................................................P-12
P.3.3 RVSM In-Flight Altitude Hold Check ...........................................................................P-14
P.4 Updating Aircraft Documentation ..........................................................................................P-15

Rev. V Page ix
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1 G500/G600 System Overview - Single Installation ..........................................................1-11
Figure 1-2 G500/G600 System Overview - Dual Installation.............................................................1-13
Figure 1-3 Typical Instrument Panel Modification .............................................................................1-15
Figure 2-1 GDU 620 ADI Location ....................................................................................................2-34
Figure 2-2 Original ADI Area .............................................................................................................2-35
Figure 2-3 GDU 620 ADI Location Requirement...............................................................................2-35
Figure 2-4 Acceptable Installation Area for 3 1/8-inch Standby Instruments.....................................2-37
Figure 2-5 Side View Stepped Panel for 3 1/8-inch Standby Instruments..........................................2-38
Figure 2-6 Acceptable Installation Area for 2 1/4-Inch Standby Instruments ....................................2-38
Figure 2-7 Acceptable Installation Area for Mixed Standby Instruments ..........................................2-39
Figure 2-8 AHRS Location Considerations for Twin-Engine Aircraft ...............................................2-44
Figure 2-9 Acceptable Locations for GMU 44 Magnetometer (Top View) .......................................2-47
Figure 2-10 Acceptable Locations for GMU 44 Magnetometer (Side View).......................................2-48
Figure 2-11 Level Mounting of GMU 44 Magnetometer .....................................................................2-48
Figure 2-12 Heading Offset Limit GMU 44 Magnetometer .................................................................2-49
Figure 2-13 GDC 74( ) Air Hose Fitting Locations ..............................................................................2-51
Figure 2-14 GSU 75(B) Air Hose Fitting Locations .............................................................................2-52
Figure 2-15 Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe - Low-Wing Aircraft ...................2-54
Figure 2-16 Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe - Twin-Engine Aircraft ...............2-55
Figure 2-17 Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe - High-Wing Aircraft ..................2-56
Figure 2-18 Location of Co-pilot ADI with Flight Director Presentation.............................................2-58
Figure 2-19 GAD 43/43e Short and Tall Installation Orientations (GAD 43 shown) ..........................2-59
Figure 2-20 VFR Only GDU 620 Installation.......................................................................................2-64
Figure 2-21 Single G500/G600 Installation without GTN 6XX/7XX ..................................................2-66
Figure 2-22 Dual G500/G600 Installation without GTN 6XX/7XX.....................................................2-67
Figure 2-23 Single G500/G600 Installation with Single GTN 6XX/7XX ............................................2-68
Figure 2-24 Single G500/G600 Installation with Dual GTN 6XX/7XX ..............................................2-69
Figure 2-25 Dual G500/G600 Installation with Single GTN 6XX/7XX as GPS #1.............................2-70
Figure 2-26 Dual G500/G600 Installation with Single GTN 6XX/7XX as GPS #2.............................2-71
Figure 2-27 Dual G500/G600 Installation with Dual GTN 6XX/7XX .................................................2-72
Figure 3-1 Example of an Ideal Instrument Configuration ...................................................................3-5
Figure 3-2 Example of a Non-Ideal Instrument Configuration .............................................................3-5
Figure 3-3 GDU 620 Installed, Non-Ideal Instrument Configuration ...................................................3-6
Figure 3-4 GDU 620 Recommended Connector Clearance ..................................................................3-7
Figure 3-5 Trim Plate Installation, Thin................................................................................................3-9
Figure 3-6 Trim Plate Installation, Thick ............................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-7 Structural Trim Plate Installation, Correct Installation......................................................3-11
Figure 3-8 Acceptable Modifications to Edge Detail..........................................................................3-12
Figure 3-9 Example of Installed GDU 620 - Standby Instruments .....................................................3-14
Figure 3-10 Example of Installed GDU 620 - Standby Instruments on Stepped Part of Panel ............3-15
Figure 3-11 Example of GDU 620 Installed with 2 ¼-Inch Standby Instruments................................3-16
Figure 3-12 GRS 77 Universal Mount (Inward Facing Angle Brackets)..............................................3-21
Figure 3-13 GRS 77 Universal Mount (Outward Facing Angle Brackets) ...........................................3-21
Figure 3-14 GRS 77 Universal Mount Assembly .................................................................................3-22
Figure 3-15 Hole-Pattern Configuration to Set Incline in Assembly for Aircraft Level.......................3-22
Figure 3-16 Top Bracket to Angle Bracket Assembly ..........................................................................3-23
Figure 3-17 Unit Remote Install Rack Installation................................................................................3-24
Figure 3-18 GRS 77 Universal Mount Installation ...............................................................................3-26

Rev. V Page x
Figure 3-19 Fastener Location In GRS 77 Universal Mount Brackets .................................................3-28
Figure 3-20 Typical Example of Bolt Installation in Sandwich Panel..................................................3-29
Figure 3-21 Mounting Bolt Installation and Alignment (Composite Aircraft) .....................................3-29
Figure 3-22 First Cloth Installation for Mounting Bolts (Composite Aircraft).....................................3-30
Figure 3-23 Second Cloth Installation for Mounting Bolts (Composite Aircraft) ................................3-31
Figure 3-24 Installation of GRS 77 Univ. Mount in Tube/Fabric Aircraft Using MS21919 Clamps...3-33
Figure 3-25 Using the GRS 77 Universal Mount in Locations of Previously Installed Equipment .....3-35
Figure 3-26 Example AHRS Installation Using Existing Shelf Structure ............................................3-36
Figure 3-27 Installation of the AHRS Remote Install Rack (GRS 77 Shown, GSU 75(B) Similar) ....3-37
Figure 3-28 Installation of AHRS on Aircraft Stringers (Adapter Riveted to Aircraft Skin) ...............3-39
Figure 3-29 Installation of AHRS on Existing Floor Panel or Installed Support Panel........................3-41
Figure 3-30 Installation of AHRS with Installed Support Plate............................................................3-42
Figure 3-31 Measuring GRS 77 to Remote Install Rack Gap ...............................................................3-43
Figure 3-32 GRS 77 Installation Example ............................................................................................3-44
Figure 3-33 GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Plate Mounted ...............................................................3-46
Figure 3-34 GMU 44 Universal Mount, Bottom Plate Mounted ..........................................................3-46
Figure 3-35 GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Plate Mounted – Suspended..........................................3-47
Figure 3-36 GMU 44 Universal Mount, Bottom Plate Mounted – Suspended .....................................3-47
Figure 3-37 GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Axis 1 ........................................................3-48
Figure 3-38 GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Axis 2 ........................................................3-48
Figure 3-39 GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Using Support Equipment, Examples .......3-49
Figure 3-40 Top Plate Alignment to Aircraft Heading .........................................................................3-50
Figure 3-41 Installation Rack Rivet Through Holes .............................................................................3-51
Figure 3-42 Installation Rack to Top Bracket Installation ....................................................................3-51
Figure 3-43 GMU 44 Universal Mount Top and Bottom Bracket Assembly .......................................3-52
Figure 3-44 GMU 44 Universal Mount Top and Bottom Hole Patterns ...............................................3-53
Figure 3-45 GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Lateral Method 1 ........................................3-54
Figure 3-46 GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Lateral Method 2 ........................................3-54
Figure 3-47 GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Rotational Method 1...................................3-55
Figure 3-48 GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Rotational Method 2...................................3-55
Figure 3-49 GMU 44 Universal Mount Incline Offset Procedure ........................................................3-56
Figure 3-50 GMU 44 Universal Mount Incline Offset Procedure ........................................................3-56
Figure 3-51 Example of a 4° Lateral Incline GMU 44 Universal Mount .............................................3-57
Figure 3-52 Example of a 6° Rotated Incline GMU 44 Universal Mount ............................................3-57
Figure 3-53 Installation of the GMU 44 into GMU 44 Universal Mount .............................................3-58
Figure 3-54 GMU 44 Installation Clearances .......................................................................................3-60
Figure 3-55 Possible Hole-Patterns on the GMU 44 Universal Mount.................................................3-62
Figure 3-56 GMU 44 Magnetometer Mounting without Universal Mount ..........................................3-66
Figure 3-57 GMU 44 Magnetometer Mounting On Wing Rib without Universal Mount ....................3-68
Figure 3-58 GMU 44 Magnetometer Mounting Bracket for Composite Installations..........................3-71
Figure 3-59 Conductive Surface Preparation for Attachment of GMU 44 Mounting Bracket .............3-72
Figure 3-60 Attach Flange Preparation of GMU 44 Magnetometer Bracket ........................................3-73
Figure 3-61 GMU 44 Mounting Bracket Attachment to Prepared Aircraft Surface.............................3-74
Figure 3-62 Final Layers of Cloth on GMU 44 Mounting Bracket ......................................................3-75
Figure 3-63 Final View of GMU 44 Installation on Conductive Surface in Composite Aircraft .........3-75
Figure 3-64 Rivet Line Method to Determine Mounting Panel Alignment ..........................................3-77
Figure 3-65 Dividers Used to Transfer Panel Alignment......................................................................3-78
Figure 3-66 Transferring Mounting Plate Alignment to Underside of Wing........................................3-78
Figure 3-67 Transferring Mounting Plate Alignment to Underside of Wing........................................3-79
Figure 3-68 Transferring Mounting Panel Line from Underside of Wing to Floor Using Plumb Bob 3-80

Rev. V Page xi
Figure 3-69 Centerline Plumb Bob Method for the Forward Fuselage.................................................3-80
Figure 3-70 Center Mark for the Forward Fuselage (Plumb Bob Method) ..........................................3-81
Figure 3-71 Centerline Plumb Bob Method for the Aft Fuselage .........................................................3-81
Figure 3-72 Center Line (Plumb Bob Method) .....................................................................................3-82
Figure 3-73 Transferring Center Line Step 1 (Laser Square Method) ..................................................3-83
Figure 3-74 Transferring Center Line Step 2 (Laser Square Method) ..................................................3-83
Figure 3-75 Measuring the Heading Angle Offset ................................................................................3-84
Figure 3-76 3-4-5 Triangle Method Step 1............................................................................................3-84
Figure 3-80 Recommended Clearance GDC 74( ) Shown, GSU 75(B) Similar ...................................3-88
Figure 3-81 GDC 74( ) Mounting Options............................................................................................3-89
Figure 3-82 Installation of GDC 74( ) Mounting Rack to Mounting Plate ...........................................3-90
Figure 3-83 Hole-Pattern in Mounting Rack for Composite Aircraft ...................................................3-92
Figure 3-84 Bonding Mounting Rack (Composite Aircraft).................................................................3-93
Figure 3-85 Cloth lay-up for Mounting Rack (Composite Aircraft) .....................................................3-93
Figure 3-86 GDC 74( ) Final Installation Example (Composite Aircraft) ............................................3-94
Figure 3-87 Single Pitot-Static System Connections for Single G500/G600 Installation.....................3-95
Figure 3-88 Dual Pitot-Static System Connections for Single G500/G600 Installation .......................3-96
Figure 3-89 Single Pitot-Static System Connections for Dual G500/G600 Installation .......................3-96
Figure 3-90 Dual Pitot-Static System Connections for Dual G500/G600 Installation .........................3-97
Figure 3-91 GTP OAT Probe Kit Assembly .........................................................................................3-98
Figure 3-92 GTP 59 Doubler A...........................................................................................................3-100
Figure 3-93 GTP 59 Doubler B ...........................................................................................................3-101
Figure 3-94 GTP 59 Temperature Probe and Doubler Installation .....................................................3-102
Figure 3-95 GTP 59 Installation in a Non-Conductive Access Panel .................................................3-105
Figure 3-96 GTP 59 Installation in Conductive Inspection Cover......................................................3-106
Figure 3-97 GAD 43/43e Recommended Clearance...........................................................................3-108
Figure 3-98 GAD 43/43e Installation Options (GAD 43 shown) .......................................................3-109
Figure 3-99 Installation of the GAD 43/43e to a Mounting Surface...................................................3-110
Figure 3-100 Upward Static Load Test .................................................................................................3-116
Figure 3-101 Forward Static Load Test.................................................................................................3-116
Figure 3-102 Shield Termination Methods ...........................................................................................3-121
Figure 3-103 Slidelock Backshell and Shield Block Assembly............................................................3-125
Figure 3-104 Shield Termination on Slidelock Backshell Assembly ...................................................3-127
Figure 3-105 Jackscrew Backshell and Shield Block Assembly...........................................................3-130
Figure 3-106 Shield Block Termination on Jackscrew Backshell Assembly........................................3-131
Figure 3-107 Backshell Assembly (Potted Configuration Module)......................................................3-133
Figure 3-108 Configuration Module Insulation/Contact Clearance......................................................3-134
Figure 3-109 Jackscrew Backshell Assembly .......................................................................................3-135
Figure 3-110 Backshell Assembly (Configuration Module with Spacer) .............................................3-136
Figure 3-111 TVS/Fuse Installation (TVS1/F1)....................................................................................3-137
Figure 3-112 Resistor Installation .........................................................................................................3-138
Figure 3-113 Detail of TVS Pin Assembly ...........................................................................................3-139
Figure 3-114 TVS 2 Assembly..............................................................................................................3-139
Figure 3-115 Inline Component Installation .........................................................................................3-140
Figure 3-116 Sample Weight and Balance Calculation ........................................................................3-151
Figure 3-117 Sample Net Electrical Load Change Calculation ............................................................3-153
Figure 3-118 Ammeter Placement for Current Measurements .............................................................3-155

Rev. V Page xii
Figure 3-119 Blank Electrical Load Tabulation Form ..........................................................................3-158
Figure 3-120 Example of Completed Electrical Load Tabulation Form...............................................3-160
Figure 3-121 Blank Emergency Power Operation Calculation Form ...................................................3-162
Figure 3-122 Example of Completed Emergency Power Operation Calculation .................................3-163
Figure 3-123 Fiberglass Insulation for Carbon Fiber Material .............................................................3-166
Figure 3-124 Aluminum Tape Joint ......................................................................................................3-166
Figure 3-125 Aluminum Tape Ground Termination .............................................................................3-167
Figure 3-126 GSU 75 Aluminum Tape Installation ..............................................................................3-168
Figure 3-127 GRS 77 Aluminum Tape Installation ..............................................................................3-169
Figure 3-128 GDC 74( ) Aluminum Tape Installation ..........................................................................3-170
Figure 3-129 GAD 43/43e Aluminum Tape Installation (Horizontal Mount, GAD 43 shown) ...........3-171
Figure 3-130 GAD 43/43e Aluminum Tape Installation (Vertical Mount, GAD 43e shown) .............3-172
Figure 5-1 AIRSPEED CONFIGURATION Page with IAS Tape Set to Basic and Advanced...........5-5
Figure 5-2 SOFTWARE UPLOAD Page............................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-3 SOFTWARE CONFIRMATION Page .............................................................................5-11
Figure 5-4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Page.................................................................................5-13
Figure 5-5 ARINC PORT CONFIG Page ...........................................................................................5-19
Figure 5-6 RS PORT CONFIG Page...................................................................................................5-22
Figure 5-7 LIGHTING CONFIGURATION Page - Photocell ...........................................................5-24
Figure 5-8 LIGHTING CONFIGURATION Page - Dimmer Bus......................................................5-25
Figure 5-9 FEATURE CONFIGURATION Page (G500) ..................................................................5-27
Figure 5-10 FEATURE CONFIGURATION Page (G600) ..................................................................5-27
Figure 5-11 AUDIO ALERT CONFIGURATION Page......................................................................5-36
Figure 5-12 TERRAIN PROXIMITY SETUP Page.............................................................................5-37
Figure 5-13 TERRAIN-SVT SETUP Page ...........................................................................................5-37
Figure 5-14 VIDEO CONFIGURATION Page ....................................................................................5-38
Figure 5-15 DISCRETE CONFIGURATION Page..............................................................................5-40
Figure 5-16 AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION Page - Altitude Preselect ..........................................5-44
Figure 5-17 AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION Page - Manual Entry.................................................5-45
Figure 5-18 Autopilot Mode Annunciation Setting...............................................................................5-48
Figure 5-20 Analog Roll Steering .........................................................................................................5-50
Figure 5-21 FLIGHT DIRECTOR Page ...............................................................................................5-52
Figure 5-22 GAD 43 Page.....................................................................................................................5-57
Figure 5-23 GAD 43e Page ...................................................................................................................5-59
Figure 5-24 GAD 43e CALIBRATION Page .......................................................................................5-62
Figure 5-25 GWX 68 WEATHER RADAR Page ................................................................................5-64
Figure 5-26 GWX 70(R)/75 WEATHER RADAR Page ......................................................................5-64
Figure 5-27 ARINC PORT CONFIGURATION Page .........................................................................5-65
Figure 5-28 DISCRETE CONFIGURATION Page..............................................................................5-66
Figure 5-29 ARINC 708 WEATHER RADAR CONFIGURATION Page..........................................5-66
Figure 5-30 GTS STATUS AND CONFIGURATION Page ...............................................................5-69
Figure 5-31 GTS PORT CONFIGURATION Page..............................................................................5-69
Figure 5-32 IRIDIUM CONFIGURATION Page.................................................................................5-70
Figure 5-33 POSITION REPORTING Page.........................................................................................5-70
Figure 5-34 AHRS Configuration Page ................................................................................................5-72
Figure 5-36 SOFTWARE UPLOAD Page............................................................................................5-74
Figure 5-37 MISCELLANEOUS GDU CONFIGURATION Page......................................................5-75
Figure 5-38 AHRS/GMU CALIBRATION Page - Pitch/Roll Offset...................................................5-79

Rev. V Page xiii
Figure 5-39 AHRS/GMU CALIBRATION Page - Magnetometer.......................................................5-81
Figure 5-40 AHRS/GMU CALIBRATION Page - Heading Offset .....................................................5-86
Figure 5-41 AHRS/GMU Calibration - Engine Run-Up Test...............................................................5-87
Figure 5-42 AHRS/GMU CALIBRATION Page - Mag Interference Test ..........................................5-89
Figure 5-43 A708 WEATHER RADAR Page ......................................................................................5-91
Figure 5-44 KFC 150 Test Harness.......................................................................................................5-95
Figure 5-45 GAD 43 Page - KAP 100/KAP 150/KFC 150...................................................................5-97
Figure 5-46 KFC 200 Maintenance Test Port .......................................................................................5-99
Figure 5-47 GAD 43 Page - KFC 225.................................................................................................5-101
Figure 5-48 GAD 43 Page - KFC 250.................................................................................................5-104
Figure 5-49 GAD 43 Page - KFC 325/275..........................................................................................5-105
Figure 5-50 GAD 43 - Roll Adjustment..............................................................................................5-105
Figure 5-51 Flight Director Command Bars .......................................................................................5-115
Figure 5-52 FLIGHT DIRECTOR Page .............................................................................................5-116
Figure 5-53 AUTOPILOT TEST Page - HDG/CRS ...........................................................................5-121
Figure 5-54 AUTOPILOT TEST Page - Heading...............................................................................5-122
Figure 5-55 AUTOPILOT TEST Page - Desired Course ...................................................................5-122
Figure 5-56 Autopilot Test - Deviations .............................................................................................5-124
Figure 5-57 AUTOPILOT TEST Page - GPS Roll Steering Test.......................................................5-125
Figure 5-58 GAD 43 - Adapter Attitude Check ..................................................................................5-128
Figure 5-59 TAS TRAFFIC INTERFACE Page.................................................................................5-133
Figure 5-60 TIS OPERATING Page...................................................................................................5-134
Figure 5-61 GDL 69 SERIES DATA AND AUDIO Page .................................................................5-135
Figure 5-62 ACTIVE CHANNEL Page..............................................................................................5-136
Figure 5-63 Example EMC Source/Victim Matrix .............................................................................5-138
Figure 5-64 GAD 43 Page - Synchro Heading Check ........................................................................5-140
Figure 5-65 WEATHER RADAR Page ..............................................................................................5-141
Figure 5-66 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Interface Check ..................................................................5-143
Figure 5-67 External Video Display....................................................................................................5-146
Figure 5-68 Radar Altitude Display ....................................................................................................5-147
Figure 5-69 Position Reporting ...........................................................................................................5-149
Figure 5-70 Iridium Phone ..................................................................................................................5-149
Figure 5-71 DME Distance Display - Single DME Tuning Source....................................................5-151
Figure 5-72 DME Distance Display - Dual DME Tuning Sources.....................................................5-152
Figure 5-73 Marker Beacon Display ...................................................................................................5-154
Figure 5-74 G600 SYSTEM STATUS Page.......................................................................................5-156
Figure 5-75 ADS-B TRAFFIC MAP Page .........................................................................................5-156
Figure 5-76 FIS-B WEATHER MAP Page.........................................................................................5-157
Figure 5-77 FLIGHT DIRECTOR CALIBRATION Page .................................................................5-160
Figure 5-78 Autopilot Configuration Page..........................................................................................5-162
Figure 5-79 Active GPSS Switch Annunciation .................................................................................5-164
Figure 5-80 Autopilot Performance Checkout Log.............................................................................5-166
Figure 5-81 G500/G600 System Configuration and Checkout Log....................................................5-171
Figure 6-1 Magnetic Interference Example #1......................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-2 Magnetic Interference Example #2......................................................................................6-4
Figure 8-1 TVS Assembly Checks ........................................................................................................8-7
Figure B-1 Connector Legend (37-contact D-sub connector shown) ................................................... B-1
Figure B-2 GDU 620 Rear Connectors................................................................................................. B-2
Figure C-1 GDU 620 Connector Locations .......................................................................................... C-2
Figure C-2 GDU 620 Dimensions and Center of Gravity..................................................................... C-3

Rev. V Page xiv
Figure C-3 GMU 44 Dimensions and Center of Gravity ...................................................................... C-4
Figure C-4 GMU 44 (-20) Dimensions and Center of Gravity ............................................................. C-5
Figure C-5 GMU 44 Install Rack (P/N 115-00481-00) ........................................................................ C-6
Figure C-7 Alternate Aircraft Mounting Holes for High Vibrations Using (P/N 115-00481-10) ........ C-8
Figure C-8 GSU 75(B) Dimensions and Center of Gravity .................................................................. C-9
Figure C-9 GSU 75(B) Connector and Remote Install Rack.............................................................. C-10
Figure C-10 GRS 77 and Remote Install Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity ............................. C-11
Figure C-11 GDC 74( ) and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option 1)............... C-12
Figure C-13 GDC 74( ) Mounting Orientation Limits.......................................................................... C-14
Figure C-14 GDC 74( ) Vertical Surface Mounting Orientation .......................................................... C-15
Figure C-15 GDU 620 Cutout Dimensions........................................................................................... C-16
Figure C-16 Trim Plate (P/N 115-01009-( )) ........................................................................................ C-17
Figure C-17 GRS 77 Universal Mount Dimensions ............................................................................. C-18
Figure C-18 GMU 44 Universal Mount Dimensions............................................................................ C-20
Figure C-19 Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00 Dimensions ............................................................ C-22
Figure C-20 GTP 59 OAT Probe Dimensions ...................................................................................... C-23
Figure C-21 GAD 43 Dimensions and Center of Gravity..................................................................... C-24
Figure C-22 GAD 43e Dimensions and Center of Gravity................................................................... C-25
Figure D-1 Installation of GDU 620 with Ideal Instrument Configuration .......................................... D-2
Figure D-2 Installation of GDU 620 with Non-Ideal Instrument Configuration ..................................D-3
Figure D-3 Installation of GDU 620 with Standby Instruments ...........................................................D-4
Figure D-4 Installation of GDU 620 Using 2 1/4-Inch Backup Instruments ........................................D-5
Figure D-5 Installation of GDU 620 with Standby Instruments Below................................................D-6
Figure D-6 Installation of GDU 620 Using Both 2 1/4-Inch and 3 1/8-Inch Backup Instruments .......D-7
Figure D-7 Installation of GDU 620 in Tandem Aircraft – Front Instrument Panel.............................D-8
Figure D-8 Installation of GDU 620 in Bonanza Model 35..................................................................D-9
Figure D-9 Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Mounted ........................ D-10
Figure D-10 Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Mounted ........................ D-11
Figure D-11 Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Suspended - Side Mounted.... D-11
Figure D-12 Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Bottom Mounted....................D-12
Figure D-13 Bottom Suspended Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount..................D-13
Figure D-14 Installation of GDC 74( ) to Mounting Plate ....................................................................D-14
Figure D-15 Installation of GDC 74( ) – Horizontal Orientation.......................................................... D-14
Figure D-16 Installation of GDC 74( ) – Vertical Orientation..............................................................D-15
Figure D-17 Installation of GDC 74( ) – Vertical Orientation using Stringers.....................................D-15
Figure D-20 Fabrication of Mounting Plate Assembly for GAD 43/43e..............................................D-17
Figure D-21 Installation of GAD 43/43e - Short Orientation ...............................................................D-18
Figure D-22 Installation of GAD 43/43e – Tall Orientation.................................................................D-19
Figure F-1 Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Single GDU) ...........................F-2
Figure F-2 Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s) .....................F-4
Figure F-3 Power/Config Module/OAT – GSU 75(B)/GMU 44 Interconnect .....................................F-9
Figure F-4 Power/Config Module/OAT – GDC 74( )/GRS 77/GMU 44 Interconnect.......................F-12
Figure F-5 Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Single GDU) ............................................................F-17
Figure F-6 Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)......................................................F-19
Figure F-7 GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Single GDU 620)........................................F-23
Figure F-8 GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Dual GDU 620s) ........................................F-25

Rev. V Page xv
Figure F-9 Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Single GDU 620).......................................................F-27
Figure F-10 Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)........................................................F-29
Figure F-11 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Honeywell (Bendix/King) ................................F-31
Figure F-12 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – S-TEC...............................................................F-40
Figure F-13 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Century .............................................................F-46
Figure F-14 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Collins ..............................................................F-52
Figure F-15 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Cessna...............................................................F-57
Figure F-16 Audio Interconnect ............................................................................................................F-62
Figure F-17 GDL 69 Series Interconnect ..............................................................................................F-64
Figure F-18 Traffic Advisory System Interconnect...............................................................................F-65
Figure F-19 ADF Interconnect ..............................................................................................................F-70
Figure F-20 External Switches (GPSS) .................................................................................................F-72
Figure F-21 Mid-Continent Electric Standby Attitude Indicator Interconnect .....................................F-73
Figure F-23 Stormscope Interconnect ...................................................................................................F-78
Figure F-24 Weather Radar Interconnect ..............................................................................................F-80
Figure F-25 Serial Altitude Output Interconnect...................................................................................F-84
Figure F-26 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Sperry ...............................................................F-85
Figure F-27 GAD 43/43e - Power and G500/G600 Interconnect..........................................................F-89
Figure F-28 GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix/King) Autopilot Interconnect.......................................F-92
Figure F-29 GAD 43/43e – Collins Autopilot Interconnect ................................................................F-106
Figure F-30 GAD 43/43e – Synchro Heading Interconnect ................................................................F-109
Figure F-31 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Bendix ............................................................F-111
Figure F-32 GSR 56 Iridium Interconnect...........................................................................................F-115
Figure F-33 Radar Altimeter (ARINC 429) Interconnect ...................................................................F-116
Figure F-34 External Video Interconnect ............................................................................................F-118
Figure F-35 GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7XX (Single GDU 620) .....................................F-119
Figure F-36 GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7XX (Dual GDU 620s) ......................................F-121
Figure F-37 HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Single GDU 620).............................................................F-123
Figure F-38 HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s) .............................................................F-131
Figure F-39 GAD 43/43e – Century Autopilot Interconnect...............................................................F-143
Figure F-40 Miscellaneous Equipment Interfaces ...............................................................................F-146
Figure F-41 GAD 43e S-TEC Autopilot Interconnect ........................................................................F-148
Figure F-42 GAD 43e Navigation Receiver (Analog) Interconnect ...................................................F-149
Figure F-43 GAD 43e Radar Altimeter (Analog) Interconnect...........................................................F-151
Figure F-44 GAD 43e DME Interconnect ...........................................................................................F-153
Figure F-45 GAD 43e Marker Beacon Receiver Interconnect ............................................................F-158
Figure F-46 GAD 43/43e Cessna Autopilot Interconnect ...................................................................F-159
Figure F-47 GDU 620 - GFC 600 (GMC 605) Interconnect...............................................................F-165
Figure F-48 Single GDU 620 - G5 (ADI)/GFC 500 Autopilot System ..............................................F-166
Figure G-1 Magnetic Interference Survey Setup with Direct Connection to PC..................................G-3
Figure G-2 Magnetic Interference Survey Setup Using RS-232 to RS-485 Converter ........................ G-3
Figure G-3 GLS Tool Install Files ........................................................................................................G-4
Figure G-4 Install Progress Window.....................................................................................................G-4
Figure G-5 Windows Installer Error Message ......................................................................................G-5
Figure G-6 MATLAB Runtime 7.6 Installation or Modification .........................................................G-5
Figure G-7 .NET Framework Message .................................................................................................G-6
Figure G-8 Existing MATLAB Modification Window ........................................................................G-6
Figure G-9 GLS Tool Shortcut..............................................................................................................G-7
Figure G-10 GLS Tool Main Window and Data Source Window........................................................G-10

Rev. V Page xvi
Figure G-11 GLS Preferences Window ................................................................................................ G-11
Figure G-12 Real Time Magnetic Interference Graph Set ....................................................................G-11
Figure G-13 Survey Initiation ...............................................................................................................G-12
Figure G-14 Graphical Display of GMU 44 GLS Calibration Period ..................................................G-13
Figure G-15 Real Time Display of Magnetic Interference Events .......................................................G-14
Figure G-16 Data Review DOS Window.............................................................................................. G-15
Figure G-17 Magnetic Tilt Display (Survey Passed) ............................................................................ G-16
Figure G-18 Magnetic Field Display (Survey Passed)..........................................................................G-17
Figure G-19 Magnetic Field Display (Survey Failed)...........................................................................G-17
Figure H-1 Instrument Panel Patches ....................................................................................................H-3
Figure H-2 Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments ...................................................................H-5
Figure J-1 Lightning Zoning Legend .................................................................................................... J-3
Figure J-2 Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Not Limited to VFR Operation ....................................... J-4
Figure J-3 Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Limited to VFR Operation .............................................. J-6
Figure J-4 Zoning for Wings Affected by Landing Gear...................................................................... J-7
Figure J-5 Zoning for a Single Propeller (Low- or High-Wing)........................................................... J-8
Figure J-6 Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Canard with a Rear-Mounted Propeller......................... J-9
Figure J-7 Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Aircraft with a Curved Lower Fuselage ...................... J-10
Figure J-8 Zoning for Front-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing) .................................. J-11
Figure J-9 Zoning for Rear-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing) ................................... J-12
Figure J-10 Zoning for Front- and Rear-Mounted Propellers (Low- or High-Wing)........................... J-13
Figure J-11 Zoning for High-Wing with Front and Rear Propellers Mounted Above Fuselage .......... J-14
Figure J-12 Zoning for Low- or High-Wing Canard with Twin Jet Engines ....................................... J-15
Figure J-13 Zoning for Single-Propeller Biplane ................................................................................. J-16
Figure J-14 Zoning for Empennage ...................................................................................................... J-17
Figure J-15 Example Lightning Zoning for Single-Engine Aircraft..................................................... J-18
Figure J-16 Example Lightning Zoning for Twin-Engine Aircraft ...................................................... J-19
Figure L-1 GMU 44 Overbraid Installation.......................................................................................... L-5
Figure L-2 GMU 44 Overbraid Termination ........................................................................................ L-6
Figure M-1 AIRSPEED CONFIGURATION Page.............................................................................. M-2
Figure M-2 Airspeed Tape Arc Range Diagrams ................................................................................. M-5
Figure M-3 OVERSPEEDS Window ................................................................................................... M-8
Figure M-4 Current ASI and Tape Markings...................................................................................... M-11
Figure M-5 Equivalent IAS Tape and Airspeed Configuration Page ................................................. M-11
Figure M-6 Current ASI and Tape Markings...................................................................................... M-12
Figure M-7 Equivalent IAS Tape and AIRSPEED CONFIGURATION Page .................................. M-12
Figure N-1 WXR Cable Overbraid Installation ....................................................................................N-4
Figure N-2 WXR Overbraid Termination .............................................................................................N-5
Figure N-3 Wire Termination in GDU 620 Connector .........................................................................N-7
Figure N-4 Shield Termination and Overbraid Preparation ..................................................................N-8
Figure N-5 Shield Termination Placement............................................................................................N-9
Figure N-6 Overbraid Placement ........................................................................................................N-10
Figure N-7 Hose Clamp Placement.....................................................................................................N-11
Figure N-8 Final Assembly .................................................................................................................N-12
Figure P-1 TBM700 RVSM System Diagram: Architecture 1 .............................................................P-3
Figure P-2 TBM700 RVSM System Diagram: Architecture 2 .............................................................P-4
Figure P-3 ADC/AM-250 Interconnect: Architecture 1 ........................................................................P-7
Figure P-4 ADC/AM-250 Interconnect: Architecture 2........................................................................P-8
Figure P-5 G600 RVSM Pitot-Static Connections ................................................................................P-9
Figure P-6 RVSM Altitude Interconnect.............................................................................................P-10

Rev. V Page xvii
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1 Pre-installation Checklist ......................................................................................................1-16
Table 1-2 G500/G600 Equipment EQFs ...............................................................................................1-17
Table 1-3 G500/G600 LRU Physical Specifications.............................................................................1-17
Table 1-4 LRU Current Specifications..................................................................................................1-18
Table 1-5 G500/G600 LRU Installation Manuals .................................................................................1-19
Table 1-6 Garmin G500/G600 Reference Documentation....................................................................1-20
Table 1-7 Other Reference Documentation...........................................................................................1-20
Table 1-8 Optional Garmin System Reference Documentation............................................................1-20
Table 1-9 Non-Garmin System Reference Documentation...................................................................1-21
Table 1-10 GDU 620 Terrain Databases and Software Compatibility ....................................................1-24
Table 2-1 Available G500/G600 LRUs ...................................................................................................2-3
Table 2-2 G500/G600 Options Available ................................................................................................2-4
Table 2-3 G500/G600 Database Cards....................................................................................................2-5
Table 2-4 G500/G600 Installation Kit P/N K10-00005-00 Accessories (with GAD 43)........................2-6
Table 2-5 G500/G600 Installation Kit P/N K10-00005-10 Accessories (With GAD 43e) .....................2-7
Table 2-6 Additional Installation Items Available from Garmin.............................................................2-7
Table 2-7 G500/G600 Installation Kit P/N K10-00005-20.....................................................................2-8
Table 2-8 G500/G600 Installation Kit P/N K10-00005-30.....................................................................2-9
Table 2-9 Approved Ethernet Cables ....................................................................................................2-10
Table 2-10 G500/G600 Circuit Breaker and Switch Labels ...................................................................2-21
Table 2-11 External Terrain Alerting/TAWS Source with G500/G600...................................................2-28
Table 2-12 Autopilot Interfaces...............................................................................................................2-30
Table 2-13 Magnetic Disturbances..........................................................................................................2-46
Table 2-14 Garmin LRU Ethernet Port Summary...................................................................................2-65
Table 3-1 Overview of AHRS Mounting Options.................................................................................3-18
Table 3-2 Overview of AHRS Mounting Options without GRS 77 Universal Mount .........................3-19
Table 3-3 GTP 59 OAT Probe Kit .........................................................................................................3-98
Table 3-4 GTP 59 Doubler Types..........................................................................................................3-99
Table 3-5 GRS 77 Static Test Loads (Without GRS 77 Universal Mount)......................................... 3-112
Table 3-6 GRS 77 Static Test Loads (With GRS 77 Universal Mount) .............................................. 3-112
Table 3-7 GSU 75(B) Static Test Loads (Without GRS 77 Universal Mount) ................................... 3-113
Table 3-8 GSU 75(B) Static Test Loads (With GRS 77 Universal Mount) ........................................ 3-113
Table 3-9 GDC 74( ) Static Test Loads ............................................................................................... 3-114
Table 3-10 GAD 43e Static Test Loads................................................................................................. 3-114
Table 3-11 Socket Contact Part Numbers ............................................................................................. 3-118
Table 3-12 Recommended Crimp Tools................................................................................................ 3-118
Table 3-13 G500/G600 LRU Connector Kits .......................................................................................3-122
Table 3-14 Slidelock Backshell Assembly ............................................................................................3-123
Table 3-15 D-sub Connectors and Backshell Assemblies .....................................................................3-128
Table 3-16 Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart...........................................................3-132
Table 3-17 Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-03 (P741 and P771) ........................................3-132
Table 3-18 Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-05 (P6202) ......................................................3-132
Table 3-19 Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-20 (P751) ........................................................3-134
Table 3-20 Configuration Module Kit (P/N 011-00979-00) (P741 and P771) .....................................3-136
Table 3-21 Configuration Module Kit (P/N 011-00979-02) (P6202) ...................................................3-136
Table 3-22 GDU 620 Unit Software Load and Configuration ..............................................................3-142
Table 3-23 GSU 75(B) Unit Software Load and Configuration ...........................................................3-143
Table 3-24 GSU 75(B) Calibration Criteria ..........................................................................................3-144

Rev. V Page xviii
Table 3-25 GRS 77 Unit Software Load and Configuration.................................................................3-144
Table 3-26 GRS 77 Calibration Criteria................................................................................................3-145
Table 3-27 GMU 44 Magnetometer Calibration and Heading Offset...................................................3-146
Table 3-28 GDC 74( ) Unit Software Load and Configuration.............................................................3-147
Table 3-29 GAD 43/43e Unit Software Load and Configuration .........................................................3-149
Table 3-30 LRU Weight and Balance....................................................................................................3-150
Table 3-31 LRU Current Requirements ................................................................................................3-152
Table 3-32 LRU Bonding Resistance....................................................................................................3-164
Table 5-1 Airframe Specific Configuration Data – IAS TAPE BASIC Setting......................................5-6
Table 5-2 Airframe Specific Configuration Data....................................................................................5-7
Table 5-3 Cross-Side GDU Configuration ............................................................................................5-13
Table 5-4 AHRS Configuration.............................................................................................................5-13
Table 5-5 ADC Configuration...............................................................................................................5-13
Table 5-6 GPS 1/2 Configuration..........................................................................................................5-14
Table 5-7 NAV 1/2 Configuration .........................................................................................................5-14
Table 5-8 ADF Configuration ...............................................................................................................5-15
Table 5-9 Traffic/ADS-B Configuration ...............................................................................................5-15
Table 5-10 Data Link Configuration .......................................................................................................5-16
Table 5-12 Adapter Configuration ..........................................................................................................5-17
Table 5-13 Iridium Configuration ...........................................................................................................5-17
Table 5-14 Radar Altimeter Configuration..............................................................................................5-17
Table 5-11 Weather Radar Configuration ...............................................................................................5-17
Table 5-15 Fast/Slow Configuration (G600 System Only).....................................................................5-18
Table 5-16 Lightning Sensor Configuration............................................................................................5-18
Table 5-17 ARINC 429 Input Format Availability..................................................................................5-20
Table 5-19 ARINC 708 Input Format Availability..................................................................................5-21
Table 5-18 ARINC 429 Output Format Availability ...............................................................................5-21
Table 5-20 RS-232 Port Configuration Availability................................................................................5-22
Table 5-21 GDU 620 Autopilot Type Settings ........................................................................................5-41
Table 5-22 GDU 620 Altitude Preselect Type Settings ...........................................................................5-44
Table 5-23 GDU 620 Manual Autopilot ACTIVE Settings ....................................................................5-46
Table 5-24 GDU 620 Autopilot Mode Annunciations Type Settings......................................................5-49
Table 5-25 GDU 620 ARINC 429 Output Settings.................................................................................5-50
Table 5-26 GDU 620 Flight Director Type Settings ...............................................................................5-52
Table 5-27 GDU 620 Manual Flight Director ACTIVE Settings............................................................5-54
Table 5-28 GAD 43 Configuration Settings............................................................................................5-58
Table 5-29 GAD 43e Altitude Preselect TYPE Settings .........................................................................5-60
Table 5-31 GAD 43e DME Type Settings...............................................................................................5-61
Table 5-30 GAD 43e Radar Altimeter TYPE Settings............................................................................5-61
Table 5-32 Heading Verification .............................................................................................................5-82
Table 5-33 Extension Harness Parts........................................................................................................5-96
Table 5-34 Airspeed Test Points............................................................................................................5-109
Table 5-35 Localizer/Glideslope Checks .............................................................................................. 5-113
Table 5-36 Radar Altimeter Tests..........................................................................................................5-148
Table 5-37 Parallel Tuning Frequencies................................................................................................5-153
Table 5-38 Flight Director Configuration Settings ...............................................................................5-161
Table 5-39 Autopilot Configuration Settings ........................................................................................5-163
Table 6-1 GDU 620 Troubleshooting Guide ...........................................................................................6-5
Table 6-2 GDU 620 Alert Troubleshooting Guide ..................................................................................6-8
Table 6-3 Autopilot Troubleshooting Guide .........................................................................................6-17

Rev. V Page xix
Table 6-4 Mid-Continent Standby ADI Troubleshooting Guide...........................................................6-22
Table B-1 P751 Strapping to Achieve Desired System ID ................................................................... B-10
Table B-2 P771 Strapping to Preserve Desired System ID................................................................... B-14
Table B-3 P741 Strapping to Achieve Desired System ID ................................................................... B-19
Table E-1 Electronic and Electromechanical Standby Indicators: ......................................................... E-2
Table E-2 Compatible GPS Position Sources......................................................................................... E-4
Table E-3 Compatible Autopilots ........................................................................................................... E-5
Table E-4 Compatible External Flight Directors .................................................................................... E-9
Table E-5 Compatible Navigation Receivers ....................................................................................... E-11
Table E-6 Compatible Traffic Sources ................................................................................................. E-12
Table E-7 Compatible Data Link Models............................................................................................. E-14
Table E-8 Compatible 2 1/4” Airspeed Indicators and Altimeters ....................................................... E-15
Table E-9 Compatible ADF Receivers ................................................................................................. E-16
Table E-10 Compatible Weather Radar Sources..................................................................................... E-17
Table E-11 Compatible Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source ............................................................ E-18
Table E-12 RS-232 Serial Altitude ......................................................................................................... E-18
Table E-13 Compatible Autopilots ......................................................................................................... E-19
Table E-14 Compatible Radar Altimeters............................................................................................... E-21
Table E-15 Compatible Video Source .................................................................................................... E-22
Table E-16 Compatible Audio Panels..................................................................................................... E-23
Table E-17 Compatible Miscellaneous System ...................................................................................... E-24
Table E-18 Compatible Analog Navigation Receivers........................................................................... E-24
Table E-19 Compatible Altitude Preselect/Vertical Speed Select........................................................... E-25
Table E-20 Compatible Analog Radar Altimeters .................................................................................. E-26
Table E-21 Compatible Synchro ADF Receiver Compatibility ............................................................. E-26
Table E-22 Compatible DMEs................................................................................................................ E-27
Table E-23 Acceptable Tuning Sources.................................................................................................. E-27
Table E-24 Compatible Marker Beacon Receivers ................................................................................ E-28
Table E-25 Compatible Stall Protection and Warning Unit.................................................................... E-28
Table G-1 PC Minimum Requirements...................................................................................................G-2
Table G-2 Example Survey Sequence.....................................................................................................G-9
Table K-1 Aircraft Model-Specific Information .....................................................................................K-2
Table K-2 Lightning Protection Requirements ..................................................................................... K-20
Table M-1 Advanced Airframe Specific Configuration Data – Arc Ranges .......................................... M-4
Table M-2 Advanced Airframe Specific Configuration Data – Markings.............................................. M-6
Table M-3 Advanced Airframe Specific Configuration Data – Bugs..................................................... M-7
Table P-1 Required Equipment ...............................................................................................................P-5
Table P-2 RVSM Required Functions .....................................................................................................P-6
Table P-3 RVSM Required Interfaces: Architecture 1 ............................................................................P-6
Table P-4 RVSM Required Interfaces: Architecture 2 ............................................................................P-6
Table P-5 Air Data Test Points ..............................................................................................................P-13
Table P-6 Altitude Hold Check Log......................................................................................................P-14

Rev. V Page xx
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................................1-2

1.2 Abbreviations ..................................................................................................................................1-4
1.3 Scope ...............................................................................................................................................1-6
1.3.1 Approved Aircraft with Systems Not Covered by the STC ...................................................1-6
1.3.2 Class I/II Aircraft Not Identified on the AML .......................................................................1-6
1.3.3 Class III Aircraft Not Identified on the AML ........................................................................1-6
1.3.4 Other Aircraft Not Covered by the G500/G600 AML STC ...................................................1-7
1.3.5 Required Documentation for All Installations .......................................................................1-7
1.4 G500/G600 System Overview ........................................................................................................1-8
1.4.1 G500/G600 LRU Descriptions ...............................................................................................1-8
1.4.2 Required GPS Navigator ......................................................................................................1-10
1.4.3 Required Standby Instruments .............................................................................................1-10
1.4.4 Interface Summary ...............................................................................................................1-11
1.5 G500/G600 Installation .................................................................................................................1-15
1.5.1 Installation Overview ...........................................................................................................1-15
1.5.2 Installation Configurations ...................................................................................................1-16
1.5.3 Pre-installation Checklist .....................................................................................................1-16
1.6 Technical Specifications ...............................................................................................................1-17
1.6.1 EQFs .....................................................................................................................................1-17
1.6.2 Physical Characteristics ........................................................................................................1-17
1.6.3 Power Requirements ............................................................................................................1-18
1.7 Certification ..................................................................................................................................1-19
1.8 G500/G600 System Documentation ............................................................................................1-20
1.9 Databases ......................................................................................................................................1-22
1.9.1 Basemap Land Database ......................................................................................................1-22
1.9.2 Aviation Database ................................................................................................................1-22
1.9.3 FliteCharts® Database .........................................................................................................1-23
1.9.4 ChartView™ Database .........................................................................................................1-23
1.9.5 SafeTaxi® Database .............................................................................................................1-23
1.9.6 Terrain and Airport Terrain Databases .................................................................................1-24
1.9.7 Obstacles Database ...............................................................................................................1-24
1.9.8 IGRF Model .........................................................................................................................1-24
1.9.9 Airport Directory Database ..................................................................................................1-25
1.10 Terminology ..................................................................................................................................1-26

Rev. V Page 1-1
1.1 Introduction
This manual covers the G500⁄G600 system, which includes the GDU 620 display, GSU 75(B) ADAHRS,
GMU 44 Magnetometer, GTP 59 Temperature Probe, and optional GAD 43/43e Adapter. The G500/G600
system can include a GDC 74( ) ADC and GRS 77 AHRS in place of the GSU 75(B) ADAHRS. This
manual describes the physical, mechanical, and electrical characteristics, as well as instructions and other
conditions and limitations for installation and approval for all components of the G500/G600 system. It is
intended for use by persons certified by the FAA to install avionics. It includes installation and checkout
procedures for the G500/G600 to standards described in Title 14 CFR Part 43.
The information in this manual must be read and understood by the installer prior to aircraft modification.
The content of this manual is arranged chronologically with the required installation process. Use the
pre-installation checklist in Section 1.5.3 and the installation overview in Section 2 to assess each aircraft
installation and ensure the applicability of the G500/G600 AML STC. Sections 3 through 6 include
detailed installation, configuration, checkout, and troubleshooting procedures. Sections 7 and 8 include
limitations, documentation, and instructions for continued airworthiness.

Rev. V Page 1-2
G500/G600
Section 1 - Overview of the AML Aircraft and G500/G600 System
Preparation • Aircraft eligibility
• Required standby instruments
• Pre-installation checklist
Review of AML Section 2 - Pre-installation Considerations and Overview

and G500/G600
System • Electrical Load Analysis prior to installation
• Equipment and materials needed
• Considerations for standby instruments, placards, other interfaces
Review of
• Baseline performance verification of interfaces
G500/G600 Aircraft • Unit location provisions and considerations
and System • Prerequisite modifications
Requirements
Section 3 - Detailed Installation Procedures

• Mechanical and pitot-static installation
Begin • Skin penetration designs for the outside air temperature (OAT) probe
Installation
• Wiring and connector information
• Unit replacement, installation, and return to service procedures
• Electrical Load Analysis procedures
• Equipment bonding checks
Equipment
Installation and
Wiring Section 4 - System Interconnect Information Reference
Section 5 - Configuration and Checkout Procedures

• Airframe-specific information (e.g., units and airspeed markings)
Configuration,
Checkout, and • Mount and wiring verification
Documentation • Software loading
• Configuration (e.g., interfaces, calibrations, external equipment)
• Ground checks (e.g., airspeed, altimeter, navigation, interfaces)
• Final checkout (e.g., system, placards, performance)
Troubleshooting • Documentation: AFMS, ICA, and configuration and checkout log
and Solutions
Section 6 - Troubleshooting Procedures and System Alert Definitions
Section 7 - Operational and Installation Limitations

Limitations and • Modifications that require other approved method
ICAs
• Instrument lighting changes
• Power distribution connection limitations
• Standby attitude with a flight director limitations
• Form 337 or other acceptable means as required
Complete • Configuration checkout log and ICA completed
Section 8 - ICA Information

Rev. V Page 1-3
1.2 Abbreviations
These abbreviations and acronyms are used in this document.
AC Advisory Circular
ADAHRS Air Data and Attitude Heading Reference System
ADC Air Data Computer
ADF Automatic Direction Finder
ADI Attitude Directional Indicator
ADS-B Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast
AFM Aircraft Flight Manual
AFMS Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement
AHRS Attitude Heading Reference System
AML Approved Model List
AMM Aircraft Maintenance Manual
AOA Angle of Attack
CAS Calibrated Airspeed
CDI Course Deviation Indicator
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
DFCS Digital Flight Control Systems
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
ECTM Engine Condition Trend Monitoring
EIDS Engine Instrumentation Display System
ESIS Electronic Standby Instrument System
EQF Environmental Qualification Form
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FD Flight Director
FIS-B Flight Information Services - Broadcast
GS Glideslope
GPS Global Positioning System
GPSS Global Positioning System Steering
GTOW Gross Take-off Weight
HDG Heading
HIRF High-Intensity Radiated Field
HSDB High Speed Data Bus
HSI Horizontal Situation Indicator
IAS Indicated Airspeed
ICA Instructions for Continued Airworthiness
IEL Indirect Effects of Lightning
IFR Instrument Flight Rules
IGRF International Geomagnetic Reference Field
ILS Instrument Landing System

Rev. V Page 1-4
LOC Localizer
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
MFD Multi-functional Display
OAT Outside Air Temperature
PFD Primary Flight Display
P/N Part Number
POH Pilot’s Operating Handbook
RMI Radio Magnetic Indicator
RMS Root Mean Square
RVSM Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum
SBAS Satellite-Based Augmentation System
SRM Structural Repair Manual
SSEC Static Source Error Correction
STC Supplemental Type Certificate
SVT Synthetic Vision Technology
TAS Traffic Advisory System
TAWS Terrain Awareness and Warning System
TCAS Traffic Collision Awareness System
TIS Traffic Information Service
TSO Technical Standing Order
TVS Transient Voltage Suppressors
VAC Volts - Alternating Current
VDC Volts - Direct Current
VFR Visual Flight Rules
VHF Very High Frequency
VOR VHF Omni-direction Range

Rev. V Page 1-5
1.3 Scope
This manual applies to the modification of an aircraft to support the installation of the G500/G600 system
and the required standby instruments. Interfacing to additional equipment is also covered by this manual;
however, the installation of such peripheral equipment (e.g., traffic/weather sensors, GPS, NAV, autopilot
systems, etc.) is not covered. Those systems require other installation data and approval.
The data contained within this manual is FAA-approved under the G500/G600 AML STC SA02153LA-D,
which is applicable for implementation within Part 23 airplanes that are contained on this STC AML.
Aircraft 6000 lbs or over (Part 23 Class III) are generally not approved for the G500 system. The AML
must be used to determine if the G500 or G600 system is approved for the aircraft model being modified.
The G500/G600 system installation covered by this STC is not appropriate for Part 25 Transport Category
aircraft or Part 27/29 Rotorcraft. Installation of the G600 system in an aircraft imposes specific limitations
that may affect the operational capabilities of some aircraft, specifically RVSM compliance.
Section 7 of this manual lists all limitations of this STC, which should be carefully reviewed prior to any
installation.
1.3.1 Approved Aircraft with Systems Not Covered by the STC

Aircraft identified on the AML have been determined to meet a minimum required configuration for
applicability of this STC. However, since some of these aircraft may have been modified over the years, or
may have been manufactured with systems that are not identified or approved in this manual for integration
with the G500/G600, it may be difficult to use the data herein to completely substantiate the installation in
compliance with this STC. It is the installer’s responsibility to make the final determination of applicability
for each aircraft. Use the pre-installation checklist in Section 1.5.3 and the installation overview
information in Section 2 of this manual to assess each installation prior to modifying any Type Certified
aircraft to ensure the applicability of the G500/G600 AML STC.
Only systems using approved equipment listed in Appendix E are approved by the G500/G600 AML STC.
Appropriately certificated persons can seek approval for installation and operational use of the G500/G600
with systems not identified in this manual; however, it is the responsibility of such persons to obtain a
separate airworthiness approval.
1.3.2 Class I/II Aircraft Not Identified on the AML

Aircraft that are not identified on the G500/G600 AML STC and are considered to be Class I or II
airplanes per AC 23.1309-1E may be valid candidates for the G500/G600 AML STC. Installers should
contact Garmin Tech Support with detailed drawings of the aircraft’s proposed installation. Engineering
analysis may allow for the inclusion of these aircraft in a future revision of the FAA AML.
1.3.3 Class III Aircraft Not Identified on the AML

Some aircraft that are considered to be Class III airplanes per AC23.1309-1E have been delayed inclusion
on the AML based upon additional data required by the Small Aircraft Directorate and Aircraft Evaluation
Group. Field Approvals for this class of aircraft should not be made; instead, installers or other
appropriately certificated agencies should contact Garmin directly to develop the required data needed to
support an installation of this type under this STC.

Rev. V Page 1-6
1.3.4 Other Aircraft Not Covered by the G500/G600 AML STC
Commuter Category Aircraft (Part 23 Class IV), Transport Category Aircraft (Part 25), aircraft with a
gross takeoff weight greater than 12,500 lbs, and Rotorcraft (Part 27/29) are not part of the G500/G600
AML STC. The data in this installation manual does not address these types of aircraft. Field Approvals for
these aircraft should not be made.
1.3.5 Required Documentation for All Installations

The G500/G600 configuration and checkout log should be completed and attached with the ICA such that
any aircraft with the modifications detailed in this manual may be properly maintained. For details, refer to
Section 5.11.

Rev. V Page 1-7
1.4 G500/G600 System Overview
The G500/G600 system is designed to replace the standard instruments, along with any external CDIs and
ADF indicator. In many cases, the optional GAD 43/43e Adapter will also allow removal of existing
attitude gyros. Standby instruments (e.g., ADI, airspeed indicator, and altimeter), which are required for
IFR installations, can usually be installed in the locations vacated by the removed instruments. Standby
instruments are not required for VFR-only installations. An overview of the G500/G600 system is shown
in Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2. Further detail on each of the LRUs is provided in the following sections.
1.4.1 G500/G600 LRU Descriptions
NOTE
All references to LRU models are generally shorthand. For the part numbers of LRUs
approved under this STC, refer to the G500/G600 STC Equipment List.
GDU 620
The GDU 620 has dual VGA (640 x 480 pixels) 6.5-inch LCD displays.
For the GDU 620, the left side is the PFD and the right side is the MFD.
For the GDU 620 RH, the right side is the PFD and the left side is the
MFD. The PFD shows primary flight information. The MFD shows
navigation and flight plan information, traffic, weather, and terrain. An
external configuration module is used, so no configuration is required if
the GDU 620 is replaced for any reason.
AHRS
The AHRS provides aircraft attitude and flight characteristics
information to the GDU 620. The unit contains advanced tilt sensors,
accelerometers, and rate sensors and interfaces with both the ADC and
the GMU 44 Magnetometer. The unit utilizes GPS signals sent from the
GPS/SBAS navigator. Actual attitude and heading information is sent
using ARINC 429 digital interface to the GDU 620 and optional
GAD 43 Adapter. The GRS 77 and GSU 75(B) are approved AHRS
units that can be installed in the G500/G600 system.

Rev. V Page 1-8
ADC
The ADC receives information from the pitot-static system and the
GTP 59 OAT sensor. The ADC provides pressure altitude, airspeed,
vertical speed, and OAT information to the G500/G600 system. The
ADC provides data to the GDU 620 and the AHRS using ARINC 429
digital interfaces. The ADC communicates maintenance and
configuration information to the GDU 620 using an RS-232 interface.
The GDC 74( ) and GSU 75(B) are approved ADC units to install in the
G500/G600 system.
GMU 44
The GMU 44 Magnetometer senses magnetic field information. The
AHRS processes received data from the GMU 44 to determine the
aircraft magnetic heading. The GMU 44 directly receives power from
the AHRS and uses an RS-485 digital interface to communicate. The
GMU 44 is available with a straight wire lead or a 90° lead.
GAD 43
The GAD 43 Adapter is an optional adapter that provides analog attitude
information for use with third-party autopilot systems. It interfaces with
the GDU 620 for configuration, alerting, and integrity monitoring and
with the AHRS for attitude, heading, and yaw input information. The
GAD 43 emulates the output of a spinning-mass gyro, allowing existing
gyros to be removed when the G500/G600 is installed. It also provides a
synchro heading output that can be used to provide synchro heading to
other systems.
GAD 43e
The GAD 43e Adapter is an optional adapter that provides all of the
functions of the GAD 43. In addition, it allows the GDU 620 to receive
data from analog VHF navigation and marker beacon receivers, synchro
(ARINC 407) ADF receivers, DME systems, and analog radar
altimeters. It also allows the GDU 620 to provide altitude preselect and
vertical speed control to suitable autopilots.

Rev. V Page 1-9
1.4.2 Required GPS Navigator
One GPS/SBAS navigator is required for each G500/G600 system installed. The G500/G600 system
supports two independent navigators. The GPS/SBAS navigators that are approved to interface to the
G500/G600 system are the GTN 6XX/7XX, 400W/500W series, or a GNS 480. Two navigators, either the
same or any combination of the three, are required for dual installations.
GTN 6XX/7XX
The GTN 6XX/7XX unit is a panel mount GPS/SBAS navigator with a
touchscreen interface and color moving map. Position and flight plan
data are displayed on the GDU 620 MFD via RS-232 and ARINC 429
interfaces. GPS position information is also forwarded to the AHRS in
order to ensure normal AHRS operation. HSDB information can be
routed through the GTN 6XX/7XX. The GTN 650/750 also provides
LOC/GS information for display on the GDU 620 HSI via an
ARINC 429 interface.
400W/500W Series
The 400W/500W series unit is a panel mount GPS/SBAS navigator with
a color moving map. Position and flight plan data are displayed on the
GDU 620 MFD via RS-232 and ARINC 429 interfaces. GPS position
information is also forwarded to the AHRS in order to ensure normal
AHRS operation. The GNS 430W/530W also provides LOC/GS
information for display on the GDU 620 HSI via an ARINC 429
interface.
GNS 480
The GNS 480 unit is a panel mount GPS/SBAS navigator with a built-in
navigation receiver and a color moving map. Position and flight plan
data are displayed on the GDU 620 MFD via RS-232 and ARINC 429
interfaces. GPS position information is also forwarded to the AHRS in
order to ensure normal AHRS operation. LOC/GS information is
provided on an ARINC 429 interface and displayed on the GDU 620
HSI.
1.4.3 Required Standby Instruments

When the G500/G600 system is installed, an independent attitude indicator, airspeed indicator, and
altimeter must be installed. In many cases, the existing instruments can be retained for use as standby
instruments.
NOTE
If the G500/G600 installation/operation is limited to VFR-only, standby instruments are
not required. For additional details, refer to Section 2.5.22.

Rev. V Page 1-10
1.4.4 Interface Summary
An overview of the G500/G600 system interfaces are shown in Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2. For a complete
list of approved interfaces, refer to Appendix E.
analog nav receiver, altitude
preselect, analog radar altim eter,
DME, ADF, M arker Beacon
Equipment Installed per this STC

GAD 43e only
Adapter (optional) to Autopilot
GAD 43/43e
Magnetometer
GMU 44
AHRS / ADC [1]

PFD/MFD Display
GDU 620
Temperature Probe
GTP 59
Audio Panel
No. 1 GPS/SBAS Navigator (optional) [2]
(required)
Traffic
(optional)
No. 2 GPS/SBAS Navigator
(optional)
Datalinks
(optional)
No. 1 VOR/Localizer/GS
(optional) Weather Radar
(optional)
No. 2 VOR/Localizer/GS Radar Altimeter

(optional) (optional)
Stormscope
Autopilot/Flight Director (optional)
(optional)
Video Source
ADF, DME (optional)
(optional)
Existing Equipment
(already installed in aircraft)
Standby Standby
Airspeed Attitude
Standby M agnetic
A ltimeter Compass
Standby Instruments
[3] [4]
Figure 1-1 G500/G600 System Overview - Single Installation

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page 1-11
Notes:
[1] The “AHRS / ADC” can either include both the GRS 77 AHRS and GDC 74( ) ADC or the
GSU 75(B) ADAHRS.
[2] An audio panel connection to the GDU 620 is recommended for tones and aural alerts
generated by the GDU 620. The audio panel must be connected if TAWS and/or SVT is
enabled.
[3] Standby instruments are not required for VFR-only operation.
[4] The requirement for standby instruments can be fulfilled using either separate standby
instruments approved under this STC or STC-compatible ESIS. Refer to Section 2.5.2 and
Section 3.2.2. This STC does not approve the ESIS installation. For a list of ESIS
determined by Garmin to be compatible, refer to Appendix E.
Figure 1-1 G500/G600 System Overview - Single Installation

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page 1-12
analog nav receiver, altitude
preselect, analog radar altimeter,
DME, ADF, Marker Beacon
GAD 43e only Equipment Installed per this STC

to Autopilot
Adapter (optional)
GAD 43/43e
Magnetometer Magnetometer
GMU 44 #1 Pilot PFD/MFD Display Copilot PFD/MFD Display GMU 44 #2
GDU 620 GDU 620
AHRS / ADC #1 AHRS / ADC #2
[1] [1]
Temperature Probe Temperature Probe

GTP 59 #1 GTP 59 #2
No. 1 GPS/SBAS Navigator Video Source

(required) (optional) [5]
Audio Panel
(optional) [2]
No. 2 GPS/SBAS Navigator Existing Equipment
(required) (already installed in
aircraft)
Video Source
(optional) [5] No. 1 VOR/Localizer/GS
(optional) [5]
No. 2 VOR/Localizer/GS
Standby Standby (optional) [5]
Airspeed Attitude
ADF, DME
(optional) [5]
Standby Magnetic Traffic
Altimeter Compass (optional) [5]
Standby Instruments Autopilot/Flight Director

(optional) [5] [6]
(required on pilot side only)
[3] [4] Datalinks
(optional)
Weather Radar ARINC 708 WXR Only

(optional) [5]
Radar Altimeter
(optional)
Only if GDU 1 is not connected
Stormscope
(optional) [5]
Figure 1-2 G500/G600 System Overview - Dual Installation

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page 1-13
Notes:
[1] The “AHRS / ADC” can either include both the GRS 77 AHRS and GDC 74( ) ADC or the
GSU 75(B) ADAHRS.
[2] An audio panel connection to the GDU 620 is recommended for tones and aural alerts
generated by the GDU 620. The audio panel must be connected if TAWS and/or SVT is
enabled.
[3] Standby instruments are not required for VFR-only operation.
[4] The requirement for standby instruments can be fulfilled using either separate standby
instruments approved under this STC or STC-compatible ESIS. Refer to Section 2.5.2 and
Section 3.2.2. This STC does not approve the ESIS installation. For a list of ESIS
determined by Garmin to be compatible, refer to Appendix E.
[5] Connection of optional equipment to both GDUs is not required. Functions provided by the
optional equipment will only be available on the GDU to which the optional equipment is
connected.
[6] If the GFC 500 autopilot system is installed, the G5/GAD 29(B) must be interfaced only to
the pilot’s GDU 620 #1.
Figure 1-2 G500/G600 System Overview - Dual Installation

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page 1-14
1.5 G500/G600 Installation
1.5.1 Installation Overview
The G500/G600 system is designed to replace standard instruments, along with any external CDIs, ADF
indicator, and the clock. Standby instruments (e.g., airspeed indicator, altimeter, and usually ADI) are
required, and these usually go in the locations vacated by the removed instruments. A typical installation is
shown in Figure 1-3.
20
200 40
180
60
160 VOR INDICATOR
CLOCK 80
140
120 100
VAC
D.C.
ELEC.
3 6
E 10 15
N 5 VERTICAL
12 SPEED
FUEL QTY UP 20
33
15 0 VOR INDICATOR
TURN COORDINATOR DN
100 FEET 20
30 PER MIN
L R S 5
W 10 15
2 MIN 24 21
ELEC CURRENT
TACHOMETER ADF
TYPICAL INSTRUMENT PANEL BEFORE MODIFICATION
CLOCK*
VAC
20
200 40
FUEL QTY 180
60
160
80
140
120 100
CURRENT
TACHOMETER
* CLOCK MAY BE REMOVED TO MAKE SPACE FOR ANOTHER INSTRUMENT
TYPICAL INSTRUMENT PANEL AFTER G500/G600 INSTALLATION
Figure 1-3 Typical Instrument Panel Modification

Rev. V Page 1-15
1.5.2 Installation Configurations
The G500/G600 system can be installed in a single or dual configuration.
In a single G500/G600 installation, the attitude, air data, autopilot, and external sensors are connected
directly to the GDU 620. Refer to Figure 1-1.
In a dual G500/G600 installation, two independent attitude systems and two ADCs are required. The
primary and secondary GDU 620s share information over a crossfill bus. The primary GDU 620 is
connected to the autopilot, although either GDU 620 can control the course and heading inputs into the
autopilot. External systems are interfaced to each GDU 620 as required. Refer to Figure 1-2. For dual
G500/G600 installations, standby instruments are only required to be installed on the pilot’s side.
1.5.3 Pre-installation Checklist

Before beginning a G500/G600 installation, it is important to ensure the aircraft meets the
pre-qualifications for the installation of the G500/G600 system under this STC. The following checklist is
provided to help the installer determine the necessary requirements that must be met before beginning
installation of the G500/G600 system in a specific aircraft. Ensure each of the items outlined in Table 1-1
are completed as necessary before beginning the modification.
Table 1-1 Pre-installation Checklist
Complete? Item Reference
 Aircraft is on the AML. STC SA02153LA-D
Planned equipment interfaces are approved under the STC or
 Appendix E [1]
have other FAA approval.
 Verify the effect of limitations on proposed installation. Section 7
Installation considerations reviewed to determine if there is any
 Section 2.5
impact on installation.
Suitable location for GMU 44 Magnetometer has been identified
 Section 2.5.11.5
and surveyed.
 Suitable location for GDU 620 display has been identified. Section 2.5.11.1
 Suitable location for AHRS has been identified. Section 2.5.11.4
 Suitable location for ADC has been identified. Section 2.5.11.6
 Suitable location for GTP 59 OAT probe has been identified. Section 2.5.11.7
 Verify weight and balance data is available and current. Section 3.6
Aircraft electrical system is sufficient for G500/G600 installation.
 Section 3.7
If possible, obtain current Electrical Load Analysis.
If GAD 43/43e is interfaced to the autopilot, the autopilot
 performance has been base-lined prior to beginning G500/G600 Section 5.10.2.5
installation.
Notes:
[1] Having interfaces not listed on the AML STC does not preclude the use of AML STC
SA02153LA-D as a basis for approval of the installation; however, those interfaces not
listed on AML STC SA02153LA-D will require other FAA airworthiness approval.

Rev. V Page 1-16
1.6 Technical Specifications
1.6.1 EQFs
The latest revision of the EQF for each G500/G600 LRU is available directly from Garmin under the part
numbers listed in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 G500/G600 Equipment EQFs

Document Garmin P/N
GAD 43 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00496-07
GAD 43e Environmental Qualification Form 005-00578-01
GDC 74A Environmental Qualification Form 005-00191-77
GDC 74B Environmental Qualification Form (G600 Only) 005-00253-77
GDU 620 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00313-20
GMU 44 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00164-31
GRS 77 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00165-31
Garmin GSU 75 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00770-01
GTP 59 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00191-97
To obtain a copy of these forms, refer to the Garmin Dealer Resource Center.
1.6.2 Physical Characteristics

All width, height, and depth measurements are taken with unit rack (if applicable) and connectors.
Table 1-3 G500/G600 LRU Physical Specifications
Unit Weight w/Rack
LRU Width Height Depth Unit Weight
and Connector
10.00 inches 6.70 inches 5.50 inches 6.38 lbs 7.04 lbs
GDU 620
(25.4 cm) (17.0 cm) (14.0 cm) (2.90 kg) (3.20 kg)
GRS 77
(9.19 cm) (8.43 cm) (24.99 cm) (1.27 kg) (1.57 kg)
2.10 inches 0.35 lbs 0.50 lbs
GMU 44 N/A [1] N/A [1]
(5.33 cm) (0.16 kg) (0.23 kg)
GDC 74( )
(7.87 cm) (8.20 cm) (24.49 cm) (0.72 kg) (1.04 kg)
GAD 43
(5.36 cm) (13.49 cm) (26.67 cm) (0.86 kg) (0.91 kg)
GAD 43e
(5.36 cm) (13.49 cm) (26.67 cm) (1.03 kg) (1.29 kg)
GSU 75(B)
(7.62 cm) (7.01 cm) (16.69 cm) (0.58 kg) (0.78 kg)
Notes:
[1] Diameter of the GMU 44 is 3.35 inches (8.51 cm), including flange.

Rev. V Page 1-17
1.6.3 Power Requirements
All LRUs are capable of operating at either 14 or 28 VDC. For details on surge ratings and
minimum/maximum operating voltages, refer to the individual LRU-specific EQF. For current draw
specifications, refer to Table 1-4.
Table 1-4 LRU Current Specifications
14 Volt Current Draw 28 Volt Current Draw
LRU
Typical Maximum Typical Maximum
GDU 620 3.9 A 5.4 A 1.9 A 2.7 A
GRS 77/GMU 44 600 mA 1.0 A [1] 300 mA 1.0 A [1]
GDC 74( ) 410 mA 480 mA 200 mA 235 mA
GAD 43 410 mA 720 mA 210 mA 350 mA
GAD 43e 790 mA 1.22 A 390 mA 590 mA
GSU 75(B) 760 mA 958 mA 380 mA 479 mA
Notes:
[1] Maximum current draw occurs momentarily at start-up or when the supply voltage drops to
9 VDC.

Rev. V Page 1-18
1.7 Certification
For a complete list of TSOs that each LRU complies, refer to the appropriate installation manual listed in
Table 1-5.
Table 1-5 G500/G600 LRU Installation Manuals
LRU Document Garmin P/N
GDU 620 GDU 620 Installation Manual 190-00601-04
GRS 77 GRS 77/GMU 44 Installation Manual 190-00303-10
GMU 44 GRS 77/GMU 44 Installation Manual 190-00303-10
GDC 74( ) GDC 74( ) Air Data Computer Installation Manual 190-00303-15
GSU 75(B) GSU 75 ADAHRS Installation Manual 190-01639-00
GAD 43 GAD 43/43e Installation Manual 190-00899-00
GAD 43e GAD 43/43e Installation Manual 190-00899-00

Rev. V Page 1-19
1.8 G500/G600 System Documentation
Table 1-6 Garmin G500/G600 Reference Documentation
Document Garmin P/N
G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06
Equipment List, G500/G600 PFD/MFD System AML STC 005-00313-AY
GDU 620 Installation Manual 190-00601-04
GDL 69 Series SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions 190-00355-04
GAD 43/43e Installation Manual 190-00899-00
G500/G600 PFD/MFD System Instructions for Continued Airworthiness 190-00601-00
Table 1-7 Other Reference Documentation

Document P/N
Mid-Continent 4300-4XX Series Electric Attitude Indicator Installation Manual 9015762
Mid-Continent 4200 Series Electric Attitude Indicator Installation Manual 9016182
Mid-Continent MD420 Emergency Power System Installation Manual 9016391
Table 1-8 Optional Garmin System Reference Documentation

Document Garmin P/N
400W Series Installation Manual 190-00356-02
500W Series Installation Manual 190-00357-02
G600 Pilot’s Guide 190-00601-02
G500 Pilot’s Guide 190-01102-02
GNS 480 (CNX80) Color GPS/NAV/COM Installation Manual 560-0982-01
GTX 330 Transponder Installation Manual 190-00207-02
GTX 33 Transponder Installation Manual 190-00303-61
GTX 33 (with ES) Transponder Installation Manual 190-00906-00
GSR 56 Installation Manual 190-00836-00
GDL 69/69A Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00355-02
GTS 8XX/GPA 65 Installation Manual 190-00587-00
GTS 8XX AML STC Installation Manual - Part 1 - Overview and Limitations 190-00993-00
GTS 8XX AML STC Installation Manual - Part 4 - Configuration, Checkout, and
190-00993-03
Maintenance
GTS 8XX AML STC Installation Manual - Part 2 - Mechanical Installation 190-00993-04
GTS 8XX AML STC Installation Manual - Part 3 - Electrical Installation 190-00993-05
GTS 8XX Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01279-00
GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Rev. V Page 1-20
Table 1-8 Optional Garmin System Reference Documentation
Document Garmin P/N
G600 MU-2B Checklist Changes (Mitsubishi MU-2B models only, G600 Only) 190-00601-20
Garmin G5 Electronic Flight Instrument Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01112-10
GFC 500 Autopilot with Electronic Stability and Protection Part 23 AML STC
190-02291-00
Installation Manual
GFC 600 Automatic Flight Control System Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01937-00
Table 1-9 Non-Garmin System Reference Documentation

Document Document Number
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices
FAA AC 43.13-1B
– Aircraft Inspection and Repair
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices
FAA AC 43.13-2B
– Aircraft Alterations
Aerospace Systems Electrical Bonding and Grounding for Electromagnetic
SAE ARP1870
Compatibility and Safety
Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load and Power Source Capacity Analysis ASTM F2490-05

Rev. V Page 1-21
1.9 Databases
The GDU 620 utilizes various databases. Databases are stored either in internal memory or on an SD
memory card. The following sections describe each database and how each is updated. The database card
includes Basemap, Obstacle, Terrain, SafeTaxi, Airport Directory, and Chart Data
(FliteCharts/ChartView). The database card remains in the bottom slot of the GDU 620. The Supplemental
Data Card includes the aviation database and, once loaded into the GDU 620, is removed from the top slot.
Databases can be synced between two GDU 620s. Refer to Section 5.5.21.
CAUTION
The database on the Supplemental Data Card (e.g., Aviation Database) is locked to
specific GDU 620 installations. The first time the Supplemental Data Card is inserted into
a display, it becomes “locked” to that particular aircraft installation and will not work in
other installations.
1.9.1 Basemap Land Database

Basemap provides ground-based references, such as roads and bodies of water. The database is stored in
internal memory of the GDU 620 display or on the SD card. Basemap does not have a scheduled update
cycle and as such does not have an expiration date.
The Basemap database is updated very infrequently. Basemap updates, when issued, are available from
flyGarmin.com.
1.9.2 Aviation Database

The Jeppesen Aviation Database provides the G500/G600 system with a database of airports, NAVAIDs,
and waypoint information.
The GDU 620 utilizes a database stored on an SD memory data card for easy updating and replacement.
The Aviation Database may be updated by simply inserting an updated Aviation Database update card into
the top SD card slot in the front panel of the GDU 620. For software versions prior to v7.10, the database
will be downloaded into the GDU 620. For software v7.10 and later, the database will be downloaded onto
the database card that must be inserted into the lower SD card slot in the front panel of the GDU 620. Each
card will only update one system. Alternately, the Aviation Database may be updated by copying the
database to the Garmin-supplied Supplemental Data Card.
The Aviation Database on the GDU 620 database card is generated from current Jeppesen data and
converted to a format that is used by the GDU 620. The data conversion process is performed using
software that is developed and maintained under Garmin configuration management according to
RTCA/DO-200A Level 1 and 2, Standards for Processing Aeronautical Data.
GDU 620 users update their database card by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin. The
database card is programmed using the supplied SD card reader. Contact Garmin at (866) 739-5687 or
flyGarmin.com for more information and instructions.

Rev. V Page 1-22
1.9.3 FliteCharts® Database
FliteCharts resembles the paper version of FAA-published terminal procedures charts. The charts are
displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. The FliteCharts database is stored on an
SD memory card that remains in the GDU 620 for normal operation.
The FliteCharts database is updated by removing the database card from the GDU 620, updating the
database on the card, and reinserting the card. Each card can only be used with one system. GDU 620 users
update their database card by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin. The database card is
programmed using the supplied SD card reader. Contact Garmin at (866) 739-5687 or flyGarmin.com for
more information and instructions.
1.9.4 ChartView™ Database

ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in
full color with high-resolution. The ChartView database is stored on an SD memory card that remains in
the GDU 620 for normal operation.
The ChartView database is updated by removing the database card from the GDU 620, updating the
database on the card, and reinserting the card. Each card can only be used with one system. GDU 620 users
update their ChartView data by purchasing database subscription updates from Jeppesen Sanderson. The
database card is programmed using the supplied SD card reader and Jeppesen-provided software. Contact
Jeppesen at (800) 621-5377 or www.jeppesen.com for more information and instructions. ChartView is an
optional feature that must be activated. Instructions for activating the ChartView function are found in
Section 5.5.5.1.
1.9.5 SafeTaxi® Database

SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in
the United States. The SafeTaxi database is stored on an SD memory card that remains in the GDU 620 for
normal operation. The data conversion process is performed using software that is developed and
maintained under Garmin configuration management according to RTCA/DO-200A, Level 2, Standards
for Processing Aeronautical Data.
The SafeTaxi database is updated by removing the database card from the GDU 620, updating the database
on the card, and reinserting the card. Each card can only be used with one system. GDU 620 users update
their database card by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin. The database card is
more information and instructions.

Rev. V Page 1-23
1.9.6 Terrain and Airport Terrain Databases
The Terrain database provides basic terrain awareness functionality. The data conversion process is
performed using software that is developed and maintained under Garmin configuration management
according to RTCA/DO-200A, Level 2, Standards for Processing Aeronautical Data. For GDU 620
Terrain databases and software compatibility, refer to Table 1-10. For additional information regarding
terrain database compatibility, refer to Section 2.3.1. All databases are available for updating as needed and
are available from Garmin. The Terrain databases are updated by removing the database card from the
GDU 620, updating the databases on the card, and reinserting the card in the lower card slot of the
GDU 620 front panel. The Terrain databases can be downloaded via the Internet and the card programmed
using the supplied SD card reader. Contact Garmin at (866) 739-5687 or flyGarmin.com for more
information or instructions.
Table 1-10 GDU 620 Terrain Databases and Software Compatibility

GDU 620 Software Version Database Resolution
v2.xx 30 arc-second
v3.00 through v6.21, no SVT 30 arc-second
9 arc-second database is required.
The Airport Terrain database is provided and
v3.00 through v6.21, with SVT optional when using the 9 arc-second resolution
terrain database (or higher resolution) and software
v4.00 or later. Otherwise, the Airport Terrain
database is required for SVT and TAWS.
4.9 arc-second resolution terrain database is
v7.00 or later required. This database does not support the
Airport Terrain database.
1.9.7 Obstacles Database

The Obstacle database provides identification of known obstacles greater than 200 feet AGL. The data
conversion process is performed using software that is developed and maintained under Garmin
configuration management according to RTCA/DO-200A, Level 2, Standards for Processing Aeronautical
Data. This database is also used with terrain awareness functionality. The Obstacle database is updated by
removing the database card from the GDU 620, updating the database on the card, and reinserting the card.
The Obstacle database can be downloaded via the Internet and the card programmed using the supplied SD
card reader. Contact Garmin at (866) 739-5687 or flyGarmin.com for more information or instructions.
1.9.8 IGRF Model

The IGRF model is contained in the AHRS and is only updated once every 5 years. The IGRF model is
provided with the Aviation database. At system power-up, the IGRF models in the AHRS and in the
Aviation database are compared, and if the IGRF model in the AHRS is out-of-date, the user is prompted to
update the IGRF model in the AHRS. The prompt will appear after the G500/G600 splash screen is
acknowledged on the MFD.

Rev. V Page 1-24
1.9.9 Airport Directory Database
The Airport Directory database provides airfield information and contact information for local aviation
services, food, lodging, transportation, and attractions. The database content is provided from selected
third-parties, such as AOPA. There may be multiple options and coverages for the Airport Directory
database, but only one Airport Directory database may be installed at a time. Update the Airport Directory
database by removing the database card from the GDU 620, updating the database on the card, and
reinserting the card. The Airport Directory database can be downloaded via the Internet and the card
more information or instructions.

Rev. V Page 1-25
1.10 Terminology
Throughout this document, references will be made to metal and nonmetallic aircraft. For the purposes of
this installation manual, metal aircraft will be those with an aluminum skin. Nonmetallic aircraft will refer
to all other aircraft (e.g., aircraft with fiberglass or composite skin or aircraft with tube and fabric
construction).
Throughout this document, references will be made to within the instrument panel area. For the purposes
of this installation manual, this will be the area forward of the instrument panel and aft of the firewall or
forward pressure bulkhead. For aircraft without a metallic firewall or metallic pressure bulkhead located
forward of the instrument panel, special considerations may be required for certification aspects of HIRF
and lightning. Refer to Section 2.5.21.
Unless otherwise specified, references made throughout this manual mean the following:
• GSU 75(B) includes the GSU 75 and GSU 75B
• GDC 74( ) includes the GDC 74A and GDC 74B
• AHRS includes the GRS 77 and GSU 75(B)
• ADC includes the GDC 74( ) and GSU 75(B)
• GDL 69 series includes GDL 69/69A/69 SXM/69A SXM
• GTS 8XX includes STC approved G500/G600 system interfaces: GTS 800/820/825/850/855
• GTS 8X0 includes GTS 800/820/850
• GTS 8X5 includes GTS 825/855
• GWX 70(R) includes the GWX 70 and GWX 70R
• GAD 29(B) includes the GAD 29 and GAD 29B

Rev. V Page 1-26
2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
2.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................................2-2

2.2 Pre-installation Information ............................................................................................................2-2
2.3 Available Equipment ......................................................................................................................2-3
2.3.1 G500/G600 Databases ............................................................................................................2-5
2.4 Installation Materials ......................................................................................................................2-6
2.4.1 Accessories Available from Garmin ......................................................................................2-6
2.4.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied .....................................................................................2-9
2.4.3 Software Loader Card ..........................................................................................................2-16
2.5 Installation Considerations ...........................................................................................................2-18
2.5.1 Minimum System Configuration ..........................................................................................2-18
2.5.2 Standby Instruments .............................................................................................................2-18
2.5.3 Placards and Labels ..............................................................................................................2-20
2.5.4 Power Distribution ...............................................................................................................2-23
2.5.5 Pitot-Static Plumbing ...........................................................................................................2-24
2.5.6 External Annunciators ..........................................................................................................2-24
2.5.7 External CDIs .......................................................................................................................2-24
2.5.8 External Sensors ...................................................................................................................2-25
2.5.9 Autopilot/Flight Director Interface ......................................................................................2-29
2.5.10 Part 121/Part 135 Considerations .........................................................................................2-34
2.5.11 Mounting Considerations .....................................................................................................2-34
2.5.12 Cable and Wiring Considerations ........................................................................................2-60
2.5.13 Cooling Requirements ..........................................................................................................2-60
2.5.14 Magnetic Compass Recalibration .........................................................................................2-60
2.5.15 RVSM Considerations (G600 System Only) .......................................................................2-60
2.5.16 GPSS (Roll Steering) Considerations ..................................................................................2-61
2.5.17 ADI Replacement Considerations ........................................................................................2-61
2.5.18 Aerobatic Aircraft Considerations ........................................................................................2-61
2.5.19 Altitude Encoder Function (GDU 620 Software v3.00 or Later) .........................................2-62
2.5.20 Equipment Bonding Considerations .....................................................................................2-62
2.5.21 Nonmetallic Aircraft Considerations ...................................................................................2-62
2.5.22 VFR-Only Installation Considerations .................................................................................2-63
2.5.23 Airspeed Warning Device Considerations ...........................................................................2-64
2.5.24 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Considerations ........................................................................2-64
2.5.25 HSDB Ethernet Architecture Requirements .........................................................................2-65
2.5.26 Dual G500/G600 Installation Considerations ......................................................................2-72
2.5.27 GDU 620 Discrete Output Considerations ...........................................................................2-72

Rev. V Page 2-1
2.1 Introduction
The following section contains an overview of the steps required for the installation of the Garmin
G500/G600 system. This section includes requirements for selection of proper locations in the aircraft, as
well as requirements for supporting structure, mechanical alignment, and electrical wiring. Any
restrictions on nearby equipment and requirements are also specified herein.
The post-installation calibration procedures required prior to flight are described in Section 5.
2.2 Pre-installation Information

Always follow acceptable avionics installation practices in FAA AC 43.13-1B, 43.13-2B or later FAA-
approved revisions of these documents.
Follow the installation procedure in this manual as it is presented for a successful installation. The contents
of this manual must be read and understood by the installer prior to aircraft modification. Prior to
installation, consider the structural integrity of the G500/G600 system installation as defined in
AC 43.13-2B, Chapter 1 and Section 3.3. Perform the post-installation checkout before closing the work
area in case problems occur.
Complete an Electrical Load Analysis in accordance with AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 11 on the aircraft prior to
starting modification to ensure the aircraft has the ability to carry the additional load of the G500/G600
equipment. For acceptable methods of conducting the required Electrical Load Analysis, refer to
Section 3.7.

Rev. V Page 2-2
2.3 Available Equipment
The G500/G600 system is supplied as an LRU kit and a G500/G600 installation kit. For unit descriptions
of the LRUs listed in Table 2-1, refer to Section 1.4.1. When it is determined which LRUs are required for
a particular installation, refer to the Aviation Price Catalog on the Garmin Dealer Resource Center to
determine which available kits are suitable for the installation.
Table 2-1 Available G500/G600 LRUs
Model Unit P/N Catalog P/N
GRS 77 011-00868-10 010-00295-10
GMU 44 [3] 011-00870-00 010-00296-00
GMU 44 011-00870-10 010-00296-10
GMU 44 011-00870-20 010-00296-20
GDC 74A 011-00882-10 010-00336-10
GTP 59 011-00978-00 011-00978-00
GDC 74B (G600 Only) [1] 011-01110-01 010-00390-01
GSU 75 011-03094-00 010-01127-00
GSU 75B [1] 011-03094-40 010-01127-40
GDU 620, Black (G600 Only) 011-01264-00 010-00482-00
GDU 620, Gray (G600 Only) 011-01264-10 010-00482-10
GDU 620, RH PFD, Black (G600 Only) 011-01264-20 010-00482-20
GDU 620, RH PFD, Gray (G600 Only) 011-01264-30 010-00482-30
GDU 620, BLACK (G500 Only) 011-01264-50 010-00482-50
GDU 620, RH PFD, Black (G500 Only) 011-01264-60 010-00482-60
GAD 43 [2] 011-01970-00 010-00724-00
GAD 43, Upgraded 011-01970-01 011-00724-03
GAD 43e 011-02349-00 011-00852-00
Notes:
[1] To be eligible for RVSM, either the GDC 74B or GSU 75B ADC is required for the G600
system. Additional RVSM parts and certification are required. Contact Garmin for
additional information on RVSM eligibility.
[2] GAD 43 P/N 011-01970-00 cannot be used to provide analog attitude information to
Century autopilots. GAD 43 P/N 011-01970-01 or P/N 011-02349-00 must be used with
Century autopilots and is backward-compatible with GAD 43 P/N 011-01970-00.
[3] GMU 44 P/N 011-00870-10 or P/N 011-00870-20 must be used for new installations and is
a direct replacement for the P/N 011-00870-00. GMU 44 P/N 011-00870-20 is designed for
low-clearance installations.

Rev. V Page 2-3
Table 2-2 G500/G600 Options Available
Item P/N
SD Card, GDU 6XX, ChartView Enablement Card – Heavy Aircraft [1] 010-00769-50
SD Card, GDU 6XX, TAWS Enablement Card – Single GDU Installations (G600
010-00769-51
only)
SD Card, GDU 6XX, Altitude Preselect Enablement Card [1] [2] 010-00769-52
SD Card, GDU 6XX, ChartView Enablement Card – Light Aircraft [1] 010-00769-53
SD Card, GDU 6XX, SVT Enablement (G500 option) 010-00769-54
SD Card, GDU 6XX, TAWS Enablement Card – Dual GDU Installations (G600 only)
010-00769-56
[3]
SD Card, GDU 6XX, WXR Enablement for GWX 68/70(R)/75 (G500 option) 010-00769-57
SD Card, GDU 6XX, GAD 43/43e Enablement (G500 option) 010-00769 58
SD Card, GDU 6XX Video Enablement Card [1] 010-00769-61
SD Card, GDU 6XX ARINC 708 WXR Enablement Card [1] 010-00769-63
SD Card, GDU 6XX RadAlt (A429) Enablement Card [1] 010-00769-64
SD Card, GDU 6XX RadAlt (A429) Enablement Card – Dual GDU Installations [3] 010-00769-65
SD Card, GDU 6XX DFCS 4 (A429) Enablement Card – Dual GDU Installations [3] 010-00769-62
SD Card, GDU 6XX Fast/Slow A429 Enablement Card - Single GDU Installations
010-00769-67
(G600 only) [4]
SD Card, GDU 6XX Fast/Slow A429 Enablement Card - Dual GDU Installations
010-00769-68
(G600 only) [3] [4]
SD Card, GDU 6XX, Radar AGCS Enablement (Single) 010-00769-93
SD Card, GDU 6XX, Radar AGCS Enablement (Dual) 010-00769-94
SD Card, GDU 6XX, Radar Turb Detect Enablement (Single) 010-00769-95
SD Card, GDU 6XX, Radar Turb Detect Enablement (Dual) 010-00769-96
SD Card, G600, RVSM Enable, Socata TBM700/850 (Single) (G600 only) 010-00769-C0 [5]
Notes:
[1] Each enablement card can only be used once and, once used, the card will only work with
that particular aircraft installation. For dual G500/G600 installations, a separate
enablement card is required to enable the feature on each GDU 620.
[2] The Altitude Preselect option is only available for certain autopilots. Refer to
Appendix Section E.3. Additionally, the GAD 43e provides Altitude Preselect functionality.
Refer to Appendix Section E.20. This enablement card is not required to enable altitude
preselect functionality using the GAD 43e.
[3] A single enablement card will enable the feature on both GDU 620s in a dual G500/G600
installation. Once used, this card will only work with that particular aircraft installation.
[4] Prior to beginning any installation that requires a fast/slow display, contact Garmin
regarding the availability of the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow Feature Enablement Card.
[5] The part number listed is required for GSU 75B installations. G600 installations that retain
the GDC 74B may use P/N 010-00769-8D.

Rev. V Page 2-4
2.3.1 G500/G600 Databases
Table 2-3 G500/G600 Database Cards

Item Garmin P/N
SD Card, G600, Terrain/Obstacle/Airports, SafeTaxi, FliteCharts 010-00769-42 [1]
Data Card
Preloaded
SD Card, G600, Terrain/Obstacle/Airports, SafeTaxi, FliteCharts 010-00769-43 [2]

SD Card, G500 Terrain/Obstacle/Airports, SafeTaxi, FliteCharts 010-00769-44 [2]
SD Card, G500/G600, Terrain/Obstacle/Airports, SafeTaxi, FliteCharts 010-00769-A1 [3]
Blank
Card
SD Card, Spare Database 010-01431-01 [4]
Notes:
[1] Use 30 arc-second resolution terrain database with GDU 620 software v2.xx. This
database card can be used with GDU 620 software v3.00 through v6.21 if SVT is disabled.
[2] Use 9 arc-second resolution terrain database with GDU 620 software v3.00 through v6.21.
This terrain database, or one of higher resolution, is required for SVT functionality.
GDU 620 software v6.21 must use SD cards labeled “MOD 1”.
[3] Use 4.9 arc-second resolution terrain database with GDU 620 software v7.00 or later.
[4] Use as a replacement for P/N 010-00769-43/44/A1. Data must be loaded from
flyGarmin.com.

Rev. V Page 2-5
2.4 Installation Materials
2.4.1 Accessories Available from Garmin
Two G500/G600 installation kits are available for use with G500/G600 installations utilizing the GAD 43
and the GAD 43e. Table 2-4 and Table 2-5 list the items provided in each G500/G600 installation kit.
Table 2-4 G500/G600 Installation Kit P/N K10-00005-00 Accessories (with GAD 43)
Used With Item P/N
011-01656-00 [3]
Connector kit, GDU 620 [1] OR
GDU 620 011-01656-01 [4]
Mounting screw kit, GDU 620 [2] 011-02078-00
011-00869-01 [3]
Connector kit, SB, GRS 77 [1] OR
011-00869-03 [4]
GRS 77
GRS 77 universal mount kit 011-01780-00
Remote install rack, GRS 77 115-00459-00
Connector kit, GMU 44 011-00871-00
GMU 44 GMU 44 universal mount kit 011-01779-01
Install rack, GMU 44 115-00481-10 [6]
011-01010-01 [3]
Connector kit, SB, GDC 74( ) [1] OR
GDC 74( ) 011-01010-05 [4]
Mounting rack, GDC 74( ) 011-01011-00
GAD 43 Connector kit, GAD 43 011-01990-00 [5]
Notes:
[1] Connector kit includes the unit configuration module.
[2] Mounting screw kit contains six screws (P/N 211-64307-14).
[3] Connector kit comes with unpotted configuration module.
[4] Connector kit comes with potted configuration module.
[5] Connector kit suitable for use with GAD 43 P/N 011-01970-XX. Connector kit includes the
unit configuration module.
[6] Use the GMU 44 install rack (P/N 115-00481-10) for new installations. The rack can
replace P/N 115-00481-00.

Rev. V Page 2-6
Table 2-5 G500/G600 Installation Kit P/N K10-00005-10 Accessories (With GAD 43e)
Used With Item P/N
011-01656-00 [3]
Connector kit, GDU 620 [1] OR
GDU 620 011-01656-01 [4]
011-00869-01 [3]
Connector kit, SB, GRS 77 [1] OR
011-00869-03 [4]
GRS 77
GRS 77 universal mount kit 011-01780-00
Remote install rack, GRS 77 115-00459-00
Install rack, GMU 44 115-00481-10 [6]
011-01010-01 [3]
Connector kit, SB, GDC 74( ) [1] OR
GDC 74( ) 011-01010-05 [4]
Mounting rack, GDC 74( ) 011-01011-00
GAD 43e Connector kit, GAD 43e 011-02350-00 [5]
Notes:
[2] Mounting screw kit contains six screws (P/N 211-64307-14).
[3] Connector kit comes with unpotted configuration module.
[5] Connector kit suitable for use with GAD 43e P/N 011-02349-00.
[6] Use GMU 44 install rack P/N 115-00481-10 for new installations. The P/N 115-00481-10
replaces the P/N 115-00481-00 rack.
Table 2-6 Additional Installation Items Available from Garmin

Item Garmin P/N
GDU 620 Cutout Template [1] 115-01010-00
G500/G600 Downloadable Software SD Card [2] [4] 010-00768-00
GDU 6xx Installer Unlock Card [3] 010-00769-60
G500/G600 Software Loader Card [4] 010-00771-( )
Trim Plate, Thin (0.032") [5] 115-01009-00
Trim Plate, Thick (0.063") [5] 115-01009-10
Notes:
[1] Cutout template is clamped to instrument panel and used to mark the cutout required by
the GDU 620. It is also used as a drill template to drill the holes for the six GDU 620
mounting screws. This template can be used to make multiple cutouts.

Rev. V Page 2-7
[2] The G500/G600 Downloadable Software SD card is a blank SD card that can be used to
make a G500/G600 Software Loader Card when the G500/G600 software is downloaded
from the Garmin Dealer Resource Center. For additional details, refer to Section 2.4.3.
[3] The Installer Unlock Card is required to access all pages in Configuration mode when
configuring the system for a particular installation.
[4] The G500/G600 Software Loader Card contains software for all G500/G600 LRUs. An
equivalent card can be made using the G500/G600 Downloadable Software SD card and
downloading the software from the Garmin Dealer Resource Center. Contact Garmin to
obtain the latest G500/G600 Software Loader Card.
[5] The trim plates are only required for the GDU 620 if the existing instrument panel is being
modified as part of a G500/G600 installation. To determine if a thin or thick trim plate is
needed, refer to Section 3.2.1.4. If a new instrument panel is being manufactured, the trim
plates are not required.
Table 2-7 G500/G600 Installation Kit P/N K10-00005-20

(with GSU 75(B) and GAD 43)
Used With Item P/N
Connector kit, GDU 620 [1] 011-01656-01 [3]
GDU 620
Remote install rack, GSU 75 117-00608-00
GSU 75(B)
Connector kit, GSU 75 [1] 011-03109-00
Install rack, GMU 44 115-00481-10
GAD 43 Connector kit, GAD 43 011-01990-00 [4]
Notes:
[2] Mounting screw kit contains six screws,( P/N 211-64307-14).
[4] Connector kit suitable for use with GAD 43 P/N 011-01970-XX. Connector kit includes the
unit configuration module.

Rev. V Page 2-8
Table 2-8 G500/G600 Installation Kit P/N K10-00005-30
(with GSU 75(B) and GAD 43e)
Used With Item P/N
Connector kit, GDU 620 [1] 011-01656-01 [3]
GDU 620
Remote install rack, GSU 75 117-00608-00
GSU 75(B)
Connector kit, GSU 75 [1] 011-03109-00
Install rack, GMU 44 115-00481-10
GAD 43e Connector kit, GAD 43e 011-02350-00 [4]
Notes:
[2] Mounting screw kit contains six screws, (P/N 211-64307-14).
[4] Connector kit suitable for use with GAD 43e P/N 011-02349-00.
2.4.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied

The G500/G600 equipment is intended for use with standard aviation accessories. The following items are
required for each installation:
• Wire - MIL-W-22759/16
NOTE
If MIL-W-22759/18 wire is utilized, because the smaller insulation diameter works better
with the high-density connectors used in the G500/G600 system, care must be taken to
adequately support and protect the wiring due to its thinner insulation.
• Shielded wire, MIL-C-27500 cable utilizing M22759/16 wire (TE) or M22759/18 wire (TG) and
ETFE jacket (14)
• Aircraft grade Category 5 Ethernet cable is only required for installations utilizing HSDB
interfaces, such as the GTN 6XX/7XX, GDL 69 series, GWX 68/70(R)/75, GDL 88, GTX 345,
GFC 600, or dual G500/G600 installations.

Rev. V Page 2-9
Table 2-9 Approved Ethernet Cables
Manufacturer P/N
CARLISLE IT 392404 (24 AWG)
EMTEQ D100-0824-100 (24 AWG)
PIC WIRE AND CABLE E10422 (22 AWG) [1]
PIC WIRE AND CABLE E10424 (24 AWG)
PIC WIRE AND CABLE E12424 (24 AWG)
THERMAX MX100Q-24 (24 AWG)
Notes:
[1] Not recommended due to large wire diameter. 24 AWG is preferred.
• Push-pull manually resettable circuit breakers. For part numbers, refer to Section 2.5.4. For rating
values, refer to interconnects in Appendix F
• Aircraft grade fasteners (e.g., AN525 screws; MS20426AD rivets; MS21059 rivet nut plates;
MS21071 reduced rivet spacing nut plates; or NAS1832, NAS1834, or NAS1836 potted inserts)
may be required if honeycomb core panels are used to support the installation of G500/G600
system components
• Pitot/static fittings, lines, and 1/8-27ANPT male fittings for pitot and static connection with ADC
• 2024-T3 aluminum alloy sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/4 or clad 2024-T3 aluminum alloy sheet per
AMS-QQ-A-250/5. Minimum sheet thickness requirements:
◦ 0.063 inches for new instrument panel, but not less than original panel thickness
◦ 0.063 inches for AHRS supporting structure. Alternatively, honeycomb core sandwich panel
with 0.020-inch thick clad 2024-T3 aluminum face sheets per QQ-A-250/ 5 can be used
◦ 0.032 inches for GMU 44 Magnetometer supporting structure (if universal mount is not
used) and GTP 59 OAT probe doubler
◦ 0.040 inches for GAD 43/43e and ADC supporting structures
• Wire bundle routing, securing, and management supplies, as required and specified in the aircraft
standard practices manual
• Ring terminals for grounding, MS25036 or MS20659
• Shield terminators, MS83519/2-X (MIL-S-83519)
• Silicone fusion tape, A-A-59163 (MIL-I-46852C)

Rev. V Page 2-10
2.4.2.1 Materials Required for HIRF and Lightning Protection
If additional lightning protection is required for a particular aircraft, the following items may also be
required for the installation. For detailed information regarding which parts are required for a particular
aircraft model, refer to Appendix K.
Applicable to all nonmetallic aircraft

• Transient voltage suppressor 30KPA48A or transient voltage suppressor 15KPA48A. The
suppressors are referred to as TVS1 in Appendix F and Table K-2
• Fuse, 3AG fast-acting, 4A Littelfuse P/N 0312-004. The fuse is referred to as “F1” in Appendix F
• Fuse holder, inline, Cooper Bussmann P/N HFB. The fuse holder is referred to as “F1” and “F2” in
Appendix F
• Heavy duty aluminum foil tape, 3M P/N 438, or other adhesive-backed dead soft aluminum foil
minimum 0.012-inch thick (i.e., with aluminum 7.2 mils or thicker)
• Tinned copper tubular braid, 7/16" (P/N QQB575R30T437), or tinned copper flat braid, 3/4" (P/N
QQB575F36T781). These braids can be used to fabricate bonding straps or as overbraid for
wingtip GMU 44 installations
• Tinned copper flat braid, 5/8" (P/N QQB575F36T375), for the bonding strap for the GSU 75(B).
Refer to Appendix Section N.3
• Resistor, 30 ohm, 3/4W, 5%, Vishay Dale (P/N RS1/230R00JB12). The resistor is referred to as
“R1” in Appendix F
Required only for nonmetallic aircraft using an electric Standby ADI

• Four same part numbered TVSs (identified as “TVS1” above) are combined in accordance with
Section 3.4.4 to make an assembly referred to “TVS2” in Appendix F and Table K-2
• Fuse, 3AG fast-acting, 10A Littelfuse P/N 0312-010. Referred to as “F2” in Appendix F
• Connector, 4-pin plug (socket housing) and cap (pin housing), Tyco Electronics P/Ns 1-480424-0
and 1-480426-0, respectively. Referred to as 4-pin connector in Section 3.4.4 and Appendix F
• Four sockets, Tyco Electronics (P/N 60617-1 or 60619-1)
• Four pins, Tyco Electronics (P/N 60618-1 or 60620-1)
Applicable to Pilatus PC-12 Aircraft

The following parts are required to overbraid the GDU 620 connector going to the Stall Protection and
Warning Unit (refer to Appendix Section N.2 for details):
• Tin Coated Copper Wire Braid, QQ-B-575 (P/N QQB575F36T781 flat 0.75-inch wide,
0.040-inch thick (recommended); or P/N QQB575R30T437 round tubular 0.437-inch inside
diameter)
• Shield terminators, MS83519/2-X (MIL-S-83519) (e.g., Raychem P/N S03-XX-R-100)
• Silicone fusion tape, A-A-59163 (MIL-I-46852C) (e.g., Garmin P/N 249-00114-00)
• Hose clamp (MS35842, SAE J1508 (Type F, I or M) or Fed Spec A-A-52506 (Type F, I or M))

Rev. V Page 2-11
2.4.2.2 Materials Required for Optional Installation Items
If optional installation items/methods are used, the following items may also be required for the
installation. If an optional Air Data Selection Switch (PFD 1) is used, it must meet or exceed the following
specifications:
1. The switch must be illuminated.
2. The switch must have ADC 1 (green) and ADC 2 (amber) legends.
3. The switch must meet the requirements of MIL-PRF-22885 (MIL-S-22885).
The following supplier parts have specifications that meet these requirements at the time of publication of
Revision L of this manual:
1. P/N M22885/108-AA14 with ADC 1 (green)/ADC 2 (amber) legend.
2. P/N LED-6A-14-BB-E0UU5 (Aerospace Optics)
3. P/N 584-10A2B5C1F4L5N2 (Eaton Aerospace)
2.4.2.3 Materials Required for Aircraft-Specific Installations

2.4.2.3.1 Pilatus PC-12
For the installation in the Pilatus PC-12, the following components are required:
1. Diodes P/N 1N6691, 1N6692, or 1N6693 (per MIL-PRF-19500/628A) or diodes meeting or
exceeding the following specifications. The diode must be installed in an area that will not exceed
75°C during all anticipated operating conditions.
◦ Minimum working peak reverse voltage of 800 V
◦ Minimum RMS reverse voltage of 560 V
◦ Minimum non-repetitive peak forward surge current 8.3-ms single half sine-wave
superimposed on rated load (IFSM) of 60 A
◦ Minimum average rectified forward current of 5 A (for 28V installations only)
◦ Minimum temperature range of -50°C to 125°C
◦ Maximum thermal resistance (junction to ambient) of 20°C/W
The following supplier parts have specifications that meet these requirements at publication of Revision K
of this manual:
• P/N 10A07-T (Diodes Incorporated)
Relays meeting or exceeding the following specifications may be used in lieu of the indicated relay:
• MIL-PRF-39016/6, as well as a transient suppression diode on relay coil
• MIL-PRF-39016/37
The following supplier parts have specifications that meet these requirements at publication of
Revision K of this manual:
• P/N M39016/37-XXX
• P/N F250-109 (LEACH International)
It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that the part supplier’s quality system maintains compliance
with these specifications.

Rev. V Page 2-12
2.4.2.3.2 Collins APS-65
For GAD 43/43e installations in aircraft equipped with the Collins APS-65 autopilot system, the
installation of four 6.8 mH inductors may be required to be installed in line with the Pitch Data X and Y,
and the Roll Data X and Y discretes, as shown in Figure F-29.
If the existing APC-65 computer has not been converted for use with digital AHRS (i.e., AHC-1000A/S or
3000A/S), the inductors are required.
For the installation of the inductors, refer to Section 3.4.5. The following are the minimum specifications
required:
• 6.8 mH +/- 15% inductor
• Wire wound copper wire axial construction
• 20 AWG axial connections, 0.032 ±0.002 inches (0.813 ±0.05 mm) diameter.
• -67 °F to 185 °F (-55°C to +85 °C) full operating temp range or -67 °F to 248 °F(-55°C to +120°C)
no load temp range
• 2000 Vrms encasement dielectric rating
• Less than 10 ohms DC resistance
• Saturation current greater than 100 mA
• MIL-I-23053/5 class 3 flame retardant coating
The following supplier part has specifications that meet these requirements of this manual:
• API Delevan Inc. (P/N 4590R-685K)
It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that the supplier’s part quality system maintains compliance
with these specifications.

Rev. V Page 2-13
2.4.2.4 Manufacturer Information
Manufacturer information is provided for convenience only. Information was current at the time of initial
publication and may change at any time.
It is the installer’s responsibility to verify component compliance with applicable specifications.
Aluminum Foil Tape Fuse Holder
3M Cooper Bussmann
3M Corporate Headquarters 114 Old State Road
3M Center Ellisville, MO 63021-5942
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000 Phone: 636-527-1270
Phone: 1-888-364-3577 Fax: 636-527-1607
www.3m.com www.cooperbussmann.com
Fuse Resistor
Littelfuse World Headquarters Vishay Americas (Vishay Dale)
8755 West Higgins Road Suite 500 One Greenwich Place
Chicago, IL 60631 USA Shelton, CT 06484
Phone: (773) 628-1000 Phone: (402) 563-6866
Fax: (847) 391.0894 Fax: (402) 563-6296
www.littelfuse.com www.vishay.com
Tinned Copper Braid TVS
Alpha Wire Company Microsemi Commercial Business Unit
711 Lidgerwood Avenue Macau
Elizabeth, NJ 07207-0711 Phone: (853) 787991
Phone: 1-800-522-5742 Fax: (858) 787995
Fax: (908) 925-6923 www.microsemi.com
www.alphawire.com
OR
OR Littelfuse World Headquarters
Daburn Electronics and Cable 8755 West Higgins Road Suite 500
44 Richboynton Road Chicago, IL 60631 USA
Dover, NJ 07801 Phone: (773) 628-1000
Phone: (973) 328-3200 Fax: (847) 391.0894
Fax: (973) 328-3130 www.littelfuse.com
www.daburn.com
4-Pin Connector and Contacts Air Data Selection Switch
Tyco Electronics Corporation Aerospace Optics, Inc.
1050 Westlakes Drive 3201 Sandy Lane
Berwyn, PA 19312 Fort Worth, Texas 76112
Phone: (610) 893-9800 Telephone: 1-817-451-1141
www.tycoelectronics.com Fax: 1-817-654-3405
www.vivisun.com
OR
Eaton Aerospace
(only available through distributors)
www.eaton.com

Rev. V Page 2-14
Diodes (Pilatus PC-12 only) Relays (Pilatus PC-12 only)
Diodes Incorporated LEACH International
4949 Hedgcoxe Road, Suite 200, 6900 Orangethorpe Ave.
Plano, TX 75024 P.O. Box 5032
Phone: (972) 987-3900 Buena Park, CA 90622-5032
www.diodes.com Phone: 714-736-7599
Fax: 714-670-1145
www.leachintl.com

Rev. V Page 2-15
2.4.3 Software Loader Card
A G500/G600 Software Loader Card may be created using a G500/G600 Downloadable Software SD card
(P/N 010-00768-00) in conjunction with a G500/G600 software application downloaded from the
Dealer Resource Center at flyGarmin.com.
NOTE
The downloadable application to create a Software Loader card only runs on Windows
PCs (Windows 2000, XP, Vista, and 7 are supported). There is no Mac support at this time.
NOTE
An SD card reader is needed to create the G500/G600 Loader card using the application
that is downloaded from Garmin. The approved readers are SanDisk SDDR-99 and
SDDR-93, although other SD card readers will work.
Create a G500/G600 Software Loader Card as follows:

1. Go to the Dealer Resource Center at flyGarmin.com.
2. Download the G500/G600 Cockpit Display System software: P/N 006-B1076-( )) for G500
systems or P/N 006-B0942-( ) for G600 systems.
3. Ensure that you have an SD card reader connected to the PC.
4. Insert the G500/G600 Downloadable Software SD card (P/N 010-00768-00) into the card reader.
5. Run the executable file that was downloaded. The following window will appear:
6. Select Setup and the following window will appear to guide you through the software loader card
creation process:

Rev. V Page 2-16
7. Select Next to get to the following window:
CAUTION
In order to create a loader card, the drive that you select will be completely erased.
8. Ensure that the correct drive is selected.

9. Select Next to create the card (select Next to acknowledge any warnings that appear). The
following window will appear when the card is being created:
10. After the card has been created, the window below will appear. Select Finish to complete the
process.
11. Eject the card from the card reader (or stop the card reader in Windows). The G500/G600 software
loader card is now ready to use.

Rev. V Page 2-17
2.5 Installation Considerations
2.5.1 Minimum System Configuration
NOTE
A G500/G600 installation includes a GSU 75(B) ADAHRS or a combination of a GRS 77
AHRS and GDC 74( ) ADC.
The minimum G500/G600 installation requires the following items:

• GDU 620 display
• AHRS
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• ADC
• GTP 59 Temperature Probe
• External GPS navigation sensor: 400W/500W series (software v3.30 or later), GNS 480 (software
v2.20 or later), or GTN 6XX/7XX (software v2.00 or later)
In addition to the G500/G600 equipment, standby instruments must be installed as described in
Section 2.5.2.
2.5.2 Standby Instruments

When installing the GDU 620 in the instrument panel, a standby attitude indicator, airspeed indicator, and
altimeter must be installed for all IFR installations. Standby instruments are not required for VFR-only
installations. For additional details for VFR-only installations, refer to Section 2.5.22. Either two-inch or
three-inch standby instruments may be used, subject to the restrictions in the following sections. The
standby instruments must be located as described in Section 2.5.11.2. For aircraft covered by this STC,
dual G500/G600 installations only require standby instruments by the pilot (primary) GDU 620.
CAUTION
If the original pneumatic airspeed indicator operating limits change based upon aircraft
altitude (such as barber pole type airspeed indicators), the original pneumatic airspeed
indicator, or an electronic standby listed in Appendix E capable of replicating the variable
limit, must be used as the standby instrument.
CAUTION
If replacing the original airspeed indicator, the installer must ensure that this indicator is
not part of an existing airspeed warning system. If it is part of the airspeed warning
system, this system must continue to operate following the installation of the G500/G600.
For additional details, refer to Section 2.5.23.

Rev. V Page 2-18
2.5.2.1 Standby Attitude Indicator
NOTE
If the G500/G600 installation/operation is limited to VFR-only, standby instruments are
not required. For additional details, refer to Section 2.5.22.
The standby attitude indicator must be one of the following:

1. A pneumatic air-driven attitude indicator that is eligible for installation as the primary attitude
indicator.
2. An electric attitude indicator listed in Appendix Section E.1. Not all aircraft models are eligible to
use an electric attitude indicator as a standby instrument. For eligibility information for particular
aircraft models, refer to Appendix K.
2.5.2.2 Standby Airspeed Indicator

The markings on the standby airspeed indicator must match those on the current airspeed indicator in the
aircraft. These ranges must match the Type Data (POH/AFM) for the specific aircraft being modified.
The standby airspeed indicator must be one of the following:
1. A pneumatic airspeed indicator that is eligible for installation as the primary airspeed indicator.
2. A pneumatic airspeed indicator listed in Appendix Section E.8. Not all aircraft models are eligible
to use the indicators listed in Appendix Section E.8. For eligibility information for particular
aircraft models, refer to the cautions in Section 2.5.2 and model-specific information in
Appendix K.
3. An electric airspeed indicator listed in Appendix Section E.1. Not all aircraft models are eligible to
use an electric airspeed indicator as a standby instrument. For eligibility information for particular
2.5.2.3 Standby Altimeter

The units on the standby altimeter (i.e., "Hg or millibars) must match those on the current altimeter in the
aircraft.
The standby altimeter must be one of the following:
1. A pneumatic altimeter that is eligible for installation as the primary altimeter.
2. A pneumatic altimeter listed in Appendix E.8. Not all aircraft models are eligible to use the
altimeters listed in Appendix Section E.8. For eligibility information for particular aircraft models,
refer to the cautions in Section 2.5.2 and model-specific information in Appendix K.
3. An electric altimeter listed in Appendix Section E.1. Not all aircraft models are eligible to use an
electric airspeed indicator as a standby instrument. For eligibility information for particular

Rev. V Page 2-19
2.5.2.4 Electronic Integrated Standby Instrument System
Installers wishing to use an electronic standby indicator in lieu of the standby instruments approved by this
STC must obtain separate airworthiness approval and ensure compatibility with the G500/G600 system. To
assist with this determination, this manual identifies those electronic standby indicator installations that
Garmin has already determined are compatible with the G500/G600 when installed under specific
conditions. For a list of electronic standby indicators considered by Garmin to be compatible, refer to
Appendix Section E.1. The conditions under which these electronic standby indicators must be installed in
order to be compatible are identified throughout this manual.
NOTE
If the G5 Electronic Instrument is installed as a standby indicator for the G500/G600
system, it must be installed in accordance with the G5 AML STC SA01818WI with the
following exceptions per this STC:
• The G5 must be installed with a backup battery pack
• The G5 must be configured as an attitude indicator and display attitude, altitude, and airspeed
• The G5 must be located as specified in Section 2.5.11.2
• The requirement of the G5 STC to retain the analog airspeed indicator, altimeter, vertical
speed indicator, and rate-of-turn indicator is satisfied by the GDU 620, and the analog
indicators may be removed
2.5.2.5 Standby Heading

The existing (i.e., non-stabilized magnetic) standby compass must be retained.
2.5.3 Placards and Labels

All placards and labels should be readable in all lighting conditions. Ambient flood lighting is acceptable.

Rev. V Page 2-20
2.5.3.1 New Labels
New circuit breakers and switches installed for the G500/G600 system must be labeled as shown in the
applicable interconnect drawing in Appendix F. These labels are summarized in Table 2-10.
Table 2-10 G500/G600 Circuit Breaker and Switch Labels
Label
LRU/Item Description Single G500/G600 Dual G500/G600
Installation Installation
CB GDU 620 Display PFD [1] PFD 1/PFD 2 [1]
CB GRS 77 AHRS, if installed AHRS [1] AHRS 1/AHRS 2 [1]
CB GDC 74( ) ADC, if installed ADC [1] ADC 1/ADC 2 [1]
ADAHRS 1/ADAHRS 2
CB GSU 75(B) ADAHRS ADAHRS [1]
[1]
Electric Standby Attitude
CB Indicator, if installed STBY ATT [1] [2] STBY ATT [1] [2]
GAD 43/43e Circuit Breaker, if

CB GAD [1] GAD [1]
installed
AP HDG DATUM AP HDG DATUM

Switch GPSS Select, if installed position 1: HDG position 1: HDG
position 2: GPSS position 2: GPSS
PFD 1 AIR DATA
Air Data Source Select, if
Switch position 1: ADC 1 (green) N/A
installed
position 2: ADC 2 (amber)
Notes:
[1] LRUs that receive power from two circuit breaker sources should be separately labeled
with an “A” and “B” suffix (e.g., PFD 1A and PFD 1B or GAD A and GAD B).
[2] Existing installations can use STBY ADI; however, new installations should use STBY
ATT.
2.5.3.2 Existing Placards

If an existing placard must be relocated because of the installation of the GDU 620, the new placard must
meet the requirements below:
1. The font size of the new placard is the same as the old placard that it is replacing.
2. The color of the new placard is identical to the color of the placard that it is replacing.
3. The text on the new placard is identical to the text on the placard that it is replacing (it can be
arranged differently as required by space constraints, but the wording must be the same).
4. The new placard must be readable in all lighting conditions.

Rev. V Page 2-21
2.5.3.3 VFR Placards
If the installation of the G500/G600 is limited to VFR operation only, the installation must be placarded as
follows:
1. If the aircraft is already limited to VFR operation prior to installation of the G500/G600, no
additional placard is required.
2. If the aircraft is not limited to VFR operation prior to installation of the G500/G600, and if the
particular aircraft model is limited to VFR operation with the G500/G600 in accordance with
Appendix K, the installation must be placarded with “AIRCRAFT LIMITED TO VFR.”
3. If the G500/G600 is installed for VFR-only operation in accordance with Section 2.5.22, the
installation must be placarded with “AIRCRAFT LIMITED TO VFR.”
If a placard must be installed to limit the aircraft to VFR operations only, it must meet the following
requirements:
1. The text on the placard must be: “AIRCRAFT LIMITED TO VFR.”
2. The font size must be a minimum of 0.25 inches high (minimum 18 point font).
3. The color of the new placard must contrast with the instrument panel so that it is easily readable.
4. The placard must be located on the pilot side instrument panel in plain view near the GDU 620.
2.5.3.4 New Placards

In addition to labels, some installations will require new placards. To determine placard requirements, refer
to Appendix E.
2.5.3.4.1 KFC 275/325 Placard

If the installation of the G500/G600 installation interfaces to a KFC 275 or KFC 325, and requires a
“DISENGAGE SOFT RIDE DURING ALTITUDE CAPTURE (ALTC)” placard (refer to
Appendix Section E.4 to determine whether or not this placard is required), the installation must be
placarded as follows:
1. The text on the placard must be: “DISENGAGE SOFT RIDE DURING ALTITUDE CAPTURE
(ALTC).”
2. The font size must be a minimum of 0.17 inches high (minimum 12 point font).
3. The color of the new placard must contrast with the instrument panel so that it is easily readable.
4. The placard must be located on the pilot side near the autopilot mode controller.

Rev. V Page 2-22
2.5.4 Power Distribution
NOTE
Aircraft modified in accordance with revision J or earlier of this manual can have both the
primary and secondary systems connected to the same power source.
NOTE
G600 System Only: For the Pilatus PC-12 only, it is acceptable to connect G600 System
#1 to Avionics Bus #1 and Avionics Bus #2.
Circuit protection devices for the G500/G600 LRUs must be push-pull manually resettable circuit breakers
MS26574-5, MS22073-5, or other trip-free, push-pull circuit breaker type as specified in the aircraft parts
catalog.
For a single G500/G600 installation, the GDU 620, AHRS, and ADC must be connected to an electrical
bus that has the following characteristics:
• The bus receives power when the battery or batteries are switched on
• The bus receives power from one or more generators/alternators when operating
• The bus is not automatically shed with the loss of a generator/alternator
For a dual G500/G600 installation, the primary system (GDU 620 #1, AHRS #1, and ADC #1) must be
connected as described for a single G500/G600 installation. The secondary system (GDU 620 #2,
AHRS #2, and ADC #2) must be connected to a power source independent of the power source used by the
primary system, if one is available.
Electric standby attitude indicators with a dedicated/integrated battery (e.g., Mid-Continent 4300-4XX,
MD420, L-3 ESI-2000, or Garmin G5) should be connected to a different bus that meets the three criteria
above. If no such bus exists, it may be connected to the same bus as the required G500/G600 equipment.
An electric or electronic standby indicator without a dedicated/integrated battery (e.g., L-3
Communications ESI-1000) may be used if the following criteria are met:
• Must be connected to a power source independent of the #1 G500/G600 power source(s)
• Power source must provide a minimum of 30 minutes of operation for the required standby
instruments in the event of a total failure of all #1 G500/G600 power sources
• Independent power source includes a means to ensure its availability before flight. For example,
through an approved Airplane Flight Manual pre-flight test procedure and/or Instructions for
Continued Airworthiness
Examples of standby indicator power sources that are independent are:
• A battery that meets the criteria above
• A multi-engine aircraft power bus that is independent of the #1 G500/G600 power source(s). The
bus must be powered by a different engine and battery than the #1 G500/G600 power source(s).
The installation and/or approval of an independent power source is outside the scope of this STC.
In all single and dual installations, the optional GAD 43/43e Adapter should be connected to the same bus
as the autopilot.
The #1 and #2 G500/G600 systems should not share any circuit breakers or ground returns. The standby
instruments must not share any circuit breakers or ground returns with either G500/G600 system.

Rev. V Page 2-23
2.5.5 Pitot-Static Plumbing
The primary (#1) ADC must be installed on the pitot/static connections that are connected to the previously
installed pilot's instruments. If this static source had an alternate static source selector switch, it must be
retained.
For aircraft equipped with a dual pitot-static system, and with a GTOW greater than 6,000 lbs, the standby
instruments must be installed on the pitot-static system that is independent from the pilot’s instruments.
For aircraft equipped with a dual pitot-static system, and with a GTOW less than 6,000 lbs, the standby
instruments should be installed on the pitot-static system that is independent from the pilot’s instruments.
If no second pitot-static system is available, then it is acceptable to install the standby instruments on the
same pitot-static source as the pilot's instruments.
For aircraft equipped with a dual pitot-static system, the ADC associated with the optional second
G500/G600 system must be installed on the pitot-static system that is independent from the pilot’s
instruments. If no second pitot-static system is available, then it is acceptable to install the secondary (#2)
ADC on the same pitot-static source as the pilot's instruments.
NOTE
It is acceptable for aircraft previously modified in accordance with earlier revisions of this
installation manual to have the standby instruments attached to the pilot’s pitot-static
system. All new installations must be installed as described above.
2.5.6 External Annunciators

The GDU 620 provides all of the necessary external annunciations for the GNS 400W/500W series units,
the GNS 480, and the GTN 6XX/7XX, eliminating the need for an external annunciator panel. For TAWS
considerations, refer to Section 2.5.8.7.
2.5.7 External CDIs

The GDU 620 PFD is capable of displaying the lateral and vertical deviation from the GPS source(s) and
navigation receiver(s) in the aircraft. Based on the G500/G600 System Safety Assessment, the G500/G600
system can be used as the sole display for all CDI information for all aircraft on the STC AML, allowing
the existing CDIs to be removed.
It is not recommended to use external CDIs in conjunction with the G500/G600 system. If it is desired to
utilize one or more external CDIs, the CDI(s) can only be used to display VOR/ILS information. These
must be installed as specified below.
NOTE
The Garmin G5 electronic standby indicator can be slaved to the GDU CDI selection and
display the same course deviations as the GDU. The G5 Navigation Configuration setting
Selected Course must be Disabled.
GNS 430W/530W
The VOR/ILS Indicator Output or VOR/LOC composite output (and ILS glideslope deviations/flags) from
P4006/P5006 must be used to drive an external CDI. Both VOR and ILS information will be available (a
resolver type indicator such as the Garmin GI 106A, or a composite indicator such as the Bendix/King KI
209, are supported).

Rev. V Page 2-24
GNS 480
The composite output from P7 must be used to drive an external CDI. Only VOR and Localizer
information can be displayed on the CDI. No vertical deviation information can be displayed (a VOR/LOC
composite indicator such as the Bendix/King KI 208 is supported).
SL30
The CDI (lateral) and glideslope (vertical) deviations and flags may be used to drive an external CDI. Both
VOR and ILS information will be available (a standard VOR/ILS indicator with resolver output, such as
the Mid-Continent MD200, is supported). Optionally, the composite output and glideslope deviations/flags
may be used to drive an external CDI. Both VOR and ILS information will be available (a VOR/ILS
composite indicator, such as the Bendix/King KI 209, is supported).
GTN 6XX/7XX
The VOR/ILS Indicator Output or VOR/LOC composite output (and ILS/glideslope deviations/flags) from
P1004 must be used to drive an external CDI. Both VOR and ILS information will be available (a resolver
type indicator, such as the Garmin GI 106A, or a composite indicator such as the Bendix/King KI 209, are
supported).
For associated limitations, refer to Section 7.
2.5.8 External Sensors

External serial data sources intended for use with the G500/G600 system should be checked for
compatibility before installation. The list of approved devices is located in Appendix E.
When the G500/G600 system is installed with external sensors, these sensors must be installed in
accordance with manufacturer's data. Installation of any external sensors not approved by this manual is
beyond the scope of this manual and STC.
2.5.8.1 GPS Navigator

Interfacing the GDU 620 to a GPS navigator is required for proper system operation. GPS information is
used by the GDU 620 for the moving map and forwarded to the AHRS. The GDU 620 supports interfacing
to two independent GPS navigators, although only one is required. For TAWS considerations, refer to
Section 2.5.8.7.
2.5.8.2 Navigation Receiver

Interfacing the GDU 620 to a navigation receiver allows VOR and ILS information to be displayed on the
PFD HSI. The GDU 620 supports interfacing to two independent navigation receivers.
2.5.8.3 Weather
2.5.8.3.1 SiriusXM® Data Link Weather
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a GDL 69 series unit allows SiriusXM weather data to be displayed on a
dedicated weather page or overlaid on the moving map.

Rev. V Page 2-25
2.5.8.3.2 Weather Radar
2.5.8.3.2.1 GWX 68/70(R) Weather Radar (GDU 620 Software v3.00 or Later)
NOTE
G500 Only: WXR Enablement Card (P/N 010-00769-57) is required to enable the display
of weather radar on the GDU 620.
Interfacing a GWX 68 or GWX 70(R) weather radar to a GDU 620 with software v3.00 to v6.21 will allow
control and display of the weather radar. In dual G500/G600 installations, only one GDU 620 can display
and control the GWX 68 or GWX 70(R). The advanced features of the GWX 70(R) are not supported.
Interfacing a GWX 68 or GWX 70(R) weather radar to a GDU 620 with software v7.00 and later provides
support for dual G500/G600 installations. GWX 70(R) advanced features are supported and an enablement
card is required for the advanced features. Refer to Table 2-2. In dual G500/G600 installations, both
GDU 620s can display and control the GWX 68 and GWX 70(R). The GWX 68 display and controls are
crossfilled (copied) to the other GDU 620. The GWX 70(R) display and controls are independent and
allow different weather radar sweeps for each display.
2.5.8.3.2.2 GWX 75 Weather Radar (GDU 620 Software v7.40 or later)
NOTE
G500 Only: WXR Enablement Card (P/N 010-00769-57) is required to enable the display
of weather radar on the GDU 620.
Interfacing a GWX 75 weather radar to a GDU 620 with software v7.40 or later provides support for dual
G500/G600 installations. GWX 75 advanced features are supported and an enablement card is required for
the advanced features. Refer to Table 2-2. In dual G500/G600 installations, both GDU 620s can display
and control the GWX 75. The GWX 75 display and controls are independent and allow different weather
radar sweeps for each display.
2.5.8.3.3 Weather over Iridium® Satellite Network (GDU 620 Software v5.00 or Later)
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver allows Garmin Flight Data Services (GFDS)
weather data to be displayed on a dedicated weather page or overlaid on the moving map. Both SiriusXM
and GFDS weather can be installed in a single installation.
2.5.8.3.4 ARINC 708 Weather Radar (GDU 620 Software Version 5.00 or Later)
Interfacing the GDU 620 to an ARINC 708 weather radar system will allow control and display of the
weather radar information using the GDU 620. In dual G500/G600 installations, both GDU 620 #1 and #2
support the display and control of the weather radar. This STC requires that the GDU 620 (#1 or #2) is the
only display type connected to the weather radar. If there are displays in addition to the GDU 620
connected to the ARINC 708 weather radar, these interfaces are beyond the scope of this STC.

Rev. V Page 2-26
2.5.8.4 Traffic
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a TIS/TAS/TCAS I traffic system allows traffic data to be displayed on a
dedicated traffic page or overlaid on the moving map. The GDU 620 can be configured to provide display
of traffic data only or display and control of the traffic system.
NOTE
If the original installation has the traffic system configured to use a heading source other
than ARINC 429 (e.g., synchro), the traffic system must be rewired and reconfigured to use
ARINC 429 heading from the G500/G600 system. Alternately, the GAD 43/43e may be
utilized to provide synchro heading.
NOTE
If the original installation has the traffic system configured to use an altitude source other
than ARINC 429 (e.g., Gray code), the traffic system must be rewired and reconfigured to
use ARINC 429 altitude from the G500/G600 system.
NOTE
Only one traffic sensor may be interfaced to the GDU 620. For dual G500/G600
installations, the GDU 620s cannot be connected each to a separate traffic sensor.
2.5.8.5 ADF
Interfacing the GDU 620 to an ADF receiver allows ADF bearing information to be displayed on a bearing
pointer on the PFD HSI and allows the existing ADF indicator to be removed. The GDU 620 only accepts
DC Sine/Cosine inputs from an ADF. The GAD 43e only accepts synchro (ARINC 407) input from an
ADF. The GDU 620/GAD 43e will not control the ADF receiver.
2.5.8.6 Stormscope® (GDU 620 Software v7.00 or Later)
NOTE
If the original installation has the Stormscope system configured to use a heading source
other than serial, the Stormscope system must be rewired and reconfigured to use RS-232
heading from the G500/G600 system.
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a Stormscope system will allow Stormscope information to be displayed on the
GDU 620. The GDU 620 can be configured to provide display of Stormscope data only, or display and
control of the Stormscope system. If dual GDU 620s are installed, both can provide display of Stormscope
data, but only the primary GDU can control the Stormscope system.

Rev. V Page 2-27
2.5.8.7 External Terrain Alerting/TAWS
Only one Terrain Alerting or TAWS that generates aural and visual annunciations may be installed in the
aircraft. If the aircraft has a TAWS installed, and SVT is enabled on the G500/G600, the GDU 620 must be
configured as shown in Section 5.5.7.2 to prevent conflicting aural and visual annunciations.Table 2-11
describes combinations of external Terrain Alerting/TAWS sources, G500/G600 settings, and the resulting
alert sources.
The GDU 620 also provides all of the required TAWS annunciations for the 500W TAWS series units and
eliminates the need for a TAWS annunciator panel, provided that the 500W TAWS series unit is connected
to the GDU 620 as GPS 1.
Table 2-11 External Terrain Alerting/TAWS Source with G500/G600

Aircraft Setup Alert Sources
PFD SVT
MFD Map MFD LRU
Ext. TAWS G500/G600 G500/G600 Terrain
PFD Annun. Impact Xs Terrain Producing
Systems Display Configuration and
Text and Pop- Proximity Aural
Installed Setting Settings Obstacle
up Alert Shading Callout
Shading
Non- EXT TAWS = Non-

Terrain
Garmin INSTALLED None None G500/G600 Garmin
Proximity
TAWS (OTHER) TAWS
Non- EXT TAWS = Non-

Garmin SVT INSTALLED None None [4] None [4] G500/G600 Garmin
TAWS (OTHER) TAWS
Terrain GNS or
GNS EXT TAWS = GNS or GTN
Proximity None G500/G600 GTN
TAWS (GARMIN) TAWS
[1] TAWS
GNS or
GNS SVT EXT TAWS = GNS or GTN
None [4] None [4] G500/G600 GTN
TAWS [2] (GARMIN) TAWS
TAWS
GTN GTN GTN

Terrain Terrain EXT TAWS = Terrain Terrain
GTN Terrain
Alerting/ Proximity INSTALLED Alerting/ G500/G600 Alerting/
Alerting/TAWS
[1] [3] [5] (HSDB)
TAWS TAWS TAWS
GTN GTN GTN GTN

Terrain EXT TAWS = Terrain Terrain Terrain
SVT GTN Terrain
Alerting/ INSTALLED Alerting/ Alerting/ G500/G600 Alerting/
[2] [3] [5] Alerting/TAWS
(HSDB)
TAWS TAWS TAWS TAWS
Notes:
[1] If the GNS TAWS or GTN Terrain Alerting/TAWS becomes unavailable, the GDU 620 will
revert to the Terrain Proximity feature and the PFD will annunciate “TER N/A.”
[2] If SVT is on and the GNS TAWS or GTN Terrain Alerting/TAWS becomes unavailable, the
display will revert to SVT and an advisory message will indicate that internal alerting is
enabled.
[3] GTN software v5.13 and GDU 620 software v7.00 or later is required for the HSDB
configuration.
[4] SVT function removed in GDU 620 software v7.00 to prevent conflicting TAWS alerts.
[5] GTN 6XX/7XX software v6.50 or later and GDU 620 software v7.30 or later is required for
the GDU 620 to receive/display the GTN’s Terrain Alerting data.

Rev. V Page 2-28
2.5.8.8 Video (GDU 620 Software v5.00 or Later)
Interfacing the GDU 620 to an external video source allows a color or monochrome video image to be
displayed (with optional full screen display of the video) on the MFD. The GDU 620 has two video inputs,
which accept color (NTSC and PAL) or monochrome (RS-170) composite video signals. The GDU 620
does not provide control of the video source, but it does provide adjustments for brightness, contrast, and
saturation.
2.5.8.9 Iridium Satellite Support (GDU 620 Software v5.00 or Later)

Interfacing the GDU 620 to a GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver provides the following functions using the
Iridium satellite network:
1. Receive and display GFDS weather information.
2. Send position information to the GSR 56 for position reporting.
3. Control the GSR 56 for sending and receiving satellite phone calls.
The features can be enabled or disabled individually.
2.5.8.10 Radar Altimeter (GDU 620 Software v5.00 or Later)

Interfacing the GDU 620 to a radar altimeter system allows radar altitude to be displayed on the PFD. The
GDU 620 can be configured to display radar altitude data only or display radar altitude data and allow self-
test initiation of the radar altimeter system. The GDU 620 generates an aural “Minimums, minimums”
when the pilot sets minimums on approach.
When the optional GAD 43e Adapter is installed (GDU 620 software v6.11 or later required), interfacing
to an analog radar altimeter is supported. If self-test initiation is desired, this must be wired to a discrete
output from the GDU 620.
2.5.9 Autopilot/Flight Director Interface

The G500/G600 is designed to interface with a wide variety of autopilots. Compatibility of the autopilot
system with the G500/G600 system must be verified before installation. The list of tested and supported
autopilots is located in Appendix Section E.3, and the list of supported flight directors is located in
Appendix Section E.4. These sections also contain information specific to each autopilot that must be
considered prior to undertaking a G500/G600 installation. When the G500/G600 system is interfaced to an
autopilot, the autopilot must be installed in accordance with manufacturer's data. Installation of the
autopilot system is beyond the scope of this manual and STC.
The G500/G600 (GDU 620) can provide AC or DC heading and course datum (error) outputs based on the
setting of the heading bug and course pointer on the HSI. When enabled, the GDU 620 can drive the
heading datum output based upon GPS steering (GPSS) information from the selected navigator, acting
like a roll steering converter. Refer to Section 2.5.16. The GDU 620 will provide analog deviation,
associated flags, and ARINC 429 GPS information based on the navigation source currently selected on
the HSI. The GDU 620 also provides ARINC 429 attitude and navigation data to compatible autopilots
listed in Appendix Section E.3 (GDU 620 software v5.02 or later).
The optional GAD 43/43e Adapter can provide analog attitude information to attitude-based autopilots,
allowing existing gyros to be removed and replaced by the G500/G600. The GAD 43/43e Adapter can also
provide yaw rate, heading, and barometric correction to various autopilots. Table 2-12 is for reference only.

Rev. V Page 2-29
Table 2-12 Autopilot Interfaces
GPSS HDG Flight Gyro ALT
Manufacturer Model GDU 620 HSI Native GPSS VS Control Mode Ann.
Emulation Director (GAD/A429) Preselect
M4C X X
Bendix
M4D X X X
II / III X X
IV X X X
Century 21 / 31 X X X
41 X X X X
2000 X X X X
400B X X X
300 / 400 / 800
X X
IFCS
Cessna
300B / 400B /
X X X X X
800B IFCS
1000A IFCS X X X X X
APS-65 X X X X X
Collins
AP-106/107 X X X
GFC 500 X X X X X X
Garmin
GFC 600 X X X X X X

Rev. V Page 2-30
GPSS HDG Flight Gyro ALT
Manufacturer Model GDU 620 HSI Native GPSS VS Control Mode Ann.
Emulation Director (GAD/A429) Preselect
KAP 150 X X X X X Partial

KFC 150 X X X X X X Partial
KAP 100 X X X
KAP 200 X X X
Honeywell KFC 200 /250 X X X X X

(Bendix/King) KAP 140 X X
KFC 225 X X X X X X
KFC 275 X X X X X X X X
KFC 300 X X X X
KFC 325 X X X X X X X X
Sperry SPZ-200A/500 X X X
20/30/40/50/
X X
60-1
60-2 / 65 X X X X X
S-TEC 60 PSS X X X
55X X X X X X X
55 X X X X X
1500 / 2100 X X X X X

Rev. V Page 2-31
2.5.9.1 Autopilot ADIs and Gyros
For attitude-based autopilots, an existing ADI or remote gyro is used to provide attitude information to the
autopilot. In some cases, these ADIs or gyros may be replaced with the GAD 43/43e (refer to
Section 2.5.9.5 for additional information). If the ADI must be retained, it can be used as a standby
instrument and be relocated to an approved location for the standby instruments (refer to Section 2.5.11.2).
Alternately, this ADI may be relocated to the co-pilot’s side. If the ADI is relocated to the co-pilot’s side,
and it is desired to display flight director information on it, this ADI must be installed in the approved
location for the co-pilot ADI (refer to Section 2.5.11.8). If the ADI used by the autopilot is an electric-
driven gyro, the electric ADI must be relocated to the co-pilot’s side and a suitable unit installed as a
standby on the pilot’s side. Any gyros that are required for proper operation of the ADI (e.g., for a KCI 310
ADI) must also be retained. If the GAD 43/43e is not installed, remote gyros, such as the KVG 350, must
be retained in order for the autopilot to function properly.
2.5.9.2 Autopilot Turn Coordinators

Instrument panel-mounted turn coordinators that interface with the existing autopilot on the aircraft will
have to be retained and might have to be relocated. Due to space constraints, it may be necessary to blind
mount the turn coordinator. Remote-mounting the turn coordinator is beyond the scope of the STC and will
require an alternate approval. The relocated turn coordinator must be installed in accordance with its
installation manual for panel incline and other applicable requirements.
2.5.9.3 Altitude Pre-selector and Remote Annunciators

The G500/G600 can provide the Altitude Pre-selector function to an autopilot (for interface requirements
and autopilot models approved for this function, refer to Appendix Section E.3). If the G500/G600 is
configured to provide the Altitude Pre-selector functions, the original Altitude Pre-selector must be
removed. Autopilots that use Altitude Pre-selectors that also function as a remote annunciator for the
autopilot are not supported in the G500/G600 AML STC. Unless fully supported by the G500/G600,
remote annunciators must not be removed. If relocated, it must meet manufacturer requirements for
installation.
2.5.9.4 ADIs with Integral Flight Director Presentation

In some cases, an ADI that must be retained to provide attitude information to the autopilot has an integral
flight director presentation (e.g., the KI 256 ADI). If this ADI is used as a standby instrument for the
G500/G600, the flight director presentation must be disabled. If this ADI is relocated to the co-pilot's side,
the flight director presentation may be kept in the enabled state provided that the location requirements in
Section 2.5.11.8 are met.

Rev. V Page 2-32
2.5.9.5 GAD 43/43e Adapter
The GAD 43/43e Adapter is an optional interface adapter for the G500/G600 Integrated Flight Deck. It
allows existing ADIs/gyros that are required for autopilot operation to be replaced as part of the
G500/G600 installation. The GAD 43/43e interfaces with the GDU 620 display for configuration and
alerting and with the AHRS for attitude, heading, and yaw rate information. The GAD 43/43e provides the
following information in analog format for use with suitable third-party autopilot systems:
1. Pitch and roll for the autopilot (synchro).
2. Pitch and roll for weather radar stabilization (50 and 200 mV/degree).
3. Heading (synchro).
4. Yaw rate (100, 200, 333 and 600 mV/degree/sec) or barometric correction (KEA 130/130A/346
compatible).
NOTE
Installation of the GAD 43/43e Adapter allows the existing attitude source for the
autopilot to be replaced without altering the autopilot performance. Prior to starting the
G500/G600/GAD 43/43e installation, it is highly recommended that a flight test be
conducted to baseline the autopilot performance and ensure that the system is operating
as designed. This flight test is repeated after completion of the aircraft modification to
validate that the GAD 43/43e attitude source operates identical to the original mechanical
gyro. For additional details, refer to Section 5.10.2.5.
In Configuration mode, the GAD 43/43e also allows the installer to set the analog attitude and heading
outputs to specific values without the need for removing any gyros and using a tilt table.
2.5.9.5.1 Analog Baro-Correction for Honeywell Autopilots

The GAD 43/43e provides an analog baro-correction output that emulates the baro-correction output from
the Honeywell KEA 130/130A and KEA 346 (P/N 006-0362-0008 through -0011 only) encoding
altimeters. It is recommended that the GAD 43/43e be used to provide the baro-correction input in lieu of
the encoding altimeter. This ensures that altitude captures will be made relative to the altitude used by the
G500/G600 system, rather than the altitude on the encoding altimeter.
NOTE
If removing the encoding altimeter, a suitable blind encoder must be installed to provide
uncorrected Gray code altitude to the autopilot (and any other LRUs using Gray code
altitude).
2.5.9.5.2 GAD 43e Only Functionality

In addition to the interfaces provided by the GAD 43, the GAD 43e also provides Altitude Pre-select and
vertical speed control when interfaced to suitable autopilots. For a listing of approved autopilots that
support this function, refer to Appendix Section E.20.

Rev. V Page 2-33
2.5.10 Part 121/Part 135 Considerations
For certain aircraft operated under Part 121 or Part 135, a third attitude source is required in addition to
primary attitude sources at each pilot station. Aircraft requiring the third attitude source are described in
14 CFR § 121.2, 14 CFR § 135.2, and 14 CFR § 121.305(j). The G500/G600 standby attitude indicator
required by Section 2.5.2 may be used to meet this requirement, provided it also fulfills all requirements
listed in 14 CFR § 121.305(k).
Single-engine aircraft operated under Part 135 must have two independent electrical sources or a standby
battery or generator/alternator capable of supplying 150% of the electrical loads of all required instruments
and equipment necessary for safe emergency operations of the aircraft for 60 minutes in accordance with
135.163(f). For multi-engine aircraft operated under Part 135, the electrical load of all required instruments
and equipment necessary for emergency operations must not be greater than one-half of the total generated
power in accordance with 135.163(g). The definition of the electrical loads that are required instruments
and equipment necessary for safe emergency operations should be expanded to include the pilot’s
GDU 620, AHRS, ADC, and the electronic/electromechanical standby attitude indicator (if installed).
2.5.11 Mounting Considerations

2.5.11.1 GDU 620 Location and Mounting
The GDU 620 is designed to mount on the aircraft instrument panel in place of the existing primary
instruments. The location must be such that the GDU 620 is not blocked by the glare shield on top or by
the control yoke on the bottom.
The FAA has determined that the acceptable installation location for the GDU 620’s ADI shall not
dramatically differ from the location of the original type certificated ADI. Consequently, the GDU 620’s
ADI, when installed, must intersect the original Type Certificated ADI.
The GDU 620 ADI area is defined as the top section of the left screen (GDU 620 with left-hand PFD) or
the top section of the right screen (GDU 620 with right-hand PFD), as shown in Figure 2-1.
4.00 Inches
4.00 Inches
Ң Ң
Ң
Ң Ң Ң
Ң
ңҢ ңҢ ңҢҢ Ң
Ң 2.625 Inches ңҢ ңҢ
ңҢҢ
Ң 2.625 Inches Ң
Ң Ң
Ң Ң
ңҢ ңҢ ҟңҢ Ң
ҟңҢ ңҢ ңҢ
ҟ Ң
Ң Ң
ҟ Ң
Ң Ң
ң
ң
ң
ң
ң
ң
Ң
ң ң
Ң
Left-Hand PFD Version Right-Hand PFD Version

Figure 2-1 GDU 620 ADI Location

Rev. V Page 2-34
The original Type Certificated ADI area is defined as the area inside the outer perimeter of the instrument
bezel, as shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Original ADI Area
When installed, the ADI area of the GDU 620 must intersect the original Type Certificated ADI
installation location, as shown in the example in Figure 2-3.
20 2
40
10 1
30
CLOCK
10 10
VAC
060
6
3 E 2
N
12 1 20
GPS
3
3 1
5
200 40
FUEL QTY 03
180
S 1 60
W
42 12 2
160
80
140
120 100
CURRENT
TACHOMETER
LEFT-HAND PFD VERSION
20 20
40
10 10
30
CLOCK
10 10
VAC 060
E 6
3
12
1 N 20
GPS 3
200
15 40
FUEL QTY S
180
1 30 60
21
24 W 160
2
80
140
120 100
CURRENT
TACHOMETER
RIGHT-HAND PFD VERSION

Figure 2-3 GDU 620 ADI Location Requirement

Rev. V Page 2-35
Some installations of the GDU 620 will require the use of one of the optional GDU 620 trim plates. The
trim plates are manufactured plates that can be used for cosmetic appeasement or structural support. For
additional information on the use of the trim plate, refer to Section 3.2.1. Due to the extent of the
modifications required for some installations, it may be easier to replace the instrument panel entirely. For
a list of items to consider when deciding whether or not to replace the instrument panel, refer to
Section 2.5.11.3.
NOTE
The GDU 620 must be electrically bonded to the instrument panel. If a trim plate is
utilized in the installation, it must be installed such that it will permit the GDU 620 to be
electrically bonded to the instrument panel. When measured from the rear aluminum
chassis of the GDU 620 to the instrument panel, the resistance must be 20 mΩ or less. For
additional information about equipment bonding, refer to Section 2.5.20.
NOTE
Certain Cessna, Hawker Beechcraft, and American Champion Aircraft models may
require that the instrument panel be replaced in order to provide sufficient space in the
instrument panel for the GDU 620. Replacement of the instrument panels in these aircraft
is not covered under this AML STC. For additional information, refer to Section 2.5.11.3.
2.5.11.2 Standby Instrument Location

This STC authorizes:
• Existing primary flight instruments to be moved to the standby location specified in Figure 2-4 or
Figure 2-6
• New or existing flight instruments to be installed in the standby location specified in Figure 2-4 or
Figure 2-6 using the instrument manufacturer’s installation data
The acceptable location of standby instruments is directly adjacent to the GDU 620 (to the right, left,
below, diagonal, or above). In cases in which the instrument panel is stepped, 3 1/8-inch standby
instruments may be located on the stepped part of the instrument panel, as long as there are no instruments
located in-between the GDU 620 and the standby instrument. Standby instruments must be located entirely
within the area defined in Section 2.5.11.2.1, Section 2.5.11.2.2, or Section 2.5.11.2.4.
If the individual standby instruments are arranged vertically, the preferred order is:
1. Attitude Indicator (top).
2. Airspeed Indicator.
3. Altimeter (bottom).
If it is not possible to place the attitude indicator on top due to space constraints, an alternate arrangement
for vertically arranged individual instruments is:
1. Airspeed Indicator (top).
2. Attitude Indicator.
3. Altimeter (bottom).
If the individual standby instruments are arranged horizontally, the preferred order is:
1. Airspeed Indicator (left).
2. Attitude Indicator.
3. Altimeter (right).

Rev. V Page 2-36
If it is not possible to arrange the standby instruments vertically or horizontally, as described above, any
order for standby instruments is acceptable, provided they are located entirely within the specified area.
In most cases, the previously certified ADI/attitude indicator, airspeed indicator, and altimeter can be used
as standby instruments and moved to the standby location specified in this section. These instruments can
be installed in pre-existing mounting locations for instruments that are no longer required because their
functions are replaced by the G500/G600 system (e.g., VORs, CDIs, ADF bearing pointers, and RMIs). If
the previously certified ADI/attitude indicator is electric-powered, it may need to be replaced with a
suitable attitude indicator. To determine which type of attitude indicators can be installed in a particular
aircraft, refer to Appendix K. If eligible to install an electric standby instrument, refer to
Appendix Section E.1 for a list of suitable electric instruments. All pneumatic ADIs and attitude indicators
are acceptable for standby instruments and do not require replacement. All flight instruments to be
installed in the standby location specified in this section must use the instrument manufacturer’s
installation data for electrical/mechanical installation.
In some installations, it may be desirable to locate one or more standby instruments in the bolster
immediately below the instrument panel. For more information, refer to Appendix Section H.2.
In some installations, it may be desirable to use an electronic standby indicator. If a compatible electronic
standby indicator is installed (refer to Appendix Section E.1 for additional information), the electronic
standby indicator display must be located in accordance with the applicable installation guidance and this
section. Installation approval of the electronic standby is outside the scope of this STC and must be
obtained by other means.
2.5.11.2.1 Acceptable Area for 3 1/8-inch Standby Instruments

If all three standby instruments are 3 1/8-inch, the instruments must be located entirely within the area
outlined in Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-4 Acceptable Installation Area for 3 1/8-inch Standby Instruments

Rev. V Page 2-37
INSTRUMENT PANEL
FORWARD
GDU 620
STEPPED PANEL
6.0" 1.
SIDE
VIEW
STANDBY
INSTRUMENT
NOTES:
1. ONLY 3.125" STANDBY INSTRUMENTS MAY BE MOUNTED
ON STEPPED PORTION OF INSTRUMENT PANEL.
Figure 2-5 Side View Stepped Panel for 3 1/8-inch Standby Instruments
2.5.11.2.2 Acceptable Area for 2 1/4-inch Standby Instruments

If all three standby instruments are 2 1/4-inch, the instruments must be located entirely within the area
outlined in Figure 2-6.
3"
4"
200
4"
40
180
60
160
80
140
120 100
ACCEPTABLE AREA FOR LOCATION OF STANDBY

INSTRUMENTS – STANDBY INSTRUMENTS MUST BE
CONTAINED ENTIRELY IN THIS AREA.
4" 4"
4"
Figure 2-6 Acceptable Installation Area for 2 1/4-Inch Standby Instruments

Rev. V Page 2-38
2.5.11.2.3 Utilizing Both 2 1/4-inch and 3 1/8-inch Standby Instruments
In some installations, it may be desired to use 3 1/8-inch standby instruments, but there is insufficient
space to accommodate such an arrangement. Consequently, some 2 1/4-inch instruments may be used. If
both 2 1/4-inch and 3 1/8-inch standby instruments are used, the instruments must be located entirely
within the area outlined in Figure 2-7.
ACCEPTABLE AREA FOR

LOCATION OF STANDBY
INSTRUMENTS - STANDBY
INSTRUMENTS MUST BE
CONTAINED ENTIRELY IN
THIS AREA
Figure 2-7 Acceptable Installation Area for Mixed Standby Instruments
2.5.11.2.4 Mid-Continent Instruments Standby ADI

2.5.11.2.4.1 Electromechanical ADI
NOTE
Not all aircraft models are eligible to use an electromechanical or electric attitude
indicator as a standby instrument. For eligibility information for particular aircraft
models, refer to Appendix K.
The model 4300-4( ) (3 1/8-inch) and 4200-( ) (2 1/4-inch) are currently the only electromechanical
standby attitude indicators that may be installed as standby attitude instruments under the G500/G600
AML STC; all non-electric attitude indicators are acceptable and do not need to be replaced. The 4300-4( )
with the internal backup battery and the 4200-( ) with the required remote-mounted MD420-Emergency
Power Supply have the ability to continue to operate in excess of 30 minutes (in accordance with
FAR 23.1353(h)) in the event aircraft electrical power is lost and have been tested to meet the reliability
and environmental conditions required by the G500/G600 AML STC.
NOTE
The Mid-Continent model 4200-( ) (2 1/4-inch) ADI requires the use of the MD420
Emergency Power System, which must be mounted separately. If the Mid-Continent
4200-( ) 2 1/4-inch attitude indicator is used in a nonmetallic aircraft, the associated
remote MD420 Emergency Power System must be mounted within the instrument panel
area. This constraint does not apply to metal aircraft.

Rev. V Page 2-39
NOTE
If the Mid-Continent 4200-( ) 2 1/4-inch attitude indicator is used in a pressurized
aircraft, the associated remote MD420 Emergency Power System must be mounted in a
pressurized area.
2.5.11.2.4.2 2¼-Inch Instruments

For approved model numbers, refer to Appendix E. Contact Mid-Continent Instruments for ordering
instructions to obtain an airspeed indicator with markings applicable to the aircraft and packages that
include the altimeter and airspeed indicator.
2.5.11.2.4.3 Mid-Continent Contact Information

For ordering information contact:
Mid-Continent Instrument Co., Inc
9400 E 34th Street N
Wichita, KS 67226 USA
Phone: 316-630-0101 Fax: 316-630-0723
www.mcico.com
This information is current at the time of publication.
2.5.11.3 New Instrument Panel Considerations
NOTE
The STCs referenced in the subsequent sections are not the only acceptable means of
replacing the instrument panel in the Cessna, Hawker Beechcraft, and American
Champion Aircraft models specified below. Other means of acquiring airworthiness
approval may be used.
NOTE
Unless otherwise specified, new instrument panels may be manufactured for any aircraft
on the AML. These panels shall not be part of the primary structure of the aircraft.
Some installations may require deviations from the original layout that will result in a substantial amount
of panel modifications. For example, moving the standby instruments by one-half inches in any direction
would require modification of the original cutouts, and therefore modification of the original panel may
not be practical. In such cases, a new blank instrument panel may be the preferred option.
A new panel, whether newly manufactured or purchased from the aircraft manufacturer, must comply with
the following requirements:
1. Material must be the same thickness and type as the original instrument panel (with a minimum
thickness of 0.063 inches).
2. Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets, etc.,) appropriate to the material thickness and
hardness type. Refer to AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 4, Section 4 Metal Repair Procedures.
3. New panel will be protected from corrosion in accordance with aircraft manufacturer standard
practices or maintenance instructions.

Rev. V Page 2-40
4. The original mounting locations, shape, form, and/or bends shall not be modified from the original
design.
5. Bends in the material must not exceed to the minimum bend radius specification of the material
used.
6. OEM processes may allow for tighter bends (e.g., a soft material is formed then heat treated to
increase hardness).
7. Panels shall not be combined (i.e., an original two-piece panel cannot be combined to create a
single-piece panel). Likewise, panels shall not be split (e.g., creating a two-piece panel from a
single-piece panel).
NOTE
Instrument panels are often more than a single piece of aluminum. They are an assembly
with other brackets and components permanently or semi-permanently attached to the
main panel. For example, angles may have been riveted to create attach points for other
pieces of equipment (such as the radio rack) or they may be used to resist bending of the
panel due to weight and center of gravity of the instruments. Brackets or channels may
exist to create additional attach points to the aircraft. The new instrument panel must not
alter the design of the instrument panel assembly features from the original design. These
features must be duplicated in the new panel structure.
NOTE
The only intended differences between the new instrument panel assembly and the old are
the cutout for the GDU 620 display unit and the location of the standby instruments. Every
other feature of the panel, including aspects of the structure invisible to the pilot, must be
duplicated. Modification of the instrument panel that will not comply with these
requirements is not approved under this STC.
The GDU 620 must intersect the original certified ADI as specified in the GDU 620 location and mounting
(refer to Section 2.5.11.1). Since there is some freedom on the position of the GDU 620 in such a case, it is
preferred to have the GDU 620 PFD as close to top center as possible without compromising the area
required for the standby instruments or other indicators. Also, review the requirements for the standby
instruments prior to finalizing their location. Whenever manufacturing a new panel, verify that all
requirements in the following sections are met to ensure proper installation.
• GDU 620 location (Section 2.5.11.1)
• Standby instrument location (Section 2.5.11.2)
When fabricating a new instrument panel, movement or consolidation of additional instruments or engine
gauges may be needed in order to achieve the desired panel layout. However, this is beyond the scope of
the G500/G600 STC and will require additional aircraft manufacturer’s data or FAA approval.
When fabricating a new instrument panel, lighting for existing items that are retained must be considered.
However, this is beyond the scope of the G500/G600 STC and will require additional aircraft
manufacturer’s data or FAA approval.
Compound curves and tooled bends formed into the instrument panel may not be easily replicated in the
field. The installer should consider contacting the aircraft manufacturer for a panel blank or modifying the
existing panel with a flat plate overlay conforming to the guidelines of this installation manual. Any
overlay should be secured to the original panel as if it were a structural repair in accordance with
AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 4, Section 4.

Rev. V Page 2-41
2.5.11.3.1 Cessna Models
The following aircraft may require the control yoke to be modified and instrument panel to be replaced in
order to provide sufficient space in the instrument panel for the GDU 620. This STC does not provide
airworthiness approval for yoke or instrument panel replacement in the following aircraft. The STCs
referenced, or other means of approval, need to be used.
• Cessna 172M (refer to STC SA170CH)
• Cessna 180, 180A-180J (refer to STC SA00023SE)
• Cessna 185, 185A-185E, A185E (refer to STC SA00023SE)
• Cessna 182, 182A-182D (refer to STC SA1347GL)
Cessna F172/F172M
Installation of this STC on Cessna F172D/F172M aircraft requires a prerequisite modification of the yoke
installation similar to that defined in for the Cessna 172M in AML STC SA170CH. STC SA170CH does
not apply to the F172 series; however, the F172 series are similar to the 172 series listed with respect to
the areas requiring modification. Therefore, the design data contained in STC SA170CH may assist a
modifier in defining and obtaining airworthiness approval of the required prerequisite modifications. The
installer is responsible for obtaining additional airworthiness approval beyond that covered by this STC
and STC SA170CH. For similarity of Cessna 172 series and F172 series instrument panel and yoke
installations, refer to the Cessna IPC (P529-12-RAND-1600-1/75).
2.5.11.3.2 Hawker Beechcraft Models

The following aircraft may require the instrument panel to be replaced in order to provide sufficient space
in the instrument panel structural integrity for the GDU 620:
• Hawker Beechcraft 35, A35, B35, C35, D35, E35, F35, G35
• Hawker Beechcraft 35-33, 35-A33, 35-B33, 35-C33
Replacement of the instrument panels in these aircraft is not covered under this AML STC. D’Shannon
Aviation has an STC for a suitable modification. For more information, contact D’Shannon Aviation at:
D’Shannon Aviation
1309 County Road 134
Buffalo, MN 55313
Phone: (800) 291-7616 or (763) 559-5998
Email: support@d-shannon-aviation.com
2.5.11.3.3 American Champion Aircraft

The following aircraft may require the instrument panel to be replaced in order to provide sufficient space
in the instrument panel for the GDU 620:
• American Champion: 7ECA, 7GCAA, 7KCAB, 7GCBC (ACAC Drawing 7-1618)
• American Champion: 8GCBC, 8KCAB (ACAC Drawing 7-1618)
Replacement of the instrument panel in these aircraft is not covered under this AML STC. The drawings
referenced above are not the only acceptable means of fitting the GDU 620. Other means to obtain
airworthiness approval may be used. For more information, contact American Champion Aircraft Corp. at:
American Champion Aircraft Corp.
32032 Washington Ave.
Rochester, WI 53149
Phone: (800) 223-9381 or (262) 534-6315
Email: aca-parts@tds.net

Rev. V Page 2-42
2.5.11.4 AHRS Location and Mounting
NOTE
In nonmetallic aircraft, the AHRS must be grounded to the instrument panel. This requires
the AHRS be located near the instrument panel. For additional information, refer to
Section 3.8.2.
NOTE
For dual G500/G600 systems, separate AHRS #1 and AHRS #2 as far as practical.
NOTE
The GSU 75(B) requires a ground strap when installed in composite aircraft. For
additional information, refer to Appendix Section N.3.
Observe the following when determining the mounting location of the AHRS:
1. The AHRS uses extremely sensitive inertial sensors and must be mounted rigidly to the aircraft
primary structure.
2. Shock mounts must not be used in AHRS installation.
3. The AHRS must be mounted within 13.0 feet (4.0 meters) longitudinally and 6.5 feet (2.0 meters)
laterally of the aircraft center of gravity.
4. Unit location should avoid areas prone to severe vibration to eliminate possibility of resonance
between the unit and its supporting structure.
5. Vibration levels are checked using the Engine Run-Up Vibration Test detailed in Section 5.6.5
(excessive vibrations above DO-160 levels listed in AHRS EQF may result in degraded accuracy).
6. The AHRS location should be protected from rapid thermal transients, particularly high-heat
exposure from nearby high-power equipment.
7. The AHRS must be mounted in a serviceable location (e.g., accessible through an access panel).
8. Installation in an unpressurized area of a pressurized aircraft is acceptable.
9. The pitch offset and roll offset between the AHRS mounting and GMU 44 mounting must be less
than 6.0°. For GMU 44 mounting requirements, refer to Section 2.5.11.5.
10. In dual G500/G600 installations, AHRS #1 must not be installed in a compartment that is
protected by a radome/fairing constructed from glass reinforced plastic without lightning
protection metallic mesh. This limitation does not apply to single G500/G600 installations or
compartments protected by fairings constructed from carbon-reinforced plastics or metal fairings
with fiber-reinforced plastic access panels. Compartments of this type are typically found in the
nose section of twin engine or amphibious aircraft.
11. The aircraft structure under cargo hold or cabin floors is a good location for AHRS, provided unit
installation has adequate strength. Unit location in unprotected areas with exposure to accidental
impact should be avoided.
12. For new G500/G600 installations in tube and fabric aircraft, installation of the AHRS is not
permitted in Lightning Zones 1A, 1B, or 2B (refer to Appendix J) if the electrical bonding clamp
illustrated in Figure 3-24 is used.
13. Non-magnetic screwdrivers are preferred to use for AHRS fasteners. Magnetized screwdrivers
will not cause problems.
14. AHRS should not be located within one inch of magnetically mounted antennas, speaker magnets,
or other emitters of strong magnetic field. Magnetized metal structure does not affect AHRS, but
may affect nearby aircraft instruments like magnetic compass.

Rev. V Page 2-43
CAUTION
It is strongly recommended to avoid placing the AHRS in the region 18 inches forward and
18 inches aft of the propellers on twin engine aircraft, as shown in Figure 2-8. If the AHRS
is placed in this region, substantial rework of the surrounding structure may be required to
stiffen the location enough to resist vibration induced in the skin and surrounding
structure by propeller blast. This rework is beyond the scope of guidance provided in this
installation manual.
$92,',167$//$7,212)7+($+56
INCHES FORE/18 INCHES$)72)7+(3523(//(5
/2&$7,216217:,1(1*,1($,5&5$)7
Figure 2-8 AHRS Location Considerations for Twin-Engine Aircraft

Rev. V Page 2-44
2.5.11.4.1 GRS 77
The GRS 77 must be leveled to within 3.0° of the aircraft level reference in pitch and roll. Prior to flight,
the aircraft leveling procedure in Section 5.6.1 must be completed.
The GRS 77's forward direction must be aligned in heading to within 1.0° of the aircraft forward direction.
The arrow symbol on the rack points forward.
For the preferred installation method for tube and fabric aircraft, refer to Section 3.2.3.2.5.
2.5.11.4.2 GSU 75(B)
NOTE
The following guidance is specific to the AHRS considerations for the GSU 75(B). For
ADC considerations, refer to Section 2.5.11.6.
The GSU 75(B) can be mounted with the connector pointing forward, aft, left, or right. To avoid heading
errors, the unit must be aligned within ±1.0° of the applicable axis. The mounting orientation is stored in
the aircraft-specific configuration module.
The GSU 75(B) mounting rack should be leveled to within 8° in aircraft longitudinal direction (pitch), and
4° in aircraft lateral direction (roll). The unit rack should be on the bottom.
Aircraft leveling and offset setting procedure should be performed prior to flight. For more information,
refer to Section 5.6.1. If the mounting rack is leveled to within 0.25° of the aircraft level reference, the
aircraft leveling and offset setting procedure is not required.
2.5.11.5 GMU 44 Location and Mounting

The GMU 44 is an extremely sensitive three-axis magnetic sensor. It is more sensitive to nearby magnetic
disturbances than a flux gate magnetometer. For this reason, when choosing a mounting location for the
GMU 44, it is recommended that the minimum distances specified in Table 2-13 be observed. In the event
that all of the minimum distances cannot be observed, Table 2-13 also specifies magnetic disturbances to
avoid in order of priority. The chosen location must be surveyed prior to installation of the GMU 44 to
verify its acceptability. Refer to Section 3.2.4.4. Section 6.1 provides guidance on troubleshooting the
GMU 44 Magnetometer location. Generally acceptable locations are shown in Figure 2-10 and specific
requirements for metallic and nonmetallic aircraft are found in Section 2.5.11.5.2 and Section 2.5.11.5.3,
respectively.
CAUTION
If mounting the GMU 44 in the location used by an existing flux valve or flux gate, the
Magnetic Interference Survey (Section 3.2.4.4) must still be successfully completed.
Although the location may have been satisfactory for a flux valve or flux gate, it may not
be acceptable for the GMU 44.
NOTE
If planning to reuse the existing flux valve or flux gate wiring for the GMU 44, it must be
verified that the existing wiring meets the requirements specified for the GMU 44 (i.e.,
same number of shielded conductors, minimum wire AWG, equivalent wire type, etc.). In
many cases, the existing wiring will have to be replaced.

Rev. V Page 2-45
Table 2-13 Magnetic Disturbances
Recommended
Disturbance Source Priority
Min Distance
10.0 feet
Electric motors and relays, including servo motors 1
(3.0 meters)
Ferromagnetic structure greater than 1 kg total (iron, steel, or cobalt 8.2 feet
2
materials, especially landing gear structure) (2.5 meters)
3.0 feet
Ferromagnetic materials less than 1 kg total, such as control cables 3
(1.0 meter)
3.0 feet
Any electrical device drawing more than 100 mA current 4
(1.0 meter)
Electrical conductors passing more than 100 mA current (may require to 3.0 feet
5
be twisted shielded pair if within close proximity to GMU 44) (1.0 meter)
2.0 feet
Electrical devices drawing less than 100 mA current 6
(0.6 meter)
Magnetic measuring device other than another GMU 44 (e.g., installed 2.0 feet
7
flux gates, even if not powered) (0.6 meter)
Electrical conductors passing less than 100 mA current (may require to 1.3 feet
8
be twisted shielded pair if within close proximity to GMU 44) (0.4 meter)
Ensure that any electrical conductor that comes within close proximity (approximately 3 feet) of the
GMU 44 is installed as a twisted shielded pair, not a single-wire conductor (if possible, the shield should
be grounded at both ends).
Use nonmagnetic materials to mount the GMU 44, and replace any magnetic fasteners within 20.0 inches
with nonmagnetic equivalents (i.e., replace zinc-plated steel screws used to mount wing covers or wingtips
with nonmagnetic stainless steel screws).
In general, wing mounting of the GMU 44 Magnetometer is strongly preferred. If wing mounting is not
possible, it may be necessary to install the GMU 44 in the tail section of the aircraft. Fuselage mounting is
permitted, but NOT within two feet of the cabin area because of numerous potential disturbances that can
interfere with accurate operation. Refer to Figure 2-9.
The GMU 44 must be mounted in a serviceable location in the aircraft (e.g., accessible through an access
panel). Installation in an unpressurized area of a pressurized aircraft is acceptable.
If installing the G500/G600 in combination with a separately approved ESIS that includes heading, the
following criteria also apply:
1. If the magnetic compass is retained in the aircraft, the location of the electronic standby
magnetometer should be separated from the G500/G600 magnetometer locations by as much
distance as practicable (e.g., GMU 11 with a G5 Electronic Standby Instrument).
2. If the magnetic compass is not retained in the aircraft, the location of the electronic standby
magnetometer must be separated from the G500/G600 magnetometer locations by at least
12.0 inches.
3. Wiring associated with the electronic standby magnetometer must be routed independent from the
G500/G600 magnetometer(s).

Rev. V Page 2-46
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION FOR GMU 44
MAGNETOMETER WING MOUNTING

MAGNETOMETER FUSELAGE MOUNTING 1.
2 FT MIN.
(GMU 44 MUST NOT BE CLOSER
THAN 2 FEET TO CABIN)

MAGNETOMETER WING MOUNTING
NOTES:
1. A STRUCTURAL VALIDATION OF THE GMU 44 MOUNTING IS REQUIRED IF
GMU 44 IS INSTALLED WITHIN THE FUSELAGE.
Figure 2-9 Acceptable Locations for GMU 44 Magnetometer (Top View)

Rev. V Page 2-47
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION FOR GMU 44 MAGNETOMETER
VERTICAL STABILIZER MOUNTING
2 FT MIN.
(GMU 44 MUST NOT BE CLOSER
THAN 2 FEET TO CABIN)

MAGNETOMETER FUSELAGE MOUNTING 1.
NOTES:
1. A STRUCTURAL VALIDATION OF THE GMU 44 MOUNTING IS REQUIRED IF GMU
44 IS INSTALLED WITHIN THE FUSELAGE.
Figure 2-10 Acceptable Locations for GMU 44 Magnetometer (Side View)
In order to avoid a magnetometer calibration failure, the GMU 44 must be:

1. Level within 3.0° of the aircraft level reference in pitch and roll.
2. The pitch offset and roll offset relative to the level of the AHRS is less than 6.0°.
GMU 44
+/- 3° MAXIMUM
Figure 2-11 Level Mounting of GMU 44 Magnetometer

Rev. V Page 2-48
The GMU 44’s forward direction should be within 0.5° in heading of the aircraft forward direction
(longitudinal axis). If it is not possible to guarantee this accuracy, installation alignment to within 2.5° is
acceptable in combination with the Post-Installation Heading Compensation procedure described in
Section 5.6.4. It is strongly preferred that the GMU 44 alignment is aligned as close as possible to the
aircraft longitudinal axis. Refer to Figure 2-12.
GMU 44
ALIGNMENT AIRCRAFT
HEADING
± 2.5° MAX.
± 0.5° PREFERRED
Figure 2-12 Heading Offset Limit GMU 44 Magnetometer

Rev. V Page 2-49
2.5.11.5.1 Considerations for Wing Grounded Light Fixtures
The following installation practices are recommended when installing the GMU 44 in the wing.
1. The wing tip lights should not have a power ground connected to the chassis of the light assembly
that would then be connected back to the airframe ground via the light assembly mounting.
2. A dedicated power ground should be used and returned as a twisted pair with the power source
back into the fuselage for a wing mounted GMU 44.
These installation practices will prevent magnetically interfering currents from flowing in the wing skin
that encloses the GMU 44. Electrically isolating the light assembly should not be used as an alternative to
item 1 above, unless the isolated light assembly has been analyzed for adequate protection against direct
effects of lightning.
2.5.11.5.2 GMU 44 Location in Metal Aircraft

The GMU 44 must be installed inside the aircraft. It is recommended that GMU 44 be located in Lightning
Zone 3. For information on lightning zoning and guidance on determining the lightning zones for a
particular aircraft, refer to Appendix J. If the GMU 44 cannot be mounted in Zone 3, then it may be
mounted in Zone 2A of the aircraft, but it must not be mounted in any non-conducting fairings/housings
that are located in Zone 2A. In addition, the GMU 44 cannot be mounted within 0.5 meters (20 inches) of
the rear-most point of the fuselage. The GMU 44 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft structure.
If the existing flux gate was mounted in the wingtip, it is also acceptable to mount the GMU 44 in the
wingtip provided the wingtip cover is made out of metal. If the aircraft has tip tanks, the tip tank must also
be made of metal and there must be at least one intermediate rib between the tip tank and the rib on which
the GMU 44 is installed. If the wingtip cover is not made out of metal, the GMU 44 can still be mounted in
the wingtip in accordance with Appendix K.
For information about acceptable locations and bonding requirements for all aircraft models, refer to
Appendix K.
2.5.11.5.3 GMU 44 Location in Nonmetallic Aircraft

The GMU 44 must be installed inside the aircraft. It is recommended that the GMU 44 be located in
Lightning Zone 3. For information on lightning zoning and guidance to determine the lightning zones for a
particular aircraft, refer to Appendix J. If the GMU 44 cannot be mounted in Zone 3, then it may be
mounted in Zone 2A of the fuselage of the aircraft, but it must not be mounted in Zone 2A of the wing or
empennage. The GMU 44 cannot be mounted within 0.5 meters (20 inches) of the rear-most point of the
fuselage. The GMU 44 must be electrically isolated from the aircraft ground plane and maintain a
minimum 0.5-inch clearance from surrounding conductive components and structure.
For information about acceptable locations and isolation requirements for all aircraft models, refer to
Appendix K.

Rev. V Page 2-50
2.5.11.6 ADC Location and Mounting
The ADC can be installed in any section of the aircraft’s fuselage or the forward equipment bay for multi-
engine aircraft. The ADC must be mounted in a serviceable location in the aircraft (e.g., accessible through
an access panel). Installation in an unpressurized area of a pressurized aircraft is acceptable. It is
recommended to install the ADC as close to existing pitot-static lines as possible to avoid adding long lines
in the fuselage.
NOTE
When installed in nonmetallic aircraft, the ADC must be grounded to the instrument panel.
This requires the ADC be located near the instrument panel. For additional information,
refer to Section 3.8.2.
NOTE
For dual G500/G600 systems, separate ADC #1 and ADC #2 as far as practical.
In dual G500/G600 installations, ADC #1 must not be installed in a compartment protected by a

radome/fairing constructed from glass reinforced plastic without lightning protection metallic mesh. This
limitation does not apply to single G500/G600 installations or compartments protected by fairings
constructed from carbon-reinforced plastics or metal fairings with fiber-reinforced plastic access panels.
Compartments of this type are typically found in the nose section of twin engine or amphibious aircraft.
The GDC 74( ) can be oriented in any position from horizontal to 45° past vertical. Figure C-13 and
Figure C-14 show the acceptable range of GDC 74( ) mounting orientation. For guidance regarding the
orientation of the GSU 75(B), refer to Section 2.5.11.4.2.
The ADC has two ports that are connected to the aircraft’s pitot pressure source and static pressure source.
The two ports are labeled on the unit. Refer to Figure 2-13 and Figure 2-14. The pressure ports have 1/8-27
ANPT female threads. The mating fitting must have 1/8-27 ANPT male threads. For additional installation
PITOT AIR PORT
STATIC AIR PORT
Figure 2-13 GDC 74( ) Air Hose Fitting Locations

Rev. V Page 2-51
PITOT AIR PORT
STATIC AIR PORT
Figure 2-14 GSU 75(B) Air Hose Fitting Locations
The added static line connection to the ADC should:

1. Use line and fittings identical to those specified in an aircraft model-specific illustrated parts
catalog and purchased from aircraft manufacturer.
2. Be clear from fluid, sealant, or particles and have no leaks when installed.
3. Be labeled near the ADC unit.
4. Be routed away from moving parts of control system and high-temperature lines and avoid chafing
and sharp bends. The ADC should not be the low point in added line to avoid moisture collection
at or near the unit.
5. Not change the effectiveness of existing drains, alternate static source selector switch (if
applicable), or the independence of dual static systems (if applicable).
6. Not modify the static port surface or aircraft surface near the static port and introduce changes that
would affect static system calibration.
For approved practices while installing hoses and connections, refer to 14 CFR Part 43 Appendix E.

Rev. V Page 2-52
2.5.11.7 GTP 59 Location and Mounting
In general, the GTP 59 may be mounted on any location on the aircraft skin as long as it is in the proper
lightning zone and kept away from heat sources (e.g., exhaust, engine cowlings, cabin exhaust valves,
direct sunlight). Additionally, the GTP 59 cannot be mounted within 0.5 meters (20 inches) of the rear-
most point of the fuselage. For mounting instructions, refer to Section 3.2.6. The GTP 59 must not be
mounted in any wet or dry fuel tank area under any circumstances. It is recommended that the GTP 59 be
located in Lightning Zone 3, although Zone 2A is acceptable in some instances. For aircraft model-specific
information regarding acceptable lightning zones for GTP 59 placement, refer to Table K-1. Table K-2
contains information on lightning zoning and guidance on determining the lightning zones for a particular
aircraft.
For acceptable locations for the GTP 59 Temperature Probe, refer to Figure 2-15, Figure 2-16, and
Figure 2-17. These locations provide general guidance only. For exact locations, the lightning zones must
be considered for each particular aircraft. Additional guidance for metallic and nonmetallic aircraft is
found in Section 2.5.11.7.1 and Section 2.5.11.7.2.
The GTP 59 OAT Probe has no icing protection. If ice accumulates on the GTP 59 OAT Probe, its accuracy
is unknown. Air temperature measurements may be incorrect if ice accumulates on the probe.
Computations (e.g., true airspeed and delta-ISA) are dependent upon air temperature measurements and
may be affected.
It is recommended that the GTP 59 be mounted on the bottom of the wing on or near an access panel (it
must be mounted on an access panel in nonmetallic aircraft). The selected location must allow the GTP 59
to protrude into the airstream when the aircraft is in flight.

Rev. V Page 2-53
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
FOR GTP 59 OAT PROBE
UNDERSIDE OF WING
OUTSIDE OF EXHAUST STREAM
DO NOT MOUNT GTP 59 OAT PROBE

INSIDE OF EXHAUST STREAM
UNDERNEATH WING OR FUSELAGE

ON ENGINE COWLING
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
UNDERSIDE OF WING
OUTSIDE OF EXHAUST STREAM
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION ACCEPTABLE LOCATION

FOR GTP 59 OAT PROBE FOR GTP 59 OAT PROBE
UNDERSIDE OF TAIL ON SIDEWALL OF FUSELAGE
OUTSIDE OF EXHAUST STREAM (NOT ON ENGINE COWLING)
ABOVE EXHAUST STREAM

ON ENGINE COWLING
EXHAUST
DO NOT INSTALL
GTP 59 OAT PROBE
ON UNDERSIDE OF FUSELAGE
Figure 2-15 Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe - Low-Wing Aircraft

Rev. V Page 2-54
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION EXHAUST STREAM
UNDERSIDE OF WING
OUTSIDE EXHAUST STREAM
DO NOT MOUNT
GTP 59 OAT PROBE
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
GTP 59 OAT PROBE
SIDEWALL OF FUSELAGE
INSIDE AIR INLET DUCT
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
ON FUSELAGE BENEATH
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
UNDERSIDE OF WING
OUTSIDE EXHAUST STREAM DO NOT MOUNT
GTP 59 OAT PROBE
EXHAUST STREAM
Figure 2-16 Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe - Twin-Engine Aircraft

Rev. V Page 2-55
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION FOR GTP 59
OAT PROBE ON SIDEWALL OF
FUSELAGE
EXHAUST
DO NOT MOUNT GTP 59 OAT
ON UNSERSIDE OF FUSELAGE
PROBE ON ENGINE COWLING
DO NOT MOUNT GTP 59 OAT PROBE INSIDE

OF EXHAUST STREAM UNDERNEATH THE
FUSELAGE
ENSURE DOOR CLEARANCE

BEFOR MODIFICATION
DO NOT MOUNT GTP 59 OAT

PROBE ON ENGINE COWLING
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION FOR GTP 59 OAT

PROBE UNDERSIDE OF WING COLLOCATED
NEAR THE STRUT ATTACH POINT AND
WING ROOT TO AVOID DAMAGE FROM
GROUND OPERATIONS UNDER THE WING.
Figure 2-17 Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe - High-Wing Aircraft

Rev. V Page 2-56
2.5.11.7.1 GTP 59 Location in Metal Aircraft
NOTE
The GTP 59 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft skin for installations in metal
aircraft.
If a suitable location for the GTP 59 cannot be found in Lightning Zone 3, then it can be installed in
Zone 2A. However, in order to be installed in Zone 2A, the aircraft skin or access panel must be aluminum
and at least 0.032 inches thick and the GTP 59 must be electrically bonded to the aluminum skin (if the
aluminum skin is less than 0.032 inches, a doubler will be required). The doubler or access panel must
have four or more fasteners each providing electrical bond. The GTP 59 may not be installed on the aircraft
skin in Lightning Zones 1B, 1A, 1C, or 2B. For lightning zoning information, refer to Appendix J.
If a suitable location cannot be found in Lightning Zones 3 or 2A, it is permissible to install the GTP 59
Probe elsewhere provided it is inside an air inlet duct and all of the following conditions are met:
1. The air inlet duct cover is metal and is electrically grounded to the aircraft.
2. The GTP 59 is mounted such that it is recessed within the duct. The distance from the outermost
surface of the duct cover to any part of the GTP 59 must be more than the narrowest opening in the
duct cover by the GTP 59 (i.e., where the GTP 59 is mounted, the duct cover contains louvers that
are 2 x 8 inches – the GTP 59 must be no closer than 2 inches to the outermost surface of the duct
cover).
3. Air outlet ducts should not be used, as they can affect the temperature reading. Potential outlets
would be exhaust for avionics bays, engine cowling louvers, cabin vent outlets, etc.
2.5.11.7.2 GTP 59 Location in Nonmetallic Aircraft
NOTE
For most nonmetallic aircraft, the GTP 59 must be electrically isolated from the aircraft
ground plane and maintain a minimum 0.5- inch clearance from surrounding conductive
components and structure. For aircraft model-specific information about isolation of the
GTP 59, refer to Table K-1.
The GTP 59 can only be located in Lightning Zone 3 of the aircraft. This STC does not allow the
installation of the GTP 59 directly in the aircraft skin for nonmetallic aircraft; consequently, the GTP 59
must be mounted in an access panel. Additionally, the GTP 59 must be mounted to an electrically non-
conducting surface. If a non-conductive surface does not exist, then a non-conductive doubler must be used
to provide one (refer to Section 7 for more details). Additionally, a minimum 0.5-inch clearance must be
maintained between the GTP 59 and any surrounding conductive components and structure.
NOTE
Carbon reinforced composite (with or without mesh) or fiberglass with mesh is considered
to be conductive. Wood, Kevlar, and fiberglass without mesh is considered to be non-
conductive.

Rev. V Page 2-57
2.5.11.8 Co-pilot ADI with Flight Director - Location
In some installations, it may be desired to install an ADI with a flight director on the co-pilot’s side (i.e., an
ADI with a flight director that must be retained for proper autopilot operation, such as the KI 256, is being
relocated to the co-pilot’s side). If it is desired to relocate this ADI to the co-pilot’s side and retain the flight
director presentation, this ADI must intersect the co-pilot’s primary view centerline as shown in Figure 2-
18.
Copilot's Instrument Panel Glareshield
The ADI must

intersect the
Primary View
Centerline.
Primary View Centerline 1

NOTES:
1. DETERMINE THE COPILOT’S PRIMARY VIEW CENTERLINE AS FOLLOWS:
-AN IMAGINARY LINE EXTENDED THROUGH THE CENTER OF THE COPILOT’S
SEAT AND PROJECTED ONTO THE INSTRUMENT PANEL SHOULD BE USED AS
THE PRIMARY VIEW CENTERLINE
- IF THE CONTROL YOKE OR STICK IS OFFSET FROM THE CENTER OF THE
COPILOT’S SEAT, THE CENTER OF THE CONTROL YOKE OR STICK IN THE
NEUTRAL POSITION MAY BE USED AS THE PRIMARY VIEW CENTERLINE.
Figure 2-18 Location of Co-pilot ADI with Flight Director Presentation

Rev. V Page 2-58
2.5.11.9 GAD 43/43e Location and Mounting
NOTE
Mechanical installation requirements for the GAD 43 and GAD 43e units are identical
except where noted.
The GAD 43/43e can be installed in any section of the aircraft’s fuselage or the forward equipment bay for
multi-engine aircraft. The GAD 43/43e must be mounted in a serviceable location in the aircraft (e.g.,
accessible through an access panel). Installation in an unpressurized area of a pressurized aircraft is
acceptable.
The GAD 43/43e must not be installed in an avionics bay that is protected entirely by a fiberglass fairing
with no metallic mesh, unless the gyro output wires are installed with double-shielded wire. The installer
must identify this type of avionics bay, typically found in the nose section of twin engine or amphibious
aircraft. Interconnect drawings in Appendix F note each connection that requires double-shielded wire.
Avionics bays covered by a carbon fiber fairing or with metal structure with fiberglass access panels do not
require the additional shielding noted in Appendix F.
NOTE
For nonmetallic aircraft, the GAD 43/43e must be grounded to the instrument panel. This
will require that the GAD 43/43e be installed near the instrument panel. For additional
information, refer to Section 3.8.2.
The GAD 43/43e can be oriented in any position and secured to structure using one of two pairs of
mounting flanges, as shown in Figure 2-19.
GAD 43/43e UNIT
GAD 43/43e UNIT
TALL ORIENTATION SHORT ORIENTATION
Figure 2-19 GAD 43/43e Short and Tall Installation Orientations (GAD 43 shown)

Rev. V Page 2-59
2.5.12 Cable and Wiring Considerations
Wiring should be installed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11. When wire separation cannot be
achieved, the following issues should be addressed:
1. The cable harness should not be located near flight control cables, high electrical-capacity lines,
high-heat sources, motors, or fuel lines.
2. The cable harness should be located in a protected area of the aircraft.
3. Do not route cable near high-energy devices.
The length of shield drain connections at the G500/G600 LRU connectors must not exceed 3.0 inches.
2.5.12.1 Metal Aircraft with Composite Covers

Dual G500/G600 installations in aircraft with an avionics bay protected entirely by a fiberglass fairing that
does not have metallic mesh require additional location and wiring considerations. The #1 AHRS (refer to
Section 2.5.11.4), #1 ADC (refer to Section 2.5.11.6), and wire shielding for specified GAD 43( ) pins
(refer to Section 2.5.11.9) are affected. The installer must identify this type of avionics bay, typically found
in the nose section of twin-engine or amphibious aircraft. This consideration does not apply to single
G500/G600 installations, avionics bays covered by carbon fiber fairing, or avionics bays covered by a
metal fairing/structure with fiberglass access panels.
2.5.12.2 Pressurized Aircraft Considerations

In pressurized aircraft, wiring that penetrates the pressure vessel must be installed in accordance with the
Type Design of the aircraft. Any wires that penetrate the pressure bulkhead must use existing provisions,
such as spare pins in the existing bulkhead connectors or existing sealed wire thoroughfares in accordance
with the AMM.
Substantiation for additional holes in the pressure vessel is beyond the scope of this manual and would
require additional data from the aircraft manufacturer or other FAA approved data.
2.5.13 Cooling Requirements

The GDU 620 has two cooling fans integrated into the bottom of the chassis to supply forced-air cooling to
the unit. The mounting configuration should not restrict intake airflow into the fans at the bottom of the
display or exhaust airflow from the ducts at the top of the display.
2.5.14 Magnetic Compass Recalibration

After reconfiguring the avionics in the cockpit panel, recalibrate the compass and make the necessary
changes for noting correction data.
2.5.15 RVSM Considerations (G600 System Only)

TBM 700/850 series aircraft that comply with the installation guidance in Appendix P and are included in
the Group Approval are eligible for airworthiness approval in RVSM airspace. Other aircraft operating
at or above RVSM published altitudes will not meet the RVSM requirements with the G600
installation as outlined in this manual.

Rev. V Page 2-60
2.5.16 GPSS (Roll Steering) Considerations
The G500/G600 system can support autopilots using ARINC 429 GPSS or act as a roll steering converter
by providing analog GPSS information via its heading datum/error output. When using the GDU 620 as a
roll steering converter, either the GDU 620 HDG key (GDU 620 software v6.11 or later) or a discrete
input can be used to switch between HDG and GPSS mode.
2.5.16.1 ARINC 429 GPSS

The G500/G600 (GDU 620) has an ARINC 429 output that can be connected to autopilots that are capable
of utilizing ARINC 429 GPSS information. On the Autopilot ARINC 429 output, the GDU 620 forwards
GPSS information from the navigator (#1 or #2) that is currently selected on the GDU 620 HSI – there is
no need to provide external switching. For installations with autopilots that accept 429 GPSS (e.g.,
S-TEC 55X and Honeywell (Bendix-King) KFC 225), an external GPSS switch is NOT required.
2.5.16.2 G500/G600 Roll Steering Converter Function

The GDU 620 can act as a roll steering converter. It will receive the ARINC 429 GPSS information from
the selected navigator (#1 or #2) and translate it to a heading error. The HDG key (GDU 620 software
v6.11 or later) or the GPSS Enable In* discrete input may be used to control the GPS Steering (roll
steering) function of the GDU 620. If the GDU 620 HDG key is utilized, pressing and holding the HDG
key will toggle the GDU 620 heading datum (error) output between ARINC 429 GPSS information and the
heading bug. If the GPSS Enable In* input is utilized, grounding this input will cause the GDU 620
heading datum (error) output to be driven based upon ARINC 429 GPSS information. If this discrete input
is open, the GPSS function will be disabled and the heading datum output will be based upon the setting of
the heading bug.
For installations that utilize the GDU 620 as a roll steering converter, the autopilot must be in HDG mode
to use the GDU 620 for GPSS. For interconnect information if using an external switch, refer to
Figure F-20, and for configuration information, refer to Section 5.5.12.5.
2.5.17 ADI Replacement Considerations

Some existing ADIs contain a fast/slow or angle of attack (AOA) indication. Currently, the G500 does not
support a fast/slow or AOA display. The G600 system supports fast/slow displays listed in Appendix E.
Consequently, prior to undertaking a G600 installation in aircraft containing such an ADI, it must be
determined if the fast/slow or AOA indication is required by the AFM/POH. If a fast/slow or AOA
indication is required, and it is not supported by the G600, it must be provided to the pilot by alternate
means. The provision of an alternate fast/slow or AOA indication is beyond the scope of the G500/G600
AML STC.
Some existing ADIs contain Autopilot mode annunciations. The GDU 620 only supports Autopilot mode
displays noted in Table 5-21. As part of a G500/G600 installation in aircraft containing such an ADI, the
installer must ensure equivalent mode annunciations are provided as part of a G500/G600 installation. The
provision of these Autopilot mode annunciations is beyond the scope of the G500/G600 AML STC.
2.5.18 Aerobatic Aircraft Considerations

The AHRS/GMU 44 is capable of maneuvers through a range of 360° in bank and pitch. The rotation rate
capability is ±200° per second, although ARINC 429 angular rate output messages are limited to ±128° per
second.

Rev. V Page 2-61
2.5.19 Altitude Encoder Function (GDU 620 Software v3.00 or Later)
The GDU 620 receives ARINC 429 altitude data from the ADC and can output RS-232 serial altitude in
the Shadin format (9600 baud). This altitude output can be provided to the transponder, allowing the
existing altitude encoder to be removed when the G500/G600 is installed.
2.5.20 Equipment Bonding Considerations

For all G500/G600 installations, the instrument panel must be made of aluminum. The GDU 620 must be
electrically bonded to the instrument panel. Bonding requirements for other LRUs vary based upon
airframe type. For specific bonding instructions, refer to Section 3.8. Other units that interface to the
GDU 620 include weather radar, ADS-B traffic units, other NAV units, and DME units (e.g., warntone
generator, flap control and generator, or stall protection warning unit).
2.5.20.1 Metal Aircraft

The GDU 620 display, AHRS, ADC, GAD 43/43e, GTP 59 Temperature Probe, GMU 44 Magnetometer,
and any supporting brackets must be electrically bonded to aircraft ground through the airframe metallic
structure (refer to Section 3.8.1 for specific bonding instructions).
2.5.20.2 Nonmetallic Aircraft

The GDU 620 display, AHRS, ADC, GAD 43/43e Adapter, and any supporting brackets must be
electrically bonded to the instrument panel unless otherwise specified. This can be accomplished using
metallic structure or aluminum foil tape (refer to Section 3.8.2 for specific bonding instructions).
NOTE
For installations with dual G500/G600 systems, AHRS #2 and ADC #2 are not required to
be bonded to the instrument panel.
The GTP 59 Temperature Probe and GMU 44 Magnetometer must not be electrically bonded to the aircraft
structure. If the location chosen for the GTP 59 or GMU 44 is conductive, an insulating doubler must be
installed to electrically isolate the unit.
NOTE
conductive.
2.5.21 Nonmetallic Aircraft Considerations

Aircraft that are constructed out of nonmetallic materials, such as fiberglass, carbon composite material, or
fabric, must take special precautions to protect the G500/G600 equipment from HIRF IEL.

Rev. V Page 2-62
2.5.21.1 Electrical Bonding
The GDU 620 must be electrically bonded to the instrument panel. Additionally, the AHRS, ADC, and
GAD 43/43e must be electrically bonded to the instrument panel via existing metallic structure. If suitable
structure does not exist, bonding can be achieved using aluminum tape. A tape length-to-width ratio of 7:1
or less must be maintained (i.e., for every seven inches in length, the width must be a minimum of one
inch). The tape makes it necessary to locate the AHRS, ADC, and GAD 43/43e in close proximity to the
instrument panel in the aircraft. For specific bonding instructions, refer to Section 3.8.1.
NOTE
For installations with dual G500/G600 systems, AHRS #2 and ADC #2 are not required to
be bonded to the instrument panel.
2.5.21.2 Circuit Protection

The G500/G600 LRUs must be protected with transient voltage suppressors (TVS). If the standby ADI is
electric, it must also be protected with two TVSs. The RS-232 connection between the GDU 620 and the
AHRS must have an inline resistor installed. For additional information, refer to the attitude and air data
interconnect drawings in Appendix F.
NOTE
For installations with dual G500/G600 systems, TVS and resistor protection is not
required for the GDU 620 #2, AHRS #2, and ADC #2.
2.5.21.3 Wire Routing

The ground return from the AHRS, ADC, and GAD 43/43e should be routed with the wires going to the
instrument panel and must be terminated at the instrument panel ground. Where possible, the wiring should
be routed on top of the aluminum tape, as described in Section 2.5.21.1.
2.5.22 VFR-Only Installation Considerations

It is possible to install the G500/G600 for VFR operation only. If this type of installation is desired, some
of the requirements otherwise specified by this manual can be relaxed. Changes to a basic G500/G600
installation are as follows:
1. Standby instruments are not required.
2. The nonmetallic aircraft considerations for circuit protection (Section 2.5.21.2) are not required.
3. The nonmetallic aircraft considerations for bonding and wire routing (Section 2.5.21.1 and
Section 2.5.21.3) are required.
4. If the aircraft operation is currently limited to VFR operation only, no additional placards are
required. However, if the aircraft is not currently limited to VFR operation only, a placard limiting
aircraft operation to VFR-only must be installed. For additional details, refer to Section 2.5.3.3.
Additionally, data for some aircraft models listed on the AML is currently insufficient to substantiate IFR
operations with the G500/G600. Consequently, these aircraft models are limited to VFR operation only and
must be placarded in accordance with Section 2.5.3.3. To determine if a particular aircraft model is limited
to VFR when modified with the installation of a G500/G600 system, refer to Table K-1.
A typical installation limited to VFR operation only is shown in Figure 2-20.

Rev. V Page 2-63
AIRCRAFT LIMITED TO VFR ONLY
Figure 2-20 VFR Only GDU 620 Installation
2.5.23 Airspeed Warning Device Considerations

The G500/G600 system does not generate any aural airspeed warning tones. However, the GDU 620 does
provide five configurable Active-Low airspeed discrete outputs that can be utilized with external devices
to trigger aural airspeed warnings. If the aircraft has an existing system that provides aural airspeed
warnings, the airspeed aural warning system must continue to function after the installation of the
G500/G600 system. For example, if the original airspeed indicator is part of the airspeed warning system,
it may be retained to generate airspeed aural warnings. Alternately, the airspeed indicator may be removed
and the GDU 620 configurable airspeed discrete outputs utilized to trigger aural airspeed warnings. For
discrete output configuration information, refer to Section 5.5.9.
2.5.24 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Considerations
NOTE
The GDU 620 can interface to an ARINC 708 weather radar in metal aircraft only. To
determine whether a particular model is considered metal or nonmetallic, refer to
Appendix K.
In order to interface an ARINC 708 weather radar to the GDU 620, the weather radar transceiver must be
electrically bonded to the surrounding structure with a resistance of 10 milliohm or less. Overbraid must be
installed over the weather radar transceiver cabling that is located beneath the radome before it enters the
metal fuselage or metal wing for a radome in Lightning Zone 1. Overbraid is required if the radome is
located entirely within Zones 2 or 3 and the cabling outside the metal enclosure is over 12 inches (for
Zone 2) or 24 inches (for Zone 3) in length. Extra cable length (for service, etc.) must be overbraided or
secured inside the metal fuselage or metal wing structure so it will not be exposed to lightning transients
during normal operation.
In order to avoid recalibration of the weather radar when upgrading from an already calibrated weather
radar installation, it is suggested that the installer activate the Maintenance page of the original indicator
before it is removed and write down the value for Roll Trim. This value may be entered in the GDU 620
to maintain the existing calibration.

Rev. V Page 2-64
2.5.25 HSDB Ethernet Architecture Requirements
When the GDU 620 is interfaced to the Garmin LRUs listed in Table 2-14, the considerations provided in
this section must be made to ensure HSDB data priority and redundancy. Interconnect diagrams for each
example architecture in this section are found in Figure F-37 and Figure F-38.
Garmin LRUs have limited HSDB Ethernet ports. A summary of the Garmin LRUs with Ethernet
capability and the number of ports for each is shown in Table 2-14.
Table 2-14 Garmin LRU Ethernet Port Summary

LRU Number of Ethernet Ports
GDU 620 2
GTN 6XX/7XX 4
GTX 345 2
GTS 8XX 1
GDL 69 Series 4
GWX 68/70(R)/75 1
GDL 88 2
GMC 605 (GFC 600) 3
NOTE
When utilizing the GDL 69 to route HSDB data from the GTX 345 to the rest of the
G500/G600 system, the GDL 69 unit must be a GDL 69 SXM (P/N 011-03177-00) or
GDL 69A SXM (P/N 011-03177-10) with software v5.10 or later. When utilizing the
GTN 6XX/7XX to route HSDB data from the GTX 345 to the rest of the G500/G600 system,
the GTN 6XX/7XX must include software v6.11 or later.
NOTE
The Ethernet architecture options shown in the following sections are provided for
guidance only. They are not intended to include every possible installation and
configuration; they are provided to help the installer choose the optimal HSDB Ethernet
architecture design for each specific installation.
NOTE
The GWX 68/70(R)/75 and the GTS 8XX must not be routed through the GTX 345, but can
be routed through the GDL 88 if no other HSDB port is available.

Rev. V Page 2-65
2.5.25.1 Single G500/G600 Installation without GTN 6XX/7XX
In a single G500/G600 installation without the GTN 6XX/7XX navigator, both HSDB ports on the
GDU 620 must be utilized before connecting additional LRUs to available HSDB ports on LRUs already
connected to the GDU 620. LRU connections to available GDU 620 HSDB ports should be prioritized in
the following order.
1. GMC 605 (GFC 600)
2. GWX 68/70(R)/75
3. GDL 69 series
4. ADS-B In Source
5. GTS 8XX TAS/TCAS I
After the GDU 620 HSDB ports have been used, the remaining LRUs should be connected to available
GDL 69 series HSDB ports. Figure 2-21 provides example HSDB networks for a single G500/G600
installation without a GTN navigator.
GDU 620 GDU 620

HSDB
HSDB
HSDB
HSDB
GDL 69 Series ADS-B In GDL 69 Series GWX 68/70(R)/75
XM WX/ XM WX/ Weather
Entertain. Source Entertain. Radar
(optional)
(optional) (optional) (optional)
HSDB
HSDB
HSDB
GTS 8XX GTS 8XX ADSB In

TAS / TCAS I TAS / TCAS I Source
WITHOUT GFC 600 or WITH GWX 68/70(R)/75,

GWX 68/70(R)/75 WITHOUT GFC 600
HSDB GDU 620 HSDB
GDL 69 Series
GFC 600
XM WX/
Entertain. Autopilot
(optional)
(optional)
HSDB
HSDB
HSDB
GWX 68/70(R)/75
GTS 8XX ADSB In
TAS / TCAS I Source Weather
Radar
(optional)
WITH GFC 600,

WITH GWX 68/70(R)/75
Figure 2-21 Single G500/G600 Installation without GTN 6XX/7XX

Rev. V Page 2-66
2.5.25.2 Dual G500/G600 Installation without GTN 6XX/7XX
In a dual G500/G600 installation without the GTN 6XX/7XX navigator, the two GDU 620s must have a
direct HSDB interface. The remaining HSDB ports on the GDU 620s must be used before connecting
additional LRUs to available HSDB ports on LRUs already connected to the GDU 620. LRU connections
to available GDU 620 HSDB ports should be prioritized in the following order.
1. GMC 605 (GFC 600)
2. GWX 68/70(R)/75
3. GDL 69 series
4. ADS-B In Source
After the GDU 620 HSDB ports have been used, the remaining LRUs should be connected to available
GDL 69 series HSDB ports. If an LRU has additional unused HSDB ports remaining, the GDL 69/69A
may be used to create redundant paths. The GMC 605 (GFC 600 autopilot) must not be connected to the
GDL 69/69A. Figure 2-22 provides example HSDB networks for a dual G500/G600 installation without a
GTN navigator.
GDU 620 HSDB GDU 620 GDU 620 HSDB GDU 620
No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 2
HSDB
HSDB
HSDB
HSDB
HSDB GDL 69 Series GDL 69 Series

ADS-B In (IF AVAILABLE) GWX 68/70(R)/75 XM WX/ GTS 8XX
Source XM WX/ Weather Radar
HSDB
TAS / TCAS I
Entertain. (optional) Entertain. (optional)
HSDB
HSDB
GTS 8XX ADS-B In

TAS / TCAS I Source

HSDB GDU 620 HSDB GDU 620 HSDB
No. 1 No. 2
GFC 600 GDL 69 Series

Autopilot XM WX/
(optional) Entertain.
(optional)
HSDB
HSDB
HSDB
GTS 8XX ADSB In GWX 68/70(R)/75

Weather
TAS / TCAS I Source
(optional) (optional) Radar
(optional)
WITH GFC 600,

Figure 2-22 Dual G500/G600 Installation without GTN 6XX/7XX

Rev. V Page 2-67
2.5.25.3 Single G500/G600 Installation with Single GTN 6XX/7XX Installation
In a single G500/G600 installation with one GTN 6XX/7XX navigator, the GTN 6XX/7XX must have a
direct HSDB interface to the GDU 620. LRU connections to the remaining GDU 620 HSDB port should be
prioritized in the following order.
1. GMC 605 (GFC 600)
2. GWX 68/70(R)/75
3. GDL 69 series
4. ADS-B In Source
After all GDU 620 HSDB ports have been used, remaining LRUs should be connected to available GTN
navigator HSDB ports. Figure 2-23 provides example HSDB networks for a single G500/G600 installation
with a single GTN navigator.
GDU 620
GDU 620
GWX 68/70(R)/75
Weather
Radar
HSDB
HSDB
HSDB
HSDB
(optional)
GTS 8XX HSDB

No. 1 or No. 2 GDL 69 Series No. 1 or No. 2 GDL 69 Series
TAS / TCAS I GPS/SBAS XM WX/ GTS 8XX HSDB
GPS/SBAS HSDB XM WX/
(optional) Navigator HSDB
Entertain. TAS / TCAS I Navigator Entertain.
GTN 6XX/7XX (optional) (optional) GTN 6XX/7XX (optional)
HSDB
HSDB
ADS-B In ADS-B In
Source Source

GDU 620
GFC 600
Autopilot
(optional)
HSDB
HSDB
GWX 68/70(R)/75 No. 1 or No. 2 GDL 69 Series

Weather HSDB
GPS/SBAS HSDB XM WX/
Radar Navigator Entertain.
(optional) GTN 6XX/7XX (optional)
HSDB
HSDB
ADS-B In GTS 8XX

Source TAS / TCAS I
WITH GFC 600,

Figure 2-23 Single G500/G600 Installation with Single GTN 6XX/7XX

Rev. V Page 2-68
2.5.25.4 Single G500/G600 - Installation with Dual GTN 6XX/7XX Installation
In a single G500/G600 installation with two GTN 6XX/7XX navigators, each GTN 6XX/7XX must have a
direct HSDB interface to the GDU. The two GTN navigators must also directly interface with each other
via HSDB. All other LRUs must be connected to the available HSDB ports on the GTN 6XX/7XX
navigators. If any LRUs have additional unused HSDB ports remaining, the GDL 69 series may be used to
create redundant paths. Figure 2-24 provides an example HSDB network for a single G500/G600
installation with dual GTN navigators.
GDU 620
HSDB
HSDB
No. 1 No. 2
GFC 600 GWX 68/70(R)/75
HSDB GPS/SBAS HSDB GPS/SBAS HSDB
Autopilot Weather Radar
Navigator Navigator
GTN 6XX/7XX GTN 6XX/7XX
HSDB
HSDB
GDL 69 Series HSDB
GTS 8XX (IF AVAILABLE) ADS-B In
HSDB XM WX/
TAS / TCAS I Source
Entertain.
Figure 2-24 Single G500/G600 Installation with Dual GTN 6XX/7XX

Rev. V Page 2-69
2.5.25.5 Dual G500/G600 - Single GTN Installation
In a dual G500/G600 installation with one GTN 6XX/7XX, the GTN 6XX/7XX must have a direct HSDB
interface to one GDU 620. If the GTN 6XX/7XX is configured as GPS #1, then the GTN 6XX/7XX must
be interfaced to GDU 620 #1. If the GTN 6XX/7XX is configured as GPS #2, then the GTN 6XX/7XX
must be interfaced to GDU 620 #2. LRU connections to the remaining GDU 620 HSDB port should be
prioritized in the following order.
1. GMC 605 (GFC 600)
2. GWX 68/70(R)/75
3. GDL 69 series
4. ADS-B In Source
After all GDU 620 HSDB ports have been used, remaining LRUs should be connected to available GTN
navigator HSDB ports. If any LRUs have additional unused HSDB ports remaining, the GDL 69 series
may be used to create redundant paths. Figure 2-25 and Figure 2-26 provide example HSDB networks for
a dual G500/G600 installation with a single GTN navigator.
No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 2
HSDB
HSDB
HSDB
HSDB
No. 1 GDL 69 Series No. 1
GTS 8XX HSDB GPS/SBAS HSDB XM WX/ GTS 8XX HSDB GPS/SBAS GWX 68/70(R)/75
TAS / TCAS I Navigator Entertain. TAS / TCAS I Navigator Weather Radar
GTN 6XX/7XX (optional) GTN 6XX/7XX
HSDB
GDL 69 Series
ADS-B In XM WX/
ADS-B In HSDB Source Entertain.
Source
(IF AVAILABLE) (optional) HSDB HSDB
(optional)
(optional)

GDU 620 HSDB GDU 620

No. 1 No. 2
HSDB
HSDB
No. 1
GFC 600 HSDB GPS/SBAS GWX 68/70(R)/75
Autopilot Navigator Weather Radar
GTN 6XX/7XX
ADS-B In GDL 69 Series GTS 8XX

XM WX/ HSDB
Source Entertain. TAS / TCAS I
(optional) HSDB HSDB
WITH GFC 600,

Figure 2-25 Dual G500/G600 Installation with Single GTN 6XX/7XX as GPS #1

Rev. V Page 2-70
No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 2
HSDB
HSDB
HSDB
HSDB
GDL 69 Series No. 2 No. 2
XM WX/ HSDB GPS/SBAS HSDB GTS 8XX GWX 68/70(R)/75 GPS/SBAS HSDB GTS 8XX
Entertain. Navigator TAS / TCAS I Weather Radar Navigator TAS / TCAS I
(optional) (optional) (optional) (optional)
HSDB
ADS-B In GDL 69 Series

Source XM WX/
HSDB
ADS-B In Entertain.
(IF AVAILABLE)
Source (optional) HSDB HSDB
(optional)
(optional)


No. 1 No. 2
HSDB
HSDB
No. 2
GFC 600 GPS/SBAS HSDB
GWX 68/70(R)/75
Autopilot Navigator Weather Radar
GTN 6XX/7XX
ADS-B In GDL 69 Series GTS 8XX

Source XM WX/ HSDB
TAS / TCAS I
(optional) HSDB HSDB
Entertain. (optional)
(optional)
WITH GFC 600,

Figure 2-26 Dual G500/G600 Installation with Single GTN 6XX/7XX as GPS #2

Rev. V Page 2-71
2.5.25.6 Dual G500/G600 - Dual GTN Installation
In a dual G500/G600 installation with dual GTN 6XX/7XX navigators, there must be a direct HSDB
interface between the two GDU 620s, the two GTNs, and each GTN 6XX/7XX must have a direct HSDB
interface to a GDU 620. All other LRUs must be connected to the available HSDB ports on the
GTN 6XX/7XX navigators. If any LRUs have additional unused HSDB ports remaining, the GDL 69
series may be used to create redundant paths. Figure 2-27 provides an example HSDB network for a dual
G500/G600 installation with dual GTN navigators.

No. 1 No. 2
HSDB
HSDB
No. 1 No. 2 GWX 68/70(R)/75
GFC 600 HSDB GPS/SBAS HSDB GPS/SBAS HSDB
Autopilot Weather Radar
Navigator Navigator
HSDB
HSDB
GDL 69 Series HSDB
GTS 8XX HSDB XM WX/ (IF AVAILABLE) ADS-B In
TAS / TCAS I Entertain. Source
Figure 2-27 Dual G500/G600 Installation with Dual GTN 6XX/7XX
2.5.26 Dual G500/G600 Installation Considerations

Due to HIRF and lightning considerations, certain aircraft are not eligible for dual G500/G600
installations. To determine which aircraft are eligible for dual G500/G600 installations, refer to the Note
column in Table K-1.
2.5.27 GDU 620 Discrete Output Considerations

The GDU 620 has eight configurable Active-Low discrete outputs. Each is an open drain output capable of
sinking up to 250 mA when active. Refer to GDU 620 TSO Installation Manual. Discrete outputs are used
throughout installation specified herein. The Airspeed Discrete outputs may be used as specified in
Section 7.2.6 to supply a signal to an existing overspeed warning system. Airspeed Discrete outputs must
be limited to support functions that have a failure condition classification of Major or less in accordance
with AC 23.1309-1E. For example, stall warning and stick pusher/shaker systems exceed Major and may
not be interfaced to a GDU 620 Airspeed Discrete output. The agency performing the installation is
responsible for determining the appropriate applications and approval of additional airspeed discrete
connections beyond those connections shown in this installation manual.

Rev. V Page 2-72
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
3.1 Special Tools Required ...................................................................................................................3-2

3.1.1 Tools Needed for Magnetic Interference Survey ...................................................................3-3
3.2 Equipment Installation ....................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.1 GDU 620 ................................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.2 Standby Instruments Location and Mounting ......................................................................3-13
3.2.3 AHRS ...................................................................................................................................3-17
3.2.4 GMU 44 Magnetometer Location and Mounting ................................................................3-45
3.2.5 ADC Mounting .....................................................................................................................3-87
3.2.6 GTP 59 Temperature Probe Mounting .................................................................................3-98
3.2.7 GAD 43/43e Adapter Mounting .........................................................................................3-107
3.3 Construction and Validation of Structures ..................................................................................3-112
3.3.1 G500/G600 Static Test Loads ............................................................................................3-112
3.3.2 Test Procedures ..................................................................................................................3-115
3.4 Cabling and Wiring .....................................................................................................................3-117
3.4.1 Wiring Harness ...................................................................................................................3-117
3.4.2 Backshell Assembly and D-Subminiature Connectors ......................................................3-122
3.4.3 TVS, Fuse, and Inline Resistor Installation (Nonmetallic Aircraft Only) ..........................3-137
3.4.4 TVS 2 Assembly (Nonmetallic Aircraft Only) ..................................................................3-138
3.4.5 Inline Component Installation ............................................................................................3-140
3.5 Unit Replacement .......................................................................................................................3-141
3.5.1 GDU 620 Unit Replacement ..............................................................................................3-141
3.5.2 GSU 75(B) Unit Replacement ............................................................................................3-142
3.5.3 GRS 77 Unit Replacement .................................................................................................3-144
3.5.4 GMU 44 Unit Replacement ................................................................................................3-146
3.5.5 GDC 74( ) Unit Replacement .............................................................................................3-147
3.5.6 Mid-Continent Electric Standby ADI System Replacement (if installed) .........................3-148
3.5.7 GAD 43/43e Unit Replacement .........................................................................................3-149
3.6 Weight and Balance ....................................................................................................................3-150
3.7 Electrical Load Analysis .............................................................................................................3-152
3.7.1 Aircraft with Existing Electrical Load Analysis ................................................................3-153
3.7.2 Aircraft without Existing Electrical Load Analysis ...........................................................3-153
3.7.3 Performing an Electrical Load Analysis by Measurement .................................................3-154
3.8 Equipment Bonding ....................................................................................................................3-164
3.8.1 Metal Aircraft .....................................................................................................................3-164
3.8.2 Nonmetallic Aircraft ..........................................................................................................3-165
3.8.3 Aluminum Surface Preparation ..........................................................................................3-173
NOTE
If the GAD 43/43e Adapter is replacing the autopilot’s existing attitude source, it is highly
recommended to conduct a flight test prior to the G500/G600/GAD 43/43e installation.
This provides a baseline for the autopilot performance and ensures the system is properly
operating. Repeat this flight test after the aircraft modification is complete in order to
validate that the GAD 43/43e attitude source operates identically to the original
mechanical gyro. For additional information, refer to Section 5.10.2.5.

Rev. V Page 3-1
3.1 Special Tools Required
Laser Square
For GMU 44 Magnetometer installations, it is recommended (but optional) to use a laser square with a line
accuracy of ±3/32 inches end-to-end, at 15 feet perpendicular distance (or better). A Stanley Laser Level
Square 77-188 S2 meets the line accuracy requirement.
Digital Level
It is recommended to use a digital level when installing the AHRS and GMU 44 Magnetometer.
Protractor Tool
A protractor tool is required to measure the angle offset during the magnetometer installation.
Plumb Bob
A plumb bob is required for leveling and installing the magnetometer unit.
Aircraft Jack Set

A set of aircraft jacks may be required for stabilizing the aircraft after it is leveled.
Crimp Tool
It is required to use a crimp tool, meeting MIL specification M22520/2-01, and a positioner/locator to
ensure consistent, reliable crimp contact connections for the rear D-sub connectors. For a list of
recommended crimp tools, refer to Table 3-11.
Milliohm Meter
It is required to use a milliohm meter with an accuracy of ±0.1 milliohm (or better) to measure the
electrical bonding between the G500/G600 system components and aircraft ground.

Rev. V Page 3-2
3.1.1 Tools Needed for Magnetic Interference Survey
Sight Compass
It is highly recommended to use a compass rose; alternatively, a sight compass can be used for the
GMU 44 Magnetometer calibration. Refer to Section 5.6. A Barfield Sight Compass SC063 can be used as
an alternative.
Laptop or PC
It is required to use a laptop or PC to run the magnetic interference survey software. Refer to Appendix G.
The laptop or PC must meet the following minimum requirements:
Operating system Windows 2000 SP4, XP, 7, 8, and 10
Processor speed 850 MHz
Hard drive free memory 500 MB
RAM memory 256 MB
Screen resolution 1024 x 768
CD-ROM drive
USB to RS-232 converter (Required only if the laptop or PC does not have a serial port)
DC Power Supply
In order to perform the magnetic interference survey, it is required to use a DC power supply capable of
supplying 12 VDC/200 mA prior to the GMU 44 Magnetometer installation. Refer to Appendix G.
RS-485 to RS-232 Converter

In order to perform the magnetic interference survey, a RS-485 to RS-232 converter may be required.
Refer to Appendix G before installing the GMU 44 magnetometer. A suitable converter is a B&B
Electronics Model 422LP9R.
GMU 44 Location Survey Software (P/N 006-A0240-00)

In order to perform the magnetic interference survey, it is required to use GMU 44 Location Survey
Software (P/N 006-A0240-00). Refer to Appendix G. This software can be downloaded from the Garmin
Dealer Resource Center under P/N 006-A0241-00.
Magnetic Interference Survey Test Cable

In order to perform the magnetic interference survey, it is required to use a test cable fabricated by the
installer. For details on manufacturing a test cable, refer to Appendix Section G.2.
Stopwatch or Watch with a Second Hand

During the survey test sequence, it is required to use a stopwatch (or watch with a second hand) in order to
measure the time for turning equipment on and off.

Rev. V Page 3-3
3.2 Equipment Installation
For equipment dimensions and physical characteristics, refer to Table 1-3 and Appendix C.
3.2.1 GDU 620

The GDU 620 must be electrically bonded to the instrument panel. If a trim plate is used in the installation,
it must permit the GDU 620 to be electrically bonded to the instrument panel. When measured from the
rear aluminum chassis of the GDU 620 to the instrument panel, the resistance must be 20 mΩ or less. For
additional information about equipment bonding, refer to Section 3.8.1.
To install the GDU 620 display:
1. Select a general location for the GDU 620 cutout in accordance with Section 3.2.1.1.
2. Address any installation-specific considerations in accordance with Section 3.2.1.2.
3. Remove instruments necessary to facilitate installation and temporarily install the GDU 620 cutout
template. Refer to Section 3.2.1.3.
4. Determine if a trim plate is necessary for the installation. If necessary, determine which type of
trim plate in accordance with Section 3.2.1.4.
5. If necessary, install the trim plate. Refer to Section 3.2.1.5.
6. Install the GDU 620. Refer to Section 3.2.1.6.
3.2.1.1 GDU 620 Display Location

Determine a suitable location for the GDU 620 in accordance with Section 2.5.11.1. For instrument panel
layouts, refer to Appendix Section D.1.
In order to provide sufficient space in the instrument panel, specific GDU 620 installation considerations
are necessary for certain aircraft. For details, refer to Section 2.5.11.3.
Standard instrument configurations consist of, but are not limited to, the primary instruments:
• Airspeed indicator
• Attitude indicator
• Altimeter
• Horizontal situation indicator (HSI)/directional gyro (DG)
• Vertical speed indicator
• Turn coordinator
In an ideal configuration, the instruments are configured to align both vertically and horizontally, are
evenly spaced, and are adjacent to one another. Refer to Figure 3-1. Non-ideal instrument configurations
consist of the same primary instruments, but often the instruments are not aligned. Refer to Figure 3-2.

Rev. V Page 3-4
)((7

$,563(('

925,1',&$725
&ORFN .1276

9DF
GF
HOHF

(

9(57,&$/

63(('
)XHO4W\ 83
925,1',&$725

WXUQFRRUGLQDWRU '1
)((7

3(50,1
6
/ 5

PLQ

:

QRSLWFK
LQIRUPDWLRQ
(OHF&XUUHQW
7DFKRPHWHU $')
Figure 3-1 Example of an Ideal Instrument Configuration
)((7

VOR INDICATOR
20

200 40
180
AIRSPEED 60
160
KNOTS 80
140
120 100
10
15
6 5 VERTICAL
3 E SPEED
UP 20
N
12
d.c.
elec.
0 VOR INDICATOR
DN
100 FEET 20
33
15
PER MIN
5
15
10
30
W 21
24
turn coordinator
L R
2 min
no pitch 6 E
information
ADF 3
12
15 S
3
30
Clock 21
S
OB
Figure 3-2 Example of a Non-Ideal Instrument Configuration

Rev. V Page 3-5
115-01009- XX
TRIM PLATE MAY BE
REQUIRED ON SOME
INSTALLATIONS
20
200 40
180
AIRSPEED 60
160
80
140 KNOTS
120 100
CLOCK
Figure 3-3 GDU 620 Installed, Non-Ideal Instrument Configuration
For any instrument panel, installation of the GDU 620 is not limited to the use of cutouts for the primary
instruments. The combination of the original cutouts for any instrument may be used if the GDU 620
location satisfies the ADI intersect criteria, in accordance with Section 2.5.11.1. For example, in
Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-3, the VOR indicator cutouts are used in conjunction with the adjacent primary
instruments cutouts. In this example, using the airspeed and turn coordinator cutouts would have caused
both a structurally and cosmetically challenging installation.

Rev. V Page 3-6
3.2.1.2 Installation Considerations
Prior to any alteration, consider the placement of the standby instruments, in accordance with
Section 2.5.11.2.
To satisfy structural requirements, the instrument panel must have a minimum thickness of 0.063 inches.
Ensure the GDU 620 has sufficient clearance for the connectors and wire harness. Refer to Figure 3-4.
7 IN.
MINIMUM
CLEARANCE
GDU 620
SIDE VIEW
Figure 3-4 GDU 620 Recommended Connector Clearance
3.2.1.3 Temporary Installation of Cutout Template

1. Remove all instruments required to aid the installation of the GDU 620.
2. On the instrument panel, temporarily fasten the Cutout Template (P/N 115-01010-00).
3. Use the outside edges of the cutout pattern to transfer the LRU outline.
4. Mark the location of the six GDU 620 mounting holes.
5. Remove the template. For cutout template dimensions and reference features, refer to Appendix C.

Rev. V Page 3-7
3.2.1.4 Trim Plate Considerations
A combination of nut plates and screws are used to secure the GDU 620 to the instrument panel. On most
aircraft installations with an ideal instrument configuration, all six nut plates can be riveted to the
instrument panel itself. On other aircraft, due to pre-existing cutouts for the original instruments, lack of
material on the instrument panel may inhibit installation of nut plates to the instrument panel. Each
installation must be evaluated as follows:
1. If all nut plates can be installed to the instrument panel, use the thin trim plate
(P/N 115-01009-00).
2. If one or two nut plates cannot be installed on the instrument panel due to insufficient material:
a. It may be possible to install patches to the instrument panel. See Appendix H for information
on determining whether or not it would be acceptable to use patches. If all six nut plate
locations can be accommodated with nut plates on the instrument panel or patches (two
maximum), the thin trim plate may be used. It is also acceptable to use the thick trim plate
(P/N 115-01009-10) if it is not desired to use patches.
b. If step 2a cannot be met, the thick trim plate must be used.
3. If three or more nut plates cannot be installed on the instrument panel due to insufficient material,
the thick trim plate must be used.
NOTE
If all of the nut plates can be installed onto the instrument panel, and no existing cutouts
are visible when the GDU 620 is installed, it is not necessary to install any trim plate.
3.2.1.5 Trim Plate Installation (If Required)
NOTE
If installing nut plates onto the trim plate, it may be necessary to cut out additional
material from the instrument panel in order to provide clearance for the attachment of the
nut plate to the trim plate.
After it is decided which trim plate is to be used (thin or thick), determine the size of the trim plate and cut
it to the required size and pattern. See Appendix C for the dimensions of the trim plates that are furnished
with the G500/G600 installation kit.
NOTE
Do not permanently install the trim plate to the instrument panel until the GDU 620
installation hardware (nut plates) has been installed on the instrument panel and/or on the
thick trim plate.
Determine locations of fasteners or rivets for securing the trim plate to the instrument panel and the
GDU 620 nut plates, in accordance with the requirements in Figure 3-5, Figure 3-6, and Figure 3-7.
NOTE
The thin (0.032-inch) trim plate can float on the instrument panel. Rivets or fasteners to
secure the thin trim plate (P/N 115-01009-00) to the instrument panel are optional. The
installation of the GDU 620 will secure the trim plate in place.

Rev. V Page 3-8
If attaching the nut plates to the instrument panel, use the Cutout Template (P/N 115-01010-00) as a guide
to drill out the holes for the nut plate position. Remove the Cutout Template and install the required nut
plates on the instrument panel and, if required, on the trim plate. Once all six of the GDU 620 nut plates
have been installed, permanently install the trim plate, if required.
TRIM PLATE,7+,1 .032"7+,&.
P/N 15-01009-00
INSTRUMENT PANEL
TO PREVENT AIR GAPS, LAY OUT TRIM PLATE SO

PARTIAL INSTRUMENT EDGE CUTOUTS ON PANEL
ARE HIDDEN BENEATH TRIM PLATE
INSTALL ALL NUTPLATES ON BACK

SIDE OF INSTRUMENT PANEL
EXISTING INSTRUMENT
PANEL CUTOUTS
FOR A THIN TRIM PLATE INSTALLATION:

-LOCATE AND INSTALL ALL NUTPLATES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL SO
1) RIVET HEADS ARE FLUSH AND HIDDEN BY TRIM PLATE
2) NUTPLATE BODY DOES NOT INTERFERE WITH ADJACENT INSTRUMENT BODIES
3) NUTPLATE BODY DOES NOT LIE IN CUTOUT OPENING
4) ADEQUATE INSTRUMENT PANEL MATERIAL EXISTS.
-APPLY A FINISH COAT OF PAINT TO PLATE PRIOR TO FINAL INSTALL.
-TRIM PLATE OUTSIDE EDGE AS REQUIRED TO CLEAR ADJACENT INSTRUMENTS OR SWITCHES.
-FINISH CORNERS AT R.25" TYP.
Figure 3-5 Trim Plate Installation, Thin

Rev. V Page 3-9
TRIM PLATE, 7+,&..06" THICK
P/N 15-01009-10
NUTPLATE INSTALLED ON
FAR SIDE OF TRIM PLATE
NUTPLATE INSTALLED ON FAR NUTPLATE INSTALLED ON

SIDE OF INSTRUMENT PANEL FAR SIDE OF TRIM PLATE
ORIGINAL PANEL MATERIAL REMOVED

RIVETS OR SCREWS (NOT MIXED) ARE
FOR NUT PLATE CLEARANCE
REQUIRED 3 PLCS EACH LOCATION WHERE
NUTPLATE IS INSTALLED ONTO TRIM PLATE
Figure 3-6 Trim Plate Installation, Thick

Rev. V Page 3-10
NUTPLATE INSTALLED
ONTO FAR SIDE OF
> MIN. TO EDGE
TRIM PLATE
> MIN. TO EDGE
THREE SCREWS OR RIVETS TO BE
INSTALLED WITHIN R1.25" OF
RIVET OR SCREW GDU 620 FASTENER LOC.
LOCATIONS GDU 620 FASTENER
HOLE LOCATION
> MIN. TO EDGE
> MIN. TO EDGE
CORRECT CORNER PLACEMENT

MS20426AD4 RIVETS
OR
#6-32 SCREWS
> MIN. TO EDGE > MIN. TO EDGE

> MIN. TO EDGE
NUTPLATE INSTALLED ONTO
FAR SIDE OF TRIM PLATE
(SEE NOTES) RIVET OR SCREW
LOCATIONS
THREE SCREWS OR RIVETS TO BE

INSTALLED WITHIN R1.25" OF
GDU 620 FASTENER LOC.
GDU 620 FASTENER

HOLE LOCATION
CORRECT SIDE PLACEMENT

MS20426AD4 RIVETS
OR
#6-32 SCREWS
CORRECT GUIDLELINE TABLE NOTES:
HARDWARE DIMENSION A MIN. TO EDGE HARDWARE SPECIFICATION
RIVETS 0.75" +/- 0.25" 0.25"
MS21055L06
SCREWS 0.75" +0.25"/-0.125" 0.30" NUTPLATES MS 21075L06
MS 21069L06
MS 21071L06
Figure 3-7 Structural Trim Plate Installation, Correct Installation

Rev. V Page 3-11
NUTPLATE INSTALLED
ONTO FAR SIDE
OF TRIM PLATE
RIVET OR SCREW R 1.25

LOCATIONS
MODIFIED TRIM
PLATE EDGE
GDU 620 FASTENER
HOLE LOCATION
> MIN.
NEIGHBORING
INSTRUMENT
ON PANEL > MIN.
> MIN.
ACCEPTABLE MODIFICATIONS TO EDGE DETAIL
CORRECT GUIDELINE TABLE:

HARDWARE DIMENSION A MIN. TO EDGE
RIVETS 0.75" ± 0.25 0.25"
SCREWS 0.75" +.25 / -.125 0.30"
Figure 3-8 Acceptable Modifications to Edge Detail
3.2.1.6 GDU 620 Installation

Install the GDU 620 using six hex head screws (P/N 211-64307-14) (supplied with GDU 620 Mounting
Kit).

Rev. V Page 3-12
3.2.2 Standby Instruments Location and Mounting
Install the standby airspeed, altimeter, and attitude indicator in the pre-existing mounting locations for
instruments no longer required, such as VORs, ADF bearing pointers, RMIs, CDIs, etc. If required, new
instrument cutouts may be made on the instrument panel and the stepped part of the instrument panel.
Existing cutouts may also be modified as required to fit the standby instruments (e.g., cutting a notch for
the altimeter baro-correction knob).
Example instrument panel layouts are shown in Figure 3-9, Figure 3-10, and Figure 3-11. Additional
examples can be found in Appendix Section D.1. For mounting requirements, refer to Section 2.5.11.
NOTE
Due to the distance from the desired location of a standby instrument on the stepped panel
to the GDU 620 and the standby instrument distance requirement from Section 2.5.11.2,
only 3 1/8-inch standby instruments are permitted to be installed on stepped panels.
In Figure 3-10, the instrument panel bolster was modified to accommodate two of the standby instruments.
For details on modifying the bolster to accommodate standby instruments, refer to Appendix H.
Some instrument panels may require additional modifications to address non-standard size instruments
(e.g., the KI 256 ADI). For additional information, refer to Appendix H.
Due to space constraints, some installations may require the use of 2 ¼-inch instruments for backup
instruments. Previously certified 2 ¼-inch instruments may be used as long as they are pneumatic. If using
an electromechanical attitude indicator, the Mid-Continent 4200-( ) (2 ¼-inch display) electromechanical
attitude indicator with the MD240-battery backup must be used. For airspeed and altitude indicators, Mid-
Continent provides a package of 2 ¼-inch instruments in combination with the specified attitude indicator.
For Mid-Continent ordering information, refer to Section 2.5.11.2.4.3.
NOTE
If the Mid-Continent 4200-( ) 2 ¼-inch attitude indicator is used in a nonmetallic aircraft,
the associated remote MD420 Emergency Power System must be mounted within the
instrument panel area. This constraint does not apply to metal aircraft.
NOTE
If the Mid-Continent 4200-( ) 2 ¼-inch attitude indicator is used in a pressurized aircraft,
the associated remote MD420 Emergency Power System must be mounted in a pressurized
area.

Rev. V Page 3-13
20
200 40
180
60
160 VOR INDICATOR
Clock 80
140
120 100
Vac
d.c.
elec.
3 6
E 10
15
N 5 VERTICAL
12 SPEED
Fuel Qty UP 20
33
15 0 VOR INDICATOR
turn coordinator DN 100 FEET 20
30 PER MIN
S 5
L R
2 min W 15
24 21 10
no pitch
information
Elec Current
Tachometer ADF
ORIGINAL INSTRUMENT PANEL CONFIGURATION
20 20
40
10 10
30
Clock
10 10
Vac O
060
6 E
3
12
1
N
20
GPS
200
33
40
15
Fuel Qty 180

1
30
AIRSPEED 60
W 24
21
2
160
KNOTS 80
140
120 100
Elec Current
)((7

Tachometer

MODIFIED INSTRUMENT PANEL CONFIGURATION
Figure 3-9 Example of Installed GDU 620 - Standby Instruments

Rev. V Page 3-14
S-TEC
PLACARD
20
200 40
180
60
160
CLOCK 140
80
120 100
SANDEL SN3308
3 6 d.c.
elec.
E N
A
v
u 10
15
N 12
V e
5 VERTICAL
SPEED
M UP 20
33 A
P
15 0
30 B
R
G 5
PER MIN
S L R
15
W 2 min 10
OBS
24 21 no pitch
information
shft sync a-b
SWITCHES
IGNITION VENT
S-TEC
Placard
20
200 40
180
60
160
80
140
120 100
Switches
Ignition Vent
Figure 3-10 Example of Installed GDU 620 - Standby Instruments on Stepped Part of Panel

Rev. V Page 3-15
6
200
20
3 E
40
180
N
60
12
160
33
80
15
140
30
120 100
S
21 24 W
S
OB
HDG 060
d.c.
elec.
6 10
3 E 15
5 VERTICAL
SPEED
20
N
UP
12
0 Blank
33
15
30
PER MIN
5
S
L R W 21 15
2 min VOR 1
24
VOR 2 10
no pitch ijav ooo ORD
information
1.2 NM
Clock
20
200 40
180
60
160
80
140
120 100
Clock
Figure 3-11 Example of GDU 620 Installed with 2 ¼-Inch Standby Instruments

Rev. V Page 3-16
3.2.3 AHRS
NOTE
When installed in a composite aircraft, the GSU 75(B) requires a ground strap. For
additional information, refer to Appendix Section N.3.
NOTE
The AHRS with remote install rack may be added to an existing shelf if the weight of the
unit and install rack, when combined with the weight of the existing equipment installed
on the shelf, is less than or equal to the shelf weight limit as referenced by a placard on the
shelf or in aircraft records.
NOTE
The existing structure that the AHRS is mounted on must meet the minimum requirements
specified in Section 3.2.3.1.
NOTE
For dual G500/G600 installations, both AHRS units should be mounted on the same
support structure, ensuring that both AHRS units are exposed to the same vibration
environment. This prevents nuisance “Check Attitude” alerts and nuisance autopilot
disconnects in installations utilizing the GAD 43/43e to supply attitude information to the
autopilot.
The AHRS location should be determined in accordance with Section 2.5.11.4. Every AHRS installation
must meet requirements of Section 3.2.3.1. The AHRS should be mounted on a structure that has adequate
strength to support inertia forces of the unit and other installed components. For weight and balance
information, refer to Section 3.6.
For an overview of AHRS mounting options, refer to Table 3-1 and Table 3-2.

Rev. V Page 3-17
Table 3-1 Overview of AHRS Mounting Options
(GRS 77 with Universal Mount Shown, GSU 75(B) Similar)
Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount (Typical)
The intent of the GRS 77 Universal Mount is to allow minor
adjustments in angle of the AHRS installation relative to the FORWARD
mounting surface in the aircraft. In some cases, the universal mount

can be attached directly to existing structure in the aircraft, where
only the mounting holes need to be added to structure.
Refer to Section 3.2.3.2.3.
Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount FORWARD
(Composite Aircraft)
Some composite aircraft have a solid fuselage
structure that, with a GRS 77 Universal Mount,
will meet the requirements for the AHRS
installation. Modification of the fuselage involves
adding points of attachment.
Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount

(Tube and Fabric Aircraft)
The GRS 77 Universal Mount can be assembled with an installation
plate to existing fuselage tube structure. The installation plate
provides a stable platform for the universal mount, which allows the
assembly to be corrected for the aircraft level reference.
FORWARD
Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount Using Existing Points from Previously Installed
Equipment
If the aircraft has a Bendix/King
KG 102/102A gyro, a Mid-Continent
4305-128 gyro, Mid-Continent
4305-150 gyro, or a Cirrus 14357-001
gyro currently installed, and it is being
removed for this installation, that location
may provide an adequate mounting USE FOR CIRRUS 14357-001
USE FOR BENDIX KING KG 102 / 102A
location for the AHRS. The GRS 77 USE FOR MID-CONTINENT 4305-128 OR 4305-150
Universal Mount will allow for

installation to an existing hole pattern for the KG 102/102A (legs turned outward) or for the
Mid-Continent 4305-128/4305-150 and Cirrus 14357-001 (legs turned inward).

Rev. V Page 3-18
Table 3-2 Overview of AHRS Mounting Options without GRS 77 Universal Mount
Mounting Bracket – Attachment to Stringers or Longerons
Closely spaced stringers or longerons extending fore/aft along the FORWARD
bottom of the fuselage may provide adequate structure to support a

mounting bracket. Look for an area that will provide ample space
forward of the AHRS for the connector and wire harness.
Additionally, ensure that the location is not shared by equipment
capable of inducing vibration in the structure that can be transmitted
back to the AHRS, such as a location near the engine or landing gear.
Modify Existing Floor Panel or Add Mounting Surface to Attach AHRS Remote Install
Rack
A false floor may exist over the airframe structure to make room for
avionics or baggage. If the false floor surface is level and meets
structural requirements, it may provide an adequate surface for mounting
the AHRS directly.
Alternately, existing frame structure may provide a level plane to which a
plate may be attached for mounting the AHRS. An example would be
multiple frames with flanges at the same water line (WL).
Refer to Section 3.2.3.3.2. FORWARD
Plate, Angle Bracket Assembly – Attachment to Existing Frame and Bulkhead Structure
Angle brackets may be fabricated to attach to existing frame and
bulkhead structure, to which a plate may be attached. Although
multiple frames and bulkhead structure may be available for the
AHRS location, they may not be at the same water line (WL). One
or more brackets may be needed to create a level plane. The intent
is to ensure the plate remains parallel to the aircraft level reference
and firmly supported across its span.

Rev. V Page 3-19
3.2.3.1 Requirements for All AHRS Installations
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the operation of the AHRS, the following conditions must
be met:
1. If support racks, brackets, or shelves need to be fabricated, they should be fabricated and attached
to the aircraft structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC43.13-2B Chapter 2 and the
following requirements:
a. Material shall be 2024-T3 sheet aluminum.
b. Material shall be corrosion protected (primer, alodine, etc.).
c. Material shall be a minimum of 0.063 inches thick for single-sheet aluminum. Aluminum
honeycomb core panels are also acceptable and have no minimum thickness requirements. If
using cored panel, NAS-1836 Blind or NAS-1834 through inserts are recommended type
fasteners for AHRS installation.
d. Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets, etc.) applicable to the material thickness and
type.
2. Any supporting structure must be rigidly connected to the aircraft primary structure through strong
structural members capable of supporting substantial loads. Avoid areas that are prone to severe
vibration (e.g., areas close to engine mounts and landing gear).
3. If a new shelf is fabricated for installation of AHRS, it will not span greater than 12.0 inches in
width or length without direct attachment to primary structure. Larger shelves may require
stiffeners and/or flange reinforcements to provide adequate support.
4. Maintain a minimum of 3.0 inches between the forward edge of the remote install rack and any
object to ensure clearance for connector and wire harness.
5. For all installations, level and heading alignment of the AHRS will require the use of either one or
a combination of the following:
a. GRS 77 Universal Mount (P/N 011-01780-00).
b. Fabricated or existing support structure.
6. The AHRS must be electrically bonded to the aircraft metallic structure (metal aircraft) or
instrument panel (nonmetallic aircraft). For additional details, refer to Section 3.8.1 and
Section 3.8.2, respectively.
For the installation of the AHRS, level the aircraft in both the longitudinal and lateral axes. For leveling
instructions, refer to the aircraft’s maintenance manual. The aircraft should be placed on jacks while in a
level state to avoid inadvertently placing the aircraft in a non-level position when entering, exiting, or
working in the aircraft.
If the intent is to use the GRS 77 Universal Mount, refer to Section 3.2.3.2. If installing the GSU 75(B) or
the GRS 77 without the GRS 77 Universal Mount, refer to Section 3.2.3.3.

Rev. V Page 3-20
3.2.3.2 Preparation for Installation with GRS 77 Universal Mount
The GRS 77 Universal Mount includes GRS 77 Remote Install Rack fastener holes. It is acceptable to
modify the GRS 77 Universal Mount and drill fastener holes for the installation of the GSU 75(B). For size
and spacing in the GSU 75(B) Remote Install Rack, refer to Figure C-8. GSU 75(B) fastener holes that
were added should be centered about the longitudinal axis of the GRS 77 Universal Mount and be a
minimum of 0.5 inches from the edge of the mount. Install four MS21047-3 two-lug self-locking nut plates
at the back side of the GRS 77 Universal Mount if the universal mount top bracket has been modified to
include GSU 75(B) holes.
3.2.3.2.1 GRS 77 Universal Mount Description

The GRS 77 Universal Mount (P/N 011-01780-00) allows for aircraft level installation of the AHRS on
mounting structures with inclines up to ±6° in 2° increments. Depending on the installation, the angle
brackets contained within the GRS 77 Universal Mount kit can be assembled and installed facing in or out,
as shown in Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13. The use of the GRS 77 Universal Mount is optional.
AHRS UNIVERSAL TOP BRACKET
(PART OF GRS 77 UNIVERSAL MOUNT KIT)
AHRS ANGLE MOUNTING BRACKET (2X)

Figure 3-12 GRS 77 Universal Mount (Inward Facing Angle Brackets)


Figure 3-13 GRS 77 Universal Mount (Outward Facing Angle Brackets)

Rev. V Page 3-21
3.2.3.2.2 Assembly of the GRS 77 Universal Mount
1. Cleco the pivot hole of the top bracket to the angle bracket on both sides, as shown in Figure 3-14.
AHRS UNIVERSAL
TOP BRACKET
CLECO PIVOT HOLE

BOTH SIDES OF
BRACKET
6°
4°
2°
0°
CLECO SECOND PAIR OF HOLES BOTH

SIDES OF BRACKET TO SET ANGLE
SUCH THAT TOP BRACKET IS LEVELED
AHRS ANGLE TO MEET THE REQUIREMENTS .PROVIDED
MOUNTING BRACKET IN SECTION 2.5.11.4.
Figure 3-14 GRS 77 Universal Mount Assembly
NOTE
The incline of the mounting location may be determined by using a level meter, such as the
PRO 360. It is recommended to use a level surface on the aircraft itself as reference for a
more accurate installation.
2. Determine and set the incline offset required for level installation. Cleco the second pair of holes
of the top bracket to the angle bracket, as shown in Figure 3-15. Drill hole-pattern from top bracket
to angle bracket (0.1285-inch diameter holes – #30 drill bit), five places each side.
CLECO PIVOT HOLE BOTH

SIDES OF BRACKET
MATCH DRILL HOLE PATTERN FROM

TOP BRACKET TO ANGLE BRACKET,
Ø.128, 5 PLACES EACH SIDE.
AHRS UNIVERSAL
TOP BRACKET
(PART OF GRS 77
UNIVERSAL MOUNT KIT) CLECO SECOND PAIR OF HOLES BOTH SIDES
OF BRACKET TO SET ANGLE SUCH THAT TOP
BRACKET IS LEVEL WITH AIRCRAFT LEVEL.
AHRS ANGLE
MOUNTING BRACKET (2X)
(PART OF GRS 77
UNIVERSAL MOUNT KIT)
Figure 3-15 Hole-Pattern Configuration to Set Incline in Assembly for Aircraft Level

Rev. V Page 3-22
3. As shown in Figure 3-16, rivet the top bracket to angled brackets with MS20470AD4-6 rivets
(alternate CR3213-4-4 blind rivets) and remove Clecos.
AHRS UNIVERSAL
TOP BRACKET
(PART OF GRS 77 MS20470AD4-6 RIVET
(ALTERNATE, CR3213-4-4
CHERRYMAX RIVET
AHRS ANGLE MOUNTING BRACKET (2X) (5X EACH SIDE)
Figure 3-16 Top Bracket to Angle Bracket Assembly
NOTE
If the GRS 77 Universal Mount is assembled with the angle brackets pointing in, fasteners
attaching the mount to the support structure should be torqued before the AHRS remote
install rack is installed. Access to these fasteners is limited with the AHRS remote install
rack installed.
4. Install the AHRS remote install rack on the GRS 77 Universal Mount. The GRS 77 Remote Install
Rack (P/N 115-00459-00) is fastened to GRS 77 Universal Mount with five AN525-1032R8
screws, as shown in Figure 3-17. The GSU 75(B) Remote Install Rack (P/N 117-00608-00) is
fastened to the GRS 77 Universal Mount with four AN3-4A bolts or AN525-1032R8 screws. The
recommended fastener torque is 20-25 in-lbf. For details on GRS 77 Universal Mount
modifications required to install the GSU 75(B), refer to Section 3.2.3.2.
5. Ensure correct orientation of remote install rack on universal mount (i.e., the arrow on the GRS 77
Remote Install Rack must point forward).

Rev. V Page 3-23
1 AN525-1032R8
SCREW (5X)
FORWARD
GRS 77 REMOTE INSTALLR$&.
AHRS UNIVERSAL
TOP BRACKET
(PART OF GRS 77
UNIVERSAL MOUNT KIT )

NOTES:
1 RECOMMENDED TORQUE 20-25 INCH-LBS
Figure 3-17 Unit Remote Install Rack Installation

(P/N 115-00459-00 GRS 77 Rack Shown, P/N 117-00608-00 GSU 75(B) Rack Similar)

Rev. V Page 3-24
3.2.3.2.3 Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount (Typical)
NOTE
Aircraft structures such as the firewall, bulkhead, and support frames are usually
perpendicular to the aircraft heading and may be used as reference for determining the
relative position of the installation to the aircraft heading.
1. Position the GRS 77 Universal Mount on selected support structure and align to the aircraft
heading.
2. Transfer the fastener hole locations from the mount to the support structure.
3. For GRS 77 installations, verify the arrow on the remote install rack is pointing forward.
4. Drill marked fastener holes (0.201-inch diameter).
5. Drill and countersink MS20426AD3 rivet holes for the selected nut plate (MS21059L3 or alternate
as shown in Figure 3-18).
6. Attach the GRS 77 Universal Mount to the aircraft structure with AN525-1032R8 screws.
7. Torque fasteners 20-25 in-lbf.
8. If required, perform the structural validation test outlined in Section 3.3.
NOTE
Eight fasteners are preferred for the installation of the GRS 77 Universal Mount to the
aircraft structure. Use of four fasteners placed at extreme corners is acceptable, provided
AHRS installation passes the Engine Run-up Vibration Test outlined in Section 5.6.5.

Rev. V Page 3-25
1 2
SCREW (8X)
FORWARD
GRS 77 REMOTE INSTALL RACK
AHRS UNIVERSAL
TOP BRACKET
(PART OF GRS 77
3 SUPPORT
STRUCTURE

NUTPLATE
RIVET (2X)
(8 REQ'D)
NOTES:
1 RECOMMENDED HARDWARE OPTIONS FOR ASSEMBLY:
HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS
SCREWS MS35207 (#10-32 LENGTH A/R); OR NAS603 (#10-32 LENGTH A/R); OR AN525-X (#10-32 LENGTH A/R)
BOLTS AN3-XA (#10-32, LENGTH A/R)
AN960-10; AN960-10L; NAS1149F0332P; MS20426AD3-X
WASHERS RIVETS
OR NAS1149F0363P
OR
AN364-1032A (MS21083N3); NUTPLATES STANDARD PART; ANY MS (MILITARY
NUTS
OR MS21042L3 SPECIFICATION) PART NUMBER
2 RECOMMENDED TORQUE 20-25 INCH-LBS.

3 MINIMUM THICKNESS .063", UNLESS ALUMINUM HONEYCOMB CORE PANEL (NO
MINIMUM THICKNESS REQUIREMENT).
Figure 3-18 GRS 77 Universal Mount Installation

Rev. V Page 3-26
3.2.3.2.4 Installation of the GRS 77 Universal Mount (Composite Aircraft)
For installation of the GRS 77 Universal Mount, it is recommended to use the existing aircraft structure
designated for installation of avionics. Such installation does not require validation of structure. Weight
added by the AHRS installation, combined with the weight of existing equipment, must not exceed the
allowable weight limit of the selected existing aircraft structure. For fastener options and fastener
installation methods, refer to the SRM or AMM.
NOTE
Design data from the aircraft manufacturer or other approved design data is required
when:
1. Anything other than the existing aircraft structure designated for the installation of avionics is
selected for AHRS installation.
2. The weight limit of existing aircraft structure designated for avionics installation is unknown.
3. The aircraft SRM or AMM specifies no fastener options or fastener installation methods for
the selected AHRS location.
Install the GRS 77 Universal Mount at the selected existing aircraft structure designated for avionics.
1. Follow the requirements of Section 2.5.11.4.
2. Assemble the GRS 77 Universal Mount. Refer to Section 3.2.3.2.2.
3. Place the GRS 77 Universal Mount assembly on the existing structure and align forward direction
with the aircraft heading.
4. Transfer the location of fasteners (four per each bracket, eight total) and bracket edges. Refer to
Figure 3-19.
5. Install the universal mount, selecting fastener types and fastener installation methods in
accordance with aircraft SRM or AMM.
CAUTION
This procedure applies to sandwich panels used in construction of floors or shelves and
must be completed in accordance with aircraft manufacturer data, including the SRM or
AMM. This procedure must not be used in application to the aircraft primary structure
including load carrying members. After the installation is complete, refer to Section 5 for
system configuration, calibration, and checkout.
NOTE
The AHRS will not provide valid outputs until the post-installation calibration procedures
are completed.

Rev. V Page 3-27
LOCATE SECOND 4.60
HOLE APPROXIMATELY
AS SHOWN
5.64
1.88 TYP.
AHRS ANGLE
MOUNTING BRACKET
FOOTPRINT (2X)
LOCATE FIRST
HOLE APPROXIMATELY
AS SHOWN
Figure 3-19 Fastener Location In GRS 77 Universal Mount Brackets
The following is an example procedure for installing the GRS 77 Universal Mount onto sandwich panel in
a composite aircraft:
1. Drill a 0.5-inch diameter hole at each fastener location for installation of an AN3 bolt.
2. Remove the core between panel face sheets as shown (approximately 1.0 inch in diameter),
avoiding damage to the opposite face sheet. Refer to Figure 3-20.
3. Mix resin and hardener (Jeffco 1307 epoxy resin with Jeffco 3176 epoxy hardener) in a 4:1 ratio
by weight.
4. Add cotton fiber (flock) to mixed resin at approximately a 2:1 ratio by volume, or until desired
consistency of paste is achieved.
5. Protect the underside of the angle brackets with packaging tape. Punch holes in the tape at each
fastener location.
6. Place an AN3 bolt at each of the cavities and pour in resin and flock mixture until each cavity is
completely filled.

Rev. V Page 3-28
7. Slide taped angle brackets on top to align the bolts and press down flush with panel surface to
evacuate excess adhesive. Ensure bolts remain perpendicular to the angles and mounting surface,
as shown in Figure 3-21.
Ø0.50 THROUGH
MOUNTING SURFACE
TOP LAY ER ONLY
MOUN TING SURFACE
AN3 BOLT
MOUNTI NG SURFA CE
T OP LAYER HONEYCOMB CORE
1.0" MIN .
Ø1.00
C ORE REMOVAL
BOTTOM LAYER HONEYC OMB CORE
Figure 3-20 Typical Example of Bolt Installation in Sandwich Panel
TAPE UNDERSIDES OF AHRS ANGLE

BRACKETS WITH PACKAGING TAPE
AN3 BOLT
MOUNTING SURFACE
EPOXY WITH FLOX
ENSURE BOLT REMAINS PERPENDICULAR TO

FACE OF BRACKET WHEN BRACKET IS FLUSH
WITH MOUNTING SURFACE
Figure 3-21 Mounting Bolt Installation and Alignment (Composite Aircraft)

Rev. V Page 3-29
8. After the resin is cured, remove the angle bracket.
9. Peel the protective tape off.
10. Clean the brackets.
11. Prepare panel surface for layup following applicable procedure in aircraft SRM.
12. Lay up two layers of glass cloth over the entire area with the second ply overlapping the first by
0.5 to 1.0 inches. The second ply is oriented 45° from the first. Refer to Figure 3-22 and
Figure 3-23.
13. After the laminate is cured, install the GRS77 Universal Mount, securing angle brackets with
AN365-1032A nuts and AN960-10 washers (eight places).
9.5"
1.9"
1.3"
Figure 3-22 First Cloth Installation for Mounting Bolts (Composite Aircraft)
15. After laying up the first sheet of cloth, lay up a second sheet oriented 45° from first sheet, as
16. Allow for the material to set.
17. Install the GRS 77 Universal Mount onto bolts and secure with AN365-1032A nuts and AN960-10
washers (eight places). The recommended torque is 20-25 in-lbf.

Rev. V Page 3-30
1.0
11.5 9.5
Figure 3-23 Second Cloth Installation for Mounting Bolts (Composite Aircraft)

Rev. V Page 3-31
3.2.3.2.5 Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount (Tube and Fabric Aircraft)
For tube and fabric aircraft, it is possible to use the tube structure as the support structure for an assembly
that includes an installation plate as well as a GRS 77 Universal Mount to set the AHRS to aircraft level.
The concept involves the assembly of the installation plate with a GRS 77 Universal Mount. The
installation plate offers a surface for attaching the GRS 77 Universal Mount, and the universal mount
allows the assembly to accommodate an aircraft level, forward orientation for the AHRS unit.
Mounting Clamps
An alternative method of installation allows for clamps to be assembled to the tube structure for attaching
the installation plate.
1. A minimum of four sets of clamps (two clamps per set in offset pattern) are required.
2. An installation plate uses the eight mounting points (four clamp sets) to secure the plate to the
airframe. Countersunk screws are used to attach the GRS 77 Universal Mount to the installation
plate, to minimize possibility of interference between hardware and the airframe.
3. The installation plate must be at least 0.125 inches thick, 2024-T3. A stiffener may be required
depending on plate length. Refer to Figure 3-24.
4. For details and illustration, refer to Figure 3-24.
5. Perform a structural validation test outlined in Section 3.3.
6. Ensure that the AHRS is bonded to the metallic tube structure with a resistance of 10 mΩ or less
with the connector disconnected. A bonding strap meeting the following criteria must be used:
a. The cross-sectional area of the strap must be greater than 0.016 sq inches (approx 20800
circular mils). A 7/16-inch or wider tubular braid (QQB575R30T437, 24120 circular mils) or
a 3/4-inch or wider flat braid (QQB575F36T781, 20,800 circular mils) must be used and
attached at both ends using an MS20659-130 terminal lug.
b. The strap length should be as short as possible and must not exceed 6.0 inches, and the
installation shall be such that it avoids the strap looping back on itself.
c. The bonding strap must be electrically bonded to the installation plate via a spot face at least
0.125 inches larger in diameter than the bonding strap terminal lug. Refer to Bonding Jumper
Installations in AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11 for guidance on attaching the bonding strap to
tubular structure.
7. The electrical bonding strap method illustrated in Figure 3-24 must not be used if the AHRS is
installed in Lightning Zone 1A, 1B, or 2B. Refer to Appendix J. If the electrical bonding clamp is
used, the installation must be completed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11 and the
following criteria:
a. Use cadmium plated steel clamp, nut, and washers. Only AN735-6 and larger diameter clamps
are permitted. Use the MS20659-130 terminal lug between two AN970-3 washers to contact
the clamp.
b. Select location to minimize the presence of moisture and allow for easy inspection.
c. Ensure that all surface preparation material (e.g., primer, paint) is removed between the clamp
and the metallic tube that is equal to the width of the clamp and 1.0-inch minimum length for
steel tubes to ensure a good contact surface.
d. After assembly and bonding check, prime the airframe tube and clamp in accordance with one
of the following:
• The approved AMM
• MIL-PRF-85285 Type I, Color to suit (36081 Flat Gray Preferable) Coating:
Polyurethane, Aircraft And Support Equipment
• MIL-PRF-23377 Type I, Class N, Primer Coatings: Epoxy, High-Solids

Rev. V Page 3-32
5 INSTALLATION PLATE
ATTACH TO STRUCTURE IN A
MINIMUM OF 8 PLACES
(SEE STIFFENER
LAYOUT FOR 2
LONGER
DISTANCES)
FORWARD
2 MINIMUM LENGTH OF TOP VIEW

ASSEMBLE 4 PAIRS (MINIMUM) UNSUPPORTED MATERIAL
AT EDGED OF ASSEMBLY IN
OFFSET PATTERN AS SHOWN.

MS24693-XX
#10-32 SCREW
LENGTH A/R, 8X
FORWARD
FORWARD
AN735-XX
BOTTOM VIEW SIDE VIEW
NOTES:
1 USE JAM NUTS IN ASSEMBLY TO SET LOCATION OF CLAMPS PRIOR TO ASSEMBLING INSTALLATION PANEL TO STRUCTURE.
2 IF DISTANCE BETWEEN CLAMP ATTACHMENTS IS GREATER THAN 12", A STIFFENER IS REQUIRED ON THIS EDGE. AN UNSUPPORTED DISTANCE
GREATER THAN 16" IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.
3 RECOMMENDED TORQUE IS 20-25 INCH-LBS.
4 RECOMMENDED HARDWARE IS AS NOTED.
5 APPLY CORROSION PROTECTION (EXAMPLE: ZINC PRIMER; ALODINE; ETC.) ON ALL SURFACES OF FABRICATED PARTS.
6 ATTACH AND BOND MOUNTING TRAY BONDING STRAP TO AIRCRAFT TUBE STRUCTURE IN ACCORDANCE WITH AC 43.13-1B, CHAPTER 11.
Figure 3-24 Installation of GRS 77 Univ. Mount in Tube/Fabric Aircraft Using MS21919
Clamps
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page 3-33
INSTALLATION
PANEL
MS21083N3 NUT, LOCKING 3
AN960 - 10 WASHER (OR EQUIV.)
(OR EQUIV.) A/R
AN315 - 3 PLAIN HEX NUT

1
(OR EQUIV.)
AN3 - XA BOLT
FORWARD
MS21919 WDG DETAIL A
CLAMP ORIENTATION ADJUSTED
1 MS21919 WDG CLAMPS WITH

HARDWARE TO ATTACH INSTALLATION
PANEL TO STRUCTURE
ISO VIEW
8X
DIM. A
DIM. B
DIM. A
HARDWARE DIM. A DIM. B

MIN. MAX.
RIVETS 0.25" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
MS20470AD4 - X RIVET
A/R, SEE TABLE FOR
RECOMMENDED SPACING
TOP VIEW
STIFFENER LAYOUT
5 AN365 -1032A NUT, 8X

STIFFENER AT EDGE
AN960 -10 WASHER, 8X
0.75 X 0.75 X 0.063 ANGLE
(2024- T3 OR 6061- T6 ALUMINUM)
END VIEW
STIFFENER LAYOUT
Figure 3-24 Installation of GRS 77 Univ. Mount in Tube/Fabric Aircraft Using MS21919
Clamps
Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page 3-34
3.2.3.2.6 Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount Using Existing Points from Previously
Installed Equipment
For aircraft that have the Bendix/King KG 102/102A unit, Mid-Continent 4305-128 or 4305-150, or
Cirrus 14357-001 installed, the mounting pattern is accommodated in the design of the GRS 77 Universal
Mount. For details on how the angles assemble to the main bracket to accommodate the previously
installed equipment locations, refer to Figure 3-25. These locations may be used for the AHRS installation
if they meet the requirements defined in Section 3.2.3.1.
TURN ANGLES INWARD FOR TURN ANGLES OUTWARD FOR

MID CONTINENT 4305 -128 OR 4305- 150 BENDIX/KING KG 102/102A
OR CIRRUS 14357 - 001 MOUNTING LOCATION
MOUNTING LOCATION
Figure 3-25 Using the GRS 77 Universal Mount in Locations of Previously Installed
Equipment

Rev. V Page 3-35
3.2.3.2.7 Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount Using Existing Structure
Some aircraft may have existing structure, such as an avionics rack or shelf, that could be used for
installation of the AHRS. The existing structure may be structurally acceptable (i.e., meeting the
requirements of the construction and validation of structures defined in Section 3.3); however, it may not
be acceptable for vibration. Carefully evaluate whether the existing structure can be used by considering
the information contained within this section.
Existing structure may be used or modified for the AHRS installation if it meets the requirements defined
in Section 3.2.3.1. Additional stiffening and/or support members may need to be fabricated and installed to
reduce the effect of vibration on existing structure and minimize or eliminate deflection in the structure.
For an example, refer to Figure 3-26.
In addition, consider the following:
1. Avoid mounting the AHRS in close proximity to avionics of significant mass. They should not
share the same shelf or be located near each other sharing the same support structure.
2. Avoid structure with lightening holes.
3. The shelf or other structure to which the AHRS will be installed must be firmly attached to
structure. Additional fasteners may be necessary.
4. Locate the AHRS close to the newly fabricated and installed support or stiffening members for
maximum rigidity in structure.
5. A stiffener can be added under the shelf structure, running fore-aft aligned with the middle of the
AHRS remote install rack. Use this technique when the AHRS cannot be located near additional
support or stiffening members.
6. Shelves or structure without flanges can be stiffened by using angle aluminum or bent sheet metal
riveted to the shelf.
FOR SHELVES
WITHOUT FLANGES,
ALUMINUM ANGLE OR
BENT SHEET METAL
CAN BE RIVETED TO
SHELF AT FORE/AFT
EDGES
BRACKET CAN BE FABRICATED

TO PROVIDE SUPPORT FOR SHELF;
ATTACH TO EXISTING STRUCTURE
Figure 3-26 Example AHRS Installation Using Existing Shelf Structure

Rev. V Page 3-36
3.2.3.3 Preparation for Installation without GRS 77 Universal Mount
NOTE
Structural members, such as firewall, bulkheads, or fuselage frames, are typically
perpendicular to aircraft heading and may be used as reference to determine correct
AHRS orientation.
1. Position the AHRS remote install rack on the selected support structure.
2. Align to the aircraft heading.
3. Transfer the fastener hole locations (five for the GRS 77 and four for the GSU 75(B)).
4. Verify the arrow on the remote install rack is pointing forward for GRS 77 installation.
5. Drill marked fastener holes (0.201-inch diameter).
6. Drill and countersink MS20426AD3 rivet holes for the selected nut plate (MS21059L3 or
alternate, as shown in Figure 3-27).
7. Perform a structural validation outlined in Section 3.3.
8. Attach the remote install rack with AN525-1032R8 screws (five total for the GRS 77 and four total
for the GSU 75(B)).
SCREW 1 2
(5X)
GRS 77 REMOTE INSTALL RACK
3 MOUNTING
PLATE
NUTPLATE
1 RIVET (2X)
(5 REQ'D)
NOTES:
SCREWS AN525 - X (#10 - 32 LENGTH A/R)
AN960 -10; AN960 -10L; NAS1149F0332P; STANDARD PART; ANY MS (MILITARY
WASHERS NUTPLATES SPECIFICATION) PART NUMBER
OR NAS1149F0363P
OR
AN364 - 1032A (MS21083N3); RIVETS MS20426AD3 -X
NUTS
OR MS21042L3
2 RECOMMENDED TORQUE 20 - 25 INCH - LBS.

3 MINIMUM THICKNESS .063".
Figure 3-27 Installation of the AHRS Remote Install Rack (GRS 77 Shown, GSU 75(B)
Similar)

Rev. V Page 3-37
3.2.3.3.1 Mounting Bracket – Attachment to Stringers or Longerons
The option of creating a mounting bracket that attaches to stringers or longerons is shown in Figure 3-28.
The following items should be considered when creating the mounting bracket:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, mounting bracket requirements should follow conditions noted in
Section 3.2.3.1.
2. Distance between stringers or longerons should be less than 16.0 inches. For a distance between
12.0 and 16.0 inches, use a stiffener down the centerline of the AHRS remote install rack
mounting hole pattern. Refer to Figure 3-28.
3. At a minimum, the stiffener should be made of 0.75 x 0.50 x 0.063-inch angle, with the 0.75-inch
leg used for attachment to the mounting bracket, and it should run the length of the bracket. For the
GRS 77 Remote Install Rack, the nut plate for the center hole in the 5-hole pattern may be attached
directly to the stiffener. Use MS20426AD3 or MS20426AD4 rivets to secure the stiffener to the
mounting bracket. The vertical leg of the stiffener must be at least 0.25 inches from the skin of the
aircraft.
4. Ensure at least 3.0 inches forward of AHRS remains clear for connector and wire harness.
5. Fabricate a U-shaped mounting bracket, keeping edge flanges as short as possible. The flange
should be no more than 0.5 inches higher than the stringers. Refer to Figure 3-28.
6. Minimal access to the underside of the bracket requires use of blind fasteners for the bracket to
structure and for the AHRS to the bracket.

Rev. V Page 3-38
ISOMETRIC VIEW
FORWARD
GRS 77 AHRS
AIRFRAME
STRINGER
MOUNTING
1 2
BRACKET
FASTENING
HARDWARE 3
VIEW LOOKING AFT
MOUNTING SURFACE
PARALLEL TO
AIRCRAFT LEVEL
NOTES:
1 USE 2024 -T3 SHEET ALUMINIUM, 0.063" THICKNESS OR GREATER. USE A BEND
RADIUS APPROPRIATE TO THE MATERIAL TYPE AND THICKNESS. (EXAMPLE: USE BEND
RADIUS 0.24" FOR 0.063" THICKNESS 2024 -T3 ALUMINUM)
2 APPLY CORROSION PROTECTION (EXAMPLE: ZINC PRIMER; ALODINE; ETC.) ON ALL

SURFACES OF PART.
3 A RIGID CONNECTION TO AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE IS REQUIRED. RECOMMENDED

HARDWARE OPTIONS ARE:
RIVETS PREFERRED: CR3213 -4-X (CHERRY MAX); OR ALTERNATE: MS20470AD4 -X
SCREWS MS35206 (#6 -32 LENGTH A/R); OR NAS601 (#6 - 32 LENGTH A/R)
AN960 -6; AN960 -6L; RIVETS
WASHERS MS20426AD3 -X
NAS1149FN632P;
OR NAS1149FN616P OR STANDARD PART; ANY MS
AN364 - 632A (MS21083N06); NUTPLATES (MILITARY SPECIFICATION)
NUTS PART NUMBER
OR MS21042L06
Figure 3-28 Installation of AHRS on Aircraft Stringers (Adapter Riveted to Aircraft Skin)
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page 3-39
WIDTH DETAIL
UP TO 8"
UP TO 8",
NO EXTRA FLANGES
8 - 12"
8" UP TO 12",
FORWARD AND AFT
FLANGES
12-16"
12" UP TO 16"
FORWARD AND AFT
FLANGES AND
FORE -AFT STIFFENER
0.25" MIN. DEFLECTION GAP
MAX. HEIGHT DETAIL MOUNTING

BRACKET
MAX. 0.5"
AIRCRAFT FLOOR AIRFRAME STRINGER
AIRFRAME
FASTENER SPACING MOUNTING
STRINGER
BRACKET
DIM A
DIM A DIM B AIRCRAFT

FLOOR
CORRECT GUIDELINE TABLE:

MIN. MAX.
RIVETS 0.25" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
SCREWS 0.30" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
Figure 3-28 Installation of AHRS on Aircraft Stringers (Adapter Riveted to Aircraft Skin)
Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page 3-40
3.2.3.3.2 Modify Existing Floor Panel or Add Mounting Surface to Attach AHRS Remote
Install Rack
Some aircraft may have an existing floor panel, such as in an avionics bay or in the baggage compartment,
that is suitable for AHRS installation. Alternately, a simple panel may be installed where existing structure
creates a level plane, creating a mounting surface for the AHRS. The following items should be considered
when modifying a floor panel or adding a mounting surface:
1. The panel to which the AHRS is mounted must be rigid enough to not transmit vibrations into the
AHRS. The minimum thickness for sheet metal structure is 0.063 inches. It is acceptable to install
the AHRS to honeycomb structure with metal face sheets used in some avionics bays.
2. If the AHRS is installed in an area used for baggage, extra care must be taken to ensure the AHRS
is protected from damage. This may require fabrication of a protective cover for the AHRS. At
least 0.25 inches of space must exist between the surfaces of the AHRS and associated brackets,
and the fabricated cover must not deflect enough to touch the unit when impacted by baggage.
3. The GRS 77 Universal Mount is not required when the mounting surface (existing or added) is
level with the aircraft level reference.
FORWARD GRS 77 AHRS
3 IN
CLEARANCE
MOUNTING SURFACE PARALLEL

TO AIRCRAFT LEVEL
FASTENING EXISTING FLOOR PANEL OR NEW

HARDWARE SUPPORT PANEL (SEE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION FOR RECOMMENDED
THICKNESS AND DESIGN FEATURES)
SUPPORT PANEL SHOULD BE

FASTENED TO EACH AIRFRAME
MEMBER ACROSS THE SPAN EXISTING SKIN
AIRFRAME
Figure 3-29 Installation of AHRS on Existing Floor Panel or Installed Support Panel

Rev. V Page 3-41
3.2.3.3.3 Plate – Attachment to Existing Frame Structure
Some aircraft will have frame members with flanges that face forward or aft, where the flanges for each
frame member are at different water lines. This presents several possibilities for the AHRS installation. If
the flanges are long enough to install hardware, one of the two existing airframe members can be modified
with hardware; whereas, an angle or bracket must be fabricated for the second frame member to create two
mounting surfaces on the same waterline. If the flanges are not long enough to install hardware, two angles
or brackets must be fabricated and installed to the vertical surfaces of the existing airframe members. For
modifying existing parts and fabricating new parts, follow guidance in Section 3.2.3.1. Figure 3-30 shows
an example where a level support plate is installed between two airframe members.
BULKHEAD
FORWARD
3 IN. GRS 77 AHRS FASTENING HARDWARE
CLEARANCE
NEW SUPPORT PANEL FOR AHRS MOUNTING
PLATE (SEE REQUIREMENTS SECTION FOR
RECOMMENDED THICKNESS AND DESIGN
FEATURES)
MOUNTING SURFACE PARALLEL TO

SUPPORT PANEL SHOULD BE AIRCRAFT LEVEL
FASTENED ACROSS THE SPAN
ANGLES TO CREATE
LEVEL PLANE FOR
SUPPORT PANEL
EXISTING SKIN
AIRFRAME
MEMBER
Figure 3-30 Installation of AHRS with Installed Support Plate

Rev. V Page 3-42
3.2.3.4 GRS 77 Rack-to-Unit Flatness Check
NOTE
Place the unit on its rack and tighten the screw fasteners on one end of the unit to the rack
(recommended torque is 22-25 in-lbf), but leave the screw fasteners on the other end of the
unit unfastened.
At the unfastened end of the unit, there should now be a gap between the unit baseplate and the rails of the
remote install. Measure the gap to determine if it is within tolerances. Refer to Figure 3-31. Using feeler
gauges, check to ensure that the gap between the unit and each rack rail is at least 0.010 inches, but less
than 0.070 inches. Refer to Figure 3-31.
If the gaps between the unit and each rack rail are within tolerance (0.010 inches, but less than
0.070 inches), tighten the remaining two fasteners to hold the GRS 77 unit firmly to its rack (recommended
torque is 22-25 in-lbf).
If the gap is less than 0.010 inches or greater than 0.070 inches, then the proper amount of preload will not
be exerted on the unit baseplate when the unit is fastened down, and the installation is not acceptable.
Possible causes for a failure of this check include the following:
• The rack is fastened down to a surface that is not sufficiently flat
• The rack is warped or damaged
• The GRS 77 has a center baseplate external shim that is damaged or has been removed
• The GRS 77 baseplate has been warped or damaged
In the event of a failed test, these possibilities must be examined and any deficiencies corrected to pass this
check before the installation is acceptable.
GRS 77 AHRS
FASTENED END
MEASURE GAP
AT UNFASTENED END
(0.010" - 0.070" ACCEPTABLE)
Figure 3-31 Measuring GRS 77 to Remote Install Rack Gap

Rev. V Page 3-43
3.2.3.5 AHRS Installation
NOTE
The AHRS will not provide valid outputs until the post-installation calibration procedures
are completed.
The AHRS may be installed after the remote install rack has been assembled to the GRS 77 Universal
Mount or other support structure and the flatness check is complete.
To install the GRS 77 on the remote install rack:
1. Install the GRS 77 unit on the remote install rack.
2. Perform a flatness check outlined in Section 3.2.3.4.
3. After satisfactorily passing the flatness check, tighten the four mounting screws securing the
GRS 77 unit to the rack.
4. Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the GRS 77 to the rack rather than hand tightening the
knurled screws. The recommended torque is 22-25 in-lbf. Refer to Figure 3-32.
To install the GSU 75(B) on the remote install rack:
1. Place the unit on the remote rack.
2. Slide the unit back until fully engaged with the rack.
3. Push down and simultaneously turn each retention screw clockwise.
4. Torque each retention screw to 15-20 in-lbf.
For system configuration, calibration, and checkout, refer to Section 5.5.
GRS 77 AHRS
USE A #2 PHILLIPS SCREWDRIVER

TO TIGHTEN FOUR KNURLED
SCREWS ON UNIT TO RACK.
TORQUE SCREWS TO 22-25 IN-LBS.

INSTALLATION PLATE
Figure 3-32 GRS 77 Installation Example

Rev. V Page 3-44
3.2.4 GMU 44 Magnetometer Location and Mounting
NOTE
For metal aircraft, the GMU 44 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft metallic
structure that forms the ground plane with a resistance of 10 mΩ or less with the
connector disconnected.
NOTE
For nonmetallic aircraft, the GMU 44 must not be electrically bonded to the aircraft
ground plane. To determine GMU 44 isolation requirements for all aircraft models, refer
to Table K-1.
Determine a suitable location for the GMU 44. For placement information, refer to Section 2.5.11.5.
Example GMU 44 installations can be found in Appendix Section D.2. The GMU 44 should not be
mounted on an access panel.
The GMU 44 Install Rack (P/N 115-00481-00 or -10) must be installed within 3.0° of the aircraft level
reference for pitch and roll. The GMU 44 must be mounted such that the pitch offset and roll offset relative
to the AHRS level is less than 6.0°. Failure to meet these specifications may result in a failed
magnetometer calibration. It is preferred that the forward direction of the GMU 44 Install Rack is aligned
to within 0.5° in heading of the aircraft forward direction (longitudinal axis). If it is not possible to
guarantee this accuracy, installation alignment to within 2.5° in heading is acceptable in combination with
a post-installation heading alignment of the aircraft to a precise heading to determine and set a heading
offset. The heading offset procedure is described in Section 5.6.4. For all installations, level and heading
alignment will require the use of one of the following:
• GMU 44 Universal Mount (P/N 011-01779-01)
• Fabricated mounting equipment (e.g., brackets, shelves, mounting platform)
• A combination of both
For the installation of the GMU 44, level the aircraft in both the longitudinal and lateral axes. Refer to the
aircraft’s maintenance manual for leveling instructions. It is preferred that the aircraft is placed on jacks
while leveled to avoid inadvertently placing the aircraft in a non level position when entering, exiting, or
working in the aircraft.
CAUTION
After a location has been selected, and a GMU 44 mounting method chosen, a magnetic
interference survey must be performed at that location prior to fabricating or assembling
any parts for the GMU 44 mounting. It is possible that the location will fail the survey and
the installation will require a new location with different installation requirements.

Rev. V Page 3-45
3.2.4.1 GMU 44 Universal Mount (Optional)
The GMU 44 installation may require the use of the GMU 44 Universal Mount (P/N 011-01779-01). The
GMU 44 Universal Mount allows for level installation and aircraft heading alignment.
The GMU 44 Universal Mount allows for aircraft level installation of the GMU 44 Magnetometer on
mounting structures with inclines up to ±6° in 2° increments and 360° of forward direction offset.
Depending on installation, the GMU 44 may be installed in the following configurations:
1. Installed inside of the GMU 44 Universal Mount.
a. Side plate mounted (Figure 3-33).
b. Bottom plate mounted (Figure 3-34).
2. Installed suspended from the GMU 44 Universal Mount.
a. Side plate mounted (Figure 3-35).
b. Bottom plate mounted (Figure 3-36).
Figure 3-33 GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Plate Mounted
Figure 3-34 GMU 44 Universal Mount, Bottom Plate Mounted

Rev. V Page 3-46
Figure 3-35 GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Plate Mounted – Suspended
Figure 3-36 GMU 44 Universal Mount, Bottom Plate Mounted – Suspended

Rev. V Page 3-47
For side plate installations (Figure 3-37 and Figure 3-38), lateral and longitudinal (two axis) level
installation can be accomplished through the level placement of the mounting holes and the incline setting
(±2°, ±4°, ±6°) of the GMU 44 Universal Mount.
GMU 44 UNIVERSAL MOUNT

INSTALLATION PARALLEL TO AIRCRAFT LEVEL
PANEL
FORWARD
MOUNTING OF GMU 44
PARALLEL TO AIRCRAFT LEVEL
SET BRACKET MOUNTING AIRCRAFT LEVEL

HOLES IN PANEL FOR REFERENCE
AIRCRAFT LEVEL
Figure 3-37 GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Axis 1
ANGLE OF
INCLINE
GMU 44
UNIVERSAL
MOUNT
AIRCRAFT
LEVEL
REFERENCE
SET INCLINE ON UNIVERSAL MOUNT

FOR LEVEL INSTALLATION
Figure 3-38 GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Axis 2

Rev. V Page 3-48
For bottom-mounted installations requiring incline offset on both the lateral and longitudinal axis, level
installation can be accomplished through level placement of support equipment, such as mounting
brackets, shelves, panels on one axis, and setting the incline on the GMU 44 Universal Mount
(±2°, ±4°, ±6°) for the other axis. An example is shown in Figure 3-39. Heading alignment is accomplished
by installing the GMU 44 Install Rack to the top bracket of the GMU 44 Universal Mount so that the
forward direction is aligned with the aircraft heading.
VERTICAL
STABILIZER
GMU 44
LEVEL TO
LATERAL AXIS
LEVEL TO
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
AIRCRAFT
REFERENCE LINE
LEVEL TO
LATERAL AXIS
LEVEL TO
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
UNIVERSAL MOUNT SET AT +6°

FOR LEVEL INSTALLATION TO
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
Figure 3-39 GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Using Support Equipment,
Examples

Rev. V Page 3-49
3.2.4.2 Installation of GMU 44 Magnetometer with GMU 44 Universal Mount
3.2.4.2.1 Assembling the GMU 44 Universal Mount
1. Use the offset angle calculated from Section 3.2.4.5 to align the GMU 44 Install Rack to the
universal mount (Figure 3-40).
2. Mark the drill hole-pattern to the universal mount.
3. Drill to a diameter of 0.159 inches, three places. Do not enlarge the holes in the GMU 44 Install
Rack.
HOLE MARKS FOR PARALLEL LINE TO HOLE MARKS FOR PARALLEL LINE TO
MATCH TOP MOUNTING OF BRACKET MATCH SIDE MOUNTING OF BRACKET
ALIGN GMU 44 INSTALL RACK PARALLEL TO

AIRCRAFT CENTERLINE . MATCH DRILL BRACKET
TO INSTALL RACK AND RIVET IN PLACE .
ALIGN GMU 44 INSTALL RACK AIRCRAFT FORWARD INDICATOR

PARALLEL TO AIRCRAFT CENTERLINE .
MATCH DRILL BRACKET TO INSTALL
RACK AND RIVET IN PLACE .
Figure 3-40 Top Plate Alignment to Aircraft Heading

Rev. V Page 3-50
4. Rivet the GMU 44 Install Rack to the top bracket using MS20426AD5-6 rivets (three places).
Refer to Figure 3-41 and Figure 3-42.
UNIVERSAL TOP
MAGNETOMETER BRACKET
GMU 44 INSTALL RACK
DO NOT RIVET. THESE

ARE FOR SECURING
THE GMU TO THIS
ASSEMBLED UNIT .
ALIGNMENT PINS
RIVET HOLES ARE

COUNTERSUNK .
Figure 3-41 Installation Rack Rivet Through Holes
MS20426AD5-6 RIVET
(3X)
NOTE FORWARD
RELATION TO
BRACKET
GMU 44 INSTALL RACK
MAGNETOMETER UNIVERSAL
TOP BRACKET
Figure 3-42 Installation Rack to Top Bracket Installation

Rev. V Page 3-51
5. Assemble the top bracket to the bottom bracket and rivet using MS20426AD3-4 rivets (three
places). Refer to Figure 3-43.
6. Ensure that installed rivets are countersunk and flush.
7. Remove any burrs or excess rivet heads.
NOTE
The incline of the mounting location may be determined by using a level meter, such as the
GUIDE HOLES PROVIDED
TO MOUNT TO AIRCRAFT
RIVET TOP AND BOTTOM

BRACKETS WITH
MS20426AD3-4 RIVETS
MS20426AD3-4 RIVET
(3X)
MAGNETOMETER
UNIVERSAL MOUNT
Figure 3-43 GMU 44 Universal Mount Top and Bottom Bracket Assembly

Rev. V Page 3-52
8. Determine and set the incline offset required for level installation.
9. Move the top bracket forward or aft relative to the bottom bracket to achieve desired angle setting
for side plate installations, or move the top bracket up or down relative to the bottom bracket to
achieve the desired angle setting for bottom plate installations.
10. Ensure alignment of holes for desired setting (0°, 2°, 4°, or 6°). For details on achieving desired
angle settings, refer to Figure 3-44 through Figure 3-48.
HOLE PATTERN FOR

LATTERAL MOTION
ANGULAR ADJUSTMENT
MAGNETOMETER
UNIVERSAL MOUNT
TOP BRACKET
HOLE PATTERN FOR

ROTATIONAL MOTION
ANGULAR ADJUSTMENT
HOLE PATTERN FOR

LATERAL MOTION
ANGULAR ADJUSTMENT
MAGNETOMETER
UNIVERSAL MOUNT
HOLE PATTERN FOR

ROTATIONAL MOTION
ANGULAR ADJUSTMENT
Figure 3-44 GMU 44 Universal Mount Top and Bottom Hole Patterns

Rev. V Page 3-53
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
VALUE 0, 2, 4 OR 6°
ANGLE ADJUSTED
2, 4 OR 6°
RIVETS
+2° +2° INSTALLED
+4° +4°
+6° +6° MOUNTING
0° 0° PLATE
MOVEMENT OF PLATES TO
ALIGN HOLES LATERALLY
FOR DEGREES OF INCLINE
Figure 3-45 GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Lateral Method 1
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT ANGLE ADJUSTED

VALUE 0, -2, -4 OR -6° -2, -4 OR -6°
RIVETS
-6° -6°
INSTALLED
-4° -4°
-2° -2°
0° 0° MOUNTING
PLATE
Figure 3-46 GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Lateral Method 2

Rev. V Page 3-54
RIVETS
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT INSTALLED
VALUES 2, 4 OR 6°
MOVEMENT OF PLATES TO
ALIGN HOLES IN ROTATION +2° +4°
FOR DEGREES OF INCLINE +2° +6°
+4°
+6°
MOUNTING
PLATE
ANGLE
REQUIRED
Figure 3-47 GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Rotational Method 1
MOUNTING
PLATE
ANGLE
REQUIRED
PLATE MOVEMENTS TO RIVETS

- 2° - 2°
ALIGN HOLES IN ROTATION - 4° - 4° INSTALLED
- 6° - 6°
FOR DEGREES OF INCLINE
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
VALUE -2, -4 OR -6°
Figure 3-48 GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Rotational Method 2

Rev. V Page 3-55
11. Cleco the desired angle and rivet the top bracket to the bottom bracket on both sides (two each
side) using MS20470AD3-4 rivets, as shown in Figure 3-49 and Figure 3-50. Examples are shown
in Figure 3-51 and Figure 3-52.
MS20470AD3 - 4 RIVET
(2X)
NOTE: RIVETS ARE MOUNTED IN SHOWN SET OF

HOLES FOR -6° DIHEDRAL ADJUSTMENT.
CLECO (2X)
Figure 3-49 GMU 44 Universal Mount Incline Offset Procedure
MS20470AD3-4 RIVET
(2X)
NOTE: RIVETS ARE MOUNTED IN SHOWN SET OF

HOLES FOR - 6° DIHEDRAL ADJUSTMENT.
Figure 3-50 GMU 44 Universal Mount Incline Offset Procedure

Rev. V Page 3-56
MOUNTING PLANE
TOP MOVEMENT TOP MOVEMENT
LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
BOTTOM MOVEMENT BOTTOM MOVEMENT
EXAMPLE OF +4° INCLINE DUE TO LATERAL MOVEMENT

RIVETED WITH MS20470AD3 -3
Figure 3-51 Example of a 4° Lateral Incline GMU 44 Universal Mount
RECOMMENDED MOUNTING
PLANE
GMU 44
6°
6°
GMU 44
RIVET LOCATION
FOR + 6 ° INCLINE RECOMMENDED MOUNTING
PLANE
Figure 3-52 Example of a 6° Rotated Incline GMU 44 Universal Mount

Rev. V Page 3-57
12. Install the GMU 44 into the GMU 44 Universal Mount using three screws (P/N 211-60037-08).
Apply medium strength thread locker (such as Loctite 242) to screw threads and torque fasteners
6-8 in-lbf. Witness stripe (torque seal) fastener heads. Refer to Figure 3-53.
211-60037-08 SCREW
6-32 X .25 BRASS
(3X)
GMU 44
MAGNETOMETER
Figure 3-53 Installation of the GMU 44 into GMU 44 Universal Mount

Rev. V Page 3-58
3.2.4.2.2 GMU 44 Universal Mount Installation
NOTE
For metal aircraft, the GMU 44 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft metallic
structure that forms the ground plane with a resistance of 10 mΩ or less with the
connector disconnected. The universal mount and any brackets it mounts to must be
electrically bonded to the aircraft ground plane.
NOTE
Prior to installing any equipment necessary for the installation of the GMU 44, a
Magnetic Interference Survey must be completed to determine if the desired location is
acceptable for the installation of the GMU 44 Magnetometer.
NOTE
In most cases, support components for the installation of the GMU 44 Universal Mount
are not required. For some aircraft that require installing the magnetometer in the vertical
stabilizer, support brackets may be required to compensate for the extreme inclines and/or
awkward positioning. In such cases, it is recommended to provide a level installation
using the manufactured brackets or other support equipment, especially if the GMU 44
Universal Mount is secured through the bottom bracket.
Example GMU 44 installations can be found in Appendix D.
Installation of the GMU 44 requires the aircraft to be leveled both in the longitudinal and lateral axes. For
leveling instructions, refer to the AMM. It is preferred that the aircraft is placed on jacks while leveled to
avoid inadvertently placing the aircraft in a non-level position when entering, exiting, or working in the
aircraft. Complete the Magnetic Interference Survey outlined in Section 3.2.4.4.
If required, install the support components (e.g., manufactured brackets or other equipment used to support
the GMU 44 Universal Mount) required for the installation of the GMU 44 Universal Mount in accordance
with the AMM and AC43.13-2B Chapter 2. Verify clearances and requirements shown in Figure 3-54.
For installations that have the clearance and access to install and remove the GMU 44 without disturbing
the GMU 44 Universal Mount, the GMU 44 Universal Mount may be installed on the mounting platform
prior to installing the GMU 44 on it. In this case, rivets may be used to secure the GMU 44 Universal
Mount to the mounting platform since removal of the GMU 44 for maintenance or replacement will not
require the removal of the GMU 44 Universal Mount. When using rivets, use CR3242-4 (Length A/R)
Cherry Max rivets or MS20470AD5 Solid Universal Head rivets. It is acceptable to oversize the holes in
the universal mount brackets to a #21 drill size (0.159") for installation of MS20470AD5 rivets.
Installation hardware for the GMU 44 Universal Mount should be non-magnetic. Acceptable nut plates
include #6-32 variations of the following: MS21048, MS21050, MS21052, MS21054, MS21056,
MS21058, MS21060, MS21070, MS21072, and MS21074. Do not use floating nut plates. Acceptable nuts
include #6-32 variations of the following: AN363C, AN364C, or AN365C. Acceptable screws include
MS5197, #6-32, length as applicable. Acceptable washers include AN960C-6, AN960C-6L, AN960PD-6,
AN960-PD-6L, or their NAS equivalents.

Rev. V Page 3-59
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the operation of the GMU 44, the following conditions
must be met:
a. Material shall be 2024-T3 aluminum alloy sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/4 or Clad 2024-T3
aluminum alloy sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/5.
b. Material shall have some type of corrosion protection (e.g., primer, alodine, etc.).
c. Material shall be a minimum of 0.032-inch thickness.
d. Use sheet metal techniques (e.g., bend radius, fillets, etc.) applicable to the material thickness
and type.
2. Any supporting structure must be rigidly connected to the aircraft structure through strong
structural members capable of supporting substantial loads.
3. Mounting platform shall not span greater than 12.0 inches in width or length without direct
attachment to primary structure. If the mounting platform does span greater than 12.0 inches, add
necessary stringers, doublers, bulkhead flange reinforcements, etc., to provide adequate support.
4. Maintain the minimum clearances shown in Figure 3-54 to ensure clearance for connector and
wire harness. If the GMU 44 Install Rack is permanently attached to the aircraft, and the GMU 44
must be lifted out of its mount for installation/removal, maintain a minimum of 3.0 inches between
the top of the GMU 44 unit and any object above the GMU 44. Refer to Figure 3-54.
*08DQG81,7621/<
0,1,0805(&200(1'('&/($5$1&(
)250,1,080%(1'5$',862)7+(
*08$1'
685)$&(
Figure 3-54 GMU 44 Installation Clearances

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page 3-60
*0881,7621/<
0,1,0805(&200(1'('&/($5$1&(
)250,1,080%(1'5$',862)7+(
*08&$%/(,17+($)7
',5(&7,21,6>@)5207+(*08
&(17(5

0,1,0805(&200(1'('&/($5$1&(

Figure 3-54 GMU 44 Installation Clearances

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page 3-61
5. Determine the angle offset for level installation and heading angle offset for aircraft heading
alignment.
6. The incline of the mounting location may be measured using a level meter, such as the PRO 360. It
is recommended to use a level surface on the aircraft itself as reference for a more accurate
installation.
NOTE
For vertical stabilizer installation, aircraft structures such as the bulkheads and support
frames are usually perpendicular to the aircraft heading and may be used as reference for
determining the relative position of the installation to the aircraft heading.
NOTE
Wing installation may require the transfer of both the aircraft heading reference line and
the mounting panel’s line to the shop floor for comparison and angle measurement. For
typical methods to determine the heading angle offset, refer to Section 3.2.4.5.
7. Assemble the GMU 44 Universal Mount as outlined in Section 3.2.4.2.1. For GMU 44 mounting
examples, refer to Appendix Section D.2.
8. For side plate installations, position the GMU 44 Universal Mount on the aircraft mounting
structure.
9. Transfer the hole-pattern from the side plate of the GMU 44 Universal Mount to the mounting
structure (0.144-inch diameter drill holes, two places). Refer to Figure 3-55, left side.
10. For bottom plate installations, drill four holes (0.128-inch diameter) on the bottom plate (two on
each side) of the GMU 44 Universal Mount.
11. Position the GMU 44 Universal Mount on the mounting platform.
12. Transfer the hole-pattern from the bottom plate of the GMU 44 Universal Mount to the mounting
plate (0.144-inch diameter, four places). Refer to Figure 3-55, right side.
Ø0.144 HOLE FOR #6-32 FASTENER

MATCH DRILL TO MOUNTING SURFACE
2 PLACES Ø0.144 HOLE FOR #6-32 FASTENER
MATCH DRILL TO MOUNTING SURFACE
4 PLACES
SIDE PLATE INSTALLATION BOTTOM PLATE INSTALLATION
Figure 3-55 Possible Hole-Patterns on the GMU 44 Universal Mount
13. Prepare the mounting surface (both faying surfaces) for bonding in accordance with Section 3.8.3.
If more than three rivets are used, then no faying surface preparation is required and the electrical
bond will be inherent through the rivets.

Rev. V Page 3-62
14. Rivet nut plates, MS21059L3 with MS20426AD4-6 rivets, countersunk rivets, onto mounting
platform.
15. Ensure that installed rivets are countersunk and are flush with the installation panel.
16. Remove any burrs or excess rivet heads. In some cases, such as with composite aircraft,
self-locking nuts may be used instead of rivet nuts.
17. Install the GMU 44 into the GMU 44 Universal Mount using hardware included in the GMU 44
Installation Kit.
18. Apply medium strength thread locker (such as Loctite 242) to screw threads.
20. Witness stripe (torque seal) fastener heads.
21. Place the connector at least 2.0 inches from the body of the GMU 44.
22. Secure the connector in place using good installation practices. This ensures that any remaining
magnetic effect can be compensated for using the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure in
Section 5.6.
23. For system configuration, calibration, and checkout, refer to Section 5.
NOTE
The GMU 44 will not provide valid outputs until the post-installation calibration
procedures are completed.
3.2.4.2.3 GMU 44 Universal Mount Installation – Tube-and-Fabric Aircraft
NOTE
For tube and fabric aircraft, the GMU 44 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft
metallic structure that forms the ground plane with a resistance of 10 mΩ or less with the
NOTE
It is recommended that the GMU 44 not be installed near the steel tube structure because
of the potential for magnetic interference. Consequently, the GMU 44 should be installed
in the wing, and the procedures specified in Section 3.2.4.2.2 should be followed.
3.2.4.2.4 GMU 44 Universal Mount Installation – Composite Aircraft
NOTE
For composite aircraft, the GMU 44 must not be electrically bonded to the aircraft
ground plane. To determine GMU 44 isolation requirements for all aircraft models, refer
to Table K-1. If the structure is conductive at the mounting location, provisions must be
made to electrically isolate the GMU 44 from the conductive structure.
NOTE
conductive.

Rev. V Page 3-63
3.2.4.2.4.1 Mounting on Conductive Structure
The GMU 44 Universal Mount cannot be easily attached to conductive structure without providing a
conductive path between the mount and structure. Consequently, the GMU 44 Universal Mount should not
be used and the procedure in Section 3.2.4.2.3 should be used.
3.2.4.2.4.2 Mounting on Non-Conductive Structure

The GMU 44 Universal Mount can be attached to non-conductive structure using methods detailed in
Section 3.2.4.2.2.
NOTE
Nut plates should not be used to attach the GMU 44 Universal Mount to non-conductive
structure. Alternate stainless locking nuts identified in Section 3.2.4.2.2 should be used to
fasten the universal mount to structure.
NOTE
The GMU 44 Universal Mount must remain electrically isolated from structure. The
GMU 44 and the GMU 44 Universal Mount must not be located within 0.5 inches of any
conductive structure or components.
3.2.4.3 Installation of GMU 44 Magnetometer without GMU 44 Universal Mount

3.2.4.3.1 GMU 44 Installation – Metal Aircraft
The GMU 44 Universal Mount, described in Section 3.2.4.1, allows for level installation and aircraft
heading alignment; however, the GMU 44 may be installed without the universal mount as long as level
installation and heading alignment requirements are met.
Installation of the GMU 44 requires the aircraft to be leveled both in the longitudinal and lateral axis. Refer
to the AMM for leveling instructions. It is preferred that the aircraft is placed on jacks while leveled to
avoid inadvertently placing the aircraft in a non-level position when entering, exiting, or working in the
aircraft.
NOTE
acceptable for the installation of the GMU 44 magnetometer.
Complete the Magnetic Interference Survey outlined in Section 3.2.4.4.

In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the operation of the GMU 44, the following conditions
must be met:

Rev. V Page 3-64
c. Material shall be a minimum of 0.032-inch thickness for bracket lengths less than 12.0 inches,
or a minimum of 0.063-inch thickness for bracket lengths greater than 12.0 inches.
and type.
3. Mounting platform shall not span greater than 12.0 inches wide or long without stiffeners or
stiffening flanges. Maximum length of mounting platform is 18.0 inches.
4. Maintain minimum clearances shown in Figure 3-54 and clearances necessary to facilitate
installation/removal of the GMU 44. Refer to Figure 3-56 for an installation example without the
universal mount.
The incline of the mounting location may be measured using a level meter, such as the PRO 360. It is
recommended to use a level surface on the aircraft itself as reference for a more accurate installation.
NOTE
NOTE
For wing installations, it may require the transferring of both the aircraft heading
reference line and the mounting panel’s line to the shop floor for comparison and angle
measurement. Refer to Section 3.2.4.5 for typical methods to determine the heading angle
offset.
1. For GMU 44 Install Rack hole pattern, which must be transferred to the fabricated mounting
structure prior to installation of the install rack, refer to Figure C-5.
2. Ensure that the GMU 44 Install Rack is aligned with the aircraft centerline.
3. Rivet the mounting plate to the top bracket using MS20426AD5-6 rivets (three places).
NOTE
Installation hardware for the GMU 44 Universal Mount should be non-magnetic.
Acceptable nut plates include #6-32 variations of the following: MS21048, MS21050,
MS21052, MS21054, MS21056, MS21058, MS21060, MS21070, MS21072, and MS21074.
Do not use floating nut plates. Acceptable nuts include #6-32 variations of the following:
AN363C, AN364C, or AN365C. Acceptable screws include MS51957, #6-32, length as
applicable. Acceptable washers include AN960C-6, AN960C-6L, AN960PD-6,
AN960-PD-6L, or their NAS equivalents.
4. Rivet nut plates, acceptable variations noted above, with MS20426AD3-4 rivets, countersunk
rivets, onto mounting platform.
5. Ensure that installed rivets are countersunk and are flush with the installation panel.
6. Remove any burrs or excess rivet heads. In some cases, such as with composite aircraft,
self-locking nuts may be used instead of rivet nuts.
7. Install the GMU 44 into the GMU 44 Universal Mount using hardware included in the GMU 44
Installation Kit.

Rev. V Page 3-65
8. Apply medium strength thread locker (such as Loctite 242) to screw threads.
10. Witness stripe (torque seal) fastener heads.
11. Place the connector at least 2.0 inches from the body of the GMU 44.
12. Secure the connector in place using good installation practices. This will ensure that any remaining
magnetic effect can be compensated for using the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure in
Section 5.6.
NOTE
The GMU will not provide valid outputs until the post-installation calibration procedures
are completed.
Example installations not using the GMU 44 Universal Mount can be found in Figure 3-56 and
Figure 3-57.
GMU 44
MAGNETOMETER
UP
12.00
MAXIMUM W/O STIFFENER
OR STIFFENING FLANGES OUTBOARD
Figure 3-56 GMU 44 Magnetometer Mounting without Universal Mount
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page 3-66
GMU 44
3 FASTENING
HARDWARE MAGNETOMETER
AIRFRAME
STRUCTURE
FORWARD
1 2 3 MOUNTING PLATE
MOUNTING SURFACE
PARALLEL TO
AIRCRAFT LEVEL
NOTES:
1 USE 2024-T3 SHEET ALUMINIUM, 0.032" THICKNESS OR GREATER. USE A BEND

RADIUS 0.16" OR GREATER FOR 0.032" THICKNESS 2024 -T3 ALUMINUM)
2 APPLY CORROSION PROTECTION (EXAMPLE: ZINC CHROMATE PRIMER; ALODINE;

ETC.) ON ALL SURFACES OF PART.
3 A RIGID CONNECTION TO AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE IS REQUIRED. HARDWARE MUST BE

NON-MAGNETIC. RECOMMENDED HARDWARE OPTIONS ARE:
RIVETS PREFERRED: CR3223 - 4-X (CHERRY MAX); OR ALTERNATE: MS20470AD4 -X
SCREWS MS51957 (#6 -32 LENGTH A/R)
AN960C- 6; AN960C -6L;
AN960PD-6; AN960PD - 6L STANDARD PART; ANY MS
WASHERS NUTPLATES (MILITARY SPECIFICATION)
NAS1149CN632R; OR
OR NAS1149CN616R PART NUMBER
AN363C- 632A; AN364C - 632A;
NUTS
AN365C-632A RIVETS MS20426AD3 -X
Figure 3-56 GMU 44 Magnetometer Mounting without Universal Mount

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page 3-67
MS20426AD5 RIVET
GMU 44 (3 PLCS)
INSTALL
RACK
WING RIB
FABRICATED
BRACKET
FORWARD
Figure 3-57 GMU 44 Magnetometer Mounting On Wing Rib without Universal Mount
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page 3-68
MOUNTING
WING RIB BRACKET
1 2 3
GMU 44
MAGNETOMETER
FORWARD
MOUNTING SURFACE
PARALLEL TO
AIRCRAFT LEVEL
FASTENING
3
HARDWARE
NOTES:
1. USE 2024-T3 SHEET ALUMINIUM, 0.032" THICKNESS OR GREATER. USE A BEND

RADIUS 0.16" OR GREATER FOR 0.040" THICKNESS 2024-T3 ALUMINUM)
2. APPLY CORROSION PROTECTION (EXAMPLE: ZINC CHROMATE PRIMER; ALODINE;

ETC.) ON ALL SURFACES OF PART.
3. A RIGID CONNECTION TO AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE IS REQUIRED. HARDWARE MUST BE

NON-MAGNETIC. RECOMMENDED HARDWARE OPTIONS ARE:
RIVETS PREFERRED: CR3223-4-X (CHERRY MAX); OR ALTERNATE: MS20470AD4 -X
SCREWS MS51957 (#6-32 LENGTH A/R)
WASHERS AN960C-6; AN960C-6L;
STANDAR PART; ANY MS
AN960PD-6; AN960PD-6L
OR NUTPLATES (MILITARY SPECIFICATION)
NAS1149CN632R;
PART NUMBER
OR NAS1149CN616R
NUTS AN363C-632A; AN364C-632A; RIVETS MS20426AD3 X
AN365C-632A
Figure 3-57 GMU 44 Magnetometer Mounting On Wing Rib without Universal Mount
Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page 3-69
3.2.4.3.2 GMU 44 Installation – Tube-and-Fabric Aircraft
CAUTION
The GMU 44 must not be installed near the steel tube structure because of the potential
for magnetic interference. The GMU 44 should be installed in the wing in accordance with
Section 3.2.4.3.1.
NOTE
For tube and fabric aircraft, the GMU 44 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft
metallic structure that forms the ground plane with a resistance of 10 mΩ or less with the
3.2.4.3.3 GMU 44 Installation – Composite Aircraft

In all installations in composite aircraft, the GMU 44 must not be electrically bonded to the aircraft ground
plane. This section provides guidance on achieving such an installation. Refer to Table K-1 to determine
GMU 44 isolation requirements for all aircraft models.
3.2.4.3.3.1 Mounting on Conductive Structure

Determine a suitable location for the GMU 44 (for placement information, refer to Section 2.5.11.5). The
selected location must maintain a minimum 0.5-inch clearance between the GMU 44 and surrounding
conductive components and structure. Installation of the GMU 44 requires the aircraft to be leveled both in
the longitudinal and lateral axis. For leveling instructions, refer to the AMM. It is preferred that the aircraft
is placed on jacks while leveled to avoid inadvertently placing the aircraft in a non-level position when
entering, exiting, or working in the aircraft. Complete the Magnetic Interference Survey outlined in
Section 3.2.4.4.
NOTE
acceptable for the installation of the GMU 44 Magnetometer.
NOTE
Refer to Figure C-5 for GMU 44 Install Rack hole pattern.
1. Fabricate a suitable mount as shown in Figure 3-58 and in accordance with the following:
b. Material shall be corrosion protected (e.g., primer, alodine, etc.).
c. Material shall be a minimum of 0.032-inch thickness for bracket lengths less than 12.0 inches.
d. Material shall be a minimum of 0.063-inch thickness for bracket lengths greater than 12.0
inches.
e. Use sheet metal techniques (e.g., bend radius, fillets, etc.) applicable to the material thickness
and type.
f. The mounting platform shall not span greater than 12.0 inches wide or long without stiffeners
or stiffening flanges. The maximum length of the mounting platform is 18.0 inches. Any

Rev. V Page 3-70
supporting structure must be rigidly connected to the aircraft primary structure through strong
Figure 3-58 GMU 44 Magnetometer Mounting Bracket for Composite Installations
2. Drill holes in the attach flanges of the GMU 44 mounting bracket. Hole diameters should be 0.098
to 0.1285 inches and be spaced approximately 0.5 inches apart.
NOTE
NOTE
For wing installations, it may require the transferring of both the aircraft heading
reference line and the mounting panel’s line to the shop floor for comparison and angle
measurement. Refer to Section 3.2.4.5 for typical methods to determine the heading angle
offset.
3. Temporarily place the bracket in its final mounting location.

4. Mark a line parallel to the heading reference line on the bracket.
5. Remove the bracket.

Rev. V Page 3-71
6. Rivet the GMU 44 Install Rack to the top bracket using MS20426AD5-6 rivets (three places),
ensuring that the forward direction of the install rack is aligned with the forward direction of the
heading reference line.
7. Maintain a minimum of 3.0 inches between the top of the GMU 44 unit and any object to allow
installation or removal of the GMU 44 and ensure clearance for connector and wire harness.
NOTE
The incline of the mounting location may be measured using a level meter, such as the
8. At the selected location, apply a minimum of two layers of glass cloth (each cloth having
0.009 inches thickness minimum) to conductive surface before installing GMU 44 mounting
bracket (refer to Figure 3-59). The bottom layer of glass cloth should be cut and located in the
aircraft such that there is a 0.5-inch distance (minimum) on all sides between the edge of the cloth
and the edge of the mounting bracket. The top layer of glass cloth should be cut and located such
that there is a 1.0-inch distance (minimum) on all sides between the edge of the cloth and the edge
of the mounting bracket.
Figure 3-59 Conductive Surface Preparation for Attachment of GMU 44 Mounting Bracket

Rev. V Page 3-72
9. Mix epoxy (Jeffco 1307 epoxy resin with Jeffco 3176 epoxy hardener) in a 4:1 ratio.
10. Apply to conductive surface and add bottom layer of glass cloth, working epoxy thoroughly into
weave and around the edge of the cloth.
11. Lay top layer of glass cloth over bottom layer, ensuring a 0.5-inch distance is kept between layers
around the perimeter of the glass cloth.
12. Work epoxy thoroughly into weave and around the edge of the cloth.
13. Allow layers to cure.
14. Prepare the metal surface of the GMU 44 Magnetometer bracket that will attach to the non-
conductive glass cloth by scuffing the faying surface with 80-grit sand paper, as shown in
Figure 3-60. The scuffing should not penetrate through the epoxy such that the fiberglass is
exposed. If exposed then another fiberglass ply should be laid on top over the entire area.
Figure 3-60 Attach Flange Preparation of GMU 44 Magnetometer Bracket
16. Add epoxy mix to flox (flocked cotton fiber) in approximately a 2:1 ratio.
17. Apply epoxy/flox mix to attach flanges of GMU 44 Magnetometer bracket as well as to
corresponding mounting surface in aircraft, as shown in Figure 3-61.
18. Ensure that the epoxy/flox mix flows through the holes in the attach flanges and smooth the mix
across the upper surface of the attach flanges.
19. Ensure bracket remains aligned with the aircraft’s forward direction and that the GMU 44
mounting surface remains level.
20. Make corrections to achieve a level surface before epoxy cures.
21. Apply fillet around the perimeter of the attach flanges and allow epoxy/flox mix to cure.

Rev. V Page 3-73
Figure 3-61 GMU 44 Mounting Bracket Attachment to Prepared Aircraft Surface
23. Apply the final layers of cloth on GMU 44 bracket flanges, as shown in Figure 3-62. The bottom
layer of glass cloth should be cut and located in the aircraft such that there is a 0.5-inch distance
(minimum) on all sides between the edge of the cloth and the edge of the mounting bracket. The
top layer of glass cloth should be cut and located such that there is a 1.0-inch distance (minimum)
on all sides between the edge of the cloth and the edge of the mounting bracket.
24. Apply epoxy to bracket flanges and lay bottom layer of cloth on top of flange, ensuring a 0.5-inch
distance is kept between the edge of the glass cloth and the mounting bracket, with one edge
resting along the bend line in the metal flange.
25. Work epoxy thoroughly into weave and around the edge of the cloth.
26. Lay top layer of glass cloth over bottom layer, ensuring a 0.5-inch distance is kept between layers
around the perimeter of the glass cloth.
27. Work the epoxy thoroughly into weave and around the edge of the cloth.
28. Allow layers to cure.

Rev. V Page 3-74
Figure 3-62 Final Layers of Cloth on GMU 44 Mounting Bracket
29. The completed installation is shown in Figure 3-63.
Figure 3-63 Final View of GMU 44 Installation on Conductive Surface in Composite

Aircraft

Rev. V Page 3-75
3.2.4.3.3.2 Mounting on Non-Conductive Structure
Same requirement as Section 3.2.4.3.1, except no fiber glass plies are required to be laid under the Al hat
section. The Al hat section may be directly bonded to the aircraft skin.
3.2.4.4 Magnetic Interference Survey
CAUTION
Do not permanently rivet the GMU 44 Universal Mount together. Use rivets held in place
with tape to hold GMU 44 Universal Mount together temporarily. Clecos, clamps, or
other devices that are metal or magnetic should not be used. It is possible that the location
will fail the survey and the installation will require a new location, with a different incline.
1. Temporarily assemble the GMU 44 Universal Mount as outlined in Section 3.2.4.2.1 for level
installation using tape to hold rivets in place.
2. Set the GMU and install rack onto the GMU 44 Universal Mount or other mounting bracket if the
universal mount is not being used. It is preferable to have the GMU 44 forward direction aligned to
the aircraft heading, but is not required.
3. Place the GMU 44 and GMU 44 Universal Mount on the desired installation location.
4. Secure in place using tape. Do not use clamps or other devices that are ferrous or magnetic.
5. Run the Magnetic Interference Survey using the magnetic interference software in accordance
with Appendix G. If the survey passes, the location is considered reliable for the installation of the
GMU 44.
If the test fails, the location should be considered unreliable until the source of the magnetic interference is
identified, remedied, and the location is retested and passes the test. For additional information on
troubleshooting and correcting the GMU 44 Magnetometer installation, refer to Section 6.1. If the
magnetic interference cannot be remedied, another location should be chosen and tested.

Rev. V Page 3-76
3.2.4.5 Method for Determining Heading Angle Offset for Wing Installation
One method of determining the heading angle offset for wing mounted installations is as follows:
1. Transfer the mounting plate alignment to the underside of the wing.
NOTE
For some metal aircraft, it may be possible to use the rivets that secure the plate to the
aircraft skin to translate the plate line. Refer to Figure 3-64. For aircraft that do not have
rivets for reference, such as composite aircraft, dividers may be used.
RIVET LINE FOR

INSTALLATION
OF PANEL
ACCESS PANEL
Figure 3-64 Rivet Line Method to Determine Mounting Panel Alignment
NOTE
Up/down movement of the dividers may offset the location of the mark on the underside of
the wing relative to other marks. It is important to note the holding position of the dividers
and ensure the same holding technique is used for all markings.

Rev. V Page 3-77
2. Using a pair of dividers (similar to those shown in Figure 3-65), transfer the mounting plate line to
the skin of the aircraft.
3. Place packing tape on the underside of the wing for marking.
OR
Figure 3-65 Dividers Used to Transfer Panel Alignment
4. Place one side of the divider inside the aircraft wing with the point making contact with the
mounting plate surface, as shown in Figure 3-66.
MOUNTING PLATE
ACCESS HOLE
DIVIDER
AIRCRAFT SKIN
Figure 3-66 Transferring Mounting Plate Alignment to Underside of Wing

5. Place the other side of the divider outside the aircraft wing.

Rev. V Page 3-78
6. Hold the divider as flush to the wing as possible and mark the point on the tape.
MARK- UP LINE
FOR PANEL LOCATION
UNDERSIDE OF (ON TAPE)
WING
WING ACCESS
PANEL HOLE
DIVIDER
Figure 3-67 Transferring Mounting Plate Alignment to Underside of Wing
NOTE
To verify that a measurement error did not occur due to the holding position of the
dividers, ensure that a straight line intersects all marks.
7. Mark at least three points along the mounting plate and draw a straight line through the points.
8. Verify that the line intersects all points marked.

Rev. V Page 3-79
9. Using a plumb bob, transfer the mounting panel line from the underside of the wing to the shop
floor. Mark at least three points and draw a straight line.
10. Verify that the line intersects all points. Refer to Figure 3-68.
FORWARD EDGE
OF WING
x
x
x
LINE SCRIBED ON TO
UNDERSIDE OF WING
FROM MOUNTING PANEL
PLUMB BOB
x
x
x
TRANSFERRED LINE
ON TO TAPE ON
HANGAR FLOOR
Figure 3-68 Transferring Mounting Panel Line from Underside of Wing to Floor Using
Plumb Bob
Find the aircraft centerline as follows:

1. Drop a plumb bob along each side of the fuselage to the left and right at the cowl line or skin line
near the front of the fuselage.
2. Make a mark for the two plumbs on the floor, as shown in Figure 3-69.
PLUMB BOB LINES
Figure 3-69 Centerline Plumb Bob Method for the Forward Fuselage
3. Strike a line between the two marks using a chalk line.

Rev. V Page 3-80
4. Measure the distance between the two marks and mark the half way point. This will be the
centerline mark for the forward fuselage. Refer to Figure 3-70.
PLUMB BOB MARK

CL ON FLOOR
CENTER MARK
ON FLOOR
Figure 3-70 Center Mark for the Forward Fuselage (Plumb Bob Method)
5. Perform the same procedure to find the center point for the aft end of the fuselage, as shown in
Figure 3-71.
PLUMB BOB
FLOOR
CENTERLINE
Figure 3-71 Centerline Plumb Bob Method for the Aft Fuselage

Rev. V Page 3-81
6. Strike a line between the centerline mark of the forward fuselage and the centerline mark at the aft
end using a chalk line, as shown in Figure 3-72. This will be the aircraft heading reference line.
PLUMB BOB
C
L AFT MARKS
CENTER MARK
ON FLOOR
DRAWN AIRCRAFT
HEADING
REFERENCE LINE
PLUMB BOB
C
L FORWARD
FUSELAGE MARKS
CENTER MARK
ON FLOOR
Figure 3-72 Center Line (Plumb Bob Method)
7. Determine the heading angle offset by comparing the aircraft reference center line to the mounting
plate alignment.
8. Transfer the aircraft center line to the mounting plate line for heading angle offset measurement.

Rev. V Page 3-82
9. Align the laser square to the aircraft reference line so that the other laser line is perpendicular to it
and intersects the mounting plate line drawn on the floor, as shown in Figure 3-73.
10. Mark the point of intersection of the plate line and the laser line.
11. Strike a line on the laser line (between the center reference line and the mounting plate line) using
a chalk line.
X
DRAWN HEADING
REFERENCE LINE
INTERSECTION POINT
(AIRCRAFT)
90°
LASER SQUARE
DRAWN MOUNTING
PANEL LINE (WING)
FORWARD
Figure 3-73 Transferring Center Line Step 1 (Laser Square Method)
12. Position the laser square at the intersection point and align one of the lasers to the chalk line from
the previous step.
13. Strike a line on the laser line parallel to the center reference line using a chalk line. This chalk line
will be the transferred aircraft heading reference line and is used to determine the heading angle
offset. Refer to Figure 3-74.
LINE PARALLEL TO
AIRCRAFT HEADING
DRAWN MOUNTING
PANEL LINE (WING)
DRAWN HEADING
90° 90° REFERENCE LINE
(AIRCRAFT)
LASER SQUARE INTERSECTION POINT
FORWARD
Figure 3-74 Transferring Center Line Step 2 (Laser Square Method)

Rev. V Page 3-83
14. Use a protractor to determine the angle difference between the aircraft heading reference line and
the plate line. Refer to Figure 3-75. This is the heading angle offset that will be used for the
magnetometer top plate installation.
Y°
Figure 3-75 Measuring the Heading Angle Offset
An alternate method to the laser square is the use of the 3-4-5 triangle.
1. Mark a Point A on the aircraft heading reference line that is just aft of the installation location.
2. Measure 3.0 feet forward on the aircraft heading reference line and mark it Point B.
Refer to Figure 3-76.
B
DRAWN MOUNTING
PANEL LINE
3 FT
A
DRAWN HEADING
REFERENCE LINE
(AIRCRAFT)
FORWARD
Figure 3-76 3-4-5 Triangle Method Step 1

Rev. V Page 3-84
3. From Point A, measure 4.0 feet as perpendicular as possible and draw an arc. Refer to
Figure 3-77.
B
DRAWN MOUNTING
PANEL LINE
3 FT
A
DRAWN HEADING
4 FT REFERENCE LINE
(AIRCRAFT)
FORWARD
4. From Point B, measure 5.0 feet and draw an arc that intersects the other; this will be Point C.
5. Draw a straight line from Point C to Point A. This line is perpendicular to the aircraft heading
reference line.
6. Extend the A-C line to intersect with the Panel line. Refer to Figure 3-78.
DRAWN MOUNTING B
PANEL LINE
5 FT
3 FT
90°
C A
DRAWN HEADING
4 FT REFERENCE LINE
(AIRCRAFT)
PERPENDICULAR
LINE
INTERSECTION POINT FORWARD
7. Perform the same procedure to find a perpendicular line to the A-C line.

Rev. V Page 3-85
8. Ensure the base of the 3-4-5 triangle lies on the intersection point of the A-C line and the Panel
line. Refer to Figure 3-79.
DRAWN MOUNTING
PANEL LINE
B-2 B
5 FT
3 FT
90°
A-2 C A
C-2
DRAWN HEADING
4 FT REFERENCE LINE
(AIRCRAFT)
INTERSECTION POINT
FORWARD
9. Measure the heading angle offset.

Rev. V Page 3-86
3.2.5 ADC Mounting
NOTE
The following section applies to both the GDC 74( ) and the GSU 75(B), unless otherwise
stated.
Determine a suitable location for the ADC. For placement information, refer to Section 2.5.11.6. Sample
ADC installations can be found in Appendix Section D.3. When installing a GDC 74( ), comply with the
orientation limits specified in Figure C-13 and Figure C-14. When installing a GSU 75(B), comply with
orientation limits specified in Section 2.5.11.6.
The ADC should be mounted to a surface known to have sufficient structural integrity to withstand
additional inertial forces imposed by the weight of the ADC as well as the accompanying mounting rack.
For ADC and rack weight, refer to Section 3.6. If it is necessary to build a shelf or bracket to mount the
ADC, or if it is not certain that the chosen location is of sufficient structural integrity, refer to Section 3.3.
NOTE
The ADC with mounting rack may be added to an existing electrical or avionics shelf if the
installed weight of the unit and mounting rack, when combined with the weight of the
existing shelf components, is less than or equal to the weight allowed by the shelf
(reference the placard on shelf indicating max weight or aircraft equipment records). A
validation of structures test is not required for this type of installation.
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the operation of the ADC, the following conditions must
be met:
to the aircraft structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC43.13-2B Chapter 2,
AC43.13-1B Chapter 4, and the following requirements:
c. Material shall be a minimum of 0.040-inch thickness. GSU 75(B) installations require material
with a minimum of 0.063-inch thickness per AHRS installation requirements in
Section 3.2.3.1.
and type.
3. Mounting platform shall not span greater than 12.0 inches in width or length without direct
attachment to primary structure. If mounting platform does span greater than 12.0 inches, add
4. Maintain a minimum of 3.0 inches between the forward edge of the mounting rack and any object
to ensure clearance for connector, wire harness, and pitot-static lines, as shown in Figure 3-80.
In addition to the structural requirements, the ADC must be electrically bonded to the aircraft metallic
structure in metal aircraft or the instrument panel in nonmetallic aircraft. For additional details, refer to
Section 3.8.

Rev. V Page 3-87
GDC 74( )
3" UP
AFT
12" MAXIMUM W/O STIFFENER

LONGITUDINALLY
Figure 3-80 Recommended Clearance GDC 74( ) Shown, GSU 75(B) Similar

Rev. V Page 3-88
There are two ways to install the GDC 74( ). Refer to the outline and Figure 3-81.
CONNECTOR
(PART OF GDC 74 CONNECTOR KIT)
GDC 74( ) UNIT
GDC 74 MOUNTING
RACK SUB-ASSEMBLY
4 MINIMUM FASTENERS REQUIRED,

HARDWARE NOT SUPPLIED
Mounting Option I - Remote mounted rack with connector and fittings

opposite screw-down mounting hardware
GDC74( ) UNIT
CONNECTOR
(PART OF GDC 74 CONNECTOR KIT)
GDC 74 MOUNTING
RACK SUB-ASSEMBLY
4 MINIMUM FASTENERS REQUIRED,

Mounting Option II - Remote mounted rack with connector and fittings

on same end as screw down mounting hardware
Figure 3-81 GDC 74( ) Mounting Options

Rev. V Page 3-89
For instructions on installing the GSU 75(B) Remote Install Rack, refer to Section 3.2.3. Install the
GDC 74( ) as follows:
1. Position the GDC 74( ) mounting rack to the mounting panel.
2. Transfer the hole-pattern to the mounting plate from the angle bracket six places (four required,
two optional).
3. Ensure installation requirements outlined in Section 2.5.11.6 are met.
4. Remove mounting plate.
5. Drill the marked hole-pattern (0.144-inch diameter holes).
6. Rivet nut plates (MS21047 or noted equivalent) with rivets (countersunk rivets). Acceptable
hardware is identified in Figure 3-82.
7. Ensure that installed rivets are flush with the installation panel.
8. Remove any burrs or excess rivet heads. Refer to Figure 3-82.
9. If required, perform a structural validation outlined in Section 3.3.
10. Install the mounting rack to the mounting plate using MS35206 or NAS601 screws (four required,
two optional).
1 2 SCREW
(4 REQ'D, 2 OPTIONAL)
GDC 74 HOLD-DOWN CLAMP

GDC 74 REMOTE MOUNT PLATE (PART OF GDC 74 MOUNTING
( PART OF GDC 74 MOUNTING RACK SUBASSEMBLY)
RACK SUBASSEMBLY)
MOUNTING PLATE
1 2 NUTPLATE
RIVET (2X)
(4 REQ'D, 2 OPTIONAL)
NOTES:
SCREWS MS35206 (#6 -32 LENGTH A/R); OR NAS601 (#6 -32 LENGTH A/R)
WASHERS AN960 -6; AN960 - 6L; NAS1149FN632P; RIVETS MS20426AD3 -X
OR NAS1149FN616P
OR
NUTS AN364 -632A (MS21083N06); STANDARD PART; ANY MS (MILITARY
NUTPLATES
2 IN THE HORIZONTAL INSTALLATION THE TWO CENTER HOLE FASTENERS ARE NOT
REQUIRED FOR MOUNTING.
Figure 3-82 Installation of GDC 74( ) Mounting Rack to Mounting Plate
NOTE
Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the ADC to the rack, rather than hand tightening
the knurled screws.
11. Place the GDC 74( ) into its mounting rack and tighten the mounting screws. Recommended
torque is 12-15 in-lbf.

Rev. V Page 3-90
3.2.5.1 Composite Aircraft ADC Installations
Use of an existing avionics mounting location, such as an avionics shelf, is strongly encouraged.
1. If an existing avionics mounting location is available, ensure that the additional weight of the
ADC, when combined with existing equipment, will not exceed the allowable weight of the
location.
2. Refer to the aircraft's SRM or AMM for fastener options and fastener installation methods for the
mounting location.
3. A validation of structures is not required for this installation.
NOTE
Additional design data from the aircraft manufacturer or other approved data is required
for the following situations:
1. A location other than an existing avionics mounting location is desired.
2. The allowable weight of the mounting location is unknown.
3. There are no fastener options or fastener installation methods for the mounting location
specified within the SRM or AMM.
For instructions on installing the GSU 75(B) Remote Install Rack, refer to Section 3.2.3. Install the
GDC 74( ) mounting rack to an existing avionics mounting location as follows:
1. Position the GDC 74( ) mounting rack to the mounting panel.
2. Transfer the hole-pattern to the mounting plate from the angle bracket six places (four required,
two optional).
3. Ensure installation requirements outlined in Section 2.5.11.6 are met.
4. Refer to the SRM or AMM for fastener options and installation methods, utilizing the fastener
pattern prepared in the previous step.
5. Install the mounting rack at the installation location using compatible mil-spec hardware (6-32
hardware; nut, washer, or non-structural screw compatible with the manufacturer-recommended
hardware in the composite shelf). The recommended torque is 12-15 in-lbf.
6. Place the GDC 74( ) into its mounting rack.
7. Firmly tighten the mounting screws.

Rev. V Page 3-91
3.2.5.1.1 ADC, Composite Aircraft Installation Example
The SRM, or AMM for some composite aircraft, provides repair materials and instructions coincident with
the following example. Ensure material and process compatibility before utilizing the example guidance.
It is recommended to use an offset bracket to install the ADC on composite aircraft. Brackets may be
manufactured in accordance with the requirements outlined in Section 3.2.5 for manufactured custom
equipment and recommendations in this section.
Flange should be a minimum of 1.0-inch wide. Flange should have 0.159-inch diameter through holes
0.5 inches apart to provide flow through for the composite flox/epoxy and better adherence to the aircraft’s
inside skin surface, as shown in Figure 3-83.
0.5" PREFERRED
Figure 3-83 Hole-Pattern in Mounting Rack for Composite Aircraft
1. To prepare for bonding, scuff the top and bottom of the bracket flange with 80 grit sandpaper.
by weight.
3. Add cotton fiber (flock) to mixed resin at approximately a 2:1 ratio by volume, or until desired
consistency of paste is achieved.
4. Apply resin and flock mixture to the surface of support structure and bond bracket in place.

Rev. V Page 3-92
5. Apply pressure to the bracket until excess adhesive flows through holes in bracket flanges. Refer
to Figure 3-84.
FLOX / EPOXY MIX

Figure 3-84 Bonding Mounting Rack (Composite Aircraft)
by weight.
7. Layup two plies of glass cloth on top of each flange. First ply shall overlap the flange by 0.5 to
1.0 inches; the second ply, oriented 45° from the first, shall overlap the first ply by 0.5 to 1.0
inches.
8. Work the laminate out to create smooth and even surface. Refer to Figure 3-85.
FIBERGLASS
CLOTH
Figure 3-85 Cloth lay-up for Mounting Rack (Composite Aircraft)

Rev. V Page 3-93
9. Allow the laminate to cure.
10. Install the mounting rack to the mounting plate using MS35206 or NAS601 (#6-32) screws. The
recommended torque is 12-15 in-lbf.
11. Place the ADC into its mounting rack and tighten the mounting screws firmly. Refer to
Figure 3-86.
GDC 74 ADC
INSTALLATION
Figure 3-86 GDC 74( ) Final Installation Example (Composite Aircraft)

Rev. V Page 3-94
3.2.5.2 Pitot-Static Connections to ADC
The installer is required to fabricate pitot-static hose connections, label the hoses near the unit, and attach
the aircraft pitot and static pressure sources to the ADC. For acceptable materials and installation
CAUTION
Check pitot-static connections for errors before operating the ADC. Incorrect plumbing
could cause internal component damage. Ensure there are no pneumatic leaks or sealant
inside the lines and fittings. Avoid getting fluids or particles into the pitot and static lines
connected to the ADC. For the location of the pitot and static ports on the ADC, refer to
Figure C-11 or Figure C-12.
NOTE
It is acceptable for aircraft previously modified in accordance with earlier revisions of this
installation manual to have the standby instruments attached to the pilot’s pitot-static
system. All new installations must be installed as described below.
Depending upon the installation, refer to Figure 3-87 through Figure 3-90 for more information.
1. Make sure the aircraft static pressure port is plumbed directly to the unit static pressure input port.
2. Make sure the aircraft pitot pressure port is plumbed directly to the unit pitot pressure input port.
3. Seal the threads of pneumatic fittings at the connector ports.
TO PILOT’S PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM

STATIC
PITOT
20
200 PITOT PITOT

40
180
AIRSPEED
60
160 $'&
KNOTS 80
140
100
STATIC STATIC
120
100 FEET
0 1
9
8 2
300
301
302
7 3
6 5 4
Figure 3-87 Single Pitot-Static System Connections for Single G500/G600 Installation

Rev. V Page 3-95
TO COPILOT’S PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM
STATIC
PITOT
STATIC
PITOT
20
200
40
180
AIRSPEED
60
160
KNOTS 80
140
100
120
PITOT
$'&
STATIC
100 FEET
0 1
9
8 2
300
301
302
7 3
6 5 4
Figure 3-88 Dual Pitot-Static System Connections for Single G500/G600 Installation
PITOT
TO PILOTS PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM
$'& #2
STATIC
PITOT
STATIC
STATIC
PITOT
20
200 PITOT PITOT
40
180
60
160 $'& #1
80
140
STATIC STATIC
120 100
Figure 3-89 Single Pitot-Static System Connections for Dual G500/G600 Installation

Rev. V Page 3-96
STATIC
PITOT
PITOT
TO COPILOT’S PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM
$'& #1
STATIC
STATIC
PITOT
20
200 PITOT PITOT

40
180
AIRSPEED
60
160 $'& #2
KNOTS 80
140
100 STATIC STATIC
120
100 FEET
0 1
9
8 2
300
301
302
7 3
6 5 4
Figure 3-90 Dual Pitot-Static System Connections for Dual G500/G600 Installation

Rev. V Page 3-97
3.2.6 GTP 59 Temperature Probe Mounting
The GTP 59 OAT Probe Kit (P/N 011-00978-00) contains the items listed in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 GTP 59 OAT Probe Kit

Figure 3-91 Description Garmin P/N Qty Notes
1 Washer, Lock, Self-Sealing, 5/16 212-00026-00 1
2 Nut, 5/16", Hex, Skirt 210-00055-00 1
3 OAT Sensor 494-00022-XX 1
- Screw, 4-40 x 0.250, PHP, SS/P, w/NYL 211-60234-08 2 [1]
- Contact, Pin, Mil Crimp, Size 22D 336-00021-00 5 [1]
4 Ring Terminal 336-00021-00 0 [2]
Notes:
[1] This item is not used for installation of the probe. It is used for termination of the wiring at
the GDC 74( ) connector P741. Refer to Section 3.4 for additional details.
[2] Ring terminal is part of OAT sensor assembly.
Assembly of the OAT probe is shown in Figure 3-91. Install the probe in accordance with Section 3.2.6.1
for metal aircraft, Section 3.2.6.2 for tube and fabric aircraft, and Section 3.2.6.3 for nonmetallic aircraft.
2 Ø 0.312 IN. THRU
3 2
1
1
1 CABLE: M27500 - 22TE3V14

2 MATERIAL THICKNESS:
0.032 INCHES MINIMUM IF GTP 59 IS MOUNTED ON ALUMINUM AIRCRAFT SKIN.
0.020 INCHES MINIMUM IF GTP 59 IS MOUNTED ON ACCESS PANEL.
Figure 3-91 GTP OAT Probe Kit Assembly
NOTE
For aircraft model-specific information regarding bonding to or isolation from the aircraft
structure/ground plane, refer to Table K-1.

Rev. V Page 3-98
3.2.6.1 GTP 59 Temperature Probe Installation in Metal Aircraft
NOTE
For metal aircraft, the GTP 59 can be mounted in the aluminum skin or in an access
panel/inspection cover.
NOTE
A doubler is not required for GTP 59 installations on an access panel/inspection cover in
Lightning Zone 3. A doubler is required for all other GTP 59 installations. The type of
doubler depends upon the location selected for the GTP 59.
1. Determine a suitable location for the GTP 59 (refer to Section 2.5.11.7 for placement information).
2. For the selected location, use Table 3-4 to determine whether doubler type A or B is required. Each
type of doubler has two options for fabrication.
3. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance to install the doubler at the selected location.
4. Drill a 5/16-inch hole through the aircraft skin or access panel/inspection cover at the desired
location.
5. Based upon the material thickness at the selected location, and the information contained in
Figure 3-94, fabricate the applicable doubler according to Figure 3-92 or Figure 3-93. Each figure
provides two options – only one must be used, if applicable.
6. Install the doubler in accordance with Figure 3-94, if applicable.
7. Install the GTP 59 in accordance with Figure 3-94.
8. Ensure that the resistance between the GTP 59 and the aluminum skin is 2.5 mΩ or less.
Table 3-4 GTP 59 Doubler Types
Aircraft Skin or Access
Location Doubler Figure
Panel Thickness
Lightning Zone 3 Any Type A [1] Figure 3-92
Lightning Zone 2A Less than 0.032 inches Type B Figure 3-93
Lightning Zone 2A 0.032 inches or greater Type A Figure 3-92
Notes:
[1] If the GTP 59 is installed on an access panel/inspection cover in Lightning Zone 3, a
doubler is not required.

Rev. V Page 3-99
DOUBLER A
OPTION 1 AS NOTED IN FIGURE 3-95
APPLIES TO:
ZONE 3 LOCATIONS
AND
ZONE 2A LOCATIONS
WHERE SKIN THICKNESS IS
.032" OR GREATER Ø1.50
Ø1.00
Ø0.323
Ø0.129 (5X)
NOTES:
1. MATERIAL SHOULD BE 2024 -T3 SHEET ALUMINUM, THICKNESS AS NOTED IN DOUBLER INSTALLATION FIGURE.
2. APPLY CORROSION PROTECTION: ALODINE FOLLOWED BY ZINC CHROMATE (FED STD TT - P - 1757) PRIMER.
ON ALL SURFACES.
DOUBLER A
APPLIES TO:
ZONE 3 LOCATIONS 1.50
AND
ZONE 2A LOCATIONS R0.50
WHERE SKIN THICKNESS IS
.032" OR GREATER
Ø1.00
1.50
Ø0.323
Ø0.129 (5X)
NOTES:
1. MATERIAL SHOULD BE 2024 -T3 SHEET ALUMINUM, THICKNESS AS NOTED IN DOUBLER INSTALLATION FIGURE.
2. APPLY CORROSION PROTECTIO N: ALODINE FOLLOWED BY ZINC CHROMATE (FED STD TT -P-1757) PRIMER.
ON ALL SURFACES.
Figure 3-92 GTP 59 Doubler A

Rev. V Page 3-100
DOUBLER B
APPLIES TO:
ZONE 2A LOCATIONS
WHERE SKIN THICKNESS
IS LESS THAN .032"
Ø2.000
Ø1.50
Ø0.323
Ø0.129 (5X)
NOTES:
1. MATERIAL SHOULD BE 2024 -T3 SHEET ALUMINUM, AS NOTED IN DOUBLER INSTALLATION FIGURE.
2. APPLY CORROSION PROTECTION: ALODINE FOLLOWED BY ZINC CHROMATE (FED STD TT - P -1757) PRIMER.
ON ALL SURFACES.
DOUBLER B
AS NOTED IN FIGURE 3-95
OPTION 2
2.00
APPLIES TO:
ZONE 2A LOCATIONS R0.50 TYP
WHERE SKIN THICKNESS
IS LESS THAN .032"
Ø1.50
2.00
Ø0.323
Ø0.129 (5X)
NOTES:
1. MATERIAL SHOULD BE 2024-T3 SHEET ALUMINUM, AS NOTED IN DOUBLER INSTALLATION FIGURE.
2. APPLY CORROSION PROTECTION: ALODINE FOLLOWED BY ZINC CHROMATE (FED STD TT - P - 1757) PRIMER.
ON ALL SURFACES.
Figure 3-93 GTP 59 Doubler B

Rev. V Page 3-101
UNIVERSAL HEAD (MS20470AD) 100° FLUSH SHEAR HEAD (NAS1097AD4)
SKIN DOUBLER SKIN DOUBLER MATERIAL
THICKNESS THICKNESS QTY RIVET CHOICE THICKNESS THICKNESS QTY PREPARATION
[IN.] [IN.] [IN.] [IN.] SKIN DOUBLER
0.020 0.032 5 MS20470AD3 (3 32 " DIA.) 0.020 - - - -
0.025 0.032 5 MS20470AD4 ( 18 " DIA.) 0.025 0.032 5 DIMPLE DIMPLE
0.032 0.040 5 MS20470AD4 ( 18 " DIA.) 0.032 0.040 5 DIMPLE C'SK
0.040 0.050 5 MS20470AD4 ( 18 " DIA.) 0.040 0.050 5 C'SK -
0.050 0.063 5 MS20470AD4 ( 18 " DIA.) 0.050 0.063 5 C'SK -
0.063 0.071 5 MS20470AD4 ( 18 " DIA.) 0.063 0.071 5 C'SK -
100° FLUSH HEAD (MS20426AD)

MATERIAL PREPARATION
SKIN THICKNESS DOUBLER THICKNESS MS20426AD3 ( 3 32 " DIA.) MS20426AD4 ( 18 " DIA.)
QTY
[IN.] [IN.] SKIN DOUBLER SKIN DOUBLER
0.020 0.032 5 DIMPLE DIMPLE - -
0.025 0.032 5 - - DIMPLE DIMPLE
0.032 0.040 5 - - DIMPLE DIMPLE
0.040 0.050 5 - - DIMPLE C'SK
0.050 0.063 5 - - C'SK -
0.063 0.071 5 - - C'SK -
Figure 3-94 GTP 59 Temperature Probe and Doubler Installation

Rev. V Page 3-102
3.2.6.2 GTP 59 Temperature Probe Installation in Tube-and-Fabric Aircraft
NOTE
For tube-and-fabric aircraft, the GTP 59 must be mounted in an access panel/inspection
cover and fairing.
NOTE
A doubler is not required for GTP 59 installations on an access panel/inspection cover in
Lightning Zone 3. A doubler is required for all other GTP 59 installations. The type of
doubler depends upon the location selected for the GTP 59.
1. Determine a suitable location for the GTP 59. For placement information, refer to Section 2.5.11.7.
2. For the selected location, use Table 3-4 to determine whether doubler type A or B is required. Each
type of doubler has two options for fabrication.
3. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance to install the doubler at the selected location.
4. Drill a 5/16-inch hole through the access panel/inspection cover at the desired location.
5. Based upon the material thickness at the selected location, and the information contained in
Figure 3-94, fabricate the applicable doubler according to Figure 3-92 or Figure 3-93. Each figure
provides two options – only one must be used, if applicable.
6. Install the doubler in accordance with Figure 3-94, if applicable.
8. Ensure that the GTP 59 is bonded to the metallic tube structure with a resistance of 2.5 mΩ or less
with the connector disconnected. A bonding strap meeting the following criteria must be used to
accomplish this:
a. The cross-sectional area of the strap must be greater than 0.016 sq. inches (approx 20800
circular mils). A 7/16-inch or wider tubular braid (QQB575R30T437, 24120 circular mils) or
a 3/4-inch or wider flat braid (QQB575F36T781, 20,800 circular mils) must be used.
b. The strap length should be as short as possible and must not exceed six inches, and the
installation shall be such that it avoids the strap looping back on itself.
c. A terminal lug (for 5/16 stud size) must be used to connect the braid directly to the GTP 59, as
Refer to Bonding Jumper Installations in AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11 for guidance on bonding to tubular
structure.

Rev. V Page 3-103
3.2.6.3 GTP 59 Temperature Probe Installation in Nonmetallic Aircraft
NOTE
Making a hole in the aircraft skin for nonmetallic aircraft is not substantiated as part of
this AML STC. Consequently, for nonmetallic aircraft, the GTP 59 can only be mounted in
an access panel/inspection cover. If it is desired to mount the GTP 59 in the aircraft skin
rather than an access panel/inspection cover, alternate approval for the GTP 59
installation is required.
NOTE
Any modifications made should comply with the AMM and SRM for that particular
aircraft.
NOTE
Carbon-reinforced composite (with or without mesh) or fiberglass with mesh is considered
conductive.

Rev. V Page 3-104
Non-Conductive Access Panels/Inspection Covers
1. Determine a suitable location for the GTP 59 (refer to Section 2.5.11.7 for placement information).
The GTP 59 and its terminal lug shall have a minimum of 0.5-inch clearance from anything
conductive in the area in which it is mounted.
2. Drill a 5/16-inch hole through the access panel/inspection cover at the desired location.
Figure 3-95 GTP 59 Installation in a Non-Conductive Access Panel
Conductive Access Panels/Inspection Covers

1. Determine a suitable location for the GTP 59. For placement information, refer to Section 2.5.11.7.
The GTP 59 and its terminal lug must have minimum 0.5-inch clearance from anything conductive
in the area in which it is mounted.
2. Drill a 1.5-inch hole through the access panel/inspection cover at the desired location.
3. Fabricate and install a non-conductive doubler. Use Grade L (Linen Base) Phenolic Sheet
(MIL-I-24768/15-FBI), thickness 0.0625-inch and minimum diameter of 2.5 inches.
4. Drill a 5/16-inch hole through the newly installed doubler, centered in the 1.5-inch opening in the
access panel/inspection cover.

Rev. V Page 3-105
Figure 3-96 GTP 59 Installation in Conductive Inspection Cover

Rev. V Page 3-106
3.2.7 GAD 43/43e Adapter Mounting
NOTE
Mechanical installation requirements for the GAD 43 and GAD 43e are identical except
where noted.
NOTE
The GAD 43 may be added to an existing electrical or avionics shelf if the installed weight
of the unit, when combined with the weight of the existing shelf components, is less than or
equal to the weight allowed by the shelf (reference the placard on shelf indicating max
weight or aircraft equipment records). A validation of structures test is not required for
this type of installation.
Determine a suitable location for the GAD 43/43e. For placement information, refer to Section 2.5.11.9.
Sample GAD 43/43e installations can be found in Appendix Section D.4.
The GAD 43/43e should be mounted to a surface known to have sufficient structural integrity to withstand
additional inertial forces imposed by a 1.9-pound unit (i.e., weight of GAD 43) or a 2.26-pound unit
(i.e., weight of GAD 43e). If it is necessary to build a shelf or bracket to mount the GAD 43/43e, or if it is
not certain that the chosen location is of sufficient structural integrity, refer to Section 3.3.
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the operation of the GAD 43/43e, the following
conditions must be met:
to the aircraft structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC43.13-2B Chapter 2,
AC43.13-1B Chapter 4, and the following requirements:
c. Material shall be minimum 0.040 inches thick.
and type.
3. Mounting platform shall not span greater than 12 inches in width or length without direct
attachment to primary structure. If mounting platform does span greater than 12 inches, add
Existing honeycomb core sandwich panels with aluminum face sheets are adequate and do not
require additional reinforcement.
4. Maintain a minimum of three inches between the forward edge of the GAD mounting flanges and
any object to ensure clearance for connector and wire harness, as shown in Figure 3-97.

Rev. V Page 3-107
GAD 43/43e
3"
UP
AFT
Figure 3-97 GAD 43/43e Recommended Clearance

Rev. V Page 3-108
In addition to the structural requirements, the GAD 43/43e must be electrically bonded to the aircraft
metallic structure (metal aircraft) or instrument panel (nonmetallic aircraft). Refer to Section 3.8 for
additional details.
There are two ways to install the GAD 43/43e. Refer to the outline and Figure 3-98.
GAD 43/43e UNIT

4 FASTENERS REQUIRED,
Option I (Tall Orientation) –

Installation uses short flanges, which contain two holes per flange
GAD 43/43e UNIT
4 FASTENERS REQUIRED,
2 (CENTER) FASTENERS OPTIONAL,
Option II (Short Orientation) -

Installation uses long flanges, which contain three holes per flange
Figure 3-98 GAD 43/43e Installation Options (GAD 43 shown)

Rev. V Page 3-109
1. Position the GAD 43/43e to the mounting panel and transfer the hole-pattern to the mounting plate
from the flanges (four places for the tall orientation or six places for the short orientation). Ensure
installation requirements per Section 2.5.11.9 are met.
2. Remove GAD 43/43e, drill the marked hole-pattern (0.166-inch diameter holes), and rivet nut
plates (MS21047 or noted equivalent) with rivets (countersunk rivets). Acceptable hardware is
identified in Figure 3-99. Ensure that installed rivets are flush with the installation panel. Remove
any burrs or excess rivet heads.
3. If required, perform a structural validation outlined in Section 3.3.
4. Install GAD 43/43e to the mounting plate. Tighten all screws with 12-15 in-lbf torque.
UP
SCREW 1
(4 (CORNER) REQUIRED, 2 (CENTER) OPTIONAL)
GAD 43/43e UNIT
MOUNTING
SURFACE
NUTPLATE 1
OR
NUT AND WASHER 1
(4 (CORNER) REQUIRED, 2 (CENTER) OPTIONAL)
MOUNTING
NOTES: SURFACE
1. RECOMMENDED HARDWARE OPTIONS FOR ASSEMBLY:
RIVETS MS20470AD4 -X; OR MS20426AD4 -X
WASHERS AN960 -8; AN960 -8L; NAS1149FN832P; NUTPLATES STANDARD PART; ANY MS (MILITARY
OR NAS1149FN816P SPECIFICATION) PART NUMBER
OR
NUTS AN364 -832A (MS21083N08); RIVETS MS20426AD3 -X
OR MS21042L08
Figure 3-99 Installation of the GAD 43/43e to a Mounting Surface

(GAD 43 Short Orientation Shown)

Rev. V Page 3-110
3.2.7.1 Composite Aircraft GAD 43/GAD 43e Installations
Use of an existing avionics mounting location, such as an avionics shelf, is strongly encouraged.
1. If an existing avionics mounting location is available, ensure that the additional weight of the
GAD 43/43e, when combined with existing equipment, will not exceed the allowable weight of the
location.
2. Refer to the aircraft's SRM or AMM for fastener options and fastener installation methods for the
mounting location.
3. A validation of structures is not required for this installation.
NOTE
Additional design data from the aircraft manufacturer or other FAA-approved data is
required for the following situations:
1. A location other than an existing avionics mounting location is desired.
2. The allowable weight of the mounting location is unknown.
3. There are no fastener options or fastener installation methods for the mounting location
specified within the SRM or AMM.
To install the GAD 43/43e to an existing avionics mounting location:

1. Position the GAD 43/43e to the mounting location and transfer the hole-pattern to the mounting
location, six places (four required, two optional) for the horizontal orientation or four places for
the vertical orientation. Ensure installation requirements outlined in Section 2.5.11.9 are met.
2. Refer to the SRM or AMM for fastener options and installation methods, utilizing the fastener
pattern prepared in the previous step.
3. Install the GAD 43/43e at the installation location using compatible mil-spec hardware (8-32
hardware; nut, washer, or non-structural screw compatible with the manufacturer-recommended
hardware in the composite shelf). The recommended torque is 12-15 in-lbf.

Rev. V Page 3-111
3.3 Construction and Validation of Structures
This section includes information necessary for testing load-carrying capabilities of equipment mounting
structures (e.g., shelves, mounting plates, and mounting brackets) used to mount the AHRS, ADC, and
GAD 43/43e for situations where an approved installation location (such as an avionics shelf) is not used.
If support racks, brackets, or shelves need to be fabricated, they should be fabricated and attached to the
aircraft structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC43.13-2B Chapter 2. After the structure is
installed, it should be tested outlined in AC43.13-2B Chapter 1 to verify that it is capable of supporting the
required loads.
The AHRS, ADC, and GAD 43/43e (if mounted within the fuselage) installations must be capable of
withstanding the Static Test Load Factors listed in the corresponding tables below for at least 3 seconds in
each specified direction without damage or permanent deformation. Additionally, there should not be
noticeable deflection of the AHRS mounting structure. Note that these required loads differ somewhat
from those normally required for equipment installations. The following tables show the static test loads
for the AHRS, ADC, and GAD 43/43e.
NOTE
A validation of structure test is not required for composite aircraft installations or
installations that utilize an existing avionics shelf previously approved to accommodate
the weight of the installed equipment.
3.3.1 G500/G600 Static Test Loads

3.3.1.1 GRS 77 Static Test Loads
The combined weight of the GRS 77, connector, and remote install rack is 3.50 lbs. The static loads that
must be applied (load factor × 3.50 lbs.) will be the following:
Table 3-5 GRS 77 Static Test Loads (Without GRS 77 Universal Mount)
Direction Load Static Test Load
of Force Factor (Load Factor x (GRS 77 + Remote Install Rack Weight))
Downward 6.6 g 6.6 × 3.5 = 23.10 lbs
Upward 6.0 g 6.0 × 3.5 = 21.00 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g 4.5 × 3.5 = 15.75 lbs
Forward 18.0 g 18.0 × 3.5 = 63.00 lbs
The combined weight of the GRS 77, connector, remote install rack, and GRS 77 Universal Mount is
4.55 lbs. The static loads that must be applied (load factor × 4.55 lbs.) will be the following:
Table 3-6 GRS 77 Static Test Loads (With GRS 77 Universal Mount)
of Force Factor (Load Factor x (GRS 77 + Remote Install Rack & Universal Bracket Weight))
Downward 6.6 g 6.6 × 4.55 = 30.03 lbs
Upward 6.0 g 6.0 × 4.55 = 27.30 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g 4.5 × 4.55 = 20.48 lbs
Forward 18.0 g (18.0 x 4.55) = 81.90 lbs

Rev. V Page 3-112
3.3.1.2 GSU 75(B) Static Test Loads
The combined weight of the GSU 75(B), connectors, and mounting rack is 1.72 lbs. The structure on which
the GSU 75(B) is mounted must be able to support the following loads (load factor × 1.72 lbs):
Table 3-7 GSU 75(B) Static Test Loads (Without GRS 77 Universal Mount)
Direction
Load Factor Test Load Notes
of Force
Downward 6.6 g (9.0 g) 6.6 (9.0) × 1.72 = 11.4 lbs (15.5 lbs) [1]
Upward 3.0 g (4.5 g) 3.0 (4.5) × 1.72 = 5.2 lbs (7.7 lbs) [1]
Sideward 4.5 g 4.5 × 1.72 = 7.7 lbs
Forward 18.0 g 18.0 × 1.72 = 31.0 lbs [2]
Notes:
[1] Load factors applicable to aerobatic category airplanes are shown in parentheses.
Otherwise, load factors applicable to all category airplanes.
[2] Applicable only if equipment is mounted inside the cabin and could injure an occupant if
loose.
Combined weight of the GSU 75(B), connectors, mounting rack, and GRS 77 Universal Mount is 2.77 lbs.
The structure on which the GSU 75(B) is mounted must be able to support the following loads (load factor
× 2.77 lbs):
Table 3-8 GSU 75(B) Static Test Loads (With GRS 77 Universal Mount)
Direction
Load Factor Test Load Notes
of Force
Downward 6.6 g (9.0 g) 6.6 (9.0) × 2.77 = 18.3 lbs (24.9 lbs) [1]
Upward 3.0 g (4.5 g) 3.0 (4.5) × 2.77 = 8.3 lbs (12.5 lbs) [1]
Sideward 4.5 g 4.5 × 2.77 = 12.5 lbs
Forward 18.0 g 18.0 × 2.77 = 49.9 lbs [2]
Notes:
[1] Load factors applicable to aerobatic category airplanes are shown in parentheses.
Otherwise, load factors applicable to all category airplanes.
[2] Applicable only if equipment is mounted inside the cabin and could injure an occupant if
loose.

Rev. V Page 3-113
3.3.1.3 GDC 74( ) Static Test Loads
The combined weight of the GDC 74( ), connector, and mounting rack is 2.30 lbs. The static loads that
must be applied (load factor × 2.30 lbs) will be:
Table 3-9 GDC 74( ) Static Test Loads

of Force Factor (Load Factor x (GDC 74( ) + Mounting Rack Weight))
Downward 6.6 g 6.6 × 2.3 = 15.18 lbs
Upward 6.0 g 6.0 × 2.3 = 13.80 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g 4.5 × 2.3 = 10.35 lbs
Forward 18.0 g 18.0 × 2.3 = 41.40 lbs
3.3.1.4 GAD 43/43e Static Test Loads
NOTE
For new installations, GAD 43e static loads should be used for both the GAD 43 and
GAD 43e.
The combined weight of the GAD 43e and connector is 2.84 lbs. The static loads that must be applied (load
factor × 2.84 lbs.) will be the following:
Table 3-10 GAD 43e Static Test Loads

of Force Factor (Load Factor x (GAD 43e Weight))
Downward 6.6 g 6.6 × 2.84 = 18.74 lbs
Upward 6.0 g 6.0 × 2.84 = 17.04 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g 4.5 × 2.84 = 12.78 lbs
Forward 18.0 g 18.0 × 2.84 = 51.12 lbs

Rev. V Page 3-114
3.3.2 Test Procedures
One method of determining the static load capability is as follows:
NOTE
Previously installed nut plates for mounting the AHRS, ADC, GMU 44, or GAD 43/43e
may be used for testing. For installation on an existing aircraft panel (which will require
no removal), testing may be accomplished prior to installing nut plates using the method
below.
1. Mark and drill the holes where the rack or universal mount will be installed, whichever is
applicable to the installation.
2. For a GSU 75(B) installation, install four #10-32 machine screws in the corner holes used to attach
the remote install rack to the structure.
For a GRS 77 installation, install four #10-32 machine screws (refer to Figure 3-18 for GRS 77
Universal Mount and Figure 3-27 for the remote install rack) in the corner holes used to attach the
GRS 77 Universal Mount or remote install rack to structure.
For a GDC 74( ) installation, install four 6-32 machine screws (refer to Figure 3-82) in the four
corner holes, when attaching the GDC 74( ) mounting rack to existing structure. If special brackets
are used between the mounting rack and existing structure, the bracket attachment to structure
must be tested.
For a GAD 43/43e installation, install four #8-32 machine screws (refer to Figure 3-99) in the four
corner holes.
For a GMU 44 installation, install two, three, or four pieces of hardware. If using the universal
mount in a side mount installation configuration, use two #6-32 machine screws (stainless), as
demonstrated in Figure 3-55 (left side), and supported by a subsequent hardware discussion. If
using the universal mount in a bottom mount installation configuration, use four #6-32 machine
screws (stainless), as demonstrated in Figure 3-55 (right side), and supported by a subsequent
hardware discussion. If installing the GMU 44 Installation Rack directly to existing structure, use
the three pan head screws that arrive with the GMU 44 Installation Kit.
3. For testing downward loading, place shot bags or other suitable weights totaling the static test load
weight of the equipment plus the rack within the footprint outlined by the four screw holes.
4. Verify that there is no damage, permanent deformation, or noticeable deflection of the structure
during and after 3 seconds.
5. Fasten a 36-inch loop of suitable material, such as fishing line, braided wire, or other similar
material having a breaking strength of at least 150 lbs, diagonally between two of the screws.
Fasten another loop diagonally between the other two screws, adjusting the length of the loop so it
exactly matches the first.
6. Hook a calibrated force gauge through both loops and apply a sustained pull for at least 3 seconds
in each of the other three directions (upward, sideward, and forward). Figure 3-100 illustrates the
upward static load test, and Figure 3-101 illustrates the forward static load test. The sideward static
load test is similar to the forward load test, in a direction perpendicular to the forward load. The
force applied must correspond to the static test load calculated for unit and rack configuration
being installed (the static test load values are found in the tables above).

Rev. V Page 3-115
7. Examine the support structure carefully. If there has been damage, permanent deformation, or
noticeable deflection, the structure is not suitable and must be replaced with one that is strong
enough to withstand the test loads. Examine all aircraft stringers, bulkheads, and skin surfaces that
may have direct or indirect contact with the fabricated parts. If it is determined that no damage or
permanent deformation has occurred, the structure is of sufficient strength and may be used to
permanently mount the AHRS, ADC, GMU 44, or GAD 43/43e.
Figure 3-100 Upward Static Load Test
Figure 3-101 Forward Static Load Test

Rev. V Page 3-116
3.4 Cabling and Wiring
The installation kits for the G500/G600 system LRUs include connectors and crimp contacts. Use wire
specified in Section 2.4.2 for all G500/G600 connections. Make the crimp connections with a crimp tool as
specified in Table 3-11.
Refer to the interconnect diagrams in Appendix F for the applicable interconnections. Use 22 or 24 AWG
wire for all connections except for power. Use 20 AWG wire or larger for power/ground, unless otherwise
specified by the system interconnect or AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11-69. Install the configuration modules as
described in Section 3.4.2.3. Once the cable assemblies have been made, attach the backshell/connector to
the rear of the mounting unit. Route the wiring bundle as applicable. Avoid sharp bends.
The #1 and #2 G500/G600 systems should not share any circuit breakers or ground returns. The standby
instruments must not share any circuit breakers or ground returns with either G500/G600 system. Wiring
from the #1 G500/G600 system and electronic standby instruments should be routed independently and,
ideally, independent from the #2 G500/G600 system.
3.4.1 Wiring Harness

Allow adequate space for installation of cables and connectors. The installer supplies and fabricates all of
the cables. All electrical connections to the G500/G600 equipment are made through the following
D-subminiature (D-sub) or circular connectors provided by Garmin:
• GDU 620 - one 37-pin D-sub connector (female), one 50-pin D-sub connector (female) and one 62-
pin D-sub connector (male)
• GRS 77 - one 44-pin D-sub connector (male)
• GMU 44 - one 9-pin circular connector (female)
• GSU 75(B) - one 78-pin D-sub connector (male)
• GDC 74( ) - one 78-pin D-sub connector (male)
• GAD 43 - one 50-pin D-sub connector (female)
• GAD 43e - one 50-pin D-sub connector (female), one 78-pin D-sub connector (male), and one
26-pin D-sub connector (male)
Construct the wiring harness according to the information contained in this and the following sections.
Cable lengths will vary depending upon installation.
1. Strip all wires going to the connectors 0.17 inches.
2. Insert the wire into the pin and crimp with one of the recommended crimping tools.
3. Insert the pin into the connector housing location as specified by the interconnect drawing in
Appendix F.
4. Verify that the pin is properly engaged into the connector by gently tugging on the wire.
5. Route and secure the cable runs from the G500/G600 LRUs away from sources of electrical noise.
Appendix B provides the pin-out information for all G500/G600 LRUs. Required connectors and
associated hardware are supplied with the connector kits. For interconnect wiring diagrams, refer to
Appendix F.
CAUTION
Check wiring connections for errors before connecting the cables to the LRUs. Incorrect
wiring could cause component damage.

Rev. V Page 3-117
Table 3-11 Socket Contact Part Numbers
62-contact connector
37-contact connector (P6203)
(P6201) 44-contact connector
Configuration Module
50-contact connector (P771)
(P6202, P431) 50-contact connector
Wire Gauge 78-contact connector
(P6202)
9-contact connector (P741, P432, P751)
(P441) 26-contact connector
(P433)
20-24 AWG [1] 28 AWG [3] 22-28 AWG
Garmin P/N 336-00022-00 336-00022-01 336-00021-00
Military P/N M39029/63-368 N/A M39029/58-360
AMP [2] N/A N/A 204370-2
Positronic [2] N/A N/A MC8522D
ITT Cannon [2] N/A N/A 030-2042-000
Notes:
[1] Contacts listed are not to be used for configuration module wiring. Use the contacts
supplied with the configuration module when installing configuration module wires in
P6202.
[2] Non-Garmin part numbers shown are not maintained by Garmin and are subject to
change without notice.
[3] For configuration module pins, ensure that the crimp tool is set to crimp 28 AWG wire.
Table 3-12 Recommended Crimp Tools

22-28 AWG [2]
20-24 AWG
(P741, P771, P6203, P432, P433,
Hand (P6201, P6202, P431)
Manufacturer P751)
Crimping Tool
Insertion/ Insertion/
Positioner Positioner
Extraction Tool Extraction Tool
M81969/14-02 M81969/14-01
Military P/N M22520/2-01 M22520/2-08 M22520/2-09
M81969/1-02 M81969/1-04
Positronic [1] 9507 9502-11 N/A 9502-3 M81969/1-04
ITT Cannon [1] 995-0001-584 N/A N/A 995-0001-739 N/A
AMP [1] 601966-1 N/A N/A 601966-6 91067-1
Daniels [1] AFM8 K13-1 N/A K42 N/A
Astro [1] 615717 615724 N/A 615725 N/A
Notes:
[1] Non-Garmin part numbers shown are not maintained by Garmin and are subject to
change without notice.
[2] For configuration module pins, ensure that the crimp tool is set to crimp 28 AWG wire.

Rev. V Page 3-118
3.4.1.1 Shield and Connection Consideration
Shield termination at non-Garmin equipment end must be as short as possible and not to exceed 3 inches,
taking into consideration any non-Garmin equipment’s installation requirements. When there are no
requirements given by the non-Garmin equipment installation manual, then the shields may be connected
to the metal connector backshell when the backshell is grounded to airframe chassis ground. Alternately,
the shield termination may be directly connected to airframe chassis ground, maintaining the 3-inch limit.
Intermediate connections must be minimized to maintain certified electromagnetic compatibility. Although
the interconnect drawings do not show all intermediate connections (i.e., bulkhead connectors, terminal
blocks, splices, etc.), all shields must have continuity at any intermediate connection unless otherwise
specified. When shields are terminated to the aircraft ground or metal backshell to provide this continuity,
the shield drain wire must be no longer than three inches unless non-Garmin equipment requires shorter
length. The termination methods specified in Section 3.4.2 may be used at these locations unless this
conflicts with the requirement of non-Garmin equipment.
If intermediate connectors are used on an audio line, run the shields through a pin on all intermediate
connectors. Audio line shields should be continuous from end to end and be grounded only at one end to
prevent ground loops.
If a wire from a G500/G600 component goes to a connector at the remote end that includes overbraided
wires, then the new wiring added at the remote end connector must also be overbraided. Any wires spliced
into this wire must also be overbraided. If this wiring passes through intermediate connections, then each
segment shall be overbraided and the overbraid must be grounded at both ends. Match existing overbraid
part number, if possible. Otherwise, use parts in Appendix Section N.1.1 or larger QQB575C part. The
overbraid must be terminated as close to the connector as possible, taking into account any requirements
imposed by the non-Garmin equipment. These additional wires should be routed with the existing cable,
where possible.
3.4.1.2 Shielded Cable Preparation

Prepare all of the shielded cables as shown in Figure 3-102. When terminating shield drains, a maximum of
two shields can be daisy chained together. The daisy chaining method may only be used if the six tapped
holes in the shield block are insufficient to ground all shields. Refer to Figure 3-102.
1. At the end of the shielded cable (1), strip back a 2.5-inch maximum length of the jacket to expose
the braid.
2. Remove this exposed braid.
3. Carefully score the jacket 1/4 to 5/16 inches from the end and remove the jacket to leave the braid
exposed.
NOTE
Solder sleeves with pre-installed shield drains may be used instead of separate shield
terminators and individual wires.
4. Connect a 20 or 22 AWG wire (2) to the exposed shield of the prepared cable assembly. Refer to
Figure 3-102. AC 43.13 may be a helpful reference for termination techniques.

Rev. V Page 3-119
NOTE
Solder Sleeves with pre-installed lead: A preferred solder sleeve is the Raychem S03
series with the thermochromic temperature indicator. These solder sleeves come with a
pre-installed lead and effectively take the place of items (2) and (3). For detailed
instructions on product use, refer to the Raychem installation procedure.
5. Slide a shield terminator (3) onto the prepared cable assembly (1).
6. Connect the shield wire (2) to the shield using a heat gun approved for use with solder sleeves. The
chosen size of solder sleeve must accommodate both the number of conductors present in the cable
and the shield wire (2) to be attached.
7. Crimp contacts (4) onto the cable wires.
8. Wrap the cable bundle with silicone fusion tape (5 or a similar version) at the point where the
backshell strain relief and cast housing will contact the cable bundle.
9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 as needed for the remaining shielded cables.
10. Install a ring terminal (6) onto the cable shield termination wires (2), grouping wires as applicable
for the connector.

Rev. V Page 3-120
2.5" MAX 3
0.17"
0.31" OF EXPOSED SHIELD
2
SHIELD DRAINS AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL

(NO LONGER THAN 3”)
PREFERRED METHOD
2.5" MAX 3
2
0.17"
0.31" OF EXPOSED SHIELD
SHIELD DRAINS AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL

(NO LONGER THAN 3”)
ALTERNATE METHOD
SHIELD DRAIN COMPONENTS AS SHORT

AS PRACTICAL (3" MAX COMBINED)
2
3
2.5" MAX
0.17"
0.31" MAX OF EXPOSED SHIELD
ALTERNATE METHOD 2 (DAISY CHAIN)
Figure 3-102 Shield Termination Methods

Rev. V Page 3-121
3.4.2 Backshell Assembly and D-Subminiature Connectors
Connector kits listed in Table 3-13 include Garmin backshell and ground adapter assemblies. Ground
adapter assemblies are not required for all Garmin LRUs and are not included in all LRU connector kits.
Backshell connectors allow the installer to terminate shield grounds at the backshell housing using the
shield block ground kit.
Table 3-13 G500/G600 LRU Connector Kits

LRU P/N
GAD 43 011-01990-00
GAD 43e 011-02350-00
GDU 620 011-01656-00
GDC 74( ) 011-01010-01
GRS 77 011-00869-01
GSU 75(B) 011-03109-00

Rev. V Page 3-122
3.4.2.1 Slidelock Backshell And Shield Block Assembly
Table 3-14 lists Garmin part numbers for the D-sub connectors and the backshell assemblies for the
GDU 620, GRS 77, GDC 74( ), and GAD 43.
Table 3-14 Slidelock Backshell Assembly
Figure 3-102
through Garmin P/N
Description Notes
Figure 3-104 or MIL Spec
[1]
Multiple conductor shielded cable Refer to Section
1 [6]
(Refer to Appendix F) 2.4.2 for MIL spec
2 Wire, insulated (20-22 AWG), 3" max length As Required [6] [7]
3 Shield terminator As Required [6] [7]
Socket contacts, #20 (P431, P6201, P6202) 336-00022-00
4
Pin contacts, #22D (P741, P771, P6203) 336-00021-00
5 Silicone fusion tape 249-00114-00 [6]
MS25036-149,
Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG,
6 MS25036-153, [6] [8]
14-16 AWG, 12–10 AWG
MS25036-156
Shield block (P771) 117-00147-00
7 [3]
Shield block (P431, P741, P6201, P6202, P6203) 117-00147-01
Backshell (P771) 125-00083-00
8 Backshell (P6201, P6203) 125-00084-00 [2]
Backshell (P431, P741, P6202) 125-00085-00
9 Screw, 4-40 x 0.250", FLHP100°, SS/P, nylon 211-63234-08 [3]
10 Slide lock lever N/A [4]
Connector, D-sub, HD, 78 Pin (P741) 330-00366-78
11 Connector, D-sub, 37 Socket (P6201) 330-00502-37 [5]
Connector, D-sub, 50 Socket (P431, P6202) 330-00502-50
12 Screw, 4-40 x 0.375", PHP, SS/P, w/Nylon 211-60234-10 [2] [5]
Strain relief clamp (P771) 115-00499-02
13 [2]
Strain relief clamp (P431, P741, P6201, P6202, P6203) 115-00499-03
14 Slide lock spring N/A [4]
Cover (P771) 115-00500-02
15 Cover (P6201, P6203) 115-00500-03 [2]
Cover (P431, P741, P6202) 115-00500-04
16 Screw, 4-40x 0.187", FLHP100, SS/P, w/Nylon 211-63234-06 [2]
MS51957-42,
17 Screw, PHP, 8-32 x 0.312", stainless or cad plated steel [6] [8]
MS35206-242
Split Washer, #8, (.045" compressed thickness) stainless MS35338-137,
18 [6] [8]
or cadmium plated steel MS35338-42
Flat washer, #8, 0.032" thick, 0.174" ID, 0.375" OD, NAS1149CN832R,
19 [6] [8]
stainless or cadmium plated steel NAS1149FN832P
Notes:
[1] All items are applicable to P431, P741, P771, P6201, P6202, and P6203 unless otherwise
specified.

Rev. V Page 3-123
[2] Supplied as part of backshell kits P/N 011-00950-02 (P771), P/N 011-00950-03 (P6201,
P6203), and P/N 011-00950-04 (P431, P741, P6202).
[3] Supplied as part of ground adapter kits P/N 011-01169-00 (P771) and P/N 011-01169-01
(P431, P741, P6201, P6202, P6203).
[4] Supplied as part of slide lock kit P/N 330-90006-02 (P771), P/N 330-90006-03 (P6201,
P6203), and P/N 330-90006-04 (P431, P741, P6202).
[5] Supplied as part of LRU connector kit P/N 011-01010-01 (GDC 74A), P/N 011-00869-01
(GRS 77), P/N 011-01656-00 (GDU 620), and P/N 011-01990-00 ().
[6] Not supplied – must be purchased separately.
[7] Solder sleeve with pre-installed braid strap may be used in place of items 2 and 3.
[8] Not a Garmin part number.
3.4.2.1.1 Shield Block Assembly

Backshell connectors give the installer the ability to terminate shield grounds at the backshell housing
using the Shield Block Ground kit. Table 3-14 lists Garmin part numbers for the GDC 74( ), GRS 77,
GDU 620, and GAD 43 D-sub connectors and the backshell assemblies.
Assemble the backshell D-sub connector and shield block. Refer to Figure 3-103.
1. Attach the shield block (7) to the backshell (8) by inserting the 4-40 x 0.250 pan head screws (9)
through the holes on the shield block and threading into the tapped holes on the backshell (8).
CAUTION
When attaching the slide lock lever (10) and D-sub connector (11) to the backshell (8), use
only the specified 4-40 x 0.375 pan head screws (12). Do not attempt to use the self-
tapping screws supplied in the slide lock kit, as these will damage the backshell housing.
2. Place the slide lock lever (10) over the D-sub connector (11).
3. Attach slide lock lever (10) and D-sub connector (11) to the backshell (8) by inserting two
4-40 x 0.375 pan head screws (12) through the holes on the connector and threading into the
tapped holes on the backshell (8).

Rev. V Page 3-124
14
10
8
11
5X 12
9
NOTES:
1 PLACE SMOOTH SIDE OF STRAIN RELIEF CLAMP ACROSS CABLE
BUNDLE. DO NOT PLACE GROOVED SIDE ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.
Figure 3-103 Slidelock Backshell and Shield Block Assembly

Rev. V Page 3-125
3.4.2.1.2 Shield Termination on Slidelock Backshell Assembly
Refer to Figure 3-103 and Figure 3-104 while completing the following assembly procedure:
1. Terminate the cable bundle contacts (4) in the D-sub connector (11) in accordance with the aircraft
wiring drawings.
2. For P6202, P741, and P771, install the configuration module wires into the connector. Refer to
Section 3.4.2.3 for instructions on installing the configuration module.
3. Place the convex side of the backshell strain relief clamp (13) across the cable bundle and secure
using three 4-40 x 0.375" pan head screws (12).
CAUTION
Place smooth side of strain relief (13) across cable bundle. DO NOT place grooved side
across cable bundle. Placing the grooved side of the strain relief across the cable bundle
may damage wires.
4. Insert the slide lock spring (14) into the backshell (8) (refer to Figure 3-103).
5. Attach the backshell cover (15) to the backshell using two 4-40 x 0.187 countersunk screws (16).
6. Terminate the ring terminals (6) to the shield block (7) by placing items on the 8-32 x 0.312 pan
head shield terminal screw (17) in the following order before finally inserting the screw into the
tapped holes on the shield block:
◦ split washer (18)
◦ flat washer (19)
◦ first ring terminal (6)
◦ second ring terminal (6) (if needed)
NOTE
Each tapped hole on the shield block (7) may accommodate only two ring terminals (6). It
is preferred that a maximum of two wires (2) be terminated per ring terminal. Two wires
per ring terminal will necessitate the use of a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 14-16 AWG
(MS25036-153). If only a single wire (2) is left, or if only a single wire is needed for this
connector a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG (MS25036-149) can accommodate
this single wire (2). If more wires exist for the connector than two per ring terminal (6), it
is permissible to terminate three wires (2) per ring terminal (6).

Rev. V Page 3-126

1 1
4
11
3 A/R
8 2
1 A/R
6 2
9 A/R
A/R
NOTES: 7 A/R
1 PLACE SMOOTH SIDE OF STRAIN RELIEF CLAMP ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.

DO NOT PLACE GROOVED SIDE ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.
2 PREFERRED SHIELD TERMINATION METHOD SHOWN.

REFER TO SECTION 3.4.2.1.1 FOR ALTERNATE SHIELD TERMINATION METHODS.
Figure 3-104 Shield Termination on Slidelock Backshell Assembly

Rev. V Page 3-127
3.4.2.2 Jackscrew Backshell and Shield Block Assembly
Garmin part numbers for D-sub connectors and backshell assemblies for the GSU 75(B) and the GAD 43e
are listed in Table 3-15.
Table 3-15 D-sub Connectors and Backshell Assemblies

Figure 3-105
Garmin P/N or
and Description [1] Notes
MIL Spec
Figure 3-106
Multiple conductor shielded cable Refer to Section 2.4.2
1 [2]
(2-conductor demonstrated here) for MIL spec
2 Wire, insulated (20-22 AWG), 3" max length [2] [3]
3 Shield termination [2] [3]
Pin contacts, size 22D (P751, P432, P433) 336-00021-00 [4] [5]
4
Socket contacts, size 20 (P431) 336-00022-00 [4]
5 Silicone fusion tape 249-00114-00 [2]
6 Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG MS25036-149 [2] [8]
Connector, HD d-sub, male, str, mil crmp pins, 26-pin
330-00626-26 [4]
(P433)
Connector, HD d-sub, male, str, mil crmp pins, 78-pin
7 330-00626-78 [4]
(P431, P432)
Connector, HD d-sub, male, str, mil crp, sealed,
330-00776-78 [5]
w/ GND indents, 78 pin (P751)
Backshell, jackscrew, configuration module, 26-pin
125-00172-00 [6]
(P433)
8
Backshell, jackscrew, configuration module, 50/78-pin
125-00175-00 [7]
(P431, P432, P751)
Strain relief clamp, 26-pin (P433) 115-01078-01 [6]
9
Strain relief clamp, 50/78-pin (P431, P432, P751) 115-01078-04 [7]
10 Screw, 4-40x 0.375", PHP, SS/P, w/nylon 211-60234-10 [6] [7]
Cover, backshell, jackscrew, 26-pin (P433) 115-01079-01 [6]
11 Cover, backshell, jackscrew, 50/78-pin
115-01079-04 [7]
(P431, P432, P751)
12 Screw, 4-40 x 0.187", FLHP100, SS/P, w/nylon 211-63234-06 [6] [7]
Screw, PHP, 8-32 x 0.312", stainless MS51957-42
13 [2] [8]
Screw, PHP, 8-32 x 0.312", cadmium-plated steel MS35206-242
Split washer, #8 (.045" compressed thickness), stainless MS35338-137
14 Split washer, #8 (.045" compressed thickness), [2] [8]
MS35338-42
cad-plated steel
Flat washer, stainless, #8, 0.032" thick, 0.174" ID,
NAS1149CN832R
0.375" OD
15 [2] [8]
Flat washer, cadmium-plated steel, #8, 0.032" thick,
NAS1149FN832P
0.174" ID, 0.375" OD
Notes:
[1] All items are applicable to P431, P432, P433, and P751 unless otherwise specified.
[2] Not supplied with LRU connector kit.
[3] Solder sleeve with pre-installed braid strap may be used.

Rev. V Page 3-128
[4] Supplied with GAD 43e connector kit P/N 011-02350-00.
[5] Supplied with GSU 75(B) connector kit P/N 011-03109-00.
[6] Supplied with backshell kit P/N 011-01855-01 (P433), which is included in the GAD 43e
LRU connector kit P/N 011-02350-00.
[7] Supplied with backshell kit P/N 011-01855-04 (P431, P432, P751), which is included in
both the GAD 43e LRU connector kit P/N 011-02350-00 and the GSU 75(B) connector kit
P/N 011-03109-00.
[8] Not a Garmin part number.
Prepare the shielded cables to be connected to the LRU in accordance with Section 3.4.1.2. Then terminate
the cables to the LRU jackscrew backshell assembly using the following procedure:
1. Terminate the crimped pin/socket contacts (4) in the D-sub connector (7) in accordance with the
aircraft wiring drawings.
2. Install the configuration module wires into the connector. Refer to Section 3.4.2.3 for
configuration module installation instructions.
3. Place the smooth side of the backshell strain relief clamp (9) across the cable bundle and secure
using three 4-40 x 0.375" pan head screws (10).
CAUTION
Place smooth side of strain relief (9) across cable bundle. DO NOT place grooved side
across cable bundle. Placing the grooved side of the strain relief across the cable bundle
may damage wires.
4. Terminate the ring terminals (6) to the tapped holes on the backshell (8) by placing items on the
8-32 x 0.312" pan head shield terminal screw (13) in the following order before finally inserting
the screw into the tapped holes on the shield block:
• split washer (14)
◦ flat washer (15)
• first ring terminal (6)
• second ring terminal (6) (if needed)
NOTE
Each tapped hole on the backshell (8) may accommodate only two ring terminals (6). It is
preferred that a maximum of two wires (3) be terminated per ring terminal. Two wires per
ring terminal will necessitate the use of a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 14-16 AWG
(MS25036-153). If only a single wire is left, or if only a single wire is needed for this
connector a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG (MS25036-149) can accommodate
this single wire. If more wires exist for the connector than two per ring terminal, it is
permissible to terminate three wires per ring terminal.

Rev. V Page 3-129
12 [
11
PLACE SMOOTH SIDE OF STRAIN

RELIEF ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.
DO NOT PLACE GROOVED SIDE
ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.
10 [
Figure 3-105 Jackscrew Backshell and Shield Block Assembly

Rev. V Page 3-130
PLACE SMOOTH SIDE OF STRAIN RELIEF ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE. DO NOT PLACE
1
GROOVED SIDE ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.
PREFERRED SHIELD TERMINATION METHOD SHOWN. SEE FIGURE 3-102 FOR

2 ALTERNATE SHEILD TERMINATION METHOD.
Figure 3-106 Shield Block Termination on Jackscrew Backshell Assembly

Rev. V Page 3-131
3.4.2.3 Configuration Module Installation (P751, P741, P771, and P6202 Only)
G500/G600 LRU connector assemblies serve as housing for configuration modules. This section lists
configuration module assemblies and installation procedures for new and existing G500/G600
installations.
Table 3-16 Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart
Color Function P751 Contact P741 Contact P771 Contact P6202 Contact
Black Ground 74 1 1 50
Red Vcc 53 21 17 49
Yellow Data 54 40 16 32
White Clock 55 60 31 33
NOTE
The socket contacts supplied with the GDU 620 configuration module are specifically
made to accommodate 28 AWG wire. The crimp tool should have the indenter set to “4”
when crimping these contacts to the configuration module harness.
3.4.2.3.1 Configuration Module Assembly with Potted PCB (New Installations)

Table 3-17 Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-03 (P741 and P771)
Figure 3-107 Description Garmin P/N
1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 011-02178-00
3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00
4 Pin Contact, Crimp, #22D 336-00021-00
Table 3-18 Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-05 (P6202)

1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 011-02178-00
3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00
4 Pin Contact, Crimp, #20 336-00022-00

Rev. V Page 3-132
Refer to Figure 3-107 for details and item numbers referenced in the following procedure:
1. Strip 0.17 inches of insulation from each wire prior to crimping.
2. Crimp the contacts (3) onto each wire of the four-conductor wire harness (2).
3. Insert the newly crimped contacts and wires (2, 3) into the applicable connector housing (4)
location, as specified by the interconnect drawings in Appendix F.
4. Plug the four-conductor wire harness (2) into the connector on the PCB (1).
5. Insert the PCB (1) into the backshell (5) recess.
6. Attach cover (6) to backshell (5) using screws (7).
2x

Figure 3-107 Backshell Assembly (Potted Configuration Module)

Rev. V Page 3-133
3.4.2.3.2 Configuration Module Assembly (Jackscrew Backshell) with Potted PCB
(New Installations)
Table 3-19 Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-20 (P751)

Figure 3-106 and
Description Garmin P/N
Figure 3-107
Potted configuration module, PCB board assembly w/
1 011-02179-00
EEPROM, jackscrew
3 4-conductor harness 325-00122-00
4 Pin contact, crimp, #22D 336-00021-00
10 Pan head screw 211-60232-07
Refer to Figure 3-108 and Figure 3-109 for details and item numbers referenced in the following
procedure.
1. Strip back approximately 0.17 inches of insulation from each wire of the four conductor wire
harness (3). It is the responsibility of the installer to determine the proper length of insulation to be
removed.
2. Crimp a pin (4) to each conductor.
3. Ensure that the wire is visible in the inspection hole and that the insulation is 1/64 - 1/32 inches
from the end of the contact.
4. Insert newly crimped pins and wires (3, 4) into the connector housing (5) location. For details,
refer to the applicable interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
5. Attach the module (1) to the backshell (6) using a pan head screw (10).
6. Plug the four conductor wire harness (3) into the connector on the module (1).
7. Point the connector housing (5) so that the four-conductor wire harness (3) is on the same side of
the backshell (6) as the module (1).
8. Attach the cover (7) to the backshell (6) using two screws (8).
$)7(5&5,03,1*,163(&7,21

+2/(:,5(0867%(9,6,%/(

Figure 3-108 Configuration Module Insulation/Contact Clearance

Rev. V Page 3-134
Figure 3-109 Jackscrew Backshell Assembly
(Potted Configuration Module)

Rev. V Page 3-135
3.4.2.3.3 Configuration Module Assembly with Spacer (Existing Installations)
NOTE
Configuration module assemblies (P/N 011-00979-00 and 011-00979-02) may not be
available for new G500/G600 installations. For new installations, refer to
Section 3.4.2.3.1.
Table 3-20 Configuration Module Kit (P/N 011-00979-00) (P741 and P771)
1 Configuration module, PCB board assembly w/EEPROM 012-00605-00
2 Spacer, configuration module 213-00043-00
4 Pin contact, crimp, #22D 336-00021-00
Table 3-21 Configuration Module Kit (P/N 011-00979-02) (P6202)

1 Configuration module, PCB board assembly w/EEPROM 012-00605-00
2 Spacer, configuration module 213-00043-00
4 Socket contact, crimp, #20 336-00022-01
Refer to Figure 3-110 for details and item numbers referenced in the following procedure:
1. Strip 0.17 inches of insulation from each wire
prior to crimping.
2. Crimp socket contacts (4) onto each wire of the
four-conductor wire harness (3).
3. Insert newly crimped socket contacts and wires 1
(3, 4) into the applicable connector housing
location, as shown in Figure 3-110, Figure F-1, 2
Figure F-2, and Figure F-4.
4. Apply the spacer (2) by wrapping it around the 3
PCB board (1), making sure to insert the plastic
connector mounted on the board into the hole 4
provided in the spacer.
5. Plug the four-conductor wire harness (3) into the
connector on the PCB board (1).
6. With pad (2) in position, insert PCB board (1)
into the backshell recess.
7. Orient the connector housing so that the inserted
4-conductor wire harness (3) is on the same side
of the backshell as the inserted PCB board (1).
Figure 3-110 Backshell Assembly
(Configuration Module with Spacer)

Rev. V Page 3-136
3.4.3 TVS, Fuse, and Inline Resistor Installation (Nonmetallic Aircraft Only)
Certain nonmetallic aircraft will require TVSs at the power input of various LRUs. Refer to Table K-2 to
determine which aircraft require them. Refer to Section 2.4.2.1 for component part numbers.
3.4.3.1 TVS/Fuse Installation
NOTE
Only TVS1/F1 are installed as described below. TVS2 uses standard terminal lugs and
should be installed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11 and the notes on the
applicable interconnect in Appendix F.
For all TVS/fuse assemblies that are required for lightning protection, install them in accordance with
Figure 3-111 and the notes on the applicable interconnect diagram in Appendix F.
T
OF TAC
GE ON .
ED T C AX
KE "M
SOC 6.0
AL
NT
ME
ON
VIR
EN LICE
S P
LENGTH TO
ENVIRONMENTAL
SPLICE 6" MAX
FUSE HOLDER
AND FUSE
HEATSHRINK
STRIPE ON TVS MUST BE SOLDER TVS TO

TOWARD POWER BUS 22 AWG WIRE
Figure 3-111 TVS/Fuse Installation (TVS1/F1)

Rev. V Page 3-137
3.4.3.2 Resistor Installation
For all resistors that are required for lightning protection, install them as shown in Figure 3-112.
RESISTOR (30 OHM, 1/2W)

4.5"- 5.0"
.312"
2.0"- 2.5" SOLDER SLEEVE
0.35" MAX.
SHIELD DRAIN
0.17" (MAX. 3.0")
TRIM RESISTOR LEAD TO .25 ± .063" AND SOLDER TO 22 AWG

WIRE. COVER WITH HEAT SHRINK TUBING AS SHOWN, TYPICAL.
Figure 3-112 Resistor Installation
3.4.4 TVS 2 Assembly (Nonmetallic Aircraft Only)

Certain nonmetallic aircraft will require a TVS assembly at the power bus that supplies power to the
standby ADI (refer to Table K-2 to determine which aircraft require them). Refer to Section 2.4.2.1 for
component part numbers. Refer to Figure F-21 and Figure F-22 for interconnect drawings that show the
TVS installed.
NOTE
Earlier versions of the TVS 2 assembly did not require the connector between the fuse
holder and TVSs. This connector was added to allow periodic inspection of the individual
TVSs, rather than periodic replacement of the entire assembly. If the connector is not
installed, modify the assembly to add the connector at the aircraft’s next inspection
interval.
3.4.4.1 TVS Fabrication

1. Cut the TVS leads to 0.75 +0.00/-0.10 inches on both sides.
2. Crimp and solder each of the four TVS banded side (cathode) leads to their connector specific
sockets (refer to Figure 3-113) and insert into the 4-pin connector with sockets.
3. Install heat shrink around the four TVSs – this will help to hold them in place during the following
steps.

Rev. V Page 3-138
3.4.4.2 TVS Assembly
Refer to Figure F-21 and Figure F-22 while completing the following steps:
1. Solder the four leads at the anode (ground) SOCKET CONTACT
end of the assembly onto a length of 18 AWG
wire. Attach a terminal lug onto the wire end. CRIMP AND SOLDER
2. Attach a section of heat shrink to cover the
soldered TVS leads and four TVS pieces. A
second larger section of heat shrink should
then be attached to shrink over the 4-pin
connector with sockets and back over the four
TVSs. These two pieces of heat shrink should
overlap along the entire length of the TVSs. 0.5"
MAX
3. Crimp and solder four 18 AWG wires to their Figure 3-113 Detail of TVS Pin Assembly
connector specific pins and insert them into
the 4-pin connector with pins.
4. Attach lengths of 18 AWG to both ends of the fuse and fuse holder assembly.
5. Splice the four wires from the connector with pins to one of the wires attached to the fuse
assembly.
6. Attach a terminal lug onto the 18 AWG coming from the other end of the fuse assembly.
7. Connect the two 4-pin connectors together.
8. Ensure that the 10A fuse is installed in the fuse holder.
DETAIL OF TVS
HEAT SHRINK ANODE
CATHODE
0.44" FUSE
Max HOLDER
SOLDER
TO TO POWER
GROUND BUS
Environmental Splice
0.75" TVS (Qty. 4)
Max
4 Pin Connector
12.0"
Max
NOTE:
All four TVSs must be installed with the cathode facing the connector.
Figure 3-114 TVS 2 Assembly

Rev. V Page 3-139
3.4.4.3 TVS Assembly Polarity Check
Using a multimeter that is set to the diode mode, check conductivity across the entire TVS assembly. In
one direction, the meter should read open and in the other direction it should read 2.0 to 2.5 volts. When
installed in the aircraft, the TVS assembly should be oriented so that it does not normally conduct from
power to ground. The meter should indicate open when the red lead is attached to the power bus terminal
lug and the black lead is attached to the ground terminal lug. The meter should indicate 2.0 to 2.5 volts
when the red lead is attached to the ground terminal lug, and the black lead is attached to the power bus
terminal lug.
3.4.4.4 TVS Assembly Installation

Refer to Figure F-21 and Figure F-22 while completing the following steps:
1. Attach the fuse (power) end of the TVS assembly to the power bus at the specific point detailed in
the drawing.
2. Attach the ground end of the TVS assembly to aircraft ground.
3.4.5 Inline Component Installation

Inline components near the connector are installed as shown in Figure 3-115.
4.5"-5.0"
2.0"-2.5" SOLDER SLEEVE
0.35" MAX.
SHIELD DRAIN
0.17" (MAX. 3.0")
TRIM COMPONENT LEAD TO .25±.063" AND SOLDER TO 22AWG

WIRE. COVER WITH HEAT SHRINK TUBING AS SHOWN, TYPICAL.
Figure 3-115 Inline Component Installation

Rev. V Page 3-140
3.5 Unit Replacement
Whenever removing or replacing units, remove power from the LRU by removing aircraft power or
opening the LRU circuit breaker. After installing an LRU, verify that resistance to aircraft ground meets
the requirements specified in Section 3.8.
3.5.1 GDU 620 Unit Replacement

3.5.1.1 Removal
1. Remove the six mounting screws from the bezel of the GDU 620.
2. Pull the GDU 620 far enough out from the instrument panel to access the three rear connectors.
3. Disconnect the rear connectors.
4. Remove the GDU 620.
3.5.1.2 Installation
1. Visually inspect the connectors to ensure that there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any
damage.
2. Connect the rear connectors, ensuring that each slide lock is secured on both sides.
3. Set the GDU 620 into place.
4. Install the six mounting screws into the bezel of the GDU 620.
CAUTION
The newer GMU 44 is not compatible with older GMU 44 software versions. Damage to
the GMU 44 may result if loading of new GMU 44 software is attempted. If a newer
GMU 44 (P/N 011-00870-10 or -20) is installed, do not use the following older
G500/G600 software:
◦ G500 Loader Card (P/N 010-00841-10 or -11)
◦ G500 Downloadable Software (P/N 006-B1076-10 or -11)
◦ G600 Loader Card (P/N 010-00771-00 through -13)
◦ G600 Downloadable Software (P/N 006-B0942-00 through -13)
NOTE
The installation configuration settings are stored in the configuration module and will be
retained when the GDU 620 is replaced with a new unit. User settings, such as map
orientation preferences, are stored internally and will be lost when the GDU 620 is
replaced with a new unit.
NOTE
Upon first power-up after installing a new GDU 620, it is normal to refer to a series of
“LOADING” messages appear on the screen. These messages indicate that the
GDU 620 is updating its configuration settings from the configuration module.

Rev. V Page 3-141
Table 3-22 GDU 620 Unit Software Load and Configuration
GDU 620 Unit Condition Required Action
Original GDU 620 reinstallation • Verify configuration. Refer to Section 5.11.3.
• Load software. Refer to Section 5.4.1.
New, repair, or exchange • Update the manifest. Refer to Section 5.5.4.
• Update configuration module. Refer to Section
5.5.20
• Update configuration module. Refer to Section
Configuration module replacement [1] [2] 5.5.20.
• Verify configuration. Refer to Section 5.11.3.
Notes:
[1] Refer to Section 3.4.2.3 for configuration module replacement.
[2] If the GDU 620 and configuration module are replaced, perform the system setup. Refer to
Section 5.5.
3.5.1.3 Return to Service

After removing and reinstalling the GDU 620 per the instructions above, a simple return-to-service check
should be performed.
1. Power up the GDU 620 in Configuration mode.
2. Verify that the configuration settings match those recorded in the checkout log in Section 5.11.3.
3. Power up the GDU 620 in normal operating mode.
4. Verify that there are no red “X”s and that no alerts are present. If red “X”s or alerts are present,
troubleshoot using Section 6.2 and Section 6.3.
3.5.2 GSU 75(B) Unit Replacement

3.5.2.1 Removal
NOTE
If the supports for the installation rack are removed, the GSU 75(B) must be recalibrated.
For calibration procedures, refer to Section 5.6.
1. Disconnect the pitot-static plumbing from the rear of the unit.

2. Disconnect the GSU 75(B) connector.
3. Turn the two retention screws counterclockwise until they disconnect from the remote rack.
4. Lift the GSU 75(B) gently from the installation rack.

Rev. V Page 3-142
1. Place the GSU 75(B) on the installation rack and ensure the proper orientation.
2. Slide the GSU 75(B) back until the feet are fully engaged with the remote rack.
3. Push down and simultaneously turn each retention screw clockwise. Torque each retention screw
to 15-20 in-lbf.
4. Connect the pitot-static plumbing.
5. Inspect the connectors to ensure that there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair or replace any
damaged pins.
6. Connect the connector to the GSU 75(B), ensuring that the jackscrews are secured on both sides.
Table 3-23 GSU 75(B) Unit Software Load and Configuration

GSU 75(B) Unit Condition Required Action
Original reinstallation • Recalibrate in accordance with Table 3-24
• Software load (refer to Section 5.4.2)
New, repair, or exchange • Configure (refer to Section 5.5.18)
• Recalibrate in accordance with Table 3-24
Configuration module replacement [1] • Recalibrate in accordance with Table 3-24
Notes:

After removing and re-installing the GSU 75(B), the following return-to-service checks should be
performed:
1. Power up the G500/G600 system with the GDU 620 in normal operating mode.
2. Observe that the GDU 620 displays a valid heading, attitude, and air data within approximately
1 minute. Note that the heading can remain invalid if the magnetometer is close to a large ground
power cart or a large metal structure, such as a hangar wall.
3. Verify that no unexpected alerts are present. Troubleshoot any active alerts. For troubleshooting
procedures, refer to Section 6.2 and Section 6.3.
4. Perform a leak check for the pitot-static system. Observe the airspeed, altitude, and vertical speed
for proper operation.

Rev. V Page 3-143
Table 3-24 GSU 75(B) Calibration Criteria
Calibrations Required
GSU 75(B)/
GSU 75(B)
Condition GMU 44 Engine Run-up
Pitch/Roll
Magnetic Vibration Test
Offset
Calibration Section 5.6.5
Section 5.6.1
Section 5.6.2
GSU 75(B) ADAHRS was removed and/or replaced.
Mounting tray was not removed. None Required
Mounting tray bolts were not loosened.
GSU 75(B) ADAHRS was removed and/or replaced.
Mounting tray was removed. X X X
Mounting tray bolts were loosened.
GSU 75(B) ADAHRS configuration module was
X X X
replaced.
3.5.3 GRS 77 Unit Replacement

3.5.3.1 Removal
1. Disconnect the GRS 77 connector.
2. Loosen the four Phillips thumbscrews with a screwdriver.
3. Gently lift the GRS 77 from the mounting plate (if the supports for the mounting plate are
removed, the GRS 77 must be recalibrated. Refer to Section 5.6).
1. Place the GRS 77 on the mounting plate, ensuring the orientation is correct.
2. Fasten the unit to the plate using the Phillips thumbscrews. Recommended torque is 22-25 in-lbf.
3. Visually inspect the connectors to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any damage.
4. Connect the connector to the GRS 77, ensuring that each slide lock is secured on both sides.
Table 3-25 GRS 77 Unit Software Load and Configuration

GRS 77 Unit Condition Required Action
Original reinstallation • Recalibrate in accordance with Table 3-26
• Software load (refer to Section 5.4.2)
• Configure (refer to Section 5.5.18)
New, repair, or exchange • Recalibrate in accordance with Table 3-26
• GRS 77 rack-to-unit flatness check (refer to
Section 3.2.3.4)
Configuration module replacement [1] • Recalibrate in accordance with Table 3-26
Notes:
[1] For instructions on how to replace the configuration module, refer to Section 3.4.2.3.

Rev. V Page 3-144
After removing and reinstalling the GRS 77, the following return-to-service checks should be performed:
2. Observe that the GDU 620 displays a valid heading and attitude within approximately 1 minute.
Note that the heading can remain invalid if the magnetometer is close to a ground power cart or a
large metal structure, such as a hangar wall.
Table 3-26 GRS 77 Calibration Criteria

Calibrations Required
GRS 77/
GRS 77 Engine Run-
Condition GMU 44
Pitch/Roll up
Magnetic
Offset Vibration Test
Calibration
Section 5.6.1 Section 5.6.5
Section 5.6.2
GRS 77 AHRS was removed and/or replaced.
Mounting tray was not removed. None Required.
Mounting tray bolts were not loosened.
GRS 77 AHRS was removed and/or replaced.
Mounting tray was removed. X X X
Mounting tray bolts were loosened.
GRS 77 AHRS configuration module was replaced. X X X

Rev. V Page 3-145
3.5.4 GMU 44 Unit Replacement
CAUTION
The newer GMU 44 is not compatible with older GMU 44 software versions. Damage to
the GMU 44 may result if loading of new GMU 44 software is attempted. If a newer
GMU 44 (P/N 011-00870-10 or -20) is installed, do not use the following older
G500/G600 software:
3.5.4.1 Removal
1. Gain access to the GMU 44 Magnetometer.
2. Unscrew the three screws that hold the GMU 44 to its install rack.
3. Carefully lift the GMU 44 from the rack.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness.
1. Visually inspect the connectors to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any damage.
2. Connect the wiring harness to the GMU 44.
3. Lower the GMU 44 into the rack and secure the plate with the three Phillips screws.
Table 3-27 GMU 44 Magnetometer Calibration and Heading Offset

GMU 44 Unit Condition Required Action
Original reinstallation • None
• Recalibrate in accordance with Section 5.6.2
Original reinstallation and magnetometer mount has
changed • Heading Offset Compensation
(refer to Section 5.6.3 and Section 5.6.4)
• Recalibrate in accordance with Section 5.6.2
New, repair, or exchange • Heading Offset Compensation
(refer to Section 5.6.3 and Section 5.6.4)

After removing and reinstalling the GMU 44, the following return-to-service checks should be performed:
1. Power-up the G500/G600 system with the GDU 620 in normal operating mode.
2. Observe that the GDU 620 displays a valid heading within approximately 1 minute. Note that the
heading can remain invalid if the magnetometer is close to a large ground power cart or a large
metal structure, such as a hangar wall.

Rev. V Page 3-146
3.5.5 GDC 74( ) Unit Replacement
3.5.5.1 Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the pitot-static plumbing from the rear of the unit. Disconnect the single connector.
2. Loosen each thumbscrew on the hold-down clamp and remove the clamp.
3. Carefully remove the unit from its mount.
3.5.5.2 Installation Procedure

1. Place the unit in the mounting tray.
2. Position the locking clamp and fasten using the thumbscrews.
3. Connect the pitot-static plumbing.
4. Inspect the connector and pins for damage. Repair any damage.
5. Connect the connector to the unit, ensuring that each slide lock is secured on both sides.
Table 3-28 GDC 74( ) Unit Software Load and Configuration

GDC 74( ) Unit Condition Required Action
Original reinstallation None
New, repair, or exchange Software load (refer to Section 5.4.2)
Configuration module replacement [1] Configuration (refer to Section 5.5.10)
Notes:

After removing and reinstalling the GDC 74( ), the following return-to-service checks should be
performed:
2. Observe that the GDU 620 displays valid air data within approximately 1 minute.
4. Perform a leak check of the pitot-static system and observe the airspeed, altitude, and vertical
speed for proper operation.

Rev. V Page 3-147
3.5.6 Mid-Continent Electric Standby ADI System Replacement (if installed)
The Mid-Continent electric ADI and associated LRUs must be replaced with the same part number
(including panel tilt and lighting voltage) as the unit(s) being replaced. Except for the MD420 emergency
power supply, these units require no configuration when removed or replaced. On the MD420 battery
module, the Lighting Voltage Select switch must be set to match the lighting voltage of the unit that was
removed.

After removing and reinstalling the Mid-Continent electric ADI or associated LRUs, the following return
to service checks should be performed:
1. Power up the standby ADI system from aircraft power.
2. Verify that the power indicator flag is out of view.
3. After approximately 3 minutes, verify that the attitude presentation is correct. The ADI may need
to be caged.
4. Remove aircraft power from the standby ADI system.
5. Press STBY PWR on the standby ADI system.
6. Verify that the power indicator flag remains out of view and the ADI continues to run on battery
power.
7. Verify that lighting is still provided to the ADI.
8. Restore aircraft power to the standby ADI.

Rev. V Page 3-148
3.5.7 GAD 43/43e Unit Replacement
3.5.7.1 Removal
1. Disconnect the GAD 43/43e connector.
2. Remove the four/six mounting screws.
3. Carefully remove the unit.
1. Place the GAD 43/43e in its mounting location and align its mounting holes with the nut plates
beneath it.
2. Insert the four/six mounting screws and tighten the screws to hold the GAD 43/43e in place.
3. Inspect the connector and pins for damage. Repair any damage.
4. Connect the connector to the unit, ensuring that each slide lock is secured on both sides.
Table 3-29 GAD 43/43e Unit Software Load and Configuration

GAD 43/43e Unit Condition Required Action
Original re-installation None
1. Load software. Refer to Section 5.4.2.
New, repair, or exchange 2. Verify configuration. [1]
3. Recalibrate unit. Refer to Section 5.5.14.3. [2]
Notes:
[1] Viewing the GAD 43/43e configuration page on the GDU 620 causes the configuration
values to be written to the GAD 43/43e.
[2] Applicable only to GAD 43e installations that interface with an analog navigation receiver.

After removing and reinstalling the GAD 43/43e, the following return to service checks should be
performed:
1. Power up the G500/G600 system with the GDU 620 in Configuration mode.
2. Conduct the checks in Section 5.8.5.8 and Section 5.8.5.9 as applicable for the installation.
3. Restart the G500/G600 system with the GDU 620 in Normal mode.
4. After valid attitude information is displayed on the GDU, verify that there are no GAD alerts in the
alerts window. If alerts are present, troubleshoot using Section 6.2 and Section 6.3.
5. Conduct the checks in Section 5.10.2.4.2 (if applicable for the installation).
6. Engage the autopilot and verify that the servos are active.
7. If the GAD 43/43e supplies attitude information to the autopilot, press AP TEST on the PFD.
8. Verify that the autopilot disconnects and the servos disengage.

Rev. V Page 3-149
3.6 Weight and Balance
Weight and balance computation is required after the installation of the G500/G600 system. Follow the
guidelines as established in AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 10, Section 2. Make applicable entries in the equipment
list indicating items added, removed, or relocated along with the date accomplished. Include your name
and certificate number in the aircraft records. For unit weight and balance, refer to Table 3-24. A sample
calculation is shown in Figure 3-116.
Table 3-30 LRU Weight and Balance

Dimensions and CG
Item Weight
Figures
GDU 620 6.38 lbs (2.90 kg) Refer to Figure C-2
GRS 77 2.80 lbs (1.27 kg) Refer to Figure C-10
GRS 77 and remote install rack 3.50 lbs (1.59 kg) Refer to Figure C-10
Refer to Figure C-10
GRS 77, remote install rack, and universal mount 4.55 lbs (2.07 kg)
and Figure C-17
GSU 75(B) 1.36 lbs (0.62 kg) Refer to Figure C-8
GSU 75(B), remote install rack, and connectors 1.72 lbs (0.78 kg) Refer to Figure C-8
GDC 74( ) 1.69 lbs (0.77 kg)
and Figure C-12
GDC 74( ) and mounting rack 2.04 lbs (0.93 kg)
and Figure C-12
GMU 44 0.35 lbs (0.16 kg) Refer to Figure C-3
GMU 44 and install rack 0.50 lbs (0.23 kg) Refer to Figure C-3
GMU 44, install rack, and universal mount 0.72 lbs (0.33 kg) Refer to Figure C-3
GAD 43 1.90 lbs (0.86 kg) Refer to Figure C-21
GAD 43e 2.26 lbs (1.03 kg) Refer to Figure C-22

Rev. V Page 3-150
Useful Empty Moment
Previous Aircraft Weight and Balance C.G. (in)
Load (lb) Weight (lb) (lb-in)
Calculated: 03/10/06 1093.3 2306.70 138.83 320233.96
Moment
Description of items removed from aircraft Weight (lb) Arm (in)
(lb-in)
VSI 0.85 116.90 99.37
CDI 1.30 116.60 151.58
Clock and OAT 0.30 117.40 35.22
Sandel HSI 3.60 114.10 410.76
HSI gyro remote 4.90 181.00 886.90
Magnetometer (Old) 0.40 151.00 60.40
Attitude Indicator 2.20 114.50 251.90
Altimeter 1.10 116.10 127.71
Total removed 14.65 2023.84
Moment
Description of items added to aircraft Weight (lb) Arm (in)
(lb-in)
GDU 620 6.38 114.10 727.96
GRS 77, remote install rack, and universal mount 4.55 181.00 823.55
GDC 74( ) and mounting rack 2.04 113.30 231.13
GMU 44, install rack, and universal mount 0.72 146.00 105.12
Standby attitude indicator 3.70 121.00 447.70
Standby altimeter 1.10 121.00 133.10
Total added 18.49 2468.56
Change 3.84 444.73
Useful Moment
New Aircraft Weight and Balance Weight (lb) C.G. (in)
Load (lb) (lb-in)
Calculated: 6/21/2008 1089.46 2310.54 138.79 320678.69
Figure 3-116 Sample Weight and Balance Calculation

Rev. V Page 3-151
3.7 Electrical Load Analysis
An Electrical Load Analysis (ELA) must be completed on each aircraft prior to installation to verify that
the aircraft electrical system is capable of supporting the G500/G600 system. The purpose of the ELA is to
show compliance with FARs 23.1351 and 23.1353(h). As part of the G500/G600 installation, it must be
shown that (i) the maximum electrical system demand does not normally exceed 80% of the alternator data
plate rating, and (ii), in the event of a complete loss of the primary electrical system, the battery must be
capable of providing at least 30 minutes of electrical power to those loads that are essential to continued
safe flight and landing. The results of the ELA must be recorded on FAA Form 337. There are several
approaches that could be taken, as described in the following sections. For each approach, use the values
listed in Table 3-31 for computation.
NOTE
Certain operating requirements (e.g., 14 CFR Part 135) may impose additional
requirements of electrical power in the event of a complete loss of the primary electrical
system. It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that the aircraft, if used for these
operations, meets these additional requirements.
NOTE
Circuits should be protected in accordance with the approved data in this document (refer
to Appendix F for recommended LRU circuit breaker ratings) and the guidelines in
AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11, Section 4.
Table 3-31 LRU Current Requirements
14 Volt Current Draw 28 Volt Current Draw
LRU
Typical Maximum Typical Maximum
GDU 620 3.9 A 5.4 A 1.9 A 2.7 A
GRS 77/GMU 44 600 mA 1.0 A [1] 300 mA 1.0 A [1]
GSU 75(B) 760 mA 958 mA 380 mA 479 mA
GDC 74( )/GTP 59 410 mA 480 mA 200 mA 235 mA
GAD 43 410 mA 720 mA 210 mA 350 mA
GAD 43e 790 mA 1.22 A 390 mA 590 mA
MCI 4200 [2] 510 mA 1.4 A [3] 250 mA 600 mA [3]
MCI 4300-4XX [2] 630 mA 1.8 A [3] 310 mA 900 mA [3]
Notes:
[1] Maximum current draw occurs momentarily at start-up or when the supply voltage drops to
9 VDC.
[2] Current draw values do not include current required to charge battery. The current
required to charge the battery will depend upon the state of charge of the battery and will
decay over time.
[3] Maximum current draw occurs at start-up.

Rev. V Page 3-152
3.7.1 Aircraft with Existing Electrical Load Analysis
If there is an existing ELA for the aircraft, this must be updated to reflect the modification. It must show
that the alternators/generators have adequate capacity to supply power to the modified systems in all
anticipated conditions. Refer to the aircraft manufacturer’s documentation for guidance on
revising/maintaining the ELA.
3.7.2 Aircraft without Existing Electrical Load Analysis

Prior to undertaking a complete Electrical Load Analysis, the net change to the electrical load resulting
from the G500/G600 system installation should be determined (refer to Figure 3-117 for a sample
calculation). The results of this analysis will determine how to proceed further.
Electrical
Items removed from aircraft:
Load (A)
KI 227 ADF indicator [Note 1] 0.00
KI 525A pictorial NAV indicator (HSI) 0.36
KA 51B slaving accessory [Note 2] 0.00
KI 256 horizon indicator (ADI) 0.76
Mid-Continent MD 200-206 VOR/LOC/GS indicator 0.30
KG 102A directional gyro 3.00
Shadin ADC 200 1.30
SUBTOTAL: 5.72

Items added to aircraft:
Garmin GDU 620 (PFD/MFD display) 3.90
Garmin GRS 77 (AHRS) 0.60
Garmin GMU 44 (magnetometer) [Note 3] 0.00
Garmin GDC 74( ) (ADC) 0.41
Garmin GAD 43 (adapter) 0.41
SUBTOTAL: 5.32

NET CHANGE IN BUS LOAD (NEW BUS LOAD - OLD BUS LOAD): -0.40

Notes:
[1] Received power from ADF receiver, which was left in the aircraft.
[2] Received power from KG 102A, which was also removed. The load for the
KA 51B is included as part of the KG102A load.
[3] Receives power from the GRS 77, so its power is included under GRS 77.
[4] Use typical current draw when doing this calculation.

Figure 3-117 Sample Net Electrical Load Change Calculation

Rev. V Page 3-153
3.7.2.1 Electrical Load is Reduced Following Modification
In many instances, when older systems are replaced with newer equipment, the electrical load presented to
the power system is reduced. If the overall load on the electrical system is reduced as a result of the
G500/G600 modification (as shown in the previous example), no further analysis is required – this
assumes that the electrical system was within all limits prior to the G500/G600 installation. The amended
electrical load calculation must be included with the FAA Form 337 to document the electrical load
reduction.
3.7.2.2 Electrical Load is Increased Following Modification

If it is determined that the electrical load has increased, a complete Electrical Load Analysis should be
performed to show that the capacity of the alternator/generator is sufficient for the additional electrical
load. For guidance on preparing an ELA, refer to ASTM F 2490-05, Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical
Load and Power Source Capacity Analysis. Alternatively, the loads under various operating conditions
may be measured, as described in Section 3.7.3.
3.7.3 Performing an Electrical Load Analysis by Measurement

Many aircraft do not have an existing load analysis. If the installation of the G500/G600 increases the
overall load, an Electrical Load Analysis must be performed. Due to the age of much of the equipment,
adequate information regarding the current draw of this equipment may not exist. One acceptable method
of performing an Electrical Load Analysis is to determine the electrical loads by measurement. The
measurements must account for loads applied to the electrical system in probable combinations and
durations for aircraft operation. The maximum electrical demand should not exceed 80% of the alternator
data plate rating. The following section describes how to do an ELA for a single alternator/single battery
electrical system. This should be modified accordingly for aircraft with multiple batteries or alternators,
and it must be shown that the maximum electrical demand for each alternator does not exceed 80% of the
alternator data plate rating.
In this section, the following definitions are used:
Normal operation: The primary electrical power generating system is operating normally.
Emergency operation: The primary electrical power generating system is inoperative.
Either an in-circuit or clamp-on ammeter can be used for current measurement. The instrument used must
be capable of reading current to the nearest 0.5 A or better.
1. Record the continuous (data plate/nameplate) rating for the alternator and battery.
2. Using the electrical load tabulation form provided in Figure 3-119, compile a list of electrical loads
on the aircraft (generally, this is just a list of circuit breakers and circuit breaker switches). Refer to
the example in Figure 3-120.
3. Identify whether each load is continuous (e.g., GPS) or intermittent (e.g., stall warning horn,
landing gear).
4. Using the worst-case flight condition, identify whether each load is used in a particular phase of
flight for normal operation. If some loads are mutually exclusive and will not be turned on
simultaneously (e.g., pitot heat and air conditioning), use only those loads for the worst-case
condition.

Rev. V Page 3-154
5. Identify whether each load is used in a particular phase of flight for emergency operation. These
are the loads essential for continued safe flight and landing. At minimum, these systems include:
◦ PFD/MFD #1 (GDU 620) [1]
◦ AHRS #1 (GRS 77 or GSU 75(B)) (includes GMU 44 magnetometer) [1]
◦ ADC #1 (GDC 74( ) or GSU 75(B)) [1]
◦ COM radio #1 [1]
◦ GPS #1 [1]
◦ Audio panel [2]
◦ Stall warning system (if applicable)
◦ Pitot heat
◦ Landing light (switched on during landing only)
◦ Instrument panel lighting
◦ Landing gear indication lights
◦ Navigation lights
◦ Strobe lights
NOTES:
[1] For dual G500/G600 installations, the #2 system is not essential for continued safe flight and
landing.
[2] If the landing gear warning or stall warning audio require the audio panel, then the audio panel
must be included; otherwise, the audio panel is not essential for continued safe flight and landing
and may be omitted.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to equipment, ensure that the ammeter is capable of handling the
anticipated load.
6. Insert/attach the ammeter in the line from the external power source to the master relay circuit, as
shown in Figure 3-118 (this will eliminate errors due to the charging current drawn by the battery).
(;7(51$/ $/7175
32:(5
(/(&75,&$/%86

$PPHWHUSODFHPHQW±HLWKHU
%$77(5< ORFDWLRQDFFHSWDEOHGRHVQRW
LQFOXGHEDWWHU\FKDUJLQJFXUUHQW
0$67(5
5(/$<
Figure 3-118 Ammeter Placement for Current Measurements
7. Ensure that all circuit breakers are closed.

8. Apply external power to the aircraft. The voltage of the power source should be set to the
nominal alternator voltage (usually 13.8 VDC or 27.5 VDC).
9. Turn on the battery master switch.

Rev. V Page 3-155
NOTE
Intermittent electrical loads are not measured. It is assumed that if additional current is
required beyond what the alternator can supply, this short-duration demand will be
provided by the battery.
10. Set the lighting as described below. These settings will be used for every current measurement that
follows:
a. All instrument panel and flood lights should be set to maximum brightness.
b. The GDU 620 backlight should be set to 50% brightness.
c. Any other displays with a backlight should be set to 50% brightness.
d. The GPS navigator backlight should be set to 50% brightness.
11. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for
the taxiing phase and record the current that is measured by the ammeter (measurement (a) in
Figure 3-119). The following items should be taken into consideration for this measurement:
a. The autopilot circuit breaker should be closed, but the autopilot should not be engaged.
CAUTION
The pitot heat should only be switched on long enough to take the current measurement
and then switched off. The pitot probe may get hot and care should be exercised to avoid
burns or damaging the unit.
the normal takeoff/landing phase and record the current that is measured by the ammeter.
Measurements must be taken with the landing lights ON and OFF (measurements (b1) and (b2) in
Figure 3-119). The following items should be taken into consideration for this measurement:
a. The autopilot circuit breaker should be closed and the autopilot should be engaged.
the normal cruise phase and record the current that is measured by the ammeter (measurement (c)
in Figure 3-119). The following items should be taken into consideration for this measurement:
a. The autopilot circuit breaker should be closed and the autopilot should be engaged.
the emergency cruise phase and record the current that is measured by the ammeter. Record the
current drawn with the landing light switched OFF and again with the landing light switched ON.
the emergency landing phase and record the current that is measured by the ammeter.
16. Using the values measured and recorded, complete the ELA using the blank form in Figure 3-91
(refer to example in Figure 3-120). Verify that the maximum demand does not exceed 80% of the
alternator data plate rating.

Rev. V Page 3-156
NOTE
It is permissible to exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating during the
takeoff/landing phase of flight when the pitot heat and landing light are switched on
simultaneously. However, for this condition (i), you must not exceed 95% of the alternator
data plate rating, and (ii) you must not exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating with
the pitot heat on and the landing light off.
17. Using the values measured and recorded, complete the Emergency Power Analysis using the blank
form in Figure 3-121 (refer to example in Figure 3-120). Verify that the battery is capable of
supplying at least 30 minutes of electrical power in accordance with 14 CFR 23.1353(h). If the
existing battery does not meet the battery capacity requirements, a battery that has sufficient
capacity must be installed. The installation of another battery is not approved by this manual is
beyond the scope of this manual and STC. Separate airworthiness approval must be obtained.
NOTE
The Electrical Load Analysis conducted for this installation is only valid for modifications
performed under this STC. Subsequent changes will require a new load analysis.

Rev. V Page 3-157
G500/G600 ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM
Date: Tail Number: Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used

Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Circuit
Breaker Operating Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
Circuit/System Number Time 10 min 10 min 60 min (Calculated) 10 min
Figure 3-119 Blank Electrical Load Tabulation Form

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page 3-158
G500/G600 ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM (CONTINUED)
Date: Tail Number: Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used

Circuit
Ldg Lt ON
(b1)
Total current used (amps):
(a) (c) (d) (e)
Ldg Lt OFF
(b2)
÷ Alternator rating (amps):
%
Ldg Lt ON
(< 95%)
x 100% = Percent of alternator capacity used: % % N/A N/A
(< 80%) (< 80%)
%
Ldg Lt OFF
(< 80%)
Pass/Fail:
Notes:
Figure 3-119 Blank Electrical Load Tabulation Form

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page 3-159
G500/G600 ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM
Date: 1/6/2014 Tail Number: N5272K Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used
Circuit
Alternator Field A1 Continuous

Annunciator Panel C1 Continuous
Vacuum Warning C2 Intermittent
Stall Warning C3 Intermittent
Gear Warning C4 Intermittent
Gear Actuator C5 Intermittent
Cluster Gauge D1 Continuous
Ignition D2 intermittent
PFD D3 Continuous
Turn Coordinator D4 Continuous
Gear Relay D5 Intermittent
ADC E1 Continuous
Panel Lights E2 Continuous
Glareshield Lights E3 Continuous
AHRS E4 Continuous
Flap Actuator E5 Intermittent
COM 1 F1 Continuous
GPS/NAV 1 F2 Continuous
COM 2 F3 Continuous
GPS/NAV 2 F4 Continuous
Autopilot [1] F5 Continuous
Audio Panel G1 Continuous
Radio Blower G2 Continuous
ADF G3 Continuous
Transponder G4 Continuous
GDL 69 H1 Continuous
TCAD H2 Continuous
JPI Engine Monitor H3 Continuous
Bose Headsets H5 Continuous
Altitude Encoder J1 Continuous
Strobe Light SW1 Continuous
Nav Lights SW2 Continuous
Pitot Heat SW5 Continuous
Elevator Trim SW6 Intermittent
Boost Pump SW7 Intermittent
Figure 3-120 Example of Completed Electrical Load Tabulation Form

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page 3-160
G500/G600 ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM (CONTINUED)
Date: 1/6/2014 Tail Number: N5272K Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used
Circuit
60.0
Ldg Lt ON
(b1)
Total current used (amps): 45.7 43.5 34 48.1
(a) 44.7 (c) (d) (e)
Ldg Lt OFF
(b2)
÷ Alternator rating (amps): 70
86 %
Ldg Lt ON
(< 95%)
x 100% = Percent of alternator capacity used: 68 % 62 % N/A N/A
(< 80%) 64 (< 80%)
%
Ldg Lt OFF
(< 80%)
Pass/Fail: PASS PASS PASS
Notes:
[1] During taxi phase, Autopilot circuit breaker is closed but autopilot is not engaged.
Figure 3-120 Example of Completed Electrical Load Tabulation Form

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page 3-161
Date: ______________Tail No.:______________
Power Sources
Number Voltage
Item Manufacturer Model Number
Installed (DC Volts)
Alternator
Battery
Battery Capacity: x 0.75 (aerating factor) = ________ Ah x 60 min =________ A-min [i]
Current drawn during Normal Cruise (amps): ________ (c) enter current calculated in step 13. above
Cruise consumption during recognition: (c)A x 5 min = ________ A-min [ii]
Emergency Landing Current (amps): _________ (e) enter current measured in step 15. above
Emergency Landing Consumption: (e) A x 10 min = ________ A-min [iii]
Capacity remaining for cruise: ([i] – [ii] – [iii]) ________ - ________ - ________ = ________ A-min [iv]
Emergency Cruise Current (amps): _________ (d) enter current measured in step 14. above
Emergency Cruise Duration ([iv] / (d)): ____________ [iv] / ___________ (d) = __________ min [v]
The total duration of flight on emergency power is determined by adding the time for recognition of the
failure (5 minutes) to the time for emergency cruise (calculated above) to the time for landing (10 mins).
Total Duration for Flight on Emergency Power (5 + [v] + 10) = ________ min [vi]
Verify that the total flight duration on emergency power [vi] is > 30 minutes.
Assumptions:
Most severe operating condition is considered to be _________________________________________
Motor load demands are shown for steady state operation and do not include inrush current draw.
Load shedding is accomplished (how)___________________________________________within five

minutes of warning annunciation.
Measured loads using __________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-121 Blank Emergency Power Operation Calculation Form

Rev. V Page 3-162
Date: 1/6/2014Tail No.: N5272K
Power Sources
Number Voltage
Item Manufacturer Model Number
Installed (DC Volts)
Alternator 1 13.75 Prestolite AL 12-P70
Battery 1 12 Gill G-35
Battery Capacity: 35 x 0.75 (derating factor) = 26.25 Ah x 60 min = 1575 A-min [i]
Current drawn during Cruise (amps): 43.5 (c) enter current calculated in step 13. above
Cruise consumption during recognition: (c)43.5A x 5 min = 217.5 A-min [ii]
Emergency Landing Current (amps): 48.1 (e) enter current measured in step 15. above
Emergency Landing Consumption: (e)48.1 A x 10 min = 481 A-min [iii]
Capacity remaining for cruise: ([i] – [ii] – [iii]) 1575 - 217.5 - 481 = 876.5 A-min [iv]
Emergency Cruise Current (amps): 34.0 (d) enter current measured in step 14 above
Cruise Duration ([iv] / (d)): 876.5 [iv] / 34.0 (d) = 25.8 min [v]
Total Duration for Flight on Emergency Power (5 + [h]25.8 + 10) = 40.8 min [vi]
The total flight duration on emergency power [vi] is > 30 minutes. [PASS]
Assumptions:
1. Most severe operating condition is considered to be night IFR with the Pitot heat operating.
2. Motor load demands are shown for steady state operation and do not include inrush current draw.
3. Load shedding is accomplished manually by the pilot within five minutes of warning
annunciation.
4. Measured loads using a calibrated Extech clamp-on DC ammeter on the battery terminal to the
master relay cable.
Figure 3-122 Example of Completed Emergency Power Operation Calculation

Rev. V Page 3-163
3.8 Equipment Bonding
Electrical bonding can be achieved with mounting hardware (rivets, bolts, nuts, washers, etc.) or via bond
straps. A reliable electrical bond rely on mated surfaces to be clean of any primer/grease/dirt. When bolts
are used to secure racks/brackets/etc. and are relied upon for electrical bond, in lieu of the mating surfaces
of the racks/brackets/etc., then the area under the head of the bolt or washer must be free of primer and a
spot face should be prepared that is at least 0.125 inches wider than the head of the bolt or the washer (if
used) under the head. If primer or film was removed to achieve this, then any exposed area still visible
after the bond is completed must be refinished with the original finish or other suitable film or coating. If
the bolt is secured with washer and nut, then a similar spot face as described above shall occur between the
washer and the mounting structure. Rivets used to mechanically attach brackets/shelves/etc. provide an
inherent electrical bond through the rivets and require no additional bond preparation. Similarly riveted nut
plates do not need any special bonding preparation and can be relied upon to provide electrical bond
between the fastener and the nutplate. The top or bottom side of the Garmin racks or equipment flanges do
not need any special bond preparations. Additional details on how to accomplish electrical bonding can
also be found in SAE ARP1870 Section 5.
When equipment is mounted to honeycomb shelves, the face sheets must be metal. The honeycomb
material between the face sheets is not conductive and therefore care must be taken to make sure proper
bonding of the equipment has taken place. The top and bottom faces sheets must be grounded to each other
and the one of the face sheets must be grounded to the airframe.
The instrument panel must be of metal construction so that the GDU 620 has a metal ground reference
back to the other G500/G600 interfacing equipment mounted on the instrument panel or remotely-mounted
units that have their mounting locations connected back to the instrument panel. For metal aircraft, the
latter is achieved inherently through the metallic aircraft structure. For composite aircraft, a ground plane
(or reference) may need to be created to achieve a comparable ground. This procedure is described in
Section 3.8.2.
In all aircraft, the GDU 620 must be electrically bonded to the instrument panel with a resistance of 20 mΩ
or less.
All LRU bonding measurements must be made with the connector(s) disconnected from the LRU.
3.8.1 Metal Aircraft

The equipment in Table 3-32 and the support brackets require a resistance value of 2.5 mΩ or less between
individual mating surfaces. For general steps on how to prepare aluminum surfaces for electrical bonding,
refer to Section 3.8.3. Overall resistance requirements for individual LRUs and their ground reference are
specified in the following table:
Table 3-32 LRU Bonding Resistance

LRU(s) Ground Reference Overall Resistance (mΩ)
GSU 75 (or, alternatively, GRS 77
and GDC 74( ))
Aircraft ground plane 10 mΩ or less
GMU 44
GAD 43/43e
GDU 620 Aircraft ground plane 20 mΩ or less
GTP 59 Aircraft skin 2.5 mΩ or less

Rev. V Page 3-164
If the instrument panel is attached by vibration mounts, verify that the mounts are grounded to the metallic
airframe structure by means of a bonding jumper. Ensure that the installed bonding jumper meets the
following specifications:
1. The cross-sectional area of the strap is greater than 0.016 sq. inches (approximately 20,800
circular mils).
2. The braid is a 7/16-inch or wider tubular braid (part number QQB575R30T437, 24,120 circular
mils) or a 3/4-inch or wider flat braid (part number QQB575F36T781, 20,800 circular mils).
3. The braid contains a terminal lug (mil-spec MS20659-130) at each end.
4. The strap length is as short as possible, not exceeding 6.0 inches.
Ensure that each terminal lug is secured to its respective mating surface with one #10 steel bolt and one flat
washer (P/N AN970-3). Lugs and washers should be center-aligned and flush on all outside edges. These
components should be in full contact with the mating surface.
3.8.2 Nonmetallic Aircraft
NOTE
The GTP 59 and GMU 44 must not be electrically bonded to the aircraft ground plane. If
the structure is conductive at the mounting locations, provisions must be made to
electrically isolate the GTP 59 and GMU 44 from the conductive structure.
NOTE
Carbon-reinforced composite (with or without mesh) or fiberglass with mesh is considered
conductive.
If the equipment is mounted in the metallic instrument panel, then the bonding should be accomplished
like that for metal aircraft (Section 3.8.1). For composite areas of the aircraft, the AHRS, ADC, and
GAD 43/43e must be electrically bonded to the metallic instrument panel either directly through the unit
remote install/mounting rack or with heavy-duty dead soft aluminum tape, such as 3M Heavy Duty
Aluminum Foil Tape 438. The following guidance should be used for locating and bonding the LRU:
1. Identify a location for the LRU that is close to the instrument panel or the grounding structure for
the instrument panel.
2. Identify a route between the LRU location and the instrument panel ground that will accommodate
a strip of aluminum tape with a width of at least 4 inches and a length-to-width ratio of 7:1.
3. If the tape will come in contact with carbon composite material, the tape must be electrically
isolated from the carbon composite material to prevent corrosion due to dissimilar materials.
Secure a thin layer of fiberglass cloth to the carbon fiber with fiberglass resin, as shown in
Figure 3-123.

Rev. V Page 3-165
STRIP OF LIGHT FIBERGLASS CLOTH
SUCH AS 1080-50 (1.45 OZ/SQ. YARD)
ATTACHED WITH FIBERGLASS RESIN.
ALUMINUM TAPE
¼” MINIMUM DISTANCE
EACH SIDE.
CARBON
FIBER
Figure 3-123 Fiberglass Insulation for Carbon Fiber Material
4. Identify a grounding location. The ground must be a bare metal surface on the instrument panel or
grounding structure for the instrument panel. If it is impractical to reach a grounding location with
aluminum tape, then:
a. The tape shall meet a 5:1 length to width ratio.
b. The bond strap shall be one inch wide and no longer than 5 inches.
5. Prepare the aluminum surface at the ground location outlined in Section 3.8.3 or identify a ground
stud to which the braid can be attached. Any new ground stud shall also be prepared for electrical
bonding.
6. Route the tape between the LRU mount and the grounding location for the instrument panel. If
needed to maintain the 7:1 length-to-width ratio, the tape can be overlapped in more than one strip.
7. If two pieces of tape need to be joined end-to-end, they can be joined as illustrated in
Figure 3-124.
3"
ADHESIVE SIDE
APPLY ALUMINUM TAPE

PATCH OVER JOINT
FOLD ALUMINUM
ADHESIVE SIDE TAPE JOINT
ADHESIVE SIDE
1"
APPLY ALUMINUM TAPE

TO SECONDARY STRUCTURE
SECONDARY STRUCTURE
Figure 3-124 Aluminum Tape Joint
8. Fold the end of the tape over twice for added thickness at the prepared grounding location. Refer to
Figure 3-125. Apply 3-inch wide tape over the seam, as shown.

Rev. V Page 3-166
9. The tape shall not have any tears in the joint or along the length of the tape, as tears will degrade
the bonding performance.
10. Electrical bond preparation for all aluminum-to-aluminum interfaces. Reference SAE ARP1870
Sections 5.1 and 5.5.
11. If a bonding strap will be used to reach the grounding location, secure the end of the tape to the
secondary composite surface as shown in Figure 3-125. Detailed instructions for installing
mounting bolts in composite material can be found in Section 3.2.3.2.4. Note that the procedure
for installing mounting bolts applies only to secondary aircraft structures, not to primary structure
or structural load-carrying members. The tape shall meet 5:1 length-to-width ratio if a bonding
strap is used. The bonding strap shall be one inch wide and no longer than five inches. Refer to
Figure 3-125.
12. Terminate both ends of the bonding strap with MS20659-130 terminal lugs.
13. Install AN970-3 washer between the terminal lug and the mating metal surface and secure with a
#10 steel bolt. Ensure that the lug and washer are centered and in full contact with the mating
surface with no overhang when secured.
14. Secure the end of the tape in place using a 0.063-inch piece of aluminum using three bolts and
nuts. Refer to Figure 3-125.
15. Secure the aluminum tape to the LRU or remote install/mounting rack, as shown in Figure 3-126
(GSU 75(B)), Figure 3-127 (GRS 77), Figure 3-128 (GDC 74( )), and Figure 3-129 and
Figure 3-130 (GAD 43/43e).
16. Verify that the resistance between tape and the local grounding location does not exceed 2.5 mΩ.
0.063" ALUMINUM PLATE

3 BOLTS WITH
LOCKNUTS
AND WASHERS GROUND STUD --
COMMON TO
INSTRUMENT PANEL
ALUMINUM 1" FLAT BRAIDED CABLE --

TAPE A A REQUIRED IF SECONDARY
STRUCTURE IS NOT BONDED
TO THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
SECONDARY
STRUCTURE
BOLT
VIEW A-A
(NOT TO SCALE)
TERMINAL LUG
(IF REQUIRED)
0.063" ALUMINUM PLATE
ALUMINUM TAPE
WASHERS
SECONDARY LOCKNUT
STRUCTURE
Figure 3-125 Aluminum Tape Ground Termination

Rev. V Page 3-167
AIRCRAFT SECONDARY STRUCTURE (E.G.,
EQUIPMENT SHELF)
GSU 75
TO
INS
TR
UM
E NT
PA
NE
L
ALUMINUM TAPE
7:1 LENGTH TO WIDTH RATIO MEASUREMENT

BEGINS AT LAST POINT OF ELECTRICAL
CONTACT WITH MOUNTING RACK
GSU 75
ALUMINUM TAPE
AIRCRAFT SECONDARY STRUCTURE (E.G.

EQUIPMENT SHELF)
Figure 3-126 GSU 75 Aluminum Tape Installation

Rev. V Page 3-168
GRS 77
MOUNTING
RACK
LOCKNUT, WASHER,
& 0.063" ALUMINUM PLATE
ALUMINUM
TAPE
TO INSTRUMENT
PANEL
7:1 LENGTH-TO-WIDTH RATIO
MEASUREMENT BEGINS AT LAST
POINT OF ELECTRICAL CONTACT
WITH MOUNTING RACK
GRS 77
MOUNTING
RACK
AIRCRAFT SECONDARY
STRUCTURE LOCKNUT, WASHER
(E.G. EQUIPMENT SHELF) & 0.062" ALUMINUM PLATE
ALUMINUM TAPE
Figure 3-127 GRS 77 Aluminum Tape Installation

Rev. V Page 3-169
GDC 74( )
MOUNTING RACK
LOCKNUT, WASHER
& 0.063" ALUMINUM PLATE
ALUMINUM
TAPE
TO
7:1 LENGTH-TO-WIDTH RATIO INSTRUMENT
MEASUREMENT BEGINS AT LAST PANEL
POINT OF ELECTRICAL CONTACT
WITH MOUNTING RACK
GDC 74( )
MOUNTING RACK
AIRCRAFT SECONDARY LOCKNUT, WASHER

STRUCTURE & 0.063" ALUMINUM PLATE
(E.G. EQUIPMENT SHELF)
ALUMINUM TAPE
Figure 3-128 GDC 74( ) Aluminum Tape Installation

Rev. V Page 3-170
GAD 43
TO INSTRUMENT
PANEL
ALUMINUM
TAPE
7:1 LENGTH-TO-WIDTH
RATIO MEASUREMENT
BEGINS AT LAST POINT OF
ELECTRICAL CONTACT
WITH MOUNTING RACK
*$'
$,5&5$)76(&21'$5<
6758&785( $/80,1807$3(
(*(48,30(176+(/)
Figure 3-129 GAD 43/43e Aluminum Tape Installation (Horizontal Mount, GAD 43 shown)

Rev. V Page 3-171
*$'H
/(1*7+72:,'7+5$7,2
0($685(0(17%(*,16$7/$67
32,172)(/(&75,&$/&217$&7
:,7+02817,1*5$&.

$/80,1803/$7(
$/80,1807$3(
$/80,1803/$7(
0,1
$,5&5$)76(&21'$5<6758&785(
(*(48,30(176+(/)

0,1
[
*$'H
[ $5
'8$/3/$7(237,21
$,5&5$)76(&21'$5<6758&785( $/80,1803/$7(
(*(48,30(176+(/)
$/80,1807$3(
127(6
$,5&5$)76(&21'$5<6758&785(68&+$6$1(48,30(176+(/)0867+$9(&/($5$1&(217+(
23326,7(6,'()25+$5':$5(1(('('72,167$//7+(*$'H727+($,5&5$)76758&785(
5(&200(1'('7+,&.1(662)$/80,1803/$7(,6$/80,1803/$7(/(1*7+$1':,'7+0867%(
$7/($67/$5*(57+$1*$'H)22735,170,1,080[)256,1*/(%21',1*3/$7(
25[)25237,21$/'8$/%21',1*3/$7(65(029($//%8556$1'6+$53('*(65$',86
$//6+$53&251(560,1,0805(&200(1'('
*$'H81,70867%(,167$//('21$+25,=217$/685)$&(%8725,(17$7,21,6815(675,&7('
'8$/%21',1*3/$7(62),1',&$7('',0(16,2166+2:10$<%(86(',13/$&(2)$6,1*/(
%21',1*3/$7(%<20,77,1*7+(,1',&$7('0$7(5,$/
Figure 3-130 GAD 43/43e Aluminum Tape Installation (Vertical Mount, GAD 43e shown)

Rev. V Page 3-172
3.8.3 Aluminum Surface Preparation
In order to prepare the aluminum surface for proper bonding, the following general steps should be
followed. For a detailed procedure, reference SAE ARP1870, Sections 5.1 and 5.5.
1. Clean grounding location with solvent.
2. Remove non-conductive films or coatings from the grounding location. When the area is cleaned
around fastener heads or washers, the area cleaned should be 0.125 inches wider than the foot print
of the washer or the bolt head.
3. Apply a chemical conversion coat, such as Alodine 1200, to the bare metal.
4. Once the chemical conversion coat is dry, clean the area.
5. Install bonding aluminum tape or equipment at grounding location.
6. After the bond is complete, if any films or coatings were removed from the surface, reapply a
suitable film or coating to the surrounding area.

Rev. V Page 3-173
4 SYSTEM INTERCONNECT
For pinout information for each G500/G600 LRU, refer to Appendix B. For G500/G600 interconnect
information, refer to Appendix F.

Rev. V Page 4-1
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CHECKOUT
5.1 System Configuration Overview ....................................................................................................5-3

5.2 Required Airframe-Specific Information ........................................................................................5-4
5.2.1 PFD .........................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2 MFD .......................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.3 GDL 69A (SXM) Audio Mute Speed ....................................................................................5-4
5.2.4 Airspeeds ................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.5 Airport Criteria (GDU 620 Software v3.00 or Later) ............................................................5-7
5.2.6 Altitude Alerter ......................................................................................................................5-7
5.3 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks ............................................................................................5-8
5.4 Software Loading ............................................................................................................................5-9
5.4.1 GDU 620 Software Loading ..................................................................................................5-9
5.4.2 LRU Software Loading Procedure .........................................................................................5-9
5.4.3 Software Load Verification Procedure .................................................................................5-11
5.5 System Setup .................................................................................................................................5-12
5.5.1 System Configuration ...........................................................................................................5-12
5.5.2 Airframe Configuration ........................................................................................................5-23
5.5.3 Lighting Configuration .........................................................................................................5-23
5.5.4 Manifest Configuration ........................................................................................................5-26
5.5.5 Optional G500/G600 Feature Activation .............................................................................5-26
5.5.6 Audio Alert Configuration ...................................................................................................5-36
5.5.7 Terrain/Garmin SVT Setup ..................................................................................................5-36
5.5.8 Video Configuration .............................................................................................................5-38
5.5.9 Discrete Output Configuration .............................................................................................5-39
5.5.10 ADC Configuration ..............................................................................................................5-40
5.5.11 GDL 69 Series Configuration ..............................................................................................5-41
5.5.12 Autopilot Configuration .......................................................................................................5-41
5.5.13 Flight Director Configuration ...............................................................................................5-51
5.5.14 GAD 43/43e Configuration ..................................................................................................5-57
5.5.15 Weather Radar Configuration ..............................................................................................5-63
5.5.16 GTS 8XX Configuration ......................................................................................................5-67
5.5.17 GSR 56 Configuration ..........................................................................................................5-70
5.5.18 AHRS Configuration (GSU 75(B) Only) .............................................................................5-71
5.5.19 Miscellaneous System Interfaces .........................................................................................5-73
5.5.20 Updating the Configuration Module ....................................................................................5-74
5.5.21 Miscellaneous GDU Configuration ......................................................................................5-75
5.6 AHRS Calibration and Check .......................................................................................................5-78
5.6.1 AHRS Pitch/Roll Offset Compensation ...............................................................................5-79
5.6.2 AHRS/GMU 44 Magnetometer Calibration ........................................................................5-80
5.6.3 Compass Swing ....................................................................................................................5-82
5.6.4 Heading Offset Compensation .............................................................................................5-85
5.6.5 Engine Run-Up Vibration Test ............................................................................................5-86
5.6.6 Magnetometer Interference Test ..........................................................................................5-88
5.6.7 Site Evaluation of Magnetic Disturbances (Optional) .........................................................5-90
5.7 External System Adjustments .......................................................................................................5-91
5.7.1 ARINC 708 Weather Radars ................................................................................................5-91
5.7.2 Honeywell (Bendix/King) Autopilot Adjustments ..............................................................5-94
5.7.3 Cessna 300B/400B/800B Autopilots .................................................................................5-106

Rev. V Page 5-1
5.7.4 Cessna 1000A Autopilots ...................................................................................................5-106
5.8 Ground Checks ...........................................................................................................................5-107
5.8.1 Database Check ..................................................................................................................5-107
5.8.2 Pitot-Static, ADC, OAT, and Airspeed Tape Settings Checks ..........................................5-107
5.8.3 GPS Receiver Interface Test ..............................................................................................5-111
5.8.4 Navigation Receiver Interface Test ....................................................................................5-111
5.8.5 Autopilot Interface Test .....................................................................................................5-113
5.8.6 Traffic System Interface Test .............................................................................................5-132
5.8.7 Garmin GDL 69 Series Checkout Procedure .....................................................................5-135
5.8.8 ADF Interface Checkout Procedure ...................................................................................5-136
5.8.9 GDU 620 Crossfill Checkout Procedure (Dual G500/G600 Installations Only) ...............5-137
5.8.10 EMI/RFI Check ..................................................................................................................5-137
5.8.11 GAD 43/43e Adapter Interface Check ...............................................................................5-139
5.8.12 Weather Radar Interface Check .........................................................................................5-141
5.8.13 Synthetic Vision Check (If SVT Enabled) .........................................................................5-144
5.8.14 TAWS Check (If TAWS Option Enabled) (G600 System Only) ......................................5-145
5.8.15 Transient Voltage Suppressor Checks (Nonmetallic Aircraft Only) ..................................5-145
5.8.16 External Video Check ........................................................................................................5-146
5.8.17 Radar Altimeter Check .......................................................................................................5-147
5.8.18 GSR 56 Iridium® Check ....................................................................................................5-148
5.8.19 Miscellaneous System Checks ...........................................................................................5-150
5.8.20 DME Distance Display Test ...............................................................................................5-150
5.8.21 Marker Beacon Display Test (Through a GAD 43e) .........................................................5-154
5.8.22 ADS-B In Interface Test .....................................................................................................5-155
5.8.23 Final G500/G600 System Check ........................................................................................5-157
5.9 Placards and Switch Labeling .....................................................................................................5-158
5.10 Flight Checks ..............................................................................................................................5-159
5.10.1 General System Flight Check .............................................................................................5-159
5.10.2 Autopilot Flight Checks and Final Adjustments ................................................................5-159
5.11 Documentation Checks ...............................................................................................................5-169
5.11.1 AFMS .................................................................................................................................5-169
5.11.2 ICA .....................................................................................................................................5-170
5.11.3 Configuration and Checkout Log .......................................................................................5-170
NOTE
Screen shots shown may not be representative of all approved GDU 620 software versions.
Actual screen content may vary depending upon the version of GDU 620 software being
used.

Rev. V Page 5-2
5.1 System Configuration Overview
After the G500/G600 system is installed, the system is configured for the particular installation. In order to
access all of the configuration pages, an Installer Unlock Card (P/N 010-00769-60) must be inserted into
the GDU 620 at the time the system is powered-up.
Below is a summary of the steps for system configuration and calibration:
1. Gather the airframe-specific information, as specified in Section 5.2.
2. Perform the installation checks specified in Section 5.3.
3. Load software into the G500/G600 LRUs, as specified in Section 5.4.
4. Configure the G500/G600 system for the particular installation, as specified in Section 5.5. This
includes setting the airframe-specific parameters and enabling interfaces to external systems.
5. Enable optional features (this can be done at a later time).
6. Perform an alignment and calibration of the AHRS, as specified in Section 5.6.
7. Perform an engine run-up test to verify the mounting of the AHRS. Refer to Section 5.6.5.
8. Perform a check of the pitot-static system to verify the installation of the ADC and standby
instruments. The correct settings of the airspeed tape are also verified during this check. Refer to
Section 5.8.2.
9. Perform the ground checks to verify the interfaces to external settings, as specified in Section 5.8.
10. Verify all placards have been relocated, as specified in Section 5.9.
11. Perform the flight checks specified in Section 5.10.
12. Update the aircraft documentation, as specified in Section 5.11.

Rev. V Page 5-3
5.2 Required Airframe-Specific Information
This section provides guidance for gathering the required information particular to each installation. Use
this information to enter data on the Airframe Configuration page. Record the information in the
configuration and checkout log sheet in Figure 5-81.
5.2.1 PFD
The distance/speed (DIS.SPD) and altitude/vertical speed (ALT.VS) units can be configured to match a
particular installation. These units must be set to those currently used in the airplane in accordance with the
POH/AFM and must match the standby instruments.
The vertical speed (VS) tape range can be configured for 2000 fpm, 3000 fpm, or 4000 fpm. The vertical
speed range must be set to match the VS indicator that was/is installed. If a VS indicator was not installed,
and a VS range is not specified in the POH/AFMS, set the vertical speed tape range to 2000 fpm.
The attitude indicator on the PFD has two pointers on the roll scale. When banking, one pointer indicates
the aircraft bank angle and the other pointer remains stationary. The pointer that indicates bank angle can
either point up (Sky Pointer) or down (Ground Pointer). This pointer must be configured to match the
Standby ADI being installed in the aircraft.
5.2.2 MFD
The default distance/speed (DIS.SPD) and altitude/vertical speed (ALT.VS) units can be configured to
match a particular installation. It is recommended that the same units as the PFD be used; however, this is
left to the installer’s discretion. The pilot will be able to change these units on the first AUX page on the
MFD. Set the aircraft icon to match the aircraft type and the aircraft icon color to white.
5.2.3 GDL 69A (SXM) Audio Mute Speed

If a GDL 69A or GDL 69A SXM is connected to the GDU 620, the GDL 69A or GDL 69A SXM audio
output will become muted whenever the airspeed is below the MUTE SPEED value. If this is set to OFF,
the GDL 69A or GDL 69A SXM will never be muted based on airspeed.
5.2.4 Airspeeds
WARNING
The IAS tape setting on the Airframe Configuration page must be set to ADVANCED in
aircraft that have an altitude-variable maximum airspeed limitation.
NOTE
GDU 620 software versions prior to v5.00 display airspeed tape settings on the Airframe
Configuration page. However, GDU 620 software v5.00 and later displays airspeed tape
information on the Airspeed Configuration page. The default basic setting allows the
airspeed tape settings to be configured exactly the same as in GDU 620 software versions
prior to v5.00.

Rev. V Page 5-4
Airspeeds used to configure the IAS tape must be taken from the AFM, POH, or aircraft specifications for
the specific airplane being modified. The source of the airspeed information should be entered in the
configuration checkout log (Figure 5-81). Information and settings available on the Airspeed
Configuration page, shown in Figure 5-1, vary depending on whether the IAS tape field on the Airframe
Configuration page is set to Basic or Advanced. This setting is highlighted in Figure 5-1. Basic setting
values are found in the AFM or POH for each aircraft. Refer to Table 5-1 for detailed information on
obtaining basic setting airspeed values. Refer to Appendix M for detailed information on obtaining
advanced setting airspeed values.
Basic Advanced
Basic Advanced
Figure 5-1 AIRSPEED CONFIGURATION Page with IAS Tape Set to Basic and Advanced

Rev. V Page 5-5
NOTE
If the AFM or POH lists IAS and CAS, use IAS values.
Table 5-1 Airframe Specific Configuration Data – IAS TAPE BASIC Setting
AFM/POH
Item Description Reference Note
Section
Stall speed in landing
Vs0 2 - Limitations Bottom of white arc on ASI.
configuration
Stall speed in a specific flight
Vs1 2 - Limitations Bottom of green arc on ASI.
configuration
Maximum flap extended Top of white arc on ASI. If more than one
Vfe 2 - Limitations
speed flap speed is given, use the lowest speed.
Top of green arc/bottom of yellow arc on
ASI. If the aircraft has no yellow arc but has
Vno Normal operating speed 2 - Limitations
a green arc that extends to the red radial,
set Vno to the same value as Vne.
Vne Never exceed speed 2 - Limitations Red radial on ASI.
Optional.
3 - Emergency
GLIDE Glide speed Set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the
Procedures
AFM/POH.
Optional.
4 - Normal Typically set to rotation speed.
Vr Reference airspeed
Procedures Set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the
AFM/POH.
Optional.
4 - Normal Set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the AFM/POH
Vx Best angle of climb speed
Procedures (if there are two speeds listed (gear up/gear
down), use the speed listed for gear down).
Optional.
4 - Normal Set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the AFM/POH
Vy Best rate of climb speed
Procedures (if there are two speeds listed (gear up/gear
down), use the speed listed for gear up).
Maximum landing gear
Vle 2 - Limitations Set to 0 Kt (off) for fixed gear aircraft.
extended speed
Minimum controllable airspeed Lower red radial on ASI of light twins.
Vmca for twin engine aircraft with 2 - Limitations
only one engine operational Set to 0 Kt (off) for single engine aircraft.
3 - Emergency
Single engine best rate of Procedures Blue radial on ASI of light twins.
Vyse climb speed for a twin engine OR
aircraft 4 - Normal Set to 0 Kt (off) for single engine aircraft.
Procedures
Vne
Applicable to rotary wing
(Pwr N/A Set to OFF.
aircraft only
Off)

Rev. V Page 5-6
5.2.5 Airport Criteria (GDU 620 Software v3.00 or Later)
For installations with TAWS (G600 system only) and/or Synthetic Vision (SVT) enabled on the GDU 620
Feature Configuration page (i.e., no external TAWS or terrain alerting source), the GDU 620 provides
aural and visual terrain alerts. The information listed in Table 5-2 must be obtained for configuring terrain
alerts in the airport environment. The alerting algorithm relaxes the terrain alerting criteria at nearby
airports. At the time of installation, the GDU 620 must be configured to specify the minimum criteria that
an airport must meet to be considered as a nearby airport for the purpose of Terrain Alerting/TAWS (G600
system only). If an external TAWS unit (e.g., GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS) is installed, the Airport Criteria
should match the airport Terrain Alerting criteria on the external TAWS unit; otherwise, use Table 5-2 to
determine the proper settings.
Table 5-2 Airframe Specific Configuration Data
POH/AFM
Item Description Notes
Section
Required runway surface Set to type of runway surface that
Rnwy Surface N/A
type the aircraft will typically use.
Set to the shortest ground roll
Minimum runway length for distance required for takeoff/landing
Min Length consideration by 5 - Performance operations (typically the distance
TAWS/Terrain alerting given for sea level using the coldest
temperature given in the POH/AFM).
5.2.6 Altitude Alerter
NOTE
The choice to use NORMAL or HIGH PERF altitude alerter setting is at the discretion of
the installer. Except for the alerting threshold for the aural chime, the altitude alerter
function is identical for either setting.
The altitude alerter setting controls how the GDU 620 provides alerts when approaching the selected
altitude. The settings are:
• OFF: This setting disables all visual and aural altitude alerting functions of the GDU 620. The
altitude alerter should be set to OFF if there is another altitude alerter present in the aircraft
• NORMAL: This setting enables the visual and aural altitude alerting functions of the GDU 620.
The aural chime will sound when approaching within 200 feet of the selected altitude
• HIGH PERF: This setting enables the visual and aural altitude alerting functions of the GDU 620.
The aural chime will sound when approaching within 1000 feet of the selected altitude. This
setting can be used for aircraft with higher climb performance

Rev. V Page 5-7
5.3 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks
1. Verify that all mounting racks and trays are secured, properly bonded, and torqued in accordance
with their specifications.
2. Verify that all cables are properly secured and shields are connected to their connector shield
blocks.
3. Check the movement of the flight and engine controls to verify that there is no interference.
4. Ensure wiring is installed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11.
5. Prior to installing any LRUs, the wiring harness should be checked for proper connections to the
aircraft systems and other avionics systems.
6. Point-to-point continuity should be checked to expose any faults, such as shorting to ground.
7. All faults or discrepancies found should be corrected before proceeding. If any TVSs are installed
as part of the modification, proper TVS installation should be verified prior to application of
power. Refer to Section 8.3.1 for information on checking each TVS.
8. After accomplishing a continuity check, perform power and ground checks to verify proper power
distribution to the LRUs. All faults or discrepancies should be corrected at this time.
9. Remove power to the aircraft upon completion of harness checkout.
10. Upon completion of continuity and power checks, the LRUs can be installed.
11. Each LRU must be installed into its respective rack and secured.
12. The units and accessories must be connected to the wiring harness.
13. Any additional connections, such as pitot-static plumbing, must also be accomplished at this time.

Rev. V Page 5-8
5.4 Software Loading
CAUTION
The GMU 44 is not compatible with older software versions and damage may result. If a
newer GMU 44 (P/N 011-00870-10 or -20) is installed, do not use the following older
G500/G600 software:
NOTE
Screen shots in this section are provided for reference only. For actual LRU software
versions, refer to Equipment List, G500/G600 PFD/MFD System AML STC.
NOTE
Before attempting to load software to external units, ensure that the external system is
configured as PRESENT on the System Configuration page. Refer to Section 5.5.1.
The G500/G600 LRUs are pre-loaded with software. To ensure that the latest software is loaded, use a
current G600 Software Loader Card (P/N 010-00771-( )) or G500 Software Loader Card
(P/N 010-00884-( )). For a dual G500/G600 installation, the software loading procedures below must be
carried out on each GDU 620.
5.4.1 GDU 620 Software Loading

1. Apply power to the aircraft and the G500/G600 system.
2. Pull the PFD circuit breaker.
3. Insert the G500/G600 Loader Card into the top card slot.
4. Insert the Installer Unlock Card into the bottom slot.
5. While pressing ENT, close the PFD circuit breaker.
6. When “INITIALIZING SYSTEM” displays, release ENT.
7. When prompted to update system files, press ENT.
When the update is finished, press any soft key. The GDU 620 powers up in Configuration mode.
5.4.2 LRU Software Loading Procedure
NOTE
Before attempting to load software to external units, ensure that the external system is
configured as PRESENT on the System Configuration page. Refer to Section 5.5.1.
NOTE
LRU software loaded on the GDU 620 at delivery may have later version numbers than
the current certified versions. Refer to Equipment List, G500/G600 PFD/MFD System
AML STC for current certified LRU software versions.

Rev. V Page 5-9
Software for the GDU 620, AHRS, ADC, and GAD is included on the G500/G600 System Loader Card.
Software for other Garmin LRUs is included on a separate loader card. Garmin LRUs that support software
loading through the GDU 620:
• GDL 69 series
• GTS 8XX
• GWX 68/70(R)/75
To load software to Garmin LRUs through the GDU 620:
1. Go to the Software Upload page in the SYS page group, as shown in Figure 5-2.
2. Select the applicable software file in the File List window, highlighted in green in Figure 5-2. The
current LRU software version is displayed in the LRU window, highlighted in blue in Figure 5-2.
3. Press LOAD.
4. Select OK.
5. Press ENT to acknowledge the “FILE UPLOAD” prompt.
6. After the files finish loading, press ENT to acknowledge the “UPLOAD COMPLETED.”
7. Check the Summary window to ensure the load is “COMPLETE.”
8. Repeat steps 1-7 for each required and optional LRU.
Figure 5-2 SOFTWARE UPLOAD Page

Rev. V Page 5-10
5.4.3 Software Load Verification Procedure
NOTE
For dual G500/G600 installations, remove the loader card from the top slot of the first
GDU 620 and repeat Section 5.4.1 and Section 5.4.2 using the second GDU 620. The
software for the GDL 69 series, GAD 43/43e, GTS 8XX, and GWX 68/70(R)/75 does not
need to be reloaded.
1. Activate the cursor on the System Status page on the PFD.

2. Highlight items that were updated.
3. Verify that the software part number and version matches the information found in Equipment List,
G500/G600 PFD/MFD System AML STC.
4. Deactivate the cursor.
Figure 5-3 SOFTWARE CONFIRMATION Page

Rev. V Page 5-11
5.5 System Setup
The GDU 620 Configuration mode allows the G500/G600 system to be configured for a particular
installation. While pressing ENT, apply power to the GDU 620 to enter Configuration mode.
Refer to Section 5 of the GDU 620 Installation Manual for details on using Configuration mode. Record all
of the settings in the checkout log sheet provided in Section 5.11.3. For a dual G500/G600 installation,
each GDU 620 must be set up as described.
Any required configuration settings for approved interfacing systems can be found in Appendix E. Any
required configuration settings for the G500/G600 are found in this section.
If not already in Configuration mode with the Installer Unlock Card, ensure that the Installer Unlock Card
is installed in the GDU 620 and cycle power to the GDU 620 while pressing ENT.
NOTE
After configuring all necessary items, ensure the configuration module is updated. Refer
to Section 5.5.20.
5.5.1 System Configuration
NOTE
Ensure the configuration module is connected prior to enabling any optional features. The
UPDT CFG softkey on the SYS > Software Upload page will be selectable if it is working
properly.
NOTE
All optional features should be enabled prior to proceeding with the system configuration.
For details about enabling optional features, refer to Section 5.5.5.
1. Go to the System Configuration page in the SYS page group.

2. Set the CDU System ID to the default setting USE DISCRETE.
3. For each external data source that is connected to the GDU 620, set the corresponding interfacing
system to PRESENT.
4. Select the type as specified in the Table 5-3 through Table 5-15. For instructions on configuring
external systems that use an ARINC 429 or ARINC 453/708 interface, refer to Section 5.5.1.1.

Rev. V Page 5-12
Figure 5-4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Page
Table 5-3 Cross-Side GDU Configuration

Manufacturer GDU Model TYPE Setting Notes
Garmin GDU 620 GDU 620
Table 5-4 AHRS Configuration

Manufacturer AHRS Model TYPE Setting Notes
Garmin GSU 75 GSU 75 [1]
Garmin GRS 77 GRS 77 [1]
Notes:
[1] ARINC 429 input port 1 setting must be “High Speed.”
Table 5-5 ADC Configuration

Manufacturer ADC Model TYPE Setting Notes
Garmin GSU 75 GSU 75 [1]
Garmin GDC 74 GDC 74 [1]
Notes:
[1] ARINC 429 input port 2 setting must be “Low Speed.”

Rev. V Page 5-13
Table 5-6 GPS 1/2 Configuration
Manufacturer GPS Model TYPE Setting Notes
GPS 400W GPS 400W [1]
GNC 420W GNC 420W [1]
GNS 430W GNS 430W [1]
GNS 480 GNS 480 [1]
GNC 500W GNC 500W [1]
Garmin GNS 530W GNS 530W [1]
GTN 625 GPS 400W [1]
GTN 635 GNC 420W [1]
GTN 650 GNS 430W [1]
GTN 725 GNC 500W [1]
GTN 750 GNS 530W [1]
Notes:
[1] ARINC 429 input port setting must be “GPS1” or “GPS1 Sextant” for GPS 1, or “GPS2” or
“GPS2 Sextant” for GPS 2. The input format and speed must be set to match the
navigator output port speed.
Table 5-7 NAV 1/2 Configuration

Manufacturer NAV Radio Model TYPE Setting Notes
GNC 255( ) GNS 430W [2]
GNS 430W GNS 430W [2]
GNS 480 GNS 480 [2]
Garmin GNS 530W GNS 530W [2]
GTN 650 GNS 430W [2]
GTN 750 GNS 530W [2]
SL30 SL30 [1]
Various Various analog radios GAD 43e [3] [4]
N/A N/A CROSSFILL [5]
Notes:
[1] SL30 can only be selected for NAV1 or NAV 2, but not for both.
[2] ARINC 429 input port must be set to “NAV 1 Low Speed” for NAV receiver 1 or “NAV 2
Low Speed” for NAV receiver 2.
[3] Refer to Appendix Section E.19 for information regarding which analog NAV radios are
supported via the GAD 43e. Refer to Section 5.5.14.2 for specific information on
configuring the GAD 43e.
[4] No ARINC 429 input must be configured specifically for NAV1 or NAV2 - all of the
information sent over the ARINC 429 interface from the GAD 43e.

Rev. V Page 5-14
[5] This setting is only available if two GDU 620s are installed. The GDU 620 that is configured
for CROSSFILL will receive navigation information for that NAV radio from the cross-side
GDU 620.
Table 5-8 ADF Configuration

Manufacturer ADF Model TYPE Setting Notes
Collins ADF-60A/B ADF-60B
KR 87 KR 87 [1]
Honeywell
KDF 806 KDF 806 / KFS 586 [1]
Various Various synchro ADFs GAD 43e [2]
N/A N/A GAD 43e CROSSFILL [3]
Notes:
[1] Set “+Superflag” to PRESENT if the Superflag output from the ADF receiver is connected
to the GDU 620.
[2] Refer to Appendix Section E.21 for information regarding which synchro ADF receivers
are supported via the GAD 43e. No additional GAD 43e configuration is required.
[3] This setting is only available if two GDU 620s are installed. The GDU 620 that is
configured for GAD 43e CROSSFILL will receive synchro ADF information from the cross-
side GDU 620.
Table 5-9 Traffic/ADS-B Configuration

+External
Manufacturer Traffic System Model TYPE Setting Notes
Control [1]
Skywatch Enable
Avidyne (Ryan) TAS 600/610/620 (9900BX) [3] [4]
Avidyne/Ryan TAS N/A
GTX 330/330D/330ES GTX 330 [2] [4]
GTX 335 GTX 330 [2] [4]
GTX ADS-B #1
GTX 345 N/A [5] [6]
GTX ADS-B #2
GTS 800 GTS 800 [2] [4]
Garmin GTS 820 GTS 820 [2] [4]
GTS 850 GTS 850 [2] [4]
GTS 825 GTS 820 [2]
GTS 855 GTS 850 [2]
GTS 800/820/850/825/855 GTS ADS-B [2] [8]
GDL 88 GDL 88 N/A [6]
KTA 870 / KMH 880 KTA 870 [2] [4]
Honeywell
KTA 970 / KMH 980 KTA 970 [2] [4]
SKY 497 SkyWatch [2] [4]
L3 Comm
SKY 899 SkyWatch HP [2] [4]
N/A N/A CROSSFILL N/A [7]

Rev. V Page 5-15
Notes:
[1] The +External Control option is available when the Traffic/ADS-B TYPE setting is set to
“SkyWatch,” “SkyWatch HP,” “KTA 870,” “KTA 970,” “GTX 330,” “GTS 800,” “GTS 820,”
“GTS 850,” or “GTS ADS-B.” Selections are “Enable” or “Disable.”
[2] If the GDU 620 controls the traffic system, +External Control must be set to “Disable.” If
the GDU 620 does not control the traffic system, +External Control must be set to
“Enable.”
[3] For new installations, choose the Traffic/ADS-B TYPE setting “Avidyne/Ryan TAS.” The
“Avidyne/Ryan TAS” TYPE setting is available in GDU software v4.00 or later. If the
SkyWatch setting is used, the parameter +External Control must be set to “Enable.”
[4] ARINC 429 input port must be set to “TRAFFIC High Speed.”
[5] The GTX ADS-B #1 and GTX ADS-B #2 TYPE settings are functionally equivalent except
that these settings determine which GTX 345 unit (#1 or #2) is configured for ADS-B
processing. In a dual GTX 345 installation, only one of the GTX 345 units may be
configured for ADS-B processing. The GDU 620 will only accept data from the GTX 345
that is configured for ADS-B processing and will display an alert message if ADS-B data is
received from the GTX 345 unit that is not configured for ADS-B processing. The GTX
ADS-B #1 and GTX ADS-B #2 TYPE settings are available in GDU software v7.10 or later.
[6] The +TAS/TCAS/TCAD option is available when the Traffic/ADS-B TYPE setting is set to
“GTX ADS-B #1,” “GTX ADS-B #2,” or “GDL 88” and provides the system the source of
the TAS/TCAS traffic information used by the ADS-B In device (GTX 345 or GDL 88) for
traffic correlation. Selections are “A429 TAS/TCAS,” “TCAD,” and “Garmin GTS”.
configured for CROSSFILL will receive traffic information from the cross-side GDU 620. If
this TYPE setting is used, the TRAFFIC format must not be configured on any ARINC 429
input.
[8] GDU 620 software must be v7.30 (or later), GTS 825/855 must use software v3.12 (or
later), and GTS 800/820/850 must use software v4.12 (or later). GTS HSDB interface is
required. The ARINC 429 interfaces between the GTS and GDU 620 are not required.
Table 5-10 Data Link Configuration

Manufacturer Data Link Model TYPE Setting Notes
GDL 69 GDL 69
GDL 69A GDL 69A [1]
Garmin
GDL 69 SXM GDL 69
GDL 69A SXM GDL 69A [1]
Notes:
[1] If a GDL 69A is installed, and the TYPE set to GDL 69, the XM weather from the GDL 69A
displays on the GDU 620. There will be no control over the audio functions from the
GDU 620.

Rev. V Page 5-16
Table 5-11 Weather Radar Configuration
Manufacturer WXR R/T Model TYPE Setting Notes
GWX 68 GWX 68
Garmin GWX 70(R) GWX 70 [3]
GWX 75 GWX 75
ART 2000 ART-2000 [1] [2]
ART 2100 ART-2000 [1] [2]
Honeywell
RS 181A RS-181A [1] [2]
RS 811A RS-811A [1] [2]
Notes:
[1] For detailed information on configuring the weather radar system, and what weather radar
functions are supported by the GDU 620, refer to Appendix Section E.10.
[2] ARINC 429 output port must be set to “WX RADAR Low Speed” and ARINC 708 input
must be set to “WX RADAR.”
[3] Type setting GWX 68 for GDU 620 software v6.21 and earlier or GWX 70 for GDU 620
software v7.00 or later.
Table 5-12 Adapter Configuration

Manufacturer Adapter Model TYPE Setting Notes
GAD 43 GAD 43
Garmin GAD 43e or [1]
GAD 43e
GAD 43e CROSSFILL [2]
Notes:
[1] This setting is available on GDU 620 #1 only.
[2] This setting is available on GDU 620 #2 only. All necessary communication to the
GAD 43e is handled through GDU 620 #1 using crossfill.
Table 5-13 Iridium Configuration
Manufacturer Receiver Model TYPE Setting Notes
Garmin GSR 56 GSR 56
Table 5-14 Radar Altimeter Configuration

Manufacturer Radar Altimeter Model TYPE Setting Notes
Collins RAC-870 ARINC 429 [1]
Free Flight RA-4500 ARINC 429 NO TEST [1]
Garmin GRA 55/5500 ARINC 429 NO TEST [1]
Honeywell KRA 405B ARINC 429 [1]
Various analog radar
Various GAD 43e [2]
altimeters
N/A N/A GAD 43e CROSSFILL [3]

Rev. V Page 5-17
Notes:
[1] ARINC 429 input port must be set to “RADAR ALTIMETER Low Speed.”
[2] For information regarding which analog radar altimeters are supported via the GAD 43e,
refer to Appendix Section E.20. For specific information on configuring the GAD 43e, refer
to Section 5.5.14.2.
configured for GAD 43e CROSSFILL will receive radio altitude information from the cross-
side GDU 620.
NOTE
G600 system only: Prior to beginning any installation that requires a fast/slow display,
contact Garmin regarding the availability of the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow Enablement Card.
Table 5-15 Fast/Slow Configuration (G600 System Only)
Stall Warning
Manufacturer TYPE Setting Notes
Computer Model
EMCA SPWG92 ARINC 429 [1] [2]
Notes:
[1] No ARINC 429 input is configured by default.
[2] ARINC 429 input port must be set to “Fast/Slow 1 Low Speed.” This is only applicable to
the PC-12 and G600.
Table 5-16 Lightning Sensor Configuration

Manufacturer Model TYPE Setting Notes
L-3 Communications WX-500 Stormscope® [1]
Notes:
[1] For specific information on configuring Stormscope, refer to Section 5.5.15.3.

Rev. V Page 5-18
5.5.1.1 ARINC Port Configuration
NOTE
Each input/output format may only be configured on one port at a time.
NOTE
A green box in the DATA column indicates data is being received on that input.
After all of the interfacing systems are configured on the System Configuration page, the ARINC 429
inputs and outputs must be set to match the installation. Most inputs and outputs are set up by default when
the interfacing systems are configured on the System Configuration page. Certain interfacing systems do
not have a default port assigned. The correct port format must be manually set for that system using the
ARINC Port Config page. Use this page to change port assignments or bus speeds.
To set the ARINC port formats and speeds:
1. Go to the ARINC Port Config page in the SYS page group.
2. Activate the cursor.
3. Set the bus speed and input format for each input/out.
A list of format settings that are available on each port can be found in Table 5-17, Table 5-18, and
Table 5-19.
With GDU 620 Software v7.35 (or later) installed, the NUMBER OF GPS UNITS CONNECTED TO
A429 OUT 1 should be set to indicate the configuration of the GPS units connected to the system.
Figure 5-5 ARINC PORT CONFIG Page

Rev. V Page 5-19
Table 5-17 ARINC 429 Input Format Availability
Input Setting Port Availability Speed Pins
GRS77#1
ARINC 429 In #1 Low/High [2] P6202-4/21
GSU 75 AHRS
GDC74#1
ARINC 429 In #2 Low/High [3] P6202-5/22
GSU 75 ADC
GPS1
ARINC 429 In #3 Low/High P6202-6/23
GPS1 Sextant
NAV1
GPS2
GPS2 Sextant
NAV2
TRAFFIC
RADAR ALTIMETER P6202-7/24, 8/25, 9/26
ARINC 429 In #4, #5, #6, #7, or #8 Low/High
GAD 43e [1] P6203-4/26, 5/27
KFC 225
KFC 275/325
Fast/Slow 1
Flight Director
GFC 500 [4]
Notes:
[1] GAD 43e input format is only required if GAD 43e is being used to interface the GDU 620
to an analog radar altimeter, a synchro ADF receiver, or an analog NAV receiver. It is not
required to set an ARINC 429 input to this format if the GAD 43e is only used for altitude
preselect, DME, or marker beacon functions.
[2] ARINC 429 In #1 must be set to “High Speed.”
[3] ARINC 429 In #2 must be set to “Low Speed.”
[4] Only available with GDU 620 v7.30 or later. GFC 500 input format is only required if a
GAD 29(B) is being used to interface the GDU 620 to a GFC 500 autopilot system.

Rev. V Page 5-20
Table 5-18 ARINC 429 Output Format Availability
Output Setting Port Availability Speed [1] Pins
GPS NAVIGATOR ARINC 429 Out #1 Low/High P6202-3/20
AUTOPILOT ARINC 429 Out #2 Low/High P6203-1/23
DFCS 1 ARINC 429 Out #2 High P6203-1/23
DFCS 2 ARINC 429 Out #2 Low/High P6203-1/23
DFCS 4 ARINC 429 Out #2 High P6203-1/23
DFCS 5 ARINC 429 Out #2 Low/High P6203-1/23
GFC 500 [2] ARINC 429 Out #2 Low P6203-1/23
GFC 500 NAV [2] ARINC 429 Out #3 or #4 Low P6203-2/24 or 3/25
GENERAL PURPOSE 1 ARINC 429 Out #3 or #4 Low/High P6203-2/24 or 3/25
WX RADAR ARINC 429 Out #3 or #4 Low/High P6203-2/24 or 3/25
Notes:
[1] Only the listed bus speeds are available for the corresponding output settings.
[2] Only available with GDU 620 v7.30 or later. GFC 500 is only populated, and GFC 500 NAV
is only selectable, when the autopilot is configured for GFC 500 on the AUTOPILOT
CONFIGURATION page.
Table 5-19 ARINC 708 Input Format Availability

Output setting Port Availability Speed Pins
WX RADAR ARINC 708 In #1 or #2 N/A P6203-14/36 or 16/38

Rev. V Page 5-21
5.5.1.2 RS-232 Port Configuration
The RS-232 ports are typically set by default during system configuration. When using GDU 620 software
v7.00 and later, channels 5, 6, and 8 can be configured manually to accommodate different installation
configurations.
Figure 5-6 RS PORT CONFIG Page
To configure the RS-232 ports:

1. Go to the RS Port Config page in the SYS page group.
3. Set channel 5, 6, and/or 8 as required to match the installation.
A list of available RS-232 port settings for each channel is provided in Table 5-20 (GDU 620 software
v7.00 and later). The setting will be unavailable for selection if it is set on a different channel. The outputs
are set automatically.
Table 5-20 RS-232 Port Configuration Availability

INPUT OUTPUT
CHNL 5 OFF, SL30, Stormscope OFF, SL30, Stormscope
CHNL 6 OFF, GSR56, Stormscope OFF, GSR56, Stormscope
CHNL 8 OFF, Stormscope OFF, Shadin-alt, Stormscope

Rev. V Page 5-22
5.5.2 Airframe Configuration
Go to the Airframe Configuration page in the SYS page group. Set the parameters to the values
determined in Section 5.2.
5.5.2.1 Airspeed Configuration

Go to the Airspeed Configuration page in the SYS page group. Set the parameters to the values
determined in Section 5.2 if using the BASIC IAS TAPE configuration, or set the values in accordance
with Appendix M if using the ADVANCED IAS TAPE configuration.
5.5.3 Lighting Configuration

The following guidance is recommended to help the installer determine a suitable setup. A flight check is
recommended upon completion of the setup.
NOTE
A description of available adjustments can be found in Section 5 of the GDU 620
Installation Manual.
NOTE
To accurately configure the lighting, the ability to adjust ambient light conditions is
required. The installer should be prepared to simulate complete darkness in the cockpit.
Simply covering the photocells may not allow the installer’s eye to properly judge whether
the display brightness is too bright or too dim for night use.
Go to the Lighting Configuration page in the SYS page group and proceed according to the following
Photocell Configuration or Dimmer Bus Configuration subsections as applicable for the installation.

Rev. V Page 5-23
Photocell Configuration
NOTE
The display and key lighting can independently be set to track the photocell or dimmer
bus.
1. Set the Response Time to a low level (such as 2) to allow the display to adjust more quickly to
light conditions.
2. It is recommended to start configuration with a Slope of 50%.
3. Minimize photocell input levels by simulating night conditions in the cockpit. Any other
instrument panel or cockpit lighting should be turned on for this adjustment. Seek uniform
consistency between display lighting, bezel/key lighting, and any other illuminated objects.
a. If a display/keypad is too bright, lower the minimum level and/or adjust the lighting slope to
achieve the desired brightness.
b. If the display is not bright enough, raise the minimum level to the desired brightness.
4. Simulate direct maximum sunlight in the cockpit (best if done outside).
5. Verify that the display produces maximum brightness on the backlight output level.
6. Simulate average sunlight conditions in the cockpit (between 5000-7500 input level).
a. If the display is too bright or too dim, vary the Slope and/or Offset to achieve desired
brightness at mid-range lighting input levels.
b. Ensure that the lighting Slope, Offset and Minimum Level still maintain the low-light
configuration achieved in step 3. Repeat step 3 if necessary to re-adjust night lighting settings.
7. Adjust the Response Time to smooth changes to brightness as required.
8. Adjust the KEY Backlight Cutoff Percentage so that the key backlighting is switched off in bright
light.
Figure 5-7 LIGHTING CONFIGURATION Page - Photocell

Rev. V Page 5-24
Dimmer Bus Configuration
1. Select the source voltage for the dimmer bus.
2. Set the Photo Transition % to 0 for initial dimmer knob calibration.
3. Set the Response Time to a low level (such as 2) to allow the display to adjust more quickly to
dimmer bus input changes.
4. Simulate night conditions in the cockpit.
5. Turn the dimmer bus knob to its minimum setting.
6. Observe the Source Input Level for corresponding change to the input level. Seek uniform
consistency between display lighting, bezel key lighting, and any other cockpit illuminated
information.
a. If a display/keypad is too bright, lower the minimum level and/or adjust the lighting slope to
achieve the desired brightness.
b. If the display is too dim, increase the minimum level to achieve desired levels.
c. Slowly adjust the dimmer bus knob to its maximum setting.
d. Adjust the Slope and Offset to obtain uniform consistency between display lighting, bezel key
lighting, and any other cockpit illuminated information over the full range of the dimmer bus.
e. Set the Photo Transition % such that the photocell is used when the dimmer bus is switched off
(“OVERRIDE” will appear in the Photo Transition % setting in the Key column).
f. With the dimmer bus OFF, adjust the Photo Offset to a value so that the display and bezel keys
remain readable.
7. With the dimmer bus OFF, simulate direct sunlight conditions in the cockpit (best if done outside).
8. If the brightness is below maximum level, adjust the Photo Slope setting to achieve maximum
brightness (~10,000).
9. Adjust the Response Time to smooth changes to brightness as required.
Figure 5-8 LIGHTING CONFIGURATION Page - Dimmer Bus

Rev. V Page 5-25
5.5.4 Manifest Configuration
CAUTION
Prior to pressing MANIFEST, ensure that each LRU is operating and has the correct
software loaded. Failure to do so will result in an incomplete list of software part numbers
and version numbers being stored in the manifest. If an incomplete list of software part
numbers or version numbers is stored in the manifest, MANIFEST can be pressed again
to reflect the current information.
NOTE
With GDU 620 software v7.23 (or later), any LRU software version can be entered into the
manifest. Verify that the correct software part number and version number are being
entered.
Go to the Manifest Configuration page in the SYS page group. The manifest will be empty on first use.
1. Wait for the GSU 75(B) (or the GRS 77 and GDC 74( )), GMU 44, and GAD 43/GAD43e, if
installed, to power-up.
2. Press MANIFEST to automatically populate the manifest.
3. Ensure that the manifest contains the correct software part numbers and version numbers. Refer to
Equipment List, G500/G600 PFD/MFD System AML STC for a list of approved version numbers.
5.5.4.1 Manifest Description

The GDU 620 maintains a list of software part numbers and version numbers (i.e., the manifest) for the
G500/G600 system. Each time the G500/G600 system is powered up, the LRUs report their software
information to the GDU 620. If the information reported by the LRU does not match the information stored
in the manifest, the GDU 620 will not use the data provided by that LRU and will provide a MANIFEST
ALERT.
5.5.5 Optional G500/G600 Feature Activation
CAUTION
The Airframe Type must be set to Fixed Wing to be eligible for approval under this STC.
CAUTION
Prior to enabling any optional features, it is recommended that at least one configuration
module update be successfully completed (refer to Section 5.5.20) to verify correct
functionality of the configuration module interface. Any optional features that are enabled
without a fully functional configuration module will be disabled when the configuration
module interface is corrected. The enablement card that was used originally will not work
to re-enable the feature in this case.
NOTE
In order to enable/disable features, an Installer Unlock Card is required. However, it is
possible to view the status of all features without using an Installer Unlock Card.

Rev. V Page 5-26
NOTE
The feature enablement card should be provided to the customer after G500/G600
installation.
Ensure that any optional features are enabled. All optional features are activated using the Feature
Configuration page of the GDU 620.
Figure 5-9 FEATURE CONFIGURATION Page (G500)
Figure 5-10 FEATURE CONFIGURATION Page (G600)

Rev. V Page 5-27
5.5.5.1 ChartView
NOTE
The ChartView Enablement Card can only be used on one GDU 620 display (for a dual
G500/G600 installation, separate ChartView Enablement Cards must be used on each
GDU 620). A new ChartView Enablement Card must be used for each GDU 620 that has
the ChartView feature activated.
NOTE
Navigation or chart data must not be programmed on the ChartView Enablement Card.
The GDU 620 can display Jeppesen charts using the optional ChartView feature, which must be activated.
This section describes how to activate the ChartView feature in the GDU 620.
1. Turn the GDU 620 off.
2. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot.
3. Insert a ChartView Enablement Card for heavy aircraft (P/N 010-00769-50) or for light aircraft
(P/N 010-00769-53) in the top slot.
4. While pressing ENT, apply power to the GDU 620 to enter Configuration mode.
5. Go to the Feature Configuration page in the SYS page group.
6. Activate the cursor and change the setting for Charts to ChartView.
7. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
8. Press ENT again to activate ChartView. “ChartView” displays in the Active column.
5.5.5.2 Altitude Preselect

When the optional Altitude Preselect feature is enabled, the GDU 620 can provide selected altitude
information to certain autopilots, allowing the autopilot to capture the selected altitude. This section
describes how to activate the Altitude Preselect feature in the GDU 620. For instructions on how to
configure the Altitude Preselect feature, refer to Section 5.5.12.1.
2. Insert an Altitude Preselect Enablement Card (P/N 010-00769-52) into the top slot.
6. Activate the cursor and change the setting for Altitude Preselect to Enabled.
8. Press ENT again to activate the Altitude Preselect feature. “Enabled” displays in the Active
column.

Rev. V Page 5-28
5.5.5.3 SVT
The PFD of the GDU 620 can display synthetic terrain data using the optional SVT feature. SVT
enablement must be purchased separately for G500 systems. This section describes how to enable and
disable the Synthetic Vision feature in the GDU 620.
G500 installations require an SVT enablement as follows. Skip to step 4 for G600 installations, as this
feature is automatically unlocked.
2. Insert an SVT Enablement Card (P/N 010-00769-54) into the top slot.
3. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted into the bottom slot.
7. Change the set value for Synthetic Vision to Enabled or Disabled.
9. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the Synthetic Vision feature. Once the
Synthetic Vision feature is activated, “Enabled” displays in the Active column.
5.5.5.4 Weather Radar
NOTE
G500 installations require an WXR Enablement Card.
NOTE
G600 installations do not require a WXR Enablement Card when a GWX is installed, and
default this setting to the GWX option. Installations that do not include any weather radar
may leave this feature set to GWX and use the System Configuration page to deactivate
the weather radar interface.
When the optional Weather Radar feature is enabled, the MFD can be utilized to display weather radar data
from an external weather radar transceiver. This section describes how to activate the Weather Radar
feature in the GDU 620.
To enable weather radar:
2. For G500 installations only: Insert into the top card slot a WXR Enablement Card
(P/N 010-00769-57) if a GWX 68/70(R)/75 weather radar is being used or an ARINC 708 WXR
Enablement Card (P/N 010-00769-63) if an ARINC 708 weather radar is being used.
6. Activate the cursor and change the set value for Weather Radar to GWX or ARINC 708 depending
on the type of weather radar being enabled.

Rev. V Page 5-29
8. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the Weather Radar feature. “GWX” or
“ARINC 708” displays in the Active column.
9. Go to the System Configuration page.
10. Set the Weather Radar to Present.
11. Select the radar type.
When the optional ARINC 708 Weather Radar feature is enabled, the MFD can be utilized to display
weather radar data from an external ARINC 708 weather radar transceiver. This section describes how to
activate the ARINC 708 Weather Radar feature in the GDU 620.
2. Insert an ARINC 708 WXR Enablement Card (P/N 010-00769-63) into the top slot.
7. Change the set value for Weather Radar to ARINC 708.
9. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the ARINC 708 Weather Radar feature. When
the ARINC 708 Weather Radar feature is activated, “ARINC 708” displays in the Active column.
11. Set the Weather Radar to Present.
12. Select the radar type.

Rev. V Page 5-30
5.5.5.4.1 Turbulence Detection (GWX 70 Installations Only)
NOTE
The Turbulence Detection function requires an enablement card.
The Turbulence Detection configuration setting enables the detection of turbulence that might contain
particulates such as rain or hail. To enable the Turbulence Detection feature:
2. Insert a Turbulence Detection Enablement Card (P/N 010-00769-95 for a single GDU 620
installation or P/N 010-00769-96 for a dual GDU 620 installation) into the top SD card slot on the
GDU 620.
6. Activate the cursor and change the set value for Turbulence Detection to Enabled.
7. Press ENT to confirm the selection.
8. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt.
5.5.5.4.2 Ground Clutter Suppression (GWX 70 Installations Only)
NOTE
The Ground Clutter Suppression function requires an enablement card.
The Ground Clutter Suppression configuration setting enables the suppression of ground returns. To enable
the Ground Clutter Suppression feature:
2. Insert a Ground Clutter Suppression Enablement Card (P/N 010-00769-93 for a single GDU 620
installation or P/N 010-00769-94 for a dual GDU 620 installation) into the top SD card slot on the
GDU 620.
6. Activate the cursor and change the set value for Ground Clutter Suppression to Enabled.
7. Press ENT to confirm the selection.
8. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt.

Rev. V Page 5-31
5.5.5.5 GAD 43/43e Adapter
When the optional GAD 43/43e Adapter feature is enabled, the GAD 43/43e Adapter can be utilized in
conjunction with the G500/G600 to interface to various autopilots and other systems. G500 installations
require the GAD 43/43e enablement as follows. Skip to step 5 for G600 installations, as this feature is
automatically unlocked.
2. Insert a GAD 43/43e Enablement Card (P/N 010-00769-58) into the top slot.
4. Enter Configuration mode on the GDU 620.
7. Change the set value for GAD 43/43e Adapter to Enabled.
9. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the GAD 43/43e Adapter feature. When the
GAD 43/43e Adapter feature is activated, “Enabled” displays in the Active column.
5.5.5.6 TAWS (G600 Only)

Native TAWS is not available for the G500 system. When the optional TAWS feature is enabled in a G600
system, the GDU 620 will provide Class B TAWS functionality. This section describes how to activate the
TAWS feature in the GDU 620. If an external TAWS unit (including the GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS) is
installed, the native GDU 620 Class B TAWS feature is suppressed to prevent conflicting TAWS warnings
and annunciations.
NOTE
If enabling TAWS on the G600, the audio output from the GDU 620 must be connected to
an unswitched and unmuted input on the audio panel. Refer to Figure F-16.
NOTE
A single TAWS Enablement Card for dual GDU 620 installations (P/N 010-00769-56)
enables the TAWS B functionality on both GDU 620s in a dual G600 installation.

3. In the top slot, insert a TAWS Enablement Card (P/N 010-00769-51 for single GDU 620
installations or P/N 010-00769-56 for dual GDU 620 installations).
5. Go to the Feature Configuration page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and change the
set value TAWS to Enabled.
7. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the TAWS feature. When the TAWS feature is
activated, “Enabled” will appear in the Active column.
8. For dual G600 installations, repeat steps 1-7 for GDU 620 #2.

Rev. V Page 5-32
5.5.5.7 External Video
When the optional external video feature is enabled, the MFD can be used to display NTSC or PAL video
data from an external video source. This section describes how to activate the external video feature in the
GDU 620.
2. Insert a Video Enablement Card (P/N 010-00769-61) into the top slot.
7. Change the set value for External Video to Enabled.
9. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the external video feature. When the external
video feature is activated, “Enabled” will appear in the Active column.
5.5.5.8 Radar Altimeter (ARINC 429)

When the optional ARINC 429 Radar Altimeter feature is enabled, the PFD will display radar altitude data
from an external ARINC 429 radar altimeter. This section describes how to activate the ARINC 429 Radar
Altimeter feature in the GDU 620.
2. Insert an ARINC 429 Radar Altimeter Enablement Card (P/N 010-00769-64 for single
G500/G600 installations or P/N 010-00769-65 for dual G500/G600 installations) into the top slot.
7. Change the set value for RAD ALT (A429) to Enabled.
9. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the ARINC 429 Radar Altimeter feature.
When the ARINC 429 Radar Altimeter feature is activated, “Enabled” will appear in the Active
column.
11. Set the Radar Altimeter to Present.
12. Select the radar altimeter type.
5.5.5.9 Metric PFD (G500 Only)

Enablement of this feature is not approved with this STC.
5.5.5.10 EIS
Enablement of this feature is not approved with this STC.

Rev. V Page 5-33
5.5.5.11 DFCS 4 (ARINC 429 Output)
When the optional DFCS 4 ARINC 429 feature is enabled, the DFCS 4 output on ARINC 429 OUT 2 may
be used. This section describes how to activate the DFCS 4 ARINC 429 feature in the GDU 620.
2. Insert a DFCS 4 A429 (Dual) Enablement Card (P/N 010-00769-62) into the top slot.
7. Change the set value for DFCS 4 (A429) to Enabled.
9. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the DFCS 4 (A429) feature.
10. Go to the Autopilot Configuration page in the FCS page group.
11. Activate the cursor
12. Highlight Autopilot.
13. Press ENT to set Autopilot as Present.
16. Change the OUTPUT for ARINC 429 Out 2 to DFCS 4.
5.5.5.12 Fast/Slow (ARINC 429)
NOTE
Prior to beginning any installation that requires a fast/slow display, contact Garmin
When the optional ARINC 429 Fast/Slow feature is enabled, the PFD will display a fast/slow indication
using data from an external ARINC 429 stall warning computer or other suitable device. This section
describes how to activate the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow feature in the GDU 620.
2. Insert an ARINC 429 Fast/Slow Enablement Card (P/N 010-00769-67 for single G500/G600
installations or P/N 010-00769-68 for dual G500/G600 installations) into the top slot.
7. Change the set value for Fast/Slow (A429) to Enabled.
9. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow feature. When the
ARINC 429 Fast/Slow feature is activated, “Enabled” will appear in the Active column.

Rev. V Page 5-34
11. Set the Fast/Slow to Present.
12. Select the Fast/Slow input type.
13. For dual G500/G600 installations, repeat steps 1-12 for GDU 620 #2.
5.5.5.13 SSEC (G600 Only)

SSEC is not available for the G500 system. When the SSEC is enabled to support RVSM eligibility, the
ADC uses the SSEC factors to reduce altimetry errors.
To enable the SSEC:
NOTE
Additional requirements apply for RVSM eligibility.

2. Insert the SSEC Enablement Card into the top slot. Refer to the descriptions in Table 2-2 to select
the SSEC Enablement Card part number that correspond to the aircraft installation.
7. Change the set value for RVSM to the aircraft type (e.g., TBM700/850).
9. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the RVSM feature. When the RVSM feature is
activated, the aircraft type (e.g., “TBM700/850”) will appear in the Active column.
10. Go to the Air Data Configuration page in the ADC page group.
12. Change Aircraft to the aircraft type (e.g., TBM700/850).
13. Press ENT to confirm your selection. The G500/G600 software manifest will require updating
after the feature enablement and configuration. Refer to Section 5.5.4 to update the manifest.
NOTE
For installations with a GSU 75 or GDC 72, replace steps 10-13 with the following:
10a. Go to the ADC Configuration page in the ADC page group.

11a. Press the SET>ACTV softkey.
12a. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt.
13a. Wait for the upload to complete, then press ENT to dismiss the notification.
Once feature enablement and configuration is complete, the installation configuration may be inspected by
starting the GDU 620 in Configuration mode. Neither an Installer Unlock Card nor feature enablement
card is required to inspect the configuration or to operate the system in Normal mode.

Rev. V Page 5-35
5.5.6 Audio Alert Configuration
The alert volume level has an initial default of 0 dB (maximum volume value). The volume of the
GDU 620 audio output must be set so as to ensure that aural messages are audible under all anticipated
noise environmental conditions, particularly high noise environments.
1. Go to the Audio Alert Configuration page in the SYS page group.
3. Select the Audio Message type.
4. Select the Play field.
5. Press ENT to play the message.
6. Using the Volume Adjust field, adjust the volume so the alert message is audible under all
anticipated noise environmental conditions.
a. Evaluate the audio messages for acceptable volume and intelligibility during both low and
high cockpit noise levels.
b. Adjust the audio volume by moving the cursor to the Volume Adjust field and rotating the
small right knob. Turn the knob clockwise to increase the volume and counterclockwise to
decrease the volume.
7. Select the desired voice type using the Voice field (Male or Female).
Figure 5-11 AUDIO ALERT CONFIGURATION Page
5.5.7 Terrain/Garmin SVT Setup

For addition information, refer to Section 2.5.8.7.
5.5.7.1 Terrain Proximity Setup with Garmin SVT and G600 TAWS Disabled
For installations with both SVT and G600 (internal) TAWS disabled, configure Terrain Alerting as
follows:
1. Go to the Terrain Proximity Setup page in the SYS page group.
3. Set EXT TAWS to one of the following:
a. NOT INSTALLED if no external TAWS system is present in the aircraft.
b. INSTALLED (GARMIN) if a Garmin external TAWS system is present in the aircraft.
c. INSTALLED (OTHER) if a non-Garmin external TAWS system is present in the aircraft.
d. INSTALLED (HSDB) if a Garmin GTN 6XX/7XX with Terrain Alerting or TAWS enabled is
connected to the system with HSDB wiring.

Rev. V Page 5-36
Figure 5-12 TERRAIN PROXIMITY SETUP Page
5.5.7.2 Garmin Terrain SVT Enabled and G600 TAWS Disabled

For installations with SVT enabled and G600 (internal) TAWS disabled, configure Terrain Alerting and
Airport Criteria as follows:
1. Go to the Terrain-SVT Setup page in the SYS page group.
3. Set EXT TAWS to one of the following:
a. NOT INSTALLED if no external TAWS system is present in the aircraft.
b. INSTALLED (GARMIN) if a Garmin external TAWS system is present in the aircraft.
c. INSTALLED (OTHER) if a non-Garmin external TAWS system is present in the aircraft.
d. INSTALLED (HSDB) if a Garmin GTN 6XX/7XX with Terrain Alerting or TAWS enabled is
connected to the system with HSDB wiring.
4. Set the RNWY Surface and Min Length to the values determined in Section 5.2.5.
Figure 5-13 TERRAIN-SVT SETUP Page

Rev. V Page 5-37
5.5.7.3 G600 Internal TAWS-B Enabled (G600 Systems Only)
For installations with G600 (internal) TAWS enabled, insert a TAWS Enablement Card and configure the
Airport Criteria as follows:
1. Go to the TAWS-B Setup page in the SYS page group.
2. Set the RNWY Surface and Min Length to the values determined in Section 5.2.5.
5.5.8 Video Configuration
NOTE
It is recommended that the Format field be set to AUTO. Other available selections are
NTSC and PAL.
NOTE
The brightness, contrast, and saturation of the image can also be adjusted in Normal
mode using the External Video page in the AUX page group.
1. Go to the Video Configuration page in the SYS page group.

2. Press VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2 to select the video source to be configured.
3. Press SETUP and change the configured field to YES.
4. Adjust the orientation of the image using the Rotation field (image rotations of 0°, 90°, 180°, and
270° are available).
5. Adjust the brightness, contrast, and saturation of the image to provide an acceptable image.
Figure 5-14 VIDEO CONFIGURATION Page

Rev. V Page 5-38
5.5.9 Discrete Output Configuration
The GDU 620 discrete outputs must be configured to match a particular installation. The functions of the
GDU 620 discrete outputs can be configured using the Discrete Configuration page in the SYS page
group. The GDU 620 assigns default functions to the discrete output pins, as shown in Figure 5-15.
NOTE
It is recommended that the default settings for the discretes be used whenever possible.
NOTE
The GDU 620 discrete outputs can be returned to the default settings by pressing
DEFAULTS.
NOTE
Each discrete output function may only be configured on one discrete output at a time.
NOTE
All discrete output configurations are available on any of the active low discrete outputs.
However, a particular discrete output configuration may only be set on one output. If it is
desired to change the output pin used, its current setting must first be turned off before the
output can be configured on another pin.
In order for the system to function correctly, any discrete outputs that are utilized in a particular installation
must be configured to match that installation.
2. Select the Function field for the desired pin and set it to match the installation. The following
settings are available for each discrete output (asterisks denote Active-Low signals):
a. TAWS Audio Active Out*
b. Altitude Capture*
c. A/P Backcourse
d. TIS/TAS Standby*
e. TAS Test*
f. GPS Annunciate*
g. GPS Select*
h. ILS/GPS Approach*
i. GSR 56 Remote Power*
j. Radar Altimeter Self Test Out*
k. WX Radar On*
l. GPS 1/2 Source*
m. HDG/CRS DATUM VALID*
n. On-Ground*
o. ETM Trend*
p. Radar Altimeter Self Test Out 2*

Rev. V Page 5-39
NOTE
Airspeed discretes require additional configuration. Refer to Section 5 of GDU 620 TSO
Installation Manual (P/N 190-00601-04).
q. AIRSPEED DISCRETE OUT 1*

r. AIRSPEED DISCRETE OUT 2*
s. AIRSPEED DISCRETE OUT 3*
t. AIRSPEED DISCRETE OUT 4*
u. AIRSPEED DISCRETE OUT 5*
3. Repeat for all discrete outputs utilized in the installation.
Figure 5-15 DISCRETE CONFIGURATION Page
5.5.10 ADC Configuration

The OAT probe type must be set for the ADC.
1. Go to the ADC Configuration page in the GDC page group.
2. Activate the cursor and select the GTP 59 OAT probe type.

Rev. V Page 5-40
5.5.11 GDL 69 Series Configuration
NOTE
GDL 69 series XM must be activated before use. Refer to the GDL 69/69A Installation
Manual and GDL 69/69A XM Activation Instructions.
If installed, the GDL 69 series unit must be configured to match the installation.
1. Go to the GDL 69 Configuration page in the GDL page group.
3. Adjust the Antenna Gain and Cable Loss to match the installation. Refer to GDL 69/69A
Installation Manual to determine the correct values.
5.5.12 Autopilot Configuration
NOTE
In most cases, Autopilot TYPE setting is set to match the original HSI that was removed as
part of the G500/G600 installation. If original HSI does not match setting below,
additional changes may be required.
If an autopilot is connected to the G500/G600, the GDU 620 must be configured to provide the correct
heading and course datum information to the autopilot.
2. Press ENT to set the autopilot to PRESENT.
3. Move the cursor to the Type field and set the value according to Table 5-21.
Table 5-21 GDU 620 Autopilot Type Settings
Autopilot Model Autopilot TYPE Setting Notes
Bendix M-4C/M-4D
Bendix M-4C / M-4D
Manual Entry [7]
Century 2000 Century 2000
Century 21/31/41 Century 21/31/41
Century 1C388C/MC [11]
Century 1C388/M [12]
Century II Century 1C388-2 [13]
Century 1C388-3 [14]
Manual Entry [6] [7]
Century 1C388C/MC [11]
Century 1C388/M [12]
Century III Century 1C388-2 [13]
Century 1C388-3 [14]
Manual Entry [6] [7]
Century IV (AC) Century NSD 360 AC
Century IV (DC) Century IV
All Century A/Ps with Radio Couplers Century NSD 360 AC [6] [7]

Rev. V Page 5-41
Table 5-21 GDU 620 Autopilot Type Settings
Autopilot Model Autopilot TYPE Setting Notes
Cessna 300/400/800 IFCS Cessna 400B AC
Cessna 400B/1000A IFCS Cessna 400B AC or DC [1]
Cessna 300B/400B/800B IFCS Cessna 400B DC
Collins AP-106/107 Collins PN 101 [10]
Collins APS-65 APS-65 [19] [20]
Garmin GFC 500 GFC 500 [21] [23]
Garmin GFC 600 GFC 600 [22] [23] [24]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KAP 100 King KI 525 [5]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 150 King KI 525 [5]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 200 King KI 525 [5]
King KFC 225 [15]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 225

King KFC 250 [2]
w/ 065-5015-XX Adapter Card (4" instruments)
King KI 525 [5]
w/ 065-5016-XX Adapter Card (3" instruments)
King KI 525 [5]
King KFC 325/275 [15] [16]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 300 Collins PN 101
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 325 King KFC 325/275 [2] [15]
Sperry SPZ-200A/500 Manual Entry [7]
S-TEC 20/30/40/50/55/55X/60-1/60-2/60 PSS/65 King KI 525 [3] [5]
STEC 1500/2100 AC [17]
S-TEC 1500/2100 (AC)
Manual Entry [7] [8] [9]
STEC 1500/2100 DC [18]
S-TEC 1500/2100 (DC)
Manual Entry [7] [8] [9]
Notes:
[1] Select “Cessna 400B AC” or “Cessna 400B DC” based upon whether the autopilot is strapped
for AC or DC course/heading error inputs. Cessna 1000A IFCS is strapped for DC
course/heading error inputs. Verify CA-1050A, PK43, Pins 1, 2, 23, and 24 are grounded.
[2] If the King autopilot is installed with a KA 52 or KA 57 autopilot adapter, the TYPE must be set
to “King KI 525” and not the indicated setting.
[3] If the autopilot has been previously configured to operate with the “NSD-360,” the TYPE must
be set to “Century NSD 360 DC” and not “KI-525.” If the autopilot is configured to operate with
any other heading system it must be reconfigured to either NSD-360 or KI-525 (KCS-55) in
order to be compatible with the G500/G600.
[4] Not used.
[5] With GDU 620 software v3.20 and earlier, on the Autopilot Configuration page, the Vmin
and Vmax default values for the King KI 525 setting were -15.0 and 15.0, respectively. These

Rev. V Page 5-42
values are -12.5 and 12.5 for GDU 620 software v5.00 and later. If the Vmin and Vmax values
are set to -15.0 and 15.0, manually set the ACTIVE values to -12.5 and 12.5, respectively.
[6] GDU 620 must be connected to a Radio Coupler. Configuration values will vary based upon
which Century Radio Coupler is used.
[7] Refer to Section 5.5.12.2 for settings.
[8] S-TEC 1500/2100 Computers with P/Ns 01304-01 or 01304-03 are AC computers, and
require Manual Entry Settings. Refer to Section 5.5.12.2. P/Ns 01304-02, 01304-04, and
01304-07 are DC computers and require manual entry settings. Refer to Section 5.5.12.2.
[9] This autopilot requires additional autopilot specific configuration. Refer to Section 5.5.12.3.1
for more information.
[10] It is acceptable to set “HDG +” and “CRS +” to non-default setting of “LEFT” if heading and
course error hi/lo signal wires are swapped.
[11] Use this setting if a 1C388C or 1C388MC radio coupler is installed.
[12] Use this setting if a 1C388 or 1C388M radio coupler is installed.
[13] Use this setting if a 1C388-2 radio coupler is installed.
[14] Use this setting if a 1C388-3 radio coupler is installed.
[15] This setting supports the display of Autopilot mode annunciations over ARINC 429.
[16] Select “King KFC 325/275” for the Autopilot TYPE. Then, set the CONFIGURATION settings
to the values specified in Section 5.5.12.2. Do not set TYPE to “Manual Entry,” otherwise,
Autopilot mode annunciations will not be available on the PFD.
[17] S-TEC 1500/2100 Computers with P/Ns 01304-01 or 01304-03 are AC computers.
[18] S-TEC 1500/2100 Computers with P/Ns 01304-02, 01304-04, and 01304-07 are DC
computers.
[19] The GAD 43e cannot be used to provide the Altitude Preselector function with any APS-65
computer that currently uses the PRE-80 altitude preselector.
[20] The GAD 43/43e cannot be used to provide the vertical gyro attitude solution to the
APS-65A. The existing vertical gyro must be retained to provide the APS-65A an attitude
solution.
[21] The GFC 500 autopilot system requires the Garmin G5 electronic ADI. The G5/GFC 500
must be connected via the GAD 29(B) to the GDU 620. The GDU 620 software must be
v7.30 or later and the G5 software must be v5.50 or later.
[22] GDU 620 software v7.30 or later must use GMC 605 software v2.21 or later.
[23] Prior to setting the Autopilot TYPE to GFC 500 or GFC 600, the GPSS/HDG CONTROL
under the Analog Roll Steering section must be set to NONE. If the Analog Roll
Steering section is not visible in the Autopilot Configuration page, set the Autopilot
TYPE to any non-Garmin type (e.g., King KFC 225). Then, set the GPSS/HDG CONTROL
to NONE and change the Autopilot TYPE back to a GFC autopilot.
[24] The AIRSPEED LIMITS SOURCE must be set to GDU in the Configuration window.

Rev. V Page 5-43
5.5.12.1 Altitude Preselect Configuration
NOTE
The Altitude Preselect setting will not display unless the Altitude Preselect option is
enabled or the GAD 43e Adapter is configured as PRESENT. Refer to Section 5.5.5.2 and
Section 5.5.1.
NOTE
For Garmin GFC 500 or GFC 600 autopilot systems, the Attitude Preselect option must
not be configured as PRESENT in the SYSTEM window of the AUTOPILOT
CONFIGURATION page.
With certain autopilots, it is possible to select an altitude on the GDU 620 and then have the autopilot
capture that selected altitude. If the system is installed to utilize this feature, the Altitude Preselect function
must be enabled and properly configured. This section describes how to configure the Altitude Preselect
feature on the GDU 620.
1. Ensure that the Altitude Preselect option is enabled or the GAD 43e Adapter has been configured
as PRESENT.
2. Go to the Autopilot page in the FCS page group.
3. Activate the cursor and highlight Altitude Preselect.
4. Press ENT to set the Altitude Preselect to PRESENT.
5. Move the cursor to the TYPE field and set the value according to Table 5-22.
Figure 5-16 AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION Page - Altitude Preselect
Table 5-22 GDU 620 Altitude Preselect Type Settings

Manufacturer Autopilot Model Altitude Preselect TYPE Setting Notes
S-TEC System 55X S-TEC 55X [1]
GAD 43e [3]
Various Various [2]
GAD 43e CROSSFILL [4]
Notes:
[1] Used when emulating an S-TEC SA-200 Altitude Selector/Alerter (P/N 01282) over
RS-485, which requires a purchased enablement. The S-TEC 55X is also supported with
an enabled GAD 43e.
[2] Refer to Appendix Section E.20 for information regarding which autopilot/altitude
preselectors are supported using the GAD 43e. Refer to Section 5.5.14.2 for specific
information on configuring the GAD 43e.
[3] This setting is available on GDU 620 #1 only.
[4] This setting is available on GDU 620 #2 only. All necessary communication to the
GAD 43e is handled through GDU 620 #1 using crossfill.

Rev. V Page 5-44
5.5.12.2 Autopilot Settings Using Manual Entry
NOTE
The values shown in the figure are for reference only. Refer to Table 5-23 for the correct
settings.
If the current version of GDU 620 software does not have a configuration setting for a particular autopilot,
the autopilot may be set up manually. Specific configurations for the settings below will be included in
future revisions of the software.
1. Go to the Autopilot Configuration page in the FCS page group, shown in Figure 5-17.
2. Activate the cursor and press ENT to set the Autopilot to PRESENT.
3. Move the cursor to the TYPE field, select “Manual Entry.”
4. Press ENT.
5. To set the ACTIVE values in accordance with Table 5-23, use the cursor.
Figure 5-17 AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION Page - Manual Entry

Rev. V Page 5-45
Table 5-23 GDU 620 Manual Autopilot ACTIVE Settings
Flight Director/Autopilot Model Parameter ACTIVE Setting Notes
AC/DC AC
HDG + LEFT
CRS + LEFT
Bendix [1] HDG V/DEG 0.291
M-4C, M-4D CRS V/DEG 0.291
Vmin -18.000
Vmax 18.000
Vref 0.000
AC/DC AC
HDG + LEFT
CRS + LEFT
Century A/P HDG V/DEG 0.040 [2]
w/ 1C388C or 1C388MC Radio Coupler CRS V/DEG 0.040 [2]
Vmin -2.000 [2]
Vmax 2.000 [2]
Vref 0.000
AC/DC AC
HDG + LEFT
CRS + LEFT
w/ 1C388 or 1C388M Radio Coupler CRS V/DEG 0.025 [2]
Vmin -1.250 [2]
Vmax 1.250 [2]
Vref 0.000
AC/DC AC
HDG + LEFT
CRS + LEFT
w/ 1C388-2 Radio Coupler CRS V/DEG 0.190 [2]
Vmin -10.000 [2]
Vmax 10.000 [2]
Vref 0.000
AC/DC AC
HDG + LEFT
CRS + LEFT
w/ 1C388-3 Radio Coupler CRS V/DEG 0.210 [2]
Vmin -11.000 [2]
Vmax 11.000 [2]
Vref 0.000

Rev. V Page 5-46
Table 5-23 GDU 620 Manual Autopilot ACTIVE Settings
Flight Director/Autopilot Model Parameter ACTIVE Setting Notes
AC/DC DC
HDG + RIGHT
CRS + RIGHT
Honeywell (Bendix/King) HDG V/DEG 0.550
KFC 275 [4] CRS V/DEG 0.210
Vmin -12.500
Vmax 12.500
Vref 0.000
AC/DC DC [3]
HDG + Right
CRS + Right
S-TEC
HDG V/DEG 0.053
1500/2100 (AC)
CRS V/DEG 0.000
P/Ns 01304-01, 01304-03
Vmin 0.250
Vmax 9.750
Vref 5.000
AC/DC DC [3]
HDG + Right
CRS + Right
S-TEC HDG V/DEG 0.550
1500/2100 (DC)
CRS V/DEG 0.000
P/Ns 01304-02, -04, -07
Vmin -16.500
Vmax 16.500
Vref 0.000
AC/DC AC
HDG + RIGHT
CRS + LEFT
HDG V/DEG 0.200
Sperry SPZ-200A/500
CRS V/DEG 0.200
Vmin -13.100
Vmax 13.100
Vref 0.000
Notes:
[1] Adjustments to the autopilot may be required. Refer to Figure F-31 for additional
information.
[2] These settings are for the Triad SP-66 isolation transformers. Refer to Figure F-13. If
using Triad TY-141P transformers, these values should be increased by 10%. This
transformer is not recommended for new installations.
[3] Both variants of the S-TEC 1500/2100 autopilot computer require the DC voltage
configuration for HDG datum.
[4] Do not set TYPE to “Manual Entry.” The Autopilot mode annunciations will not be available
on the PFD.

Rev. V Page 5-47
5.5.12.3 Model Specific Autopilot Configuration
5.5.12.3.1 S-TEC 1500/2100 Autopilot
The S-TEC 1500/2100 autopilot requires a dual G500/G600 installation.
NOTE
In order to configure the DFCS 4 output format on ARINC 429 Out 2, the DFCS 4 (A429)
Feature must be enabled. Refer to Section 5.5.5.11 for more information on enabling the
DFCS 4 (A429) feature.
For each GDU 620 do the following:

2. Activate the cursor and set the output format of ARINC 429 Out 2 to DFCS 4.
5.5.12.3.2 Autopilot Mode Annunciations

With certain autopilots, it is possible to display the Autopilot mode on the GDU 620 PFD. This section
describes how to configure the display of Autopilot mode annunciations on the GDU 620.
NOTE
In order for Autopilot mode annunciations to be displayed, a GDU 620 ARINC 429 input
must be properly configured. Refer to Section 5.5.1.1 for details on how to configure the
ARINC 429 inputs.
NOTE
For Autopilot TYPE “GFC 500”, the “+Mode Annunciations” is automatically set to
“ARINC 429” on GDU 1 or “ARINC 429 Crossfill” on GDU 2 and it cannot be changed.
NOTE
The “+Mode Annunciations” setting only appears for autopilot TYPES that support it.

2. Activate the cursor and highlight “+ Mode Annunciations.”
3. Press ENT to set the mode annunciations to PRESENT.
Figure 5-18 Autopilot Mode Annunciation Setting

Rev. V Page 5-48
Table 5-24 GDU 620 Autopilot Mode Annunciations Type Settings
+ Mode Annunciations
Manufacturer Autopilot Model Notes
TYPE Setting
ARINC 429 input from the GFC 500
Garmin GFC 500 (i.e., G5/GAD 29(B)) must be set to
GFC 500/Low Speed
ARINC 429 input from autopilot
KFC 225
ARINC 429 must be set to KFC 225
Honeywell ARINC 429 input from autopilot
KFC 275
(Bendix/King) must be set to KFC 325/275
ARINC 429 input from autopilot
KFC 325
must be set to KFC 325/275
5.5.12.4 ARINC 429 Output Configuration (ARINC Out 2)

Various autopilots receive ARINC 429 information from the GDU 620. This section describes how to
configure the ARINC 429 OUT 2 on the GDU 620.
2. Activate the cursor and highlight ARINC 429 OUT 2 fields, and set the values according to
Table 5-25.

Rev. V Page 5-49
Table 5-25 GDU 620 ARINC 429 Output Settings
ARINC 429 Output Setting
Manufacturer Autopilot Model Notes
SPEED OUTPUT
Garmin GFC 500 Low GFC 500 [3] [4]
KFC 225 DFCS 5
Honeywell
KFC 275 Low DFCS 5 [1]
(Bendix/King)
KFC 325 DFCS 5 [1]
System 55X Low AUTOPILOT
S-TEC
1500/2100 High DFCS 4 [2]
Notes:
[1] Only supported by KCP 220 -15 and above.
[2] In order to configure the DFCS 4 output format on ARINC 429 Out 2, the DFCS 4 (A429)
feature must be enabled. Refer to Section 5.5.5.11 for more information on enabling the
DFCS 4 (A429) feature.
[3] When the GFC 500 is set as the Autopilot TYPE on the AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION
page, the ARINC 429 Out 2 is automatically set to GFC 500/Low by default.
[4] Must set “GFC 500 NAV” (Low Speed) on ARINC 429 OUT 3 or OUT 4.
5.5.12.5 Roll Steering Converter Function Configuration
NOTE
During system configuration, leave the GPSS to HDG Datum Gain set to the default value.
Refer to Section 5.10.2.3 for information on adjusting the GPSS to HDG Datum Gain.
The GDU 620 can act as a roll-steering converter. It will receive the ARINC 429 GPSS information from
the selected navigator (1 or 2) and translate it into a heading error. This section describes how to configure
the GPS Roll Steering function on the GDU 620.
2. In the Analog Roll Steering window, set the GPSS/HDG Control to one of the following settings:
a. NONE – if the GDU 620 Roll Steering Conversion function is not being used in the
installation.
b. DISCRETE IN – if the GPSS Enable In* discrete input (external switch) is used to switch
between GPSS and HDG on the heading datum output.
c. HDG KEY– if GDU 620 HDG is used to switch between GPSS and HDG on the heading
datum output.
Figure 5-20 Analog Roll Steering

Rev. V Page 5-50
5.5.13 Flight Director Configuration
NOTE
The two SVT FD configuration settings are only displayed if SVT is enabled on GDU 620s
running software v3.00 or later.
NOTE
By default, the flight director display is turned off when SVT is turned on. For those
autopilots listed in Table 5-26 with SVT FD Allowed (Yes), it is acceptable to set SVT FD
DISPLAY to “ENABLE” so that the flight director can be displayed when synthetic terrain
is displayed on the PFD. For those autopilots listed in Table 5-26 with SVT FD
Allowed (No), SVT FD DISPLAY must be set to “DISABLE.”
NOTE
Successive releases of GDU 620 software have added settings for Flight Director TYPE.
Whenever possible, use the TYPE that is listed. If the required TYPE is not available, use
the manual entry settings.
NOTE
It is recommended that the SVT FD PITCH SCALING setting be changed to 0.46 from the
default value of 0.55. However, it is still acceptable to use the default value of 0.55.
NOTE
The pitch threshold setting becomes available when DISCRETE ENABLE is disabled.
NOTE
Selecting the Flight Director TYPE will set default values for the flight director. These
values may require adjustment based upon the flight director check. For additional
details, refer to Section 5.8.5.3 and Section 5.10.2.1
If an external flight director input is connected to the G500/G600, the GDU 620 must be configured to
enable the display of the flight director. This section describes how to configure the GDU 620 to enable the
flight director.
1. Go to the Flight Director page in the FCS page group.
3. Press ENT to set the Flight Director to PRESENT.
5. Century IV/41/2000 Autopilot model only: Move the cursor to the DISCRETE ENABLE field
and set to DISABLE, then move the cursor to the PITCH THRESHOLD field and set to the value
described in Table 5-27.
6. (Optional) For those autopilots listed in Table 5-26 with SVT FD Allowed (Yes), move the cursor to
the SVT FD DISPLAY field and set to ENABLE. Set the SVT FD PITCH SCALING to 0.46.

Rev. V Page 5-51
Figure 5-21 FLIGHT DIRECTOR Page
Table 5-26 GDU 620 Flight Director Type Settings

Flight Director Flight Director TYPE SVT FD
Manufacturer Notes
(Autopilot) Model Setting Allowed
M-4D
Bendix Bendix M-4D Yes [4]
w/ 4007463-0501 FD Adapter Card
Century IV/41/2000 Manual Entry Yes [1]

300B/400B/800B IFCS Cessna 400B/800B Yes
Cessna
1000A IFCS Cessna 1000 IFCS No [1]
APS-65 Collins APS-65 Yes [4]
Collins
AP-106/107 Collins AP-106/107 Yes [2] [4]
GFC 500 ARINC 429 Yes [3]
Garmin
GFC 600 GFC 600 Yes
KFC 150/200 King KI 256 Yes [4]
KFC 225 King KFC 225 Yes [4] [1]
KFC 250
w/ 065-5015-XX Adapter Card King KCI 310 Yes [4]
(4" instruments)
KFC 250
w/ 065-5016-XX Adapter Card King KI 256 Yes [4]
Honeywell (3" instruments)
(Bendix/King)
KFC 275
King KI 256 Yes [4]
(w/KCP 220 -0012 and earlier)
KFC 325
King KCI 310 Yes [4]
(w/KCP 220 -0012 and earlier)
KFC 275/325
ARINC 429 Yes [3] [4] [5]
(w/KCP 220 -0015 and later)
KFC 300 King KCI 310 Yes [4]
Sperry SPZ-200A/500 Sperry SPZ-200A/500 Yes [4]

Rev. V Page 5-52
Table 5-26 GDU 620 Flight Director Type Settings
Flight Director Flight Director TYPE SVT FD
Manufacturer Notes
(Autopilot) Model Setting Allowed
55, 55X S-TEC 55X Yes [4] [6]
S-TEC 60-2/65 S-TEC ST-670 Yes [1]
1500/2100 S-TEC 1500/2100 Yes [4]
Notes:
[1] For settings and settings updates, refer to Section 5.5.13.1.
[2] It is acceptable to set “PITCH +” to non-default setting of “UP” if FD Pitch UP/DN signal
wires are swapped.
[3] Set Flight Director TYPE to ARINC 429 Crossfill on GDU 620 #2.
[4] It is recommended that the SVT FD PITCH SCALING be changed to 0.46 rather than the
default 0.55. However, it is still acceptable to use the default value of 0.55.
[5] It is acceptable to use the KCI 310/Manual Entry setting for existing G600 installations.
[6] The following FLIGHT DIRECTOR CAL setting should be used for S-TEC 55/55X rather
than the default settings:
• PITCH FILTER TIME: 0.4
• ROLL FILTER: ABSOLUTE
• ROLL FILTER TIME: 0.7
5.5.13.1 Flight Director Settings Using Manual Entry

If the current version of GDU 620 software does not have a configuration setting for a particular flight
director, the flight director may be set up manually. Specific configurations for the settings below may be
included in future revisions of the software:
3. Press ENT to set the Flight Director to PRESENT.
4. Move the cursor to the TYPE field.
5. Select “Manual Entry.”
6. Press ENT.
7. Use the cursor to set the ACTIVE values according to Table 5-27.
Table 5-27 includes flight director setting changes made in the most recent installation manual revision.

Rev. V Page 5-53
Table 5-27 GDU 620 Manual Flight Director ACTIVE Settings
Flight Director/
Parameter ACTIVE Setting Notes
Autopilot Model
PITCH FILTER ABSOLUTE
PITCH FILTER TIME 0.0
PITCH + UP
PITCH V/DEG 0.300
PITCH ANGLE MAX 15.0
PITCH ANGLE MIN -10.0
PITCH Vref -6.000
ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
Century IV/41/2000 ROLL FILTER TIME 0.0
ROLL + RIGHT
ROLL V/DEG 0.416
ROLL ANGLE MAX 30.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
DISCRETE ENABLE DISABLE
PITCH THRESHOLD 10 [4]
SVT FD DISPLAY ENABLE
SVT FD PITCH SCALING 0.46 [1] [3]
PITCH + UP
PITCH V/DEG 0.025
Cessna PITCH Vref 0.000
1000A IFCS ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
ROLL FILTER TIME 0.0
ROLL + LEFT
ROLL V/DEG 0.008
ROLL ANGLE MAX 20.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
SVT FD DISPLAY DISABLE

Rev. V Page 5-54
Flight Director/
Autopilot Model
PITCH + DOWN
PITCH V/DEG 0.454
PITCH Vref 0.000
Honeywell
(Bendix/King) ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
KFC 225 ROLL FILTER TIME 0.8
ROLL + LEFT
ROLL V/DEG 0.201
ROLL ANGLE MAX 20.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
SVT FD DISPLAY ENABLE [2]
PITCH + UP
PITCH V/DEG 1.000
Honeywell PITCH ANGLE MIN -15.0

(Bendix/King) PITCH Vref 0.000
KFC 250
ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
KFC 300
KFC 325 ROLL FILTER TIME 0.0
with KCI 310 ROLL + RIGHT
ROLL V/DEG 0.750
ROLL ANGLE MAX 21.0
ROLL Vref 0.000

Rev. V Page 5-55
Flight Director/
Autopilot Model
PITCH + DOWN
PITCH V/DEG 1.200
PITCH Vref 0.000
S-TEC
60-2 ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
65 with ST-670 ROLL FILTER TIME 0.0
ROLL + LEFT
ROLL V/DEG 0.175
ROLL ANGLE MAX 20.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
Notes:
[1] This setting appears only with SVT enabled.
[2] SVT FD Display is set to DISABLE by default. It is acceptable to set SVT FD Display to
ENABLE so that the flight director can be displayed when synthetic terrain is displayed on
the PFD.
[3] The default value for SVT PITCH SCALING of 0.55 is also acceptable, although 0.46 is
preferred.
[4] This setting appears only with DISCRETE ENABLE disabled.

Rev. V Page 5-56
5.5.14 GAD 43/43e Configuration
5.5.14.1 GAD 43 Configuration
NOTE
Before the GAD 43 can be configured, the GAD 43 Adapter option must be enabled and
configured as PRESENT. Refer to Section 5.5.5.5 and Section 5.5.1.
If a GAD 43/43e is installed and connected to the autopilot, the GAD 43/43e must be configured to
provide the correct information to the autopilot.
1. Go to the GAD 43 page in the GAD page group.
2. Activate the cursor and set the Gyro Emulation Type and Yaw Rate Scale Factor according to
Table 5-28.
3. Set the Anticipator Algorithm to ON.
Figure 5-22 GAD 43 Page

Rev. V Page 5-57
Table 5-28 GAD 43 Configuration Settings
Autopilot Autopilot Yaw Rate
Gyro Emulation Type Notes
Manufacturer Model Scale Factor
None -- [5]
None
Heading Only -- [6]
21
31
Century Century 52D267/M (2000) None
41
2000
300B/400B/800B IFCS Cessna/ARC G519 None
400B Cessna/ARC G519 None
Cessna
Cessna/ARC G519 None [7]
1000A Series
Sperry VG-14A None [8]
Collins APS-65 Collins 332D-11T 200 mV/deg/Sec [9]
KAP 100 King KI 256 None
KAP 150 King KI 256 None [1]
KAP 200 King KI 256 None
KFC 150 King KI 256 200 mV/deg/Sec [1] [4]
KFC 200 King KI 256 200 mV/deg/Sec [4]
Honeywell
KFC 225 King KI 256 None [1]
(Bendix/King)
King KI 256 [1] [2] [4]
KFC 250 200 mV/deg/Sec
King KVG 350 [1] [3] [4]
KFC 275 King KI 256 [1] [4]
KFC 300 King KVG 350 200 mV/deg/Sec [1] [4]
KFC 325 King KVG 350 [1] [4]
Notes:
[1] A setting of “None” for the Yaw Rate Scale Factor is required in order to use the
GAD 43/43e to provide barometric correction to the autopilot.
[2] For KCP 299 computers with the 065-5016-XX Adapter card (i.e., for installations that
previously utilized the KI 255/256/ KG 258 ADI).
[3] For KCP 299 computers with the 065-5015-XX Adapter card (i.e., for installations that
previously utilized the KVG 350 remote gyro).
[4] If the KRG 331 rate gyro is not being replaced by the GAD 43/43e, the Yaw Rate Scale
Factor can be set to “None.”
[5] If the GAD 43/43e is not being used to provide attitude to an autopilot, and the Synchro
Heading output is not being used (e.g., some of the additional GAD 43e interfaces are
used), set the Gyro Emulation Type as to None.
[6] If the GAD 43/43e is not providing attitude to the autopilot, but the Synchro Heading
output (P431-8/7/41) is being used, set the Gyro Emulation Type as to Heading Only.
[7] For Cessna 1000A Series Computer Amplifier P/Ns 46210-0001, -0002, and -0102
(i.e., for installations that previously utilized a panel mount gyro such as a G-895B,
G-1050A, G-550A, or G-519B).
[8] For Cessna 1000A Series Computer Amplifier P/Ns 46210-0004, -0005, and -0105
(i.e., for installations that previously utilized a remote mount gyro such as a VG-14(A)).
[9] The GAD 43/43e cannot be used to provide the vertical gyro attitude solution to the
APS-65A.

Rev. V Page 5-58
5.5.14.2 GAD 43e Configuration
NOTE
The KAS 297B GAIN STRAPS window will only appear if the Altitude Preselect TYPE is
set to King KAS 297B.
If a GAD 43e is installed, it must be configured to provide the correct information.

1. Go to the GAD 43e page in the GAD page group.
3. Set the Altitude Preselect TYPE according to Table 5-29.
4. Set the Radar Altimeter TYPE according to Table 5-30.
5. Set the DME TYPE according to Table 5-31.
Figure 5-23 GAD 43e Page

Rev. V Page 5-59
Table 5-29 GAD 43e Altitude Preselect TYPE Settings
Autopilot Autopilot
Altitude Preselect TYPE Notes
Manufacturer Model
300B IFCS
400B IFCS
Cessna AA-801
800B IFCS
1000A IFCS
Collins APS-65 United Inst 5506L-S [4]
KAP 150
King KAS 297B [1]
KFC 150
KFC 200
KAS 297 [6]
Honeywell KFC 250
(Bendix/King) King KAS 297C #1 [5]
KFC 275
King KAS 297C #2 [2]
King KAS 297C #1 [3] [5]
KFC 325
King KAS 297C #2 [2]
55
55X
S-TEC 60-2 S-TEC ST-360
60 PSS
65
Notes:
[1] KAS 297B GAIN STRAPS #1 through #4 (green boxes) must correspond to the grounded
gain straps (P297B1-16/17/34/22) of the KAS 297B being replaced. If a KAS 297B was
not previously installed, refer to manufacturer’s data for KAS 297B strapping for the
specific aircraft model in which the GAD 43e is being installed.
[2] For KCP 220 computers with P/N 065-00064-0008 (TBM 700).
[3] For KCP 220 computers with P/N 065-00064-0015 (PC-12), and the KAS 297C being
replaced with GAIN STRAP #1 (P297C1-16) not grounded and GAIN STRAP #2 through
#4 (P297C1-17/34/22) grounded.
[4] Autopilot must currently use the UI 5506L-S altitude preselector.
[5] For KCP 220 computers with P/N 065-00064-0008 (TBM 700), and the KAS 297C being
replaced with GAIN STRAP #1 through #4 (P297C1-16/17/34/22) not grounded.
[6] KC 295 flight control computer must be serial number 4460 or higher.

Rev. V Page 5-60
Table 5-30 GAD 43e Radar Altimeter TYPE Settings
Radar Altimeter Radar Altimeter Radar Altimeter
Notes
Manufacturer Model TYPE
Collins ALT-50A/55B KRA 405 / ALT-55
Honeywell KRA 405 KRA 405 / ALT-55 [1]

(Bendix/King) KRA 10/10A King KRA 10
AA-100 Sperry AA-100
Sperry AA-100A Sperry AA-100A
AA-200 Sperry AA-200 [2]
Notes:
[1] KRA 405 Auxiliary Output #1 must be used.
[2] AA-200 Precision Output must be used.
Table 5-31 GAD 43e DME Type Settings

DME DME Tuning Tuning
DME TYPE
Manufacturer Model Format Source
DME-42 DME-40/42 [4]
Collins DME-442 DME-442/4000 N/A [1] [2]
DME-4000 DME-442/4000 N/A
KDM 706(A) KN 63 [3] [1] [2]
Honeywell KN 62 KN 62/64 N/A

(Bendix/King) KN 63 KN 63 [3] [1] [2]
KN 64 KN 62/64 N/A
Notes:
[1] Set Tuning Source #1 to Present if VHF NAV Radio #1 is able to channel the DME.
[2] Set Tuning Source #2 to Present if VHF NAV Radio #2 is able to channel the DME.
[3] Set the tuning format (Serial, 2x5, BCD or SLIP) to match the tuning method used by the
NAV radios to channel the DME.
[4] Set the tuning format (CSDB or Parallel) to match the NAV radio interconnect (Figure F-44).

Rev. V Page 5-61
5.5.14.3 GAD 43e Calibration
NOTE
The GAD 43e Calibration page only appears if either NAV1/NAV2 TYPE is set to
GAD 43e on the System Configuration page.
NOTE
For dual G500/G600 installations, the GAD 43e Calibration page is only available on
GDU 620 #1.
If a GAD 43e is installed and connected to one or more analog NAV radios, the GAD 43e must be
calibrated to each individual NAV radio.
1. Go to the GAD 43e Calibration page in the GAD page group.
2. Use a NAV radio tester to generate a localizer signal with 0.155 DDM left or right, and tune the
NAV radio(s) to the test frequency.
3. Move the cursor to the cyan Localizer Calibrate selection.
4. Press ENT for the particular NAV radio(s).
5. Wait for the calibration to complete (approximately 6 seconds).
6. Verify that the DDM readout is 0.155 ± 0.010 DDM.
7. If the DDM readout is not within the specified value, adjust the GAIN value manually so that the
readout is 0.155 ± 0.010 DDM. Increase the GAIN value if the displayed DDM value is less than
0.145. Decrease the GAIN value if the displayed DDM value is greater than 0.165.
8. Use a NAV radio tester to generate a zero degree FROM radial VOR signal and tune the NAV
radio(s) to the test frequency.
9. Move the cursor to the cyan VOR Calibrate selection and press ENT for the particular NAV
radio(s).
Figure 5-24 GAD 43e CALIBRATION Page

Rev. V Page 5-62
5.5.15 Weather Radar Configuration
NOTE
Before the weather radar can be configured, the Weather Radar option must be enabled
and configured as PRESENT. Refer to Section 5.5.5.4 and Section 5.5.1.
5.5.15.1 GWX Configuration
NOTE
If the GDU 620 is running a software version prior to v7.00, the GWX 68 WXR must be
disabled if GWX 68 weather radar displays on GTN 6XX/7XX. Refer to Section 5.5.5.4.
NOTE
With GWX 70 software prior to v2.20, attitude information is not provided to the
GWX 70(R) over the HSDB interface. Stabilization data must be provided to the
GWX 70(R) over a separate analog or ARINC 429 interface. Use the GWX PC Install Tool
to properly configure the ARINC 429 interface.
NOTE
If a GWX 75 is installed, ensure the GDU 620 is running software v7.40 or later.
If a GWX is installed, it receives pitch and roll stabilization data from the GDU 620 through HSDB.
“HSDB AHRS” displays as the source on the GWX Weather Radar page.
To save the GWX configuration settings:
1. On the GDU 620, go to the GWX Weather Radar page.
2. Press ACTV>SET.

Rev. V Page 5-63
Figure 5-25 GWX 68 WEATHER RADAR Page
Figure 5-26 GWX 70(R)/75 WEATHER RADAR Page

Rev. V Page 5-64
5.5.15.2 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Configuration
As part of the wiring installation, the GDU 620 will be connected to the weather radar as display #1 or #2,
and the GDU 620 must be configured accordingly. Follow the steps below to perform ARINC 708 radar
configuration:
1. Go to the ARINC Port Config page in the SYS page group, as shown in Figure 5-5.
3. Set ARINC 429 output #3 or #4 to Low-speed WX RADAR, as applicable for the installation.
5. Go to the Discrete Configuration page in the SYS page group, as shown in Figure 5-15.
6. Ensure that the discrete output that is connected to the weather radar is set to
WX Radar On*.
8. Go to the A708 Weather Radar page in the WXR page group, as shown in Figure 5-29.
9. Activate the cursor and set the DISPLAYHEAD to 1 or 2 to match the connections to the weather
radar.
11. After setting the GDU 620 to the weather radar display head number, the ARINC 708 weather
radar system may require additional calibration. Refer to Section 5.7.1.
Figure 5-27 ARINC PORT CONFIGURATION Page

Rev. V Page 5-65
Figure 5-28 DISCRETE CONFIGURATION Page
Figure 5-29 ARINC 708 WEATHER RADAR CONFIGURATION Page

Rev. V Page 5-66
5.5.15.3 WX-500 Stormscope Configuration
1. Go to the System Configuration page in the SYS page group.
2. Select Stormscope in the Lightning Sensor option.
3. Go to the RS Port Config page in the SYS page group.
4. Select Stormscope for RS-232 CHNL 5, 6, or 8 depending on which port was wired based on the
available channel.
5. Go to the Stormscope page in the WXR page group.
6. Select YES for GDU configuration.
5.5.16 GTS 8XX Configuration

If a GTS 8XX is connected to the G500/G600, the GTS 8XX must be configured to match the aircraft
installation and provide the correct data to the GDU 620.
NOTE
For descriptions of GTS 800/820/850 configuration settings, refer to GTS 8XX/GPA 65
Installation Manual. For descriptions of GTS 800/825/855 configuration settings, refer to
GTS 8XX Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual.
1. Go to the GTS Status And Configuration page in the TRFC page group.
2. Activate the cursor and select TOP Antenna.
3. Select the type of antenna that is installed.
4. Select TOP ANT CBL LOSS.
5. Enter in the value of the cable loss between the GA 58 and the GTS 8XX. If a GPA 65 is installed,
then the value entered for TOP ANT CBL LOSS is the total cable loss (i.e., the sum of the cable
losses between the GA 58 and GPA 65, and GPS 65 and GTS 8XX).
6. Select BOTTOM ANTENNA.
7. Select the type of antenna that is installed. Select NONE if a bottom antenna is not installed.
8. Select the Mode S Address.
9. Enter in the value. This is applicable to GTS 820, 850, 825, and 855 only.
10. Enter the Mode S ID (HEX) transponder code. Refer to the FAA Aircraft Registry website to
determine the Mode S ID transponder code.
11. Select ADS-B TX.
12. Select Installed or None. An ADS-B capable transmitter, such as a GTX 330 ES or
GTX 3X5, must be installed in the aircraft to enable this.
13. Set Squat Switch to ON GND.
14. Select GROUND or OPEN for the squat switch input. This field must be set to match the state of
the GTS 8XX Air/Ground* input when the aircraft is on ground (i.e., weight on wheels).
15. Select LDG GR TYPE.
16. Select RETRACTABLE or FIXED.
17. Select LDG GR ‘DOWN’.
18. Select OPEN or GROUND for the landing gear down sense input. This field must be set to match
the state of the GTS 8XX Gear Down and Locked* input when the landing gear is extended.
19. Select VOICE.

Rev. V Page 5-67
20. Select MALE or FEMALE.
21. Select VOLUME and adjust as needed.
22. To test the volume, select the AUDIO TEST key.
23. Press ENT.
24. Evaluate the GTS 8XX volume compared to the audio levels of other systems installed in the
aircraft. The GTS 8XX audio alerts should be audible under all anticipated noise environmental
conditions.
25. Press SAVE after the changes to this page are complete. This writes the configuration settings to
the GTS 8XX.
26. Go to the GTS Port Configuration page in the TRFC page group.
27. Activate the cursor and configure the ports in the BARO Altitude Source window to match the
GTS 8XX source(s) of Baro altitude data. For the ARINC 429 sources, configure the Speed to
HIGH or LOW to match the source speed.
28. Configure the ports in the Radio Altitude Source window to match the GTS 8XX source(s) of
radio altitude data. For the ARINC 429 source, configure the Speed to HIGH or LOW to match the
source speed.
29. Configure the ports in the GPS PVT Source window to match the GTS 8XX source(s) of GPS
data.
30. For the ARINC 429 sources, configure the Speed to HIGH or LOW to match the source speed.
31. Configure the ports in the MAG Heading Source window to match the GTS 8XX source(s) of
heading data. For the ARINC 429 sources, configure the Speed to HIGH or LOW to match the
source speed.
32. Configure the ports in the Traffic Output window to match the GTS 8XX outputs that are
connected to a traffic display. For the ARINC 429 output, configure the Speed to HIGH or LOW to
match what the traffic display is expecting.
33. Configure the ports in the XPDR 1 Communication window if the GTS 8XX is connected to a
transponder (only required for a GTS 820, 825, 850, and 855 installation). For the ARINC 429
ports, configure the Speed to HIGH or LOW as required by the installation.
34. Configure the ports in the XPDR 2 Communication window if the GTS 8XX is connected to a
transponder (only required for a GTS 820, 825, 850, and 855 installation). For the ARINC 429
ports, configure the Speed to HIGH or LOW as required by the installation.

Rev. V Page 5-68
Figure 5-30 GTS STATUS AND CONFIGURATION Page
Figure 5-31 GTS PORT CONFIGURATION Page

Rev. V Page 5-69
5.5.17 GSR 56 Configuration
NOTE
A lower position reporting interval (PERIOD) may increase the charges for the Iridium
service.
NOTE
The position reporting settings may also be adjusted in normal mode using the Position
Reporting page in the AUX page group on the MFD.
If the GSR 56 Iridium transceiver is installed and connected to the GDU 620, the GSR 56 features that will
be used must be enabled.
1. Go to the Iridium Configuration page in the GSR page group.
2. Activate the cursor and select a feature.
3. Press ENT to enable/disable as desired. The Enable box will be green if the feature is enabled and
black if the feature is disabled.
4. Ensure that the RUDICS number setting is 0088160000576. If the RUDICS number setting is
incorrect, select the RUDICS number field and press ENT.
5. Use the concentric knobs to correct the number and press ENT again.
7. If position reporting is enabled, go to the Position Reporting page in the GSR page group.
8. Activate the cursor and select Report Type and select Standard or AFF.
9. Select PERIOD.
10. Select Automatic or Off.
11. If Automatic is selected, then set an interval between 2 minutes and 60 minutes.
Figure 5-32 IRIDIUM CONFIGURATION Page
Figure 5-33 POSITION REPORTING Page

Rev. V Page 5-70
5.5.18 AHRS Configuration (GSU 75(B) Only)
NOTE
When initially turned to the AHRS Configuration page, ”updating” will temporarily
display to the right of Active. This indicates the configuration is being received from the
AHRS.
NOTE
“BINARY DATA MISMATCH” will display if a CRC mismatch exists between the
GDU 620 and the GSU 75(B), even in the non-displayed parameters.
NOTE
The SET column displays the configuration that is stored in the GDU 620. The Active
column displays the configuration that is stored in the GSU 75(B).
NOTE
“MISSING GDU STANDARD CONFIG DATA” will display in the Set column when the
configuration data is unavailable.
The AHRS configuration page is displayed if the AHRS is configured for the GSU 75(B) on the System
Configuration page. The AHRS Configuration page allows installers to do the following:
1. Load the configuration from the GDU 620 to the GSU 75(B).
2. Transfer the configuration from the GSU 75(B) to the GDU 620.
The standard configuration will be loaded to the GDU (Set column) by default from the AHRS
configuration file included with GDU software v7.10 or later. These default configuration settings are
determined by both the Airframe Type setting (Feature Configuration page) and the AHRS and ADC
TYPE settings (System Configuration page).
The following AHRS configuration settings may be changed by the installer for a specific installation:
• Mount Orient
◦ Right Wing - GSU 75(B) connector faces toward aircraft right wing
◦ Left Wing - GSU 75(B) connector faces toward aircraft left wing
◦ Forward - GSU 75(B) connector faces toward aircraft nose
◦ Aft - GSU 75(B) connector faces toward aircraft tail
• Mag Location
◦ May flex - GMU 44 is mounted in a flexing location (such as the wing)
◦ Will not flex - GMU 44 is mounted in a non-flexing location

Rev. V Page 5-71
The SET>ACTV key writes the configuration settings that are stored in the GDU 620 to the AHRS. The
soft key will only be active when there is a configuration in the GDU 620 to load into the AHRS.
The ACTV>SET key writes the configuration settings that are stored in the AHRS to the GDU 620.
The DWNLD CFG key downloads GDU configuration, AHRS configuration, and calibration files to the
top SD card for troubleshooting.
The REVERT key reverts the current GDU configuration to the standard configuration.
Figure 5-34 AHRS Configuration Page
5.5.18.1 Advanced Configuration Settings (Software v7.35 or Later)

The default configuration value of “0” must be used in all fields.

Rev. V Page 5-72
5.5.19 Miscellaneous System Interfaces
5.5.19.1 Meggitt (Cobham) Engine Instrumentation Display System (EIDS)
NOTE
If an autopilot is connected to ARINC OUT 2, then the EIDS must be connected to and
configured for ARINC OUT 3 or 4.
NOTE
Not all ARINC 429 output settings are available on all output ports. Refer to Section 5 of
GDU 620 Installation Manual (P/N 190-00601-04) for more information.

2. Activate the cursor and move the ARINC 429 Output window.
3. Configure the output that is used for the EIDS. Refer to Figure F-40.
◦ Speed: High
◦ Output: DFCS 1, DFCS 4, or GENERAL PURPOSE 1

Rev. V Page 5-73
5.5.19.2 EMCA Stick Pusher and Warntone Generator (G600 System Only)
NOTE
Prior to beginning any installation that requires a fast/slow display, contact Garmin
If an external stall protection and warning unit is used to provide fast/slow data to the GDU 620, the
GDU 620 must be configured to enable the fast/slow display on the PFD. This section describes how to
configure the GDU 620 to enable the fast/slow indication.
1. Enable the Fast/Slow (ARINC 429) feature. Refer to Section 5.5.5.12.
2. Activate the cursor and move the ARINC 429 Input window.
3. Configure the ARINC 429 input that is used for the fast/slow. Refer to Figure F-40.
◦ Speed: Low
◦ Input: Fast/Slow 1
5.5.20 Updating the Configuration Module
NOTE
The soft keys shown below are only displayed if an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the
GDU 620.
When all of the items have been configured as described in this section:
1. Go to the Software Upload page.
2. Press UPDT CFG.
3. Press ENT to confirm and update the configuration module.
When the configuration module has been successfully updated, “Config Module Update Complete”
displays with no error messages. If error messages display, verify that the configuration module is correctly
installed.
Figure 5-36 SOFTWARE UPLOAD Page

Rev. V Page 5-74
5.5.21 Miscellaneous GDU Configuration
Figure 5-37 MISCELLANEOUS GDU CONFIGURATION Page
5.5.21.1 Database SYNC
NOTE
The Database SYNC function requires GDU 620 software v7.00 or later.
The Database SYNC function is configured on the Miscellaneous GDU Configuration page. In dual
GDU 620 installations, database SYNC lets GDU 620 #1 and GDU 620 #2 crossfill databases. When
Database SYNC is enabled, and a database card is inserted, the GDU 620s coordinate with each other to
determine which unit has the latest databases. The LRUs will begin to pass the databases over HSDB. The
Database SYNC function supports the following database types:
• Navigation
• Obstacle
• Safetaxi
• Airport Directory
• FliteCharts
• Basemap
Configure Database SYNC:
1. Go to the Miscellaneous GDU Configuration page in the SYS page group.
2. Press the inner knob.
3. Select DATABASE SYNC field.
4. Select the applicable configuration setting.
a. DISABLED - Database SYNC function is off.
b. ENABLED - Database SYNC function is on.
c. PILOT SELECTABLE - Database SYNC function is off or on by pilot-controllable
configuration.

Rev. V Page 5-75
5.5.21.2 NAV Deviation Display Filtering
NOTE
The NAV Deviation Display Filtering function requires GDU 620 software v7.20 or later.
The NAV Deviation Display Filtering function is configured on the Miscellaneous GDU Configuration
page. This setting enables the GDU 620 to filter the VOR and ILS lateral and vertical deviations. Both of
these settings for NAV1 and NAV2 must be configured to ENABLED, if applicable (both settings are
enabled by default). These configuration settings will only display if the system detects a navigator (if a
second navigator is not installed and appropriately configured the NAV2 setting will not appear).
To enable NAV Deviation Display Filtering:
3. Select the NAV Deviation Display Filtering field for NAV1.
4. Select ENABLED.
5. Select the NAV Deviation Display Filtering field for NAV2 (if applicable).
6. Select ENABLED (if applicable).
5.5.21.3 AHRS/Air Data Monitor
NOTE
The AHRS/Air Data Monitoring enable/disablement requires GDU 620 software v7.35 or
later.
The AHRS/Air data monitoring function is configured on the Miscellaneous GDU Configuration page.
This setting specifies whether or not the AHRS and Air Data cross comparison monitor, and associated
miscompare alerts, are enabled or disabled. This setting must be configured to ENABLED (this setting is
enabled by default).
To enable the AHRS/Air Data Monitor:
3. Select the AHRS/Air Data Monitor field.
4. Select ENABLED.
5.5.21.4 CDI & Baro Sync
NOTE
The CDI & Baro Sync option is only configurable in installations that use GDU 620
software v7.35 or later. The default configuration setting of “PILOT SELECTABLE”
retains the behavior of previous software versions.
The CDI & Baro Sync option is configured on the Miscellaneous GDU Configuration page. This setting
is used to specify whether or not CDI Source and Baro Correction settings are synced between GDU in
multi-GDU installations.

Rev. V Page 5-76
To configure the CDI & Baro Sync option to always crossfill:
3. Select the CDI & Baro Sync field.
4. Select the applicable configuration setting.
a. ALWAYS ON - CDI Source & Baro Sync will always crossfill between GDU.
b. PILOT SELECTABLE - This setting retains the behavior of software prior to v7.35.
5.5.21.5 CDI Sync with Navigator
NOTE
The CDI Sync with Navigator option is only configurable in installations that use GDU
620 software v7.35 or later. The default configuration setting of “DISABLED” retains the
behavior of previous software versions.
The CDI Sync with Navigation option is configured on the Miscellaneous GDU Configuration page. This
setting is used to specify whether or not the CDI Source is synced with the selected navigator in multi-
GDU installations.
To enable CDI Sync with Navigator:
3. Select the CDI Sync with Navigator field.
4. Select ENABLED.

Rev. V Page 5-77
5.6 AHRS Calibration and Check
NOTE
Prior to completion of the AHRS pitch/roll offset compensation and AHRS/GMU 44
Magnetometer calibration procedures, the annunciation “CALIBRATE AHRS/MAG”
displays on the PFD and the attitude and heading appears valid. As soon as the aircraft
moves, the displayed attitude and heading becomes invalid. This condition is normal and
automatically clears as soon as the calibration procedures are successfully completed.
The AHRS does not provide valid outputs until the calibration procedures are completed. The
magnetometer calibration procedure must be carried out at a site that is determined to be free of magnetic
disturbances. Follow the guidance in Section 5.6.7. If the site condition is acceptable, Section 5.6.7 is not
necessary.

Rev. V Page 5-78
5.6.1 AHRS Pitch/Roll Offset Compensation
NOTE
In order to run the Pitch/Roll Offset Compensation Procedure, an Installer Unlock Card is
required.
This procedure must be carried out with the engine off.

1. Select the AHRS page group on the MFD.
2. Go to the AHRS/GMU Calibration page.
3. Level the aircraft to within ±0.25° of zero pitch and zero roll using the procedures in the AMM.
4. Initiate the AHRS Ground Pitch/Roll Aircraft Level compensation mode by performing the
following steps:
a. Select PITCH/ROLL OFFSET.
b. Press ENT.
c. Follow the checklist items displayed on the MFD and press ENT as each one is completed or
confirmed.
d. When the Calibrate field blinks, press ENT to begin the procedure.
e. After several seconds, a new checklist appears in the lower half of the MFD.
f. Press ENT as each item is confirmed.
g. When the Confirm Aircraft Is Level field blinks, press ENT to continue.
5. The result of the pitch/roll offset compensation is displayed on the MFD. If successful, the AHRS
records the required pitch and roll offsets, informs the operator of a successful conclusion and
returns to normal operation.
6. Press ENT to conclude this procedure.
7. For dual G500/G600 installations, repeat steps 4 through 6 with GDU 620 #2.
Figure 5-38 AHRS/GMU CALIBRATION Page - Pitch/Roll Offset

Rev. V Page 5-79
5.6.2 AHRS/GMU 44 Magnetometer Calibration
CAUTION
This Magnetometer Calibration Procedure should be carried out on a compass rose in
order to guarantee measurements free of environmental magnetic disturbances. If a
compass rose is not available, a sight compass can be used. Attempting to carry out this
procedure on a typical ramp area may not yield a successful calibration. The accuracy of
the AHRS cannot be guaranteed if this calibration is not performed on a magnetically
clean and level surface. If the magnetic cleanliness of the proposed surface is not known,
it is recommended that the technician follow the guidance in Section 5.6.7.
NOTE
The calibration procedure in Section 5.6.1 must be completed prior to performing this
procedure.
NOTE
In order to run the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure, an Installer Unlock Card is
required.
NOTE
Performing the magnetometer calibration removes any stored heading offset values.
NOTE
For dual G500/G600 installations, the following procedure must be performed on each
GDU 620. The calibration on each GDU 620 can be done simultaneously. When
performing the steps below, follow the turn prompts on GDU 620 #1.
NOTE
A magnetometer calibration failure is indicated by a “Calibration Error” message. In the
event of a failure, verify that the installation passes the Magnetometer Interference Test in
Section 5.6.6. Verify the relative orientation of the AHRS relative to the GMU 44. If
necessary, move the aircraft to a different location and attempt the magnetic calibration
again.
1. Start the aircraft engine in accordance with the aircraft AFM or POH.
2. After aircraft engine start-up, taxi the aircraft to a properly calibrated compass rose.
3. At the compass rose, align the aircraft to a heading of magnetic north (5°).
4. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot of the GDU 620.
5. Restart the GDU 620 in Configuration mode.
6. Go to the AHRS page group on the MFD.
7. Select the AHRS/GMU Calibration page.
8. Activate the cursor and highlight the Select Procedure window.
9. Select MAGNETOMETER.
10. Press ENT.
11. Use the cursor to highlight the Before Calibration window.

Rev. V Page 5-80
12. Follow the checklist items displayed on the MFD and press ENT as each one is completed or
confirmed.
13. When the Calibrate field blinks, press ENT to begin the procedure.
14. The MFD display advises the operator when to turn the aircraft, when to stop, and when to turn
again.
15. Upon instruction to turn, taxi the aircraft in a right turn. After approximately 25° to 30° of turn
from the last heading, the MFD display advises the operator to stop the aircraft.
NOTE
Due to the difficulties in executing smooth, accurate turns, the MFD may incorrectly
interpret a station and instruct to “HOLD POSITION” prior to full completion of a 30°
turn. If this scenario is encountered, it is best for the operator to ignore the “HOLD
POSITION” command and instead use outside references to complete the approximate
30° turn. Instead of using the MFD instruction to turn as a real-time indication of when to
turn, simply judge the 30° (±5°) turn increments of the aircraft by using the compass rose
radials. Dwelling at these 30° increments for the time recommended by the MFD should
result in successful calibration.
16. The MFD guides the operator to dwell at multiple headings around a complete circle.
NOTE
Due to high winds or excessive airframe vibration, the operator may encounter a
condition where the MFD restarts the 18-second countdown without full completion of the
previous countdown. If this is encountered more than once for a given station, the operator
should begin turning to the next station (approximately 30°). A minimum of two successful
stations per quadrant is required, where a successful station is a full 18-second countdown
followed by instruction to move. Ensure that at least two stations per quadrant are
completed. Thus, it may sometimes be required to dwell at a station after a countdown
restart. A maximum of 20 stations is allowed for the entire calibration procedure. If too
many countdown restarts are encountered, the calibration will fail with the message,
“TOO MANY STATIONS.”
17. Repeat the turn-and-stop process until the MFD advises that a successful calibration is complete.
The AHRS then enters its normal operational mode.
18. Press ENT on the GDU 620 to conclude this procedure.
Figure 5-39 AHRS/GMU CALIBRATION Page - Magnetometer

Rev. V Page 5-81
5.6.3 Compass Swing
After the Magnetic Calibration Procedure is completed, a compass swing must be performed to verify the
AHRS/GMU 44 heading accuracy. If each heading displayed on the PFD (or PFD #1 and PFD #2) is
within ±3° of the actual heading, no further adjustments are necessary. Otherwise, additional adjustments
are required, as described below. The procedure in Section 5.6.4 must be performed.
1. With all of the aircraft and avionics systems powered and operating normally, position the aircraft
on a known compass rose at a heading 360° (North), or select a level and magnetically clean
location and use a sight compass to position the aircraft to a heading of 360° (North).
2. Record the heading displayed on the PFD (or PFD #1 and PFD #2 for a dual G500/G600
installation) in Table 5-32. Also, record the heading displayed on the standby compass (these
values can be used to complete the standby compass calibration card).
3. Repeat step 2 for each of the headings listed in Table 5-32.
4. Calculate the heading errors by subtracting the displayed (B) value from the actual (A) value for
each of the headings in Table 5-32.
Table 5-32 Heading Verification
PFD (OR PFD #1 (FOR DUAL INSTALLATIONS))
Displayed PFD Stby Compass
Heading (A) Heading Error (A-B)
or PFD #1 Heading (B) Heading
360° (North)
30°
60°
90° (East)
120°
150°
180° (South)
210°
240°
270° (West)
300°
330°

Rev. V Page 5-82
PFD #2 (FOR DUAL INSTALLATIONS ONLY)
Heading (A) Displayed PFD #2 Heading (B) Heading Error (A-B)
360° (North)
30°
60°
90° (East)
120°
150°
180° (South)
210°
240°
270° (West)
300°
330°
5.6.3.1 Single GDU 620 Installations

1. If all calculated heading errors for the PFD are between -3° and +3° inclusive, the installation is
acceptable and no further work is required to correct the GMU 44 installation. Proceed to
Section 5.6.5.
2. If all calculated heading errors are between -5° and +5° inclusive, the Heading Offset Procedure
can be used to correct the GMU 44 installation. Proceed to Section 5.6.4.
NOTE
If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5° / less than –5°, DO NOT perform the
Heading Offset Procedure in Section 5.6.4 until the GMU 44 installation has been
physically corrected.
3. If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5° / less than -5°, calculate the average error by
adding all errors and dividing by 12. This is the angle by which the GMU 44 must be physically
rotated to correct the installation.
4. Modify the installation to rotate the GMU 44 by the amount calculated in the previous step. When
looking down at the GMU 44, rotate clockwise for positive values and counterclockwise for
negative values.
5. After physically correcting the GMU 44 installation, repeat the procedures in Section 5.6.2 and
this section.

Rev. V Page 5-83
5.6.3.2 Dual GDU 620 Installations
The installation of both GMU 44s must be verified individually using GDU 620 #1 for GMU 44 #1 and
GDU 620 #2 for GMU 44 #2.
1. If all calculated heading errors for PFD #1 are between -3° and +3° inclusive, the installation of the
#1 system is acceptable and no further work is required to correct the GMU 44 #1 installation. Go
to step 6 for #2 system checks, and proceed to Section 5.6.5 for further tests to be performed on
GDU 620 #1.
2. If all calculated heading errors are between -5° and +5° inclusive, the Heading Offset Procedure
can be used to correct the GMU 44 #1 installation. Go to step 6 for #2 system checks, and proceed
to Section 5.6.4 for further tests to be performed on GDU 620 #1.
NOTE
If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5° / less than –5°, DO NOT perform the
Heading Offset Procedure in Section 5.6.4 until the GMU 44 #1 installation has been
3. If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5°/less than -5°, calculate the average error by
adding all PFD #1 heading errors and dividing by 12. This is the angle by which GMU 44 #1 must
be physically rotated to correct the installation.
4. Modify the installation to rotate the GMU 44 #1 by the amount calculated in the previous step.
When looking down at the GMU 44, rotate clockwise for positive values and counterclockwise for
negative values.
5. After physically correcting the GMU 44 #1 installation, repeat the procedures in Section 5.6.2 and
Section 5.6.3 on PFD #1 only.
6. If all calculated heading errors for PFD #2 are between -3° and +3° inclusive, the installation of
the #2 system is acceptable and no further work is required to correct the GMU 44 #2 installation.
Proceed to Section 5.6.5 for further tests to be performed on GDU 620 #2.
7. If all calculated heading errors are between -5° and +5° inclusive, the heading offset procedure can
be used to correct the GMU 44 #2 installation. Proceed to Section 5.6.4 for further tests to be
performed on GDU 620 #2.
NOTE
If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5°/less than –5°, DO NOT perform the
Heading Offset Procedure in Section 5.6.4 until the GMU 44 #2 installation has been
8. If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5°/less than -5°, calculate the average error by
adding all PFD #2 heading errors and dividing by 12. This is the angle by which GMU 44 #2 must
be physically rotated to correct the installation.
9. Modify the installation to rotate the GMU 44 #2 by the amount calculated in the previous step.
When looking down at the GMU 44, rotate clockwise for positive values and counterclockwise for
negative values.
10. After physically correcting the GMU 44 #2 installation, repeat the procedures in Section 5.6.2 and
Section 5.6.3 on PFD #2 only.

Rev. V Page 5-84
5.6.4 Heading Offset Compensation
NOTE
The Heading Offset Compensation procedure is not required if it was determined in
Section 5.6.3 that all calculated heading errors are between -3° and +3° inclusive. If at
least one heading error was greater than 3° or less than -3°, but all heading errors were
between -5° and +5° inclusive, use the Heading Offset Compensation Procedure to correct
the errors. Otherwise, physically correct the GMU 44 installation BEFORE performing
the Heading Offset Compensation Procedure.
NOTE
If Heading Offset Compensation Procedure must be performed on both GDU 620 #1 and
GDU 620 #2, it is permitted to run the procedure below simultaneously on each GDU 620.
NOTE
In order to run the Heading Offset Compensation Procedure, an Installer Unlock Card
is required.
NOTE
Magnetometer Calibration Procedure must be performed BEFORE the Heading Offset
Compensation Procedure. Performing the magnetometer calibration removes any stored
heading offset values.
1. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot of the GDU 620.
2. Restart the GDU 620 in Configuration mode.
3. Go to the AHRS page group on the MFD.
4. Select the AHRS/GMU Calibration page.
5. Select the Heading Offset Procedure.
6. Press ENT.
7. Follow the checklist items displayed on the MFD.
8. Press ENT as each one is completed or confirmed.
9. Press ENT on each GDU 620 if the procedure is running simultaneously on both GDU 620s.
11. The MFD display instructs the operator to turn to headings of 360°, 90°, 180°, and 270°.
12. Press ENT to confirm each heading.
13. When the operator has successfully completed the heading offset procedure, “CALIBRATION
SUCCESSFUL” will flash.
14. Press ENT on the GDU 620 to conclude this procedure.

Rev. V Page 5-85
Figure 5-40 AHRS/GMU CALIBRATION Page - Heading Offset
5.6.5 Engine Run-Up Vibration Test
NOTE
An Installer Unlock Card is not required to run the Engine Run-up Test.
NOTE
The calibration procedures in Section 5.6.1 through Section 5.6.4 do not have to be
completed prior to performing this procedure.
NOTE
For dual G500/G600 installations, the following procedure must be performed on EACH
GDU 620 and AHRS. The run-up procedure can be done simultaneously on each
GDU 620. Ensure “CALIBRATE” is displayed on both GDU 620s before proceeding.
Follow the prompts on GDU 620 #1.
Initiate the AHRS engine run-up vibration test procedure by performing the following steps:
1. Select the Engine Run-up Test procedure and press ENT.
2. Follow the checklist items displayed on the MFD, and press ENT as each one is completed or
confirmed.
4. The MFD display instructs the operator to gradually increase power from idle to full throttle and
back to idle over a period of 1-2 minutes.
5. When the operator has completed the engine run-up and the engine is back to an idle setting, press
ENT to indicate that the process is complete. When this is done, the Test Complete field stops
blinking.
6. The MFD informs the operator if the installation has passed or failed the vibration test. If the test
fails, the specific measurements causing the failure are identified and numeric values are displayed
on the MFD.
7. Press ENT on the MFD to conclude this procedure.

Rev. V Page 5-86
NOTE
If failures are indicated, the Engine Run-up Test may be repeated at most two more times.
If the test does not pass after three attempts, then the installation should not be considered
reliable until the source of the vibration problem is identified and remedied. In the event of
repeated failure of the Engine Run-up Test, record the values that are reported to be out of
range for future reference.
The following are potential causes for failure of the Engine Run-up Test:
1. Vibration motion of AHRS and/or GMU 44 caused by neighboring equipment and/or supports.
2. Mounting screws and other hardware for AHRS and/or GMU 44 not firmly attached.
3. AHRS connector not firmly attached to unit.
4. Cabling leading to AHRS or GMU 44 not firmly secured to supporting structure.
5. An engine/propeller that is significantly out of balance.
The aircraft can now be taxied back and the engine can be shut down for final testing. Following a
successful AHRS calibration, when the PFD powers-up in Normal mode, the AHRS attitude and heading
information displayed should become valid within 1 minute of power-up.
Figure 5-41 AHRS/GMU Calibration - Engine Run-Up Test

Rev. V Page 5-87
5.6.6 Magnetometer Interference Test
NOTE
When a GSU 75(B) is installed with GDU 620 software v7.12, a Mag Interference Test
Tool is required in order to perform the Magnetometer Interference Test. This tool (P/N
006-B1167-30) can be downloaded from Garmin’s Dealer Resource Center. Refer to GDU
620 Installation Manual (P/N 190-00601-04) or Service Bulletin 1666 for additional
information.
NOTE
For dual G500/G600 installations, the following procedure must be performed on EACH
GDU 620/GMU 44. The interference test procedure can be done simultaneously on each
GDU 620.
NOTE
An Installer Unlock Card is not required to run the Magnetometer Interference Test.
With the GDU 620 in Configuration mode, initiate the AHRS Magnetometer Interference Test Procedure
by performing the following steps:
1. Select the AHRS page group on the MFD.
2. Go to the AHRS/GMU Calibration page, as shown in Figure 5-42.
3. Select the Mag Interference Test Procedure.
4. Press ENT.
5. Follow the checklist items displayed on the MFD.
6. Press ENT as each one is completed or confirmed.
NOTE
The third item on the checklist instructs the operator to prepare a detailed test sequence list with
precise start and stop times for exercising all electronic devices. Only the electronic devices that
are likely to affect the operation of the GMU 44 Magnetometer need be included in the test
sequence. The list of relevant electronic devices varies from aircraft to aircraft. This sequence is
the same sequence developed for the Magnetometer Interference Survey in Appendix G.
7. When the Calibrate field blinks, press ENT to begin the procedure. Have a stopwatch ready to
begin recording the elapsed time.
8. The operator should carry out the actions called for in the prepared test sequence.
NOTE
It is important that all actions are carried out in the order and at the precise elapsed time
as specified in the prepared test sequence.
NOTE
If performing the procedure on both GDU 620s simultaneously, wait until the “Begin test
sequence” text appears on both GDU 620s before proceeding.
9. After “Begin test sequence” appears, wait approximately 5 seconds and perform each of the
actions listed in the test sequence table. Refer to Table G-2 for an example of a test sequence.

Rev. V Page 5-88
10. When the test sequence is completed, wait approximately 5 seconds and then press ENT to
complete the test.
11. Press ENT on the MFD to end the procedure.
The MFD informs the operator if the installation has passed or failed the Magnetometer Interference Test.
If the test passes, no further action is required.
If the test fails, the installation should be considered unreliable until the source of magnetic interference is
identified and remedied. The Magnetometer Interference Test must be repeated until passed. When the
Magnetometer Interference Test fails, record the three magnetometer maximum deviation values and their
corresponding timestamps. A maximum deviation value greater than 5.0 milliGauss in either the X or Y
axes, or greater than 8.0 milliGauss in the Z axis indicates a problem that must be resolved. Compare the
corresponding timestamps with the prepared test sequence to identify which action produced the problem.
Contact Garmin for assistance in resolving the problem.
Two common reasons for a failed Magnetometer Interference Test are:
1. New equipment is installed in close proximity to the GMU 44 Magnetometer.
2. An existing or new electronic device has become grounded through the aircraft structure instead of
via the proper ground wire in a twisted shielded pair, especially if the ground return path through
the aircraft structure passes near the GMU 44.
Figure 5-42 AHRS/GMU CALIBRATION Page - Mag Interference Test

Rev. V Page 5-89
5.6.7 Site Evaluation of Magnetic Disturbances (Optional)
NOTE
Typically, a compass rose is an acceptable location to perform the Magnetometer
Calibration Procedure. However, because not all compass roses are well maintained, even
an existing compass rose should be regularly evaluated using the method described here
to determine if it is free of magnetic disturbances. If evaluation of an existing compass
rose indicates that magnetic disturbances are present, then an alternative location must be
found to perform the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure.
NOTE
In order to perform the Site Evaluation for Magnetic Disturbances, an Installer Unlock
Card is required.
NOTE
Although Section 5.6.2 indicates that the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure should be
performed by making a series of clockwise turns around the site, the procedure can also be
performed by making counterclockwise turns for the purpose of evaluating the site for
magnetic disturbances.
A G500/G600-equipped airplane can be used to evaluate a candidate site for magnetic disturbances and
determine whether it is a suitable location to perform the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure. The
Magnetometer Calibration Procedure itself contains the logic to simultaneously survey the location for
magnetic cleanliness while it is computing the magnetometer calibration parameters.
The G500/G600-equipped airplane used to evaluate the site must have already completed the Pitch/Roll
Offset Compensation Procedure (Section 5.6.1). However, prior completion of the Magnetometer
Calibration Procedure (Section 5.6.2) is not required.
In order to evaluate a candidate site, the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure must be performed twice:
once turning clockwise around the site and once turning counterclockwise. Both times, the procedure
should be conducted as described in Section 5.6.2 of this document, with the exception of the direction of
turns around the site.
If, upon completion of the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure in both a clockwise and counterclockwise
direction, the PFD displays the “CALIBRATION SUCCESSFUL/SITE IS CLEAN” message, then the
candidate site is sufficiently free of magnetic disturbances and is acceptable for performing the
Magnetometer Calibration Procedure. It is important to obtain successful results in both the clockwise and
counterclockwise directions to ensure that the magnetometer sweeps over a large enough area at the
candidate site.
If, upon completion of the magnetometer calibration procedure in either of the two directions, the PFD
displays either the “MAG FIELD AT SITE NOT UNIFORM” or “MAG FIELD AT SITE DIFFERS
FROM IGRF MODEL” message, then the site contains magnetic disturbances that are too large and an
alternate site should be used for the AHRS/GMU 44 magnetic calibration procedure.

Rev. V Page 5-90
5.7 External System Adjustments
5.7.1 ARINC 708 Weather Radars
NOTE
The GAD 43 Output window is only displayed when the WXR is in Calibration mode and
will not be displayed if the GAD 43 Adapter is not present in the system. This window
allows you to set the analog pitch and roll outputs from the GAD 43 to specific values. Any
pitch/roll adjustments in this window will only affect the GAD 43 analog outputs and will
not affect the attitude output from the GRS 77.
NOTE
With GDU 620 software v6.11, if the GAD 43e is used to provide analog stabilization, the
GAD 43 Output window will never be displayed. To complete analog stabilization
calibration, temporarily set the Adapter TYPE to GAD 43 on the System Configuration
page and then perform the calibration. When complete, reset the Adapter TYPE to
GAD 43e on the System Configuration page.
Figure 5-43 A708 WEATHER RADAR Page
5.7.1.1 Honeywell (Bendix/King) 2XXX Series Radars

This section describes post-installation system configuration and calibration of the Bendix/King
RDR-2000 and RDR-2100 Radar Systems using the GDU 620. The CM 2000 Configuration Module for
the WXR must be configured using the Honeywell (Bendix/King) KPA 900 Configuration Module
Programmer Kit (P/N 050-03311-0000) in conjunction with a personal computer. Refer to the
configuration module programmer operator’s guide for detailed setup instructions. Follow the instructions
for the programmer and any required weather radar settings contained in Appendix Section E.10.

Rev. V Page 5-91
5.7.1.1.1 Weather Radar Calibration Mode
Place the WXR in Calibration mode:
1. Go to the A708 Weather Radar page in the WXR page group.
3. Set the Radar Mode to TEST.
4. Move the cursor to the Calibration field and set to ON.
5. Wait for the WXR to enter Calibration mode – all status boxes will flash briefly to indicate that the
radar is in Calibration mode.
NOTE
If the radar status boxes do not flash (i.e., the radar does not go into Calibration mode),
keep the radar in TEST mode and set the CALIBRATION field to OFF and back to ON.
5.7.1.1.2 Antenna Clearance Check

Perform the antenna clearance check:
1. Ensure that the WXR is in Calibration mode. Refer to Section 5.7.1.1.1.
2. Adjust the Gain field to a value of -26.5 to -28.0.
3. Set the Tilt Settings field to 14.75°U. This will initiate the antenna clearance scan. The antenna
will move to each of the extreme positions to determine that there is no interference with antenna
movement and all scan motors are working properly.
5.7.1.1.3 Stabilization Calibration
NOTE
The GAD 43/43e may be used to provide analog stabilization to the WXR. If this is the
case, the Pitch and Roll fields in the GAD 43 Output window on the A708 Weather Radar
page can be used to adjust the attitude being supplied to the WXR. There will be no need to
remove the AHRS from the aircraft and place it on a tilt table to achieve the pitch/roll
values specified in the calibration procedure.
Perform the WXR stabilization calibration:

1. Ensure that the radar is in Calibration mode. Refer to Section 5.7.1.1.1.
2. Note the Roll Trim value for re-entry following the stabilization calibration procedure.
3. Adjust the Roll Trim field to 0.000°.
4. Beginning with the 400 Hz REF GAIN procedure, follow the instructions in Section 2.4.4.1 of
RDR 2000 Installation Manual (Honeywell P/N 006-00643-0007) or RDR 2100 Installation
Manual (Honeywell P/N 006-00648-0002).
5. If the roll trim value was recorded from the previous WXR indicator or noted in step 2, set the Roll
Trim field on the GDU 620 to this value.

Rev. V Page 5-92
5.7.1.2 Honeywell (Bendix/King) RDS 8X Series Radars
This section describes post-installation system configuration and calibration of the Bendix/King
RDS-81 (RS 811A) and RDS-82 (RS 181A) systems using the GDU 620.
5.7.1.2.1 Weather Radar Calibration Mode

Place the WXR in Calibration mode:
1. Go to the A708 Weather Radar page in the WXR page group.
3. Set the Radar Mode to TEST.
4. Move the cursor to the Calibration field and set to ON.
5. Wait for the WXR to enter Calibration mode – the RX TX box will turn red when the radar enters
Calibration mode.
5.7.1.2.2 Stabilization Calibration
NOTE
The GAD 43/43e may be used to provide stabilization to the WXR. If this is the case, the
Pitch and Roll fields in the GAD 43 Output window on the A708 Weather Radar page can
be used to adjust the attitude being supplied to the WXR. There will be no need to remove
the AHRS from the aircraft and place it on a tilt table to achieve the pitch/roll values
specified in the calibration procedure.
Perform the WXR stabilization calibration as follows:

1. Ensure that the radar is in Calibration mode. Refer to Section 5.7.1.2.1.
2. Note the Roll Trim value for re-entry following the stabilization calibration procedure.
3. Adjust the Roll Trim field to 0.000°.
4. Beginning with the step C in Section 2.3.6.3 of RDS 81 Installation Manual (Honeywell
P/N 006-00954-0001) or RDS 82 Installation Manual (Honeywell P/N 006-00955-0006), perform
the stabilization alignment in the aircraft.
5. If the roll trim value was recorded from the previous WXR indicator or noted in step 2, set the Roll
Trim field on the GDU 620 to this value.

Rev. V Page 5-93
5.7.2 Honeywell (Bendix/King) Autopilot Adjustments
5.7.2.1 KAP 100, KAP/KFC 150 Autopilot
NOTE
The following alignment is only required if the GAD 43/43e is be used to provide analog
attitude to the autopilot.
NOTE
Ensure the G500/G600 system is correctly configured for the KAP 100 or KAP/KFC 150
before performing the following procedure. Refer to Section 5.5.12 and Section 5.5.14.
NOTE
A voltmeter accurate to 0.1 V at a 5 VDC range is required to perform the following
procedures.
When using the GAD 43/43e as a replacement for the autopilot attitude gyro, it is necessary to perform the
Gyro Alignment Procedure. Analog attitude gyros have significant variations in their attitude output
signals, and the autopilot computer was previously aligned to match the outputs from a specific analog
gyro. It is necessary to align the autopilot computer to the standardized output generated by the
GAD 43/43e.
Failure to align the autopilot computer to the GAD 43/43e outputs can result in:
• Shallow or excessive bank angles during turns
• Sluggish or aggressive response to pitch commands
• Poor autopilot performance
The following procedure requires a temporary test harness to be installed as shown in Figure 5-44. The
parts required for the test harness installation are listed in Table 5-33.

Rev. V Page 5-94
KAP 100 AND KAP/KFC 150 TEST HARNESS
TOP TEST A4 Test Pin 1
ROLL ATT X FEED Test Pin 2
SIGNAL GROUND Test Pin 3

5
KC 19X
2 TC101
A4 TOP TEST A4
4 1 19X1
22 22 ROLL ATT X FEED
Z Z VG REF
Y Y PITCH ATTITUDE HI
21 21 ROLL ATTITUDE HI
To KC 19X
mounting tray 4 1 P19X2
10 10 SIGNAL GROUND
A A CHASIS GROUND
B B AP DISCONNECT
2 2 POWER 14/28VDC
C C VG EXCITATION
1 1 POWER REF
Notes
THE KC19X CARD EDGE CONNECTORS ARE BOTH ORIENTED SO THE LETTERED SIDE OF THE
1 CONNECTORS FACE UP.
A4 IS THE FOURTH CONNECTOR FROM THE LEFT ON THE TOP WHEN VIEWED FROM THE FRONT. TC101 IS
2 NOT APPLICABLE TO THE KC 190/KAP 100.
Figure 5-44 KFC 150 Test Harness

Rev. V Page 5-95
Table 5-33 Extension Harness Parts
Figure Manufacturer
Name Description Manufacturer Qty
5-44 P/N
Main connectors Dual edge 44- TE Connectivity
1 583617-1 2
19X1/19X2 female position AMP Connectors
Top side connector Dual edge 20- TE Connectivity
2 583861-4 1
TC101 female position AMP Connectors
Female crimp Terminal edge TE Connectivity
3 5-583853-4 Varies
connectors crimp AMP Connectors
Main connectors Dual edge 44- Sullins Connector
4 EBM22MMWD 2
19X1/19X2 male position Solutions
Cinch
Connector tip Connectivity
5 Tip jack [1] 105-0602-001 3
jack, red Solutions
Johnson
Notes:
[1] It is only required to access the signals on the indicated wires with a voltmeter; therefore,
any other equivalent solution is acceptable.
Gyro Alignment Procedure

1. Remove the KC 19X computer from the mounting rack.
2. To allow access to the adjustment pots (one on the front and three on the side) and the three signal
test pins, connect the test harness as shown in Figure 5-44.
4. Ensure the GAD 43/43e is powered on.
5. Go to the GAD 43/43e page in the GAD page group. Refer to Figure 5-45.
6. Ensure that the GAD 43/43e output test values are 0° pitch, 0° roll, and valid on the GAD 43/43e
page.
7. Measure the voltage from test pin 2 (J19x1-22) to test pin 3 (J19x2-10) with a digital voltmeter.
8. Adjust the RN potentiometer to obtain a voltmeter reading of 0.0 VDC.
9. Measure the voltage from test pin 1 (TC101-A4) to test pin 3 (J19x2-10) with a digital voltmeter.
10. Adjust the PDN potentiometer to obtain a voltmeter reading of 0.0 VDC. This step is not
applicable to the KC 190/KAP 100.
11. Set the GAD 43/43e output to a 25° right bank using the roll output test value.
12. Use a digital voltmeter to measure the voltage (+) at test pin 2 (J19x1-22) with reference to test pin
3 (J19x2-10).
13. Adjust the RDG potentiometer to obtain a voltmeter reading of -5 ± 0.1 VDC.
14. Set the GAD 43/43e output to a 25° left bank using the roll output test value.
15. Ensure that the voltmeter reading is now +5 ± 0.1 VDC.
16. Set the GAD 43/43e output to 10° nose down and bank to zero degrees using the pitch output test
value.
17. Use a digital voltmeter to measure the voltage (+) at test pin 1 (TC101-A4) with reference to test
pin 3 (J19x2-10).

Rev. V Page 5-96
18. Adjust the PDG potentiometer to obtain a voltmeter reading of +2 ± 0.1 VDC. This step is not
applicable to the KC 190 / KAP 100.
19. Set the GAD 43/43e output to 10° nose up using the pitch output test value.
20. Ensure that the voltmeter reading is now -2 ± 0.1 VDC. This step is not applicable to the
KC 190/KAP 100.
21. When testing is complete, remove the test harness.
22. Re-insert the KC 19X computer into the rack.
Figure 5-45 GAD 43 Page - KAP 100/KAP 150/KFC 150
5.7.2.2 KFC 200 Autopilot
NOTE
The following alignment is only required if the GAD 43/43e is used to provide analog
NOTE
Ensure the G500/G600 system is configured correctly for the KFC 200 before performing
the following procedure. Refer to Section 5.5.12, Section 5.5.13, and Section 5.5.14.
NOTE
A voltmeter accurate to 0.01 V at a 5 VDC range is required to perform the following
procedures.

Rev. V Page 5-97
When using the GAD 43/43e as a replacement for the autopilot attitude gyro, it is necessary to perform this
gyro alignment procedure. Analog attitude gyros have significant variations in their attitude output signals,
and the autopilot computer was previously aligned to match the outputs from a specific analog gyro.
Because of this, it is necessary to align the autopilot computer to the standardized output generated by the
GAD 43/43e. Failure to align the autopilot computer to the GAD 43/43e outputs can result in the
following:
The following procedure requires the maintenance test port to be installed per Figure 5-46. The test harness
must be 4 inches or less and stowed when not in use. Ensure all existing shielded wiring remains shielded
(shield splices as necessary). Shields for the test harness should be terminated at the same location as the
shields for the autopilot system.
1. Start the GDU 620 in Configuration mode.
2. Ensure the GAD 43/43e is powered on.
3. Go to the GAD 43/43e page in the GAD page group. Refer to Figure 5-23.
4. Activate the cursor and ensure that the Relay Position is set to ATTITUDE VALID.
5. Perform the following KC 290 Mode Controller Adjustments:
a. Using the GAD 43/43e output test values on the GAD 43/43e page, ensure that the
GAD 43/43e Pitch and Roll output test values are both zero and valid.
b. Loosen the KC 290 mode controller from its mount to gain access to the pitch/roll adjustment
potentiometers on the bottom of the mode controller.
c. Connect the voltmeter to pins 6 and 1 (1 as reference) on the maintenance port.
d. Adjust the Pitch Adjust potentiometer on the KC 290 until the voltmeter reads 0.0 ± 0.3 VDC.
e. Connect the voltmeter to pins 5 and 4 (4 as reference) on the maintenance port.
f. Adjust the roll adjust potentiometer on the KC 290 until the voltmeter reads 0.0 ± 0.3 VDC.
6. Perform the following Roll gyro calibration:
a. Remove dust cover on the KC 295 to gain access to adjustment potentiometers.
b. Ensure that the GAD 43/43e Roll output test value is zero and valid.
c. Connect the voltmeter to pins 3 and 4 (4 as reference) on the maintenance port.
d. Adjust the Gyro Roll Zero potentiometer on the KC 295 computer until the voltmeter reads
0.0 ± 0.05 VDC.
e. Set the GAD 43/43e Roll output test value to 25° right bank and valid.
f. Adjust the Gyro Roll Gain potentiometer on the KC 295 computer until the voltmeter reads
5 VDC.
g. Set the GAD 43/43e Roll output test value to 25° left bank and valid.
h. Ensure the voltmeter reads -5 VDC.
7. Perform the following Pitch gyro calibration:
a. Connect the voltmeter to pins 2 and 1 (1 as reference) on the maintenance port.
b. Ensure that the GAD 43/43e pitch output test value is zero and valid.
c. Adjust the Gyro Pitch Zero potentiometer on the KC 295 computer until the voltmeter reads
0.0 ± 0.15 VDC.
d. Set the GAD 43/43e Pitch output test value to 10° nose up and valid.

Rev. V Page 5-98
e. Adjust the Gyro Pitch Gain potentiometer on the KC 295 computer until the voltmeter reads
6 VDC.
8. Perform the following Flight Director calibration:
a. Ensure that the GAD 43/43e pitch/roll output test values are zero and valid.
b. View the Flight Director Cal page on the GDU.
c. Disengage all AP/FD modes, then re-engage the FD only by pressing the FD key. The flight
director data on the GDU should be valid.
d. Adjust the Roll Command Bar Zero potentiometer on the KC 295 computer until the roll flight
director command on the GDU is 0°.
e. Adjust the Pitch Command Bar Zero potentiometer on the KC 295 computer until the pitch
flight director command on the GDU is 0°.
<4" KC 295
P2952
330-00360-00
CONNECTOR
(Tyco 206485-1) 1 L PITCH REF
2 P VERTICAL GYRO PITCH T.P.
3 S
4
5
6
S
KC 296
(YAW COMPUTER) P2961
GYRO ROLL CROSSFEED H X GYRO ROLL CROSSFEED
LAT REF F f LAT REF
S S
KC 290
(MODE CONTROLLER) P2902
ROLL ADJ F K ROLL ADJ
PITCH ADJ A b PITCH ADJ
S S
Figure 5-46 KFC 200 Maintenance Test Port

Rev. V Page 5-99
NOTE
The following alignment is only required if the GAD 43/43e is used to provide analog
NOTE
Ensure the G500/G600 system is correctly configured for the KFC 225 before performing
the following procedure. Refer to Section 5.5.12 and Section 5.5.14.
When using the GAD 43/43e as a replacement for the autopilot attitude gyro, it is necessary to perform this
gyro alignment procedure. Analog attitude gyros have significant variations in their attitude output signals,
and the autopilot computer was previously aligned to match the outputs from a specific analog gyro. It is
necessary to align the autopilot computer to the standardized output generated by the GAD 43/43e.
Failure to align the autopilot computer to the GAD 43/43e outputs can result in:
Gyro Alignment Procedure

2. Go to the GAD 43/43e page in the GAD page group.
3. Ensure that Relay Position is set to ATTITUDE VALID.
4. Perform the attitude gyro calibration procedure using GAD 43/43e KI 256 emulation.
a. Use an extender harness for the KC 225 to gain access to the PIT/ROL adjustment
potentiometers on the side of the KC 225 as specified in Honeywell KFC 225 Flight Control
System Installation Manual.
b. Select the Set Installation Offsets page on the KC 225 Remote Terminal Interface (RTI).
c. Refer to Honeywell KFC 225 Flight Control System Installation Manual for instructions
regarding how to connect and use the KC 225 RTI.
d. Ensure that the GAD 43/43e output test values are 0° pitch, 0° roll, and Attitude Valid.
e. Record the values for Pitch and Roll attitude that are displayed on the KC 225 RTI. These are
the Pitch/Roll Offset values.
Pitch Offset Roll Offset
f. Use the GAD 43/43e output test to select a pitch angle of 10°U.
g. Adjust the PIT potentiometer on the side of the KC 225 until the Pitch value on the KC 225
RTI is equal to 10° plus the Pitch Offset value (tolerance ±0.5°). Refer to the example pitch
adjustment shown below.
h. Use the GAD 43/43e output test to select a pitch angle of 0°U and a roll angle of 20°R.
i. Adjust the ROL potentiometer on the side of the KC 225 until the ROLL value on the KC 225
RTI is equal to 20° plus the Roll Offset value (tolerance ±0.5°). Refer to the example roll
adjustment shown below.

Rev. V Page 5-100
j. Use the GAD 43/43e output test to select 0° pitch/roll.
k. Engage the autopilot in the default modes (PIT and ROL).
l. On the KC 225 RTI, select “3. Pitch Attitude.”
m. To store the Pitch Attitude calibration, press ENTER.
n. With the autopilot still engaged in the default modes, adjust the potentiometer on the front of
the KC 225 until the Roll value on the KC 225 RTI is equal to 0°.
o. Disengage the autopilot.
p. Verify the roll attitude calibration:
i. Use the GAD 43/43e output test to select a pitch angle of 0°U and a roll angle of 20°R.
ii. Verify that the Roll value on the KC 225 RTI is 20° (±0.5°).
iii. .Use the GAD 43/43e output test to select a pitch angle of 0°U and a roll angle of 20°L.
iv. Verify that the Roll value on the KC 225 RTI is -20° (±0.5°).
v. If both Roll attitude values are not within tolerance, adjust the ROL potentiometer on the
side of the KC 225 until both Roll attitude values are within tolerance.
q. At the completion of test, remove the KC 225 extender harness.
Example Pitch Adjustment

• Pitch Offset: 0.67°
• With 10°U pitch, adjust the PIT potentiometer until the displayed Pitch value is between 10.17°
and 11.17°
◦ This range is equal to [10° + 0.67°] ±0.5°
Example Roll Adjustment

• Roll Offset: -0.34°
• With 20°R roll, adjust the ROL potentiometer until the displayed ROLL value is between 19.16°
and 20.16°
◦ This range is equal to [20° + (-0.34°)] ±0.5°
Figure 5-47 GAD 43 Page - KFC 225

Rev. V Page 5-101
5.7.2.3.1 Heading and Course Pointer Calibration (All Installations)
1. Go to the Autopilot Test page in the FCS page group on the GDU 620.
2. Activate the HDG/CRS test.
3. Set the Current Heading, Desired Heading, and Desired Course to 360°.
4. On the KC 225 RTI, select the Installation Offset function.
a. Select “1. Heading” on the Set Installation Offsets page.
b. Press ENTER.
c. Select “2. Course” on the Set Installation Offsets page.
d. Press ENTER.
e. Press ENTER to exit the page.
5.7.2.3.2 FD Alignment
1. Ensure that the attitude input to the autopilot is level (zero pitch/roll).
a. If using the GAD 43/43e, ensure that the GAD 43/43e output test values are 0° pitch, 0° roll,
and Attitude Valid on the GAD 43/43e page.
b. If using an analog gyro, ensure that the gyro is operational and level. This may require an
extender harness and tilt table.
2. Go to the Flight Director Cal page in the FCS page group to view the FD Pitch/Roll values.
Align FD PITCH
1. Ensure the FD is engaged, but not the autopilot.
2. Press and hold CWS.
3. Adjust the potentiometer on the front of the KC 225 until the FD Pitch value is as close to zero as
possible.
Align FD ROLL
1. Ensure the autopilot and flight director are disengaged.
2. Press and hold FD.
3. Adjust potentiometer on the KC 225 until the FD Roll value is as close to zero as possible.

Rev. V Page 5-102
5.7.2.3.3 Flight Director Gain Adjustment Procedure
NOTE
The following adjustment is required for all KFC 225 installations displaying the flight
director on the GDU 620.
NOTE
The Honeywell KFC 225 Flight Control System Installation and Maintenance Manual
specific to the aircraft being modified must be used whenever making flight director
adjustments.
2. Ensure that the attitude input to the autopilot is level (zero pitch/roll).
a. If using the GAD 43/43e, ensure that the GAD 43/43e output test values are 0° pitch, 0° roll,
and Attitude Valid on the GAD 43/43e page.
b. If using an analog gyro, ensure that the gyro is operational and level (may require an extender
harness and tilt table).
3. Go to the Flight Director Cal page in the FCS page group to view the FD Pitch value.
4. Press and hold the GA switch.
5. Adjust potentiometer on the front of the KC 225 until the FD Pitch value matches the pitch value
specified in the autopilot installation data for Go-around mode (e.g., 6.00°) as closely as possible.
6. Verify the FD Gain adjustment.
a. Press CWS. The FD Pitch value should be approximately zero.
b. Make five discrete clicks using the UP keys on the KC 225. The FD Pitch value should be
approximately +2.5° up.
5.7.2.3.4 Altimeter Calibration Procedure
NOTE
The following calibration is only required if the GAD 43/43e is used to provide analog
BARO-correction to the autopilot.
1. Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode.

2. Perform the altimeter calibration procedure as specified in Honeywell KFC 225 Flight Control
System Installation Manual with the following difference:
a. When instructed to set the Barometric setting to 29.92 inches, set the Barometric setting on the
GDU 620 to 29.92 inches.

Rev. V Page 5-103
5.7.2.4.1 Gyro Alignment Procedure
NOTE
The following alignment is only required if the GAD 43/43e is be used to provide analog
4. Perform the Alignment Procedure as specified in the King installation manual with the following
difference:
a. The use of a tilt table is not required, and it is not necessary to remove the AHRS from the
aircraft. To set Pitch and Roll as directed in the procedure, activate the cursor on the GDU 620
and set the Pitch Angle and Roll Angle to the desired values.
Figure 5-48 GAD 43 Page - KFC 250
5.7.2.5 KFC 325/275 Autopilot

5.7.2.5.1 Flightline Gyro Alignment Procedure (KFC 275 Only)
4. Perform the Flightline Gyro Alignment Procedure as specified in the King installation manual with
the following difference:

Rev. V Page 5-104
a. The use of a tilt table is not required, and it is not necessary to remove the AHRS from the
Figure 5-49 GAD 43 Page - KFC 325/275
5.7.2.5.2 Roll Adjustment Procedure (KFC 325 Only)

1. Ensure that the GDU 620 is in Configuration mode.
4. Set the Pitch Angle and Roll Angle to 0°.
5. Engage the flight director and autopilot. The control wheel should not move. If the control wheel
turns, adjust the roll null (RN) potentiometer on the side of the KMC 321 to stop the movement.
Figure 5-50 GAD 43 - Roll Adjustment

Rev. V Page 5-105
5.7.2.5.3 In-Flight Adjustments
Perform the in-flight adjustments for Roll, Lateral Acceleration (Yaw), and command bar positioning as
specified in the Bendix/King Installation Manual.
5.7.3 Cessna 300B/400B/800B Autopilots

5.7.3.1 Gyro Alignment Procedure
4. Preform the Roll Error output Null Adjustment, Roll Gyro Gain Adjustment, Pitch Error output
Null Adjustment, and the Pitch Gyro Gain Adjustment as described in Cessna Autopilot System
Service Manual with the following difference:
a. The use of a tilt table is not required and it is not necessary to remove the AHRS from the
5.7.4 Cessna 1000A Autopilots

5.7.4.1 Gyro Alignment Procedure
4. Perform attitude gyro system interface adjustments as described in Cessna Autopilot System
Service Manual with the following difference:
a. The use of a tilt table is not required and it is not necessary to remove the AHRS from the
aircraft. To set Pitch and Roll as directed in the procedure, activate the cursor on the
GDU 620 and set the Pitch Angle and Roll Angle to the desired values.

Rev. V Page 5-106
5.8 Ground Checks
The steps that are not applicable to a particular installation may be skipped.
NOTE
Throughout the checkout section, references are made to particular GDU 620 functions. If
the function is not available, ensure that the GDU 620 has been configured correctly as
described in Section 5.5.
5.8.1 Database Check

Refer to Section 1.9 for database definitions and G600 Pilot’s Guide for updated cycle information.
1. Ensure that a G500/G600 Database Card is inserted in the bottom slot of the GDU 620.
2. Turn on power to the G500/G600 system.
3. Verify all self-tests pass on the main start-up screen.
NOTE
Databases that have expired will be displayed in yellow text on the MFD start-up screen.
Databases will also be displayed in yellow until a valid GPS position has been acquired.
4. Verify the expiration on the Jeppesen NavData Database.

5. If activated, verify the expiration of the Electronic Charts Database.
5.8.2 Pitot-Static, ADC, OAT, and Airspeed Tape Settings Checks

Verify correct operation of the GDU 620 altitude and airspeed tapes, standby altimeter, and standby
airspeed indicator using a pitot-static ramp tester.
CAUTION
When using a pitot-static ramp tester, only simulate normal aircraft operating conditions
as defined in the aircraft Type Data (POH/AFM) to avoid component damage.
NOTE
When conducting air data tests, it is possible to induce attitude and/or heading errors on
the GDU 620 – this is normal system behavior. Refer to Section 6.2 for additional details.
NOTE
For a dual G500/G600 installation, this check must be completed for each GDU 620 –
both may be verified at the same time.
NOTE
The ADC may require a warm-up period of 15 minutes to reach full accuracy –
30 minutes if the environmental temperature is less than 0°C.

Rev. V Page 5-107
5.8.2.1 Basic Airspeed Tape Setting
GDU airspeed tape display and settings must be verified in accordance with this section.
NOTE
The airspeeds referenced in the following steps are those determined in Section 5.2.4.
If the IAS TAPE is set to BASIC, verify correct operation of the ADC as follows:
3. Using a pitot-static ramp tester, increase the airspeed until the PFD airspeed tape pointer is at the
bottom of the white band (Vs0).
4. Verify that the bottom of the white arc/band on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same
airspeed value.
5. Only applicable to twin engine aircraft: Increase the airspeed to the lower red radial (Vmca).
Verify that the red radial on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.
6. Change the airspeed until the PFD airspeed tape pointer is at the bottom of the green band (VS1).
7. Verify that the bottom of the green arc/band on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same
airspeed value.
8. Only applicable to twin engine aircraft: Increase the airspeed to the blue radial (Vyse).
9. Verify that the blue radial on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.
10. Change the airspeed until the PFD airspeed tape pointer is at the top of the white band (Vfe).
11. Verify that the top of the white arc/band on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same airspeed
value.
12. Change the airspeed until the PFD airspeed tape pointer is at the top of the green band/bottom of
the yellow band (Vno).
13. Verify that the top of the green arc/band on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same airspeed
value.
14. Increase the airspeed to the upper red radial/top of yellow arc (Vne).
15. Verify that the red radial on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.
NOTE
If the ADC and standby airspeed indicator are on separate pitot-static systems, their
agreement with the test set airspeed will have to be checked separately.
16. Decrease the airspeed to zero, stopping at all of the airspeeds listed in the Table 5-34 (airspeeds
above Vne should not be checked).
17. Verify that the PFD and standby airspeed indicator display the values within the tolerances
indicated in Table 5-34.

Rev. V Page 5-108
Table 5-34 Airspeed Test Points
Test Set PFD Allowed Recommended Standby ASI
Airspeed (knots) Tolerance (knots) Tolerance (knots) [1]
50 ±5.0 ±5
80 ±3.5 ±4
100 ±2.0 ±3
120 ±2.0 ±3
150 ±2.0 ±3
180 ±2.0 ±5
210 ±2.0 ±5
250 ±2.0 ±5
290 ±3.0 ±6
Notes:
[1] If available, the aircraft or instrument manufacturer’s data should be referenced for
standby tolerances.
5.8.2.2 Advanced Airspeed Tape Setting

If the IAS TAPE is set to ADVANCED, verify correct operation of the ADC.
NOTE
The airspeeds referenced in the following steps are determined in accordance with
Appendix M.

3. Using a pitot-static ramp tester, increase the airspeed until the PFD airspeed tape pointer is at the
bottom of the white band (Vs0).
4. Verify that the bottom of the white arc/band on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same
airspeed value.
5. Increase the IAS throughout the range of the ASI – stop at the limits of all Arc Ranges, and at all
Markings values, as configured per Table M-1 and Table M-2.
6. Verify that the ranges and markings on the ASI and PFD are located at the same airspeeds values.
The last value verified should be the beginning of the barber pole (Vne/Vmo/Mmo).
7. The following applies to Variable Vne/Vmo/Mmo aircraft only.
a. Decrease the IAS to 25 KT below the barber pole on the PFD. Increase the indicated altitude to
the maximum operating altitude or service ceiling. Verify that the barber pole on the PFD and
standby ASI are at the same airspeed (+/- 5 KT). Decrease the airspeed as needed to ensure the
IAS does not exceed the barber pole during the simulated climb.

Rev. V Page 5-109
NOTE
If the ADC and standby airspeed indicator are on separate pitot-static systems, record the
test set airspeed/altitude and PFD airspeed corresponding to the barber pole and
compare the PFD value to the standby ASI barber pole under the same conditions.
b. Decrease the indicated altitude (not exceeding vertical speed limitations) back to ambient
static pressure.
8. From the current airspeed, decrease the airspeed to zero, stopping at all of the relevant airspeeds
listed in Table 5-34 (airspeeds above Vne should not be checked). Verify that the PFD and standby
airspeed indicator display the values within the tolerances indicated.
5.8.2.3 Altimeter Check

The GDU 620 and standby altitude displays must be verified in accordance with Title 14 of the
CFR 91.411 and Part 43 Appendix E, with the following exception to 14 CFR Part 43 Appendix E,
paragraph (b)(1):
• The tests of sub-paragraphs iv (Friction) and vi (Barometric Scale Error) are not applicable
because the digital outputs of the ADC
5.8.2.4 OAT Check
NOTE
GDU 620 software v7.00 and later provides a pilot-selectable OAT display setting.
GDU 620 software prior to v7.00 only provides OAT.
1. Start the G500/G600 system in Normal mode.

3. Select the AUX page under System Setup.
4. In PFD Options, select desired Temp Reference to match the type used in the AFM or POH for
each aircraft.
a. SAT (static air temperature).
b. TAT (total air temperature).
c. ISA (international standard atmosphere).
5. Verify the correct OAT and air temperature reference (e.g., SAT, TAT, ISA) are displayed on the
PFD.

Rev. V Page 5-110
5.8.3 GPS Receiver Interface Test
The GDU 620 receives position and flight plan and navigation data from an external GPS navigation
source. This check verifies that the units are communicating.
1. Select GPS (or GPS1) as the navigation source for the PFD CDI.
2. Turn on the external GPS Navigator (GPS1 for installations with dual navigators). If there are dual
GPS navigators installed, ensure the second GPS navigator is switched off.
3. For a 400W/500W series unit or GTN 6XX/7XX navigator, while on the power-up self-test page,
verify that the GDU 620 CDI displays the correct lateral and vertical deviation information. For a
GNS 480 unit, while it is going through its power-up sequence, verify that the GDU 620 CDI
displays the correct lateral and vertical deviation information.
4. Wait until the navigator acquires a position before proceeding.
5. Review the active alerts on the GDU 620 (if any) and verify that the GPS1 PPS FAIL (GPS2 PPS
FAIL if using GPS 2) alert is not present.
6. Create/activate a flight plan on the GPS navigation source.
7. Verify that the MFD is not displaying the message “NO GPS POSITION.”
8. Verify that the active waypoint displayed in the PFD WPT field is the same as the active waypoint
on the navigator.
9. Wait 1 minute.
10. Verify that the alert “AHRS1 GPS –AHRS1 not receiving any GPS information” is not displayed
on the MFD by pressing ALERTS and verifying all active alerts.
11. Verify that the flight plan is displayed on the GDU 620 using the flight plan (FPL) function.
12. On the GPS navigator, enter OBS mode.
13. Press CRS on the PFD.
14. Adjust the course using the PFD knob.
15. Verify that the course to the active waypoint changes as the PFD course pointer is rotated.
16. Exit OBS mode on the navigator.
17. If dual GPS receivers are installed, power off GPS 1 and power on GPS 2.
18. Select GPS2 on the CDI and repeat steps 6 through 15.
5.8.4 Navigation Receiver Interface Test

5.8.4.1 ARINC 429 NAV Receiver (to GDU 620)
The GDU 620 can receive bearing and deviation information from a navigation receiver. This check
verifies that the units are communicating.
1. Ensure that the external navigation receiver (VLOC1 for installations with dual NAV receivers) is
turned on. If there are dual NAV receivers installed, ensure the second NAV receiver is switched
off.
2. Select the navigation receiver (or navigation receiver 1) as the navigation source for the PFD CDI.
3. Tune the navigation receiver to a localizer frequency (for this check it is not necessary that a valid
localizer signal is being received).
4. Verify that the CDI on the PFD displays LOC (or LOC 1/LOC 2 for installations with dual
navigators).
5. If dual navigation receivers are installed, power off NAV 1 and power on NAV 2.
6. Select navigation receiver 2 on the CDI. Repeat steps 3 through 4.

Rev. V Page 5-111
5.8.4.2 Analog NAV Receiver (to GAD 43e)
NOTE
Prior to conducting this check, ensure that the GAD 43e has been calibrated to the NAV
receiver in accordance with Section 5.5.14.3.
The GAD 43e can receive bearing and deviation information from a navigation receiver with composite
and low-level deviation/flag outputs. The GAD 43e converts this information to ARINC 429 and sends it
to the GDU 620 for display. This check verifies that this interface is functioning correctly.
1. Ensure that the external navigation receiver (VLOC1 for installations with dual NAV receivers) is
turned on. If there are dual NAV receivers installed, ensure the second NAV receiver is switched
off.
2. Ensure that there is a valid attitude and heading display on the GDU 620.
3. Select the navigation receiver (or navigation receiver 1) as the navigation source for the PFD CDI.
4. Tune the navigation receiver to a VOR frequency (for this check it is not necessary that a valid
VOR signal is being received).
5. Verify that the CDI on the PFD displays VOR (or VOR 1/VOR 2 for installations with dual
navigators).
6. Using a VOR/ILS test set, generate a zero degree FROM radial VOR signal, and tune the NAV
radio(s) to the test frequency.
7. Adjust the bearing pointer until the deviation is centered and FROM is indicated.
8. Verify that the course pointer setting is 0 ± 4°.
9. Repeat steps 6 and 7 using VOR FROM signals at 90°, 180°, and 270°.
10. Verify that the course pointer is within 4° of the simulated VOR bearing.
11. Tune the navigation receiver to a localizer frequency (for this check it is not necessary that a valid
localizer signal is being received).
12. Verify that the CDI on the PFD displays LOC (or LOC 1/LOC 2 for installations with dual
navigators).
13. Set the course pointer to your current heading (i.e., straight up on the PFD CDI).
14. Using a VOR/ILS test set, generate a localizer and glideslope signal as specified in Table 5-35.
15. Verify that the course pointer deviation bar and glideslope indications are as specified in
Table 5-35.
16. If dual navigation receivers are installed, power off NAV 1 and power on NAV 2.
17. Select navigation receiver 2 on the CDI. Repeat steps 4 through 15.

Rev. V Page 5-112
Table 5-35 Localizer/Glideslope Checks
Test Set Setting (DDM) GDU 620 Indication
Localizer Glideslope Localizer Glideslope
Centered Centered
0.000 0.000
(within fuselage on aircraft symbol) (covering horizontal white line)
Half-scale right Half-scale down
0.078 Right 0.088 Down
(dev bar inside of first dot) (first dot covered by diamond)
Full-scale right Full-scale down
0.155 Right 0.175 Down
(dev bar inside of second dot) (second dot covered by diamond)
Half-scale left Half-scale up
0.078 Left 0.088 Up
(dev bar inside of first dot) (first dot covered by diamond)
Full-scale left Full-scale up
0.155 Left 0.175 Up
(dev bar inside of second dot) (second dot covered by diamond)
5.8.5 Autopilot Interface Test

The GDU 620 can interface with various autopilots. Before proceeding with the autopilot interface tests,
verify that the GDU 620 has been configured for the installed autopilot and flight director, if applicable, as
defined in Appendix Section E.3. Only those interfaces that are directly affected by the G500/G600 STC
are covered by this manual; if any other autopilot modifications were performed, they are outside the scope
of this STC and must be checked in accordance with the autopilot installation manual.
WARNING
It is important that the GDU 620 be properly configured in order to prevent signals from the
GDU 620 damaging the autopilot computer. Refer to Appendix Section E.3.
5.8.5.1 Autopilot Engagement Test

This section verifies that the autopilot can be engaged.
1. Power up the G500/G600 and other aircraft systems. Allow the GDU 620 to obtain a valid
heading, attitude, altitude, and GPS location (from the navigator).
2. Engage the autopilot. If the autopilot cannot be engaged, troubleshoot it in accordance with the
autopilot installation manual.
3. For installations utilizing the GAD 43 to provide attitude information, press AP TEST on the
PFD.
4. Verify that the autopilot disconnects and the servos disengage. For all other installations,
disengage the autopilot using regular means.

Rev. V Page 5-113
5.8.5.2 Flight Director Test
This section verifies that the flight director interface between the autopilot computer and the GDU 620 is
functional. This test is only required when the flight director is interfaced to the GDU 620 via analog or
ARINC 429, and if the GDU 620 supports the flight director. For dual G500/G600 installations with an
analog flight director, the flight director should be wired to each GDU, and each GDU 620 should be
configured separately for that flight director. For dual G500/G600 installations with an ARINC 429 flight
director, the flight director should be wired to GDU 620 #1 and crossfilled to GDU 620 #2. Refer to
Appendix Section E.3 for instructions on configuring the GDU 620 to display the flight director.
1. Activate the flight director with the autopilot in pitch/roll or heading/altitude mode. It is not
necessary for the servos to be engaged for this test.
2. Verify that the flight director is displayed on the GDU 620. If the flight director is not displayed,
troubleshoot using the guidelines in Table 6-3.
3. With the GDU 620 in Normal mode and the flight director displayed, command the flight director
to pitch up.
4. Verify that the command bars move up.
5. Command the flight director to pitch down.
6. Verify that the command bars move down.
7. Command the flight director to roll right.
8. Verify that the command bars move to the right.
9. Command the flight director to roll left.
10. Verify that the command bars move to the left.
11. Press Go Around, if present.
12. Verify that the command bars center laterally and move to command a climb.
13. If the expected movement of the command bars does not occur, troubleshoot using the guidelines
in Table 6-3.

Rev. V Page 5-114
5.8.5.3 Flight Director Offset Calibration (If Required)
NOTE
If an ADI with a flight director presentation is installed on the co-pilot’s side, the flight
director for this ADI must be aligned to its aircraft symbol before running this G500/G600
Flight Director Offset Calibration Procedure. Refer to the ADI/autopilot manufacturer’s
documentation for instructions on ADI flight director alignment.
NOTE
For ARINC 429 flight directors, the GDU 620 does not allow calibration of the flight
director offset. The offset should be adjusted on the autopilot system. Refer to Section 5.7
for any autopilot adjustments that may be required.
NOTE
Some autopilots have a flight director pitch adjustment that is used to correct for parallax
errors in mechanical steering horizons. If possible, correct any flight director offset using
the autopilot adjustment before making changes to the GDU 620 configuration.
This section describes how to correct any offset that may be present in the flight director command bars.
1. Center the heading bug on the GDU 620 by pressing the knob on the PFD.
2. Activate the autopilot in Heading and Altitude Hold mode.
3. Observe the position of the flight director bar in relation to the aircraft icon the GDU 620 attitude
indicator.
4. If the flight director command bars are offset from the aircraft icon in the pitch axis, take note of
the number of degrees of offset for adjustment.
Figure 5-51 Flight Director Command Bars
5. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the GDU 620.

8. Change PITCH V REF as needed. Note that the V/DEG ratio for the flight director is displayed on
the same page. In the sample screen shot, the PITCH V/DEG is 0.217. Changing the PITCH V
REF by 0.217 would move the flight director by 1°. Entering a negative PITCH V REF will move
the flight director down.
9. The resulting FD Pitch can be read at the bottom of the screen. Adjust the PITCH V REF until the
FD Pitch is 0.00 ± 0.25°.
10. Restart the GDU 620 in Normal mode and verify that the flight director is matched to the aircraft
icon.

Rev. V Page 5-115
11. For dual-GDU 620 systems, change PITCH V REF on GDU 620 #2 to the same value as PITCH V
REF on GDU 620 #1.
Figure 5-52 FLIGHT DIRECTOR Page
5.8.5.4 Altitude Preselector Test
NOTE
For dual G500/G600 installations that use the GAD 43e, the Altitude Preselector and
Vertical Speed Controller functions are connected through the GAD 43e to only the pilot’s
GDU 620. However, the co-pilot’s GDU 620 is also able to control and annunciate the
preselector and VS modes using crossfill. Any step that requires an action be completed on
the GDU 620 must be performed on the co-pilot’s GDU 620 to verify the entirety of the
interface. Any annunciation that is verified on the GDU 620 must be verified on both
GDU 620s.

Rev. V Page 5-116
5.8.5.4.1 S-TEC 55X Autopilot Without GAD 43e
NOTE
This test is applicable only for S-TEC autopilots that have the RS-485 altitude preselector
input connected to the GDU 620. The GDU 620 also must be configured for the altitude
preselector option. Reference Section 5.5.5.2 for instructions on configuring the GDU 620
for the altitude preselector.
This test verifies that the altitude preselector between the GDU 620 and the autopilot is functional. For
dual G500/G600 installations, the altitude preselector input to the autopilot is connected only to the pilot’s
GDU 620.
1. Power up the GDU 620 in Normal mode and wait until valid air data is displayed.
2. On the GDU 620, set the selected altitude to match the displayed field elevation plus
approximately 1000 feet.
3. Engage the flight director or autopilot in HDG mode. Press ALT and VS simultaneously to select
Altitude Select mode.
4. Verify that “ALT” and “VS” are displayed on the autopilot. If “ALT” is not displayed, the autopilot
is not receiving the RS-485 altitude preselector data from the GDU 620. Troubleshoot using the
guidelines in Section 6.4.
5. Disengage the autopilot.
5.8.5.4.2 Autopilot Using GAD 43e S-TEC ST-360 Emulation (S-TEC 55/55X/60-2/60
PSS/65)
This test verifies that the Altitude Preselector and Vertical Speed Controller functions provided by the
GAD 43e to the autopilot are functional.
1. Power up the GDU 620(s) in Normal mode and wait until valid attitude and air data is displayed.
2. On the GDU 620, set the selected altitude bug approximately 500 feet above the current altitude.
3. Engage the flight director or autopilot and arm ALT mode by pressing VS and ALT
simultaneously on the autopilot controller (“VS” and “ALT” should be displayed on autopilot
controller).
4. On the GDU 620, adjust the vertical speed bug to +1000 fpm.
5. Verify the flight director commands pitch up and/or the control wheel moves aft.
6. On the GDU 620, adjust the vertical speed bug to -1000 fpm.
7. Verify the flight director commands pitch down and/or the control wheel moves forward.
8. On the GDU 620, increase the BARO setting so the displayed altitude increases towards the
selected altitude bug.
9. As the selected altitude bug is approached, verify on the GDU 620(s) that the selected VS bug
automatically decreases towards zero.
10. After crossing through the selected altitude bug, verify on the autopilot that “VS” has extinguished
and “ALT” remains displayed.

Rev. V Page 5-117
5.8.5.4.3 Autopilot Using GAD 43e KAS 297B/C Emulation (King KAP 100/150 or KFC
150/275/325)
This test verifies that the Altitude Preselector and Vertical Speed Controller functions provided by the
GAD 43e to the autopilot are functional.
2. On the GDU 620, set the selected altitude approximately 500 feet above the current altitude.
3. Engage the flight director or autopilot.
4. Press and hold ALT on the GDU 620 to arm the selected altitude.
5. Press and hold VS on the GDU 620 to engage Vertical Speed mode.
6. Verify that “ALT” is displayed in white and “VS” is displayed in green on each GDU 620.
7. On the GDU 620, adjust the vertical speed bug to +1000 fpm.
8. Verify the flight director commands pitch up and/or the control wheel moves aft.
9. On the GDU 620, adjust the vertical speed bug to -1000 fpm.
10. Verify the flight director commands pitch down and/or the control wheel moves forward.
11. On the GDU 620, increase the BARO setting so the displayed field elevation increases towards
and through the selected altitude.
12. After crossing the selected altitude, verify on the GDU 620 that the green “VS” and white “ALT”
annunciations have extinguished. A green “ALTC” annunciation may appear briefly when
crossing through the selected altitude.
13. Verify on the autopilot that “ALT” is displayed.
5.8.5.4.4 Autopilot Using GAD 43e AA801A Emulation (Cessna 300B IFCS, 400B IFCS,
800B IFCS, 1000A IFCS)
This test verifies the Altitude Preselector function provided by the GAD 43e to the autopilot is functional.
2. On the GDU 620, set the current altitude to 500 ft and the target altitude bug to 1700 ft,
approximately 1200 feet above the current altitude.
3. Arm the selected altitude by pressing and holding ALT.
4. Verify the “ARMED” annunciation does not illuminate above the altitude tape on the GDU 620.
5. Engage the flight director (FD) on the mode select panel or autopilot (AP) on the autopilot control
unit.
6. Arm the selected altitude by pressing and holding ALT on the GDU 620.
7. Verify that “ARMED” is displayed on the GDU 620 above the altitude tape.
8. Readjust the selected altitude below the current altitude (300 ft).
9. Verify the “ARMED” annunciation remains.
10. Reset the selected altitude to 1700 ft, approximately 1200 feet above the current altitude.
11. Adjust the BARO setting so the displayed altitude increases towards the selected altitude.
12. Verify at 700 feet that the 1000-foot offset alerter annunciates, and at 1500 feet that the 200-foot
offset alerter annunciates.
13. After crossing the selected altitude, verify “ALT” annunciates on the autopilot mode selector panel
and “ARMED” extinguishes.

Rev. V Page 5-118
5.8.5.4.5 Autopilot Using GAD 43e United Instruments 5506L-S Emulation
(Collins APS-65)
This test verifies that the Altitude Preselector function provided by the GAD 43e to the autopilot is
functional.
3. Engage the flight director and arm ALT SEL mode. Verify that “ALT SEL” is displayed on the
autopilot mode annunciator and is not flashing.
4. On the GDU 620, adjust the selected altitude bug while observing the autopilot “ALT SEL”
annunciator.
5. Verify that the “ALT SEL” annunciator flashes while the selected altitude bug is being adjusted.
Return the selected altitude bug to approximately 500 feet above the current altitude.
7. After crossing through the selected altitude, verify on Autopilot mode annunciator that “ALT
SEL” has extinguished and “ALT” is displayed. The transition from “ALT SEL” to “ALT” may
occur before the selected altitude bug is reached.
5.8.5.4.6 Autopilot Using GAD 43e KAS 297 Emulation (Bendix/King KFC 200/250)
This test verifies that the Altitude Preselector functions provided by the GAD 43e to the autopilot are
functional.
2. Engage the flight director by pressing FD on the autopilot controller (“FD” should be displayed on
autopilot annunciator).
3. On the autopilot mode controller, operate the vertical trim switch in both directions and verify that
the flight director command bar moves accordingly.
4. Engage Altitude Hold mode by pressing ALT on the autopilot controller (“ALT” should be
displayed on autopilot annunciator).
6. Press and hold ALT on the GDU 620 to arm the selected altitude.
7. On the GDU 620(s), verify that “ALT” is displayed in white.
8. Press Preflight Test on the autopilot mode control panel.
9. On the GDU 620(s), verify that the white “ALT” annunciation is extinguished.
10. Re-arm the selected altitude (i.e., repeat step 6).
11. Press the autopilot go around (GA) switch.
12. On the GDU 620(s), verify that the white “ALT” annunciation is extinguished.
13. Re-arm the selected altitude (i.e., repeat step 6).
15. After crossing through the selected altitude, verify on the GDU 620(s) that the white “ALT”
annunciation is extinguished and the autopilot has engaged Altitude Hold mode. “ALT” should be
displayed on autopilot annunciator.

Rev. V Page 5-119
NOTE
A green “ALTC” annunciation may appear briefly on the GDU 620(s) when crossing
through the selected altitude.
16. Disengage the flight director.
5.8.5.5 Heading and Course Error Test
NOTE
With GDU 620 software v3.xx, if the GAD 43/43e is used to provide attitude information
to the autopilot, the autopilot will not engage while on the Autopilot Test page.
Consequently, the heading and course error tests should be run with the GDU 620 in
Normal mode. A suitable VOR/ILS test set will be required in order to provide valid lateral
flags during the test.
This section verifies that the heading and course error interface between the GDU 620 and autopilot
computer is functional. For dual G500/G600 installations, only the pilot’s GDU 620 is wired to the
autopilot, and the following instructions apply only to the pilot’s GDU 620:
2. Go to the Autopilot Test page.
3. Engage the autopilot in Heading mode.
4. On the GDU 620, set the HDG/CRS Test to ACTIVE. In Configuration mode, changes are made by
turning the outer and inner FMS knob on the lower right side of the display.
5. Set the Desired Heading to 10°.
6. Press ENT.
7. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves to the right.
9. Press ENT.
10. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves to the left.
NOTE
If the control yoke or stick moves in the opposite direction to what is expected, reverse the
LEFT/RIGHT polarity of the HDG+ setting on the Autopilot Configuration page. Refer to
Table 5-39 for a description of the autopilot configuration settings.

12. Press ENT.
13. Set the Lateral Flag and Superflag to VALID.
14. Set the Desired Course to 20°.
15. Press ENT.
16. Put the autopilot into NAV mode.
17. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves to the right.
19. Press ENT.

Rev. V Page 5-120
20. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves to the left.
22. Press ENT.
NOTE
If the control yoke or stick moves in the opposite direction to what is expected, reverse the
LEFT/RIGHT polarity of the CRS+ setting on the Autopilot Configuration page. Refer to
Table 5-39 for a description of the autopilot configuration settings.
Figure 5-53 AUTOPILOT TEST Page - HDG/CRS

Rev. V Page 5-121
Figure 5-54 AUTOPILOT TEST Page - Heading
Figure 5-55 AUTOPILOT TEST Page - Desired Course

Rev. V Page 5-122
5.8.5.6 VOR/Localizer and Glideslope Deviation Tests
NOTE
Consequently, the deviation tests should be run with the GDU 620 in Normal mode. A
suitable VOR/ILS test set will be required in order to generate suitable deviations during
the test.
This test verifies that the lateral deviation, vertical deviation, lateral flag/superflag, and vertical
flag/superflag interfaces between the GDU 620 and autopilot are correct. Throughout this section, set
either the flag or superflag status depending on which output from the GDU 620 is connected to the
autopilot. For dual G500/G600 installations, only the pilot’s GDU 620 is wired to the autopilot, and the
following instructions apply only to the pilot’s GDU 620. Refer to the interconnect drawing in
Appendix F.
1. Engage the autopilot in Heading/Altitude mode.
2. On the GDU 620 Autopilot Test page in Configuration mode, set the Lateral Deviation to
30% R.
3. Set the Lateral Flag/Superflag to VALID.
4. Put the autopilot into APR mode.
5. Verify that the autopilot moves the control yoke or stick to the right.
6. Set the Lateral Deviation to 30% L.
7. Verify that the autopilot moves the control yoke or stick to the left.
8. Set the Lateral Deviation to 0%.
9. Set the Lateral Flag/Superflag to INVALID.
10. Verify that the autopilot exits APR mode.
11. Set the Lateral Flag/Superflag back to VALID and put the autopilot back into APR mode if
necessary.
12. Set the ILS/GPS APRCH to ACTIVE.
13. Set the Vertical Deviation to 30% UP.
14. Set the Vertical Flag/Superflag to VALID.
15. Verify that the autopilot indicates that it is capturing or tracking the glideslope.
16. Verify that the autopilot moves the control yoke or stick aft.
17. Set the Vertical Deviation to -30% DN.
18. Verify that the autopilot moves the control yoke or stick forward.
19. Set the ILS/GPS APRCH to INACTIVE.
20. Verify that the autopilot indicates that it is no longer capturing or tracking the glideslope.
21. Set the Vertical Flag/Superflag to INVALID, the Vertical Deviation to 0%, and the Lateral
Flag/Superflag to INVALID.

Rev. V Page 5-123
Figure 5-56 Autopilot Test - Deviations
5.8.5.7 GPS Roll Steering Check

GPS roll steering is handled in one of three ways:
1. If the autopilot has an ARINC 429 roll steering input, the GDU 620 can provide ARINC 429 roll
steering directly to the autopilot.
2. If an external roll steering converter has been installed, the GDU 620 can provide ARINC 429 roll
steering to the converter, which then outputs an analog heading error signal to the autopilot.
3. The GDU 620 can provide the roll steering via the heading error output, taking the place of a
separate roll steering converter. The autopilot is left in Heading mode, and the GDU 620 varies the
heading error output to steer the autopilot.

Rev. V Page 5-124
5.8.5.7.1 ARINC 429 GPS Roll Steering Check
NOTE
This test verifies that the GPS roll steering interface between the GDU 620 and the autopilot is functional.
For dual G500/G600 installations, only the pilot’s GDU 620 is wired to the autopilot, and the following
instructions apply only to the pilot’s GDU 620:
1. On the GDU 620 Autopilot Test page in Configuration mode, set the GPS ANNUNCIATE and
GPS SELECT discrete outputs to ACTIVE.
2. Engage the autopilot in GPSS Roll Steering mode. If an external roll steering converter is used,
engage the autopilot in Heading mode and set the roll steering converter to roll steering.
3. Set the Bank Angle to 10°R.
4. Set Ground Speed to 50 KT.
5. Set GPSS Valid to VALID.
6. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick to the right.
7. Set the Bank Angle to 0°.
8. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick level.
9. Set the Bank Angle to 10°L.
10. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick to the left.
11. Disconnect the autopilot.
Figure 5-57 AUTOPILOT TEST Page - GPS Roll Steering Test

Rev. V Page 5-125
5.8.5.7.2 GDU 620 Analog GPS Roll Steering Check
NOTE
The heading error test in Section 5.8.5.5 should be successfully completed prior to
checking the operation of the GDU 620 analog GPS roll steering.
This check verifies that the input from the A/P HDG DATUM switch, if installed, is functional. This check
also verifies that the GPSS/HDG Control selection is configured correctly. This check can also be used to
verify the operation of the analog GPS roll steering interface between the GDU 620 and the autopilot,
although if the heading error interface is functional, there is no need to verify this interface. For dual
G500/G600 installations, only the pilot’s GDU 620 is wired to the autopilot, and the following instructions
apply only to the pilot’s GDU 620.
2. Use PFD CDI to select “GPS” as the navigation source on the HSI.
3. Depending upon the installation, either set the A/P HDG DATUM switch to the GPSS position or
press and hold HDG for GPSS.
4. On GDU 620 #1, verify “GPSS” displays on the PFD near the OAT display.
5. Verify the cyan heading bug is hollowed out on both GDU 620s.
6. Set the A/P HDG DATUM switch to the HDG position.
7. Verify that “GPSS” on the PFD is removed.
5.8.5.7.2.1 400W/500W Series and GTN 6XX/7XX Units
NOTE
The following steps are not required if the heading error test has successfully been
completed. These steps are included for information only.
NOTE
Due to the nature of the 400W/500W and GTN 6XX/7XX self-test operation, it may be
difficult to observe this behavior. It is recommended that the heading error test be used in
place of self-test operation.
For the GPS corresponding to the navigation source selected on the HSI:
1. Restart it in Normal mode.
2. Proceed to the Instrument Panel Self-Test page.
3. Ensure that GPSS displays in white text on the PFD.
4. Engage the autopilot in HDG mode. If possible, engage only the flight director and not the
autopilot servos.
5. If available, verify that the flight director slowly moves back and forth between a right bank and
wings level. If the flight director is not available, verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or
stick to the right.

Rev. V Page 5-126
5.8.5.7.2.2 GNS 480 Navigator
1. For the GPS corresponding to the navigation source selected on the HSI, do the following. Start it
in Ground Maintenance mode and go to the Autopilot Test page.
2. Ensure that “GPSS” is displayed in white text on the PFD.
3. Set the Roll/Steer to 10°R.
4. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick to the right.
5. Set the Roll/Steer to 0°.
6. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick level.
7. Set the Roll/Steer to 10°L.
8. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick to the left.
9. Disconnect the autopilot.
5.8.5.8 GAD 43/43e Adapter Attitude Check

This section verifies that the attitude interface between the GAD 43/43e and autopilot computer is
functional.
NOTE
For dual G500/G600 installations, only the pilot’s GDU 620 is wired to the GAD 43 and
the autopilot, and the following instructions apply only to the pilot’s GDU 620.
2. Go to the GAD page group.
3. On the GDU 620, activate the cursor and set Relay Position to Attitude Valid.
4. Set the Heading Valid output to Valid.
5. Engage the autopilot in PIT/ROLL mode (for autopilots without a ROLL mode, PIT/HDG is
acceptable).
6. Set the Roll Angle to 5° R.
7. Verify that the control yoke moves counterclockwise or the stick moves to the left.
8. Set the Roll Angle to 5° L.
9. Verify that the control yoke moves clockwise or stick moves to the right.
10. Set the Pitch Angle to 5° U.
11. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves forward.
12. Set the Roll Angle to 5° D.
13. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves aft.
14. Set the Relay Position to Attitude Invalid.
15. Verify that the autopilot disconnects.
16. Attempt to re-engage the autopilot.
17. Verify that the autopilot will not engage while the Relay Position is in the Attitude Invalid position.
18. Set the Relay Position to Attitude Valid.

Rev. V Page 5-127
Figure 5-58 GAD 43 - Adapter Attitude Check
5.8.5.9 GAD 43/43e Adapter Barometric Correction Check
NOTE
Most autopilots do not require barometric correction inputs for altitude preselect/capture
purposes. This test must only be performed if the autopilot is installed so that it receives
barometric correction information from the GAD 43/43e.
NOTE
The barometric pressure information from the actively-changing field is updated at a
once-per-second rate. There may be some lag between the time that the pressure is set and
the time it is updated to the autopilot computer.
NOTE
For troubleshooting issues with the operation of the autopilot with the G500/G600, refer
to Section 6.4.
This section verifies that the barometric correction interface between the autopilot computer and the
GDU 620 is functional.
2. Wait for the air data and attitude indications to become valid.
3. Adjust the GDU 620 barometric correction so that the altitude displayed on the PFD is a multiple
of 100feet (e.g., 500 feet, 1300 feet).
4. Select an altitude on the autopilot controller that is 1000 feet above the altitude displayed on the
GDU 620, and then engage (arm) the autopilot in Altitude Capture mode.
5. Slowly decrease the GDU 620 barometric correction so that the altitude displayed on the PFD
increases, to simulate a capture of the selected altitude.
6. Verify that the autopilot computer captures the selected altitude when you reach the selected
altitude as displayed on the GDU 620 PFD.

Rev. V Page 5-128
5.8.5.10 ARINC 429 Attitude/Air Data (S-TEC 1500/2100 Only)
NOTE
Interfacing to an S-TEC 1500/2100 autopilot requires a dual G500/G600 installation.
1. Power on the S-TEC 1500/2100 autopilot.

2. Start both GDU 620s in Normal mode.
3. Wait for the air data and attitude indications to become valid.
4. Verify that “ATT FAIL” is not annunciated on the autopilot.
5.8.5.11 Autopilot Mode Annunciations (KFC 225/275/325 only)

If the ARINC autopilot mode annunciations are being used, engage the autopilot and verify that “AP” is
displayed in green at the top of the PFD in order to verify that the autopilot annunciations are configured
and wired correctly.
5.8.5.12 GFC 500 Autopilot

The autopilot interface to a Garmin GFC 500 must be verified. Reference GFC 500 Autopilot with
Electronic Stability and Protection Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual (P/N 190-02291-00) for the
GFC 500 system post-installation checks. The following checks ensure that autopilot annunciations are
correctly displayed on the top section of the GDU 620 PFD and the flight director displays the correct
behavior between the GDU 620 and the G5 ADI. Complete the following procedure:
1. Power on the aircraft avionics. Allow the GDU 620 to obtain a valid heading, attitude, altitude, and
GPS location (from the navigator).
2. Engage the autopilot by pressing the AP button on the GMC 507. If the autopilot cannot be
engaged, troubleshoot it in accordance with the autopilot installation manual.
3. Verify that the same “ROL | AP* | PIT ALTS” autopilot mode annunciations are displayed on both
the G5 and on the GDU 620 PFD.
NOTE
“YD” will only be displayed (next to the AD) if the aircraft has a yaw damper installed
and configured.

5. Engage the flight director by pressing the FD button on the GMC 507.
6. Verify that the magenta flight director bars on the G5 are shown on the GDU 620.
7. Move the pitch wheel on the GMC 507 and verify that the flight director bars displayed on the
GDU 620 update accordingly and match the flight director bars displayed on the G5.
NOTE
Ensure the GDU 620 is not in SVT mode for this test.
8. Change NAV modes on the GDU 620 PFD by pressing the CDI softkey. Verify that the CDI bar on
the G5 correctly shows a magenta triangle for GPS or a green triangle for LOC.

Rev. V Page 5-129
NOTE
If a LOC fix is not available, the CDI bar on the G5 will not be shown.
9. When adjusting the ALT SEL knob and HDG/TRK knob on the GMC 507, verify that the altitude
preselect bug and the heading bug displayed on the GDU 620 PFD update correctly and match the
corresponding altitude preselect bug and heading bug displayed on the G5.
10. When adjusting the altitude preselect bug and heading bug on the GDU 620, verify that the altitude
preselect bug and heading bug displayed on the G5 update correctly and match the corresponding
bugs displayed on the GDU 620.
11. Place the GFC 500 in Indicated Airspeed mode by pressing the IAS button on the GMC 507.
Verify that the airspeed annunciation value on the GDU 620 updates correctly when changed from
the GMC 507 using the pitch wheel.
Verify that the airspeed annunciation value on the G5 updates correctly when changed from the
GDU 620.
12. Switch to Vertical Speed mode by pressing the VS button on the GMC 507.
Verify that the vertical speed bug and annunciation value displayed on the GDU 620 update
correctly and match the vertical speed bug and value displayed on the G5 when adjusted using the
pitch wheel on the GMC 507.
Verify that the vertical speed bug and annunciation value displayed on the G5 update correctly and
match the vertical speed bug and value displayed on the GDU 620 when adjusted using the VS
knob on the GDU 620.
13. Adjust the Barometric Pressure setting on the G5 until it matches the barometric setting displayed
on the GDU 620. Wait at least 5 seconds before proceeding with step 14.
NOTE
The G5 Barometric Pressure setting will be displayed in white text on a black background
when the BARO setting matches the value set on the GDU 620.
14. Change the barometric pressure setting on the GDU 620 PFD and verify that barometric pressure
setting on the G5 automatically updates to match the selected value on the GDU.
NOTE
The G5 barometric pressure setting will be displayed in black text on a cyan background
when the BARO setting is being adjusted from the GDU.
NOTE
If the barometric pressure setting is changed on the G5, it will not change the BARO
setting on the GDU 620. The G5 barometric pressure setting will be displayed in black text
on a yellow background when the BARO settings on the G5 and GDU 620 do not match.
To re-synchronize, set the G5 to match the GDU 620 and wait a short period of time.

Rev. V Page 5-130
5.8.5.13 GFC 600 Autopilot
The autopilot interface to a Garmin GFC 600 must be verified. Reference GFC 600 AFCS Part 23 AML
STC Installation Manual (P/N 190-01937-00) for the GFC 600 system post-installation checks. The
following checks ensure that autopilot annunciations are correctly displayed on the top section of the
GDU 620 PFD and the flight director on the GDU 620 behaves correctly. Complete the following
procedure:
1. Power on the aircraft avionics. Allow the GDU 620 to obtain a valid heading, attitude, altitude, and
GPS location (from the navigator).
2. Engage the autopilot by pressing the AP button on the GMC 605. If the autopilot cannot be
engaged, troubleshoot it in accordance with the autopilot installation manual.
3. Verify “ROL | PIT ALTS” are displayed on the GMC 605 and green lights are illuminated next to
AP, FD, and YD buttons on the GMC 605. If installed, verify that “ROL | ALT PIT” is illuminated
on the GI 285 mode annunciator panel.
4. Verify “ROL | AP | PIT ALTS” are displayed on the GDU 620.
NOTE
“YD” will only be displayed (next to the AD) if the aircraft has a yaw damper installed
and configured.

6. Engage the flight director by pressing the FD button on the GMC 605.
7. Verify that the magenta flight director bars are displayed on the GDU 620.
8. Move the pitch wheel on the GMC 605 and verify that the flight director bars displayed on the
GDU 620 update accordingly.
9. Adjust the altitude bug on the GDU 620 and verify that the ALTS value in the armed section on the
GMC 605 updates to the altitude bug value on the GDU 620.
10. Place the GFC 600 in Indicated Airspeed mode by pressing the IAS button on the GMC 605.
11. Move the pitch wheel on the GMC 605 and verify that the airspeed annunciation value on the
GDU 620 updates correctly.
12. Verify that the airspeed annunciation value on the GMC 605 updates correctly when changed from
the GDU 620.
13. Switch to Vertical Speed mode by pressing the VS button on the GMC 605.
14. Move the pitch wheel on the GMC 605 and verify that the vertical speed bug on the GDU 620
updates correctly.
15. Verify that the vertical speed reference value on the GMC 605 updates correctly when changed
from the GDU 620.

Rev. V Page 5-131
5.8.6 Traffic System Interface Test
The GDU 620 provides mode control and display data from various traffic systems. This check verifies
that the GDU 620 is configured correctly and is receiving and transmitting data to the TAS/TCAS/TIS
traffic system.
5.8.6.1 TAS/TCAS Traffic Interface Test
NOTE
For installations with TAS/TCAS traffic that interfaces with an ADS-B In device, refer to
Section 5.8.22.
NOTE
If the GDU 620 is configured for an external control (i.e., a display other than the
GDU 620 is controlling the traffic system), then steps 4 through 7 do not have to be
carried out.
NOTE
The Self-Test menu option will not be available if the traffic system is operating.
If an L3 Communications SKY497/SKY899 SkyWatch® sensor, a Honeywell (Bendix/King) KTA 810

TAS/KMH 820 IHAS/KTA 910 TAS/KMH 920 IHAS, an Avidyne TAS 620 (Ryan 9900BX TCAD), or a
GTS 8XX is connected to the GDU 620, the traffic interface should be verified as described in this section:
1. Select the Traffic Map page on the GDU 620.
2. Verify that no TAS/TCAS failure annunciations are shown on the traffic map (e.g., “NO DATA”,
“TRFC FAIL”, “NO TRFC DATA”, “DATA FAILED”, “FAILED”).
3. In the upper-left corner of the Traffic Map page, verify that the status of the traffic system is either
“TAS/TCAS: OPER” or “TAS/TCAS: STBY” (i.e., “TIS” should not be displayed).
4. Alternately, press STANDBY and OPERATE to change the mode of the traffic system. It may
take several seconds for the traffic system to change modes.
5. Verify that the mode of the traffic system can be changed.
6. Put the traffic system in Standby mode.
7. Press MENU.
8. Press ENT to initiate a traffic system self-test.
9. Verify that the traffic system runs a self-test and the self-test traffic pattern is displayed.

Rev. V Page 5-132
Figure 5-59 TAS TRAFFIC INTERFACE Page

Rev. V Page 5-133
5.8.6.2 TIS-A Interface Test - Garmin GTX 33( )/330( )/335
If a Garmin GTX 33( )/330( )/335 sensor is connected to the GDU 620, the traffic interface should be
verified as described in this section.
1. Select the Traffic Map page on the GDU 620.
2. Turn on the GTX 33( )/330( )/335 by pressing ALT on the GTX 33( )/330( )/335.
3. Verify that the amber “TIS FAIL” is not displayed in the upper-left corner.
4. Verify that the amber “NO DATA” is not displayed over the ownship symbol.
5. On the upper-left corner of the Traffic Map page, verify that the status of the traffic system is
either “TIS Standby” or “TIS Operating/Unavailable” (i.e., “TAS” should not be displayed).
NOTE
If the GDU 620 is configured for an external control (i.e., a display other than the
GDU 620 is controlling the traffic system), then the following steps do not need to be
carried out.
6. Pull the ADC breaker.

7. Verify that the air data fields have a red “X”.
8. Turn off all navigators to remove a valid GPS position to the GDU.
9. If a squat switch (or airspeed switch) to the GTX 33( )/330( )/335 squat switch input is present,
ensure that this is in AIR mode.
10. Alternately, press STANDBY and OPERATE to change the mode of the traffic system. It may
take several seconds for the traffic system to change modes.
11. Verify that the mode of the traffic system can be changed.
12. Close the ADC circuit breaker.
Figure 5-60 TIS OPERATING Page

Rev. V Page 5-134
5.8.7 Garmin GDL 69 Series Checkout Procedure
Locate the aircraft where there is a clear view of the southeastern or southwestern sky. XM Satellite Radio
satellites are located above the equator over the eastern and western coasts of the continental United States.
NOTE
The following section only verifies correct installation and activation of GDU 620
functions. It does not activate the GDL 69 series XM data link radio. Complete
instructions for activating the GDL 69 series XM data link radio can be found in
document P/N 190-00355-04.
NOTE
Steps 3 and 4 only need to be completed for GDL 69A (SXM) installations.
NOTE
If the XM Satellite Radio audio subscription has not been activated, audio is available
only on Channel 1. If the audio subscription has been activated, audio should be available
on multiple channels.
1. Go to the XM Information page in the AUX page group.

2. Verify that the Data Radio ID field has a valid value and is not blank.
3. Select the XM Radio page in the AUX page group.
4. Unmute the XM volume and verify that audio can be heard over the headsets. Adjustment of the
volume may be required.
Figure 5-61 GDL 69 SERIES DATA AND AUDIO Page

Rev. V Page 5-135
Figure 5-62 ACTIVE CHANNEL Page
5.8.8 ADF Interface Checkout Procedure

The GDU 620 can receive relative bearing information from an external ADF source, either directly or
through the GAD 43e.This check verifies that the units are communicating.
1. Ensure that the G500/G600, GAD 43e (if applicable), and ADF are powered on.
2. Press PFD on the PFD.
3. Repeatedly press BRG 1 until “ADF” is displayed as the source for the #1 bearing pointer.
4. Verify that the ADF window is not invalid (i.e., no red “X”).
5. Using an ADF test set, generate a bearing to a station.
6. Tune the ADF receiver to the same frequency as the test set.
7. Verify that the ADF bearing pointer indicates the correct relative bearing.
8. Verify correct display for three other bearings at 90° increments.
9. If the ADF flag is used in the installation, tune the ADF receiver to an unused frequency and verify
that the bearing pointer is removed from the PFD.

Rev. V Page 5-136
5.8.9 GDU 620 Crossfill Checkout Procedure (Dual G500/G600 Installations Only)
In dual G500/G600 installations, one GDU 620 can share information with the other GDU 620. This check
1. Ensure that both G500/G600 systems are powered on.
2. On the GDU 620 #1 MFD go to the AUX page and ensure that BARO Synchronization is ON.
3. Press BARO on GDU 620 #1 and use the knob to change the barometric setting.
4. Verify that the barometric setting on both GDU 620s change to the same value.
5. Press BARO on GDU 620 #2 and use the knob to change the barometric setting.
6. Verify that the barometric setting on both GDU 620s change to the same value.
5.8.10 EMI/RFI Check

An EMC check must be conducted once the G500/G600 is installed and all interfaces to external
equipment are verified to be correctly working. The EMC check verifies that the G500/G600 is not
producing unacceptable interference in other avionics systems and other avionics systems are not
producing unacceptable interference in the unit.
An example EMC Source/Victim matrix is shown in Figure 5-63.
1. Enter equipment installed in the aircraft into the Source row and Victim column of the form.
2. Apply power to all avionics systems except the G500/G600.
3. Verify all existing avionics systems are properly functioning.
4. Apply power to the G500/G600.
5. Remove power from all other avionics systems.
NOTE
Before applying power to the next system, wait for the current system start-up sequence to
finish.
6. Apply power and/or operate the systems listed on the fillable form, one system at a time.
7. Verify the G500/G600 properly functions.
a. Verify there are no related messages displayed.
8. Verify each radio properly functions.
a. For VHF COM radio, monitor one local frequency, one remote (far field) frequency, and one
unused frequency.
b. Verify no unintended squelch breaks or audio tones interfere with communications.
c. For each VHF NAV radio, monitor one local frequency, one remote (far field) frequency, and
one unused frequency.
d. Verify there are no guidance errors.
e. Verify no audio tones interfere with the station ID.
9. Verify all other avionics properly function.

Rev. V Page 5-137
‫‪VICTIM‬‬
‫)‪Communication Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Power Plant Instruments‬‬
‫‪Turn and Bank Indicator‬‬
‫‪Vertical Speed Indicator‬‬
‫‪Gov RPM Incr / Decr‬‬

‫)‪Navigation Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Magnetic Compass‬‬
‫‪Airspeed Indicator‬‬
‫‪Heading Indicator‬‬
‫‪Attitude Indicator‬‬
‫‪Radar Altimeter‬‬
‫‪Engine Relight‬‬
‫‪OAT Indicator‬‬
‫‪Transponder‬‬
‫‪Audio Panel‬‬
‫‪Eng Deicing‬‬
‫‪Hyd System‬‬
‫‪G500/G600‬‬
‫‪Pulse Light‬‬
‫‪TAS/TCAS‬‬
‫‪Anti Coll Lt‬‬
‫‪Fuel Valve‬‬
‫‪Generator‬‬
‫‪Pitot Heat‬‬
‫‪Altimeter‬‬
‫‪Autopilot‬‬
‫‪Ldg Lts‬‬
‫‪Pos Lt‬‬
‫‪Clock‬‬
‫܆ ‪Attitude Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫܆ ‪Airspeed Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Altimeter‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Vertical Speed‬‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Indicator‬‬
‫‪Turn and Bank‬‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Indicator‬‬
‫܆ ‪Heading Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Magnetic‬‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Compass‬‬
‫‪Clock‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪OAT Indicator‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Power Plant‬‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Instruments‬‬
‫‪SOURCE‬‬
‫‪Autopilot‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Navigation‬‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫)‪Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Communication‬‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫)‪Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Engine Relight‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Fuel Valve‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Pitot Heat‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Pulse Light‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Generator‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Pos Lt‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Anti Coll Lt‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Ldg Lts‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Gov RPM Incr /‬‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Decr‬‬
‫‪Eng Deicing‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Hyd System‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ‪Radar Altimeter‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪TAS/TCAS‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Transponder‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Audio Panel‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪G500/G600‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Figure 5-63 Example EMC Source/Victim Matrix‬‬
‫‪190-00601-06‬‬ ‫‪G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual‬‬

‫‪Rev. V‬‬ ‫‪Page 5-138‬‬
5.8.11 GAD 43/43e Adapter Interface Check
NOTE
The GAD 43/43e can provide various signals to the autopilot, and all of these interfaces
are verified as part of the autopilot checkout. Refer to Section 5.8.5.
NOTE
For dual G500/G600 installations, only the pilot’s GDU 620 is wired to the GAD 43/43e,
and the following instructions apply only to the pilot’s GDU 620.
Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode. Wait for the G500/G600 system to completely initialize, press
ALERTS and verify that there are no GAD 43/43e alerts.

Rev. V Page 5-139
5.8.11.1 GAD 43/43e Synchro Heading Check
NOTE
Not all equipment that utilizes synchro heading uses a Heading Valid signal. The steps
checking the Heading Valid output do not need to be carried out if the receiving equipment
does not utilize a Heading Valid signal.
This section verifies that the heading interface between the GAD 43/43e and interfaced equipment is
functional.
2. Go to the GAD page group.
3. On the GDU 620, activate the cursor and set Relay Position to Attitude Valid.
5. Set the Heading Valid output to Invalid.
6. Verify that the equipment interfaced to the GAD 43 Synchro Heading output flags the heading as
invalid.
8. Set the Heading Output to 90°.
9. Verify that the equipment indicates a heading of 090 (E).
11. Verify that the equipment indicates a heading of 180 (S).
13. Verify that the equipment indicates a heading of 270 (W).
15. Verify that the equipment indicates a heading of 360 (N).
Figure 5-64 GAD 43 Page - Synchro Heading Check

Rev. V Page 5-140
5.8.12 Weather Radar Interface Check
5.8.12.1 GWX 68/70(R)/75 Weather Radar Interface Check
This section verifies that the heading interface between the GDU 620 display and GWX 68/70(R)/75
weather radar is functional.
2. On the MFD, go to the Weather Radar page in the WX page group.
3. Press MODE.
4. Select Standby mode and wait for the warm-up to complete.
5. Press MENU.
6. Press ENT to go into the Radar Test mode.
7. Verify that the GWX 68/70(R)/75 begins sweeping and the test pattern is shown.
8. Verify that “STAB ON” displays in the upper-right corner of the MFD.
9. Press MODE to set the mode to OFF.
Figure 5-65 WEATHER RADAR Page

Rev. V Page 5-141
5.8.12.2 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Interface Check
This section verifies that the interface between the GDU 620 display and ARINC 708 weather radar is
functional.
1. Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode. For a dual G500/G600 installation, start both GDU 620s in
Normal mode.
2. On the MFD of each GDU 620, go to the Weather Radar page in the WX page group.
3. On one GDU 620, press MODE.
4. Select STANDBY and wait for the warm-up to complete.
5. Press MENU.
7. Verify that the radar begins sweeping and the test pattern is shown.
8. Press ALERTS/ADVISORY.
9. Verify that there are no WXR alerts.
CAUTION
Aircraft should be outdoors and personnel should not be in front of the weather radar
when it is radiating (i.e., when Weather mode or Ground mode is selected on the
GDU 620).
10. If stabilization is supplied to the radar, turn the radar to Weather mode and turn stabilization ON
using the CONTROL softkey group.
11. Verify that “STAB ON” displays in the upper-right corner of the MFD. If “STAB INOP” displays,
verify that stabilization is being supplied to the weather radar R/T.
12. Press MODE to set the mode to OFF.
13. Repeat steps 3 through 12 for the second GDU 620.
NOTE
If only one GDU 620 is installed, the following steps do not have to be carried out.
14. On each GDU 620, press MODE.

15. Select Standby mode and wait for the warm-up to complete.
16. On each GDU 620, press MENU.
18. On GDU 620 #1, press RNG UP to increase the range of the radar display.
19. Verify that the range on GDU 620 #1 changes and the range on GDU 620 #2 does not change.
20. On GDU 620 #2, press RNG UP to increase the range of the radar display.
21. Select a different range than GDU 620 #1.
22. Verify that the range on GDU 620 #2 changes and the range on GDU 620 #1 does not change.
23. On each GDU 620, press MODE to set the mode to OFF.

Rev. V Page 5-142
Figure 5-66 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Interface Check

Rev. V Page 5-143
5.8.12.3 WX-500 Stormscope Interface Check
This section verifies that the interface between the GDU 620 display and the WX-500 Stormscope is
functional.
Normal mode.
2. On the MFD of each GDU 620, go to the Stormscope page in the WX page group.
3. Verify there are no warnings displayed.
4. Press MODE.
5. Toggle between CELL and STRIKE modes using the softkeys.
6. Verify “CELL” or “STRIKE” appears in the Mode box at the top-right corner of the screen.
7. Press BACK.
8. On the MFD, press VIEW.
9. Toggle between ARC and 360 using the softkeys.
10. Verify the image switches between a 360° view surrounding the aircraft icon to an arc placed in
front of the aircraft icon.
5.8.13 Synthetic Vision Check (If SVT Enabled)
NOTE
It may take up to 1 minute for the synthetic terrain data to be displayed on the PFD. Until
SVT is active, the horizon display will be the standard blue over brown.
1. Ensure that the Supplemental Data Card specified in Table 2-3 is inserted into the bottom slot.
3. Wait for the G500/G600 system to initialize (i.e., attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude, and GPS
position become valid).
4. On the PFD, press PFD.
5. Press SYN VIS.
6. Press SYN TERR to turn on SVT.
7. Verify that there are no SVT alerts.
8. Verify that synthetic terrain data is displayed on the PFD.

Rev. V Page 5-144
5.8.14 TAWS Check (If TAWS Option Enabled) (G600 System Only)
NOTE
If the TAWS B map is not available (i.e., the terrain map is labeled “TERRAIN
PROXIMITY” or “TERRAIN-SVT”) then the TAWS option has not been enabled.
NOTE
The aural message “TAWS System Failure” will be annunciated if the TAWS system is
NOT functioning properly. If no audio message is heard, then a fault exists within the
audio system and the TAWS capability must be considered non-functional.
1. Ensure that the Supplemental Data Card specified in Table 2-3 is inserted into the bottom slot.
2. Start the GDU 620 in Normal mode and ensure that the audio panel is turned on.
3. Wait for the G600 system to initialize (i.e., attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude, and GPS position
become valid).
4. On the MFD, go to the TAWS B map in the Map page group.
5. Press MENU.
6. Select Test TAWS option.
7. Press ENT to initiate the TAWS test.
8. Wait until the TAWS self-test completes (5-10 seconds).
9. Verify that the message “TAWS System Test OK” is heard over the cockpit speaker.
5.8.15 Transient Voltage Suppressor Checks (Nonmetallic Aircraft Only)

If transient voltage suppressors (TVSs) are installed, correct installation of each TVS must be verified as
described in Section 8.3.1.

Rev. V Page 5-145
5.8.16 External Video Check
If an external video source is installed and connected to the GDU 620, check the video operation as
follows:
1. Ensure that the GDU 620 is in Normal mode.
2. Go to the External Video page in the AUX page group.
NOTE
If the orientation of the video image is not correct, the image can be rotated in
Configuration mode. Refer to Section 5.5.8.
3. If more than one video source is installed, ensure that “VIDEO 1” is selected.
4. Press SETUP.
5. Verify that the brightness, contrast, and saturation can be adjusted to provide an acceptable video
display.
6. Repeat for the second video source, if installed.
7. For full screen option, press FULL.
8. Verify display is accurate.
9. Display settings can be adjusted as needed by pressing SETUP.
Figure 5-67 External Video Display

Rev. V Page 5-146
5.8.17 Radar Altimeter Check
5.8.17.1 ARINC 429 Radar Altimeter (to GDU 620)
NOTE
The GRA 55/5500 and FreeFlight RA4500 radar altimeter have no pilot-initiated self-test
option. After the power-up sequence, verify no faults are detected and RA display is 0.
If a radar altimeter is installed and connected to the GDU 620, check the operation as follows:
2. To initiate the radar altimeter self-test, press RA TEST on the System Setup page in the AUX
page group.
3. Verify that “RA TEST” displays above the radar altitude display on the PFD, and the displayed
radar altitude goes to the value commanded during self-test. Refer to Figure 5-68.
Figure 5-68 Radar Altitude Display

Rev. V Page 5-147
5.8.17.2 Analog Radar Altimeter to GAD 43e
If a radar altimeter is installed and connected to the GAD 43e, and radar altitude is displayed on the
GDU 620, check the operation as follows:
2. Verify that radar altitude (RA) is displayed and indicating approximately 0 ft (except for the
Honeywell KRA 10/10A and Sperry AA-100/100A, which will not indicate radar altitude on the
ground – these will have the RA display removed entirely).
3. Pull the radar altimeter circuit breaker and verify that “RA FAIL” is displayed in yellow.
4. Close the radar altimeter circuit breaker and wait until a valid radar altitude is displayed.
5. To initiate the radar altimeter self-test, press RA TEST on the System Setup page in the AUX
page group.
6. Verify that “RA TEST” is displayed above the radar altitude display on the PFD, and the displayed
radar altitude goes to the value shown in Table 5-36.
Table 5-36 Radar Altimeter Tests

Radar Altimeter Indicated Altitude during Self Test (ft)
Collins ALT-50A 50 ± 5
Collins ALT-55B 50 ± 5
Honeywell KRA 10/10A 50 ± 10
Honeywell KRA 405 40 ± 15
Sperry AA-100 100 ± 20
Sperry AA-100A 100 ± 20
Sperry AA-200 100 ± 20
5.8.18 GSR 56 Iridium® Check
NOTE
When testing the GSR 56, the aircraft must be located outside and have an unobstructed
view of the sky.
NOTE
For additional information on using the GSR 56 features, refer to G500/G600 Pilot’s
Guide (P/N 190-00601-02).
NOTE
To use the Position Reporting feature of the GSR 56, a short burst data (SBD) Iridium
account is required. To use the Phone feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium voice account is
required. To use the Weather feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium RUDICS account is
required.

Rev. V Page 5-148
If the GSR 56 Iridium transceiver is installed and connected to the GDU 620, check the operation as
follows:
2. If position reporting is enabled, go to the Position Reporting page in the AUX page group.
3. Verify that the reporting status is not “Unavailable.”
4. If the Iridium phone is enabled, go to the Iridium Phone page in the AUX page group.
5. Verify that the Phone Status is not Unavailable.
6. Verify that a phone call can be placed.
NOTE
The following steps are mandatory only if GFDS weather is enabled. In order to receive
weather updates, the GSR 56 being tested must be registered and the registration access
code must be entered into the GSR 56 using the GDU 620.
7. Go to the first map page in the WX page group.

8. Verify that the map is labeled “GFDS WEATHER MAP 1.”
9. If “XM WEATHER MAP 1” is displayed, press MNU on the GDU 620.
10. Select the Display GFDS Weather option to change the page to display GFDS weather.
11. If the GSR 56 is registered, press MNU.
12. Select the GFDS Data Request option.
13. Verify that weather is displayed on the map. Refer to G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide for information on
requesting GFDS data.
Figure 5-69 Position Reporting
Figure 5-70 Iridium Phone

Rev. V Page 5-149
5.8.19 Miscellaneous System Checks
5.8.19.1 Meggitt (S-TEC/Cobham) Engine Instrumentation Display System (EIDS)
NOTE
A dual G500/G600 installation is required when interfacing to a Meggitt EIDS.
1. Toggle 1-2 on GDU 620 #1.

2. Verify that the EIDS display of GPS 1 or GPS 2 matches the source selection on GDU 620 #1.
3. Verify the DAU records ECTM data correctly. Reference the AMM or EIDS installation for more
information.
5.8.19.2 Fast/Slow Indication Check (PC-12) (G600 System Only)

1. Move the left Angle of Attack (AOA) transmitter vane to the fully up position.
2. Ensure that the fast/slow pointer on the GDU 620 (both GDU 620s, if applicable) moves to the
fully down (slow) position.
3. Move the left AOA transmitter vane to the fully down position.
4. Ensure that the fast/slow pointer on the GDU 620 (both GDU 620s, if applicable) moves to the
fully up (fast) position.
5.8.20 DME Distance Display Test

The GDU 620 can receive DME distance information from a DME transceiver. The GDU 620 can
optionally select the NAV source used to tune the DME, or place the DME in HOLD mode. This check
NOTE
Valid attitude or air data are not required for this test.

Rev. V Page 5-150
5.8.20.1 Installations with One NAV Receiver Tuning the DME
Normal mode.
2. Ensure that the GAD 43e, DME, and NAV receiver are receiving power.
3. Using a DME test set, select a NAV frequency and simulate a DME distance of 30.0 nm.
4. Tune the NAV radio to the same frequency as the DME test set.
5. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm is displayed on each PFD. Refer to Figure 5-71.
6. Tune the NAV radio to a different frequency.
7. Verify that DME distance display is dashed out on each PFD.
9. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm is displayed on each PFD.
NOTE
The following steps are only required if the installation is configured to use DME HOLD
from the GDU 620.
10. Select DME HOLD and verify that the DME distance of 30.0 nm remains displayed on the PFD.
11. Tune the NAV radio to a different frequency.
12. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm remains displayed on each PFD.
13. De-select DME HOLD and verify that DME distance display is dashed out on each PFD.
Figure 5-71 DME Distance Display - Single DME Tuning Source

Rev. V Page 5-151
5.8.20.2 Installations with Two NAV Receivers Tuning the DME
Normal mode.
2. Ensure that the GAD 43e, DME, and both NAV receivers are receiving power.
3. Using a DME test set, select a NAV frequency and simulate a DME distance of 30.0 nm.
4. Tune the NAV 1 radio to the same frequency as the DME test set and NAV 2 to a different
frequency.
5. Ensure that DME NAV1 is selected as the DME tuning source by pressing PFD, DME, and DME
NAV1. Refer to Figure 5-72.
7. On the PFD (either PFD for dual GDU 620s) select DME NAV2 as the tuning source by pressing
the PFD, DME, and DME NAV2 soft keys.
8. Verify that the DME distance display is dashed out on each PFD.
9. Tune the NAV 2 radio to the same frequency as the DME test set and NAV 1 to a different
frequency.
NOTE
The following steps are only required if the installation is configured to use DME HOLD
form the GDU 620.
11. Select DME HOLD by pressing PFD, DME, and DME HOLD softkeys.
12. Verify that the DME distance of 30.0 nm remains displayed on the PFD.
13. Tune the NAV 2 radio to a different frequency.
14. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm remains displayed on each PFD.
15. De-select DME HOLD and verify that DME distance display is dashed out on each PFD.
16. Tune the NAV 1 radio to the same frequency as the DME test set.
17. Verify that the DME distance display is dashed out on each PFD.
18. On the PFD (either PFD for dual GDU 620s) select DME NAV1 as the tuning source.
19. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm is again displayed on each PFD.
Figure 5-72 DME Distance Display - Dual DME Tuning Sources

Rev. V Page 5-152
5.8.20.3 Installations Utilizing Parallel DME Tuning (2x5, BCD, or SLIP Code)
In addition to one of the checks above, if the NAV receiver provides parallel DME tuning information to
the GAD 43e, the following additional check must be completed to verify the proper operation of the
tuning discretes:
Normal mode.
2. Ensure that the GAD 43e, DME, and NAV receiver are receiving power.
NOTE
If parallel tuning is used with the Collins DME-40/42, the tuning format must be
determined based upon the installation – the GAD 43e does not read the parallel tuning
discretes in this case.
3. Use a DME test set to select the first NAV frequency listed in Table 5-37 corresponding to the
tuning format used by the installation.
4. Simulate a DME distance of 30.0 nm.
6. Verify that DME distance of 30.0 nm is displayed on each PFD (refer to Figure 5-71).
7. Tune the DME test set to each of the remaining frequencies in Table 5-37 and repeat steps 5 and 6
for each frequency.
If a second NAV receiver supplies parallel tuning information to the GAD 43e, repeat steps 3 to 7 for that
NAV receiver.
Table 5-37 Parallel Tuning Frequencies
NAV Radio Test Frequencies (MHz)
2 x 5 Tuning Shifted BCD Tuning SLIP Code Tuning
108.05 108.00 112.05
108.15 108.05 112.15
108.25 108.15 112.20
108.85 108.25 112.25
108.95 108.45 112.35
109.80 108.85 112.45
109.85 109.05 113.25
111.85 110.05 114.25
112.85 112.05 117.25
113.85 116.05 --

Rev. V Page 5-153
5.8.21 Marker Beacon Display Test (Through a GAD 43e)
The GDU 620 can display inner, middle, and outer marker information from a marker beacon receiver. The
marker beacon display test verifies that the units are communicating.
NOTE
Valid attitude or air data not required for this test.
Normal mode.
2. Ensure that the GAD 43e and marker beacon receiver are receiving power.
3. Use a marker beacon test set to simulate an inner marker.
4. Verify that a white “I” is flashing on each PFD.
5. Use the test set to simulate a middle marker.
6. Verify that an orange “M” is flashing on each PFD.
7. Use the test set to simulate an outer marker.
8. Verify that a cyan “O” is flashing on each PFD.
Figure 5-73 Marker Beacon Display

Rev. V Page 5-154
5.8.22 ADS-B In Interface Test
If the installed system is configured to receive ADS-B In data (TIS-B and/or FIS-B) through an interface
with an ADS-B In capable unit (GTX 345 or GDL 88), the interface must be verified as follows:
2. On the PFD, verify that a green check is displayed for the ADS-B device in the Devices Online
section of the page.
NOTE
The following additional steps are recommended and may be performed as a ground check
if the aircraft is located within range of an FAA ground station and targets of opportunity
are available. If this is not the case, it is recommended that these checks be performed
in-flight within range of an FAA ground station.
3. Power off the GDU 620 and then power back on in Normal mode.
4. Select the ADS-B Traffic Map page on the GDU 620 MFD.
5. Turn on the interfacing ADS-B In capable equipment.
a. If the installation includes TAS/TCAS correlated traffic, also turn on the TAS/TCAS source.
6. Make sure there are no “FAIL” annunciations on the ADS-B Traffic Map page.
a. If the installation includes TAS/TCAS correlated traffic, also make sure the TAS/TCAS status
is either OPER or STBY.
7. Observe targets of opportunity from an ADS-B equipped aircraft or an FAA ground station.
8. Go to the FIS-B Weather Map page on the GDU 620.
9. Set the FIS-B Weather Map page to display multiple weather products. It may take up to
10 minutes after power on for the system to begin receiving FIS-B weather products.
10. Make sure at least one selected weather product displays a valid time stamp.

Rev. V Page 5-155
Figure 5-74 G600 SYSTEM STATUS Page
Figure 5-75 ADS-B TRAFFIC MAP Page

Rev. V Page 5-156
Figure 5-76 FIS-B WEATHER MAP Page
5.8.23 Final G500/G600 System Check
NOTE
The system ID for the installation is at the bottom of the Database window.
This section verifies that all G500/G600 systems are providing data to the GDU 620.
2. On the PFD, verify that the following information displays:
◦ Attitude and heading
◦ Airspeed, altitude, vertical speed, and temperature
3. On the MFD, verify that there are no active alerts or advisories. If active alerts or advisories are
present, refer to Section 6.3 for troubleshooting.
4. On the MFD, go to the System Status page in the AUX page group.
5. On the MFD, verify that the following information displays for each LRU listed:
◦ A green check for the status
◦ A valid serial number (not dashes)
6. Press DBASE to move the cursor to the Database window and verify that each database is current.
7. Verify the following volume levels are audible in a high cockpit noise environment during high
engine RPM:
a. For alert volumes, refer to Section 5.5.6.
b. For GTS 8XX volume, if installed, refer to Section 5.5.16.
c. GDL 69A (SXM) volume, if installed, refer to Section 5.8.7.

Rev. V Page 5-157
5.9 Placards and Switch Labeling
Not all G500/G600 installations that are limited to VFR operation only will require a placard. Refer to
Section 2.5.3.3 for details.
If any placards were relocated as a result of the GDU 620 installation, verify the following:
1. The font size of the new placard is the same as the old placard it is replacing.
2. The color of the new placard is identical to the color of the placard that it is replacing.
3. The text on the new placard is identical to the text on the placard that it is replacing (it can be
arranged differently as required by space constraints, but the wording must be the same).
If the new switch labels were added as a result of the G500/G600 installation, verify the following:
1. The font size is legible from the pilot’s seat.
2. The labels are readable in all ambient light conditions. In particular, the labels are readable with
ambient flood lighting in darkness.
If the G500/G600 installation is limited to VFR operation only, verify the following (if applicable):
1. The text on the placard reads, “AIRCRAFT LIMITED TO VFR.”
2. The font is at least 0.25 inches high.
3. The placard can easily be read from the pilot’s seat.

Rev. V Page 5-158
5.10 Flight Checks
5.10.1 General System Flight Check
During flight, the following items should be verified:
1. Display of attitude, airspeed, and heading on the GDU 620 while maneuvering. If the G5 ESI is
installed, verify that the attitude, airspeed, and heading on the G5 match what is displayed on the
GDU 620.
2. Display of attitude, airspeed, and heading on the standby instruments.
3. Navigation using each GPS and VLOC source on the GDU 620 CDI. For navigation receivers,
both VOR and ILS should be verified.
4. Audibility of the altitude alerter chime.
5. Display of traffic from any interfaced traffic system, if applicable.
6. Display of bearing from any interfaced ADF, if applicable.
7. Display of weather from the GDL 69 series unit, if applicable.
8. Control of GDL 69A (SXM) audio functions, if applicable.
9. Display of radar altitude. The radar altitude display should be verified at several heights AGL
throughout the operating range of the radar altimeter, if applicable.
10. Display and control of the weather radar, if applicable.
11. Display of DME distance. If applicable, each NAV radio should be used as a tuning source for the
DME.
12. Display of marker beacon information if suitable markers exist in the flight test area, if applicable.
13. Display of the fast/slow indication, if applicable.
5.10.2 Autopilot Flight Checks and Final Adjustments
NOTE
Any adjustments made should be reflected in the checkout log. Refer to Section 5.11.3.
After verifying the autopilot interfaces as described in Section 5.8.5, the autopilot must be flight tested and,
if necessary, adjusted for the particular airframe. This section provides general guidelines for verifying the
autopilot and flight director performance and also for making necessary adjustments.

Rev. V Page 5-159
5.10.2.1 Flight Director Performance
It is best to evaluate the flight director with the autopilot coupled in order to assess the performance of the
flight director versus the autopilot. Evaluate the flight director performance in level flight, turns, climbs,
and descents. Observe any excessive fluctuations in pitch or roll, as well as how closely the autopilot
follows the movements of the flight director.
The flight performance can be adjusted by changing the settings on the Flight Director Cal page in the
FCS page group while in Configuration mode. For dual G500/G600 systems, all flight director
configuration changes must be made on both GDU 620s.
Figure 5-77 FLIGHT DIRECTOR CALIBRATION Page

Rev. V Page 5-160
Table 5-38 Flight Director Configuration Settings
Parameter Description
Relative: Angles filtered in this setting are relative to the aircraft. Sets the filter to
PITCH FILTER
be applied to inputs regardless of A/C orientation.
(leave set at default
Absolute: Setting accounts for changes in aircraft body before applying the filter.
value)
Sets the filter to be applied to inputs including A/C orientation.
Sets the time in seconds for the flight director display to change from the current
PITCH FILTER TIME
value to the commanded value.
PITCH + Sets the polarity of the pitch response of the flight director.
PITCH V/DEG Sets the number of volts required for one degree of flight director movement.
Sets the maximum pitch up angle that the flight director can reach. The displayed
PITCH ANGLE MAX FD will not exceed this value even if a larger pitch up angle is received from the
autopilot computer.
Sets the maximum pitch down angle that the flight director can reach. The
PITCH ANGLE MIN displayed FD will not exceed this value even if a larger pitch down angle is
received from the autopilot computer.
PITCH V ref Sets the zero pitch reference point.
Relative: Angles filtered in this setting are relative to the aircraft. Sets the filter to
ROLL FILTER
be applied to inputs regardless of A/C orientation.
(leave set at default
Absolute: Setting accounts for changes in aircraft body before applying the filter.
value)
Sets the filter to be applied to inputs including A/C orientation.
Sets the time in seconds for the flight director display to change from the current
ROLL FILTER TIME
value to the commanded value.
ROLL + Sets the polarity of the roll response of the flight director.
ROLL V/DEG Sets the number of volts required for one degree of flight director movement.
Sets the maximum roll angle that the flight director can reach. The displayed FD
ROLL ANGLE MAX will not exceed this value even if a larger roll angle is received from the autopilot
computer.
ROLL V ref Sets the zero roll reference point.

Rev. V Page 5-161
5.10.2.2 Autopilot Performance
NOTE
The GAD 43/43e can provide synchro heading and yaw rate outputs. If the autopilot
system is interfaced to the GAD 43/43e, verify that turns are coordinated and that yaw
damp operation functions properly.
The autopilot performance can be adjusted by changing the settings on the Autopilot Configuration page
in Configuration mode. For dual G500/G600 systems, all autopilot configuration changes should be made
on the pilot’s GDU 620 only.
1. To evaluate the autopilot heading performance, center the heading bug and engage the autopilot in
HDG mode. Change the heading bug by at least 45°. The autopilot should follow the heading bug
and roll out smoothly, without undershooting or overshooting the selected heading.
2. To evaluate the autopilot course performance, engage the autopilot in NAV mode. Tune to a NAV
frequency that is out of range and select that NAV for display on the CDI, so that the GDU 620
invalidates the lateral deviation signal. Change the course by at least 45°.
3. The autopilot should turn to the new course and roll out smoothly, without undershooting or
overshooting the selected course.
Figure 5-78 Autopilot Configuration Page

Rev. V Page 5-162
Table 5-39 Autopilot Configuration Settings
Parameter Description
Selects whether the autopilot receives AC or DC heading and course error signals.
AC/DC
This parameter should not be changed.
HDG + Changes the polarity of the heading error signal.
CRS + Changes the polarity of the course error signal.
HDG V/DEG Changes the gain of the heading error signal.
CRS V/DEG Changes the gain of the course error signal.
Sets the minimum voltage that the GDU 620 will send to the autopilot.
V Min
Sets the maximum voltage that the GDU 620 will send to the autopilot.
V Max
V Ref Sets the zero reference for the heading and course error signals.

Rev. V Page 5-163
5.10.2.3 Roll Steering Performance
NOTE
GPS roll steering is handled in one of three ways: First, if the autopilot has an ARINC 429
roll steering input, the GDU 620 can provide ARINC 429 roll steering directly to the
autopilot. Second, if an external roll steering converter has been installed, the GDU 620
can provide ARINC 429 roll steering to the converter, which then outputs an analog
heading error signal to the autopilot. Third, the GDU 620 can provide the roll steering via
its heading error output, taking the place of a separate roll steering converter. The
autopilot is left in Heading mode, and the GDU 620 varies the heading error output to
steer the autopilot.
NOTE
If the analog roll steering function is used, the scaling of the output can be adjusted using
the Analog Roll Steering Scaling setting on the Autopilot Configuration page. If the
autopilot does not turn tightly enough while roll steering, increase the GPSS to HDG
DATUM Gain setting. If the autopilot turns too tightly while roll steering, decrease the
GPSS to HDG DATUM Gain setting.
1. Set up a GPS flight plan that includes at least two legs with an angle between them.
2. Set the CDI to display the active GPS.
3. Engage the autopilot in GPS Roll Steering mode.
4. If the autopilot uses the heading error input for roll steering, engage the autopilot in HDG mode.
5. Activate the GPSS switch via an external switch located near the autopilot control panel or by
pressing and holding the HDG softkey. Refer to Figure 5-79.
6. Verify that the autopilot flies the airplane smoothly through the turn between the two legs.
Figure 5-79 Active GPSS Switch Annunciation

Rev. V Page 5-164
5.10.2.4 Altitude Preselector Performance
5.10.2.4.1 Altitude Preselector Performance (S-TEC 55X)
This test is applicable only for S-TEC autopilots that have the RS-485 altitude preselector input connected
to the GDU 620 and have the Altitude Preselector option enabled in the GDU 620.
1. Set the altitude preselector on the GDU 620 to an altitude above the present altitude.
2. Engage the autopilot in Altitude Select mode by pressing VS and ALT simultaneously.
3. Set a positive vertical speed on the autopilot.
4. Verify that the autopilot climbs and captures the selected altitude.
5. Set the altitude preselector on the GDU 620 to an altitude below the present altitude.
6. Set a negative vertical speed on the autopilot.
7. Verify that the autopilot descends and captures the selected altitude.
5.10.2.4.2 Altitude Preselector Performance (Preselector is Part of Autopilot)

This test is applicable only for autopilots that have an internal Altitude Preselector function and are
interfaced to the GAD 43/43e for barometric correction information.
1. Set the selected altitude on the autopilot controller to an altitude above the present altitude.
2. Engage the Altitude Capture mode of the autopilot.
3. Set a positive vertical speed on the autopilot.
4. Verify that the autopilot climbs and captures the selected altitude.
5. Set the selected altitude on the autopilot controller to an altitude below the present altitude.
6. Set a negative vertical speed on the autopilot.
7. Verify that the autopilot descends and captures the selected altitude.
5.10.2.5 Autopilot Performance Check

Use the autopilot performance log shown in Figure 5-80 to document the autopilot performance before and
after the G500/G600 or GAD 43/43e installation.
NOTE
If autopilot performance does not adhere to criteria listed in the center column of the
autopilot performance log, the autopilot should be serviced in order to meet these criteria,
or customer acknowledgment of the performance condition should be obtained prior to
proceeding with the installation.
NOTE
This section applies only to installations in which the G500/G600 interfaces to the
autopilot.

Rev. V Page 5-165
G500/G600 AUTOPILOT PERFORMANCE CHECKOUT LOG
Completion of this form is required only for installations interfacing to an autopilot.
Aircraft Make and Model: Aircraft Registration Number:

Autopilot Make and Model:
Autopilot Performance Prior to G500/G600 or GAD 43/43e Installation
Date: By:
Function/Mode Criteria Notes

Selected pitch attitude held within ±2°.
Pitch Attitude Hold
Pitch attitude should not oscillate continuously.
Selected roll attitude held within ±3°.

Roll Attitude Hold
Roll attitude should not oscillate continuously.
Selected heading held within ±3°.

Heading Bug Coupling
Heading should not oscillate continuously.
Altitude held within ±100 feet.

Altitude Hold
Altitude should not oscillate continuously.
Selected Altitude Capture Overshoot during altitude capture should not

(Altitude Preselect) exceed 100 feet.
Selected vertical speed held within ±200 FPM.

Vertical Speed Hold
Vertical speed should not oscillate continuously.
Selected airspeed held within ±5 KIAS.

Airspeed Hold Indicated airspeed should not oscillate
continuously.
Lateral deviation from course should remain with
VOR Tracking 25% of full scale deflection once established on
course.
Lateral and vertical deviations from course/
ILS/LPV Approach glidepath should remain with 25% of full scale
deflection once established.
Capture performance before and after
VOR/LOC/GS Capture installation should be similar (assuming same
intercept angles and conditions).
Pitch and roll attitude held as specified by

Go-around
autopilot installation.
Flight director commands satisfy selected modes

Flight Director
and do not display excessive jitter or oscillation.
Yaw dampening performance before and after

Yaw Damp installation should be similar (assuming same
conditions).
General Notes
Figure 5-80 Autopilot Performance Checkout Log

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page 5-166
G500/G600 AUTOPILOT PERFORMANCE CHECKOUT LOG (CONTINUED)
Completion of this form is required only for installations interfacing to an autopilot.
Autopilot Performance Following G500/G600 or GAD43/43e Installation
By: Date:
Function/Mode Criteria Notes

Selected pitch attitude held within ±2°.
Pitch Attitude Hold
Pitch attitude should not oscillate continuously.
Selected roll attitude held within ±3°.

Roll Attitude Hold
Roll attitude should not oscillate continuously.
Selected heading held within ±3°.

Heading Bug Coupling
Heading should not oscillate continuously.
Altitude held within ±100 feet.

Altitude Hold
Altitude should not oscillate continuously.
Selected Altitude Capture Overshoot during altitude capture should not

(Altitude Preselect) exceed 100 feet.
Selected vertical speed held within ±200 FPM.

Vertical Speed Hold
Vertical speed should not oscillate continuously.
Selected airspeed held within ±5 KIAS.

Airspeed Hold Indicated airspeed should not oscillate
continuously.
Lateral deviation from course should remain with
VOR Tracking 25% of full scale deflection once established on
course.
Lateral and vertical deviations from course/
ILS/LPV Approach glidepath should remain with 25% of full scale
deflection once established.
Capture performance before and after
VOR/LOC/GS Capture installation should be similar (assuming same
intercept angles and conditions).
Pitch and roll attitude held as specified by

Go-around
autopilot installation.
Flight director commands satisfy selected modes

Flight Director
and do not display excessive jitter or oscillation.
Yaw dampening performance before and after

Yaw Damp installation should be similar (assuming same
conditions).
General Notes
Figure 5-80 Autopilot Performance Checkout Log

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page 5-167
5.10.2.6 Yaw Damper Operation
This check is only required if the GDU 620 or GAD 43/43e is used to replace an existing yaw rate sensor
to provide yaw rate information to the autopilot.
During flight, verify that the yaw damp function correctly operates.

Rev. V Page 5-168
5.11 Documentation Checks
5.11.1 AFMS
Ensure that the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) is completed and inserted in the AFM or
POH.
1. Fill in the required airplane information on the AFMS cover sheet.
2. In AFMS Section 4.6 (Autopilot Operations), fill in all applicable checkboxes corresponding to the
interfaces to the autopilot. More than one box may be checked, depending upon the installation.
These are further described below.
 This installation does not interface with the autopilot (basic wing leveling autopilot or no
autopilot is installed in the aircraft).
◦ Check this box if there are no interfaces between the G500/G600 system and the autopilot, or
if no autopilot is installed in the aircraft. No other boxes should be checked if this box is
checked.
 Course/NAV Selection coupling to the autopilot.
◦ Check this box if the course datum signal is connected to the autopilot.
 Heading Bug coupling capability to the autopilot.
◦ Check this box if the heading datum signal is connected to the autopilot.
 Roll steering emulated via the Heading mode.
◦ Check this box if an external GPSS switch is installed with the G500/G600 or if roll steering is
configured to be controlled via the GDU 620 HDG key.
 Roll steering capable autopilot.
◦ Check this box if the ARINC 429 output from the GDU 620 is connected to the autopilot.
 Altitude Preselector integrated with the autopilot.
◦ Check this box if the Altitude Preselect option is enabled (unlocked).
 Vertical speed bug integrated with the autopilot.
◦ Check this box if any of the following GAD 43e Altitude Preselector emulations are used:
King KAS 297B, King KAS 297C (any), or S-TEC 360.
 Flight director display driven from external autopilot or FD computer.
◦ Check this box if an external flight director is connected to and configured on the GDU 620.
 Flight director is not available with Synthetic Vision enabled.
◦ Check this box if the SVT flight director display in NOT enabled.
 A GAD 43/43e Adapter is installed in this aircraft.
◦ Check this box if a GAD 43/43e Adapter is installed in the aircraft.
 GAD 43/43e provides attitude to the autopilot.
◦ Check this box if the GAD 43/43e is connected to the attitude inputs on the autopilot and
configured via the GDU 620.
 GAD 43/43e provides yaw rate to the yaw damper.
◦ Check this box if the GAD 43/43e is connected to the yaw rate inputs on the autopilot and
configured via the GDU 620.
 GAD 43/43e provides baro correction to the Altitude Preselector.
◦ Check this box if the GAD 43/43e is connected to the baro correction input on the
autopilot and configured via the GDU 620.

Rev. V Page 5-169
 GFC 500 or GFC 600 is installed in this aircraft and the GDU 620 provides a means for mode
annunciation, altitude selection, vertical speed selection, heading bug selection, and navigation
source selection.
◦ Check this box if a GFC 500 or GFC 600 is installed and connected to the GDU 620.
3. Insert the completed AFMS into the AFM or POH.
5.11.2 ICA
Ensure that the aircraft information on the ICA is filled in completely and inserted into the aircraft
permanent records.
1. Fill in the aircraft make, model, registration number, and serial number information on the cover of
the ICA (P/N 190-00601-00).
2. In the ICA Appendix A, fill in the locations of all LRUs that were installed as part of the
G500/G600 installation. Also, sketch the location of the wire runs for the G500/G600 LRUs.
3. Insert the completed ICA in the aircraft permanent records.
5.11.3 Configuration and Checkout Log

A configuration log and checkout log(s) must be completed and maintained with the aircraft permanent
records. The AML STC Configuration Log, with fillable fields and checkboxes, is available on the Dealer
Resource Center on Garmin’s website. If the aircraft had a dual G500/G600 installation, a separate
configuration and checkout log must be completed for the second system.
5.11.3.1 Aircraft Documentation Checklist (Mitsubishi MU-2B Models Only) (G600 System
Only)
For MU-2B aircraft operations that are subject to the requirements of SFAR 108, refer to Garmin
document G600 MU-2B Checklist Changes (P/N 190-00601-20).
This document describes changes to the MU-2B checklists that have been accepted by the FAA MU-2B
Flight Standardization Board. Operators of MU-2B aircraft may utilize this document as a means to
incorporate checklist changes resulting from the installation of the G600 system. Garmin document G600
MU-2B Checklist Changes (P/N 190-00601-20, Rev. 1) was accepted by the AEG Flight Standardization
Board on July 13, 2011.

Rev. V Page 5-170
G500/G600 CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT LOG
Date: By:
Installation Information
Single GDU 620 Dual GDU 620 (#1) Dual GDU 620 (#2)
Aircraft Model: Aircraft S/N:
Unit Part Number Serial Number Mod Level
GDU 620 011-01264-

N/A GRS 77 011-00868-
N/A GSU 75 011-03094-
N/A GSU 75B 011-03094-
GMU 44 011-00870-
N/A GDC 74A 011-00882-
N/A GDC 74B 011-01110-
GTP 59 011-00978-
N/A GAD 43 011-01970-
N/A GAD 43e 011-02349-
Unit Part Number Serial Number Panel Tilt Lighting

N/A 4300-4( ) 4300-4 ° V
4300-( ) 4200- ° V
Unit Part Number Serial Number Lighting

N/A 4300-4( ) 4300-4 V
Equipment Location
For each unit listed below, record the fuselage station and provide a brief description of the location.
Unit Station (CG) Description of Location

GDU 620 in.
N/A GRS 77 in.

GMU 44 in.
N/A GDC 74( ) in.

GTP 59 in.
N/A GAD 43/43e in.
N/A MD240 in.
N/A GSU 75(B) in.

Autopilot Performance Baseline
The autopilot performance baseline is required only if the GAD 43/43e is installed to provide attitude to the autopilot.
N/A Autopilot performance baseline completed
Figure 5-81 G500/G600 System Configuration and Checkout Log

Sheet 1 of 7

Rev. V Page 5-171
G500/G600 CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT LOG (CONTINUED)
Configuration
System Configuration
Cross-Side GDU: Present Not Present Type:
AHRS: Present Not Present Type:
ADC: Present Not Present Type:
GPS 1: Present Not Present Type:
GPS 2: Present Not Present Type:
NAV 1: Present Not Present Type:
NAV 2: Present Not Present Type:
ADF: Present Not Present Type: + Superflag

Traffic/ADS-B: Present Not Present Type: + TAS/TCAS/TCAD
+ External Control
Data Link: Present Not Present Type:
Weather Radar: Present Not Present Type:
Adaptor: Present Not Present Type:
Iridium: Present Not Present Type:

Radar Altimeter: Present Not Present Type:
Fast/Slow: Present Not Present Type:
Lightning: Present Not Present Type:
Airframe Configuration
PFD MFD
Metric
DIS. SPD: Nautical Imperial Metric DIS. SPD: Nautical Imperial
ALT. VS: FEET ALT. VS: FEET
VS TAPE RANGE: 2000 3000 4000 Aircraft Icon:
IAS TAPE: Basic Advanced GDL 69A (SXM) Audio

ADI ROLL POINTER: Sky Ground Mute Speed: Off
VS MINIMUM: OFF Alerts
VS MAXIMUM: OFF Alt. Alerter: Off Normal High Perf
Notes

Sheet 2 of 7

Rev. V Page 5-172
Configuration (Continued)
Airspeed Configuration Lighting Configuration
BASIC N/A BRIGHTNESS
Data Source:
Display Key
Vso : Vx:
Input Source
Vs1 : Vy:
Minimum Level
Vfe: Vle:
Response Time:
Vno: Vmca:
Slope:
Vne: Vyse:
Offset:
Glide: Vne:
Vr: Vne (pwr off): OFF Key Backlight Cutoff: N/A
Photo Slope: N/A
ADVANCED N/A
Photo Transition: N/A
Arc Data Sources:
Photo Offset: N/A
Marking Data Sources:
Overspeed Data Sources: Manifest Configuration

Vne/Vmo Table Source: GDU 620 006-B v.
Arc Ranges
N/A GDC 74( ) 006-B0261- v.
Red (Low Speed): Off On Max:
N/A GDC 74( ) FPGA 006-C0055- v.
White: Off On Min: Max:
N/A GSU 75(B) ADC 006-B1838- v.
Half-White: Off On Min: Max:
N/A GSU 75(B) AHRS 006-B1838- v.
White/Green Off On Min: Max:
GMU 44 006-B0224- v.
Green: Off On Min: Max:
GMU 44 FPGA 006-C0048- v.
Yellow: Off On Min: Max:
N/A GRS 77 006-B0223- v.
Vne / Vmo / Mmo: Off On Min:
N/A GRS 77 FPGA 006-C0049- v.
Markings
N/A GAD 43 006-B0876- v.
White Triangle: Off On
N/A GAD 43e 006-B1176- v.
Red Bar: Off On Feature Configuration
Blue Bar: Off On Airframe: Fixed Wing
Red/White Bar: Off On Charts: None FliteCharts ChartView
Vle: Off On Altitude Preselect: Enabled Disabled
Overspeeds Synthetic Vision: Enabled Disabled
Mmo: Mmo Level: Weather Radar: Disabled
Vne / Vmo GAD 43/43e: Enabled Disabled
1. Alt: IAS: 6. Alt: IAS: External Video: Enabled Disabled
2. Alt: IAS: 7. Alt: IAS: Rad Alt (A429): Enabled Disabled
3. Alt: IAS: 8. Alt: IAS: DFCS 4: Enabled Disabled
4. Alt: IAS: 9. Alt: IAS: Fast/Slow: Enabled Disabled
5. Alt: IAS: 10. Alt: IAS: TAWS: N/A Enabled Disabled
RVSM Aircraft: N/A

Sheet 3 of 7

Rev. V Page 5-173
Audio Alert Configuration Video Configuration N/A

Volume Adjustment: dB VIDEO 1
Voice: Male Female Configured: Yes No
Format: Auto NTSC PAL

ARINC 429 Port Configuration
Rotation: °
In 1: High Input:
VIDEO 2
In 2: Low Input:
Configured: Yes No
In 3: Low High Input: GPS1
Format: Auto NTSC PAL
In 4: Low High Input:
Rotation: °
In 6: Low High Input: Discretes Configuration
In 7: Low High Input: P6201-23:
In 8: Low High Input: P6201-24:
Out 1: Low High Output: GPS Navigator P6201-25:
Out 2: Low High Output: P6201-26:
P6203-45:
ARINC 708 Port Configuration
P6203-46:
P6203-47:
RS-232 Port Configuration Airspeed Discrete Outputs Configuration
CHNL 5: Off SL30 Stormscope
Active Condition Value No Data State
CHNL 6: Off GSR56 Stormscope
1: Active Inactive
CHNL 8: Off Shadin-alt Stormscope
2: Active Inactive
RS-485 Port Configuration 3: Active Inactive
CHNL 1: 4: Active Inactive
CHNL 2: 5: Active Inactive
CHNL 3:
ADC Configuration
CHNL 4:
OAT: GTP 59 RVSM Aircraft: N/A
Terrain / TAWS / SVT Configuration GDL 69 Series Configuration N/A

Terrain Proximity Antenna Gain (lower): dB
Terrain Alerting Configuration: Terrain-SVT Cable Loss (nominal): dB
TAWS-B GDL 69 Series activated: Yes No
Ext. 7HUUDLQ Not Installed Installed (Garmin)
$OHUWLQJTAWS:
Installed (Other) Installed (HSDB)
Airport Criteria
Runway Surface: N/A
Minimum Length: N/A

Sheet 4 of 7

Rev. V Page 5-174
Autopilot Configuration N/A GAD 43/43e Configuration N/A

Present Not Present CONFIGURATION
Autopilot:
Type: Gyro Emulation Type:
N/A Present Not Present Yaw Rate Scale Factor:

+ Mode Annunciations
Type:
GAD 43e Configuration N/A
Present Not Present
Altitude Preselect: Present Not Present
Type: Altitude Preselect:
Type:
CONFIGURATION (ACTIVE SETTINGS)
Present Not Present
AC/DC: AC DC Radar Altimeter:
Type:
HDG+: RIGHT LEFT
Present Not Present
Out 3: Low High DME:
Type:
Out 4: Low High
Tuning Source: N/A #1 #2
ANALOG ROLL STEERING (ACTIVE SETTINGS)
(GDU 620 version 3.00 or later) Tuning Format: N/A CSDB
GPSS to Heading Datum Gain: #1 #2
KAS 297B Gain Straps: N/A
GPSS/HDG Control: #3 #4
ALTITUDE CAPTURE
GAD 43e Calibration N/A
Altitude Threshold: On Off
NAV1 N/A NAV2 N/A
Time Threshold: On Off
Localizer Calibrated: 1 Gain: 2 Gain:
Re-arm Threshold: On Off
VOR Calibrated: 1 2
Flight Director Configuration N/A

GWX Weather Radar Configuration N/A
Present Not Present Type:
Pitch Trim: ° Roll Trim: °
CONFIGURATION (ACTIVE SETTINGS)
Discrete Enable: Enabled Disabled ARINC 708 Weather Radar Configuration N/A
SVT FD Display: Enabled Disabled Display Head: #1 #2
SVT FD Pitch Scaling: Radar Mode: Standby Test WXR On
Flight Director Calibration N/A GTS Configuration

CONFIGURATION (ACTIVE SETTINGS) Refer to GTS 8XX Installation Manual (P/N 190-00993-0X
or P/N 190-01279-00).
Absolute Absolute
Pitch Filter: Roll Filter: Iridium Configuration N/A
Relative Relative
Phone: Enabled Disabled
Pitch Filter Time: Roll Filter Time:
GFDS Weather: Enabled Disabled
Pitch+: Up Down Roll+: Left Right
RUDICS Number:
Pitch V/Deg: Roll V/Deg:
POSITION REPORTING [ N/A ] Enabled Disabled
Pitch Angle Max: Roll Angle Max:
Report Type: Standard AFF
Pitch Angle Min:
Off Automatic
Pitch V ref: Roll V ref: Period:
N/A Every minute(s)

Sheet 5 of 7

Rev. V Page 5-175
Checkout
AHRS/GMU Calibration Ground Checks (Continued)

Pitch/roll offset completed SYSTEM INTERFACE CHECKS (CONTINUED)
Magnetometer calibration completed Autopilot Checks N/A

N/A Heading offset completed Autopilot engagement check
Engine run-up test passed N/A Flight director check

Magnetic interference test passed N/A FD offset calibration
N/A Altitude preselect check

Ground Checks
Heading and course error check
DATABASE CHECKS
VLOC and GS deviation check
Jeppesen NAV data current
GPS roll steering check
Electronic charts current
N/A GAD 43/43e attitude
Terrain data current
N/A GAD 43/43e baro correction
PITOT-STATIC, ADC, AND TAPE CHECKS
N/A ARINC 429 attitude/air data
Static system and altimeter checked per CFR 91.411
N/A Traffic system interface checked
Airspeed tape settings checked
N/A GDL 69 Series interface checked
Airspeed accuracy checked
N/A ADF interface checked
N/A GDU 620 cross-fill checked

GENERAL CHECKS
N/A External video checked
EMI/RFI Check: Pass Fail
N/A GSR 56 Iridium functions checked
N/A All placards relocated
N/A Radar altimeter checked
N/A All labels are readable
N/A Meggitt EIDS checked
N/A VFR Only placard installed
GAD 43/43e Interface checks N/A
N/A TVS operation checked
N/A Autopilot disengagement checked
OPTIONAL FEATURES
N/A Synchro heading checked
N/A SVT checked
N/A DME distance display checked
N/A TAWS checked
SYSTEM INTERFACE CHECKS
GPS receiver interface checked
N/A NAV receiver interface checked
Notes

Sheet 6 of 7

Rev. V Page 5-176
Checkout (Continued)
Flight Checks Flight Checks (Continued)

GENERAL SYSTEM CHECKS AUTOPILOT CHECKS N/A
Primary Attitude, Heading, and Airspeed N/A Flight Director Performance
Standby Attitude, Heading, and Airspeed Autopilot Performance

GPS1 Navigation N/A FD Offset Performance
N/A GPS2 Navigation N/A GAD 43/43e Autopilot Performance

N/A NAV1 Navigation N/A GAD 43/43e Attitude
N/A NAV2 Navigation N/A GAD 43/43e Yaw Damper Operation

N/A Altitude Alerter Audibility N/A Altitude Preselect Check
N/A Traffic Display VLOC and GS Deviation Check
N/A ADF Bearing Display N/A GPS Roll Steering Check

N/A GDL 69 Series Weather Display N/A GAD 43/43e Baro Correction
N/A GDL 69A (SXM) Audio Control N/A GAD 43/43e Heading
N/A GSR 56 Iridium Functions N/A ARINC 429 Attitude/Air Data
N/A Radar Altimeter Display
Documentation Checks
N/A Weather Radar Control and Display
AFMS completed and in POH/AFM
N/A DME Distance Display
ICA completed and included in aircraft records
N/A Marker Beacon Display
N/A Other Aircraft documentation completed
N/A Fast/Slow Information Display
Final System Check
Notes

Sheet 7 of 7

Rev. V Page 5-177
6 TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 GMU 44 Magnetometer Troubleshooting ......................................................................................6-2

6.1.1 Common Causes for Failures of the Magnetometer Interference Test ..................................6-2
6.1.2 Examples of Magnetic Interference Problems .......................................................................6-3
6.2 G500/G600 Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................6-5
6.3 G500/G600 Alerts ...........................................................................................................................6-8
6.4 Autopilot Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................6-17
6.5 Mid-Continent Standby ADI System (if installed) .......................................................................6-22
6.6 Contacting Garmin for Assistance ................................................................................................6-23
This section provides information to assist troubleshooting if problems occur with a G500/G600
installation.

Rev. V Page 6-1
6.1 GMU 44 Magnetometer Troubleshooting
When performing a magnetic interference survey, numerous issues may arise. This section lists some
common causes for failures of the Magnetometer Interference Test and a description of some of the things
that can be done to remedy them.
6.1.1 Common Causes for Failures of the Magnetometer Interference Test

6.1.1.1 Electrical Current Return Paths
If electrical loads are grounded through the airframe, the returning electrical current will flow through the
airframe toward the alternator, generator, or battery. If the magnetometer lies along this current return path,
the current can cause significant magnetic interference. Electrical current return paths are the most
common cause of magnetic interference issues. Common examples of this problem are the navigation
lights at the wingtips for wing-mounted magnetometers or the strobe light on the tail for vertical stabilizer-
mounted magnetometers.
Before making changes to the aircraft, isolate the particular electrical load that is causing the interference
by running the GMU 44 Location Survey Tool while turning the load on and off or by running the
Magnetometer Interference Test with the load on and again with it off.
To correct the problem, ground the electrical load through a wire rather than through the airframe. The
ground wire should run into the fuselage for wing-mounted magnetometers so that the return current no
longer flows through the airframe past the magnetometer. Ideally, this ground wire should be routed beside
the power wire for that electrical load. This maximizes cancellation of the associated magnetic field that is
generated by the current.
6.1.1.2 Nearby Electrical Loads

Large electrical loads that are close to the magnetometer can generate significant magnetic interference. It
is important to install the GMU 44 using the guidelines provided in Section 2.5.11.5 and Table 2-13.
6.1.1.3 Ferromagnetic Materials

Ferromagnetic materials can become magnetized and cause magnetic interference. It is important to use
nonmagnetic materials to mount the GMU 44 and replace any magnetic fasteners within 20 inches
(0.5 meters) with nonmagnetic equivalents (e.g., replace zinc-plated steel screws used to mount wing
covers or wingtips with nonmagnetic stainless steel screws).

Rev. V Page 6-2
6.1.2 Examples of Magnetic Interference Problems
In order to isolate the cause of the magnetic interference, first review the results from the GMU 44
Location Survey Tool, as described in Appendix G. Compare the survey results to the detailed test
sequence to identify which item caused the failure. Two examples of common survey failures are shown in
Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2.
The cause of both of the interference events recorded in Figure 6-1 was determined to be electrical current
return paths through the airframe, as described in Section 6.1.1.1. Two options were available at this point:
1. Run new ground wires for the pitot heat, strobe light, and NAV light.
2. Choose a different location for the GMU 44.
Since it was determined that running new ground return wires through the wing would be difficult, the
GMU 44 was relocated to more suitable location in the aft fuselage.
INTERFERENCE FROM WINGTIP NAVIGATION AND STROBE LIGHTS

INTERFERENCE FROM PITOT HEAT
Figure 6-1 Magnetic Interference Example #1

Rev. V Page 6-3
The cause of the interference event recorded in Figure 6-2 was determined to be an electrical current return
path through the airframe, as described in Section 6.1.1.1. The power return for the strobe light power
supply was through the chassis of the power supply (the design for this power supply did not have a
separate connection for a power ground). To correct the problem, the power supply was replaced with a
new power supply that had a separate power ground that was isolated from the chassis. A new ground wire
was run from the strobe light power supply and attached to the airframe forward of the GMU 44.
INTERFERENCE FROM VERTICAL STABILIZER STROBE LIGHT
Figure 6-2 Magnetic Interference Example #2

Rev. V Page 6-4
6.2 G500/G600 Troubleshooting
Table 6-1 GDU 620 Troubleshooting Guide
Problem Cause Solution
Ensure power is properly wired to the GDU 620 and the
Improper wiring; circuit breaker open.
Unit does not power up – blank circuit breaker is closed.
screen. Ensure that unit is not in Manual Intensity Control mode
Unit intensity turned down.
with the intensity turned down.
All expected configuration pages are Insert the Installer Unlock Card (P/N 010-00769-60) into
An Installer Unlock Card is not inserted into the GDU 620.
not displayed. the bottom slot of the GDU 620 and cycle power.
Ensure that the ADC RS-232 connection to the GDU 620
The ADC OAT probe type shows up
The RS-232 connection to the ADC is not working. is properly wired, and ensure that the ADC or ADAHRS
as “UNKNOWN”.
circuit breaker is closed.
When loading software, the LRU The software loader card is installed in the bottom slot of Insert the loader card in the top slot and cycle power to the
software is not being displayed on the the GDU 620. GDU.
Software Upload page. The software loader card contains no information. Repeat the process for making the Software Loader Card.
Configuration errors are displayed on
Update the configuration module– Refer to
power-up, before the GDU 620 enters The configuration module has not been updated.
Section 5.5.20.
Normal mode.
Vertical GPS deviation is not For 400W/500W series units, the ARINC 429 vertical Enable Labels on the 400W/500W series unit ARINC 429
displayed on the GDU 620. deviation labels are not being transmitted. Configuration page.
Configure the ARINC 429 inputs/outputs for LNAV1
Unable to control the GPS course The GPS navigator is not correctly configured as LNAV1/2
(SYS1) or LNAV2 (SYS2) based upon whether the
when in OBS mode. or SYS1/2.
navigator is GPS1 or GPS2.
Data is not being received from an ARINC 429 bus hi and low are swapped. Verify/correct wiring.
ARINC 429 device.
(Valid data is being received on the Reconfigure input port to the correct setting for that LRU.
429 input port as shown on the Wrong device is connected to port on GDU 620. For configuration details, refer to Section 5.5.1. Use
GDU 620 Port Monitoring page) correct ports. Refer to Appendix F for interconnect details.
Data is not being received from an On the transmitting LRU, the ARINC 429 transmitter
Set the ARINC 429 transmitter speed to the correct speed.
ARINC 429 device. speed is not set correctly.
(No data is being received on the 429
input port as shown on the GDU 620 Wiring is not correct. Check for continuity/shorts and correct as required.
Port Monitoring page)

Rev. V Page 6-5
Attitude and heading errors/resets are possible if the air
data tests are conducted indoors without a good GPS
signal. With marginal or no GPS signals present, sudden
This is expected behavior and no troubleshooting is
changes in airspeed caused by using a pressure tester
Attitude and heading on GDU 620 required if this occurs. To reduce the chances of inducing
may result in attitude and heading errors and possibly
red “X” / AHRS resets during air data attitude and heading errors/resets while conducting the air
cause the AHRS to reset. This occurs because the
ground testing. data tests, ensure that the G500/G600 is receiving good
artificial changes in airspeed cause disagreement with the
GPS signals.
other sensor measurements internal to the AHRS. This
sensor disagreement will not occur in the normal
conditions of flight.
Invalidation of heading is possible if the air data tests are
Heading red “X” during air data This is expected behavior and no troubleshooting is
conducted indoors, due to typical magnetic anomalies,
ground testing. required if this occurs.
even with a good GPS signal.
On the System Configuration page, set the affected
ARINC 429 port not configured on ARINC Port Config system as NOT PRESENT and then set back to
System is configured as PRESENT page. PRESENT. Verify that the ARINC 429 port is properly
on the System Configuration page configured on the ARINC Port Config page.
but is still not communicating On the System Configuration page, set the affected
(GDU 620 software v3.02 or earlier). system as NOT PRESENT and then set back to
RS-232 port not configured on RS Port Config page.
PRESENT. Verify that the RS-232 port is properly
configured on RS Port Config page.
ARINC 708 WXR does not power on Ensure that the GDU 620 discrete output is configured
when selected to a mode other than Standby/On discrete input to WXR is not being driven low. correctly. Refer to Section 5.5.15.2.
OFF on the GDU 620. Verify wiring between GDU 620 and WXR.
Ensure that the GDU 620 is configured as DISPLAY
GDU 620 is not configured as the correct display head. HEAD to 1 or 2 to match the connections to the weather
radar. Refer to Section 5.5.15.2.
ARINC 708 WXR mode cannot be Ensure that the GDU 620 ARINC 429 output is set to
controlled by the GDU 620. low-speed WX RADAR. Refer to Section 5.5.15.2.
ARINC 429 control bus is not being provided to the WXR. Ensure that the GDU 620 discrete output is configured
correctly. Refer to Section 5.5.15.2.
Verify wiring between GDU 620 and WXR.

Rev. V Page 6-6
ARINC 429 data from AHRS is not being received by the Verify that AHRS is receiving power.
GAD 43 software will not load.
GAD 43/43e. Verify wiring.
If using GAD 43e, GDU 620 is not receiving appropriate Verify that all GDU 620 and GAD 43e configuration
data from GAD 43e. settings are correct.
Autopilot Mode annunciations not
displayed on PFD. Verify wiring.
If using ARINC 429, no mode data is being received.
Refer to NO AP DATA alert in Section 6.3.

Rev. V Page 6-7
6.3 G500/G600 Alerts
NOTE
All alerts listed in this section are displayed on the MFD unless otherwise specified.
The G500/G600 will display a number of alerts on the GDU 620. These are listed in the following table:
Table 6-2 GDU 620 Alert Troubleshooting Guide
Alert Text Cause Solution
If PFD 1 AIR DATA switch has ADC 1 selected, verify that
the ADC and SYS configurations have matching RVSM
ADC 1 ALT EC– ADC1 altitude error aircraft enabled.
correction is unavailable. The ADC is indicating that the SSEC is not functioning or
the PFD 1 AIR DATA switch has ADC 2 selected. If PFD 1 AIR DATA switch has ADC 2 selected, disregard
(TBM 700/850 aircraft only)
this alert. Selecting ADC 1 will remove this alert if ADC 1 is
operating normally.
ADC (1/2) SERVICE - ADC (1/2)
requires service. Contact repair
GSU 75(B) ADC is failed. Return unit to Garmin for service.
facility.
(GSU 75(B) installations only)
Verify whether the configuration in the GDU or
configuration in the GSU 75(B) is the desired
configuration. If the configuration stored in the GDU 620 is
correct, press the SET>ACTV button to upload the
configuration from the GDU's backup to the GSU 75(B).
This would be the case when replacing the GSU 75(B).
ADC CONFIG - ADC config error. The GSU 75(B) ADC configuration CRC stored on the
Contact repair facility. GDU 620 does not match the CRC of the active If the configuration stored in the GSU 75(B) is correct,
(GSU 75(B) installations only) GSU 75(B) ADC configuration. press the ACTV>SET button to download the
configuration from the GSU 75(B) to the GDU's backup.
This would be the case when replacing the GDU 620.
If neither configuration is correct, perform the steps in
Section 5.5.10 to configure the ADC portion of the
GSU 75(B).
AHRS(1/2) SERVICE - AHRS(1/2)
needs service. Contact repair facility. GSU 75(B) AHRS has failed. Return unit to Garmin for service.

Rev. V Page 6-8
AHRS(1/2) CAL - AHRS(1/2)
Verify appropriate software version. Update software
Calibration version error. Contact The GSU 75(B) AHRS sensor calibration parameters and
and/or recalibrate GSU 75(B), if necessary. Refer to
repair facility. software version are incompatible.
Section 5.6.
Verify which configuration is correct. If the configuration
stored in the GDU 620 is correct, press the SET>ACTV
button to upload the configuration from the GDU's backup
to the GSU 75(B). This would be the case when replacing
the GSU 75(B).
AHRS CONFIG - AHRS config error. The GSU 75(B) AHRS configuration CRC stored on the
Contact repair facility. If the configuration stored in the GSU 75(B) is correct,
GDU 620 does not match the CRC of the active
press the ACTV>SET button to download the
(GSU 75(B) installations only) GSU 75(B) AHRS configuration.
configuration from the GSU 75(B) to the GDU's backup.
This would be the case when replacing the GDU 620.
If neither configuration is correct, perform the steps in
Section 5.5.18 to configure the AHRS portion of the
GSU 75(B).
AHRS(1/2) GPS – AHRS(1/2) using Wait for GPS 1 to acquire a position.
backup GPS source. Contact repair AHRS(1/2) is using the backup GPS information.
facility. Verify that the 1 PPS wiring to GPS 1 is correct.
AHRS(1/2) GPS - AHRS(1/2) is not Wait for GPS 1/2 to acquire a position.
AHRS(1/2) is not receiving any GPS information.
receiving any GPS information. Verify that the 1 PPS wiring to each GPS is correct.
Ensure that at least one GPS has acquired a valid
position.
AHRS(1/2) GPS – AHRS (1/2) If GDU 620 does not have a valid position, verify wiring
operating in exclusively in no-GPS AHRS(1/2) is not receiving any GPS information. between GDU 620 and GPS receiver and configuration of
mode. GDU 620 and GPS receiver.
If GDU 620 has a valid GPS position, verify wiring
between GDU 620 and GRS. Also verify time mark wiring.
AHRS(1/2) GPS – AHRS (1/2) not Wait for GPS 2 to acquire a position
AHRS(1/2) is not receiving GPS information from GPS2.
receiving backup GPS information. Verify that the 1PPS wiring to GPS2 is correct.

Rev. V Page 6-9
AHRS(1/2) magnetic field model should be updated. Update AHRS IGRF model (current model is with aviation
AHRS(1/2) SRVC
Appears on ground only. database).
ADC not powered up. Close ADC C/B.
ADC not receiving input from GTP 59 OAT probe. Verify
AHRS(1/2) TAS AHRS(1/2) is not receiving true airspeed from ADC. wiring is correct.
ARINC 429 connection from ADC to AHRS is not working.
Verify wiring is correct.
Update AHRS and/or GDU magnetic field model database
AHRS MAG DB AHRS / GDU magnetic model database version mismatch. (current model is with aviation database). If the problem
persists, contact Garmin Technical Support.
(Applicable only to dual G500/G600 installations) Verify that cross-side GDU and ADC are valid.
ALT NO COMP
No cross-side air data is available for comparison. Verify that ADC System ID PGM pins are correctly set.
Using the ARINC Port Config page, verify that an
On the System Configuration page, a configured LRU
ARINC 429 input is assigned for all systems that require
ARINC 429 CONFIG does not have all of its required ARINC 429 format(s)
one. Refer to the System Configuration page to
configured.
determine which systems are PRESENT.
An ARINC 708 weather radar is configured as PRESENT
Verify that an ARINC 708 input is assigned for WX Radar
ARINC 708 CONFIG on the System Configuration page, but no ARINC 708
on the ARINC Port Config page.
input is configured.
CAL LOST Registry reports that it has lost calibration data. Contact Garmin Technical Support.
Chart streaming not available. Reverting to data card's Ensure the LRU that is providing the charts is online and
CHT STREAM
charts. ensure the database cards remain inserted.
Data card's charts database is incomplete. Some charts
CHT DB ERR Reload charts database.
may be unavailable.
CNFG MISMATCH - (Applicable only to dual G500/G600 installations)

Restart both GDU 620s in Configuration mode to
GDU 620 configuration settings GDU 620 in Normal mode has received updated crossfill automatically synchronize settings.
disagree (v6.11 and later) tags for configuration registry entries.
CNFG MISMATCH – (Applicable only to dual G500/G600 installations)

Restart both GDU 620s in Configuration mode to
GDU 1-2 airframe configurations GDU 620 in Normal mode has received updated crossfill automatically synchronize settings.
disagree (v5.02 and earlier) tags for configuration registry entries.

Rev. V Page 6-10
Verify wiring to configuration module.
CNFG MODULE The configuration module is inoperative.
Replace configuration module.
DATA LOST Pilot stored data was lost. Re-check data and settings.
DB ERR Database found on top card. Remove database card or move card to bottom slot.
DB SYNC DISABLED No database card found to receive databases. Insert valid database card.
DB SYNC ERROR Not enough space to receive one or more databases. Obtain database card with adequate available space.
DSCRT CONFIG – Discrete output Use the Discrete Configuration page in the SYS page
A discrete output required by an interfaced system has not
configuration error. Contact repair group to configure the discrete outputs to match the
been configured.
facility installation.
Fan (1/2) has reported 0 RPM when it was powered with a Verify that fan is not obstructed and can turn freely. For fan
FAN (1/2) FAIL
PWM duty cycle higher than or equal to 10%. location, refer to Figure C-2.
AC reference voltage is not being provided to Verify that AC reference voltage is turned on and wiring is
GAD 43 - AC Reference Lost
GAD 43/43e. correct.
GAD 43 - AHRS A429 Attitude Invalid The AHRS has flagged its outputs as invalid. This is due to If this error persists, AHRS must be returned for service.
Fault a fault caused by the internal AHRS monitors. Contact Garmin Technical Support.
GAD 43 - AHRS Pitch Out of Range The GAD 43/43e Adapter has received a pitch signal from If this error persists, AHRS must be returned for service.
Fault the AHRS that is out of range (greater than 90° up/down). Contact Garmin Technical Support.
The AHRS has flagged its outputs as invalid. This is due to If this error persists, AHRS must be returned for service.
GAD 43 - AHRS Attitude Invalid Fault
a fault caused by the internal AHRS monitors. Contact Garmin Technical Support.
Verify that AHRS is powered up.
GAD 43 - AHRS A429 Heading GAD 43/43e has detected a timeout on the incoming
Timeout Fault ARINC 429 heading data from the AHRS. Verify that ARINC 429 data bus wiring from AHRS to
GAD 43/43e is correct.
GAD 43 - AHRS A429 Heading
The AHRS has flagged its heading output as invalid. If this error persists, contact Garmin Technical Support.
Invalid Fault
Reload software into GAD 43/43e.
GAD 43 - Application SCI Integrity
Internal software does not pass CRC check. If this error persists, GAD 43/43e must be returned for
Fault
service. Contact Garmin Technical Support.

Rev. V Page 6-11
Update GAD 43/43e configuration. Refer to
Internal GAD 43/43e configuration data does not pass
GAD 43 - Configuration Integrity Fault Section 5.5.14. If this error persists, GAD 43/43e must be
CRC check.
returned for service. Contact Garmin Technical Support.
GAD 43/43e has detected that its internal calibration is GAD 43/43e must be returned for service. Contact Garmin
GAD 43 - Calibration Integrity Fault
corrupt. Technical Support.
GAD 43 FAIL - GAD 43 The GDU 620 is not receiving information from the GAD 43/43e not powered up. Close GAD C/B.
communication lost GAD 43/43e. Verify wiring between GDU 620 and GAD 43/43e.
The GAD 43/43e configuration information stored in the With the GDU 620 in Configuration mode, verify that the
GAD 43 - Gyro Emulation Type
GAD 43/43e and the GDU 620 configuration module do GAD 43/43e configuration settings are correct on the
Mismatch Fault
not match. GAD 43/43e page in the GAD page group.
GDU 620 monitor has detected a fault with the connected If this error persists, AHRS must be returned for service.
GAD 43 - GDU AHRS Monitor Fault
AHRS. Contact Garmin Technical Support.
Verify that wiring is correct for analog pitch outputs from
GAD 43/43e has detected an error with one or more of its GAD 43/43e.
analog pitch outputs.
GAD 43 - Pitch Deviation Fault If this error persists, contact Garmin Technical Support.
GAD 43/43e has detected an error with the unit’s internal If this error persists, GAD 43/43e must be returned for
GAD 43 - Power Supply Fault
power supplies. service. Contact Garmin Technical Support.
Verify that wiring is correct for analog roll outputs from
GAD 43/43e has detected an error with one or more of its GAD 43/43e.
analog roll outputs.
GAD 43 - Roll Deviation Fault If this error persists, contact Garmin Technical Support.
Verify that wiring is correct for analog yaw rate output from
GAD 43/43e has detected an error with its analog yaw rate GAD 43/43e.
GAD 43 - Yaw Rate Deviation Fault
output.
If this error persists, contact Garmin Technical Support.
The GAD 43/43e configuration information stored in the With the GDU 620 in Configuration mode, verify that the
GAD 43 - Yaw Rate Scale Factor
GAD 43/43e and the GDU 620 configuration module do GAD 43/43e configuration settings are correct on the
Mismatch Fault
not match. GAD 43/43e page in the GAD page group.

Rev. V Page 6-12
Verify that AHRS is powered up.
GAD 43 - AHRS A429 Attitude GAD 43/43e has detected a timeout on its incoming
Timeout Fault ARINC 429 attitude data from the AHRS. Verify that ARINC 429 data bus wiring from AHRS to
GAD 43/43e is correct.
GAD 43/43e must be returned for service. Contact Garmin
GAD 43 - Unit Fault GAD 43/43e has detected an internal fault.
Technical Support.
With the GDU 620 in Configuration mode, go to the
The GAD 43e configuration information stored in the
GAD 43e page in the GAD page group. Simply viewing
GAD 43e CONFIG GAD 43e and the GDU 620 configuration module do not
this page will cause the configuration to be rewritten to the
match.
GAD 43e.
This error appears whenever the GDU 620 is replaced
Cycle power to the GDU. This error automatically clears on
with a GDU 620 that was configured for a different
the second power-up with a different configuration module.
GDU CONFIG installation.
Check GDU 620 configuration in accordance with
Error in the configuration of the GDU 620.
Section 5.
Specific GDU 620 has poor cooling and power usage is Ensure fans on indicated GDU 620 are functioning.
GDU (1/2) COOLING
being reduced. Ensure fans on indicated GDU 620 are not obstructed.
Error in specific database, where “GDU (1/2) DB” denotes
GDU (1/2) DB ERR Reload affected database to SD card.
specific database.
Increase the voltage above 12VDC.
GDU (1/2) VOLTAGE GDU supply voltage is below 12 VDC. This alert is normal in 14V aircraft that are running on the
battery only and should clear once the aircraft engine is
started and the alternator/generator is carrying the load.
Location is too far north/south for AHRS magnetic
GEO LIMITS
compass.
Ensure GPS (1/2) is turned on.
GPS(1/2) FAIL No GPS1 or GPS2 data is available.
Verify RS-232 wiring from the GPS to the GDU 620.
This alert will be set if the PPS signal has not been Ensure GPS (1/2) is turned on.
GPS(1/2) PPS Failure received in more than 5 sec. If the unit is configured for
dual GPS, then the side will be specified in the error. Verify 1PPS wiring from the GPS to the GDU 620.

Rev. V Page 6-13
Verify GPS 1 is functional and communicating with the
GPS2 FPL USED GPS1 has failed and GPS2 is configured and operating.
GDU 620.
The GWX 68 configuration information stored in the With the GDU 620 in Configuration mode, go to the GWX
GWX 68 and the GDU 620 configuration module do not Weather Radar page in the WXR page group. Press
GWX CONFIG
match. GDU 620, with software v7.00 or later, does not SET>ACTV to copy the GDU 620 configuration into the
support this alert. GWX 68.
A GWX 75 is installed, but the GDU is configured for
GWX 68 or GWX 70(R). Navigate to the System Config page and correct the
GWX CNFG - Installed weather radar
configured weather radar setting to match the installed
does not match configured type A GWX 68 or GWX 70(R) is installed, but the GDU is radar type.
configured for GWX 75.
When GWX 70 or GWX 75 is installed, a hidden GWX
config setting is set to a value that disables weather alert Navigate to the GWX Config page and press the
GWX CNFG - Weather Alert is SET>ACTV softkey.
processing. The graphical weather alert arc on the radar
disabled. Contact repair facility
sweep page and textual weather alert message are both If problem persists, contact Garmin Technical Support.
disabled.
AHRS not receiving information from GMU 44. Verify
HDG FAULT AHRS magnetometer fault has occurred.
wiring to GMU 44.
HDG LOST Heading from the AHRS/GMU 44 is not valid. Caused by a local magnetic anomaly. No action required.
(Applicable only to dual G500/G600 installations) Verify that cross-side GDU and ADC are valid.
IAS NO COMP
No cross-side air data is available for comparison. Verify that ADC System ID PGM pins are set correctly.
Specific LRU should be serviced, where “<LRU>” denotes
<LRU> SERVICE Return indicated LRU to Garmin for service.
specific LRU.
GDU 620 has received product data for an LRU that Ensure the manifest is properly configured. For additional
should have a manifest entry, but is not in the manifest. information, refer to Section 5.5.4.
Update the LRU software to match the manifest. Refer to
MANIFEST
The LRU software P/N and version number in the manifest Section 5.4.
does not match the values being reported by that LRU. Update the manifest to match the LRU software. Refer to
Section 5.5.4.

Rev. V Page 6-14
On ARINC Port Config page, verify that appropriate
KFC 275/325 or GFC 500 autopilots - GDU 620 is ARINC 429 input has been configured and data is being
configured to receive ARINC 429 mode data from the received on it (green box displayed).
autopilot but none is received. Check wiring between GDU 620 and KCP 275/325 or
GAD 29( ).
NO AP DATA (displayed on PFD)
KFC 150/KAP 150 autopilots - GDU 620 is configured to On RS Port Config page, verify that appropriate RS-232
receive RS-232 data from the GAD 43e but none is input has been configured and data is being received
received. (green box displayed).
KFC 150/KAP 150 autopilots - GAD 43e is configured to
Check wiring between GAD 43e and KCP 191/192.
receive serial data from the autopilot but none is received.
Verify NAV RCVR 1 is configured and operating correctly.
NAV1 FAIL No navigation receiver 1 data.
Verify wiring.
Verify NAV RCVR 2 is configured and operating correctly.
NAV2 FAIL No navigation receiver 2 data.
Verify wiring.
PIT NO COMP or (Applicable only to dual G500/G600 installations) Verify that cross-side GDU and AHRS are valid.
ROL NO COMP No cross-side attitude data is available for comparison. Verify that AHRS System ID PGM pins are set correctly.
Register the GSR 56 with Garmin Flight Data Services to
REGISTER GFDS Data services are inoperative, register with GFDS.
receive weather data.
A system requiring RS-485 is configured as PRESENT on
Verify that a suitable RS-485 port is assigned for that
RS-485 CONFIG the System Configuration or Autopilot Configuration
system on the RS Port Config page.
page, but no RS-485 port is configured.
SD CARD 1 - Top SD card disabled The SD card in the top SD card slot is inoperative due to
Remove inoperative SD card and replace with new card.
due to errors. Replace Card errors on the card.
SD CARD 2 - Bottom SD card The SD card in the bottom card slot is inoperative due to
Remove inoperative SD card and replace with new card.
disabled due to errors. Replace Card errors on the card.
SIMULATOR The simulator mode is active. Ensure P6202-36 is not grounded.
SVT DISABLED - Out of available
Location is beyond region covered by terrain database. Ensure that terrain database covers region of operation.
terrain region
SVT DISABLED - Terrain DB Update the Supplemental Data card with the 9 arc-second
A 30 arc-second terrain database is being used.
resolution too low terrain database.

Rev. V Page 6-15
GDU 620 software version strings do not match. Crossfill Ensure that both GDU 620s have the same software
SW MISMATCH
disabled. version.
The GDU 620 is not receiving traffic information from the
Verify wiring between GDU 620 and traffic sensor.
traffic sensor.
TRAFFIC FAIL* The GDU 620 is receiving information from the traffic
sensor, but the information is indicating that the traffic Troubleshoot the traffic system.
sensor has failed.
TRK LOST GPS1 TRK lost. HSI defaulted to GPS2 TRK. Ensure GPS has a valid position.
TRK TRAFFIC Heading Lost. Traffic is now based on track. Refer to HDG errors.
This is a normal system alert. No installation action is
WX ALERT Possible severe weather ahead.
required.
Ensure that the weather radar is powered-up.
Verify wiring between GDU 620 and weather radar.
WX RADAR FAIL Weather radar has failed. If the GWX 68/70(R)/75 is not directly connected to a
GDU 620 via HSDB, and is instead routed through another
HSDB capable LRU, ensure that the associated Ethernet
ports are enabled on the routing LRU.
The ARINC 708 weather radar is reporting that it is not
WXR INPUT FAULT – Weather radar Ensure that the weather radar is receiving all required
receiving one or more ARINC 429 inputs for which it is
is not receiving one or more inputs ARINC 429 control and/or stabilization inputs.
configured.
*Traffic fail alerts could be specific to TAS/TCAS, ADS-B, or both. In either case, the Solution would be the same.

Rev. V Page 6-16
6.4 Autopilot Troubleshooting
Table 6-3 Autopilot Troubleshooting Guide
External input to autopilot not valid.
Troubleshoot in accordance with the autopilot installation
Internal problem in the autopilot computer, autopilot control manual.
panel, or servos.
Ensure the GAD 43/43e and connected LRUs (GDU 620,
AHRS) are powered-on.
GAD 43/43e flagging attitude as invalid.
Autopilot will not engage. (For installations using the GAD 43/43e to supply attitude Ensure that the PFD displays a valid attitude (and is not in
information to autopilot) AHRS-Align mode).
Verify ARINC 429 data bus wiring from AHRS to GAD 43/43e.
Autopilot disconnect wiring through GAD 43/43e is not correct.
Verify wiring to GAD 43/43e.
(For installations using the GAD 43/43e to supply attitude
Refer to the applicable interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
information to autopilot)
Check GDU 620 flight director configuration settings per
GDU 620 not properly configured for flight director inputs.
Section 5.5.13.
Autopilot servos turn opposite Check flight director signal wiring between autopilot and
Flight director signal wiring reversed.
direction of flight director. GDU 620. Reference the interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
Check autopilot servo rigging if it was changed during
Autopilot servo rigged incorrectly.
G500/G600 installation.
GDU 620 not configured for flight director. Configure GDU 620 for flight director per Section 5.5.13.
Verify valid signal wiring between autopilot and GDU 620.
Flight director not displayed
Reference the interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
on GDU 620. Flight director valid signal not received by GDU 620.
The valid signal status can be observed on the GDU 620 on
the Flight Director page in Configuration mode.
Check GDU 620 flight director configuration settings per
Flight director bars are GDU 620 not properly configured for flight director inputs.
Section 5.5.13.
displayed on the GDU 620
but do not move. Check flight director signal wiring between autopilot and
Flight director signals not being received by GDU 620.
GDU 620. Reference the interconnect drawing in Appendix F.

Rev. V Page 6-17
Check the GDU 620 autopilot and flight director configuration
GDU 620 not properly configured for flight director inputs.
settings per Section 5.5.12 and Section 5.5.13.
Flight director signal wiring reversed.
Flight director bars move in GDU 620 heading error and/or course error inputs not
wrong direction laterally on configured correctly.
Check flight director signal, heading error, course error, and
the GDU 620. Heading/course error signal wiring between the GDU 620 and lateral deviation signal wiring between the autopilot and
autopilot reversed. GDU 620. Reference the interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
Lateral deviation signal wiring between the GDU 620 and

autopilot reversed.
GDU 620 not properly configured for flight director inputs. Check the GDU 620 flight director configuration settings per
Flight director bars move in Section 5.5.13.
Flight director wiring reversed.
wrong direction vertically on Check flight director signal and glideslope deviation signal
the GDU 620. Glideslope deviation signal wiring between the GDU 620 and wiring between the autopilot and GDU 620. Reference the
autopilot reversed. interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
Check the GDU 620 autopilot configuration settings per
GDU 620 not properly configured for the heading error output.
Autopilot rolls the control Section 5.5.12.
yoke or stick in the wrong Check the heading error signal wiring between the GDU 620
direction in heading mode. Heading error wiring between GDU 620 and autopilot
and autopilot. Reference the interconnect drawing in
reversed.
Appendix F.
Autopilot rolls the control Check the signal wiring between the GAD 43/43e and autopilot
Autopilot computer is not receiving roll attitude information.
yoke or stick to extreme (> 30 computer. Reference the interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
degree) angles in any lateral
mode.
(For installations using the Autopilot computer is receiving roll attitude information in Check the signal wiring between the GAD 43/43e and autopilot
GAD 43/43e to supply opposite polarity. computer. Reference the interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
attitude information to
autopilot)

Rev. V Page 6-18
Autopilot pitches the control Check the signal wiring between the GAD 43/43e and autopilot
Autopilot computer is not receiving pitch attitude information.
yoke or stick to extreme (> 15 computer. Reference the interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
degree) angles in any vertical
mode.
(for installations using the Autopilot computer is receiving pitch attitude information in Check the signal wiring between the GAD 43/43e and autopilot
GAD 43/43e to supply opposite polarity. computer. Reference the interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
attitude information to
autopilot)
Check the GDU 620 autopilot configuration settings per
GDU 620 not properly configured for the course error output.
Section 5.5.12.
Autopilot rolls the control
yoke or stick in the wrong Course error wiring between the GDU 620 and autopilot
direction in NAV or Approach reversed. Check the course error signal and lateral deviation signal
mode. wiring between the GDU 620 and autopilot. Reference the
Lateral deviation signal wiring between the GDU 620 and interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
autopilot reversed.
Autopilot does not roll the
Check the heading error signal wiring between the GDU 620
control yoke or stick to follow
Autopilot not receiving heading error signal from the GDU 620. and autopilot. Reference the interconnect drawing in
the heading bug when in
Appendix F.
Heading mode.
Autopilot does not roll the Autopilot not receiving course error signal from the GDU 620.
control yoke or stick to correct Check the course error signal, lateral deviation signal, and
Autopilot not receiving the lateral deviation signal from the
lateral deviation from the lateral flag wiring between the GDU 620 and autopilot.
GDU 620.
course when in NAV or Reference the interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
Approach mode. Autopilot not receiving the lateral flag from the GDU 620.
Autopilot does not move the Autopilot not receiving glideslope deviation signal from the
control yoke or stick to correct GDU 620. Check the glideslope deviation and vertical flag signal wiring
glideslope deviation when in between the GDU 620 and autopilot. Reference the
Approach mode with a valid Autopilot not receiving the vertical flag from the GDU 620. interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
glideslope signal.
Autopilot remains in ARM Check the lateral and vertical flag signal wiring between the
Autopilot not receiving lateral or vertical flag from the
mode and does not capture GDU 620 and autopilot. Reference the interconnect drawing in
GDU 620.
VOR, localizer, or glideslope. Appendix F.

Rev. V Page 6-19
Autopilot does not support Altitude Preselector interface with Verify that the autopilot supports the Altitude Preselector
the GDU 620. interface with the GDU 620.
Autopilot does not respond to GDU 620 not configured for Altitude Preselector output to Check the GDU 620 autopilot configuration settings per
Altitude Preselector in the autopilot. Section 5.5.12.
GDU 620.
Check the RS-485 Altitude Preselector wiring between the
Autopilot not receiving the RS-485 Altitude Preselector setting
GDU 620 and autopilot. Reference the interconnect drawing in
from the GDU 620.
Appendix F.
If the GAD 43/43e is configured to provide this information, go
to the GAD 43/43e Configuration page and verify that the
Autopilot is not receiving barometric correction information. YAW RATE SCALE FACTOR is set to NONE.
Verify the wiring between the GAD 43 and the autopilot.
Autopilot does not capture at Reference the appropriate interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
the selected altitude.
(For installations using the Calibrate the autopilot computer to the barometric correction
GAD 43/43e to supply Barometric correction information is not correct. output of the GAD 43/43e in accordance with the autopilot
barometric correction installation manual.
information to autopilot) If the GAD 43/43e is configured to provide barometric
correction information, a separate altitude source must provide
Autopilot is not receiving altitude information. altitude information to the autopilot computer. Check wiring to
autopilot altitude source in accordance with the autopilot
installation manual.
Verify that the GDU 620 is in GPSS mode. This is controlled by
GDU 620 not in GPSS mode. HDG or an external switch and is annunciated. Refer to
Autopilot does not follow GPS Figure 5-79.
roll steering (ARINC 429 roll
steering autopilots). Check the ARINC 429 roll steering wiring between the
Autopilot not receiving ARINC 429 roll steering from the
GDU 620 and autopilot. Reference the interconnect drawing in
GDU 620.
Appendix F.
GDU 620 not in GPSS mode. Verify that the GDU 620 is in GPSS mode. This is controlled by
Roll steering converter not receiving ARINC 429 roll steering HDG or an external switch and is annunciated. Refer to
Autopilot does not follow GPS from the GDU 620. Figure 5-79.
roll steering (analog roll
steering autopilots). Check the wiring between the GDU 620, roll steering converter
Autopilot not receiving analog heading error signal from
(if installed), and autopilot. Reference the interconnect drawing
GDU 620 or roll steering converter.
in Appendix F.

Rev. V Page 6-20
On the GAD 43/43e Configuration page, verify that the yaw
rate signal scaling (mV/deg/sec) matches the required input as
Autopilot not receiving Yaw Rate signal from the GAD 43/43e. specified in the autopilot installation manual.
Autopilot does not make Check the yaw rate wiring between the GAD 43/43e and
coordinated turns. autopilot. Reference the interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
(For installations using the Autopilot not receiving heading output signal from the Check the heading wiring between the GAD 43/43e and
GAD 43/43e to supply yaw GAD 43/43e. autopilot. Reference the interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
rate and/or heading
information to autopilot) Ensure the GAD 43/43e and connected LRUs (GDU 620,
AHRS) are powered-on. Ensure that the PFD displays a valid
Heading valid discrete output from the GAD 43/43e is heading.
indicating an invalid heading.
Check the heading wiring between the GAD 43/43e and
autopilot. Reference the interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
Verify that Altitude Preselect is set to GAD 43e on the
Autopilot Configuration page.
Verify that GAD 43e is configured for Altitude Preselect Type
“ALT SEL” just flashes when “United Inst 5506L-S.”
attempting to engage ALT Autopilot computer is not receiving valid altitude error data.
Verify that 28VDC is being provided to GAD 43e P432-58 (this
SEL mode.
provides 28VDC for the Preselect Mon + (P432-59)).
(Collins APS-65)
Verify wiring between GAD 43e P432 and the autopilot
computer.
Knob in Motion discrete is constantly grounded. Verify that knob in motion wire is not shorted to ground.

Rev. V Page 6-21
6.5 Mid-Continent Standby ADI System (if installed)
Table 6-4 Mid-Continent Standby ADI Troubleshooting Guide
The Standby ADI system does not run from aircraft Ensure that STBY ADI circuit breaker is closed.
Unit is not getting aircraft power.
power. Verify that power wiring to ADI is correct.
Verify that STBY PWR switch has been pressed.
Verify that standby battery is charged.
The Standby ADI system does not operate from
The battery power is not supplied to the ADI.
battery power. If the MD420 emergency power supply is being
used, verify that wiring from emergency power
supply to the ADI is correct.

Rev. V Page 6-22
6.6 Contacting Garmin for Assistance
If the G500/G600 fails to operate despite troubleshooting efforts, contact Customer Service for assistance.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062-3426 USA
Phone: (913) 397-8200
Fax: (913) 397-8282
flyGarmin.com
Be prepared to offer the following information about the installation:
• Installation configuration (accessories, interfaced systems, completed configuration sheet)
• Model numbers, part numbers with mod levels, and serial numbers
• Software versions for ADC, AHRS, GAD 43/43e, GDU 620, GMU 44, and GNS or GTN
navigator(s)
• Description of problem
• Efforts made to isolate the problem

Rev. V Page 6-23
7 LIMITATIONS
7.1 Operation ........................................................................................................................................7-2

7.2 STC Installations .............................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.1 Penetration of Aircraft Pressure Vessels ................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 Equipment Interfaced to the G500/G600 System ..................................................................7-4
7.2.3 Major Alterations ...................................................................................................................7-5
7.2.4 ICA .........................................................................................................................................7-5
7.2.5 Installations with External TAWS .........................................................................................7-5
7.2.6 Installations with Existing Overspeed Warning System ........................................................7-5
7.2.7 Airspeed Indication ................................................................................................................7-5

Rev. V Page 7-1
7.1 Operation
All functions of the G500/G600 system meet the appropriate design assurance qualifications for PFDs in
all aircraft listed on the AML. The TSO authorizations by function are in the manuals listed in Table 1-5.
The installation instructions in this manual must be followed in order to ensure an airworthy installation for
aircraft operating under Title 14 CFR Parts 91, 121, and 135 with the limitations of those installations
listed here.
Data for some aircraft models listed on the AML is currently insufficient to substantiate IFR operations
with the G500/G600. Consequently, these aircraft models are limited to VFR operation only and must be
placarded in accordance with Section 2.5.3.3. To determine if a particular aircraft model is limited to VFR
when modified with the installation of a G500/G600 system, refer to Table K-1.

Rev. V Page 7-2
7.2 STC Installations
Installation of the GDU 620 will require rearrangement of existing aircraft instruments to make room for
the display(s). This STC defines the location of standby instruments, but does not include data for
installation of existing instruments that are retained (e.g., required standby instruments) and need to be
relocated. Data used for the installation of those instruments should be based on the equipment or aircraft
manufacturer data.
Instruments relocated in accordance with this manual should use the original lighting system provided by
the Type Design. When modifying or re-fabricating an instrument panel that has an overlay for lighting,
the installer must modify the lighting overlay in accordance with the manufacturer’s data or replace that
lighting with an approved lighting technique covered by the TC, applicable STC, or other approved
method.
For preservation of essential equipment in aircraft with multiple power buses, the GDU 620, AHRS, and
ADC must be powered from the essential bus. For aircraft with a single bus feed, this equipment must be
powered from the main bus. Operation of the pilot’s (primary) system on an avionics bus or secondary bus
is prohibited, except as explicitly stated in this manual.
Backup CDIs that support GPS or GPS/NAV will not operate properly under all conditions; as such, if a
backup CDI is installed, it must be limited to VOR/LOC and/or ILS indications only.
Except for installations with a G5 standby ESI, installations that utilize a standby attitude indicator with a
flight director presentation integral to the unit must disable the flight director presentation. The parallax
view of the flight director requires FAA evaluation to determine suitability for each panel location of the
attitude indicator. Driving multiple flight director displays from some autopilot/flight director computers
may overload the signal and affect the amplitude and overall delay of the presentation. Approval for the
display of the flight director on the standby attitude instrument may be done via TC, STC, or FAA Field
Approval, but is beyond the scope of the G500/G600 AML STC.
Aircraft requiring a third attitude instrument for operations under Part 121 or 135 must still comply with
the G500/G600 standby instrument requirements and placement; as such, one additional attitude indicator
is required for the co-pilot’s position. This third attitude indication may be a traditional gyro or second
G500/G600 system installed in accordance with this manual. Refer to Section 2.5.10 for additional
Part 121 and Part 135 considerations.
Aircraft operating at or above RVSM published altitudes will not meet the RVSM requirements with the
G600 installation unless the aircraft group and installation comply with RVSM specific requirements
outlined in this manual.
The GAD 43/43e Adapter is not capable of providing analog attitude information without external
integrity monitoring. In order to ensure the proper error detection rate, and ensure the safety of the system,
the GDU 620 is the only device that can be used as an integrity monitor when the GAD 43/43e is used to
replace the attitude source for an autopilot. Consequently, installation of the GAD 43/43e is not authorized
without the GDU 620 installed in accordance with this manual.
7.2.1 Penetration of Aircraft Pressure Vessels

In pressurized aircraft, some components of the G500/G600 system may be mounted outside the
pressurized area, requiring that wires penetrate through the pressure vessel. This installation must utilize
the provisions of bulkhead penetrations, such as sealed connectors or wiring, as provided by the
manufacturer and in accordance with the AMM. Substantiation for additional holes in the pressure vessel
is beyond the scope of the G500/G600 AML STC and would require additional data from the aircraft
manufacturer or other FAA approved data.

Rev. V Page 7-3
7.2.2 Equipment Interfaced to the G500/G600 System
Connections from the G500/G600 to aircraft systems other than those shown in this installation manual are
outside the scope of the G500/G600 AML STC and may require further evaluation and/or certification
approval.
All equipment interfaced to the G500/G600 must be previously or concurrently approved.
7.2.2.1 GNS 500W Series and GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS Annunciation

Only TAWS annunciations received from the #1 System (i.e., GPS or GPS 1) are displayed on the PFD. If
the aircraft’s TAWS system is embedded in a GNS 500W series or GTN 6XX/7XX navigator configured as
system #2, the remote annunciations will not display on the PFD of the G500/G600. Refer to
Appendix E for approved equipment and compatible interfaces.
7.2.2.2 Altitude Alerter and Preselectors

Some autopilot systems support altitude capture during flight level changes. Of those systems, only a
subset of autopilots support external vertical speed and/or pre-selected altitudes. The G500/G600 Altitude
Alerter can function as an Altitude Preselector only for those systems identified in this installation manual
and only when the option is enabled in the G500/G600 as a system upgrade. The functional extent of the
altitude alerter must be communicated to the pilot through the AFMS.
7.2.2.3 Traffic Sensor Interfaced to the G500/G600

The G500/G600 system is certified to support only one traffic system for a given installation. The
GDU 620 supports multiple types of traffic sensors: TAS, TCAS I, TIS, ADS-B, or composite traffic (e.g.,
ADS-B and TAS/TCAS correlation). However, only one complete traffic system may be configured for
use, which includes composite traffics systems that combine ADS-B and active traffic correlation. For
installations with dual G500/G600 systems installed, this STC does not approve interfacing a different
traffic sensor to each GDU 620.
7.2.2.4 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Interfaced to the G500/G600

The data provided in this STC does not support interfacing ARINC 708 weather radars to the GDU 620 in
nonmetallic aircraft.
7.2.2.5 Video Display

Functions and operations using the video display must be limited to AC 23.1309-1 Minor criticality or less.
The video display may be used as a supplement to provide additional visual perspective to aid operations
that do not rely solely on the video image.

Rev. V Page 7-4
7.2.2.6 G5 Electronic Standby Instrument
The G5 electronic instrument may only be installed as a standby instrument to the G500/G600 system in
single reciprocating engine aircraft with a maximum takeoff weight of 6,000 lbs or less (i.e., Class I
aircraft). Additionally, the Class I aircraft must be listed on both the G5 Part 23 AML STC (SA01818WI)
and the G500/G600 Part 23 AML STC (SA02153LA-D).
7.2.3 Major Alterations

The installation of the G500/G600 system is a major alteration to the aircraft. Following a major alteration,
the aircraft must be returned to service in a means acceptable to the cognizant aviation authority. An
example would be an FAA Form 337 Major Repair and Alteration Airframe, Powerplant, Propeller, or
Appliance properly executed to describe the major alteration including the equipment and systems to
which the G500/G600 system is interfaced and submitted to the appropriate FAA office.
7.2.4 ICA
Before returning the airplane to service, the G500/G600 Configuration and Checkout Log must be
completed and attached with the ICA so that any aircraft with the modifications detailed in this manual
may be properly maintained.
7.2.5 Installations with External TAWS

Only one TAWS that generates aural and visual annunciations may be installed in the aircraft. If an
external TAWS is installed along with SVT on the GDU 620, the GDU 620 must be configured to disable
SVT-Terrain aural and visual annunciations. Refer to Section 5.5.7 for details on configuration options.
7.2.6 Installations with Existing Overspeed Warning System

Certain aircraft are required to have a speed warning device in accordance with § 23.1303 (e). The
G500/G600 system does not generate aural airspeed warnings, although the GDU 620 does provide
configurable airspeed discrete outputs that can be utilized with external devices to trigger aural airspeed
warnings. For aircraft that have a speed warning system, the speed warning system must continue to
function after the installation of the G500/G600 system.
7.2.7 Airspeed Indication

The GDU 620 must be configured such that its airspeed tape conveys all operating limitations that were
previously conveyed to the pilot by the type design approved airspeed indicator. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1
for details on configuration of the GDU 620 airspeed tape.

Rev. V Page 7-5
8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
8.1 Cleaning ..........................................................................................................................................8-2

8.2 ADC ................................................................................................................................................8-2
8.3 Lightning Protection (Nonmetallic Aircraft Only) .........................................................................8-3
8.3.1 Transient Voltage Suppressor (TVS) .....................................................................................8-3
8.3.2 Aluminum Foil Tape (if Installed) .........................................................................................8-8
8.3.3 Bonding Straps (if Installed) ..................................................................................................8-8
8.4 Lightning Protection (Metal Aircraft Only) ....................................................................................8-9
8.4.1 Lightning Strike Inspection (GMU 44 Installed in a Nonmetallic Wingtip) .........................8-9
8.4.2 Lightning Strike Inspection (ARINC 708 Weather Radar Overbraid) .................................8-10
The G500/G600 is designed to not require any regular maintenance. Maintenance of all G500/G600 LRUs
is “on condition” only.

Rev. V Page 8-1
8.1 Cleaning
The front bezel, keypad, and display of the GDU 620 can be cleaned with a soft cotton cloth dampened
with clean water. DO NOT use any chemical cleaning agents. Care should be taken to avoid scratching the
surface of the display.
8.2 ADC
Per 14 CFR Part 43 Appendix E, paragraph (b)(2), the ADC must be checked using a test procedure
equivalent to 14 CFR Part 43 Appendix E, paragraph (b)(1) with two exceptions:
• The tests of sub-paragraphs iv (friction) and vi (barometric scale error) are not applicable because
the digital outputs of the ADC are not susceptible to these types of errors
• Other than for regulatory testing pertaining to Part 43 Appendices E and F (pitot/static leak test as
described in Part 91.411), maintenance of the ADC is on condition only

Rev. V Page 8-2
8.3 Lightning Protection (Nonmetallic Aircraft Only)
NOTE
Refer to Table K-2 to determine which transient voltage suppressors (TVSs) are required
for a particular aircraft model.
8.3.1 Transient Voltage Suppressor (TVS)

The following sections provide instructions for TVS testing. After a known or suspected lightning strike,
each TVS and TVS assembly must be replaced. If a TVS must be replaced, refer to Section 3.4.3 for
information on installing an in-line TVS, and refer to Section 3.4.4 for information on the TVS assembly
used for standby ADI bus protection.
NOTE
For a dual G500/G600 installation, only the #1 G500/G600 system components will have
the TVS protection. The following checks will only apply to the #1 GDU 620, AHRS, and
ADC.
8.3.1.1 GDU 620 (GDU 620 #1 in Dual G500/G600 Installation)

Reference the appropriate GDU 620 power interconnect drawing in Appendix F. To check the TVS on the
GDU 620 power inputs, the following steps should be followed:
NOTE
The GDU 620 should be the only LRU connected to the PFD circuit breaker. If other
equipment is connected to the PFD circuit breaker, it must also be disconnected prior to
conducting the following check. No other TVS devices should be on this circuit. If the TVS
being checked is not isolated, erroneous readings may result.
1. Remove the GDU 620 as described in Section 3.5.1.1.

2. Open the PFD circuit breaker and use a multimeter to perform a diode check between P6202-1 and
ground:
a. The meter should indicate open with the red lead on P6202-1 and the black lead on ground.
b. The meter should indicate a diode drop of between 2.0V and 2.5V with the red lead on ground
and the black lead on P6202-1.
i) If the diode drop is outside of the above range, then replace the TVS.
ii) If the meter indicates a short during steps 2a or 2b, then replace the TVS.
iii) If the meter indicates an open in both directions, check the continuity of the fuse.
iv) If the fuse is open, replace the fuse and repeat the check. After replacing the fuse, if the
meter does not ring in only one direction (like a diode) between P6202-1 and ground,
replace the TVS.
v) If the fuse is good, check the wiring for faults. If the wiring is good, replace the TVS.
3. Verify continuity between P6202-1 and P6202-34.
4. Replace the GDU 620 as described in Section 3.5.1.2 and Section 3.5.1.3
5. Reset the PFD circuit breaker.

Rev. V Page 8-3
8.3.1.2 AHRS (AHRS #1 in Dual G500/G600 Installation)
NOTE
The AHRS should be the only LRU connected to the AHRS circuit breaker. If other
equipment is connected to the AHRS circuit breaker, it must also be disconnected prior to
Reference the appropriate AHRS power interconnect drawing in Appendix F. To check the TVS on the
AHRS power inputs, the following steps should be followed:
1. Remove the connector from the AHRS.
2. Open the AHRS circuit breaker and use a multimeter to perform a diode check between the LRU’s
Aircraft Power 1 pin on the harness side (P771-18 for GRS 77) and ground.
a. The meter should indicate open with the red lead on Aircraft Power 1 and the black lead on
ground.
b. The meter should indicate a diode drop of between 2.0 V and 2.5 V with the red lead on
ground and the black lead on Aircraft Power 1.
meter does not ring in only one direction (like a diode) between Aircraft Power 1 and
ground, replace the TVS.
3. Verify continuity between Aircraft Power 1 (P771-18 for GRS 77) and Aircraft Power 2 (P771-20
for GRS 77).
4. Replace the AHRS connector and reset the AHRS circuit breaker.
8.3.1.3 ADC (ADC #1 in Dual G500/G600 Installation)
NOTE
The ADC should be the only LRU connected to the ADC circuit breaker. If other
equipment is connected to the ADC circuit breaker, it must also be disconnected prior to
Reference the appropriate ADC power interconnect drawing in Appendix F. To check the TVS on the
ADC power inputs, the following steps should be followed:
1. Remove the connector from the ADC.
2. Open the ADC circuit breaker and use a multimeter to perform a diode check between the LRU’s
Aircraft Power 1 pin on the harness side (P741-55 for GDC 74( )) and ground.
a. The meter should indicate open with the red lead on Aircraft Power 1 and the black lead on
ground.
ground and the black lead on Aircraft Power 1.

Rev. V Page 8-4
meter does not ring in only one direction (like a diode) between Aircraft Power 1 and
ground, replace the TVS.
3. Verify continuity between Aircraft Power 1 (P741-55 for GDC 74( )) and Aircraft Power 2
(P741-58 for GDC 74( )).
4. Replace the ADC connector.
5. Reset the ADC circuit breaker.
8.3.1.4 GAD 43/43e
NOTE
The GAD 43/43e should be the only LRU connected to the GAD circuit breaker. If other
equipment is connected to the GAD circuit breaker, it must also be disconnected prior to
Reference the GAD 43/43e power interconnect drawing in Appendix F. To check the TVS on the GAD 43
power inputs, the following steps should be followed:
1. Remove connector P431 from the GAD 43/43e.
2. Open the GAD circuit breaker and use a multimeter to perform a diode check between P431-49
and ground.
a. The meter should indicate open with the red lead on P431-49 and the black lead on ground.
ground and the black lead on P431-49.
meter does not ring in only one direction (like a diode) between P431-49 and ground,
replace the TVS.
3. If the Aircraft Power 2 input is used, repeat step 2 for the TVS connected to P431-50.
4. Replace the GAD 43/43e connector and reset the GAD circuit breaker(s).
8.3.1.5 Standby Indicator with Integrated Battery (if installed)
NOTE
The Standby ATT should be the only LRU connected to the STBY ATT circuit breaker. If
other equipment is connected to the STBY ATT circuit breaker, it must also be
disconnected prior to conducting the following check. No other TVS devices should be on
this circuit. If the TVS being checked is not isolated, erroneous readings may result.

Rev. V Page 8-5
Reference the appropriate Standby ATT interconnect drawing in Appendix F. To check the TVS on the
standby ATT power input, the following steps should be followed:
1. Remove the connector from the standby ATT.
2. Open the STBY ATT circuit breaker and use a multimeter to perform a diode check between pin C
on the standby ATT connector and ground.
a. The meter should indicate open with the red lead on pin C and the black lead on ground.
ground and the black lead on pin C.
meter does not ring in only one direction (like a diode) between pin C and ground, replace
the TVS.
3. Replace the standby ATT connector and reset the STBY ATT circuit breaker.
8.3.1.6 Standby ADI with MD420 Emergency Power Supply (if installed)
NOTE
The MD420 Emergency Power Supply should be the only LRU connected to the STBY ADI
circuit breaker. If other equipment is connected to the STBY ADI circuit breaker it must
also be disconnected prior to conducting the following check. No other TVS devices
should be on this circuit. If the TVS being checked is not isolated, erroneous readings may
result.
Reference the appropriate Standby ADI interconnect drawing in Appendix F. To check the TVS on the
MD420 power input, follow the procedure below:
1. Remove the connector from the MD420.
2. Open the STBY ADI circuit breaker and use a multimeter to perform a diode check between pin 1
on the MD420 connector and ground.
a. The meter should indicate open with the red lead on pin 1 and the black lead on ground.
ground and the black lead on pin 1.
meter does not ring in only one direction (like a diode) between pin 1 and ground, replace
the TVS.
3. Replace the MD420 connector and reset the STBY ADI circuit breaker.

Rev. V Page 8-6
8.3.1.7 Standby Indicator Power Bus Protection (if installed)
NOTE
Early versions of the TVS 2 assembly did not require the connector between the fuse
holder and TVSs. This connector was added to allow periodic inspection of the individual
TVSs, rather than periodic replacement of the entire assembly. If the connector is not
installed, modify the assembly to add the connector prior to conducting the following
checks.
NOTE
Verify operation of all four TVSs prior to replacing any failed TVS.
The TVS assembly (refer to Section 3.4.4) and fuse on the power bus side of the electromechanical or
electronic standby indicator (e.g., STBY ADI) circuit breaker must be replaced after a known or suspected
lightning strike. Reference the appropriate standby ADI interconnect drawing in Appendix F and
Table K-2 for applicable models. To check the TVS assembly, follow the procedure below:
1. Ensure that the power to the bus is off
TO STANDBY ADI
and disconnect the connector in the 5A
TVS assembly.
2. Use a multimeter to perform a diode CONTINUITY CHECK
check between the first connector
contact (socket contact on the first
1 2 3 4
TVS) and ground. Refer to
Figure 8-1. TVS ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
a. The meter should indicate open
with the red lead on the connector 1 2 3 4
socket contact and the black lead
STRIPE ON
on ground.
T T T T TVS DIODE CHECK
TVS INDICATES V V V V
b. If the meter indicates a short, then CATHODE SIDE S S S S
replace the TVS diode

corresponding to the contact being
checked. Figure 8-1 TVS Assembly Checks
i) The meter should indicate a
diode drop of between 2.0 V and 2.5 V with the red lead on ground and the black lead on
the connector socket contact.
ii) If the diode drop is outside of the above range, then replace the TVS diode corresponding
to the contact being checked.
iii) If the meter indicates a short, then replace the TVS diode corresponding to the contact
being checked.
iv) If the meter indicates an open, check the wiring for faults. If the wiring is good, replace the
TVS diode corresponding to the contact being checked.
3. Repeat checks in the previous step for each of the three remaining contacts/TVS diodes.
4. On the other connector, verify continuity between each of the four contacts and the power bus.
a. If there is no continuity between the power bus and all four contacts, check the continuity of
the fuse.
b. If there is continuity between the power bus and some contacts but not others, check the wiring
to the “open” contacts and repair as necessary.
5. Re-connect the connector in the TVS assembly.

Rev. V Page 8-7
8.3.2 Aluminum Foil Tape (if Installed)
When inspecting the aluminum foil tape used to ground the AHRS, ADC, and GAD 43/43e, verify that it is
not torn, damaged, or showing signs of corrosion. If any of these occurs, then the tape must be replaced.
8.3.3 Bonding Straps (if Installed)

If a bonding strap is used to ground the GTP 59, it must be replaced after a known or suspected lightning
strike. Refer to Section 3.2.6.2 for additional details.

Rev. V Page 8-8
8.4 Lightning Protection (Metal Aircraft Only)
8.4.1 Lightning Strike Inspection (GMU 44 Installed in a Nonmetallic Wingtip)
In the event of an aircraft lightning strike or suspected aircraft lightning strike, metal aircraft with
nonmetallic wingtips are subject to additional inspection items if the GMU 44 Magnetometer is installed in
the wingtip. This section describes the procedures for visual and operational inspections of the GMU 44
and its cable overbraid in the event of a real or suspected aircraft lightning strike. Refer to Appendix L for
overbraid re-installation or replacement instructions.
8.4.1.1 Required Materials

Visual inspection of the GMU 44 cable and connectors requires the replacement of three tie wraps. Refer to
Appendix L for tie wrap specifications.
8.4.1.2 GMU 44 Access

Gain access to the GMU 44 by the following steps:
1. Removing the wingtip cover.
2. Remove the three tie wraps from the cable collar end of the overbraid.
3. Slide the overbraid back and disconnect P441 from J441.
When the visual inspection outlined in the next section is complete, reconnect P441 to J441 and re-secure
the overbraid to the GMU 44 cable with new tie wraps in accordance with Appendix L.
8.4.1.3 Visual Inspection

Check the GMU 44 and overbraid for the following:
1. Check the GMU 44 Magnetometer body and mount for scorching, soot, melting, pitting, denting,
or discoloration.
2. Check P441 and J441 for melting or pin damage.
3. Check the cable overbraid for pinching, melting, or evidence of arcing.
4. Check the lug for evidence of arcing and verify that the lug is still secured to the overbraid.
5. Check electrical bonding between the GMU 44 overbraid and adjacent aircraft structure.
Resistance should be less than 5 mΩ.
6. If any of these checks shows evidence of a lightning strike, replace the overbraid assembly in
accordance with Appendix L.
8.4.1.4 GMU 44 Operational Check

Perform a GMU 44 operational check.
1. Reconnect P441 to J441 and re-secure the overbraid to the terminal lug.
2. Check GMU 44 operation by verifying aircraft heading on the GDU 620 PFD.
3. If the operational check fails, replace the GMU 44.

Rev. V Page 8-9
8.4.2 Lightning Strike Inspection (ARINC 708 Weather Radar Overbraid)
In the event of an aircraft lightning strike or suspected aircraft lightning strike, metal aircraft with an
ARINC 708 weather radar interfaced to the GDU 620 are subject to additional inspection. This section
describes the procedures for visual inspections of the cable overbraid in the event of a known or suspected
aircraft lightning strike. Refer to Appendix N for overbraid installation instructions.
8.4.2.1 Visual Inspection

Check the weather radar overbraid.
1. Gain access to the weather radar transceiver by removing the radome.
2. Check the weather radar R/T overbraid for pinching, melting, or evidence of arcing.
3. Check the lug for evidence of arcing and verify that the lug is still secured to the overbraid.
4. Check electrical bonding between the weather radar cable overbraid and adjacent aircraft
structure. Resistance should be less than 10 mΩ.
If any of these checks shows evidence of a lightning strike, replace the overbraid assembly in accordance
with Appendix N.

Rev. V Page 8-10
APPENDIX A NOT USED

Rev. V Page A-1
APPENDIX B CONNECTOR INFORMATION
B.1 GDU 620 PFD/MFD ...................................................................................................................... B-2

B.1.1 J6201/P6201 Connector ........................................................................................................ B-3
B.1.2 J6202/P6202 Connector ........................................................................................................ B-4
B.1.3 J6203/P6203 Connector ........................................................................................................ B-5
B.2 GSU 75(B) ADAHRS .................................................................................................................... B-6
B.2.1 J751/P751 Connector ............................................................................................................ B-6
B.3 GRS 77 AHRS ............................................................................................................................. B-11
B.3.1 J771/P771 Connector .......................................................................................................... B-11
B.4 GMU 44 Magnetometer ............................................................................................................... B-15
B.4.1 J441/P441 Connector .......................................................................................................... B-15
B.5 GDC 74( ) .................................................................................................................................... B-16
B.5.1 J741/P741 Connector .......................................................................................................... B-16
B.6 GAD 43/43e Adapter ................................................................................................................... B-20
B.6.1 J431/P431 Connector (GAD 43/43e) .................................................................................. B-20
B.6.2 J432/P432 Connector (GAD 43e Only) .............................................................................. B-27
B.6.3 J433/P433 Connector (GAD 43e Only) .............................................................................. B-28
This appendix contains pinout diagrams and signal descriptions for G500/G600 LRU connectors. For
detailed signal descriptions, refer to the appropriate LRU TSO installation manual. D-sub connector
contact types (pin or socket) are represented in diagrams according to the legend shown in Figure B-1.
NOTE
Contacts are numbered under the “Pin #” column of a pinout table regardless of whether
the contacts are pins or sockets.
37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Pin
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Contacts
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Socket
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Contacts
Figure B-1 Connector Legend (37-contact D-sub connector shown)

Rev. V Page B-1
B.1 GDU 620 PFD/MFD
For detailed descriptions of GDU 620 signals, refer to GDU 620 TSO Installation Manual.
Figure B-2 GDU 620 Rear Connectors

Rev. V Page B-2
B.1.1 J6201/P6201 Connector
37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
J6201
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(GDU 620)
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
P6201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
(D-Sub)
Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Pin Name I/O

1 COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 1 IN 19 RESERVED --
2 RESERVED -- 20 COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 2 IN
3 AUDIO INHIBIT IN* IN 21 RESERVED --
4 CDU SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* IN 22 GROUND --
5 SPARE DISC IN* 4 IN 23 DISCRETE OUT 1* OUT
GSR STATUS IN* 24 DISCRETE OUT 2* OUT

6 IN
(software v4.00 or later) 25 DISCRETE OUT 3* OUT
7 SPARE DISC IN* 6 IN 26 DISCRETE OUT 4* OUT
8 GPSS ENABLE IN* IN 27 DISCRETE OUT 5* OUT
9 FD ENABLE IN IN 28 AUDIO OUT HI OUT
10 ADF VALID IN IN 29 AUDIO OUT LO OUT
11 ETHERNET IN 1A IN 30 ETHERNET IN 2A IN
12 ETHERNET IN 1B IN 31 ETHERNET IN 2B IN
13 ETHERNET OUT 1A OUT 32 ETHERNET OUT 2A OUT
14 ETHERNET OUT 1B OUT 33 ETHERNET OUT 2B OUT
15 FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH UP IN 34 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL LEFT IN
16 FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH IN 35 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL IN
17 ADF X/COS IN IN 36 ADF DC REF IN IN
18 ADF Y/SIN IN IN 37 RESERVED --
*Indicates Active-Low

Rev. V Page B-3
50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 J6202
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (GDU 620)
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 P6202
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 (D-Sub)

1 AIRCRAFT POWER IN 26 ARINC 429 IN 6B IN
2 AIRCRAFT GROUND -- 27 RS-232 OUT 1 OUT
3 ARINC 429 OUT 1A OUT 28 RS-232 OUT 2 OUT
4 ARINC 429 IN 1A IN 29 RS-232 OUT 3 OUT
7 ARINC 429 IN 4A IN 32 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
8 ARINC 429 IN 5A IN 33 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK OUT
9 ARINC 429 IN 6A IN 34 AIRCRAFT POWER IN
10 RS-232 IN 1 IN 35 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
11 RS-232 IN 2 IN 36 DEMO MODE SELECT* IN
12 RS-232 IN 3 IN 37 RESERVED --
13 RS-232 IN 4 IN 38 GROUND --
14 RS-232 IN 5 IN 39 RESERVED --
15 LIGHTING BUS HI IN 40 TIME MARK IN 1A IN
16 LIGHTING BUS LO IN 41 TIME MARK IN 1B IN
17 RESERVED -- 42 TIME MARK IN 2A IN
18 AIRCRAFT POWER IN 43 TIME MARK IN 2B IN
19 AIRCRAFT GROUND -- 44 RS-232 GND 1 --
20 ARINC 429 OUT 1B OUT 45 RS-232 GND 2 --
21 ARINC 429 IN 1B IN 46 RS-232 GND 3 --
24 ARINC 429 IN 4B IN 49 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT
25 ARINC 429 IN 5B IN 50 CONFIG MODULE GND --

Rev. V Page B-4
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 J6203
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 (GDU 620)
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 P6203
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (D-Sub)

1 ARINC 429 OUT 2A OUT 32 RS-485 2B I/O
4 ARINC 429 IN 7A IN 35 RESERVED --
5 ARINC 429 IN 8A IN 36 ARINC 708/453 IN 1B IN
6 RS-232 IN 6 IN 37 ARINC 708/453 IN 1 TERM B IN
7 RS-232 IN 7 IN 38 ARINC 708/453 IN 2B IN
8 RS-232 IN 8 IN 39 ARINC 708/453 IN 2 TERM B IN
9 RS-485 1A I/O 40 A/P HEADING ERROR LO --
10 RS-485 2A I/O 41 A/P COURSE ERROR LO --
11 RS-485 3A I/O 42 A/P AC REF LO IN
12 RS-485 4A I/O 43 RESERVED --
13 RESERVED -- 44 DISCRETE OUT 6* OUT
14 ARINC 708/453 IN 1A IN 45 DISCRETE OUT 7* OUT
15 ARINC 708/453 IN 1 TERM A IN 46 DISCRETE OUT 8* OUT
16 ARINC 708/453 IN 2A IN 47 DISCRETE OUT 9* OUT
17 ARINC 708/453 IN 2 TERM A IN 48 GROUND --
18 A/P HEADING ERROR HI OUT 49 RS-232 GND 6 --
19 A/P COURSE ERROR HI OUT 50 RS-232 GND 7 --
20 A/P AC REF HI IN 51 RS-232 GND 8 --
21 RESERVED -- 52 LATERAL +LEFT OUT OUT
22 RESERVED -- 53 LATERAL +RIGHT OUT OUT
23 ARINC 429 OUT 2B OUT 54 LATERAL +FLAG OUT OUT
24 ARINC 429 OUT 3B OUT 55 LATERAL –FLAG OUT OUT
25 ARINC 429 OUT 4B OUT 56 VERTICAL +UP OUT OUT
26 ARINC 429 IN 7B IN 57 VERTICAL +DOWN OUT OUT
27 ARINC 429 IN 8B IN 58 VERTICAL +FLAG OUT OUT
28 RS-232 OUT 6 OUT 59 VERTICAL –FLAG OUT OUT
29 RS-232 OUT 7 OUT 60 LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT OUT
30 RS-232 OUT 8 OUT 61 VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT OUT
31 RS-485 1B I/O 62 RESERVED --

Rev. V Page B-5
B.2 GSU 75(B) ADAHRS
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 J751
(GSU 75(B))
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
P751
59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
(D-Sub)
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 1A OUT 40 PPS IN 1B IN
2 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 1B OUT 41 PPS IN 2A IN
3 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 2A OUT 42 ARINC 429 IN ADC 1A IN
4 OAT LO IN 43 ARINC 429 IN ADC 1B IN
5 OAT HI IN 44 ARINC 429 IN ADC 2A IN
6 OAT POWER OUT 45 ARINC 429 IN AHRS 1A IN
7 ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 1B OUT 46 ARINC 429 IN AHRS 1B IN
8 ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 3A OUT 47 ARINC 429 IN AHRS 3A IN
9 ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 3B OUT 48 SIGNAL GROUND --
10 RS 422 IN A IN 49 ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 2A OUT
11 RS 422 IN B IN 50 ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 2B OUT
12 RS 232 OUT AHRS 3 OUT 51 RS 232 OUT AHRS 1 OUT
13 MAGNETOMETER POWER OUT OUT 52 RS 232 IN AHRS 1 IN
14 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 IN 53 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT OUT
15 SIGNAL GROUND -- 54 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
16 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 IN 55 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK OUT
17 RS 232 OUT ADC 2 OUT 56 DISCRETE IN 1* IN
18 RS 232 IN ADC 2 IN 57 SYS ID 2* IN
19 RESERVED -- 58 RESERVED IN
20 RESERVED -- 59 RESERVED I/O
21 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 3A OUT 60 PPS IN 1A IN
22 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 3B OUT 61 PPS IN 2B IN
23 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 2B OUT 62 ARINC 429 IN ADC 3A IN
24 SIGNAL GROUND -- 63 ARINC 429 IN ADC 3B IN
25 PPS SELECT IN 64 ARINC 429 IN ADC 2B IN
26 SIGNAL GROUND -- 65 ARINC 429 IN AHRS 2A IN

Rev. V Page B-6
27 ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 1A OUT 66 ARINC 429 IN AHRS 2B IN
28 ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 3A OUT 67 ARINC 429 IN AHRS 3B IN
29 ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 3B OUT 68 RS-232 ADC 1 GROUND --
30 SIGNAL GROUND -- 69 RS 232 OUT ADC 1 OUT
31 RS-232 AHRS 3 GROUND -- 70 RS 232 IN ADC 1 IN
32 RS-232 AHRS 1 GROUND -- 71 RS 232 OUT AHRS 2 OUT
33 MAGNETOMETER GROUND -- 72 RS 232 IN AHRS 2 IN
34 POWER GROUND -- 73 RS-232 AHRS 2 GROUND --
35 RESERVED -- 74 CONFIG MODULE GROUND --
36 POWER GROUND -- 75 SYS ID 1* IN
37 RS-232 ADC 2 GROUND -- 76 DISCRETE IN 3* IN
38 RESERVED IN 77 DISCRETE IN 4 IN
39 RESERVED I/O 78 DISCRETE IN 2* IN

Rev. V Page B-7
B.2.1.1 Power Function
Power-input pins accept 14/28 VDC. AIRCRAFT POWER 2 is for connecting to an alternate power
source, such as on aircraft with two electrical buses. For OAT power, pin 6 on J751, refer to
Appendix Section B.2.1.3 for information.
Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 P751 14 IN
POWER GROUND P751 34 --
MAGNETOMETER POWER OUT P751 13 OUT
MAGNETOMETER GROUND P751 33 --
B.2.1.2 Serial Data

B.2.1.2.1 RS-232
RS-232 IN AHRS 1 P751 52 IN
RS-232 OUT AHRS 1 P751 51 OUT
RS-232 AHRS 1 GROUND P751 32 --
RS-232 IN AHRS 2 P751 72 IN
RS-232 IN ADC 1 P751 70 IN
RS-232 OUT ADC 1 P751 69 OUT
RS-232 ADC 1 GROUND P751 68 --
RS-232 IN ADC 2 P751 18 IN
RS-232 OUT ADC 2 P751 17 OUT
RS-232 ADC 2 GROUND P751 37 --
B.2.1.2.2 RS-422
RS-422 IN A P751 10 IN
RS-422 IN B P751 11 IN

Rev. V Page B-8
B.2.1.2.3 ARINC 429
ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 1A P751 27 OUT
ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 1B P751 7 OUT
ARINC 429 IN AHRS 1A P751 45 IN
ARINC 429 IN AHRS 1B P751 46 IN
ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 2A P751 49 OUT
ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 2B P751 50 OUT
ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 3A P751 8, 28 [1] OUT
ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 3B P751 9, 29 [1] OUT
ARINC 429 OUT ADC 1A P751 1 OUT
ARINC 429 OUT ADC 1B P751 2 OUT
ARINC 429 IN ADC 1A P751 42 IN
ARINC 429 IN ADC 1B P751 43 IN
Notes:
[1] Both pin numbers are functionally equivalent and are internally connected within the GSU 75.

Rev. V Page B-9
B.2.1.3 Temperature Inputs
The OAT probe connections are used to power and interface with a GTP 59.
OAT LO P751 4 IN
OAT HI P751 5 IN
OAT POWER P751 6 OUT
B.2.1.4 Configuration Module Connections

CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT P751 53 OUT
CONFIG MODULE DATA P751 54 I/O
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK P751 55 OUT
CONFIG MODULE GROUND P751 74 --
B.2.1.5 ARINC 429 System ID Connections

The GSU 75(B) has an associated Source/Destination Identifier (SDI or system ID) that is coded into its
ARINC 429 output messages/labels. The system ID may be used to uniquely distinguish the source of the
GSU 75(B) ARINC 429 labels in a system with more than one GSU 75(B). The GSU 75(B) can be set to
All Call, #1, or #2 for such purposes.
By hard strapping the program pins to ground or open, the GSU 75(B) is assigned a system ID. The system
ID is included in each transmitted ARINC 429 word. The system ID indicates there is only a single
GSU 75(B) installed (All Call) or, if multiple units are installed, which GSU 75(B) the data originates from
(#1 or #2). When a single GSU 75(B) is installed in the system, the pins are left open (All Call).

SYS ID 1* P751 75 IN
SYS ID 2* P751 57 IN
Table B-1 P751 Strapping to Achieve Desired System ID

SYSTEM ID 1 (Pin 75) SYSTEM ID 2 (Pin 57) System ID Number
Open Open All Call
Ground Open #1
Open Ground #2
Ground Ground N/A, Do Not Ground Both Pins

Rev. V Page B-10
B.3 GRS 77 AHRS
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 J771
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 (GRS 77)
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 P771
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (D-Sub)

1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND -- 23 SPARE RS-232 OUT 1 OUT
2 AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 IN 24 POWER GROUND --
3 AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 IN 25 MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN A IN
4 RESERVED -- 26 GPS 1 RS-232 OUT OUT
5 SPARE -- 27 ARINC 429 OUT 3 B (CDU 1, high-speed) OUT
ARINC 429 OUT 2 B
6 GPS 2 RS-232 IN IN 28 OUT
(GIA 2, high-speed)
ARINC 429 OUT 1 B
7 RESERVED -- 29 OUT
(GIA 1, high-speed)
ARINC 429 IN 1 B
8 SPARE RS-232 IN 1 IN 30 IN
(AIR DATA, low-speed)
9 MAGNETOMETER POWER OUT OUT 31 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK OUT
10 MAGNETOMETER RS-232 OUT OUT 32 SPARE --
ARINC 429 OUT 3 A
11 GPS 1 RS-232 IN IN 33 OUT
(CDU 2, high-speed)
ARINC 429 OUT 3 A
12 OUT 34 SPARE --
(CDU 1, high-speed)
ARINC 429 OUT 2 A
13 OUT 35 SIGNAL GROUND (GPS 2) --
(GIA 2, high-speed)
ARINC 429 OUT 1 A
14 OUT 36 SPARE --
(GIA 1, high-speed)
ARINC 429 IN 1 A
15 IN 37 SIGNAL GROUND --
(AIR DATA, low speed)
SIGNAL GROUND
16 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O 38 --
(MAGNETOMETER)
17 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT OUT 39 MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN B IN
18 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 IN 40 MAGNETOMETER GROUND --
ARINC 429 OUT 3 B
19 OUT 41 SIGNAL GROUND (GPS 1) --
(CDU 2, high-speed)
20 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 IN 42 SIGNAL GROUND (CDU 1) --
21 GPS 2 RS-232 OUT OUT 43 SIGNAL GROUND (AFCS) --
22 POWER GROUND -- 44 SIGNAL GROUND (AIR DATA) --

Rev. V Page B-11
Power-input pins accept 14/28 VDC. AIRCRAFT POWER 2 is for connecting to an alternate power
source, such as on aircraft with two electrical buses.

AIRCRAFT POWER 1, GRS 77 P771 18 IN
AIRCRAFT POWER 2, GRS 77 P771 20 IN
MAGNETOMETER POWER OUT P771 9 OUT
POWER GROUND, GRS 77 P771 22 --
POWER GROUND, GRS 77 P771 24 --
B.3.1.2 Serial Data

B.3.1.2.1 RS-232
GPS 1 RS-232 IN P771 11 IN
GPS 2 RS-232 IN P771 6 IN
SPARE RS-232 IN 1 P771 8 IN
GPS 1 RS-232 OUT P771 26 OUT
GPS 2 RS-232 OUT P771 21 OUT
SPARE RS-232 OUT 1 P771 23 OUT
MAGNETOMETER RS-232 OUT P771 10 OUT
B.3.1.2.2 RS-485
MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN B P771 39 IN
MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN A P771 25 IN

Rev. V Page B-12
B.3.1.2.3 ARINC 429
ARINC 429 OUT 3A (high-speed) P771 12 OUT
ARINC 429 OUT 3B (high-speed) P771 27 OUT
SIGNAL GROUND P771 42 --
ARINC 429 IN 1A (low-speed) P771 15 IN
ARINC 429 IN 1B (low-speed) P771 30 IN


Rev. V Page B-13
B.3.1.4 AHRS System ID Strapping
AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 P771 2 IN
AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 P771 3 IN
By hard strapping the program pins to ground, the GRS 77 is assigned a system ID. IDs identify a GRS 77
as an All Call, #1, #2, or #3 unit. For a single system, the pins are left open (All Call).
The GRS 77 has an associated Source/Destination Identifier (SDI or system ID) that is coded into its
GRS 77 ARINC 429 labels in a system with more than one GRS 77. The GRS 77 system ID is set as
follows:
Table B-2 P771 Strapping to Preserve Desired System ID
System ARINC System ID 1 ARINC System ID 2
ID Number Pin 2 Pin 3
All Call Open Open
#1 Ground Open
#2 Open Ground
#3 Ground Ground

Rev. V Page B-14
B.4 GMU 44 Magnetometer
VIEW OF P441 CONNECTOR

LOOKING AT FACE OF CONNECTOR PIGTAIL
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 SIGNAL GROUND --
2 RS-485 OUT B OUT
3 SIGNAL GROUND --
4 RS-485 OUT A OUT
5 SPARE --
6 POWER GROUND --
7 SPARE --
8 RS-232 IN IN
9 +12 VDC POWER IN

+12 VDC POWER, GMU 44 P441 9 IN
POWER GROUND, GMU 44 P441 6 --
B.4.1.2 Serial Data

B.4.1.2.1 RS-232
RS-232 IN P441 8 IN
B.4.1.2.2 RS-485
RS-485 OUT A P441 4 OUT
RS-485 OUT B P441 2 OUT

Rev. V Page B-15
B.5 GDC 74( )
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
J741
59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
(GDC 74( ))
78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
P741
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
(D-Sub)
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND -- 42 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B OUT
2 OAT PROBE POWER OUT OUT 43 SIGNAL GROUND --
3 OAT PROBE IN HI IN 44 ARINC 429 OUT 2 A OUT
4 OAT PROBE IN LO IN 45 ARINC 429 OUT 2 B OUT
5 SIGNAL GROUND -- 46 SIGNAL GROUND --
6 ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 IN 47 ARINC 429 OUT 3 A OUT
7 SIGNAL GROUND -- 48 ARINC 429 OUT 3 B OUT
DISCRETE IN* 6 49 SIGNAL GROUND --
8 IN
(PITOT SENSOR 2 HEATER ACTIVE*) 50 DISCRETE IN 7 IN
9 SIGNAL GROUND -- 51 SIGNAL GROUND --
10 RS-232 IN 1 IN 52 DISCRETE IN 8 IN
11 RS-232 OUT 1 OUT 53 SIGNAL GROUND --
12 SIGNAL GROUND -- 54 SPARE --
13 RS-232 IN 2 IN 55 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 IN
14 RS-232 OUT 2 OUT 56 SPARE --
15 SIGNAL GROUND -- 57 SPARE --
16 RESERVED -- 58 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 IN
17 POWER GROUND -- 59 SPARE --
18 POWER GROUND -- 60 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK OUT
19 POWER GROUND -- DISCRETE IN* 1
61 IN
20 POWER GROUND -- (OAT SENSOR 1 HEATER ACTIVE*)
21 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT OUT 62 SIGNAL GROUND --
22 SPARE -- DISCRETE IN* 2
63 IN
23 ARINC 429 IN 1 A IN (OAT SENSOR 2 HEATER ACTIVE*)
24 ARINC 429 IN 1 B IN 64 SIGNAL GROUND --
25 SIGNAL GROUND -- DISCRETE IN* 3
65 IN
26 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A OUT (STATIC SENSOR 1 HEATER ACTIVE*)
27 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B OUT 66 SIGNAL GROUND --
67 IN
29 ARINC 429 OUT 2 A OUT (STATIC SENSOR 2 HEATER ACTIVE*)
69 IN
32 ARINC 429 OUT 3 A OUT (PITOT SENSOR 1 HEATER ACTIVE*)
34 SIGNAL GROUND -- 71 ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 IN
35 ARINC 429 IN 2 A IN 72 SIGNAL GROUND --
36 ARINC 429 IN 2 B IN 73 ARINC 429 IN 3 A IN
37 SIGNAL GROUND -- 74 ARINC 429 IN 3 B IN
38 SPARE -- 75 SIGNAL GROUND --
39 SPARE -- 76 ARINC 429 IN 4 A IN
40 CONFIGDULE DATA I/O 77 ARINC 429 IN 4 B IN
41 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A OUT 78 SIGNAL GROUND --

Rev. V Page B-16
B.5.1.1 Power
The power-input pins accept 14/28 VDC. AIRCRAFT POWER 2 is for connecting to an alternate power
source, such as on aircraft with two electrical buses. AIRCRAFT POWER 1 (pin 55) and AIRCRAFT
POWER 2 (pin 58) are internally “diode ORed” to provide power redundancy.

OAT PROBE POWER OUT P741 2 OUT
B.5.1.2 Serial Data

B.5.1.2.1 RS-232 Input/Output

RS-232 IN1 P741 10 IN
RS-232 OUT 1 P741 11 OUT
RS-232 IN 2 P741 13 IN
RS-232 OUT 2 P741 14 OUT

Rev. V Page B-17
B.5.1.2.2 ARINC 429 Input/Output
The ARINC 429 transmitters currently operate at low speed. The receivers are capable of accepting either
high-speed or low-speed data. Unless high-speed transmission is necessary, low-speed transmission is
preferred.
Pin Name Connector Pin(s) I/O

ARINC 429 OUT 1 A P741 26, 41 OUT
ARINC 429 OUT 1 B P741 27, 42 OUT
ARINC 429 OUT 2 A P741 29, 44 OUT
ARINC 429 OUT 2 B P741 30, 45 OUT
ARINC 429 OUT 3 A P741 32, 47 OUT
ARINC 429 OUT 3 B P741 33, 48 OUT
ARINC 429 IN 1 A P741 23 IN
ARINC 429 IN 1 B P741 24 IN
SIGNAL GROUND P741 37

Rev. V Page B-18
B.5.1.3 Temperature Inputs
OAT PROBE POWER OUT P741 2 OUT
OAT PROBE IN HI P741 3 IN
OAT PROBE IN LO P741 4 IN

B.5.1.5 ADC ARINC 429 System ID Connections

ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 P741 6 IN
ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 P741 71 IN
By hard strapping the program pins to ground, the GDC 74( ) is assigned a system ID. IDs identify a
GDC 74( ) as an All Call, #1, #2, or #3 unit. For a single system, the pins are left open (All Call).
The GDC 74( ) has an associated Source/Destination Identifier (SDI or system ID) that is coded into its
GDC 74( ) ARINC 429 labels in a system with more than one GDC 74( ). The GDC 74( ) system ID is set
as follows:
Table B-3 P741 Strapping to Achieve Desired System ID
ARINC System ID 1 ARINC System ID 2
System ID Number
Pin 6 Pin 71
All Call Open Open
#1 Ground Open
#2 Open Ground
#3 Ground Ground

Rev. V Page B-19
B.6 GAD 43/43e Adapter
B.6.1 J431/P431 Connector (GAD 43/43e)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 J431
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 (GAD 43/43e)
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 P431
50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 (D-Sub)

WXR ROLL OUT LO
1 RESERVED -- 26 --
(50 mV/deg)
2 HEADING VALID OUT* OUT 27 SPARE DISC IN* 2 IN
3 ATTITUDE VALID RELAY NO -- 28 WXR ROLL OUT HI (50 mV/deg) OUT
4 ATTITUDE VALID RELAY NC -- 29 ROLL DC OUT OUT
AP INTERLOCK RELAY
5 -- 30 ROLL SYNCHRO OUT X OUT
COMMON
6 +26 VDC OUT OUT 31 PITCH SYNCHRO OUT X OUT
7 HDG SYNCHRO OUT Y OUT 32 ARINC 429 IN B IN
8 HDG SYNCHRO OUT X OUT 33 RS-232 OUT OUT
9 10VAC REF IN HI IN 34 26VAC LO --
10 10VAC REF IN LO IN 35 5VAC OUT LO --
11 SPARE DISC OUT* 2 OUT 36 5VAC OUT HI OUT
WXR PITCH OUT HI
12 OUT 37 115VAC REF IN LO IN
(50 mV/deg)
13 PITCH DC OUT OUT 38 115VAC REF IN HI IN
14 ROLL SYNCHRO OUT Y OUT 39 26VAC REF IN HI IN
15 PITCH SYNCHRO OUT Y OUT YAW RATE / BARO
40 --
16 ARINC 429 IN A IN CORRECTION GND
17 RS-232 IN IN 41 HDG SYNCHRO OUT Z OUT
18 26VAC OUT HI OUT PITCH AC OUT LO
42 --
(60 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg)
YAW RATE / BARO
19 OUT WXR PITCH OUT LO
CORRECTION OUT 43 --
(50 mV/deg)
ATTITUDE VALID RELAY
20 -- 44 ROLL SYNCHRO OUT Z OUT
COMMON
AP INTERLOCK RELAY VALID
21 -- 45 PITCH SYNCHRO OUT Z OUT
NC
AP INTERLOCK RELAY VALID
22 -- 46 RS-232 GND --
NO
ROLL AC OUT HI 47 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
23 OUT
(54 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) 48 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
PITCH AC OUT HI 49 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 IN
24 OUT
(60 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) 50 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 IN
ROLL AC OUT LO
25 --
(54 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg)

Rev. V Page B-20
B.6.1.1 Power
The GAD 43/43e will accept input power from 9 to 33 VDC. At least one of the power inputs should be
connected. Power inputs are diode-isolated to support power from multiple buses.

AIRCRAFT GROUND P431 47 --
AIRCRAFT GROUND P431 48 --
B.6.1.2 Power Supply Outputs

The GAD 43/43e will always provide a +26 VDC supply. The intent of this supply is for use with the
GAD 43 relays (to provide attitude validity information). When a 115 VAC reference input is provided, the
GAD 43/43e will provide a 26 VAC and 5 VAC output supply that will be in-phase with the provided
reference.
When provided with a 115 VAC input, the GAD 43/43e is capable of sourcing 300 mA (7.8 VA) at
26 VAC, and 250 mA (1.25 VA) at 5 VAC.

+26 VDC OUT P431 6 OUT
26VAC OUT HI P431 18 OUT
26VAC LO P431 34 --
5VAC OUT LO P431 35 --
115VAC REF IN HI P431 38 IN
115VAC REF IN LO P431 37 IN
B.6.1.3 Serial Data

B.6.1.3.1 RS-232
The RS-232 outputs have an output voltage swing of at least ±5V when driving a standard RS-232 load.

RS-232 IN P431 17 IN
RS-232 OUT P431 33 OUT
RS-232 GND P431 46 --

Rev. V Page B-21
B.6.1.3.2 ARINC 429
ARINC 429 IN A P431 16 IN
ARINC 429 IN B P431 32 IN
B.6.1.4 Gyro Emulation Interfaces

The GAD 43/43e is capable of emulating numerous standard attitude gyro interfaces described below.
B.6.1.4.1 Analog Pitch/Roll Output

The GAD 43/43e provides AC pitch and roll outputs intended for emulating gyros, such as the King
KI 256 and the Cessna/ARC G519. An input for 10 VAC reference voltage is also provided.
The GAD 43/43e provides DC pitch and roll outputs intended for emulating gyros, such as those used in
Century autopilots. DC pitch and roll outputs are referenced to GAD 43/43e ground.

PITCH AC OUT HI (60 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 24 OUT
ROLL AC OUT HI (54 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 23 OUT
PITCH DC OUT P431 13 OUT
ROLL DC OUT P431 29 OUT
PITCH AC OUT LO (60 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 42 --
ROLL AC OUT LO (54 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 25 --
Notes:
[1] Multi-function pins used for analog pitch/roll outputs (60 mV/deg and 54 mV/deg) and
isolated synchro AC outputs (200 mV/deg). Configuration determines the function of these
pins.

Rev. V Page B-22
B.6.1.4.2 Synchro (ARINC 407) Outputs
The GAD 43/43e provides synchro pitch, roll, and heading outputs. An input for 26 VAC reference voltage
is also provided. The GAD 43/43e can convert an 115 VAC inverter signal to a 26 VAC reference, if
desired.

HDG SYNCHRO OUT X P431 8 OUT
HDG SYNCHRO OUT Y P431 7 OUT
HDG SYNCHRO OUT Z P431 41 OUT
PITCH SYNCHRO OUT X P431 31 OUT
PITCH SYNCHRO OUT Y P431 15 OUT
PITCH SYNCHRO OUT Z P431 45 OUT
ROLL SYNCHRO OUT X P431 30 OUT
ROLL SYNCHRO OUT Y P431 14 OUT
ROLL SYNCHRO OUT Z P431 44 OUT
26VAC LO P431 34 --

Rev. V Page B-23
B.6.1.4.3 Isolated Synchro Outputs
The GAD 43/43e provides isolated synchro pitch and roll outputs. When the GAD 43/43e is configured to
emulate a remote-mount ARINC 407 gyro (such as the King KVG 350, Collins 332D-11, or the Sperry
VG-14A), these isolated synchro outputs are active. An input for 26 VAC reference voltage is also
provided. The GAD 43/43e can convert an 115V AC inverter signal to a 26 VAC reference, if desired.

PITCH AC OUT HI (60 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 24 OUT
ROLL AC OUT HI (54 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 23 OUT
PITCH AC OUT LO (60 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 42 --
ROLL AC OUT LO (54 mV/deg or 200 mV/deg) [1] P431 25 --
26VAC LO P431 34 --
Notes:
[1] Multi-function pins used for analog pitch/roll outputs (60 mV/deg and 54 mV/deg) and
isolated synchro AC outputs (200 mV/deg). Configuration determines the function of these
pins.
B.6.1.4.4 Weather Radar (Stabilization) Outputs

The GAD 43/43e provides weather radar pitch and roll stabilization outputs. When the GAD 43/43e is
configured to emulate a remote mount ARINC 407 gyro (such as the King KVG 350, Collins 332D-11, or
the Sperry VG-14A), the weather radar pitch and roll stabilization outputs are active. An input for 26 VAC
reference voltage is also provided. The GAD 43/43e can convert an 115 VAC inverter signal to a 26 VAC
reference, if desired. For wiring interconnect information to support this conversion, refer to Appendix F.

WXR PITCH OUT HI (50 mV/deg) P431 12 OUT
WXR ROLL OUT HI (50 mV/deg) P431 28 OUT
WXR PITCH OUT LO (50 mV/deg) P431 43 --
WXR ROLL OUT LO (50 mV/deg) P431 26 --
26VAC LO P431 34 --

Rev. V Page B-24
B.6.1.4.5 Yaw Rate Outputs
The GAD 43/43e provides one analog yaw rate output with configurable values of 100, 200, 333, and
666 mVDC/deg/sec. The output saturates at +4 VDC; polarity is positive voltage for clockwise yaw as
viewed from above the aircraft. A configuration of “None” implies that these output pins will be used for
barometric correction as described in the following section.

YAW RATE / BARO CORRECTION OUT [1] P431 19 OUT
YAW RATE / BARO CORRECTION GND [1] P431 40 --
Notes:
[1] Multi-function pins used for yaw rate output and baro correction output. Configuration
determines the function of these pins.
B.6.1.5 Baro Correction Outputs

The GAD 43/43e provides one analog barometric output for emulation of the King KEA-130 barometric
pickoff. The output varies from 0 to 5 VDC based on the barometric setting displayed on the GDU 620.
This interface is intended to be used in installations with the King KFC-225 autopilot. For wiring
interconnect information, refer to Appendix C. A yaw rate configuration of “None” is required for
barometric correction outputs to be active.

YAW RATE/BARO CORRECTION OUT [1] P431 19 OUT
YAW RATE/BARO CORRECTION GND [1] P431 40 --
Notes:
[1] Multi-function pins used for yaw rate output and baro correction output. Configuration
determines the function of these pins.

Rev. V Page B-25
B.6.1.6 Discretes
B.6.1.6.1 Discrete Input
Active-Low discrete inputs are considered active if either the voltage to ground is < 3.5 VDC or the
resistance to ground is < 375 Ω. These inputs are considered inactive if the voltage to ground is
6.5-33 VDC or the resistance to ground is >100 kΩ.

SPARE DISC IN* 2 (function not currently implemented) P431 27 IN
B.6.1.6.2 Discrete Outputs

All discrete outputs from the GAD 43/43e are Active-Low. Each is an “open drain” output capable of
sinking 250 mA when active.

HEADING VALID OUT* P431 2 OUT
SPARE DISC OUT* 2 (function not currently implemented) P431 11 OUT
B.6.1.7 Relays
The GAD 43/43e provides two relays that switch based on the validity of the attitude solution. The
normally-open (NO) contact on each relay is mechanically connected to the common (COMMON) contact
when the attitude solution is valid. The normally-closed (NC) contact on each relay is mechanically
connected to the common (COMMON) contact when the attitude solution is invalid.

ATTITUDE VALID RELAY NO P431 3 --
ATTITUDE VALID RELAY NC P431 4 --
ATTITUDE VALID RELAY COMMON P431 20 --
AP INTERLOCK RELAY VALID NO P431 22 --
AP INTERLOCK RELAY VALID NC P431 21 --
AP INTERLOCK RELAY COMMON P431 5 --

Rev. V Page B-26
B.6.2 J432/P432 Connector (GAD 43e Only)

-

*$'H

3

'6XE

1 ALTITUDE PRESELECT DATA I/O 40 DME RQST HI/DME SYNC IN HI I/O
2 GROUND -- 41 DME RQST LO/DME SYNC IN LO I/O
3 RS-232 IN 2 IN 42 DME RNAV RQST OUT OUT
4 RS-232 OUT 2 OUT 43 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A OUT
5 RS-232 GND 2 -- 44 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B OUT
6 OUTER MARKER EXT LAMP IN IN 45 GROUND --
7 MIDDLE MARKER EXT LAMP IN IN 46 ILS ENERGIZE #1 IN* IN
8 INNER MARKER EXT LAMP IN IN 47 ILS ENERGIZE #2 IN* IN
9 RADAR ALT VALID IN IN 48 GLIDESLOPE #1 VALID IN IN
10 GROUND -- 49 GLIDESLOPE #2 VALID IN IN
11 RESERVED -- 50 DME EXT TUNE K50 IN IN
12 RESERVED -- 51 DME SUPERFLAG IN IN
13 RESERVED -- 52 DME HOUT OUT* OUT
14 RESERVED -- 53 ALT HOLD* OUT
15 GROUND -- 54 GROUND --
16 RESERVED -- 55 RESERVED --
17 VS CMD OUT 56 RESERVED --
18 GROUND -- 57 RESERVED --
19 ALTITUDE ERROR OUT + OUT 58 PRESELECT MON+ POWER IN
20 ALTITUDE ERROR OUT - OUT 59 PRESELECT MON+ OUT OUT
21 ALTITUDE PRESELECT CLOCK I/O 60 DME CLOCK HI I/O
22 GROUND -- 61 DME CLOCK LO I/O
23 DME ARINC 429 IN A IN 62 DME DATA HI I/O
24 DME ARINC 429 IN B IN 63 DME DATA LO I/O
25 GROUND -- 64 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
26 RESERVED -- 65 DME EXT TUNE M8/MA/M0 IN IN
27 RESERVED -- 66 DME EXT TUNE M4/ME/M1 IN IN
28 RESERVED -- 67 DME EXT TUNE M2/MC/M2 IN IN
29 RESERVED -- 68 DME EXT TUNE M1/MD/M3 IN IN
30 PRESELECT ADDR 0/AP DISC SW IN 69 DME EXT TUNE K800/KA/K0 IN IN
31 PRESELECT ADDR 1 IN 70 DME EXT TUNE K400/KE/K1 IN IN
32 GROUND -- 71 DME EXT TUNE K200/KC/K2 IN IN
33 RESERVED OUT 72 DME EXT TUNE K100/KD/K3 IN IN
34 VS SELECT CTRL*/KNOB IN MOTION* OUT 73 GROUND --
35 DME COM NAV 1*/CH 1-2 SELECT* I/O 74 RESERVED --
36 DME COM NAV 2* IN 75 RESERVED --
37 RESERVED IN 76 GROUND --
38 GROUND -- 77 RESERVED --
39 RESERVED -- 78 RESERVED --

Rev. V Page B-27
B.6.3 J433/P433 Connector (GAD 43e Only)
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
10 J433
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 (GAD 43e)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 P433
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 (D-Sub)
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE #1 HI IN
2 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE #1 LO IN
3 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE #2 HI IN
4 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE #2 LO IN
5 GROUND --
6 GLIDESLOPE #1 +UP IN IN
7 GLIDESLOPE #1 +DN IN IN
8 GLIDESLOPE #2 +UP IN IN
9 GLIDESLOPE #2 +DN IN IN
10 RESERVED --
11 GROUND --
12 ADF BEARING X IN
13 ADF BEARING Y IN
14 ADF BEARING Z (GND) --
15 RADAR ALT IN HI IN
16 RADAR ALT IN LO IN
17 GROUND --
18 GROUND --
19 FD PITCH UP OUT/GS #2 VALID OUT OUT
20 FLIGHT DIR PITCH DOWN OUT (GND) --
21 FD ROLL RIGHT OUT/GS #1 VALID OUT OUT
22 FLIGHT DIR ROLL LEFT OUT (GND) --
23 FD PITCH UP IN/GS #2 +FLAG IN
24 FD PITCH DOWN IN/GS #2 -FLAG IN
25 FD ROLL RIGHT IN/GS #1 +FLAG IN
26 GD ROLL RIGHT IN/GS #1 -FLAG IN

Rev. V Page B-28
APPENDIX C OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
Figure C-1 GDU 620 Connector Locations .......................................................................................... C-2

Figure C-2 GDU 620 Dimensions and Center of Gravity..................................................................... C-3
Figure C-3 GMU 44 Dimensions and Center of Gravity ...................................................................... C-4
Figure C-4 GMU 44 (-20) Dimensions and Center of Gravity ............................................................. C-5
Figure C-7 Alternate Aircraft Mounting Holes for High Vibrations Using (P/N 115-00481-10) ........ C-8
Figure C-8 GSU 75(B) Dimensions and Center of Gravity .................................................................. C-9
Figure C-9 GSU 75(B) Connector and Remote Install Rack.............................................................. C-10
Figure C-10 GRS 77 and Remote Install Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity ............................. C-11
Figure C-13 GDC 74( ) Mounting Orientation Limits.......................................................................... C-14
Figure C-14 GDC 74( ) Vertical Surface Mounting Orientation .......................................................... C-15
Figure C-15 GDU 620 Cutout Dimensions........................................................................................... C-16
Figure C-16 Trim Plate (P/N 115-01009-( )) ........................................................................................ C-17
Figure C-17 GRS 77 Universal Mount Dimensions ............................................................................. C-18
Figure C-18 GMU 44 Universal Mount Dimensions............................................................................ C-20
Figure C-19 Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00 Dimensions ............................................................ C-22
Figure C-20 GTP 59 OAT Probe Dimensions ...................................................................................... C-23
Figure C-21 GAD 43 Dimensions and Center of Gravity..................................................................... C-24
Figure C-22 GAD 43e Dimensions and Center of Gravity................................................................... C-25

Rev. V Page C-1
Figure C-1 GDU 620 Connector Locations

Rev. V Page C-2
FAN 1 FAN 2
Figure C-2 GDU 620 Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. V Page C-3
&*
$,5&5$)7
02817,1*
685)$&(
Figure C-3 GMU 44 Dimensions and Center of Gravity

(Including Install Rack)

Rev. V Page C-4

&*

',0(16,216$5(120,1$/$1'72/(5$1&(6$5(
,167$//5$&.:,7+02817,1*+2/(6(7%
&*
&*
$,5&5$)702817,1*
685)$&(
Figure C-4 GMU 44 (-20) Dimensions and Center of Gravity

(Including Install Rack)

Rev. V Page C-5
AIRCRAFT MOUNTING HOLES FOR 115-00481-00
3X Ø.164 [Ø4.17]
THRU (IN THIN MATERIAL, USING LOCKING NUTS)
3X Ø.213 [Ø5.41]
OR
OPTIONAL CLEARANCE
DRILL AND TAP
HOLES FOR HOLD-DOWN SCREWS
# 6-32 UNC IN MATERIAL THICKER THAN 3/16 [18]
2.175 [55.25]
(120°)
FORWARD
2X 1.485 [37.72]
(120°)
.725 [18.42]
2.51 [63.75]
0 Ø
2 .49 [63.25]
.795 [20.19]
.061 1.256 [31.90] 2.511

[ 1.54] [ 63.79]
0 2.572 [65.33]
TOLERANCES
INCHES mm
.XX ± 0.010 .X ± 0.25
.XXX ± 0.005 .XX ± 0.13
GMU 44 INSTALL RACK

115-00481-00
Ø3.370 [Ø85.60]
Ø2.520 [Ø64.01]
NOTE:
1. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES [mm].
2. FOLLOW "FORWARD" AND "TOP" INDICATIONS ON UNIT AND RACK.
Figure C-5 GMU 44 Install Rack (P/N 115-00481-00)

Rev. V Page C-6
+2/(6(7$02817,1*
+2/(686(7+(6$0(
$,5&5$)702817,1*+2/(
3$77(51$67+(
,167$//5$&.
% %
$ $
+2/(6(7%02817,1*+2/(6
$5(86(':,7+7+($/7(51$7(
$,5&5$)702817,1*+2/(
3$77(51)25+,*+9,%5$7,21
,167$//$7,216:,7+7+(
,167$//5$&.
Figure C-6 GMU 44 Install Rack (P/N 115-00481-10)

Rev. V Page C-7
72/(5$1&(6
237,21$/&/($5$1&(
+2/(6)25+2/''2:16&5(:6
)25:$5'
86,1*/2&.,1*1876
25
'5,//$1'7$3

Figure C-7 Alternate Aircraft Mounting Holes for High Vibrations Using (P/N 115-00481-10)

Rev. V Page C-8

3
3,727$,5),77,1*
$137)(0$/(7+5($'

67$7,&$,5),77,1*
; $137)(0$/(7+5($'

3/$&(6
5$&.+(,*+7

;
127(6
',0(16,216,1&+(6>PP@0(75,&9$/8(6$5()255()(5(1&(21/<
',0(16,216$5(120,1$/$1'72/(5$1&(6$5(127,03/,('81/(66
63(&,),&$//<67$7('
02817,1*+2/(6)253$1+($'25+(;+($')$67(1(56
; >@

6((127(
Figure C-8 GSU 75(B) Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. V Page C-9
GSU 75 UNIT
011-03094-00
CONNECTOR KIT (5()(572 NOTE 2)

011-03109-00
CONFIGURATION MODULE (NOT SHOWN)

011-00979-20 NOTE 1
330-00776-78
011-01855-04
GSU 75 RACK
117-00608-00
NOTES:
1. GASKET IS PART OF 330-00776-78. INSTALL GASKET OVER PINS.
2. REFER TO 190-01639-00 FOR ADDITIONAL PARTS LISTS.
Figure C-9 GSU 75(B) Connector and Remote Install Rack

Rev. V Page C-10
NOTE:
1. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES [mm]
2. REMOTE INSTALL RACK IS NOT SYMMETRIC. GRS 77 UNIT MUST BE MOUNTED WITH CONNECTOR FORWARD.
3. USE FIVE #10 PAN HEAD OR BUTTON HEAD SCREWS TO SECURE MOUNTING PLATE TO RIGID LOCATION.
Figure C-10 GRS 77 and Remote Install Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. V Page C-11
GDC 74 (011- 00882- 10) OUTLINE DRAWING
FOR REMOTE MOUNTING OPTION I:
(CONNECTOR AND FITTINGS ARE OPPOSITE
THE SCREW DOWN MOUNTING HARDWARE.)
0.25 [6.2]
1.78 [45.2]
ALWAYS ORIENT BACKSHELL

WITH SLIDELOCK SPRING
1.78 TOWARDS THE TOP AS SHOWN
6.48 [164.6] [45.1]
J400
GPN 330 00366-78
.22 [81.8]
PITOT AIR FITTING:
1.40 1.88 [47.6] UNIT HAS 1/8 27 ANPT
[35.6] 0.98 FEMALE THREAD
[24.8]
0.99 3.58 2X 1.23 STATIC AIR FITTING:

[25.0] [90.9] [31.1] UNIT HAS 1/8 27 ANPT
1.38 FEMALE THREAD.
[35.1]
6X Ø.17 [4.3]
3.05 [77.5]
0.80
[20.2]
2.30
[58.3]
3.10
[78.5]
0.98 [24.8] 0.86 [21.8]

1.40
3.26 [82.8]
[35.6] 5.66 [143.8]
3.09 [78.5]
6.52 [165.6]
6.82 [173.2]
GDC 74 REMOTE MOUNT PLATE

TOP VIEW SHOWING MOUNTING HOLES
Figure C-11 GDC 74( ) and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option 1)

Rev. V Page C-12
GDC 74 (011 -00882 -10) OUTLINE DRAWING
FOR REMOTE MOUNTING OPTION II:
(CONNECTOR AND FITTINGS ARE ON SAME END
AS THE SCREW DOWN MOUNTING HARDWARE.)
3.05 [77.5]
1.07 [27.1]
1.78 [45.2]
.40 [35.6]
3.09 [78.5]
ALWAYS ORIENT BACKSHELL

WITH SLIDELOCK SPRING
0.31 [7.9] 6.48 [164.6] 1.78 [45.1] TOWARDS THE TOP AS SHOWN
3.22 [81.8]
1.40 [35.6]
3.78 [96.0]
J400
GPN 330 - 00366- 78
PITOT AIR FITTING:

1.88 [47.6] UNIT HAS 1/8 27
- ANPT FEMALE THREAD.
0.98 [24.8]
2X 1.23 [31.1] STATIC AIR FITTING:

UNIT HAS 1/8 27
- ANPT FEMALE THREAD.
Figure C-12 GDC 74( ) and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option 2)

Rev. V Page C-13
MOUNTING ORIENTATION
VERTICAL
MOUNT
UP
45°
90°
PAST VERTICAL
MOUNT
NOTES:
1. ORIENTATION MUST BE LIMITED TO RANGE SHOWN

HORIZONTAL TO AVOID FLUID ACCUMULATION INSIDE UNIT.
MOUNT
2. UNIT MAY BE ORIENTED AS SHOWN IN ANY POSITION
FROM HORIZONTAL TO 45 DEGREES PAST VERTICAL.
Figure C-13 GDC 74( ) Mounting Orientation Limits

Rev. V Page C-14
GDC 74B (011-01110-XX) AND GDC 74A (011-00882-XX)
VERTICAL SURFACE MOUNTING ORIENTATION
UP
45°
45°
MAX
MAX
NOTES:
1. ORIENTATION MUST BE LIMITED TO RANGE SHOWN TO AVOID FLUID ACCUMULATION INSIDE UNIT.
2. UNIT MAY BE ORIENTED ON VERTICAL SURFACE AS SHOWN. MOUNTING ORIENTATION MUST BE WITHIN 45 DEGREES OF VERTICAL.
Figure C-14 GDC 74( ) Vertical Surface Mounting Orientation

Rev. V Page C-15
0.108 0.108
A3 A5
R0.125
0.365
0.313
9.460
16° HOLE TABLE GDU 620 FASTENERS R0.125

0.098 TAG X LOC Y LOC SIZE
0.181-100
A1 -0.090 3.330
0.21
0.560
A2 -0.070 0.080
9
DETAIL A A3 -0.070 6.380 R0.691
6.460
A SCALE 1 : 1 A4 9.530 0.080
0.144 THRU A6
TYP. 6 PLCS
6.300
A5 9.530 6.380
A1
A6 9.550 3.330
0.090
0.21
8
0.320
4.240
GDU 620 CUTOUT
3.250
0.040
0 X
1.740
0.365
0.313
Y
A2 0 A4
0.108 0.088
0.080
9.600
Figure C-15 GDU 620 Cutout Dimensions

Rev. V Page C-16
UP
RIGHT
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION THICKNESS (in)

115-01009-00 TRIM PLATE, THIN 0.032
115-01009-10 TRIM PLATE, THICK 0.063
NOTES:
1. TWO TRIM PLATES ARE AVAILABLE. BOTH ARE 2024-T3 ALUMINUM, WITH THICKNESSES OF 0.032" AND 0.063".
2. TRIM PLATE IS CHROMATED. IT MUST BE CUT TO THE CORRECT SIZE AND PAINTED TO MATCH EACH INSTALLATION.
Figure C-16 Trim Plate (P/N 115-01009-( ))

Rev. V Page C-17
1.50
8.50
1.50
115-00909-00 ANGLE, AHRS BRKT MOUNTING
Figure C-17 GRS 77 Universal Mount Dimensions

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page C-18
9.11
3.92
1.61
115-00922-00 BRACKET, TOP, AHRS, UNIV
Figure C-17 GRS 77 Universal Mount Dimensions

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page C-19
3.87 1.72
3.73
1.00
3.25
115-01017-01 BRACKET, MAGNETOMETER, TOP, UNIV
Figure C-18 GMU 44 Universal Mount Dimensions

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page C-20
3.77
2.03 0.75
3.59 2.50
2.50
1.56
115-00939-01 BRACKET, MAGNETOMETER, UNIV
Figure C-18 GMU 44 Universal Mount Dimensions

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page C-21
UP
OUTER PERIMETER OF
TEMPLATE IS SAME SIZE
AS GDU 620 BEZEL
RIGHT
10.00
9.600
3.050
6.459 6.70
3.250
CUTOUT PERIMETER
9.459
CUTOUT REPRESENTS
PFD DISPLAY AREA
NOTES:
1. CUTOUT TEMPLATE IS MADE FROM STAINLESS STEEL AND CAN BE USED FOR MULTIPLE
INSTALLATIONS.
2. CUTOUT TEMPLATE SHOULD BE TEMPORARILY AFFIXED TO INSTRUMENT PANEL IN DESIRED
LOCATION PRIOR TO MARKING CUTOUT THE OUTSIDE EDGES OF THE CUTOUT PATTERN SHOULD
BE USED WHEN MARKING THE CUTOUT ONTO THE INSTRUMENT PANEL.
3. INSTRUMENT PANEL HOLES FOR GDU MOUNTING NUTPLATES SHOULD BE DRILLED USING A #30
(0.1285 ") DRILL BIT PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF THE TEMPLATE FROM THE INSTRUMENT PANEL . THE
HOLES ARE RESIZED LATER TO THEIR FINAL DIAMETER.
Figure C-19 Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00 Dimensions

Rev. V Page C-22
10FT±6"
M27500-22TE3V14 CABLE
5/16-32 UNEF-2A
0.563
Ø0.255
1.015 0.500
2.065
Figure C-20 GTP 59 OAT Probe Dimensions

Rev. V Page C-23
Figure C-21 GAD 43 Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. V Page C-24
Figure C-22 GAD 43e Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. V Page C-25
APPENDIX D SAMPLE INSTALLATIONS
D.1 Sample Instrument Panel Layouts .................................................................................................D-2

D.2 GMU 44 Installation Examples ...................................................................................................D-10
D.3 GDC 74( ) Installation Examples .................................................................................................D-14
D.4 GAD 43/43e Installation Examples .............................................................................................D-17
NOTE
The following figures are examples only. For specific installation guidance, refer to
Section 3.2.

Rev. V Page D-1
D.1 Sample Instrument Panel Layouts
Audio Panel
20
200 40
180
60
160 VOR INDICATOR
Clock 80
140
120 100 Nav/Com 1
Vac
d.c.
elec.
6
3 E 10
15
5 VERTICAL
12
SPEED
Fuel Qty UP 20
33
VOR INDICATOR Nav/Com 2
15
0
turn coordinator DN
100 FEET 20
30
S
PER MIN
L R 5
21 15
2 min W
24 10
no pitch
information
Elec Current
ADF
Tachometer ADF
Transponder
BEFORE MODIFICATION
Audio Panel
Clock
*
Vac
GNS 530W
20
200 40
Fuel Qty 180
60
160
80
140
120 100
Elec Current
GNS 430W
Tachometer
Transponder
* IF DESIRED, CLOCK MAY BE REMOVED TO MAKE SPACE FOR ANOTHER INSTRUMENT.
AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-1 Installation of GDU 620 with Ideal Instrument Configuration

Rev. V Page D-2
Nav/Com 1
VOR INDICATOR
20
200 40
180
60
160
80
140
120 100
10
15 Nav/Com 2
6 5 VERTICAL
3 E SPEED
UP 20
N 0
d.c. 12 VOR INDICATOR
elec. 20
3 DN 100 FEET
3 1 PER MIN
5 5
0 15
3 10
S
W
42 12
turn coordinator Audio Panel
L R
2 min 6
no pitch
information ADF
3 E
12
Transponder
3 1
5
03
Clock S
S 12
OB
BEFORE MODIFICATION
GNS 530W
200 40
180
60
160
80
140
120 100
GNS 430W
Audio Panel
*
Clock
Transponder
*CLOCK MAY BE REMOVED TO MAKE SPACE FOR ANOTHER INSTRUMENT, IF DESIRED.
AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-2 Installation of GDU 620 with Non-Ideal Instrument Configuration

Rev. V Page D-3
S- TEC
Placard
20
200 40
180
60
160
Clock 80
140
120 100
SANDEL SN3308
3 6 d.c.
elec.
E N
A
v
u 10
N V e 15
12 5 VERTICAL
SPEED
M UP 20
33 A
P
15 0
DN 20
30 turn coordinator B
R
100 FEET
PER MIN
S L R
G 5
15
W 21 2 min 10
OBS 24 no pitch
information
shft sync a-b
Switches
Ignition Vent
BEFORE MODIFICATION
S- TEC
Placard
20
200 40
180
60
160
80
140
120 100
Switches
Ignition Vent
AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-3 Installation of GDU 620 with Standby Instruments

on Stepped Part of Instrument Panel

Rev. V Page D-4
Electrical Gauges
Audio Panel
Transponder
3 6
E
200 40 N
180 12
60 3
160 3 1 Tachometer
5
140 80 0
3 S
120 100 W
4 2 12
BS
O GNS 530
060
3 6 10
E 15
5
N 12 20
3
3 1 0 Blank Fuel Flow/Pressure
5
20
03
S
L R 5
W
2 42 12 10
15
min VOR 1 VOR 2
ijav ooo ORD
1.2 NM
GNS 430
Clock EADS
BEFORE MODIFICATION
Electrical Gauges
Audio Panel
Transponder
Tachometer
200 40
180
60
160
80
140
120 100
GNS 530W
Fuel Flow/Pressure
GNS 430W
Clock
EADS
AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-4 Installation of GDU 620 Using 2 1/4-Inch Backup Instruments

Rev. V Page D-5

+'*
KJ
LzLJ

1 (

=(57,&$/
63(('
<3

JKPH '1
6 )((7
> 3(50,1
/ 5

P =25 =25
PJO PQH 25'
PMHP 10
1

(
>

6
BEFORE MODIFICATION
AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-5 Installation of GDU 620 with Standby Instruments Below

Rev. V Page D-6
Blank Blank
3 6 Audio Panel
20 E
200 N
40 12
180
160
60 33
15
80 30
140 Nav/Com 1
100 S
120 W
OBS
24 21
d.c.
elec.
3 6 Nav/Com 2
E 10
15
N 5 VERTICAL
12 SPEED
UP 20
33
15 0 Blank
turn coordinator
30
DN 100 FEET 20
PER MIN
S 5
L R
2 min W 21 10 15
no pitch
24 Transponder
information
BEFORE MODIFICATION
Blank
Audio Panel
GNS 430W
GNS 430W
Transponder
AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-6 Installation of GDU 620 Using Both 2 1/4-Inch and 3 1/8-Inch Backup
Instruments

Rev. V Page D-7
20
200 40
180
60 OIL PRESSURE/
160
TEMP
CLOCK 80 VOLTS
140
120 100 AMPS
d.c.
elec. 3 6
E 3 6
E 10
15
N 12 N 5 VERTICAL
12 SPEED
UP 20
33 33
MAP
15 15 0 TACH
turn coordinator DN
100 FEET 20
30 30
S
PER MIN
L R S W
5
15
2 min W 24 21 10
no pitch
information
OBS
24 21
GPS
Nav/Com
Transponder
BEFORE MODIFICATION
OIL PRESSURE/
TEMP
VOLTS/
AMPS
20
200 40
180
60
160 TACH MAP
80
140
120 100
GPS
Nav/Com
Transponder
AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-7 Installation of GDU 620 in Tandem Aircraft – Front Instrument Panel

Rev. V Page D-8

PDQLIROG

SUHVVXUH

$,563(('

.1276 / 5
USP

PLQ

3/$&$5'$5($ 3/$&$5'$5($
BEFORE MODIFICATION

HPMzK
LL

AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-8 Installation of GDU 620 in Bonanza Model 35

Rev. V Page D-9
D.2 GMU 44 Installation Examples
For non-conductive composite aircraft installations, stainless screws with stainless self-locking nuts are an
acceptable installation method.
MOUNTING
PLATE
6-32 NUTPLATE &

RIVETS (2X)
STAINLESS
6-32 SCREW
& WASHER (2X)
GMU 44 UNIVERSAL
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
Figure D-9 Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Mounted

Rev. V Page D-10
6-32 LOCKING NUT &
WASHER (2X) MOUNTING
PLATE
GMU 44 UNIVERSAL
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
6-32 SCREW &

WASHER (2X)
Figure D-10 Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Mounted
MOUNTING
PLATE
6-32 LOCKING NUT
AND WASHER (2X)
6-32 SCREW &

WASHER (2X)
Figure D-11 Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Suspended - Side
Mounted

Rev. V Page D-11
-32 LOCKING NUT &
WASHER (4X)
GMU 44 UNIVERSAL
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING PLATE
6-32 SCREW &

WASHER (4X)
Figure D-12 Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Bottom Mounted

Rev. V Page D-12
6-32 SCREW &
WASHER (4X)
MOUNTING PLATE
6-32 LOCKING NUT &

WASHER (4X)
GMU 44 UNIVERSAL
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
Figure D-13 Bottom Suspended Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount

Rev. V Page D-13
D.3 GDC 74( ) Installation Examples
*'&$
(;,67,1*)/2253$1(/251(:68332573$1(/
5()(5725(48,5(0(1766(&7,21)25 ,1
5(&200(1'('7+,&.1(66$1''(6,*1)($785(6 &/($5$1&(
68332573$1(/6+28/'%(
)$67(1('72($&+$,5)5$0(
0(0%(5$&52667+(63$1
(;,67,1*
$,5)5$0(
0(0%(5
6.,1
Figure D-14 Installation of GDC 74( ) to Mounting Plate
GDC 74( ) UNIT
AIRFRAME
STRINGER
MOUNTING
BRACKET
FASTENING
HARDWARE
Figure D-15 Installation of GDC 74( ) – Horizontal Orientation

Rev. V Page D-14
1 SCREW (6 REQ'D)
BULKHEAD
MOUNTING SURFACE
2 115 -00573 -00

REMOTE MOUNT PLATE, GDC 74A
(PART OF 011 -01011 -00)
GDC 74A UNIT

CONNECTION ORIENTED DOWN
1 NUTPLATE
RIVET (2X)
115 -00574 -00 2 UP
HOLD -DOWN CLAMP, GDC 74A
(6 REQ'D);
(PART OF 011 -01011 -00)
(ALTERNATELY MAY USE
NUT AND WASHER)
NOTES:
WASHERS AN960 -6; AN960 -6L; NAS1149FN632P; RIVETS MS20426AD3 -X
OR NAS1149FN616P
OR
NUTPLATES
2. THE REMOTE MOUNT PLATE MAY ALTERNATELY BE INSTALLED WITH THE HOLD-DOWN CLAMP AT THE
TOP OF THE INSTALLATION, SO IT IS AT THE OPPOSITE SIDE FROM THE GDC 74A CONNECTIONS. THE
CONNECTION PORTS HOWEVER ARE ALWAYS ORIENTED DOWN.
Figure D-16 Installation of GDC 74( ) – Vertical Orientation
SKIN
PRE-ASSEMBLED MOUNTING
UP PLATE (ANGLE ON REVERSE)
EXISTING GDC 74A UNIT

STRUCTURE
MS20470AD4-X RIVET OR
CR3213-4-X OR
#6 SCREW / WASHER / LOCKING NUT
(DO NOT MIX) (A/R)
115-00573-00
115-00574-00
REMOTE MOUNT PLATE, GDC 74A
HOLD-DOWN CLAMP, GDC 74A
(PART OF 011 -01011-00)
(PART OF 011 -01011-00)
Figure D-17 Installation of GDC 74( ) – Vertical Orientation using Stringers

Rev. V Page D-15
SKIN
MOUNTING ORIENTATION
MEETS CRITERIA FOR
ANGLE <45° FROM VERTICAL
MOUNTING PLATE ASSY
UP (FABRICATED 0.050 - 0.063"
2024-T3 ALUM)
SKIN GDC 74A UNIT
EXISTING
CONNECTIONS 1
STRUCTURE
MS20470AD4-X RIVET OR
#6 SCREW / WASHER /
LOCKING NUT
(DO NOT MIX) (A/R)
DIM A DIM B (SPACING)

TRIM ANGLE A/R
ENSURE NO CONTACT DIM A
115-00574-00 2
HOLD-DOWN CLAMP, GDC 74A
(PART OF 011 -01011-00)
0.19 MIN HARDWARE DIM. A DIM. B

ANGLE LEG MIN. MAX.
DETAIL RIVETS 0.25" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
SCREWS 0.30" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
NOTES: 00303 15 GDC 74A INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR APPROVED PRACTICES WHILE
1. REFER TO 190-00303-15 GDC INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR APPROVED PRACTICES WHILE

INSTALLING LINES AND CONNECTIONS.
2. THE REMOTE MOUNTING PLATE MAY ALTERNATELY BE INSTALLED WITH THE HOLD - DOWN
CLAMP AT THE TOP OF THE INSTALLATION, SO IT IS AT THE OPPOSITE SIDE FROM THE GDC 74A
CONNECTIONS. THE CONNECTION PORTS HOWEVER ARE ALWAYS ORIENTED DOWN.
UP MOUNTING
2 RIVETS 1
SUPPORT PLATE
A / R FOR SUPPORT ANGLE
ANGLE
SCREW 1
(6 REQ'D FOR ORIENTATION)
NUT 1 115 -00573 -00

WASHER 1 REMOTE MOUNT PLATE, GDC 74A
(6 REQ'D) (PART OF 011 - 01011-00)
NOTES:
SCREWS MS35206 (#6 - 32 LENGTH A/R); OR NAS601 (#6-32 LENGTH A/R)
WASHERS AN960 -6; AN960 -6L; NAS1149FN632P;
RIVETS MS20426AD 3-X
OR NAS1149FN616P
OR
NUTS AN364 - 632A (MS21083N06); NUTPLATES STANDARD PART; ANY MS (MILITARY
2. THE MATERIAL OF THE SUPPORT ANGLE SHOULD MINIMALLY BE 0.5" X 0.5" X 0.063" 2024-T3 or 6061 -T6
ALUMINUM. T RIM THE ANGLE LEG THAT IS NORMAL TO THE MOUNTING PLATE AS REQUIRED TO AVOID CONTACT
WITH SKIN OR EXISTING STRUCTURES. ONLY ONE ANGLE IS REQUIRED.

Rev. V Page D-16
D.4 GAD 43/43e Installation Examples
UP SCREW 1
(4 REQ'D, 2 OPTIONAL
FOR ORIENTATION )
RIVETS 1
A / R FOR SUPPORT ANGLE
011-01970-00
GAD 43 GYRO ADAPTER
MOUNTING
PLATE
NUT
WASHER 1
(6 REQ'D)
2
SUPPORT
ANGLE
MOUNTING
NOTES: PLATE
SCREWS MS35206 (#8-32 LENGTH A/R); OR NAS602 (#8-32 LENGTH A/R)
WASHERS AN960 -8; AN960-8L; NAS1149FN832P; RIVETS MS20426AD3 -X
OR NAS114 9FN816P
OR
NUTS AN364 -832A (MS21083N08); NUTPLATES STANDARD PART; ANY MS (MILITARY
2. THE MATERIAL OF THE SUPPORT ANGLE SHOULD MINIMALLY BE 0.5" X 0.5" X 0.063" 2024- T3 or 6061 -T6
ALUMINUM. TRIM THE ANGLE LEG THAT IS NORMAL TO THE MOUNTING PLATE AS REQUIRED TO AVOID CONTACT
Figure D-20 Fabrication of Mounting Plate Assembly for GAD 43/43e

Short Orientation Installation (GAD 43 Shown)

Rev. V Page D-17
UP SKIN
MOUNTING PLATE ASSY

(FABRICATED 0.050 - 0.063"
2024 -T3 ALUM)
GAD 43/43e UNIT

EXISTING
SKIN STRUCTURE
MS20470AD4 -X RIVET OR
#6 SCREW / WASHER /
LOCKING NUT
(DO NOT MIX) (A/R)
ANGLE MAY BE TRIMMED

AS REQUIRED TO
DIM A
ENSURE NO CONTACT
WITH SKIN OR STRUCTURE
DIM B (SPACING)
DIM A
0.19 MIN
DETAIL ANGLE LEG
MIN. MAX.
RIVETS 0.25" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
SCREWS 0.30" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
MS20470AD4 -X RIVET, OR
CR3213 -4-X, OR PRE-ASSEMBLED
1 #6 SCREW / WASHER / LOCKING NUT OR NUTPLATE MOUNTING PLATE
(DO NOT MIX RIVETS AND NUTPLATES) (ANGLE ON REVERSE)
(A/R)
PRE-ASSEMBLED
MOUNTING PLATE
(ANGLE ON REVERSE)
GAD 43/43e UNIT
EXISTING
STRUCTURE
UP
NOTES:
WASHERS AN960 -6; AN960 -6L; NAS1149FN632P; RIVETS MS20426AD3 -X
OR NAS1149FN616P
OR STANDARD PART; ANY MS (MILITARY
NUTS AN364 -632A (MS21083N06); NUTPLATES
Figure D-21 Installation of GAD 43/43e - Short Orientation

Using Fabricated Plate Assembly on Existing Structure (GAD 43 Shown)

Rev. V Page D-18
EXISTING
STRUCTURE
GAD 43/43e UNIT

SCREW 1
UP
VIEW LOOKING DOWN AT GAD 43 UNIT INSTALLATION
EXISTING
STRUCTURE
EXISTING
STRUCTURE
VIEW LOOKING FROM SIDE
SCREW 1
EXISTING NUTPLATES
STRUCTURE INSTALLED
(A/R)
NOTES:
SCREWS MS35206 (#8 -32 LENGTH A/R); OR NAS602 (#8 -32 LENGTH A /R)
WASHERS AN960 -8; AN960 -8L; NAS1149FN832P;
RIVETS MS20426AD3 -X
OR NAS1149FN816P
OR
NUTPLATES
VIEW LOOKING UP AT NUTPLATE INSTALLATION 2. THE MATERIAL OF THE SUPPORT ANGLE SHOULD MINIMALLY BE 0.5" X 0.5" X 0.063" 2024 -T3 or 6061 -T6
ALUMINUM. TRIM THE A NGLE LEG THAT IS NORMAL TO THE MOUNTING PLATE AS REQUIRED TO AVOID CONTACT
Figure D-22 Installation of GAD 43/43e – Tall Orientation

Existing Shelves in Aircraft (GAD 43 Shown)

Rev. V Page D-19
APPENDIX E EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION
E.1 Electronic and Electromechanical Standby Indicators .................................................................. E-2

E.2 GPS Source .................................................................................................................................... E-4
E.3 Autopilot ........................................................................................................................................ E-5
E.4 External Flight Directors ............................................................................................................... E-9
E.5 Navigation Receivers (ARINC 429) ............................................................................................ E-11
E.6 Traffic Source .............................................................................................................................. E-12
E.7 Data Link ..................................................................................................................................... E-14
E.8 2 ¼-inch Standby Airspeed Indicators and Altimeters ................................................................ E-15
E.9 ADF Receiver (Interfaced to GDU 620) ...................................................................................... E-16
E.10 Weather Radar Source ................................................................................................................. E-17
E.11 Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source ........................................................................................ E-18
E.12 External TAWS Source ............................................................................................................... E-18
E.13 GDU 620 Serial Altitude (RS-232) ............................................................................................. E-18
E.14 GAD 43/43e – Autopilot Compatibility - Attitude Source .......................................................... E-19
E.15 Radar Altimeters .......................................................................................................................... E-21
E.16 External Video Sources ............................................................................................................... E-22
E.17 Audio Panels ................................................................................................................................ E-23
E.18 Miscellaneous Systems ................................................................................................................ E-24
E.19 GAD 43e – Analog Navigation Receiver Compatibility ............................................................. E-24
E.20 GAD 43e – Autopilot Compatibility – Altitude Preselect/Vertical Speed Select ....................... E-25
E.21 GAD 43e – Analog Radar Altimeter Compatibility .................................................................... E-26
E.22 GAD 43e – Synchro ADF Receiver Compatibility ..................................................................... E-26
E.23 GAD 43e – DME Compatibility .................................................................................................. E-27
E.24 GAD 43e – Marker Beacon Receiver Compatibility ................................................................... E-28
E.25 Stall Protection and Warning Unit (Fast/Slow Indication) Compatibility (G600 Only) ............. E-28
The following equipment listed in this appendix is compatible with the G500/G600 system when
configured as described. For G500/G600 configuration information, refer to Section 5.5.

Rev. V Page E-1
E.1 Electronic and Electromechanical Standby Indicators
NOTE
Not all aircraft models are eligible to use an electromechanical/electronic indicator as a standby instrument. For eligibility, refer to Table K-1.
Nonmetallic aircraft may require additional lightning protection. Refer to Table K-2.
If an electric/electronic indicator is used, it must be one listed in Table E-1.
NOTE
The GI 275 is approved as a standby indicator for the G500/G600 system under the GI 275 Part 23 AML STC SA02658SE.
For electronic and electromechanical instrument requirements, refer to the following sections:
• Standby instruments Section 2.5.2
• Power distribution Section 2.5.4
• Pitot-static plumbing Section 2.5.5
• Location and mounting Section 3.2.2
• Cable and wiring Section 3.4
• Interface limitations Section 7.2.2
Table E-1 Electronic and Electromechanical Standby Indicators:
Manufacturer Model Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
• G5 must be configured as an attitude indicator
• G5 must be equipped with a G5 standby battery pack
• If dual GPS sources are installed with the G500/G600 system, the
G5 must be interfaced with GPS #1 source for GPS attitude data via
Garmin G5 Attitude Indicator [5] [7] [8] [9] the RS-232 MapMX interface
• The G5 must configure the V-Speed tape colors to match the
Electronic
GDU 620 V-Speed settings.

• Must use GDU 620 v7.30 or later and G5 v5.50 or later.
If aircraft has variable Vne/Vmo, the Vne/Vmo schedule must be
ESI-1000 [3] [5]
programmed into the ESI-1000.
L-3 Communications
If aircraft has variable Vne/Vmo, the Vne/Vmo schedule must be
ESI-2000 [3] [5]
programmed into the ESI-2000.
MD302 If aircraft has variable Vne/Vmo, the Vne/Vmo schedule must be
Mid-Continent Instruments [4] [5] [6]
MOD 1 or later programmed into the MD302.

Rev. V Page E-2
Manufacturer Model Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
2 1/4-inch electric
Electromechanical
4200 Must be used with MD420 Emergency Power System. [1] [2]
attitude indicator
Mid-Continent Instruments
3 1/8-inch electric
4300-4XX With supplied Standby Battery Pack.
attitude indicator
Notes:
[1] The MD420 Emergency Power System must be mounted in the instrument panel area in nonmetallic aircraft.
[2] The MD420 Emergency Power System must be mounted in a pressurized area if installed in pressurized aircraft.
[3] Must be installed in accordance with the requirements in this installation manual and AML STC SA02738CH, except circuit breaker must be labeled
“STBY ATT” instead of “ATTITUDE” as specified in the STC. For additional labeling information, refer to Section 2.5.3.1. If used, the ESI-1000/2000
Magnetometer must not be collocated with the G500/G600 GMU 44(s).
[4] Must be installed in accordance with the requirements in this manual and AML STC SA01969SE.
[5] Installation approval for this indicator is not provided by this STC and must be obtained separately. This STC only approves compatibility of the
indicator as a standby instrument for the G500/G600.
[6] For instructions to determine unit MOD level, refer to Mid-Continent Manual P/N 9017782, Revision F or later.
[7] Must be installed in accordance with the requirements in this installation manual and the G5 Part 23 AML STC SA01818WI, except circuit breaker
must be labeled “STBY ATT” instead of “ATT” or “ATTITUDE”, as specified in the G5 Part 23 AML STC. For additional labeling information, refer to
Section 2.5.3.1. If used, the GMU 11 must not be collocated with the G500/G600 GMU 44(s).
[8] The G5 is not eligible to be used as a standby instrument for the G500/G600 system in aircraft that have variable Vne/Vmo.
[9] The G5 can only be installed as a standby instrument under this STC in Class I aircraft (single reciprocating engine aircraft with a maximum takeoff
weight of 6,000 lbs. or less) that are listed on both the G5 Part 23 AML STC (SA01818WI) and G500/G600 Part 23 AML STC (SA02153LA-D).

Rev. V Page E-3
E.2 GPS Source
The GPS position sources listed in Table E-2 are compatible with the GDU 620.
Table E-2 Compatible GPS Position Sources

Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
Main ARINC 429 Config: IN 1: Low, Garmin GDU
OUT: High, GAMA 429
SDI: LNAV 1 (for GPS 1)
Main software v3.10 or later is LNAV 2 (for GPS 2)
required. VNAV: Enable Labels
ARINC 429 Main RS-232 Config: CHNL 1: Off / MapMX
400W/500W series If a 500W TAWS unit is Single G500/G600 Installations
RS-232
installed, it must be Main CDI/OBS Config: Allow CDI Key
connected as GPS1. (i.e., CDI can be GPS or VLOC)
Dual G500/G600 Installations
Main CDI/OBS Config: Ignore CDI Key
(i.e., CDI is GPS Only)
Serial Setup: CH 1 (RX/TX): MapMX / MapMX
ARINC 429 Setup: CH 2 IN: Garmin GDU, Low
Sys 1 (for GPS 1)
Sys 2 (for GPS 2)
CH 1 OUT: GAMA 429
ARINC 429 Software v2.30 or later is
GNS 480 Single G500/G600 Installations
RS-232 required. Misc Setup: CDI SELECT:USE
Garmin (i.e., CDI can be GPS or NAV)
Misc Setup: CDI SELECT: IGNORE
ARINC 429 Setup: IN 2: Low, GDU Format 1
OUT 2: High, GAMA Format 1
SDI: LNAV1 (for GPS 1)
LNAV2 (for GPS 2)
RS-232 Setup: CHNL 2: Off / MapMX
(MapMX Format 1 for GTN software v6.00 and later)
Single G500/G600 Installations
ARINC 429
GTN 6XX/7XX Interfaced Equipment: GDU # 1 - Present - GDU 620
RS-232 Main Indicator (Analog) Config: CDI Key - Enabled
(i.e., CDI can be GPS or VLOC)
Interfaced Equipment: GDU # 1 - Present - GDU 620
GDU # 2 - Present - GDU 620
Main Indicator (Analog) Config: CDI Key - Disabled

Rev. V Page E-4
E.3 Autopilot
The autopilots listed in Table E-3 are compatible with the GDU 620. For a listing of which autopilots may use the GAD 43/43e as an attitude source, refer to
Appendix Section E.14. For a listing of autopilots compatible with the Altitude Preselect function of the GAD 43e, refer to Appendix Section E.20.
NOTE
This section includes compatibility with the basic autopilot computer but does not include compatibility with the flight director interface to the
autopilot computer. For compatibility with the autopilot computer flight director outputs, refer to Appendix Section E.4.
Table E-3 Compatible Autopilots

Bendix M4C, M4D Analog [3] Attitude-based autopilot. Any variant of the 5536E/F Computer-Amplifier. [10]
II / III Analog [3] Attitude-based autopilot. G500/G600 can interface with radio coupler only.
IV Analog [3] Attitude-based autopilot.
Century
21 / 31 /41 Analog [3] Attitude-based autopilot. [13]
2000 Analog [3] Attitude-based autopilot.
400B Analog [3] Attitude-based autopilot.
For 400 IFCS, the mode control panel must be
300 IFCS/400 IFCS/800
Analog [3] Attitude-based autopilot. adjusted NOT to attenuate the heading or course error
IFCS
signal. [15]
Cessna
G519( ) attitude gyro may replace G550A or G1050A
300B/400B/800B IFCS Analog [3] Attitude-based autopilot. ADI to provide attitude information to the autopilot
system. [15]
1000A IFCS Analog [3] Attitude-based autopilot. [11] [15]
APS-65 (APC-65/65A/
65B/65C/65E/65F/65G/
Analog [3] Attitude-based autopilot. [8]
Collins 65H/65J, FGC-65( ),
FYD-65)
AP-106/107 Analog [3] Attitude-based autopilot.

Rev. V Page E-5
The GFC 500 autopilot system requires the Garmin
G5 Electronic ADI IAW the G5 Part 23 AML STC, with
the following corresponding ARINC 429 settings on
the G5 for the GAD 29(B) to GDU 620 interface shown
in Figure F-48.
Attitude-based autopilot. The • GDU 620 ARINC 429 INPUT “GFC 500” to
pilot’s GDU 620 is directly G5/GAD29(B) ARINC 429 Output “Garmin G500”
interfaced with the GAD 29(B) • GDU 620 ARINC 429 OUTPUT "GFC 500" to
GFC 500 ARINC 429
via ARINC 429 to communicate G5/GAD29(B) ARINC 429 Input "Garmin G500 Data"
Garmin data to/from the G5/GFC 500 • GDU 620 ARINC 429 OUTPUT "GFC 500 NAV" to
autopilot system. G5/GAD29(B) ARINC 429 Input "Garmin G500 Nav"
For further installation details and configuration of a
G5/GFC 500 system, see G5 Part 23 AML STC
Installation Manual (P/N 190-01112-10) and GFC 500
Autopilot Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual
(P/N 190-02291-00). [20]
For further installation details and configuration of a
GFC 600 HSDB [22] Attitude-based autopilot. GFC 600 system, see GFC 600 AFCS Part 23 AML
STC Installation Manual (P/N 190-01937-00). [21]
KAP 100/150/200
Analog [3] Attitude-based autopilot. [1] [2] [4]
KFC 150/200/250
KAP 140 Analog [3] Rate-based autopilot. [1] [14]
Analog [3],
KFC 225 Attitude-based autopilot. [1] [4] [14] [19]
ARINC 429 GPSS
Analog [3],
KFC 275 Attitude-based autopilot. [1] [4] [18]
Honeywell ARINC 429 GPSS
(Bendix/King) Attitude-based autopilot.
GDU 620 software v3.00 or later.
KFC 300 Analog [3] Only KFC 300 autopilots without [4] [7] [12]
VNAV functionality are
supported.
KFC 325 (KCP 220
computers with Analog [3] Attitude-based autopilot. [1] [4] [16] [17] [18]
-12 suffix or lower)

Rev. V Page E-6
KFC 325 (KCP 220
Honeywell Analog [3],
computers with Attitude-based autopilot. [1] [4] [16] [18]
(Bendix/King) ARINC 429 GPSS
-15 suffix or higher)
Sperry SPZ-200A/500 Analog [3] Attitude-based autopilot. [9]
20/30/40/50/55/ Must be configured to operate with either the NSD-360
Analog [3], Discrete Rate-based autopilot.
60-1/60-2/65 or KI-525 (KCS-55) heading system.
60 PSS Analog [3] Pitch axis only autopilot.
Rate-based autopilot.
Altitude Preselect/Capture is
available as an option using the Must be configured to operate with either the NSD-360
RS-485 interface. This requires or KI-525 (KCS-55) heading system.
an optional enablement (refer to If the optional GDU 620 RS-485 Altitude Preselect
Analog [3], Discrete, Section 5.5.5.2) and utilizes the function is activated:
55X ARINC 429 GPSS, RS-485 interface (refer to • 55X computer must have mod AC/AC
S-TEC RS485 Figure F-12). (software/hardware)
Altitude/VS Preselect/Capture is • 55X computer must be strapped for a 01282
available as an option using the (SA-200) altitude selector/alerter (P2-23 must be
GAD 43e (refer to Appendix OPEN)
Section E.20 for additional
details).
Attitude-based autopilot.
Analog [3], Discrete, Must have either 01304-01, 01304-02, -01304-03,
Only dual G500/G600
1500/2100 ARINC 429 GPSS, -01304-04, or -01304-07 ADC with Mod Level L
installations are allowed to
Attitude and Air Data software or later.
interface to the 1500/2100.
Notes:
[1] If GDU 620 software v5.02 or earlier is used, the compass valid discrete input to the autopilot computer must be grounded when the G500/G600 is installed.
For GDU 620 software v6.11 or later, the HDG/CRS DATUM VALID discrete output may be used (refer to Figure F-11). The autopilot uses this input to
determine the validity of the heading and course datum (error) signals. With mechanical instruments, when heading becomes invalid, the heading and
course datum signals will remain set to the value when valid heading was last received. However, unlike mechanical instruments, the G500/G600 will (i)
automatically set these signals to zero error whenever the heading becomes invalid, resulting in a wings-level condition (GDU 620 v2.xx); or (ii) set these
signals to the errors based upon the reversionary track-up HSI (GDU 620 v3.00 and later). This allows GPSS (simulated heading datum) from the
G500/G600 to still be used by the autopilot if the heading were to fail.
[2] For KAP 150/KFC 150, EFIS-enabled KC-19X computer (P/N 065-0042-16) is not supported.

Rev. V Page E-7
[3] Analog signal characteristics for the interfaces from the GDU 620 to the autopilot can be found in Section 4.2.5 of GDU 620 Installation Manual
(P/N 190-00601-04). The heading and course signal characteristics are determined by the “Autopilot Type” that is configured. Refer to Section 5.5.12.
[4] An attitude source must be provided to the autopilot in order for it to function properly. The KVG 350 gyro or the KI 255/256 ADI may be retained, or the KG
258 ADI may replace the KI 256 ADI to provide attitude information to the autopilot system. Optionally, the GAD 43/43e Adapter may be used instead of the
KI 255/256/KG 258 ADI or the KVG 350 gyro to provide attitude information to the autopilot system.
[5] Not used.
[6] In order for ARINC 429 GPSS to function, the autopilot computer must be configured to receive roll steering information via the ARINC 429 bus from a GPS
sensor (ARINC 429 (GPS) Steering must be enabled).
[7] For the KFC 300 autopilot, a synchro heading input is required. The existing KCS 305 compass system (KSG 105 slaved directional gyro) may be retained,
or the GAD 43/43e Adapter may be used instead of the KSG 105 to provide heading information to the autopilot system.
[8] Attitude, yaw rate, and compass monitor inputs must be provided to the autopilot. The GAD 43/43e can replace the attitude and yaw rate sensors for most
Collins APS-65 autopilots. The GAD 43/43e cannot be used to provide the vertical gyro attitude solution to the APS-65A. The existing vertical gyro must be
retained to provide the APS-65A an attitude solution.
[9] The original attitude and heading system must remain in the aircraft to provide attitude and heading inputs to the autopilot. The original Altitude Alert
Controller must be retained.
[10] The autopilot computer must be configured for a Collins PN-101 (FD-112C/V) HSI. If the autopilot had another HSI prior to the installation of the G500/G600,
changes to the GDU 620 emulation setting may be required (the installation that was evaluated was an M-4D that had a Collins
FD-112 HSI/ADI in the original configuration).
[11] The CA-1050A autopilot computer must be configured for a Century NSD-360 HSI, or equivalent (DC Heading and Course Error signals). The GDU 620 can
emulate AC Heading and Course Error (Datum) signals; however, this has currently not been evaluated as part of this STC. Installers are encouraged to
utilize the NSD-360 DC setting to avoid the burden of additional installation approval efforts.
[12] The KCI 310 indicator contains a TEST key that is used to initiate the KFC 300 self-test. If the KCI 310 indicator is removed, an external momentary switch
must be installed to replace the function of the KCI 310 TEST switch.
[13] For the Century 31/41, ensure any jumpers at CD185 pins 8, 9, and 17 are removed to configure computer for an NSD 360A.
[14] For the KAP 140 and KFC 225, the GPS SELECT discrete configuration setting on the GNS 400W/500W must be set to “Prompt” in accordance with the
GNS 400W/500W installation manual.
[15] For Cessna autopilots with NAV1/NAV2 source switching on the autopilot mode controller, the NAV1/NAV2 source indication (lighted switch caption) on the
mode controller must be obliterated (i.e., hidden from view). All NAV source switching is accomplished from the GDU 620. For details, refer to Figure F-15.
[16] Installation in an aircraft with a previously installed EFIS is supported. However, removal of an existing EFIS requires installation of GDU software v6.11 or
later in order to provide autopilot mode annunciations.
[17] Autopilot does not support ARINC 429 roll steering.
[18] A placard reading, “DISENGAGE SOFT RIDE DURING ALTITUDE CAPTURE (ALTC)” must be installed near the autopilot mode controller. For details,
refer to Section 2.5.3.4.
[19] The KFC 225 must be configured for DC analog heading and A429 GPS Steering.
[20] The GFC 500 autopilot system requires the Garmin G5 electronic ADI. GDU 620 software v7.30 or later and G5 software v5.50 or later are required.
[21] GDU 620 software v7.30 or later requires GMC 605 software v2.21 or later.
[22] The HSDB connection between the GDU 620 and GMC 605 must use Ethernet cable Carlisle IT P/N 392404.

Rev. V Page E-8
E.4 External Flight Directors
The flight directors listed in Table E-4 are compatible with the G500/G600.
Table E-4 Compatible External Flight Directors

Data
Mfr Model Notes [1] Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
Format
5536F computer must have 4007463-0501 Flight Director
Bendix M-4D Analog
Board (for Collins 329B7-R, FD-108, and FD112C/V indicators).
Autopilot computer must be previously compatible with the single cue
IV Analog
52C77( ) series indicator.
Century
41 Analog
2000 Analog
300B/400B/800B IFCS Analog
Cessna
1000A IFCS Analog [3]
APS-65 Analog N/A
OUT OF VIEW+ signal from
Collins autopilot must be inverted to be
AP-106/107 Analog
Active-High for correct
operation with the G500/G600.
The GDU 620 is directly
interfaced with the GAD 29(B) For configuration of a G5/GFC500 system, see G5 Part 23 AML STC
G5 [4] ARINC 429 via ARINC 429 to receive flight Installation Manual (P/N 190-01112-10) and GFC 500 Autopilot Part 23
Garmin director data from the AML STC Installation Manual (P/N 190-02291-00).
G5/GFC 500 system.
For configuration of the GFC 600 autopilot system, see GFC 600
GMC 605 HSDB [5]
AFCS Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual (P/N 190-01937-00).
For KFC 150, EFIS-enabled KC-19X computer (P/N 065-0042-16) is
KFC 150/200/225 Analog
not supported.
Honeywell KFC 250 Analog

(Bendix/King) Analog or
KFC 275/325
ARINC 429
KFC 300 Analog

Rev. V Page E-9
Data
Mfr Model Notes [1] Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
Format
ST-645 Remote Annunciator panel must be installed (or retained) if the
flight director is displayed on G500/G600. This will provide the required
mode annunciations.
Only flight director pitch/roll outputs directly from 55X computer can be
55, 55X Analog
used for display on G500/G600 (FD pitch/roll outputs from the Remote
Annunciator panel cannot be used).
S-TEC If FD Logic output from 55/55X P2-4 is connected to P1-20 input on
ST-645, it must be disconnected.
ST-670 Single Cue FD Interface Unit for King KI 256
60-2/65
Analog (P/N 01180) must be installed or retained to display flight director
(with ST-670)
information on the G500/G600.
1500 / 2100 Analog
Sperry SPZ-200A/500 Analog [2]
Notes:
[1] The characteristics of the analog signals are determined by the “Flight Director Type” that is configured. For details, refer to Section 5.5.12.2.
[2] FZ-500 flight director computer must be strapped for low gain pitch/roll steering and pitch/roll bias out of view inputs must be connected.
[3] The flight director bars cannot be displayed when synthetic terrain (SVT) is being displayed on the PFD. For additional information, refer to
Section 5.5.13.
[4] The G5 electronic ADI is the flight director for the GFC 500 autopilot system (refer to Table E-3).
[5] The HSDB connection between the GDU 620 and GMC 605 must use Ethernet cable Carlisle IT P/N 392404.

Rev. V Page E-10
E.5 Navigation Receivers (ARINC 429)
The navigation receivers listed in Table E-5 are compatible with the GDU 620. For a list of analog navigation receivers that are compatible with the GAD 43e, refer
to Appendix Section E.19.
Table E-5 Compatible Navigation Receivers

ARINC 429 config:
One or two navigation receivers can Tx: LO SPEED
GNC 255( ) ARINC 429
be connected. SDI:VOR/ILS 1 (for NAV 1)
VOR/ILS 2 (for NAV 2)
VOR/LOC/GS ARINC 429 Config:
One or two navigation receivers can TX: Low
GNS 430W/530W ARINC 429
be connected. SDI:VOR/ILS 1 (for NAV 1)
ARINC 429 Setup:
One or two navigation receivers can CH 2 OUT VOR/ILS Low
GNS 480 (CNX80) ARINC 429
be connected. Sys 1 (for NAV 1)
Garmin Sys 2 (for NAV 2)
VOR/LOC/GS Setup:
ARINC 429 Config:
One or two navigation receivers can
GTN 650/750 ARINC 429 Tx Speed: Low
be connected.
SDI:VOR/ILS 1 (for NAV 1)
With no external CDI connected to SL30:
Indicator Head Type: Serial
With external “standard CDI” connected to SL30:
SL30 RS-232 Only one SL30 can be connected.
Indicator Head Type: Resolver
With external “composite CDI” connected to SL30:
Indicator Head Type: Serial

Rev. V Page E-11
E.6 Traffic Source
The traffic sources listed in Table E-6 are compatible with the GDU 620.
Table E-6 Compatible Traffic Sources
The GTX 33( )/330( ) must be configured as follows:
429 OUTPUT CHANNEL 2: GARMIN W/TIS
TIS-A (this is a high-speed output)
The GDU 620 can control the The GTX 335 must be configured as follows:
GTX 33( )/330( )/335 ARINC 429
TIS state; however, it does not A429 OUTPUT: FORMAT 8
provide control of the GTX 33. If the GTX 33( )/330( ) will receive ARINC 429 data from
the GDU 620, set the GTX 33( )/330( ) input as follows:
EFIS W/ALT, LOW speed [1]
ADS-B/TIS-B
The GTX 345 also provides
FIS-B weather data with this
interface.
When utilizing the GDL 69 to
route HSDB data from the
GTX 345 to the rest of the
Garmin G500/G600 system, the GDL 69
unit must be a GDL 69 SXM HSDB INTERFACE: GDU 620
GTX 345 [5] HSDB
(P/N 011-03177-00) or PRESENT: YES
GDL 69A SXM (P/N 011-03177-
10) with software v5.10 or later.
When utilizing the GTN
6XX/7XX to route HSDB data
from the GTX 345 to the rest of
the G500/G600 system, the
GTN 6XX/7XX must include
software v6.11 or later.
TAS/TCAS I
ARINC 429 Traffic Output must be set to high-speed.
GTS 800/820/825/ Configuration of the GTS 8XX is
ARINC 429 The GTS 8XX can receive heading and altitude from the
850/855 (GTS 8XX) [4] supported using the HSDB
GDU 620 or directly from the AHRS and ADC.
interface.
GTS 800/820/825/ See GTS 8XX Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual
HSDB TAS/TCAS I and ADS-B/TIS-B
850/855 (GTS 8XX) [6] (P/N 190-01279-00) for GTS traffic system config details.

Rev. V Page E-12
KTA 810/KMH 820 ARINC 429 TAS Intruder File Protocol: ARINC 735
Honeywell
KTA 910/KMH 920 ARINC 429 TCAS I Controller Type: Discrete [2]
For SKY 497, ARINC 735 Alternate Display type must be

L3 Communications set to “ARINC735 Type 1” (P1-80 must be grounded).
SKY497 [3] /SKY899 ARINC 429 TAS
(Goodrich)
SKY 497 units must have software v1.6 or later installed.
TAS
External unit capable of displaying traffic and controlling
TAS 600/610/620 GDU 620 does not provide any
Avidyne (Ryan) ARINC 429 the TCAD is required in addition to GDU 620
(9900BX) control of TCAD and will only (e.g., 400W/500W or Avidyne display/controller).
display TCAD traffic.
Notes:
[1] The GDU 620 provides altitude as part of the data transmitted to the GTX 33( )/330( ); however, it is recommended that a direct connection from the
ADC also be provided so that the GTX 33( )/330( ) will still receive altitude in the event of a GDU 620 failure. For interconnect data, refer to
Figure F-18.
[2] Controller type is only required if the GDU 620 is used to control the traffic system.
[3] TRC 497 software v1.6 or later is required.
[4] GDU 620 software v6.11 or later is required.
[5] GDU 620 software v7.10 or later is required. Only one ADS-B In source can be configured at a time.
[6] GDU 620 software v7.30 or later, GTS 800/820/850 software v4.12 or later, and GTS 825/855 software v3.12 or later are required.

Rev. V Page E-13
E.7 Data Link
The data link models listed in Table E-7 are compatible with the GDU 620.
Table E-7 Compatible Data Link Models

SiriusXM subscription is required.
GDU 620 will also control GDL 69A
(SXM) audio functions. GDL 69 series
GDL 69 Series Ethernet
software v3.40 or later is required when
interfacing to a GDU 620 with software
v7.12 or later.
Iridium satellite transceiver – weather,
Garmin RS-232, position reporting, and telephone are
GSR 56
discrete available (account required to activate
desired services).
GDL 88 configuration is accomplished using a GTN 6XX/7XX
or the Install Tool if a GTN 6XX/7XX is not installed. Refer to
GDL 88 [1] Ethernet ADS-B data source.
the GDL 88 AML STC SA02119SE. GDL 88 software v3.00
or later is required.
Notes:
[1] Only one ADS-B In source can be configured at a time.

Rev. V Page E-14
E.8 2 ¼-inch Standby Airspeed Indicators and Altimeters
The 2 ¼-inch airspeed indicators and altimeters listed in Table E-8 are suitable for use as standby instruments for a G500/G600 installation.
Table E-8 Compatible 2 1/4” Airspeed Indicators and Altimeters

25020-0179 200 knots maximum airspeed
Range markings must be added to match the current airspeed
indicator in the aircraft.
Aerosonic 25040-0180 400 knots maximum airspeed
N/A
Instruments 25020-1160 [2]
15035-0110x 35,000 ft
Inches or millibars must match the current altimeter in the
16550-11xx 50,000 ft
aircraft.
16450-1147 [2]
-xxx corresponds to the airspeed Range markings must be added to match the current airspeed
MD25-xxx
range [1] indicator in the aircraft.
Mid-Continent
N/A
Instruments MD15-2xx 20,000 ft [1] Inches or millibars must match the current altimeter in the
MD15-3xx 35,000 ft [1] aircraft.
Notes:
[1] Contact Mid-Continent Instruments for complete part number definition.
[2] Used on PA-46.

Rev. V Page E-15
E.9 ADF Receiver (Interfaced to GDU 620)
The ADF receivers listed in Table E-9 are compatible with the GDU 620. For a list of synchro ADF receivers that are compatible with the GAD 43e, refer to
Appendix Section E.22.
Table E-9 Compatible ADF Receivers

Collins ADF-60A/B Analog DC Sin/Cos
KR 87
Honeywell Analog DC Sin/Cos
KDF 806
NOTE
The GDU 620 does not accept XYZ ADF inputs.

Rev. V Page E-16
E.10 Weather Radar Source
The weather radar transceivers listed in Table E-10 are compatible with the GDU 620.
Table E-10 Compatible Weather Radar Sources

No configuration of the GWX 68 is required to communicate with
GWX 68 [3] [4] the GDU 620. For GWX 68 configuration instructions, refer to
GDU 620 software v3.00 Section 5.5.15.1.
HSDB or later is required.
Garmin GWX 70(R) software v2.05 or later required.
GWX 70(R) [3] [5] [6] [7] (Ethernet)
For GWX 70(R) configuration instructions, refer to Section 5.5.15.1.
GDU 620 software v7.40
GWX 75 [3] For GWX 75 configuration information, refer to Section 5.5.15.1.
or later is required.
RDS 81 (RS 811A) [1]
RDS 82VP model with
RDS 82 (RS 181A) [1] vertical scan is not
ARINC 429, currently supported.
Honeywell
ARINC 708, Configured for Desired Antenna Sweep 100°, Map Gain Change
(Bendix/King) RDR 2000 (ART 2000) [1] [2]
discrete Accepted, Target Alert Disabled.
Configured for Desired Antenna Sweep 100°, Wx Gain Change
RDR 2100 (ART 2100)
Ignored, Map Gain Change Accepted, ARL Disabled, Auto Step
[1] [2]
Scan Disabled, Autotilt Disabled, Target Alert Disabled.
Notes:
[1] The cabling to the weather radar transceiver that is in the radome area must be protected with overbraid until it enters the metal fuselage or metal
wing. For details on the overbraid requirements, refer to Section 2.5.24. Refer to Appendix N for guidance on installing the overbraid. The weather
radar transceiver must be electrically bonded to the surrounding structure. The resistance must be 10 mΩ or less.
[2] The AHRS may be used to provide ARINC 429 stabilization data to the weather radar.
[3] No other ARINC 453/708 displays (e.g., GMX 200) may be connected to the GWX 68/70(R)/75 (the GWX 68/70(R)/75 does not support
simultaneous connection of HSDB and ARINC 453/708 display interfaces).
[4] When using GDU 620 software versions prior to v7.00, the display of GWX 68 weather radar must be disabled on the GTN navigator, if installed
(simultaneous display of GWX 68 data on the GDU 620 and GTN navigator was not supported).
[5] When using GWX 70(R) software versions prior to v2.20, stabilization data must be provided to the GWX 70(R) over a separate analog or
ARINC 429 interface; otherwise, stabilization is provided by HSDB.
[6] When using GDU 620 software versions prior to v7.00, configure GWX 70(R) weather radar information to display on GDU 620 #1 and one GTN
navigator. When using GDU 620 software v7.00 and later, GDU #1 and #2 have individual display and control capabilities.
[7] When using GDU 620 software v7.00 or later and GWX 70(R) FPGA software versions prior to v1.20, all displays must have the same features
enabled (i.e., Turb Det and/or GCS).

Rev. V Page E-17
E.11 Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source
The lightning/electrical discharge system listed in Table E-11 is compatible with the GDU 620.
Table E-11 Compatible Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source

Compatible with the GDU 620
L-3 software v7.00 or later. Prior
WX-500 RS-232 For RS-232 port configuration information, refer to Section 5.5.15.3.
Communications software versions are not
compatible.
E.12 External TAWS Source
NOTE
The GDU 620 will display all of the required TAWS annunciations and eliminate the need for a separate TAWS annunciator panel if a GNS 500W or
GTN unit with TAWS is connected as defined in Appendix F. For additional external TAWS information, refer to Section 2.5.8.7.
E.13 GDU 620 Serial Altitude (RS-232)

The G500/G600 can provide RS-232 serial altitude, Shadin altitude format, and 9600 baud to the systems listed in Table E-12.
Table E-12 RS-232 Serial Altitude

GDU 620 software v3.00 or
GTX 32 later is required. The RS-232 input that is used to provide altitude to the
RS-232
GTX 327 GDU 620 RS-232 Chnl 8 Output transponder must be set to “SHADIN ALT.”
must be set to “Shadin-alt.”
Garmin
GDU 620 software v3.00 or
later is required. The RS-232 input that is used to provide altitude to the
GTX 33( )/330( ) RS-232 [1] transponder must be set to “SHDN ALT 25ft” (or “SHADIN
GDU 620 RS-232 Chnl 8 Output ALT 25ft” if using the GNS 480 to configure the transponder).
must be set to “Shadin-alt.”
Notes:
[1] The GDU 620 can provide serial altitude to the GTX 33( )/330( ); however, it is recommended that a direct connection from the ADC be used to
provide altitude so that the GTX 33( )/330( ) will still receive altitude in the event of a GDU 620 failure.

Rev. V Page E-18
E.14 GAD 43/43e – Autopilot Compatibility - Attitude Source
NOTE
Installation of the GAD 43/43e Adapter allows the existing attitude source for the autopilot to be removed, but will not improve autopilot
performance. Prior to starting a G500/G600 installation in which the GAD 43/43e is used to provide attitude to the autopilot, it is recommended
that a short flight test be conducted to baseline the autopilot performance. This short flight test is repeated after completion of the aircraft
modification to verify that the autopilot performance has not been affected. For additional details, refer to Section 5.10.2.5.
The autopilots listed in Table E-13 are compatible with the GAD 43/43e when using the GAD 43/43e as an attitude source.
Table E-13 Compatible Autopilots

Interfacing Equipment
Mfr Model Data Format Notes
Configuration Information
Century 21/31/41/2000 Analog [1] GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot. [9]
300B/400B/800B IFCS
(Type IF-550A)
Cessna 400B (Type AF-550A) Analog [1] GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot.
1000A Series
(Types AF/IF-1050A)
APS-65 GAD 43/43e provides attitude and yaw rate information to
Collins Analog [1] [2]
(APC-65/65E/65H/65J) autopilot.
KAP 100 Analog [1] GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot. [3]
GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot. [3]

KAP 150/KFC 150 Analog [1]
GAD 43/43e can also provide baro-correction directly to the
[4] [5]
KAS 297B Altitude/Vertical Speed Selector.
Honeywell KAP 200/KFC 200 Analog [1] GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot. [8] [3]
(Bendix/King)
GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to the autopilot
KFC 250 Analog [1]
(or KA 141 if installed). [8]
GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot. [3] [7]
KFC 275 Analog [1] GAD 43/43e can also provide baro-correction directly to the
[4] [5]
KAS 297C Altitude/Vertical Speed Selector.

Rev. V Page E-19
GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot. [3]
KFC 225 Analog [1] GAD 43/43e can also provide baro-correction directly to the
[5] [6]
Honeywell KC 225 computer. [4]
(Bendix/King) GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot (or KA 141 if
KFC 300 Analog [1]
installed). [8]
KFC 325 Analog [1] GAD 43/43e provides attitude information to autopilot.
Notes:
[1] Analog signal characteristics for the interfaces from the GAD 43/43e to the autopilot can be found in Section 4 of GAD 43/43e Installation Manual
(P/N 190-00899-00). Output signal characteristics are determined by the configuration of the GAD 43/43e. Refer to Section 5.5.14.
[2] Inductors are required if the existing APS-65 autopilot system did not use a digital AHRS (i.e., AHC-1000A/S or 3000A/S). For inductor
specifications, refer to Section 2.4.2.3.2. For interconnect information, refer to Figure F-29.
[3] After installation of the GAD 43/43e, perform the Gyro Alignment Procedure or Attitude Gyro Calibration in accordance with the autopilot
manufacturer’s instructions. There is no need to remove the AHRS where the manufacturer’s procedure calls for the attitude gyro/indicator to be
removed and mounted on a tilt table. Instead, with the GDU 620 in Configuration mode, use the GAD 43/43e page to set the GAD 43/43e pitch and
roll values as required by the autopilot check.
[4] If the GAD 43/43e is used to provide BARO-correction to the KAS 297B/C, perform the KAS 297B/C Checkout Procedures (unit alignment and
operational check).
[5] If desired, the KEA 130/130A encoding altimeter may be removed and replaced with the GAD 43/43e and a separate blind encoder. The
GAD 43/43e will provide the BARO-correction and the blind encoder will provide the Gray code altitude.
[6] If the GAD 43/43e is used to provide BARO-correction to the KFC 225, perform an Altimeter Calibration and Altitude Selector Checkout Procedure
in accordance with the autopilot manufacturer’s instructions.
[7] Installation of the GAD 43/43e in place of an existing KI-254 attitude source is not supported.
[8] The GAD 43/43e can also be used to replace the KRG 331 rate gyro if desired.
[9] GAD 43 P/N 011-01970-00 cannot be used to provide attitude information. GAD 43 P/N 011-01970-01 must be used to provide attitude to Century
autopilots.

Rev. V Page E-20
E.15 Radar Altimeters
The radar altimeter transceivers listed in Table E-14 are compatible with the GDU 620.
Table E-14 Compatible Radar Altimeters

This is an analog to digital
Collins RAC-870 ARINC 429 converter specifically for use
with the ALT-55B radalt.
Must set ARINC 429 Speed Select program to pin to set
FreeFlight RA-4500 ARINC 429 output bus speed to match GDU 620 ARINC 429 input
speed.
GDU ARINC 429 IN set for LOW SPEED. (Optional channels
Garmin GRA 55/5500 ARINC 429
are 4 through 8).
Honeywell
KRA 405B ARINC 429
(Bendix/King)

Rev. V Page E-21
E.16 External Video Sources
CAUTION
Agencies installing auxiliary video systems are solely responsible for all direct and indirect effects of lightning compliance as a result of a lightning
strike to the auxiliary video system. Garmin strongly recommends that all installed auxiliary video systems support pin injection test levels stricter
than those already met by the GDU 620(s) (refer to EQF 005-00313-20). Garmin neither possesses data for nor can guarantee results of any
alternative high level testing conducted by the installing agency. The installing agency has the option to either add external lightning protection to
the auxiliary video system outside of the GDU 620(s) in lieu of a redesign, or to add sufficient protection within the auxiliary video system to prevent
current backflow to the GDU 620(s) at levels in excess of the GDU 620 pin injection limits.
The video source listed in Table E-15 is compatible with the GDU 620.
Table E-15 Compatible Video Source

Max-Viz EVS-1500 RS-170 Video [1]
Notes:
[1] To be eligible to connect a video system to the GDU 620 in metal aircraft, the limitations in Section 7.2.2.5 and following conditions must be met:
• The video system wiring and components must be installed inside a metal housing in Lightning Zone 2A or 3 on metal aircraft only. If the cable
from the camera to its power supply is not routed inside a metal housing, the aircraft must be limited to VFR operation
• Electrical bonding of the metal housing to aircraft skin must be 2.5 mΩ or less
• In a dual G500/G600 installation, only a single GDU 620 may be connected to a video system
Connection to the video system in nonmetallic aircraft or installations not meeting the limitations above require additional airworthiness approval and
is not included in this STC. Transient voltages from the video system must not exceed the test levels to which GDU 620 video input is qualified.
Refer to EQF (P/N 005-00313-20) for DO-160D Sections 20 and 22.

Rev. V Page E-22
E.17 Audio Panels
The connection of a GDU 620 to an audio panel is recommended but not required for tones and aural alerts generated by the GDU 620. However, the connection of
a GDU 620 to an audio panel is required if TAWS B and/or SVT is enabled.
The audio panels listed in Table E-16 are compatible with the GDU 620. However, interface to audio panels not listed below can still be approved under G500/G600
AML STC if all of the following conditions are met:
• The installation of the audio panel was previously FAA-approved
• The GDU 620 audio must be verified as described in Section 5.5.6
For installations using G500/G600 SVT, the audio panel must have an unswitched audio input that is used for the GDU 620 audio.
Table E-16 Compatible Audio Panels

KMA 24
Honeywell
KMA 26 Analog
(Bendix/King)
KMA 28
GMA 340
GMA 347
GMA 35(c)
Garmin Analog GMA 35(c) requires a control panel, such as a GTN 7XX.
GMA 350(c)
SL15
SL15M
PMA 6000
PS Engineering PMA 7000 series Analog
PMA 8000 series

Rev. V Page E-23
E.18 Miscellaneous Systems
The system listed in Table E-17 is compatible with the GDU 620/G500/G600.
Table E-17 Compatible Miscellaneous System

Interfacing Equipment Configuration
Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes
Information
The GDU 620 will not display any
Meggitt (Cobham/S-TEC) MAGIC EIDS ARINC 429, discrete information from the EIDS.
[1] [2] [3]
Notes:
[1] For GDU 620 setup items, refer to Section 5.5.9 and Section 5.5.19.
[2] A dual G500/G600 installation is required.
[3] The GDU 620 provides air data for the engine trend monitoring system and a discrete to control whether system 1 data or system 2 data is
displayed.
E.19 GAD 43e – Analog Navigation Receiver Compatibility

Interface to analog navigation receivers not listed in Table E-18 can still be approved under G500/G600 AML STC if all of the following conditions are met:
• The navigation receiver is approved to TSO C36( ) (Localizer) and C40( ) (VOR), and optionally C34( ) (Glideslope) if glideslope is used
• If glideslope is being used, the navigation receiver has a glideslope low-level flag output
• The installation of the navigation receiver was previously FAA-approved
• The interface check for the analog navigation receiver described in Section 5.8.4.2 has successfully been completed
Table E-18 Compatible Analog Navigation Receivers

Composite
Collins VIR-32/33 Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both
Analog
KX 155/155A/165/ Composite
Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both
Honeywell 165A/170B/175B Analog
(Bendix/King) Composite
KN 53 Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both
Analog

Rev. V Page E-24
E.20 GAD 43e – Autopilot Compatibility – Altitude Preselect/Vertical Speed Select
Table E-19 Compatible Altitude Preselect/Vertical Speed Select
Data
Mfr Model Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
Format
300B IFCS, 400B IFCS, 800B
Cessna Discrete AA801A
IFCS, 1000A IFCS
Autopilot must currently use the UI 5506L-S Altitude
APS-65 Preselector.
Analog United Instruments 5506L-S
Collins (APC-65/65A/65B/65C/65E/65F/ APS-65 autopilots that currently have the PRE-80 Altitude
Discrete emulation
65G/65H/65J, FGC-65( ),FYD-65) Preselector cannot use the GAD 43e Altitude Preselect
function.
KAP 150
Digital KAS 297B emulation
KFC 150
The flight director interface from the KFC 200/250 described
Honeywell in Appendix Section E.4 is required.
(Bendix/King) KFC 200/250 Discrete KAS 297 emulation Installations with the KNS 660 Flight Management System
are not supported. KC 295 flight control computer must be
serial number 4460 or higher.
KFC 275/325 Digital KAS 297C emulation
55/55X computer must be strapped for a 0140 / 01279PX

Analog
S-TEC 55/55X, 60-2, 65, 60PSS ST-360 emulation (ST-360) altitude/vertical speed selector altitude
Discrete
(P2-23 must be GROUNDED).

Rev. V Page E-25
E.21 GAD 43e – Analog Radar Altimeter Compatibility
Table E-20 Compatible Analog Radar Altimeters
Analog
ALT-50A
Discrete
Collins
Analog
ALT-55B
Discrete
Analog
KRA 10/10A
Honeywell Discrete
(Bendix/King) Analog
KRA 405 Auxiliary Output #1 must be used.
Discrete
Analog
AA-100 Precision Output must be used.
Discrete
Analog
Sperry AA-100A Precision Output must be used.
Discrete
Analog
AA-200 Precision Output must be used.
Discrete
E.22 GAD 43e – Synchro ADF Receiver Compatibility

Interface to ADF receivers not listed in Table E-21 can still be approved under G500/G600 AML STC if all of the following conditions are met:
• The ADF receiver is approved to TSO-C41( ) (Airborne Automatic Direction Finding (ADF) Equipment)
• The ADF receiver has a synchro bearing TO station output. This output must comply with the ARINC 407 synchro electrical specification
• The installation of the ADF receiver was previously FAA-approved
• The interface check for the ADF receiver described in Section 5.8.8 has successfully been completed
Table E-21 Compatible Synchro ADF Receiver Compatibility

Honeywell Existing KI 225-04 indicator
KR 85 Analog Only KI 225-04 indicator supported.
(Bendix/King) must be retained.

Rev. V Page E-26
E.23 GAD 43e – DME Compatibility
Table E-22 Compatible DMEs
DME-42 ARINC 568 [1] Must be strapped to match tuning source.
Collins
DME-442/4000 ARINC 429
KDM 706(A) Digital [2] GDU 620/GAD 43e is Master DME Display/Control.
Honeywell
KN 62/64 Digital
(Bendix/King)
KN 63 Digital [2] GDU 620/GAD 43e is Master DME Display/Control.
Notes:
[1] Only installations that use CSDB tuning and have a single DME tuning source are supported (i.e., only one NAV radio can be used to tune the DME).
[2] The GAD 43e can accept either serial or parallel tuning data, which it will forward to the KN 63 or KDM 706(A) DME. A list of approved tuning
sources appears below.
Acceptable Tuning Sources (for use with KN 63 or KDM 706(A) DME)

Tuning sources not listed in Table E-23 can still be approved under G500/G600 AML STC if all of the following conditions are met:
• The VHF NAV receiver is approved to TSO C36( ) (Localizer) and C40( ) (VOR)
• The VHF NAV receiver supports King serial tuning or 2x5 / Slip Code / Shifted BCD parallel tuning
• The installation of the VHF nav receiver was previously FAA-approved
• The interface check for the DME receiver described in Section 5.8.20 has successfully been completed
Table E-23 Acceptable Tuning Sources

Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
400W/500W Series King Serial
Garmin
GTN 6XX/7XX King Serial
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KX 170B/175B Parallel Slip Code Tuning

Rev. V Page E-27
E.24 GAD 43e – Marker Beacon Receiver Compatibility
Interface to marker receivers not listed in Table E-24 can still be approved under G500/G600 AML STC if all of the following conditions are met:
• The marker beacon receiver is approved to TSO-C35( ) (Airborne Radio Marker Receiving Equipment)
• The marker beacon receiver has Active-High discrete outputs for inner, middle, and outer marker lamps
• The installation of the marker beacon receiver was previously FAA-approved
• The interface check for the marker beacon receiver described in Section 5.8.21 has successfully been completed
Table E-24 Compatible Marker Beacon Receivers

Collins VIR-32/33 Discrete
Garmin GMA 35(c)/340/347/350(c) Discrete
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KMA 24/26/28 Discrete
PS Engineering PMA 6000/7000/8000 Discrete
E.25 Stall Protection and Warning Unit (Fast/Slow Indication) Compatibility (G600 Only)
Table E-25 Compatible Stall Protection and Warning Unit
Use ARINC 429 input format

EMCA SPWG92 ARINC 429
“FAST/SLOW 1”, LOW SPEED [1]
Notes:
[1] Prior to beginning installation, contact Garmin regarding availability of the ARINC 429 Fast/Slow Enablement Card.

Rev. V Page E-28
APPENDIX F INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS
Figure F-1 Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Single GDU) ...........................F-2
Figure F-2 Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s) .....................F-4
Figure F-3 Power/Config Module/OAT – GSU 75(B)/GMU 44 Interconnect .....................................F-9
Figure F-4 Power/Config Module/OAT – GDC 74( )/GRS 77/GMU 44 Interconnect.......................F-12
Figure F-5 Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Single GDU) ............................................................F-17
Figure F-6 Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)......................................................F-19
Figure F-7 GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Single GDU 620)........................................F-23
Figure F-8 GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Dual GDU 620s) ........................................F-25
Figure F-9 Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Single GDU 620).......................................................F-27
Figure F-10 Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)........................................................F-29
Figure F-11 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Honeywell (Bendix/King) ................................F-31
Figure F-12 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – S-TEC...............................................................F-40
Figure F-13 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Century .............................................................F-46
Figure F-14 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Collins ..............................................................F-52
Figure F-15 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Cessna...............................................................F-57
Figure F-16 Audio Interconnect ............................................................................................................F-62
Figure F-17 GDL 69 Series Interconnect ..............................................................................................F-64
Figure F-18 Traffic Advisory System Interconnect...............................................................................F-65
Figure F-19 ADF Interconnect ..............................................................................................................F-70
Figure F-20 External Switches (GPSS) .................................................................................................F-72
Figure F-23 Stormscope Interconnect ...................................................................................................F-78
Figure F-24 Weather Radar Interconnect ..............................................................................................F-80
Figure F-25 Serial Altitude Output Interconnect...................................................................................F-84
Figure F-26 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Sperry ...............................................................F-85
Figure F-27 GAD 43/43e - Power and G500/G600 Interconnect..........................................................F-89
Figure F-28 GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix/King) Autopilot Interconnect.......................................F-92
Figure F-29 GAD 43/43e – Collins Autopilot Interconnect ................................................................F-106
Figure F-30 GAD 43/43e – Synchro Heading Interconnect ................................................................F-109
Figure F-31 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Bendix ............................................................F-111
Figure F-32 GSR 56 Iridium Interconnect...........................................................................................F-115
Figure F-33 Radar Altimeter (ARINC 429) Interconnect ...................................................................F-116
Figure F-34 External Video Interconnect ............................................................................................F-118
Figure F-35 GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7XX (Single GDU 620) .....................................F-119
Figure F-36 GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7XX (Dual GDU 620s) ......................................F-121
Figure F-37 HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Single GDU 620).............................................................F-123
Figure F-38 HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s) .............................................................F-131
Figure F-39 GAD 43/43e – Century Autopilot Interconnect...............................................................F-143
Figure F-40 Miscellaneous Equipment Interfaces ...............................................................................F-146
Figure F-41 GAD 43e S-TEC Autopilot Interconnect ........................................................................F-148
Figure F-42 GAD 43e Navigation Receiver (Analog) Interconnect ...................................................F-149
Figure F-43 GAD 43e Radar Altimeter (Analog) Interconnect...........................................................F-151
Figure F-44 GAD 43e DME Interconnect ...........................................................................................F-153
Figure F-45 GAD 43e Marker Beacon Receiver Interconnect ............................................................F-158
Figure F-46 GAD 43/43e Cessna Autopilot Interconnect ...................................................................F-159
Figure F-47 GDU 620 - GFC 600 (GMC 605) Interconnect...............................................................F-165
Figure F-48 Single GDU 620 - G5 (ADI)/GFC 500 Autopilot System ..............................................F-166

Rev. V Page F-1
METAL AIRCRAFT
AND NON-METALLIC VFR-ONLY INSTALLATIONS
9
GDU 620 PFD/MFD PFD
P6202 10
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 20 AWG ESSENTIAL BUS 8

3 $9'&
AIRCRAFT POWER 34 20 AWG
$9'& 12
AIRCRAFT GND 2 20 AWG AIRCRAFT

3
AIRCRAFT GND 35 20 AWG GROUND
5
CONFIG MODULE PWR 49 RED CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE GND 50 BLK MODULE
CONFIG MODULE DATA 32 YEL
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 33 WHT 4
LIGHTING BUS HI 15 TO AIRCRAFT

6 7
LIGHTING BUS LO 16 LIGHTING BUS
NONMETALLIC AIRCRAFT
(EXCEPT VFR-ONLY INSTALLATIONS)
9
GDU 620 PFD/MFD
P6202 PFD 10
3
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 20 AWG 20 AWG ESSENTIAL BUS 8
3 $9'&
AIRCRAFT POWER 34 20 AWG F1
$9'& 12
TVS1
11

3
5
CONFIG MODULE PWR 49 RED CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE GND 50 BLK MODULE
CONFIG MODULE DATA 32 YEL

6 7
Figure F-1 Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Single GDU)
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-2
NOTES
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: S SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3 BOTH POWER LEADS AND BOTH GROUND LEADS ARE REQUIRED.
4 THE CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED IN THE BACKSHELL OF THE P6202 CONNECTOR.
CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH THE
5 CONFIGURATION MODULE MUST BE USED FOR CONNECTING CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO
P6202.
THE GDU 620 MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR THE CORRECT LIGHTING BUS VOLTAGE (28 VDC, 14 VDC,
5 VDC, OR 5 VAC). NO DAMAGE WILL OCCUR IF THE UNIT IS CONFIGURED INCORRECTLY. A MANUAL
6 LIGHTING CONTROL OPTION IS ALSO AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE POST-INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE.
OPTIONAL CONNECTION. IF NOT CONNECTED, THE GDU 620 LIGHTING MUST BE CONFIGURED TO
AUTOMATICALLY COMPENSATE FOR AMBIENT LIGHTING CONDITIONS USING ITS PHOTOCELL. A MANUAL
PROCEDURE.
THE GDU 620 MUST BE ON THE SAME POWER BUS AS THE AHRS AND ADC. THE GDU 620 MUST NOT BE
8 ON THE AVIONICS POWER BUS.
9 CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS SHOWN.
IF THE AIRCRAFT DOES NOT HAVE AN “ESSENTIAL” BUS, CONNECT TO A BUS THAT RECEIVES POWER AS
10 SOON AS THE BATTERY MASTER IS TURNED ON. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, REFER TO
SECTION 2.5.4.
FOR PART NUMBERS, REFER TO SECTION 2.4.2.1. FOR AIRCRAFT MODEL-SPECIFIC INFORMATION,
REFER TO TABLE K-2. FOR INFORMATION ON INSTALLING THE TVS/FUSE, REFER TO SECTION 3.4.3.
11 ALTERNATELY, THE FUSE MAY BE INSTALLED ON THE GROUND SIDE OF THE TVS. CONNECT TVS AT THE
GDU 620 AS SHOWN. TVS1/F1 IS NOT REQUIRED FOR ALL AIRCRAFT MODELS.
6" P6202
GDU 620
1
34
4A FUSE
F1
6"
Cut TVS leads to 0.5" (2PL)
Stripe on TVS must be toward
TVS1 power bus
s CONNECT TO
SHIELD BLOCK
12 G600 ONLY: FOR TBM 700/850 AIRCRAFT, REFER TO APPENDIX P.
TO DETERMINE THE WIRE SIZE IF INSTALLED POWER AND GROUND LENGTHS ARE GREATER THAN
13 TEN FEET (FOR 14V AIRCRAFT) OR FORTY FEET (FOR 28V AIRCRAFT), REFER TO AC 43.13-1B CHAPTER
11. SECTION 3.7 LISTS EQUIPMENT CURRENT DATA.
Figure F-1 Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Single GDU)
Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-3
METAL AIRCRAFT
10
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1
P6202 PFD 1 11
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 20 AWG ESSENTIAL BUS
3
AIRCRAFT POWER 34 20 AWG $9'&
$9'&
15

3 AIRCRAFT GND GROUND
35 20 AWG
5
CONFIG MODULE PWR 49 RED
CONFIG MODULE GND 50 BLK &21),*
CONFIG MODULE DATA 32 YEL 02'8/(

6 7
P6201
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
S
8 9
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2
P6201
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
S
CDU SYSTEM ID PGM* 4 14
GROUND 22
10
P6202 PFD 2
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 20 AWG AVIONICS OR MAIN BUS
3
$9'&
15
3 AIRCRAFT GND 35 GROUND
20 AWG
5

6 LIGHTING BUS 7
LIGHTING BUS LO 16
Figure F-2 Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)
Sheet 1 of 5

Rev. V Page F-4
METAL AIRCRAFT – ALTERNATE CONFIGURATION (PC-12 ONLY)
15 10 PFD 1A
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 AVIONICS #1 BUS
P6202 $9'&
CR1
3 20 AWG
AIRCRAFT POWER 34 15 PFD 1B
10
AVIONICS #2 BUS
$9'&
CR1
35 20 AWG
5

6 LIGHTING BUS 7
LIGHTING BUS LO 16
P6201
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
S
8 9
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2
P6201
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
S
CDU SYSTEM ID PGM* 4 14
GROUND 22 15 10 PFD 2A
AVIONICS #1 BUS
P6202 $9'&
CR1
3 20 AWG
AIRCRAFT POWER 34 15 PFD 2B
10
AVIONICS #2 BUS
$9'&
CR1

3 AIRCRAFT GND 35 GROUND
20 AWG
5

6 LIGHTING BUS 7
LIGHTING BUS LO 16
Sheet 2 of 5

Rev. V Page F-5
10
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1
P6202 PFD 1 11
3
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 20 AWG 20 AWG ESSENTIAL BUS
3 $9'&
AIRCRAFT POWER 34 20 AWG F1
$9'&
TVS1
13

3
5

6 7
P6201
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
S
8 9
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2
P6201
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
S
CDU SYSTEM ID PGM* 4 14.
GROUND 22
10
P6202 PFD 2
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 20 AWG AVIONICS OR MAIN BUS
3
$9'&
35 20 AWG
5

6 7
Sheet 3 of 5

Rev. V Page F-6
NOTES
4 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED IN THE BACKSHELL OF THE P6202 CONNECTOR.
CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH THE CONFIGURATION MODULE MUST BE USED FOR CONNECTING
5 CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO P6202.
THE GDU 620 MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR THE CORRECT LIGHTING BUS VOLTAGE (28 VDC, 14 VDC,
5 VDC, OR 5 VAC). NO DAMAGE WILL OCCUR IF THE UNIT IS CONFIGURED INCORRECTLY. A MANUAL
PROCEDURE.
OPTIONAL CONNECTION. IF NOT CONNECTED, THE GDU 620 LIGHTING MUST BE CONFIGURED TO
AUTOMATICALLY COMPENSATE FOR AMBIENT LIGHTING CONDITIONS USING ITS PHOTOCELL. A MANUAL
PROCEDURE.
GDU 620 #1 MUST BE CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO GDU 620 #2. IT IS NOT PERMITTED TO CONNECT
8 ANOTHER DEVICE (E.G., GDL 69 SERIES) BETWEEN BOTH GDU 620s.
9 USE APPROVED ETHERNET CABLE LISTED IN SECTION 2.4.2.
10 CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS SHOWN.
SECTION 2.5.4.
AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
12 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES.
Sheet 4 of 5

Rev. V Page F-7
NOTES CONTINUED
FOR PART NUMBERS, REFER TO SECTION 2.4.2.1. REFER TO TABLE K-2 FOR AIRCRAFT MODEL-SPECIFIC
INFORMATION. FOR INFORMATION ON INSTALLING THE TVS/FUSE, REFER TO SECTION 3.4.3.
13 ALTERNATELY, THE FUSE MAY BE INSTALLED ON THE GROUND SIDE OF THE TVS. CONNECT TVS AT
GDU 620 AS SHOWN. TVS1/F1 IS NOT REQUIRED FOR ALL AIRCRAFT MODELS.
6" P6202
GDU 620
1
34
4A FUSE
F1
6"
Stripe on TVS must be toward
TVS1 power bus
s CONNECT TO
SHIELD BLOCK
CDU SYSTEM ID GM PIN (P6201-4) MAY BE GROUNDED TO SHIELD BLOCK RATHER THAN P6202-22 IF
14 P6202-22 IS BEING USED FOR VIDEO.
15 FOR SUITABLE PART NUMBERS, REFER TO SECTION 2.4.2.3.
TO DETERMINE THE WIRE SIZE IF INSTALLED POWER AND GROUND LENGTHS ARE GREATER THAN
16 10 FEET (FOR 14V AIRCRAFT) OR 40 FEET (FOR 28V AIRCRAFT), REFER TO AC 43.13-1B CHAPTER 11.
SECTION 3.7 LISTS EQUIPMENT CURRENT DATA.
Sheet 5 of 5

Rev. V Page F-8
PRIMARY CONFIGURATION
(METAL AND NONMETALLIC AIRCRAFT)
8
GSU 75(B) ADAHRS ADAHRS 9 14
P751 3
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 14 22 AWG 22 AWG ESSENTIAL BUS (SINGLE GSU OR
5A GSU 1)
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 16 22 AWG AVIONICS OR MAIN BUS (GSU 2)
6 7
(14/28 VDC)
3
AIRCRAFT GND 1 34 22 AWG 22 AWG 11
AIRCRAFT GND 2 36 22 AWG
5 CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE PWR 53 RED 4
CONFIG MODULE GND 74 BLK 1 MODULE
CONFIG MODULE DATA 54 YEL 3
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 55 WHT 2 4
P441 GMU 44
A 10 4 MAGNETOMETER
RS-485 IN 1
B 11 2
s 16
1
RS-232 OUT 3 12 8
MAGNETOMETER PWR OUT 13 9
MAGNETOMETER GROUND 33 6
s
3
12
OAT POWER 6 WHT
OAT PROBE IN HI 5 BLU GTP 59
OAT PROBE IN LO 4 ORN OAT PROBE
s
Figure F-3 Power/Config Module/OAT – GSU 75(B)/GMU 44 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. V Page F-9
METAL AIRCRAFT – ALTERNATE CONFIGURATION 13
GSU 75(B) ADAHRS #1 (#2) 8 ADAHRS 1A (2A)

P751
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 14 22 AWG AVIONICS #1 BUS (28 VDC)
5A
8 ADAHRS 1B (2B)
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 16 22 AWG AVIONICS #2 BUS (28 VDC)
5A
3
AIRCRAFT GND 1 34 22 AWG 22 AWG
AIRCRAFT GND 2 36 22 AWG
5 CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE PWR 53 RED 4
CONFIG MODULE GND 74 BLK 1 MODULE
CONFIG MODULE DATA 54 YEL 3
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 55 WHT 2 4
P441 GMU 44
A 10 4 MAGNETOMETER
RS-485 IN 1
B 11 2
s
1 16
RS-232 OUT 3 12 8
MAGNETOMETER PWR OUT 13 9
MAGNETOMETER GROUND 33 6
s
3
13
OAT POWER 6 WHT
OAT PROBE IN HI 5 BLU GTP 59
OAT PROBE IN LO 4 ORN OAT PROBE
s

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. V Page F-10
NOTES
CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH CONFIGURATION
5 MODULE MUST BE USED FOR CONNECTING CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO P751.
6 FOR A SINGLE GDU INSTALLATION, CONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER TO THE ESSENTIAL BUS.
FOR A DUAL GDU INSTALLATION, CONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE #1 ADAHRS TO THE
7 ESSENTIAL BUS. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE #2 ADAHRS MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE AVIONICS OR
MAIN BUS.
CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS SHOWN. LABEL AS ADAHRS 1 OR 2, AS APPROPRIATE FOR

8 DUAL GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS (I.E., “ADAHRS 1” OR “ADAHRS 2”).
SECTION 2.5.4.
AT THE GSU 75(B), CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
10 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES.
WHEN INSTALLED IN A NONMETALLIC AIRCRAFT, THE LRU MUST BE GROUNDED TO THE INSTRUMENT
11 PANEL.
THE WIRING SUPPLIED WITH THE GTP 59 MAY BE EXTENDED IF THE SUPPLIED WIRE LENGTH IS NOT
12 SUFFICIENT FOR A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.
THE ALTERNATE CONFIGURATION MAY ONLY BE UTILIZED IN AIRCRAFT THAT MEET THE FOLLOWING
13 CRITERIA: (1) HAVE TWO OR MORE GENERATORS, AND (2) HAVE AT LEAST TWO AVIONICS BUSES THAT
CAN BE ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED FROM EACH OTHER.
THE GSU 75(B) REQUIRES A GROUND STRAP WHEN INSTALLED IN COMPOSITE AIRCRAFT. REFER TO
15 APPENDIX SECTION N.3.
THE GMU 44 MAGNETOMETER MUST BE EITHER P/N 011-00870-10 OR P/N 011-00870-20 WHEN INSTALLED
16 WITH A GSU 75(B). THE GSU 75(B) IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH P/N 011-00870-00.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. V Page F-11
METAL AIRCRAFT
GRS 77 AHRS 8
P771
AHRS
3 9
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 18 22 AWG 22 AWG ESSENTIAL BUS (SINGLE GRS OR GRS 1)
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 20 22 AWG $ AVIONICS OR MAIN BUS (GRS 2)
3 (14/28 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 22 22 AWG 22 AWG 6 7
AIRCRAFT GND 24 22 AWG
5
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 31 WHT
4
*08
P441 0$*1(720(7(5
RS-485 IN 1A 25
RS-485 IN 1B 39
s

RS-232 OUT 2 10
MAGNETOMETER PWR OUT 9
MAGNETOMETER GROUND 40
s

ARINC 429 IN 1A 15
ARINC 429 IN 1B 30
s
GDC 74() ADC

P741
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 42 8
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 41 ADC
s 9
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 55 22 AWG ESSENTIAL BUS (SINGLE GDC OR GDC 1)
$ AVIONICS OR MAIN BUS (GDC 2)
AIRCRAFT GND 17 22 AWG 6 7 (14/28 VDC)
13
OAT POWER 2 WHT
OAT PROBE IN HI 3 BLU *73
OAT PROBE IN LO 4 ORN 2$7352%(
s

5
Figure F-4 Power/Config Module/OAT – GDC 74( )/GRS 77/GMU 44 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 5

Rev. V Page F-12

METAL AIRCRAFT – ALTERNATE CONFIGURATION
$1'1210(7$//,&9)521/<,167$//$7,216
GRS 77 AHRS #1 (#2)
P771
$+56$$
$9,21,&6%86
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$ 9'&
$+56%%
$9,21,&6%86
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$ 9'&

$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*

&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7

*08
P441 0$*1(720(7(5
56,1$
56,1%
V

56287
0$*1(720(7(53:5287
0$*1(720(7(5*5281'
V

$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1%
V
GDC 74() ADC #1 (#2)

P741
$5,1&287%
$5,1&287$ $'&$$
V
$9,21,&6%86
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* 9'&
$
$'&%%
$9,21,&6%86
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$ 9'&
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*

2$732:(5 :+7
2$7352%(,1+, %/8 *73
2$7352%(,1/2 251 2$7352%(
V
&21),*02'8/(3:5 5('
&21),*02'8/(*1' %/. &21),*
&21),*02'8/('$7$ <(/ 02'8/(
&21),*02'8/(&/2&. :+7


Sheet 2 of 5

Rev. V Page F-13
8
GRS 77 AHRS P771 AHRS 9 16
3 ESSENTIAL BUS (SINGLE GRS OR GRS 1)
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 18 22 AWG 22 AWG
$ AVIONICS OR MAIN BUS (GRS 2)
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 20 22 AWG F1 (14/28 VDC)
TVS1 12
(#1 GRS 77 ONLY)
3
AIRCRAFT GND 22 22 AWG 22 AWG 11
AIRCRAFT GND 24 22 AWG
5
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 31 WHT
4
*08
P441 0$*1(720(7(5
RS-485 IN 1A 25
RS-485 IN 1B 39
s

RS-232 OUT 2 10
MAGNETOMETER PWR OUT 9
MAGNETOMETER GROUND 40
s

ARINC 429 IN 1A 15
ARINC 429 IN 1B 30
s
GDC 74() ADC

P741
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 42 8
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 41 ADC 9 16
s
3 ESSENTIAL BUS (SINGLE GDC OR GDC 1)
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 55 22 AWG 22 AWG AVIONICS OR MAIN BUS (GDC 2)
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 58 22 AWG F1 $
(14/28 VDC)
6 7
TVS1 12
(#1 GDC 74() ONLY)
3
AIRCRAFT GND 17 22 AWG 22 AWG 11
AIRCRAFT GND 18 22 AWG 13
OAT POWER 2 WHT
OAT PROBE IN HI 3 BLU *73
OAT PROBE IN LO 4 ORN 2$7352%(
s

5

Sheet 3 of 5

Rev. V Page F-14
NOTES
CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH CONFIGURATION
5 MODULE MUST BE USED FOR CONNECTING CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO P771 OR P741.
6 FOR A SINGLE GDU INSTALLATION, CONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER TO THE ESSENTIAL BUS.
FOR A DUAL GDU INSTALLATION, CONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE SYSTEM 1 LRU TO THE
7 ESSENTIAL BUS. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE SYSTEM 2 LRU MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE AVIONICS
OR MAIN BUS.
CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS SHOWN. LABEL AS SYSTEM 1 OR 2, AS APPROPRIATE FOR

8 DUAL GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS (I.E., “AHRS 1,” “AHRS 2,” “ADC 1,” OR “ADC 2”).
SECTION 2.5.4.
AT GRS 77 AND GDC 74(), CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD
10 LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES.
11 LRU MUST BE GROUNDED IN THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AREA.
REFER TO TABLE K-2. ALTERNATELY, THE FUSE MAY BE INSTALLED ON THE GROUND SIDE OF THE TVS.
12 FOR INFORMATION ON INSTALLING THE TVS/FUSE, REFER TO SECTION 3.4.3. CONNECT TVS AT GRS 77
AND GDC 74() AS SHOWN. FOR DUAL GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS, TVS IS NOT REQUIRED ON GRS 77 #2 OR
GDC 74() #2.
6" P771 GRS 77

6" P741 GDC 74()
Splice must be located inside Splice must be located inside
connector backshell. 18 connector backshell. 55
20 58
FUSE FUSE
4A F1 4A
F1
6" 6"
Cut TVS leads to 0.5" (2PL) Cut TVS leads to 0.5" (2PL)
TVS1 Stripe on TVS must be TVS1 Stripe on TVS must be

toward power bus toward power bus
s CONNECT TO s CONNECT TO
SHIELD BLOCK SHIELD BLOCK

Sheet 4 of 5

Rev. V Page F-15
NOTES CONTINUED
THE WIRING SUPPLIED WITH THE GTP 59 MAY BE EXTENDED IF THE SUPPLIED WIRE LENGTH IS NOT
13 SUFFICIENT FOR A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.
THE ALTERNATE CONFIGURATION MAY ONLY BE UTILIZED IN AIRCRAFT THAT MEET THE FOLLOWING
14 CRITERIA: (i) HAVE TWO OR MORE GENERATORS, AND (ii) HAVE AT LEAST TWO AVIONICS BUSES THAT
CAN BE ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED FROM EACH OTHER.
THE GDC 74() MAY BE POWERED FROM A BATTERY BUS INSTEAD OF AVIONICS BUS #1 IF THE GDC IS
15 CONNECTED TO OTHER AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS THAT NEED AIR DATA BEFORE THE AVIONICS BUSES ARE
SWITCHED ON.

Sheet 5 of 5

Rev. V Page F-16
METAL AIRCRAFT
GARMIN AHRS #1
GDU 620 PFD/MFD GSU GRS
P6202
75 77
P751 P771
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 27 14 A
ARINC 429 OUT 1
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 7 29 B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 51 26 OUT
RS-232 OUT 1 27 52 11 IN GPS1 RS-232
RS-232 GND 1 44 32 41 GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 72 6 IN
4 GPS2 RS-232
RS-232 GND 4 47 73 35 GND
s s
4
N/C 75 2 SYSTEM ID 1*
N/C 48 37 SIGNAL GROUND
GARMIN ADC #1
GSU GDC
75 74
P751 P741
ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 26 A
ARINC 429 OUT 1
ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 2 27 B
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 69 11 OUT
RS-232 OUT 2 28 70 10 IN RS-232 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 68 12 GND
s s
N/C - 6 SYSTEM ID 1*
N/C - 7 SIGNAL GROUND
NON-METALLIC AIRCRAFT
GDU 620 PFD/MFD P6202 GARMIN AHRS #1
GSU GRS
75 77
P751 P771
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 27 14 A
ARINC 429 OUT 1
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 7 29 B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 51 26 OUT
30 ¾W
RS-232 OUT 1 27 52 11 IN GPS1 RS-232
R1
5
RS-232 GND 1 44 32 41 GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 72 6 IN
4 GPS2 RS-232
RS-232 GND 4 47 73 35 GND
s s
4
N/C 48 37 SIGNAL GROUND
GARMIN ADC #1
GSU GDC
75 74
P751 P741
ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 26 A
ARINC 429 OUT 1
ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 2 27 B
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 69 11 OUT
RS-232 OUT 2 28 70 10 IN RS-232 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 68 12 GND
s s
N/C - 7 SIGNAL GROUND
Figure F-5 Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Single GDU)

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-17
NOTES
AT THE GDU 620, AHRS, AND ADC, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE
3
SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES.
4 THIS CONNECTION IS ONLY REQUIRED IF GPS #2 IS CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620.
RESISTOR REQUIRED FOR GRS 77 INSTALLATIONS ONLY. FOR PART NUMBERS, REFER TO
5 SECTION 2.4.2.1. FOR INFORMATION ON INSTALLING THE RESISTOR, REFER TO SECTION 3.4.3.
Figure F-5 Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Single GDU)

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-18
METAL AIRCRAFT (w/o Air Data Switching)
GARMIN AHRS #1
GSU GRS
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 75 77
P6202
P751 P771
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 27 14 A ARINC 429 OUT 1
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 7 29 B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 51 26 OUT
RS-232 OUT 1 27 52 11 IN GPS1 RS-232
RS-232 GND 1 44 32 41 GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 72 6 IN
RS-232 GND 4 47 GPS2 RS-232
73 35 GND
s s
75 2 SYSTEM ID 1*
48 37 SIGNAL GROUND
GARMIN ADC #1
GSU GDC
75 74
P751 P741
ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 26 A
ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 ARINC 429 OUT 1
2 27 B
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 69 11 OUT
RS-232 OUT 2 28 70 10 IN RS-232 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 68 12 GND
s s
- 6 SYSTEM ID 1*
- 7 SIGNAL GROUND
GARMIN AHRS #2
GSU GRS
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 75 77
P6202
P751 P771
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 27 14 A
7 29 B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 51 26 OUT
RS-232 OUT 1 27 52 11 IN GPS1 RS-232
RS-232 GND 1 44 32 41 GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 72 6 IN
RS-232 GND 4 47 GPS2 RS-232
73 35 GND
s s
57 3 SYSTEM ID 2*
48 37 SIGNAL GROUND
GARMIN ADC #2
GSU GDC
75 74
P751 P741
ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 26 A
ARINC 429 OUT 1
ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 2 27 B
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 69 11 OUT
RS-232 OUT 2 28 70 10 IN RS-232 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 68 12 GND
s s
- 71 SYSTEM ID 2*
- 72 SIGNAL GROUND
Figure F-6 Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)
Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. V Page F-19
METAL AIRCRAFT (with Air Data Switching)
GARMIN AHRS #1
GSU GRS
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 75 77
P6202
P751 P771
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 27 14 A ARINC 429 OUT 1
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 7 29 B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 51 26 OUT
RS-232 OUT 1 27 52 11 IN GPS1 RS-232
RS-232 GND 1 44 32 41 GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 72 6 IN
GND GPS2 RS-232
RS-232 GND 4 47 73 35
s s
75 2 SYSTEM ID 1*
48 37 SIGNAL GROUND
PFD 1 GARMIN ADC #1

AIR DATA GSU GDC
75 74
ADC 1 P751 P741
ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 26 A
ARINC 429 OUT 1
ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 2 27 B
s
s
ADC 2 - 6 SYSTEM ID 1*
5 6 - 7 SIGNAL GROUND
RS-232 IN 2 11 69 11 OUT
RS-232 OUT 2 28 70 10 IN RS-232 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 68 12 GND
s s
GARMIN AHRS #2
GSU GRS
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 75 77
P6202
P751 P771
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 27 14 A
7 29 B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 51 26 OUT
RS-232 OUT 1 27 52 11 IN GPS1 RS-232
RS-232 GND 1 44 32 41 GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 72 6 IN
RS-232 GND 4 GPS2 RS-232
47 73 35 GND
s s
57 3 SYSTEM ID 2*
48 37 SIGNAL GROUND
GARMIN ADC #2
GSU GDC
75 74
P751 P741
3 32 A ARINC 429 OUT 2
23 33 B (3 FOR GDC 74)
s
ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 26 A
2 27 B
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 69 11 OUT
RS-232 OUT 2 28 70 10 IN RS-232 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 68 12 GND
s s
- 71 SYSTEM ID 2*
- 72 SIGNAL GROUND
Sheet 2 of 4

Rev. V Page F-20
GARMIN AHRS #1
GSU GRS
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 P6202 75 77
P751 P771
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 27 14 A
7 29 B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 51 26 OUT
30 ¾W
RS-232 OUT 1 27 52 11 IN GPS1 RS-232
R1
4
RS-232 GND 1 44 32 41 GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 72 6 IN
RS-232 GND 4 47 GND GPS2 RS-232
73 35
s s
75 2 SYSTEM ID 1*
48 37 SIGNAL GROUND
GARMIN ADC #1
GSU GDC
75 74
P751 P741
ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 26 A
ARINC 429 OUT 1
ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 2 27 B
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 69 11 OUT
RS-232 OUT 2 28 70 10 IN RS-232 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 68 12 GND
s s
- 6 SYSTEM ID 1*
- 7 SIGNAL GROUND
GARMIN AHRS #2
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 GSU GRS
P6202 75 77
P751 P771
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 27 14 A
ARINC 429 OUT 1
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 7 29 B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 51 26 OUT
RS-232 OUT 1 27 52 11 IN GPS1 RS-232
RS-232 GND 1 44 32 41 GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 72 6 IN
RS-232 GND 4 47 GPS2 RS-232
73 35 GND
s s
57 3 SYSTEM ID 2*
48 37 SIGNAL GROUND
GARMIN ADC #2
GSU GDC
75 74
P751 P741
ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 26 A
2 27 B
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 69 11 OUT
RS-232 OUT 2 28 70 10 IN RS-232 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 68 12 GND
s s
- 71 SYSTEM ID 2*
- 72 SIGNAL GROUND
Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. V Page F-21
NOTES
AT THE GDU 620, AHRS, AND ADC, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE
3
SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES.
RESISTOR REQUIRED FOR GRS 77 INSTALLATIONS ONLY. FOR PART NUMBERS, REFER TO
4 SECTION 2.4.2.1. FOR INFORMATION ABOUT INSTALLING THE RESISTOR, REFER TO SECTION 3.4.3.
5 SWITCH MUST BE MOUNTED ADJACENT TO THE GDU 620 #1.
SWITCH MUST BE ILLUMINATED AND LABELED AS SHOWN. FOR SUITABLE SWITCHES, REFER TO
6 SECTION 2.4.2.2.
PFD 1
AIR DATA
ADC 1 (green)
ADC 2 (amber)
Sheet 4 of 4

Rev. V Page F-22
*$50,1 *36

*36:
*'83)'0)' *1&: *36:
*16 *16: *16:
3 3 3 3 3
56,1 562870$30;
56*1' *1' *1' *5281'
V

7,0(0$5.,1$ 7,0(0$5.287
*36 7,0(0$5.,1%
7,0(0$5.287
V
$5,1&,1$ *36287$ *$0$

$5,1&,1% *36287% 12)3
V
$5,1&287$ *36,1$
*$50,1*'8
$5,1&287% *36,1%
V
*36
*$50,1

*36:
*1&: *36:
*16 *16: *16:
3 3 3 3
*36,1$
*$50,1*'8
*36,1%
56,1 562870$30;

V

7,0(0$5.,1$ 7,0(0$5.287
*36 7,0(0$5.,1% 7,0(0$5.287

V
*36287$ *$0$
$5,1&,1$
$5,1&,1% *36287% 12)3
V
NOTES
AT GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST
3 BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT
A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
4 IF ONLY ONE NAVIGATOR IS INSTALLED, WIRE AS SHOWN FOR GPS 1.
5 FOR GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.
6 FOR NAVIGATOR SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO APPENDIX E.
THE TIME MARK B/- CONNECTION (P6202-41/43) IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THE 400W/500W SERIES UNITS
7 AND MUST BE LEFT UNCONNECTED IN THE INSTALLATION. A SINGLE CONDUCTOR SHIELDED WIRE MAY
BE USED FOR THE TIME MARK IN THIS CASE.
Figure F-7 GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Single GDU 620)

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-23
NOTES CONTINUED
8 FOR PINS IDENTIFIED WITH “GND,” CONNECT WIRE TO GROUND AT THE REAR OF THE UNIT.
IF A TAWS-EQUIPPED 500W SERIES UNIT IS INSTALLED, IT MUST BE CONNECTED AS GPS1 – ONLY TAWS
ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GPS1 ARE DISPLAYED ON THE PFD. IF TWO TAWS-EQUIPPED UNITS ARE
9 INSTALLED, THE TAWS-EQUIPPED UNIT THAT IS CONNECTED TO THE AUDIO PANEL MUST BE
CONNECTED AS GPS1.
REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT

10
INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
11 IF A GTN 6XX/7XX NAVIGATOR IS INSTALLED, REFER TO FIGURE F-35 AND FIGURE F-36.
DEFAULT ARINC 429 INPUT PORT SHOWN. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE DEFAULT INPUT BE UTILIZED
WHENEVER POSSIBLE; HOWEVER, THIS FUNCTION MAY BE CONFIGURED ON ANOTHER AVAILABLE
12 ARINC 429 INPUT (INPUTS 4-8 ONLY). FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429 INPUTS,
REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1.
Figure F-7 GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Single GDU 620)

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-24
GPS #1
GARMIN
6
9
GPS 400W
GNC 420W GPS 500W
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 GNS 480 GNS 430W GNS 530W
5 P6202 P1 P5 P4001 P5001
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 3 - 8 48 48 GPS 429 IN A (GARMIN GDU)
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 20 - 28 49 49 GPS 429 IN B
s
RS232 IN 3 12 5 - 56 56 RS232 OUT (MAPMX)
RS232 GND 3 46 23 - GND GND GROUND 8
s
7
TIME MARK IN 1A 40 19 - 16 16 TIME MARK OUT +
*36 -
TIME MARK IN 1B 41 17 - - TIME MARK OUT -
s
ARINC 429 IN 3A 6 - 4 46 46 GPS 429 OUT A (GAMA 429/

ARINC 429 IN 3B 23 - 24 47 47 GPS 429 OUT B 429 NO FP)
s
RS232 IN 4 13
s
TIME MARK IN 2A 42
*36
TIME MARK IN 2B 43
s
ARINC 429 IN 5A 8
12
ARINC 429 IN 5B 25
s
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 5 P6202

RS232 IN 3 12
RS232 GND 3 46
s
GPS #2
TIME MARK IN 1A 40 GARMIN
*36 6
TIME MARK IN 1B 41
s 9
GPS 400W
ARINC 429 IN 3A 6 GNC 420W GPS 500W
ARINC 429 IN 3B 23 GNS 480 GNS 430W GNS 530W
s
P1 P5 P4001 P5001
RS232 IN 4 13 5 - 56 56 RS232 OUT (MAPMX)
s
7
TIME MARK IN 2A 42 19 - 16 16 TIME MARK OUT +
*36 TIME MARK OUT -
TIME MARK IN 2B 43 17 - - -
s
ARINC 429 IN 5A 8 - 4 46 46 GPS 429 OUT A (GAMA 429/
12
ARINC 429 IN 5B 25 - 24 47 47 GPS 429 OUT B 429 NO FP)
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 3 - 8 48 48 GPS 429 IN 1A

(GARMIN GDU)
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 20 - 28 49 49 GPS 429 IN 1B
s
Figure F-8 GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-25
NOTES
4 FOR INSTALLATIONS WITH DUAL GDUs, TWO SUITABLE GPS SENSORS ARE REQUIRED.
THE TIME MARK B/- CONNECTION (P6202-41/43) IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THE 400W/500W SERIES UNITS
7 AND MUST BE LEFT UNCONNECTED IN THE INSTALLATION. A SINGLE CONDUCTOR SHIELDED WIRE MAY
BE USED FOR THE TIME MARK IN THIS CASE.
8 FOR PINS IDENTIFIED WITH “GND,” CONNECT WIRE TO GROUND AT THE REAR OF THE UNIT.
IF A TAWS-EQUIPPED 500W SERIES UNIT IS INSTALLED, IT MUST BE CONNECTED AS GPS1 – ONLY TAWS
ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GPS1 ARE DISPLAYED ON THE PFD. IF TWO TAWS-EQUIPPED UNITS ARE
9 INSTALLED, THE TAWS-EQUIPPED UNIT THAT IS CONNECTED TO THE AUDIO PANEL MUST BE
CONNECTED AS GPS1.

10
INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
11 IF A GTN 6XX/7XX NAVIGATOR IS INSTALLED, REFER TO FIGURE F-35 AND FIGURE F-36.
Figure F-8 GPS Source Interconnect 400W/500W/480 (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-26
ARINC 429
NAV 1 (NAV 2)
GARMIN
5
GDU 620 4 GNC 255() GTN 650 GTN 750 GNS 480 GNS 430W GNS 530W
P6202 P2002 P1004 P1004 P5 P4006 P5006
3 9
ARINC 429 IN 4(6)A 7(9) 24 24 24 5 24 24 VOR/ILS 429 OUT A
1$9 23 23 23 25 23 23 VOR/ILS 429 OUT B
ARINC 429 IN 4(6)B 24(26)
s
RS-232
NAV 1 OR NAV 2
GARMIN
5 6
SL30
GDU 620 4 37-Pin
P6202
1$9 RS-232 OUT 5 31 4 RXD1
25 RS-232 IN 5 14 5 TXD1
1$9 RS-232 GND 5 48 3 SERIAL GROUND
s
NOTES
BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT
2 A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL, IN ACCORDANCE WITH LRU INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
3 IF ONLY ONE NAV RECEIVER IS INSTALLED, WIRE AS SHOWN FOR NAV 1.
ONLY ONE SL30 MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620. IT CAN BE CONFIGURED AS NAV 1, OR AS NAV 2
6 IF NAV 1 IS CONFIGURED FOR AN ARINC 429 NAV SOURCE.
Figure F-9 Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Single GDU 620)

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-27
NOTES CONTINUED
FOR GNC OR GTN NAVIGATORS, CONNECT SHIELD TO SHIELD BLOCK GROUND, NOT AIRFRAME
8 GROUND.
Figure F-9 Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Single GDU 620)

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-28
ARINC 429
NAV 1
GARMIN
4 8
PILOT’S GDU 620 GNC 255() GTN 650 GTN 750 GNS 480 GNS 430W GNS 530W
6
P6202 P2002 P1004 P1004 P5 P4006 P5006
11
ARINC 429 IN 4A 7 24 24 24 5 24 24 VOR/ILS 429 OUT A
1$9 23 23 23 25 23 23 VOR/ILS 429 OUT B
ARINC 429 IN 4B 24
s
10
11
ARINC 429 IN 6A 9 9
1$9
ARINC 429 IN 6B 26
10 s
COPILOT’S GDU 620 6

NAV 2
P6202 GARMIN
11 4 8
ARINC 429 IN 4A 7 GNC 255() GTN 650 GTN 750 GNS 480 GNS 430W GNS 530W
1$9
ARINC 429 IN 4B 24 P2002 P1004 P1004 P5 P4006 P5006
s
10
11
ARINC 429 IN 6A 9 24 24 24 5 24 24 VOR/ILS 429 OUT A
1$9 VOR/ILS 429 OUT B
ARINC 429 IN 6B 26 23 23 23 25 23 23
10 s
RS-232
PILOT’S GDU 620 6
P6202
1$9 RS-232 OUT 5 31
25 RS-232 IN 5 14
1$9 RS-232 GND 5 48 NAV 1 OR NAV 2
s
GARMIN
4 5 7 8
SL30
COPILOT’S GDU 620 6 37-Pin
P6202
1$9 RS-232 OUT 5 31 N/C 4 RXD1
25 RS-232 IN 5 14 5 TXD1
1$9 RS-232 GND 5 48 3 SERIAL GROUND
s
Figure F-10 Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-29
NOTES
4 IF ONLY ONE NAV RECEIVER IS INSTALLED, WIRE AS SHOWN FOR NAV 1.
ONLY ONE SL30 MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620. IT CAN BE CONFIGURED AS NAV 1, OR AS NAV 2
5 IF NAV 1 IS CONFIGURED FOR AN ARINC 429 NAV SOURCE.
THE SL30 MUST BE CONNECTED AS THE SAME NAVIGATION SOURCE TO BOTH GDUs (I.E., AS NAV 1 ON
7 BOTH GDU 620s, OR AS NAV 2 ON BOTH GDU 620s).
FOR GNC OR GTN NAVIGATORS, CONNECT SHIELD TO SHIELD BLOCK GROUND, NOT AIRFRAME
9 GROUND.
10
ARINC 429 INPUT (INPUTS 4-8 ONLY). REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE
THE ARINC 429 INPUTS.
CONNECTION FROM NAV RADIO CAN BE MADE TO BOTH GDUs OR ONLY CONNECTED TO ONE GDU
(EITHER PILOT’S OR CO-PILOT’S) AND NAVIGATION INFORMATION CROSSFILLED TO THE OTHER GDU.
11 DIRECT CONNECTION TO EACH GDU IS PREFERRED. CROSSFILL OPTION SHOULD ONLY BE USED IF
THERE ARE AN INSUFFICIENT NUMBER OF GDU ARINC 429 INPUTS TO SUPPORT ALL ARINC 429
INTERFACES IN A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.
Figure F-10 Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-30
AUTOPILOT
GARMIN HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING) AUTOPILOT
GDU 620 KAP 200
KAP 150
KAP 100 KAP 140 KFC 200 KFC 225
KFC 150 11 KFC 250
KC 295
KC 191
KC 190 KC 140 KC 192 KC 295 KC 225
KCP 299
P1901 P1902 P1401 P1402 P19X1 P19X2 P1 P2 P2251 P2252
P6203 8
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 X - 2 - X - - H 2 - HDG DATUM HI

A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 20 - 27 - 20 - - M 28 - HDG DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 W - - 17 W - - W - 16 CRS DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 19 - 27 - 19 - - M/S 28 - CRS DATUM LO
s
6
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 54 - - 22 - - - - - 23 - LAT DEV FLAG +
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 55 - - 23 - - - - - 24 - LAT DEV FLAG -
s
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 52 U - 24 - U - - C 25 - LAT DEV +LT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 53 17 - 25 - 17 - - A 26 - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 58 - - - 31 - 21 C - - 14 GS DEV FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 59 - - - 12 - Y D - - 15 GS DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 56 - - - 9 - V M - - 12 GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 57 - - - 10 - 19 K - - 52 GS DEV +DOWN
s
GPS SELECT*
22
(DISC OUT 7*) 45 - - - 26 - - - - - 34 GPS SELECT (GND=GPS)
22 ILS/GPS APPROACH*
(DISC OUT 8*) 46 B - 7 - B - AA - 7 - ILS ENERGIZE (A/P IN)
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 1 - - - - - - - - 46 - A

28 429 GPS IN
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 23 - - - - - - - - 47 - B
s
HDG/CRS DATUM VALID
n 1 - 11 - 1 - c - 11 - COMPASS VALID
25 (DISC OUT n)
9
ARINC 429 IN xA x - - - - - - - - 48 - A
26 429 OUT
ARINC 429 IN xB x - - - - - - - - 49 - B
s
7 A/P AC REF HI 20 - - - - - - H 13 - - - 26 VAC 400 HZ REF HI

A/P AC REF LO 42 - - - - - - - - - - 26 VAC 400 HZ REF LO
s
s
19 - 1 - - - 1 - - - - PWR REF
HONEYWELL 19
Z - - - Z - - - - - VG REF
(BENDIX-KING) 20 P3501
KVG-350
26 VAC 400 HZ REF HI E
TO GAD 43 (OPTIONAL)
26 VAC 400 HZ REF LO B
Figure F-11 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Honeywell (Bendix/King)

Sheet 1 of 9

Rev. V Page F-31
KFC 275/325 AUTOPILOT (except KCP 220 -08)
HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING) AUTOPILOT
GARMIN
GDU 620 KFC 275 KFC 275 KFC 325 KFC 325
KCP 220 KMC 221 KCP 220

(-12 and below, or KCP 220 (-12 and below, KMC 321 KCP 220
(-15 and above) (-15 and above)
except -08) KMC 321 except -08)
P2211 / P2211 /
P2201 P2202 P2203 P3211 P2201 P2202 P2203 P2201 P2202 P2203 P3211 P2201 P2202 P2203
P6203 8
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 16 - - - 16 - - - - 34 - - - 34 HDG DATUM HI

A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 17 - - - 17 - - - - 35 - - - 35 HDG DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 32 - - - 32 - - - - 10 - - - 10 CRS DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 33 - - - 33 - - - - 9 - - - 9 CRS DATUM LO
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 54 - - - 27 21 - 24 - - - - - 27 21 - 24 - - NAV VALID (+)
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 55 - - - 26 - - - - - - 26 - - - NAV VALID (-)
s
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 52 3 - - - 3 - - 3 - - - 3 - - LAT DEV +LT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 53 2 - - - 2 - - 2 - - - 2 - - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 58 - 27 - - - - 24 - - 27 - - - - 24 - GS DEV FLAG +

VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 59 - 10 - - - - - - 10 - - - - - GS DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 56 - 11 - - - 11 - - 11 - - - 11 - GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 57 - 28 - - - 28 - - 28 - - - 28 - GS DEV +DOWN
s
GPS SELECT*
22
(DISC OUT 7*) 45 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - GPS SELECT (GND=GPS)
ILS/GPS APPROACH*
22 (DISC OUT 8*) 46 22 - - - 22 - - 22 - - - 22 - - ILS ENERGIZE (A/P IN)
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 1 - - - - - - 18 - - - - - - 18 A

28 ARINC 429 IN (EFIS)
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 23 - - - - - - 20 - - - - - - 20 B
s
HDG/CRS DATUM VALID 9
n 38 - - - 38 - - 38 - - - 38 - - COMPASS VALID
25 (DISC OUT n)
ARINC 429 IN xA x - - 26 - - - 26 - - 26 - - - 26 A
26 429 FLT CNTRL DATA
ARINC 429 IN xB x - - 27 - - - 27 - - 27 - - - 27 B
s
7 A/P AC REF HI 20 - - 36 - - - 36 - - 36 - - - 36 26 VAC 400 HZ REF HI

A/P AC REF LO s
42
30 30 30 30
HONEYWELL
(BENDIX-KING)
KVG-350 20
P3501

Sheet 2 of 9

Rev. V Page F-32
KFC 275/325 AUTOPILOT (with KCP 220 -08)
GARMIN
GDU 620 KFC 275 31 KFC 275 32 KFC 325 31 KFC 325 32
KCP 220 KMC 321 KCP 220 KCP 220 KMC 321 KCP 220
(-08) (-08 only) (-08) (-08) (-08 only) (-08)
P2201 P2202 P2203 P3211 P2201 P2202 P2203 P2201 P2202 P2203 P3211 P2201 P2202 P2203
P6203 8
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 16 - - - 16 - - - - 34 - - - 34 HDG DATUM HI
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 17 - - - 17 - - - - 35 - - - 35 HDG DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 32 - - - 32 - - - - 10 - - - 10 CRS DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 33 - - - 33 - - - - 9 - - - 9 CRS DATUM LO
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 54 - - - 27 21 - - - - - - 27 21 - - - NAV VALID (+)
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 55 - - - 26 - - - - - - 26 - - - NAV VALID (-)
s
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 52 3 - - - 3 - - 3 - - - 3 - - LAT DEV +LT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 53 2 - - - 2 - - 2 - - - 2 - - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 58 - 27 - - - 27 - - 27 - - - 27 - GS DEV FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 59 - 10 - - - 10 - - 10 - - - 10 - GS DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 56 - 11 - - - 11 - - 11 - - - 11 - GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 57 - 28 - - - 28 - - 28 - - - 28 - GS DEV +DOWN
s
GPS SELECT*
(DISC OUT 7*) 45
22 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - GPS SELECT (GND=GPS)
ILS/GPS APPROACH*
22 (DISC OUT 8*) 46 22 - - - 22 - - 22 - - - 22 - - ILS ENERGIZE (A/P IN)
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A

28 ARINC 429 IN (EFIS)
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 23 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B
s
HDG/CRS DATUM VALID 9
n - - - 7 38 - - - - - 7 38 - - COMPASS VALID IN
25 (DISC OUT n)
33 33
ARINC 429 IN xA x - - 26 - - - 26 - - 26 - - - 26 A 429 FLT CNTRL DATA
26
ARINC 429 IN xB x - - 27 - - - 27 - - 27 - - - 27 B
s
7 A/P AC REF HI 20 - - 36 - - - 36 - - 36 - - - 36 26 VAC 400 HZ REF HI

A/P AC REF LO s
42
30 30 30 30
HONEYWELL
(BENDIX-KING)
KVG-350 20
P3501

Sheet 3 of 9

Rev. V Page F-33
KFC 300 AUTOPILOT
GARMIN AUTOPILOT
HONEYWELL
GDU 620 (BENDIX/KING)
KFC 300
AIRCRAFT 400 HZ AC
REFERENCE VOLTAGE KCP 320
P6203 J1 J2TP J2BP
8
A/P AC REF HI 20 19 - - 26 VAC 400 HZ REF HI

A/P AC REF LO 42 - - 5 26 VAC 400 HZ REF LO
s
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 12 - - HDG DATUM HI
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 13 - - HDG DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 14 - - CRS DATUM SIN +
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 15 - - CRS DATUM SIN -
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 54 - 30 - LAT DEV FLAG +
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 55 - 31 - LAT DEV FLAG -
s
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 52 2 - - LAT DEV +LT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 53 1 - - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 58 - 24 - GS DEV FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 59 - 25 - GS DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 56 3 - - GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 57 4 - - GS DEV +DOWN
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH*
22 (DISC OUT 8*) 46 - 29 - ILS ENERGIZE (A/P IN)
TO GDU 620
CIRCUIT BREAKER
17 - - COURSE DATUM COS-
16 - - COURSE DATUM COS+
2 M, - 40 - PRE-FLT TEST SWITCH
¼ WATT
TO KAC 325 TP-43 AND

P6201 KDC 380 J1-R
A/P BACKCOURSE*
22 (DISC OUT 3*) 25 NC NC
23
BACKCOURSE
RELAY TO GDU 620
NO NO CIRCUIT BREAKER
AP TEST

Sheet 4 of 9

Rev. V Page F-34
FLIGHT DIRECTOR – SINGLE GDU INSTALLATIONS
KI 256 ADI 14
(on copilot s side) P2561
12
CMD BAR RETRACT P
ROLL CMD BAR IN M
PITCH CMD BAR IN L
(OPTIONAL)
CMD BAR REF N HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING)
AUTOPILOT
KFC 150 11 KFC 200 KFC 225 KFC 250 KFC 275
GARMIN KCP 299

KCP 220 27
w/ 065-5016-XX
GDU 620 KC 192 KC 295 KC 225 Adapter Card (-12 and below)
P6201 P1911 P1912 P29X1 P29X2 P2251 P2252 P2991 P2992 P2201 P2202 P2203
FD ENABLE IN 9 16 - - p - 48 - p 8 - - CMD BAR RETRACT
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 C - - EE - 49 - EE 21 - - ROLL CMD BAR OUT

FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15 E - - BB - 50 - BB 29 - - PITCH CMD BAR OUT

FD PITCH DOWN 16 - A F - - 51 F - - 41 - CMD BAR REF
s
AUTOPILOT ORIGINALLY HAD 3" INSTRUMENTS
KCI 310 ADI 14

(on copilot s side) P1
12
CMD BAR RETRACT R
ROLL CMD BAR IN T
PITCH CMD BAR IN P
(OPTIONAL)
CMD BAR REF W
TO AUTOPILOT
CIRCUIT BREAKER 16
KFC 250 KFC 300 KFC 325
18 FUSE, 5A OR LESS
GARMIN KCP 299
KCP 220 27
w/ 065-5015-XX
GDU 620 Adapter Card KCP 320 (-12 and below)
P6201 100 K, ¼ WATT 17
P2991 P2992 J1 J2TP J2BP P2201 P2202 P2203
FD ENABLE IN 9 - p 9 - - 15 - - CMD BAR RETRACT
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - EE 30 - - 39 - - ROLL CMD BAR OUT

FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15 - BB 29 - - 7 - - PITCH CMD BAR OUT

FD PITCH DOWN 16 F - - - 10 - 41 - CMD BAR REF
s

Sheet 5 of 9

Rev. V Page F-35
FLIGHT DIRECTOR - DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS
GARMIN
GDU 620 #2 P6201
FD ENABLE IN 9
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 8
FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15 HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING) AUTOPILOT

FD PITCH DOWN 16
s KFC 150 11 KFC 200 KFC 225 KFC 250 KFC 275
KCP 299
w/ 065-5016-XX KCP 220 27
GARMIN KC 192 KC 295 KC 225 Adapter Card (-12 and below)
GDU 620 #1 P6201 P1911 P1912 P29X1 P29X2 P2251 P2252 P2991 P2992 P2201 P2202 P2203
s s 15
FD ENABLE IN 9 16 - - p - 48 - p 8 - - CMD BAR RETRACT
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 C - - EE - 49 - EE 21 - - ROLL CMD BAR OUT

FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15 E - - BB - 50 - BB 29 - - PITCH CMD BAR OUT

FD PITCH DOWN 16 - A F - - 51 F - - 41 - CMD BAR REF
s
GARMIN
GDU 620 #2 P6201
FD ENABLE IN 9
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 8
FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
TO AUTOPILOT
FD PITCH UP 15 CIRCUIT BREAKER 16 AUTOPILOT
HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING)
FD PITCH DOWN 16
s
18 KFC 250 KFC 300 KFC 325
FUSE, 5A OR LESS KCP 299
w/ 065-5015-XX KCP 220 27
GARMIN Adapter Card KCP 320 (-12 and below)
100 K ¼ WATT
GDU 620 #1 P6201 P2991 P2992 J1 J2TP J2BP P2201 P2202 P2203
s s 15
FD ENABLE IN 9 - p 9 - - 15 - - CMD BAR RETRACT
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - EE 30 - - 39 - - ROLL CMD BAR OUT

FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15 - BB 29 - - 7 - - PITCH CMD BAR OUT

FD PITCH DOWN 16 F - - - 10 - 41 - CMD BAR REF
s

Sheet 6 of 9

Rev. V Page F-36
NOTES
4 REFERENCE SECTION 5.5 FOR GDU AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION.
5 CONNECTIONS ARE REQUIRED ONLY FOR THOSE INPUTS THAT THE AUTOPILOT COMPUTER SUPPORTS.
ON THE KFC 200, CONNECT BOTH THE A/P HEADING ERROR LO AND A/P COURSE ERROR LO TO PIN M.
6 ON THE KFC 250, CONNECT THE A/P HEADING ERROR LO TO PIN M AND THE A/P COURSE ERROR LO TO
PIN S.
A/P AC REFERENCE CONNECTIONS TO THE GDU 620 ARE NEEDED ONLY IF THE AUTOPILOT REQUIRES
7 THE AC REFERENCE.
FOR DUAL-GDU 620 SYSTEMS, CONNECT THE FD SIGNALS TO GDU #2 AS SHOWN. ALL OTHER
8 AUTOPILOT SIGNALS SHOULD BE CONNECTED ONLY TO GDU #1.
NEW G500/G600 INSTALLATIONS MUST USE THE HDG/CRS VALID* DISCRETE OUTPUT FROM THE
GDU 620. FOR EXISTING G500/G600 INSTALLATIONS, IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO GROUND THE COMPASS
9 VALID DISCRETE INPUT WHEN THE GDU 620 IS INSTALLED. THE AUTOPILOT USES THIS INPUT TO
DETERMINE THE VALIDITY OF THE HEADING AND COURSE DATUM (ERROR) SIGNALS. FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION, REFER TO APPENDIX E.
10 NOT USED.
11 EFIS-ENABLED KC 19X COMPUTER (P/N 065-0042-16) IS NOT SUPPORTED.
FLIGHT DIRECTOR WIRING TO EXISTING ADI MUST BE DISCONNECTED IF THIS INDICATOR IS USED AS A
STANDBY INSTRUMENT FOR THE GDU 620. IF THIS INDICATOR IS BEING RELOCATED TO THE CO-PILOT’S
12 SIDE, WIRING MAY BE CONNECTED IN PARALLEL TO THIS ADI. THE WIRING TO THIS ADI MUST BE
CONNECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS. THIS ADI MUST BE
LOCATED ON IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 2.5.11.8.
AC REFERENCE APPLICABLE TO THE KFC 250 ONLY (WITH KCP 299 UTILIZING 065-5015-XX ADAPTER
13
CARD FOR 4-INCH INSTRUMENTS).
IF THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR IS BEING DISPLAYED ON THE CO-PILOT’S ADI, THIS FLIGHT DIRECTOR
14 ALIGNMENT MUST BE CORRECTLY ADJUSTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S
INSTRUCTIONS PRIOR TO MAKING ANY ADJUSTMENTS TO THE GDU 620.
FOR DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS, FLIGHT DIRECTOR WIRING MUST BE DISCONNECTED FROM THE
15
EXISTING ADI.

Sheet 7 of 9

Rev. V Page F-37
NOTES CONTINUED
GDU 620 FD ENABLE INPUT MUST BE PULLED UP TO THE SAME CIRCUIT BREAKER AS THE AUTOPILOT
16 COMPUTER IN ORDER TO ENSURE THAT THE COMMAND BARS ARE REMOVED WHEN THE AUTOPILOT
COMPUTER IS NOT POWERED-UP.
IF THE KCI 310 ADI IS CONNECTED IN PARALLEL TO THE GDU 620, THE PULL-UP RESISTOR IS NOT
17
REQUIRED.
IF THE RATING OF THE AUTOPILOT CIRCUIT BREAKER IS GREATER THAN 5A, AN IN-LINE FUSE WILL BE
REQUIRED TO PROTECT THE WIRING TO THE GDU. THE FUSE MUST BE INSTALLED AT THE POINT THAT
18
POWER IS PICKED OFF FOR THE PULL-UP RESISTOR. IF THE RATING OF THE AUTOPILOT CIRCUIT
BREAKER IS 5A OR LESS, NO FUSE IS REQUIRED.
IF THE GAD 43 IS USED TO REPLACE THE ADI, AND THE WIRING TO THE EXISTING ADI IS REMOVED,
19
ENSURE THAT GROUND REFERENCE PINS REMAIN JUMPERED AS SHOWN.
IF THE GAD 43 IS USED TO REPLACE THE KVG 350, THE 26 VAC REFERENCE WILL BE PROVIDED BY THE
20 GAD 43. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, REFER TO FIGURE F-28.
IF THE MODE CONTROL PANEL DOES NOT SUPPORT THE NAV FLAG, THESE OUTPUTS FROM THE
21 GDU 620 MAY BE LEFT UNCONNECTED.
DEFAULT OUTPUT PIN SHOWN. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE DEFAULT OUTPUT BE UTILIZED
22 DISCRETE OUTPUT. FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE DISCRETE OUTPUTS, REFER TO
SECTION 5.5.9.
THE KCI 310 INDICATOR CONTAINS A TEST KEY THAT IS USED TO INITIATE THE KFC 300 SELF-TEST. IF
23 THE KCI 310 INDICATOR IS REMOVED, AN EXTERNAL MOMENTARY SWITCH MUST BE INSTALLED TO
REPLACE THE FUNCTION OF THE KCI 310 TEST SWITCH. THE SWITCH SHOULD BE LABELED “AP TEST.”
24 THE ARINC 429 DATA IS USED FOR THE VALID FLAGS.
THERE IS NO DEFAULT CONFIGURATION FOR THIS DISCRETE OUTPUT. AN UNUSED DISCRETE OUTPUT
25 MUST BE ASSIGNED TO THIS FUNCTION. FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE DISCRETE
OUTPUTS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.9.
THERE IS NO DEFAULT CONFIGURATION FOR THIS ARINC 429 INPUT. AN UNUSED ARINC 429 INPUT
26 (INPUTS 4-8 ONLY) MUST BE ASSIGNED TO THIS FUNCTION. FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE
ARINC 429 INPUTS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1.
THE KFC 325/275 -15 AND ABOVE USE ARINC 429 FOR THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR AND DO NOT REQUIRE
27
ANALOG FLIGHT DIRECTOR CONNECTIONS.
28 FOR ARINC 429 OUTPUT SETTINGS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.12.4.
ADDITIONAL INTERFACES TO HONEYWELL (BENDIX-KING) AUTOPILOTS USING THE GAD 43/43e ARE
29
SHOWN IN FIGURE F-28.
OTHER AUTOPILOT INPUTS USE THE 26 VAC REFERENCE FOR THE ANALOG ATTITUDE FROM THE
30
GAD 43/43e. REFER TO FIGURE F-28.

Sheet 8 of 9

Rev. V Page F-38
NOTES CONTINUED
31 USE THIS CONFIGURATION IF KMC 321 (P/N 065-00086-08) IS INSTALLED.
USE THIS CONFIGURATION FOR INSTALLATIONS WITH ALL KMC 221 MODE CONTROL PANELS, OR WITH
32 ALL KMC 321 MODE CONTROL PANELS EXCEPT P/N 065-00086-08.
IF THE EXISTING INSTALLATION HAD A JUMPER BETWEEN P3211 PINS 7 AND 18 (KMC 321
33 P/N 065-00086-00), IT MUST BE RETAINED. IF NO JUMPER WAS PRESENT BETWEEN P3211 PINS 7 AND 18
(KMC 321 P/N 065-00086-08), DO NOT INSTALL A JUMPER.

Sheet 9 of 9

Rev. V Page F-39
AUTOPILOT
21 21
S-TEC AUTOPILOT
GARMIN S-TEC 60-1/ 28 S-TEC S-TEC
GDU 620 S-TEC S-TEC 60-2/60 PSS/ 1500/2100 1500/2100
20/30 S-TEC 55 S-TEC 55X 65 18 (-01 & -03) (-02,-04, -07)
40/50
P6203 P1 P1 P1 P2 P1 P2 RFGC PFGC P1 P2 P1 P2
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 8 31 28 - 28 - 19 - 3 - 5 - HDG DATUM HI
25
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 7 29 29 - 29 - 13 - - - 7 - HDG DATUM LO
s
23
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 - - 11 - 11 - 20 - - - - - CRS DATUM HI
- - 25
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 - - 12 - 12 - 13 - - - CRS DATUM LO
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 54 - - 13 - 13 - 24 - 37 - 37 - LAT DEV FLAG +
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 55 - - 14 - 14 - 6 - 36 - 36 - LAT DEV FLAG -
s
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 52 9 14 31 - 31 - 23 - 39 - 39 - LAT DEV +LT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 53 10 13 30 - 30 - 21 - 38 - 38 - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 58 - - - 1 - 1 - 77 41 - 41 - GS DEV FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 59 - - - 2 - 2 - 58 40 - 40 - GS DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 56 - - - 18 - 18 - 46 42 - 42 - GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 57 - - - 19 - 19 - 45 1 - 1 - GS DEV +DOWN
s
GPS ANNUNCIATE*
19
(DISC OUT 6*) 44 - - - - - 38 - - - - - - GPSS STEERING
GPS SELECT* 13
- - - -
19
(DISC OUT 7*) 45 42 26 - - 49 - - - GPS TRACK GAIN 13
ILS/GPS APPROACH*
19 (DISC OUT 8*) 46 - - 32 - 32 - 16 - 23 - 23 - LOC SWITCH
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 1 - - - - - 36 - - A

26 22 22 22 22 429 GPSS DATA IN
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 23 - - - - - 37 - - B
s
RS-485 3A 11 - - - - - 21 - - - - - - A ALT SEL/BARO ALT
27 20 RS-485 3B - - - - 20 - - - - - - B
33 - RS‐485
s
N/C - - - - - 23 - - - - - - ALT SEL JUMPER
6
N/C - - - - - 42 - - - - - - GROUND
N/C - - 9 - 9 - 18 - - - - - DG GROUND STRAP
14
N/C - - 10 - 10 - 34 - - - - - GROUND
N/C 20 23 - - - - - - - - - - NO HEADING SYSTEM A

15
N/C 21 39 - - - - - - - - - - NO HEADING SYSTEM B
Figure F-12 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – S-TEC

Sheet 1 of 6

Rev. V Page F-40
ARINC-429 – S-TEC 1500/2100
21 AUTOPILOT
S-TEC
GARMIN
GDU 620 #1 S-TEC
1500/2100
P2
24 26 P6203
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 1 26 (ADAHRS 1) ARINC RX1A
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 23 27 (ADAHRS 1) ARINC RX1B
s
32 (PILOT S PFD) ARINC RX3A
33 (PILOT S PFD) ARINC RX3B
GARMIN
GDU 620 #2
P6203
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 1 28 (ADAHRS 2) ARINC RX2A
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 23 29 (ADAHRS 2) ARINC RX2B
s
24 26
FLIGHT DIRECTOR – S-TEC 1500/2100

GARMIN
GDU 620 #2 P6201
FD ENABLE IN 9
FD ROLL RIGHT 35
FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15
FD PITCH DOWN 16
21 AUTOPILOT
s
S-TEC
S-TEC
1500/2100
GARMIN P1 P2
GDU 620 #1 P6201
s s
FD ENABLE IN 9 - 24 FD FLAG
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 50 - R-STR-OUT

FD ROLL LEFT 34 19 - VREF
s
FD PITCH UP 15 51 - P-STR-OUT
FD PITCH DOWN 16
s

Sheet 2 of 6

Rev. V Page F-41
ADI
(on copilot s side)
17
S-TEC AUTOPILOT
GARMIN S-TEC 55 S-TEC 55X
GDU 620 P6201 P1 P2 P1 P2
FD ENABLE IN 9 - 4 - 4 FD LOGIC OUT 10
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - 12 - 12 ROLL STEERING SIG

FD ROLL LEFT 34 - 29 - 29 SIG REF
s
FD PITCH UP 15 - 13 - 13 PITCH STEERING SIG
FD PITCH DOWN 16 - 30 - 30 SIG REF
s
N/C - 10 - 10 10 VDC PARALLAX POT

11 N/C - 11 - 11 PITCH STR CENTERING
N/C - 44 - 44 FD POT GROUND
S-TEC AUTOPILOT
S-TEC 60-2/65
RFGC PFGC OPTION
N/C - - 1 10 VDC PARALLAX POT
11 N/C - - 4 PITCH STR CENTERING
N/C - - 3 FD POT GROUND
S-TEC STEERING HORIZON

GARMIN INTERFACE
GDU 620 ST-670
(P/N 01180) 8
P6201 P1
FD ENABLE IN 9 13 FD ENGAGE
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 1 ROLL CMD

FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15 9 PITCH CMD

FD PITCH DOWN 16
s

Sheet 3 of 6

Rev. V Page F-42
FLIGHT DIRECTOR – DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS 22
GARMIN
GDU 620 #2 P6201
FD ENABLE IN 9
FD ROLL RIGHT 35
FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15 S-TEC AUTOPILOT

FD PITCH DOWN 16
s S-TEC 55 S-TEC 55X
P1 P2 P1 P2
N/C - 10 - 10 10 VDC PARALLAX POT
GARMIN 11 N/C - 11 - 11 PITCH STR CENTERING
GDU 620 #1 P6201 N/C - 44 - 44 FD POT GROUND
s s 14
FD ENABLE IN 9 - 4 - 4 FD LOGIC 10
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - 12 - 12 ROLL FD STEERING

FD ROLL LEFT 34 - 29 - 29 SIG REF (ROLL FD)
s
FD PITCH UP 15 - 13 - 13 PITCH FD STEERING

FD PITCH DOWN 16 - 30 - 30 SIG REF (PITCH FD)
s
GARMIN
GDU 620 #2 P6201 S-TEC AUTOPILOT
S-TEC 60-2/65
FD ENABLE IN 9
RFGC PFGC OPTION
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 8 - - 1 10 VDC PARALLAX POT
N/C
FD ROLL LEFT 34 11 N/C - - 4 PITCH STR CENTERING
s - - 3 FD POT GROUND
N/C
FD PITCH UP 15
FD PITCH DOWN 16
s
S-TEC STEERING HORIZON

INTERFACE
GARMIN ST-670
8
GDU 620 #1 P6201 P1
s s 14
FD ENABLE IN 9 13 FD ENGAGE
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 1 ROLL CMD

FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15 9 PITCH CMD

FD PITCH DOWN 16
s

Sheet 4 of 6

Rev. V Page F-43
NOTES
4 REFERENCE SECTIONS 5.5.12 AND 5.5.13 FOR GDU AUTOPILOT AND FLIGHT DIRECTOR CONFIGURATION.
ALT SEL JUMPER MUST NOT BE INSTALLED IF THE GDU 620 IS PROVIDING THE ALTITUDE PRESELECT
6 FUNCTION. WHEN THE GDU 620 IS USED FOR THE ALTITUDE PRESELECT FUNCTION, IT EMULATES THE
S-TEC SA-200 (P/N 01282) ALTITUDE SELECTOR/ALERTER.
FOR DUAL GDU 620 SYSTEMS, CONNECT THE FD SIGNALS TO THE SAME PINS ON GDU #2 AS WELL. ALL
7 OTHER AUTOPILOT SIGNALS SHOULD BE CONNECTED ONLY TO GDU #1.
THE ST-670 (P/N 01180 FOR THE KI-256) IS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR DISPLAY
8 FROM THE S-TEC 60, 60-2, AND 65 AUTOPILOTS.
9 STANDBY INSTRUMENT FOR THE GDU 620.
FD LOGIC OUTPUT FROM THE 55/55X (P2-4) MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO ST-645 REMOTE
10 ANNUNCIATOR (P1-20). IF THE ST-645 WAS PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED, THE WIRE CONNECTING THE 55/55X
COMPUTER P2-4 TO ANNUNCIATOR P1-20 MUST BE REMOVED OR CAPPED AND STOWED.
TO SUPPORT THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR INTERFACE WITH THE GDU 620, THE PILOT-ACCESSIBLE PARALLAX
11 POT CONNECTIONS MUST BE REMOVED (SINCE THE GDU 620 FLIGHT DIRECTOR PRESENTATION IS ON
AN LCD DISPLAY, THERE ARE NO PARALLAX ISSUES).
12 NOT USED.
THE AUTOPILOT “GPS TRACK GAIN” INPUT MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620 “GPS ANNUNCIATE”
13
OUTPUT (P6203-44) INSTEAD OF THE “GPS SELECT” OUTPUT (P6203-45).
IF THE GDU 620 IS REPLACING A DIRECTIONAL GYRO, ENSURE THE “DG GROUND STRAP” JUMPER IS
14
REMOVED.
IF THE GDU 620 IS BEING INSTALLED IN AN AIRCRAFT THAT HAD NO HEADING SYSTEM, ENSURE THAT
15
THE “NO HEADING SYSTEM” JUMPER IS REMOVED.
CONNECT OTHER PINS THAT ARE NOT SHOWN IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S
16
INSTRUCTIONS.

Sheet 5 of 6

Rev. V Page F-44
NOTES CONTINUED
THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR CANNOT BE DISPLAYED ON AN ADI ON THE CO-PILOT’S SIDE BECAUSE THERE IS
17 NO WAY TO ADJUST THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR OFFSET FOR THIS ADI AFTER THE PARALLAX POT IS
REMOVED.
CONNECTIONS TO THE 60 PSS ARE ONLY ON THE PFGC CONNECTOR. THE RFGC CONNECTOR IS NOT
18
USED.
19
DISCRETE OUTPUT. FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE DISCRETE OUTPUTS, REFER TO
SECTION 5.5.9.
20 THE RS485 PORT MUST BE CONNECTED TO GDU #1 IN DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS.
21 INTERFACE TO THE S-TEC 1500/2100 IS ONLY SUPPORTED FOR DUAL GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS.
22 FOR S-TEC 1500/2100 INTERCONNECTS, REFER TO FIGURE F-12 SHEET 2.
THE P/N 01304-01 AND P/N 01304-03 UNITS WILL NOT HAVE A CONNECTION MADE TO HDG ERROR LO
23 FROM THE GDU 620. THE P/N 01304-02, P/N 01304-04, AND P/N 01304-07 UNITS WILL HAVE A CONNECTION
MADE TO HDG ERROR LO FROM THE GDU 620.
ARINC 429 OUTPUT FORMAT MUST BE SET TO “DFCS 4". REFERENCE SECTION 5.5.12.3.1 FOR MORE
24 INFORMATION.
FOR ALL VARIANTS OF THE 1500/2100 AUTOPILOTS, NO REFERENCE SIGNAL SHALL BE CONNECTED FOR
25 THE HDG DATUM INTERFACE AND NO ANALOG CRS DATUM INTERFACE SHALL BE CONNECTED. THE
COURSE DATUM IS PROVIDED VIA ARINC 429.
26 FOR ARINC 429 OUTPUT SETTINGS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.12.4.
RS 485 WIRING IS ONLY REQUIRED WHEN USING THE GDU 620 FOR ALTITUDE PRESELECT. IT IS NOT
27
REQUIRED IF USING THE GAD 43E FOR ALT/VS PRESELECT.
CONNECTIONS TO THE 60-1 ARE ONLY ON THE RFGC CONNECTOR. THE PFGC CONNECTOR IS NOT
28
USED.

Sheet 6 of 6

Rev. V Page F-45
AUTOPILOT
AUTOPILOT
CENTURY
Century Century Century Century Century Century
II III IV 21 31/41 15 2000
GARMIN 6 CD34 CD34 CD58 CD66 CD194 CD175 CD191 CD175 CD191 CD175 CD189
GDU 620 P6203
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 7 7 7
49 - 17 - 17 - 17 - HEADING DATUM HI
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 - - - - - - - - HEADING DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 48 - 2 - 2 - 2 - COURSE DATUM HI
7 7 7
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 - - - - - - - - COURSE DATUM LO
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 54 - - - - 2 - 7 - 7 - - LAT DEV FLAG +

LATERAL -FLAG OUT 55 - - - - 3 - 8 - 8 - - LAT DEV FLAG -
s
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 52 B B - 32 4 - 6 - 6 - - LAT DEV +LT

LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 53 A A - 31 5 - 5 - 5 - - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 58 - - - - - - 2 - 2 - - GS DEV FLAG +

VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 59 - - - - - - 1 - 1 - - GS DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 56 - - B 45 - - 4 - 4 - - GS DEV +UP

VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 57 - - A 46 - - 3 - 3 - - GS DEV +DOWN
s
14. ILS/GPS APPROACH* 46 - - 44 10 1 - 9 - 9 - - LOC SWITCH
(DISC OUT 8*)
A/P AC REF HI 20 39 12 - - - - - - - 5 kHz EXCITATION
7 7 7
A/P AC REF LO 42 40 - - - - - - - 5 kHz EXCITATION
s
- - - - - - - - - - 26 ALTITUDE CAPTURE
13 - - - - - - - - - - 24 ENB1
- - - - - - - - - - 25 ENB2
Figure F-13 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Century

Sheet 1 of 6

Rev. V Page F-46
RADIO COUPLERS
RADIO COUPLER
CENTURY
TO CONSOLE/AMPLIFIER/ 1C388 1C388C
GARMIN 6 ARTIFICIAL HORIZON 1C388M 1C388MC
GDU 620 (EXISTING WIRING RETAINED) CD33 CD33
P6203 CD33 TO DG
TO AMP TO DG
1 4
A/P AC REF HI 20 C - D ROLL EXCITATION
10k 9
T1 F - E ROLL EXCITATION
3 6
10k:10k
1 4
- A A HEADING SIGNAL
2
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 9 10k
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 N/C
T1 - B B ROLL COMMON
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 N/C 3 6 18 mH .047µF
10k:10k
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 N/C - D - DG EXCITATION
- E - DG EXCITATION
RADIO COUPLER
CENTURY
1C388-2 1C388-3
GARMIN 6 CD33 CD33
CD33 TO DG
GDU 620 P6203 TO AMP TO DG
1 4
A/P AC REF HI 20 - D E ROLL EXCITATION
10k 9
- E D ROLL EXCITATION
3 T1 6
10k:10k
1 4
- A A HEADING SIGNAL
2
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 9 10k
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 N/C 8
B - F ROLL COMMON
3 T1 6
10k:10k
1 4
- B B COURSE SIGNAL
2
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 9 10k
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 N/C 8
B - C ROLL COMMON
3 T1 6
10k:10k

Sheet 2 of 6

Rev. V Page F-47
FLIGHT DIRECTOR – DUAL GDU INSTALLATION
GARMIN
GDU 620 #2
P6201
16
FD ENABLE IN 9 NC
FD ROLL RIGHT 35
FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15
FD PITCH DOWN 16
s
GARMIN CENTURY AUTOPILOT

GDU 620 #1
IV 41 2000
P6201
s s
CD66 CD184 CD220
FD ENABLE IN 9 NC
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 21 40 6 ROLL STEERING
FD ROLL LEFT 34 -- 28 7 ROLL COMMON
s 22
18 19
FD PITCH UP 15 20 AWG 20 AWG 20 29 5 PITCH STEERING

21
FD PITCH DOWN 16 20 AWG 20 AWG 17 17 30 STEERING COMMON

s

Sheet 3 of 6

Rev. V Page F-48
FLIGHT DIRECTOR- SINGLE GDU WITH ADI
ADI 52C77- ADI
52C77/-2/-3/-4
(optional install on copilot s ()/-2 -3/-4
side)
CD-64 CD-144 20 17 19
ROLL STEERING H 10
ROLL COMMON K 28
PITCH STEERING J 11 20 AW G
STEERING COMMON F 12 20 AW G

GDU 620
P6201 IV 41 2000
CD66 CD184 CD220
FD ENABLE IN 9 NC
21
FD ROLL LEFT 34 24 28 7 ROLL COMMON
s 22
FD PITCH UP 15 20 AWG 20 AW G 20 29 5 PITCH STEERING

20 AWG
FD PITCH DOWN 16 20 AW G 20 AW G 17 17 30 STEERING COMMON

s
FLIGHT DIRECTOR- SINGLE GDU WITHOUT ADI

GDU 620 #1
IV 41 2000
P6201
CD66 CD184 CD220
FD ENABLE IN 9 NC
FD ROLL LEFT 34 -- 28 7 ROLL COMMON
s 22
18 19
FD PITCH UP 15 20 AWG 20 AWG 20 29 5 PITCH STEERING

21
FD PITCH DOWN 16 20 AWG 20 AWG 17 17 30 STEERING COMMON

s

Sheet 4 of 6

Rev. V Page F-49
NOTES
FOR DUAL GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS, CONNECT TO GDU 620 #1 ONLY. THESE PINS ARE NOT CONNECTED
6 ON GDU 620 #2.
7 REFER TO SEPARATE DRAWING FOR RADIO COUPLER WIRING.
8 SPLICE BOTH WIRES TOGETHER INTO PIN B OF CD33 TO AMP.
USE MIL-T-27 TYPE TF5S21ZZ TRANSFORMER TRIAD MAGNETICS (P/N SP-66). TRIAD P/N TY-141P
9 TRANSFORMER MAY ALSO BE USED, BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED FOR NEW GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS.
THE CENTURY IV REQUIRES AN ISOLATION DIODE TO BE INSTALLED ON THE LOCALIZER SWITCHING

10
INPUT AS SHOWN:
AUTOPILOT
GARMIN CENTURY
GDU 620 CD66
P6203 P1
ILS/GPS APPROACH* 46
14. (DISC OUT 8*) 44 LOC SWITCH
1N4444 OR
EQUIV.
REMOVE EXISTING FLIGHT DIRECTOR WIRING FROM ATTITUDE INDICATOR AND STOW NEAR THE
11
PILOT’S GDU 620 P6201.
12 THE 5 kHz EXCITATION SIGNAL IS NEEDED ONLY FOR AC AUTOPILOTS.
FOR CENTURY 2000 AUTOPILOTS THAT DO NOT HAVE THE ALTITUDE PRESELECTOR INSTALLED, ROUTE
13
PROVISIONAL WIRES FROM CD189 AND STOW NEAR P6201 ON BACK OF THE PILOT’S GDU 620.

Sheet 5 of 6

Rev. V Page F-50
NOTES CONTINUED
14
SECTION 5.5.9.
ENSURE ANY JUMPERS AT CD185 PINS 8, 9, AND 17 ARE REMOVED TO CONFIGURE COMPUTER FOR
15
NSD 360A.
FOR DUAL GDU 620 SYSTEMS, CONNECT THE FD SIGNALS TO GDU #2 AS SHOWN. ALL OTHER
16 AUTOPILOT SIGNALS SHOULD BE CONNECTED ONLY TO GDU #1. ONLY ONE 18.0 OR 30.0 OHM RESISTOR
SHALL BE INSTALLED REGARDLESS OF SINGLE OR DUAL INSTALLATION.
LOCATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 2.5.11.8.
USE RESISTOR P/N RE65G() OR RE65N() (PER MIL-PRF-18546) CHASSIS MOUNT POWER RESISTOR
MEETING THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS:
• 18.0 OHM FOR CENTURY IV AND 14 VDC SYSTEMS WITH CENTURY 41 AND 2000, OR A 30.0 OHM
FOR 28 VDC SYSTEMS USING THE CENTURY 41 OR 2000 AUTOPILOTS
18 • MINIMUM POWER RATING OF 10 WATTS
• MAXIMUM TOLERANCE OF +/- 5%
LOCATE RESISTOR ON METALLIC SECONDARY STRUCTURE WITHIN INSTRUMENT PANEL AREA NEAR
GDU.
IF THE 52C77/-2/-3/-4 ADI IS CONNECTED WITH THE GDU 620, THE 18.0 OR 30.0 OHM RESISTOR MUST NOT
19
BE INSTALLED.
21 ONLY CONNECTED FOR CENTURY IV FLIGHT DIRECTOR.
22 ONLY CONNECTED FOR CENTURY 41 AND CENTURY 2000 FLIGHT DIRECTORS.

Sheet 6 of 6

Rev. V Page F-51
AUTOPILOT
GDU 620 PFD/MFD or AUTOPILOT
COLLINS
GDU 620 #1 PFD/MFD COMPUTER
AP-106/107 APC-65/65B/65C/65E/
APC-65A/65G 65F/65H/65J,
161H-1 913K-1/1A FGC-65( ), FYD-65
J1 J1 J2 J1 J2 J3 J1 J2 J3
P6203
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 - 24 - 7 - - 7 - - HDG ERROR HI
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 - 25 - 6 - - 6 - - HDG ERROR LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 37 22 - 34 - - 34 - - CRS DATUM HI

A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 41 21 - 30 - - 30 - - CRS DATUM LO
s
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 52 42 - - - - 54 - - 54 LAT DEV +LT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 53 38 - - - - 53 - - 53 LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 56 7 - - - - 41 - - 41 GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 57 11 - - - - 44 - - 44 GS DEV +DN
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 54 30 - 23 - - - - - 4 NAV LL FLAG +

LATERAL -FLAG OUT 55 34 - 20 8 - - - - - 1 NAV LL FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 58 - 1 - - - - - - 12 GS HL FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 59 - 2 - - - - - - 9 GS HL FLAG -
s
14
LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT 60 - - - - - 4 - - 4 NAV LL FLAG +

N/C - - - - - - - - 1 NAV LL FLAG -
VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT 61 - - - - - 12 - - 12 GS HL FLAG +

N/C - - - - - - - - 9 GS HL FLAG -
15 ILS/GPS APPROACH* 46 2 27 - 35 - - 35 - - LOC FREQ GND

(DISC OUT 8*)
9 9
- - - - 41 - - 41 - 26 VAC 400 HZ REF I
A/P AC REF HI 20 - 29 - 26 - - 26 - - 26 VAC 400 HZ REF II
A/P AC REF LO 42 - 26 - - - - - - - 26 VAC IN LO
s
AIRCRAFT 400 HZ AC
REFERENCE VOLTAGE
Figure F-14 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Collins

Sheet 1 of 5

Rev. V Page F-52
ADI-84A FLIGHT DIRECTOR – SINGLE GDU INSTALLATIONS
(on copilot s side) 12 (OPTIONAL)
IN-VIEW BIAS BB FLIGHT
COLLINS CONTROL PANEL
ROLL STR + RT u
FCP-65/65A
ROLL STR COM t
J1
PITCH STR + DN w 27 IN-VIEW BIAS
PITCH STR COM v
COLLINS APS 65
AUTOPILOT
GARMIN COMPUTER
GDU 620 APC-65/65B/65C/65E/
P6201 APC-65A/65G 65F/65H/65J,
FGC-65( ), FYD-65
FD ENABLE IN 9
J1 J2 J3 J1 J2 J3
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - - 39 - - 39 ROLL STEER +RT
FD ROLL LEFT 34 - - 38 - - 38 ROLL STEER +LT
s
FD PITCH DOWN 16 - - 43 - - 43 PITCH STEER +DN
FD PITCH UP 15 - - 42 - - 42 PITCH STEER +UP
s
ADI
(on copilot s side) COLLINS
FD-112 C/V
13
P2
12
OFF MODE + Z
(OPTIONAL)
ROLL CMD +RIGHT U
ROLL CMD +LEFT T
+28 VDC
PITCH CMD +UP F 10 11
PITCH CMD +DOWN k AUTOPILOT
COLLINS AP-106/107
GARMIN N/C 161H-1 913K-1/1A

GDU 620 J1 J1 J2
P6201
- - 33 OUT OF VIEW + 10
FD ENABLE IN 9 OUT OF VIEW+ 16
RELAY
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - - 28 ROLL STEER +RT
FD ROLL LEFT 34 28 - - SIG COM (K-1)
s
FD PITCH DOWN 16 52 20 - SIG COM (K-1)

FD PITCH UP 15 - 8 - PITCH STEER +DN
s

Sheet 2 of 5

Rev. V Page F-53
GARMIN FLIGHT DIRECTOR - DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS
GDU 620 #2 P6201
FD ENABLE IN 9 FLIGHT
COLLINS CONTROL PANEL
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 FCP-65/65A
7
FD ROLL LEFT 34
s J1
FD PITCH DOWN 16 27 IN-VIEW BIAS
FD PITCH UP 15
s
COLLINS APS 65
AUTOPILOT
GARMIN COMPUTER
GDU 620 #1 APC-65/65B/65C/65E/
P6201 APC-65A/65G 65F/65H/65J,
s s FGC-65( ), FYD-65
FD ENABLE IN 9
13 J1 J2 J3 J1 J2 J3
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - - 39 - - 39 ROLL STEER +RT
FD ROLL LEFT 34 - - 38 - - 38 ROLL STEER +LT
s
FD PITCH DOWN 16 - - 43 - - 43 PITCH STEER +DN
FD PITCH UP 15 - - 42 - - 42 PITCH STEER +UP
s
GARMIN
GDU 620 #2
P6201
7
FD ENABLE IN 9
FD ROLL RIGHT 35
FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
+28 VDC
FD PITCH DOWN 16 10
FD PITCH UP 15 AUTOPILOT
s
COLLINS AP-106/107
GARMIN N/C
161H-1 913K-1/1A
GDU 620 #1 J1 J1 J2
P6201
- - 33 OUT OF VIEW + 10
FD ENABLE IN 9 OUT OF VIEW+ 16
RELAY
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - - 28 ROLL STEER +RT
FD ROLL LEFT 34 28 - - SIG COM (K-1)
s
13
FD PITCH DOWN 16 52 20 - SIG COM (K-1)
FD PITCH UP 15 - 8 - PITCH STEER +DN
s

Sheet 3 of 5

Rev. V Page F-54
NOTES
THE ORIGINAL MCS-65 HEADING/YAW RATE SYSTEM MUST REMAIN IN THE AIRCRAFT IN ORDER TO
6 PROVIDE THE YAW RATE AND COMPASS MONITOR INPUTS TO THE AUTOPILOT. IF A YRS-65 /YAW RATE
SENSOR IS INSTALLED, IT MAY BE REPLACED BY THE GAD 43/43E, AS SHOWN IN FIGURE F-29.
8 CONNECT LAT DEV FLAGS FROM 161H-1 TO 913K-1A FOR 913K-1A SYSTEMS ONLY.
FOR NEGATIVE-LOGIC LOCALIZER FREQUENCY SIGNAL INPUT, REFER TO STRAPPING INFORMATION IN

INSTALLATION BOOK 523-0764806, PAGE 4 (REVISED 27 JUNE 1984 - 913K-1/1A STRAPPING OPTIONS) AND
9 PAGE 11 (REVISED 1 MARCH 1977 - 161H-1 STRAPPING OPTIONS). ALTERNATIVELY, CONNECT A RELAY
TO INVERT THE SIGNAL FROM THE GDU FOR ACTIVE-HIGH OUTPUT.
IT IS NECESSARY TO INSTALL A RELAY TO INVERT THE POLARITY OF THE “OUT OF VIEW+” SIGNAL FROM
10 ACTIVE-LOW TO ACTIVE-HIGH FOR INPUT INTO THE GDU 620. USE M39016/6-204M OR -207M. RELAY COIL
MUST NOT DRAW MORE THAN 50 MA.
IF THE OPTIONAL CO-PILOT’S ADI IS INSTALLED, THE “OFF MODE+” SIGNAL MUST BE DISCONNECTED
11
FROM THE AUTOPILOT (J2-33) AND ISOLATED USING A RELAY AS SHOWN.
STANDBY INSTRUMENT FOR THE GDU 620 – THE DISPLAY OF THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR MUST BE DISABLED
IN THIS CASE. IF THIS INDICATOR IS BEING RELOCATED TO THE CO-PILOT’S SIDE, WIRING MAY BE
12
CONNECTED IN PARALLEL TO THIS ADI AND THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR MAY BE ENABLED. THE WIRING TO
THIS ADI MUST BE CONNECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS. THIS ADI
MUST BE LOCATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 2.5.11.8.
13
EXISTING ADI.
CONNECT EITHER THE LOW-LEVEL FLAGS OR THE SUPERFLAGS. DO NOT CONNECT BOTH SETS OF
14
FLAGS IN A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.

Sheet 4 of 5

Rev. V Page F-55
NOTES CONTINUED
15
SECTION 5.5.9.
16 DIODE TO BE P/N 1N4007.

Sheet 5 of 5

Rev. V Page F-56
6 MODE
GARMIN CESSNA
CONTROLLER/
GDU 620 P6203 300IFCS 400IFCS 800IFCS 1000A IFCS
AUTOPILOT S530A S530A S530A CA-1050A COMPUTER AMP
J3/P18 J3/P18 J3/P18 J1 J3 J4
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 E E E - 28 - HDG ERROR 1 HI
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 C C C - - - HDG ERROR 1 LO
s DC
- - - - 30 - HDG ERROR 2 HI
17
- - - - - - HDG ERROR 2 LO
9 11
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 V V V - 27 - NAV 1 CRS DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 k k k - - - NAV 1 CRS DATUM LO
s
DC
b b b - 29 - NAV 2 CRS DATUM HI
17
T1
m m m - - - NAV 2 CRS DATUM LO
10k:10k
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 52 T T T - - 5 NAV 1 +L
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 53 U U U - - 3 NAV 1 +R
s
Z Z Z - - 4 NAV 2 +L
17
a a a - - 2 NAV 2 +R
VERTICAL +UP OUT 56 N N N - - 24 NAV 1 G/S +UP

VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 57 P P P - - 23 NAV 1 G/S +DN
s
d d d - - 22 NAV 2 G/S +UP

17
f f f - - 21 NAV 2 G/S +DN
AUTOPILOT 28 VDC R R R - - - NAV 1 VOR/LOC RY
X X X - - - NAV 2 VOR/LOC RY
16 ILS/GPS APPROACH* -
(DISC OUT 8*) 46 S S S 4 - *NAV 1 VOR/LOC RY RTN
Y Y Y 3 - - *NAV 2 VOR/LOC RY RTN
VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT 61 - - - 16 - - G/S 1 SUPER_FLAG
- - - 18 - - G/S 2 SUPER_FLAG
LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT 60 - - - 12 - - NAV 1 SUPER_FLAG
- - - 14 - - NAV 2 SUPER_FLAG
19
LATERAL +FLAG OUT - 2 - HDG ERROR 1 HI

54 N/C
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 55 - - - HDG ERROR 1 LO
N/C AC
- 23 - HDG ERROR 2 HI
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 58 N/C AUTOPILOT - - - HDG ERROR 2 LO
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 59 N/C COMPUTER
CESSNA
- 1 - NAV 1 CRS DATUM HI
300IFCS 400IFCS 800IFCS NAV 1 CRS DATUM LO
CA530FD CA530FD CA530FD - - -
AC
J1/P5 J1/P5 J1/P5
- 24 - NAV 2 CRS DATUM HI
A/P AC REF HI 20 E E E 10 VAC 400 HZ - - - NAV 2 CRS DATUM LO
A/P AC REF LO 42 F F F 10 VAC 400 HZ RETURN
s
Figure F-15 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Cessna

Sheet 1 of 5

Rev. V Page F-57
AUTOPILOT
MODE
CESSNA CONTROLLER
GARMIN
300B IFCS 400B IFCS 800B IFCS 400B
GDU 620 6 S-550A CA550A/FD S-550A CA550A/FD S-550A CA550A/FD CA550A/FD
P6203 J1 J2 J3 J1 J2 J1 J2 J3 J1 J2 J1 J2 J3 J1 J2 J1/P4 J2/P5
17
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 12 - - - - 12 - - - - 12 - - - - 24 - DC HDG GYRO IN
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 13 - - - - 13 - - - - 13 - - - - - - #2 DC HDG GYRO IN
s 17
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 - - 21 - - - - 21 - - - - 21 - - - 17 DC COURSE DATUM IN
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 - - 24 - - - - 24 - - - - 24 - - - - #2 DC COURSE SIG IN
s
- - - 15 - - - - 15 - - - - 15 - 15 - AC COURSE DATUM
7
- - - - 20 - - - - 20 - - - - 20 - 20 AC HDG GYRO IN
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 52 - - 5 - - - - 5 - - - - 5 - - - 5 VOR/LOC SIGNAL (+LT)

LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 53 - - 22 - - - - 22 - - - - 22 - - - 2 VOR/LOC SIGNAL (+RT)
s
- - 16 - - - - 16 - - - - 16 - - - - NAV #2 VOR/LOC (+LT)
17
- - 4 - - - - 4 - - - - 4 - - - - NAV #2 VOR/LOC (+RT)
VERTICAL +UP OUT 56 - - 1 - - - - 1 - - - - 1 - - 18 - G/S SIGNAL (+UP)

VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 57 - - 6 - - - - 6 - - - - 6 - - 17 - G/S SIGNAL (+DN)
s
- - 15 - - - - 15 - - - - 15 - - - - NAV #2 G/S SIG (+UP)
17
- - 14 - - - - 14 - - - - 14 - - - - NAV #2 G/S SIG (+DN)
16 ILS/GPS APPROACH*
(DISC OUT 8*) 46 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9 *VOR/LOC RELAY RTN 8
- 10 - - - - 10 - - - - 10 - - - - - NAV #1 LOC GND
- 19 - - - - 19 - - - - 19 - - - - - NAV #2 LOC GND
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 54 N/C
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 55 N/C
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 58 N/C

VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 59 N/C

Sheet 2 of 5

Rev. V Page F-58
ADI
(on co-pilot s side) CESSNA FLIGHT DIRECTOR – SINGLE GDU INSTALLATIONS
G-1050A G-550A
13
P1 J1 14 18 (OPTIONAL)
CMD BAR N VIEW 24 8
CMD BAR +RT 26 9

CMD BAR +LT/REFERENCE 27 26
CMD BAR +UP 28 10

CMD BAR +DN 29 -
MODE SELECTOR/
COMPUTER AMP
CESSNA
300B IFCS 400B IFCS 800B IFCS 1000A IFCS
GARMIN S550A S550A S550A CA-1050A
GDU 620 #1 P6201 12
J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J2 J3
1 1 1 -
FD ENABLE IN 9 - - - 37 FD COMPUTER ON
9 9 9
- 15
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - 11 - 11 - 11 ADI ROLL BAR
FD ROLL LEFT 34 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 22 SIGNAL COMMON/ROLL +LT
s
FD PITCH UP 15 - 22 - 22 - 22 - 33 ADI PITCH BAR

FD PITCH DOWN 16 - 1 - 1 - 1 15 - ADI PITCH + DN
s
GARMIN
GDU 620 #2 P6201 FLIGHT DIRECTOR - DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS
FD ENABLE IN 9
FD ROLL RIGHT 35
FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15
FD PITCH DOWN 16
s MODE SELECTOR/
COMPUTER AMP
CESSNA
300B IFCS 400B IFCS 800B IFCS 1000A IFCS
GARMIN S550A S550A S550A CA-1050A
GDU 620 #1 P6201 12
J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J2 J3
s s 1 1 1
FD ENABLE IN 9 - - - 37 - FD COMPUTER ON
9 9 9
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - 11 - 11 - 11 - 15 ADI ROLL BAR
FD ROLL LEFT 34 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 22 SIGNAL COMMON/ROLL + LT
s
FD PITCH UP 15 - 22 - 22 - 22 - 33 ADI PITCH BAR

FD PITCH DOWN 16 - 1 - 1 - 1 15 - ADI PITCH + DN
s

Sheet 3 of 5

Rev. V Page F-59
FLIGHT DIRECTOR PROVISIONS
TO GDU 620 #2
IN DUAL INSTALLATIONS
10 MODE
CESSNA CONTROLLER
300IFCS 400IFCS 800IFCS
S530A S530A S530A
J3/P18 J3/P18 J3/P18
TO GDU 620
J J J ADI CMD BAR LEFT
(GDU 620 #1 IN
K K K ADI CMD BAR COMMON
DUAL INSTALLATIONS)
10 L L L ADI CMD BAR RIGHT
NOTES
FOR DUAL GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS, CONNECT TO GDU #1 ONLY. THESE PINS ARE NOT CONNECTED ON
6 GDU #2.
7 JUMPER IS REQUIRED FOR DC HEADING/COURSE ERROR SIGNALS.
THE ILS/GPS APPROACH DISCRETE OUTPUT MUST ALSO BE CONNECTED TO THE BACK COURSE RELAY
8 – REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
USE TRIAD TRANSFORMER P/N TY-141P OR SIMILAR. THIS TRANSFORMER IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THE
9 CESSNA 1000A IFCS INPUTS.
STOW PROVISIONAL FLIGHT DIRECTOR WIRING NEAR P6201 OF THE GDU 620. FOR DUAL GDU 620
10
SYSTEMS, SPLICE WIRING AND STOW NEAR P6201 OF EACH GDU 620.

Sheet 4 of 5

Rev. V Page F-60
NOTES CONTINUED
TUNE RESISTANCE POTS ON HEADING ERROR HI AND COURSE ERROR HI TO END OF TRAVEL IN ORDER
11
TO NOT AFFECT THE HEADING AND COURSE ERROR SIGNALS. DOES NOT APPLY TO CESSNA 1000A IFCS.
12 MAINTAIN EXISTING CONNECTION BETWEEN AUTOPILOT COMPUTER AND MODE SELECTOR.
13 OTHER COMPATIBLE FLIGHT DIRECTOR ADI’S MAY BE UTILIZED.
14
CONNECTED IN PARALLEL TO THIS ADI AND THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR MAY BE ENABLED. THE WIRING TO
TERMINATE SIGNAL WIRE TO SHIELD AND AIRFRAME GROUND. CONNECT GROUND WITH AS SHORT A
15
CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
WHENEVER POSSIBLE. HOWEVER, THIS FUNCTION MAY BE CONFIGURED TO ANOTHER AVAILABLE
16
DISCRETE OUTPUT. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON CONFIGURING THE DISCRETE OUTPUTS, REFER
TO SECTION 5.5.9.
WIRING IS INSTALLED ACROSS BOTH NAV1 AND NAV2 AUTOPILOT INPUTS. ACCORDINGLY, THE
17 NAV1/NAV2 LIGHTED SWITCH LEGEND MUST BE REMOVED SO THAT ANY NAV SOURCE INDICATION ON
THE AUTOPILOT MODE CONTROLLER IS HIDDEN FROM VIEW.
18 EXISTING ADI.
CONNECT EITHER THE LOW-LEVEL FLAGS OR THE SUPERFLAGS. DO NOT CONNECT BOTH SETS OF
19 FLAGS IN A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.

Sheet 5 of 5

Rev. V Page F-61
GDU 620 PFD/MFD or AUDIO PANEL
GDU 620 #1 PFD/MFD GARMIN PS Engineering Bendix/King
7
GMA 35(c) SL15 PMA6000 PMA8000 KMA 24
8 GMA 350(c) SL15M GMA 340 GMA 347 PMA7000 KMA 28 KMA 26
P6201
9 P3501 Bottom J1 J3471 Bottom J1 Bottom P261
HI 28 31 T 31 54 T 31 T 14 HI UNSWITCHED
AUDIO OUT
LO 29 32 Gnd Lug 32 55 Gnd Lug 32 Gnd Lug 31 LO AUDIO IN
s
11
AUDIO INHIBIT IN* 3 4 6
AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 23 5 6 10

(DISCRETE OUT 1*)
MIXING AUDIO SIGNALS USING RESISTORS 7
BEFORE MODIFICATION AFTER MODIFICATION
EXISTING LRU AUDIO PANEL EXISTING LRU R AUDIO PANEL
AUDIO OUT HI UNSWITCHED AUDIO OUT HI UNSWITCHED

LO AUDIO IN LO AUDIO IN
R
GDU 620
AUDIO OUT
s
Figure F-16 Audio Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-62
NOTES
3
BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES.
USE THE AUDIO INHIBIT IN* DISCRETE INPUT TO INHIBIT GDU 620 AURAL ALERTS WHEN A HIGHER
4
PRIORITY SYSTEM IS PLAYING AUDIO MESSAGES.
USE THE AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* DISCRETE OUTPUT TO INHIBIT AURAL ALERTS FROM LOWER PRIORITY
5 SYSTEMS WHENEVER THE GDU 620 IS PLAYING AUDIO MESSAGES.
6 FUNCTION NOT CURRENTLY IMPLEMENTED.
IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO USE OTHER AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED, UNMUTED PORTS. IF AUDIO PANEL DOES
NOT HAVE AN AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED INPUT, AUDIO FROM GDU 620 MUST BE MIXED WITH AN
7 EXISTING AUDIO SOURCE USING RESISTORS TO ISOLATE THE AUDIO OUTPUT FROM EACH LRU. A
TYPICAL VALUE FOR MIXING RESISTORS IS 390Ω ¼ W. THE AUDIO LEVELS OF EXISTING AUDIO SOURCES
WILL HAVE TO BE RE-EVALUATED AFTER MIXING RESISTORS ARE INSTALLED.
FOR DUAL GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS, ONLY CONNECT THE AUDIO OUTPUT AND ASSOCIATED DISCRETES
8 FROM GDU #1. LEAVE THE AUDIO OUTPUT AND DISCRETES FROM GDU #2 UNCONNECTED.
IF THE TAWS B FEATURE IN THE GDU 620 IS ENABLED, THE AUDIO INPUT MUST BE UNSWITCHED AND
9 UNMUTED.
10
SECTION 5.5.9.
11 THE HIGH SIDE OF THE GMA 35(c)/350(c) ALERT INPUT #2 IS ON P3502-15.
Figure F-16 Audio Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-63
GDU 620 PFD/MFD or
GDU 620 #1 PFD/MFD GDL 69 SERIES
P6201 P691
ETHERNET IN A 25 ETHERNET OUT 1A
ETHERNET IN B 4 24 ETHERNET OUT 1B
6 4
ETHERNET OUT A 6 23 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT B 22 ETHERNET IN 1B
S S
GDU 620 #2 PFD/MFD

P6201
ETHERNET IN B 4 ETHERNET OUT 2B
28 5
ETHERNET OUT A 6 4 27 ETHERNET IN 2A
6
ETHERNET OUT B 26 ETHERNET IN 2B
S S
NOTES
2 GROUND DESIGNATION: S SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3 BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GDL 69 SERIES LRU TO ITS
CONNECTOR BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH GDL 69 SERIES INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
ETHERNET PORT 3 OR 4 MAY BE USED INSTEAD. FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS, REFER TO THE GDL 69
5 SERIES INSTALLATION MANUAL.
6 FOR HSDB ARCHITECTURE, REFER TO FIGURE F-37 AND FIGURE F-38.
Figure F-17 GDL 69 Series Interconnect

Rev. V Page F-64
CONNECTIONS TO TAS / TCAS I
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2

5 P6203
27
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4
26 ARINC 429 IN 7B 26
s
P6201
9 27
20 TAS TEST* 27
20 TIS/TAS STANDBY* 26
TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM
13 HONEYWELL 9
L3 COMM
KTA 810 KTA 910 6
GDU 620 PFD/MFD (#1) TRC 497 TRC 899 KMH 820 KMH 920
5 P6203 27 P1 P1 J10 J10
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4 34 42 54 54 A
26 ARINC 429 OUT
ARINC 429 IN 7B 26 33 43 55 55 B
s
P6201
27
20 TAS TEST* 27 85 19 2 2 FUNCTIONAL TEST
9 (OPTIONAL) 7
20 TIS/TAS STANDBY* 26 82 21 23 23 STANDBY / OPERATE
TO GPS
P6202 NAVIGATOR(S)
15
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 3 45 54 - - A ARINC 429 IN (LS)

ARINC 429 OUT 1B 20 44 55 - - B (HEADING/ALTITUDE) 10
s (OPTIONAL)
- - 60 60 A ARINC 429 IN (LS) 11
- - 61 61 B (ALTITUDE)
69 - - - ARINC 429 HEADING

15 AHRS #1 GSU GRS (OPTIONAL) 14 70 - - - CONFIG STRAPPING 14
75 77 13 - - - STRAP COMMON
25 P751 P771 (OPTIONAL)
ARINC 429 OUT 2 A 49 13 - - 62 62 A ARINC 429 IN (HS) 11
(AHRS) B 50 28 - - 63 63 B (HEADING/ATTITUDE)
s
CONNECTIONS TO TCAD / TAS
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2

5 16 P6203
27
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4
26
ARINC 429 IN 7B 26
s
AVIDYNE TCAD TRAFFIC SYSTEM

GDU 620 PFD/MFD (#1) TAS 6xx
9900BX 6 17
5 16 P6203 P1 (25-pin)
27
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4 8 A
26 ARINC 429 TX
ARINC 429 IN 7B 26 9 B
s
TO GPS
P6202 NAVIGATOR(S)
15
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 3 10/12 A ARINC 429 RX 1/2 (LS)

ARINC 429 OUT 1B 20 11/13 B (ALT/HDG) 18
s (OPTIONAL)
Figure F-18 Traffic Advisory System Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 5

Rev. V Page F-65
CONNECTIONS TO GTS 8XX
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2

5 P6203
27
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4
26 ARINC 429 IN 7B 26
s
P6201
9 27
20
TAS TEST* 27
GDU 620 PFD/MFD (#1) P6203 P8001 GTS 8XX

27
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4 14 ARINC 429 OUT 1A
26 15 (HS)
ARINC 429 IN 7B 26 ARINC 429 OUT 1B
s s
P6201
P8002
27 7
TIS/TAS STANDBY* 26 75 OPERATE/STANDBY*
TAS TEST 27 74 SELF TEST SELECT*
ETHERNET IN A 6 AIR/GROUND
23 54 SYSTEM STATUS VALID
ETHERNET IN B
24 21
ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET OUT B P8001
S
52 ETHERNET OUT A
21 53 ETHERNET OUT B
24 54 ETHERNET IN A
TO GPS 55 ETHERNET IN B
NAVIGATOR(S) S
P6202
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 3 16 ARINC 429 IN 1A (LS)

ARINC 429 OUT 1B 20 17 ARINC 429 IN 1B
s (OPTIONAL) s (HEADING/ALTITUDE)

Sheet 2 of 5

Rev. V Page F-66
CONNECTIONS TO TIS
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2

5 P6203
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4
26 ARINC 429 IN 7B 26
s
P6201
TIS SOURCE
GARMIN GARMIN
(TRANSPONDER)
GDU 620 PFD/MFD (#1) GTX 33 GTX 335
GTX 330 6
5 P6203 P3301 P3251
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4 30 5 A
26 26 28 6 B ARINC 429 OUT 2
ARINC 429 IN 7B
s
P6201
20 TIS/TAS STANDBY* 26 46 15 TIS CONNECT SELECT
28
12 P6203
(OPTIONAL)
ARINC 429 OUT 3/4 A 2/3 32/33/26 27/48 A ARINC 429 IN (LS)
(GENERAL PURP 1 B 24/25 35/36/29 28/49 B (ALT/TEMP/HDG/ 12
or DFCS 1) s SPD/SEL CRS)
ADC #1 GSU GDC

75 74
P751 P741 (OPTIONAL)
ARINC 429 OUT 2 A 3 29 32/33/26 27/48 12
A ARINC 429 IN (LS)
(ADC) B 23 30 35/36/29 28/49 B (ALTITUDE) 19
12 s

Sheet 3 of 5

Rev. V Page F-67
NOTES
4 ONLY ONE TRAFFIC SOURCE MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620.
6 FOR TAS/TIS SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO APPENDIX E.
THESE OPTIONAL DISCRETE CONNECTIONS ARE NOT REQUIRED IF THE GDU 620 IS CONFIGURED FOR
7 “+ EXTERNAL CONTROL.” IN THIS CASE, THE GDU 620 WILL NOT CONTROL THE TRAFFIC ADVISORY
SYSTEM OPERATION.
8 IF ONLY A SINGLE GDU 620 IS BEING INSTALLED, CONNECT AS SHOWN FOR GDU 620 PFD/MFD (#1).
FOR HONEYWELL TRAFFIC SYSTEMS, THE “FUNCTIONAL TEST” AND “STBY/OPERATE” DISCRETE INPUTS
9 TO THE TRAFFIC COMPUTER MUST BE CONNECTED TO ONE DISPLAY ONLY.
IF DESIRED, ALTITUDE AND HEADING MAY BE PROVIDED BY THE GDU 620 TO THE SKYWATCH SYSTEM.
ANY AVAILABLE ARINC 429 INPUTS ON THE TRAFFIC COMPUTER MAY BE USED IF THOSE SHOWN ARE
10 ALREADY USED. THE TRAFFIC SYSTEM MAY HAVE TO BE CONFIGURED TO ACCEPT ALTITUDE AND
HEADING VIA ARINC 429 (LOW-SPEED). FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, REFER TO THE
MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION MANUAL.
IF DESIRED, ALTITUDE, ATTITUDE AND HEADING MAY BE PROVIDED BY THE GDU 620 SYSTEM TO THE
HONEYWELL TRAFFIC SYSTEM. THE HONEYWELL TRAFFIC SYSTEM WILL NOT ACCEPT
11 HEADING/ATTITUDE AND ALTITUDE ON A SINGLE ARINC 429 INPUT. CONSEQUENTLY, HEADING/ATTITUDE
(HIGH-SPEED) AND ALTITUDE (LOW-SPEED) MUST BE PROVIDED TO SEPARATE INPUTS. THE TRAFFIC
SYSTEM MUST BE CONFIGURED TO ACCEPT ARINC 429 ALTITUDE, HEADING, AND ATTITUDE.
IF DESIRED, ALTITUDE, TEMPERATURE, HEADING, SPEED, AND SELECTED COURSE INFORMATION MAY
BE PROVIDED BY THE GDU 620 TO THE TRANSPONDER. THE GTX 33/330/335 WILL HAVE TO BE
CONFIGURED TO ACCEPT THIS INFORMATION VIA ARINC 429 (“EF/AD W/ALT” FOR GTX 33/330 AND “EFIS
12 AIR DATA” FOR GTX 335; SPEED SET TO MATCH GDU 620 OUTPUT). IF THE GDU 620 IS THE ONLY
ALTITUDE SOURCE FOR THE GTX 33/330/335, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE GTX 33/330/335 ALSO BE
CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE ADC SO THAT THE TRANSPONDER WILL CONTINUE REPORTING
ALTITUDE IN THE EVENT OF A GDU 620 FAILURE.
13 TRC 497 SOFTWARE v1.6 OR HIGHER IS REQUIRED.
THESE STRAPS SET THE HEADING INPUT SOURCE TO ARINC 429. FOR ADDITIONAL STRAPPING
14
INFORMATION, REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION MANUAL.

Sheet 4 of 5

Rev. V Page F-68
NOTES CONTINUED
FOR DUAL GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS, ONLY ARINC 429 OUTPUTS FROM GDU #1 AND AHRS #1 SHOULD BE
15 CONNECTED TO THE TIS/TAS SYSTEM. ARINC 429 OUTPUTS FROM GDU #2 OR AHRS #2 SHOULD NOT BE
CONNECTED TO THE TIS/TAS SYSTEM.
THE GDU 620 MUST BE SET TO “SKYWATCH” OR “AVIDYNE/RYAN TAS” AND “+EXTERNAL CONTROL” MUST
16
BE SET TO ENABLE.
AN EXTERNAL UNIT CAPABLE OF DISPLAYING TRAFFIC AND CONTROLLING THE TCAD IS REQUIRED IN
17
ADDITION TO THE GDU 620 (E.G., A 400W/500W OR AVIDYNE DISPLAY).
FOR THE TCAD TO ACCEPT ARINC 429 HEADING AND ALTITUDE, PROCESSOR P/N 70-2420-5 OR LATER IS
18
REQUIRED. THE BUS SPEED MUST BE THE SAME FOR ARINC 429 RX 1 AND RX 2.
THE GTX 33/330 MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR “ADC W/ALT” (LOW SPEED). THE GTX 335 MUST BE
19
CONFIGURED FOR ADC (LOW SPEED).
20
DISCRETE OUTPUT. FOR DETAILS ABOUT CONFIGURING THE DISCRETE OUTPUTS, REFER TO
SECTION 5.5.9.
22 NOT USED.
JUMPER CAN BE INSTALLED AS SHOWN TO MAKE TRAFFIC SYSTEM TRANSITION TO OPERATE IF NO

23 OTHER “ON GROUND” INDICATION IS AVAILABLE.
IF ARINC 429 OUT 2 IS BEING USED BY ANOTHER LRU, IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO SPLICE THE ARINC 429
25 WIRING TO EACH LRU TOGETHER.
26
ARINC 429 INPUT (INPUTS 4-8 ONLY). FOR DETAILS ABOUT CONFIGURING THE ARINC 429 INPUTS, REFER
TO SECTION 5.5.1.1.
CONNECTION FROM TRAFFIC SYSTEM CAN BE MADE TO BOTH GDUs AS SHOWN, OR ONLY CONNECTED
TO ONE GDU (EITHER PILOT’S OR CO-PILOT’S) AND TRAFFIC INFORMATION AND CONTROL CROSSFILLED
27 TO THE OTHER GDU. DIRECT CONNECTION TO EACH GDU IS PREFERRED. CROSSFILL OPTION SHOULD
ONLY BE USED IF THERE ARE AN INSUFFICIENT NUMBER OF GDU ARINC 429 INPUTS TO SUPPORT ALL
ARINC 429 INTERFACES IN A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.
28 CONFIGURABLE I/O DISCRETE. REFER TO GTX 3X5 TRANSPONDER TSO INSTALLATION MANUAL.

Sheet 5 of 5

Rev. V Page F-69
GDU 620 #2 SIN / COS ADF
PFD/MFD
2 P6201
ADF X/COS IN 17
ADF Y/SIN IN 18
ADF DC REF IN 36
3
ADF VALID IN 10
ADF RECEIVER
HONEYWELL COLLINS
GDU 620 #1
PFD/MFD KR 87 KDF 806 ADF-60A/B
KFS 586
2 P6201 P872 P8061 P1
ADF X/COS IN 17 B 12 28 DC X/COS
ADF Y/SIN IN 18 A 13 32 6 DC Y/SIN
ADF DC REF IN 36 D 11 33 DC DC REF
24 6 DC Y/SIN
3 (OPTIONAL)
ADF VALID IN 10 C 4 21 5 25 SUPERFLAG (ADF LOCK)
SYNCHRO ADF ADF RECEIVER

HONEYWELL
GAD 43e Adapter
KR 85
KI 225
P433 P222
ADF BEARING X 12 A ADF BEARING X
ADF BEARING Y 13 B ADF BEARING Y 9
ADF BEARING Z 14 C ADF BEARING Z
P431
26 VAC REF IN HI 39 E 26 VAC REF IN HI
26 VAC OUT LO 34 D 26 VAC OUT LO
7 8
AIRCRAFT 26 VAC 400HZ
REFERENCE VOLTAGE
Figure F-19 ADF Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-70
NOTES
IF CONNECTING AN ADF RECEIVER THAT DOES NOT PROVIDE SUPERFLAG OUTPUT, LEAVE P6201-10
UNCONNECTED; OTHERWISE, CONNECT AS SHOWN. ONCE THE GDU 620 IS CONFIGURED FOR A
3 PARTICULAR MODEL OF ADF, THE “+ SUPERFLAG” BOX ON THE GDU 620 SHOULD BE CHECKED OR
UNCHECKED, AS APPROPRIATE. IF THE SUPERFLAG SIGNAL IS CONNECTED TO THE GDU, THE
“+ SUPERFLAG” BOX SHOULD BE CHECKED.
THE SUPERFLAG OUTPUT IS ONLY PROVIDED BY 066-1072-04, -05, -06, -07, -14, -15, AND -17 VERSIONS OF
4
THE KR 87 ADF RECEIVER.
5 THE SUPERFLAG OUTPUT IS ONLY PROVIDED BY 066-1077-01 VERSION OF THE KDF 806 ADF RECEIVER.
CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN FOR A BOTTOM-MOUNTED ANTENNA. FOR A TOP-MOUNTED ANTENNA

6 DISCONNECT WIRE FROM P1-32 AND CONNECT TO P1-24.
7 KI 225-04 / -01 INSTALLATION ONLY.
8 KI 225 NEEDS TO BE RETAINED.
9 SYNCHRO ANGLE INDICATES BEARING TO STATION.
Figure F-19 ADF Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-71
A/P HEADING DATUM SWITCH (OPTIONAL)
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2

P6201
5
GPSS ENABLE IN* 8 N/C
3
HDG
GDU 620 PFD/MFD (#1) 4
P6201
GPSS ENABLE IN* 8
GPSS
(OPTIONAL)
6
NOTES
3 SWITCH MUST BE LOCATED AS NEAR AS PRACTICAL TO THE AUTOPILOT MODE CONTROL PANEL.
SWITCH MUST BE LABELED AS SHOWN.

4 IF “A/P HDG DATUM” WILL NOT FIT, IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO LABEL THE SWITCH “A/P DATUM.” THE “HDG”
AND “GPSS” LABELS MAY BE SWAPPED FROM THE POSITIONS SHOWN.
A/P HDG DATUM A/P HDG DATUM
GPSS GPSS
HDG
(push-button HDG
illuminated switch) (toggle switch)
FOR NEW DUAL GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS, DO NOT CONNECT GDU #2 (GPSS CONTROL INFORMATION IS
5 SENT TO GDU #2 VIA CROSSFILL - GDU 620 v6.11 OR LATER). FOR EXISTING INSTALLATIONS, IT IS
ACCEPTABLE TO LEAVE WIRE CONNECTED TO THE SAME PIN ON BOTH GDUs.
THE OPTIONAL “HDG/GPSS” SWITCH IS ONLY REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATIONS THAT UTILIZE THE GDU 620
AS A GPS ROLL STEERING CONVERTER AND ARE CONFIGURED FOR DISCRETE GPSS/HDG CONTROL.
6 INSTALLATIONS CONFIGURED FOR HDG KEY GPSS/HDG KEY CONTROL, OR WITH AUTOPILOTS THAT
UTILIZE ARINC 429 GPSS, DO NOT REQUIRE THIS SWITCH. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, REFER TO
SECTION 2.5.16.
Figure F-20 External Switches (GPSS)

Rev. V Page F-72
METAL AIRCRAFT
STANDBY
ATTITUDE INDICATOR STBY
MCI 4300-4XX MS3112E8-4P ATT
3
AIRCRAFT POWER C 22 AWG ESSENTIAL BUS 5
AIRCRAFT GND A 22 AWG $9'&
$9'&
AIRCRAFT
GROUND
LIGHTING BUS HI B TO AIRCRAFT

4
LIGHTING BUS LO D LIGHTING BUS
STANDBY
ATTITUDE INDICATOR STBY
MCI 4300-4XX MS3112E8-4P ATT
3
AIRCRAFT POWER C 22 AWG ESSENTIAL BUS 5
$
22 AWG
STRIPE ON TVS MUST BE
TOWARD POWER BUS AIRCRAFT
TVS1 GROUND
6 TVS 4-PIN CONNECTOR
6 ASSY
AIRCRAFT GND A (TVS2) TVS (qty 4)
STRIPE ON TVS
MUST BE TOWARD
CONNECTOR
LIGHTING BUS HI B TO AIRCRAFT

4
LIGHTING BUS LO D LIGHTING BUS
Figure F-21 Mid-Continent Electric Standby Attitude Indicator Interconnect

(Integral Battery)
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-73
NOTES
3 POWER WIRES SHALL BE TWISTED PAIR WITH NO MORE THAN SIX INCHES UNTWISTED AT EITHER END.
THE MCI BACKUP ADI MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR THE CORRECT LIGHTING BUS VOLTAGE (28 VDC,
4 14 VDC, 5 VDC, OR 5 VAC). REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR LIGHT TRAY ASSEMBLY OPTIONS
(MID-CONTINENT INSTRUMENTS MANUAL NUMBER 9015762).
IF THERE IS MORE THAN ONE ESSENTIAL BUS, THE BACKUP ADI AND G500/G600 MUST BE INSTALLED ON
5 SEPARATE ESSENTIAL BUSES.
REFER TO TABLE K-2. ALTERNATELY, THE FUSE MAY BE INSTALLED ON THE GROUND SIDE OF THE TVS.
6 TVS2/F2 IS NOT REQUIRED FOR ALL AIRCRAFT MODELS. FOR INFORMATION ON INSTALLING TVS1/F1,
REFER TO SECTION 3.4.3. FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON CREATING THE TVS2 ASSEMBLY, REFER TO
SECTION 3.4.4. CONNECT TVSS AT STANDBY ADI AND ESSENTIAL BUS AS SHOWN:
STANDBY MS311E8-4P
ATTITUDE 6"
INDICATOR C ESSENTIAL BUS
$
FUSE
F1 4A 6" (MAX)
FUSE
Cut TVS leads to 0.5" (2PL) F2 10A
WIRE SHALL
BE 18 AWG TVS
Stripe on TVS must be TVS1 12" (MAX)
toward power bus ASSY
CONNECT TO (TVS2)
AIRFRAME
GROUND

(Integral Battery)
Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-74
METAL AIRCRAFT
STANDBY EMERG PWR SUPPLY
ATTITUDE INDICATOR MD420
MCI 4200-() MS3116F8-4S
3
AIRCRAFT POWER C 22 AWG 2 GYRO POWER
6
AIRCRAFT GND A 22 AWG 4 GYRO GROUND
10 GYRO LIGHTING LOW
4 LIGHTING BUS HI B 6 GYRO LIGHTING HIGH
EXTERNAL
SENSOR
GND
ANNUNCIATION 7 18 AUTOMATIC INPUT
CONTROL UNIT (OPTIONAL)
AIR
MD422
ANNUNCIATION POWER 2 24 ANNUNCIATION POWER
ANNUNCIATION GROUND 3 25 ANNUNCIATION GROUND
STBY BUTTON 6 23 STBY BUTTON
GREEN ANNUNCIATION 1 19 GREEN ANNUNCIATION
RED ANNUNCIATION 4 20 RED ANNUNCIATION
AMBER ANNUNCIATION 5 21 AMBER ANNUNCIATION
WHITE ANNUNCIATION 8 22 WHITE ANNUNCIATION
TO AIRCRAFT 5 LIGHTING BUS HI

6
LIGHTING BUS 9 LIGHTING GROUND
STBY
ATT
3
5 ESSENTIAL BUS 1 AIRCRAFT POWER
$9'& 3 AIRCRAFT GROUND
$9'& AIRCRAFT
GROUND

(External Battery)
Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. V Page F-75
NONMETALLIC AIRCRAFT EMERG PWR SUPPLY
STANDBY MD420 9
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
MCI 4200-() MS3116F8-4S
4 LIGHTING BUS HI B 6 GYRO LIGHTING HIGH
6
10 GYRO LIGHTING LOW
AIRCRAFT GND A 22 AWG 4 GYRO GROUND
AIRCRAFT POWER C 22 AWG 2 GYRO POWER
F1 3
STRIPE ON TVS MUST BE
TOWARD POWER BUS
TVS1
8 EXTERNAL
SENSOR
GND
ANNUNCIATION 7
CONTROL UNIT 18 AUTOMATIC INPUT
MD422 AIR (OPTIONAL)
ANNUNCIATION POWER 2 24 ANNUNCIATION POWER
ANNUNCIATION GROUND 3 25 ANNUNCIATION GROUND
STBY BUTTON 6 23 STBY BUTTON
GREEN ANNUNCIATION 1 19 GREEN ANNUNCIATION
RED ANNUNCIATION 4 20 RED ANNUNCIATION
AMBER ANNUNCIATION 5 21 AMBER ANNUNCIATION
WHITE ANNUNCIATION 8 22 WHITE ANNUNCIATION
TO AIRCRAFT 5 LIGHTING BUS HI

6
LIGHTING BUS 9 LIGHTING GROUND
STBY
ATT
3
5 ESSENTIAL BUS 1 AIRCRAFT POWER
$ 3 AIRCRAFT GROUND
AIRCRAFT
GROUND
TVS 4-PIN CONNECTOR
8 ASSY +
(TVS2) TVS (qty 4)
-
STRIPE ON TVS
MUST BE TOWARD
CONNECTOR

(External Battery)
Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. V Page F-76
NOTES
3 POWER WIRES SHALL BE TWISTED PAIR WITH NO MORE THAN SIX INCHES UNTWISTED AT EITHER END.
THE UNIT’S LIGHTING INPUT MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR THE CORRECT LIGHTING BUS VOLTAGE
4 (28 VDC, 14 VDC, 5 VDC). REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR SWITCH SELECTION OPTIONS
(MID-CONTINENT INSTRUMENTS MANUAL NUMBER 9016182).
IF THERE IS MORE THAN ONE ESSENTIAL BUS, THE BACKUP ADI AND G500/G600 MUST BE INSTALLED ON
5 SEPARATE ESSENTIAL BUSES.
INSTALLER MUST SELECT 5V, 14V, OR 28V LIGHTING ON THE MD421 BATTERY MODULE. FOR SWITCH
6 SELECTION OPTIONS, REFER TO MID-CONTINENT INSTRUMENTS MANUAL P/N 9016391.
MAY BE USED INSTEAD OF CONNECTING PITOT AND STATIC PORTS. A GROUND ON PIN 18, WHEN THE
AIRCRAFT IS IN FLIGHT, ALLOWS FOR FULL AUTOMATIC BACKUP POWER WHEN AIRCRAFT POWER IS
7 LOST. FOR CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS, REFER TO MID-CONTINENT INSTRUMENTS MANUAL
P/N 9016391.
8 REFER TO TABLE K-2. ALTERNATELY, THE FUSE MAY BE INSTALLED ON THE GROUND SIDE OF THE TVS.
TVS2/F2 IS NOT REQUIRED FOR ALL AIRCRAFT MODELS. FOR INFORMATION ON INSTALLING TVS1/F1,
REFER TO SECTION 3.4.3. FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON CREATING THE TVS2 ASSEMBLY, REFER TO
SECTION 3.4.4. CONNECT TVSs AT STANDBY ADI AND ESSENTIAL BUS AS SHOWN:
MD420
1 ESSENTIAL BUS
$
FUSE
F2 10A
WIRE SHALL
BE 18 AWG TVS 12" (MAX)
ASSY
(TVS2)
STRIPE ON TVS
MUST BE TOWARD
STANDBY MS311E8-4P CONNECTOR
ATTITUDE 6"
INDICATOR C
FUSE
F1 4A
6" (MAX)
Stripe on TVS must be TVS1

toward power bus
CONNECT TO
AIRFRAME
GROUND
THE MD420 POWER SUPPLY MUST BE MOUNTED WITHIN THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AREA IN
9 NONMETALLIC AIRCRAFT. IN PRESSURIZED AIRCRAFT, THE MD420 MUST BE MOUNTED IN PRESSURIZED
AREA.

(External Battery)
Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. V Page F-77
SINGLE GDU 620 INSTALLATION
GDU DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS STORMSCOPE
WX-500
STORMSCOPE
P2
GDU 620 PFD/MFD
5 RS-232_GND
4
P6203
P3
RS232 GND 6 49
RS232 IN 6 6 20 RS232 TX
RS232 OUT 6 28 8 RS232 RX
s
GDU DISPLAYS STORMSCOPE DATA ONLY
GDU 620 PFD/MFD WX-500

STORMSCOPE
4 P6203 P2
RS232 GND 6 49 5 RS-232_GND
RS232 IN 6 6
RS232 OUT 6 28 N/C s
P3
20 RS232 TX
8 RS232 RX
TO STORMSCOPE
CONTROL AND DISPLAY
DUAL GDU 620 INSTALLATION 6
GDU 620 PFD/MFD WX-500

#2 STORMSCOPE
P6203 P2
4
RS232 GND 6 49 5 RS-232_GND
RS232 IN 6 6
RS232 OUT 6 28 N/C s
P3
20 RS232 TX
8 RS232 RX
GDU 620 PFD/MFD
#1
4 P6203
RS232 GND 6 49
RS232 IN 6 6
RS232 OUT 6 28
s
Figure F-23 Stormscope Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-78
NOTES
3 BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH AS SHORT
DEFAULT SETTING IS RS-232 PORT 6. PORTS 5 OR 8 ARE ALSO AVAILABLE. REFER TO CONFIGURATION
4
SETTINGS IN SECTION 5.5.15.3 FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
5 NOT USED.
IF DUAL GDU 620s ARE INSTALLED, ONLY ONE GDU (THE PRIMARY) CAN CONTROL THE STORMSCOPE.
6 BOTH GDU 620s CAN BE USED TO DISPLAY STORMSCOPE DATA. EITHER GDU 620 #1 OR #2 MAY BE
CONNECTED AS THE PRIMARY STORMSCOPE DISPLAY.
7 WX-500 IS ONLY COMPATIBLE WITH GDU 620 SOFTWARE v7.00 OR LATER.
Figure F-23 Stormscope Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-79
GARMIN WEATHER RADAR - SINGLE GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS
21
GWX 68 GWX 70(R) GWX 75 GARMIN WEATHER
GDU 620 PFD/MFD RADAR
P6201 P400 P751 P27000
A 34 4 4 A
ETHERNET OUT 5 ETHERNET IN
B 35 3 3 B
A 18 5 36 23 23 A
ETHERNET IN 18 ETHERNET OUT
B 37 22 22 B
s s
44 56 56 RT ON/OFF
15 8 8 SIGNAL GROUND
GARMIN WEATHER RADAR - DUAL GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS 8
21
GARMIN WEATHER
GDU 620 #1 PFD/MFD GWX 68 GWX 70(R) GWX 75 RADAR
P6201 P400 P751 P27000
A 34 4 4 A
ETHERNET OUT 5 ETHERNET IN
B 35 3 3 B
A 18 5 36 23 23 A
ETHERNET IN 18 ETHERNET OUT
B 37 22 22 B
s s
A 44 56 56 RT ON/OFF
ETHERNET IN
B 15 8 8 SIGNAL GROUND
A 18
ETHERNET OUT
B
s
5
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2
P6201
B
ETHERNET IN
A
B 18
ETHERNET OUT
A
s
NOTE
Weather radar functionality is only available with GDU 620 v3.00 and later
Figure F-24 Weather Radar Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. V Page F-80
METAL AIRCRAFT ONLY
ARINC 708 WXR - SINGLE GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS
WEATHER RADAR R/T

RDS 81 RDS 82 RDR 2000 RDR 2100 12
GDU 620 PFD/MFD RS 811A RS 181A ART 2000 ART 2100

12
P6203 17 11 P1001 P1001 P5001 P5001
A 16 8 8 42 42 A ARINC 453 OUT
9 ARINC 453/708 IN 2 (WEATHER)
B 38 9 9 43 43 B
s
A 3 19 (18) 19 (18) 2 (4) 2 (4) A ARINC 429 IN #1 (#2)
ARINC 429 OUT 4 B (CONTROL)
B 25 20 (5) 20 (5) 3 (5) 3 (5)
s
WX RADAR ON*
(DISC OUT*) 15 24 (12) 24 (12) 31 (32) 31 (32) RT ON/OFF #1 (#2)
N/C - - 1 1 STRUT SWITCH IN

A 17
ARINC 453/708 IN 2 TERM 10 13 13 13
B 39
ARINC 708 WXR - DUAL GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS
WEATHER RADAR R/T

RDS 81 RDS 82 RDR 2000 RDR 2100 12
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 RS 811A RS 181A ART 2000 ART 2100

12
P6203 P1001 P1001 P5001 P5001
A 17
ARINC 453/708 IN 2 TERM 10
B 39
A 3 19 19 2 2 A ARINC 429 IN #1
16 ARINC 429 OUT 4 B (CONTROL)
B 25 20 20 3 3
s
WX RADAR ON* 15 24 24 31 31 RT ON/OFF #1
(DISC OUT*)
A 16
9 ARINC 453/708 IN 2
B 38
s
11
17
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 12
P6203
14
s
A 16 8 8 42 42 A ARINC 453 OUT

9 ARINC 453/708 IN 2 (WEATHER)
B 38 9 9 43 43 B
s
A 3 18 18 4 4 A ARINC 429 IN #2
16 ARINC 429 OUT 4 B (CONTROL)
B 25 5 5 5 5
s
WX RADAR ON* 15 12 12 32 32 RT ON/OFF #2
(DISC OUT*)
N/C - - 1 1 STRUT SWITCH IN
A 17 N/C
ARINC 453/708 IN 2 TERM 13 13 13
B 39 N/C

Sheet 2 of 4

Rev. V Page F-81
METAL AIRCRAFT ONLY
ARINC 708 WXR – ARINC 429 STABILIZATION
WEATHER RADAR R/T

HONEYWELL
(BENDIX/KING)
AHRS GRS 77 GSU 75
RDR 2000 RDR 2100
P771 P751 11 ART 2000 ART 2100
P5001 P5001
19 19 19 17
ARINC 429 OUT 2A (3A/3A) 13 (12/33) 49 (8/28) 8 8 PITCH/ROLL 429 IN A

20
ARINC 429 OUT 2B (3B/3B) 28 (27/19) 50 (9/29) 9 9 PITCH/ROLL 429 IN B
s
NOTES
4 NOT USED.
6 NOT USED.
7 NOT USED.
WITH GDU 620 SOFTWARE PRIOR TO v7.00, WEATHER RADAR INFORMATION WILL ONLY BE DISPLAYED
8 ON GDU #1. NO WEATHER RADAR INFORMATION WILL APPEAR ON GDU #2. GDU 620 v7.00 AND LATER,
GDU #1 AND #2 HAVE INDIVIDUAL DISPLAY AND CONTROL CAPABILITIES.
9 THE WXR ARINC 453/708 INPUT IS NOT TERMINATED.
IF THE GDU 620 IS THE ONLY EQUIPMENT ON THE ARINC 453/708 OUTPUT BUS FROM THE WEATHER
RADAR, OR IF IT IS DESIRED TO UTILIZE THE GDU 620 INTERNAL TERMINATION RESISTOR, INSTALL THE
10 TERMINATION JUMPER AS SHOWN. THIS LENGTH OF THIS JUMPER SHOULD NOT EXCEED 3.0 INCHES. IF
MULTIPLE PIECES OF EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE ARINC 453/708 BUS, ONLY ONE TERMINATION RESISTOR
SHOULD BE UTILIZED, AT THE LAST LRU ON THE ARINC 453/708 BUS.

Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. V Page F-82
NOTES CONTINUED
AT WEATHER RADAR UNIT, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH AS SHORT A
11
THE GDU 620 MAY BE CONNECTED AS INDICATOR #1 OR INDICATOR #2. DO NOT CONNECT THE GDU 620
12 AS INDICATOR #3. FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE GDU DISPLAY HEAD #1/#2, REFER TO
SECTION 5.5.15.2.
IF THE STRUT SWITCH INPUT IS CONNECTED TO THE WXR, DISCONNECT IT. THE GDU WILL
13 AUTOMATICALLY COMMAND THE WXR TO STANDBY UPON LANDING. THIS ALSO ALLOWS THE PILOT TO
TURN THE WXR ON PRIOR TO TAKEOFF.
SPLICE MUST BE MADE WITHIN 6.0 INCHES OF CONNECTOR BACKSHELL (WITHIN CONNECTOR
14
BACKSHELL IS PREFERRED).
NO DISCRETE OUTPUT IS ASSIGNED BY DEFAULT. AN UNUSED ACTIVE-LOW DISCRETE OUTPUT MUST BE

15 CONFIGURED FOR THIS FUNCTION. FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE DISCRETE OUTPUTS,
REFER TO SECTION 5.5.9.
DEFAULT OUTPUT PORT SHOWN. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE DEFAULT OUTPUT BE UTILIZED
WHENEVER POSSIBLE; HOWEVER, THIS FUNCTION MAY BE CONFIGURED ON ARINC 429 OUTPUT #3.
16
REFER TO GDU 620 INSTALLATION MANUAL SECTION 5.5.1.8 FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE
ARINC 429 OUTPUTS.
THE WIRING TO THE WEATHER RADAR R/T MUST BE OVERBRAIDED IN THE RADOME AREA, PRIOR TO
17
ENTERING THE METAL FUSELAGE OR METAL WING.
19 ARINC 429 OUT 3 CANNOT BE USED IF THE GAD 43 IS INSTALLED.
IF ARINC 429 OUT 2 MUST BE USED, BUT IS USED BY ANOTHER LRU, IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO SPLICE
20
TOGETHER THE ARINC 429 WIRING TO EACH LRU.
PRIOR TO GWX SOFTWARE v2.20, ATTITUDE INFORMATION IS NOT PROVIDED TO THE GWX 70(R) OVER
21 THE HSDB INTERFACE. STABILIZATION DATA MUST BE PROVIDED TO THE GWX 70(R) OVER A SEPARATE
ANALOG OR ARINC 429 INTERFACE.

Sheet 4 of 4

Rev. V Page F-83
GARMIN 7 TRANSPONDER
GDU 620 PFD/MFD
GTX 33 GTX 32 5
4 GTX 330 GTX 327
P6203
P3301 J1
7 RS-232 IN
RS-232 OUT 8 30 24/22 2/19
RS-232 GND 8 51 - -
s
NOTES
3
BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES.
FOR TRANSPONDER SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO APPENDIX SECTION E.6 FOR GTX 33( )/330( ) TRAFFIC
5 SOURCE INFORMATION. FOR SERIAL ALTITUDE (RS-232) PORT CONFIGURATION, REFER TO
APPENDIX SECTION E.13.

6 INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
IF POSSIBLE, AN ARINC 429 INTERFACE SHOULD BE USED TO PROVIDE ALTITUDE INFORMATION. FOR
7 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, REFER TO FIGURE F-18, SHEET 3. IF THE ARINC 429 INTERFACE IS USED,
THIS RS-232 CONNECTION IS NOT REQUIRED.
Figure F-25 Serial Altitude Output Interconnect

Rev. V Page F-84
AUTOPILOT
AUTOPILOT
GDU 620 PFD/MFD or SPERRY COMPUTER
GDU 620 #1 PFD/MFD SPZ-200A 6 SPZ-500 6
FZ-500 SP-200 FZ-500 SP-200

FD Computer AP Comp FD Computer AP Comp
J1A J1B J1B J1A J1B J1B
P6203 7
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 36 - - 36 - - HDG ERROR HI

A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 41 - - 41 - - CRS DATUM HI

A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 37 - - 37 - - HDG/CRS DATUM LO
s
LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT 60 16 - - 16 - - LAT SUPERFLAG
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 52 20 - - 20 - - LAT DEV +LT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 53 21 - - 21 - - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT 61 - 7 - - 7 - G/S SUPERFLAG
VERTICAL +UP OUT 56 - 16 - - 16 - GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 57 - 17 - - 17 - GS DEV +DN
12 ILS/GPS APPROACH* 46 22 - - 22 - - LOC FREQ GROUND

(DISC OUT 8*)
A/P AC REF HI 20 - - 7 - - 7 26 VAC OUTPUT
A/P AC REF LO 42 - - 5 - - 5 AC POWER GROUND
s
TO OTHER AVIONICS
Figure F-26 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Sperry

Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. V Page F-85
SPERRY
AUTOPILOT
SPZ-200A SPZ-500
FZ-500 FZ-500
4" ADI 8 SPERRY J1A J1B J1A J1B
(on copilot’s side) HZ-444
2 - 2 - +V OUTPUT
P1 10 31 - 31 - ROLL BIAS OUT OF VIEW
FD WARN FLAG (+) GG
FD WARN FLAG (-) HH 5 - 5 - -V OUTPUT
10 - 29 - 29 PITCH BIAS OUT OF VIEW
ROLL CMD PTR (+) s
ROLL CMD PTR (-) t N/C 60 - 60 - HI
9 ROLL PTR
61 - 61 - LOW GAIN SEL
PITCH CMD PTR (+) p 62 - 62 - COMM
PITCH CMD PTR (-) q
(OPTIONAL) N/C - 11 - 11 HI
9 PITCH PTR
- 12 - 12 LOW GAIN SEL
- 13 - 13 COMM
GARMIN
GDU 620 - 48 - 48 LOW LEVEL FDC VALID
P6201 1 - 1 - SIGNAL GROUND
FD ENABLE IN 9 - 47 - 47 +28 FDC VALID
FD ROLL LEFT 34 29 - 29 - ROLL FD COMMAND +

FD ROLL RIGHT 35 30 - 30 - ROLL FD COMMAND -
s
FD PITCH DOWN 16 - 30 - 30 PITCH FD COMMAND +
FD PITCH UP 15 - 31 - 31 PITCH FD COMMAND -
s

Sheet 2 of 4

Rev. V Page F-86
FLIGHT DIRECTOR - DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS
AUTOPILOT
SPERRY
SPZ-200A SPZ-500
GARMIN FZ-500 FZ-500
J1A J1B J1A J1B
GDU 620 #2 P6201
7 2 - 2 - +V OUTPUT
FD ENABLE IN 9 10 31 - 31 - ROLL BIAS OUT OF VIEW
FD ROLL LEFT 34 5 - 5 - -V OUTPUT

FD ROLL RIGHT 35 10 - 29 - 29 PITCH BIAS OUT OF VIEW
s
FD PITCH DOWN 16 N/C 60 - 60 - HI
9 ROLL PTR
FD PITCH UP 15 61 - 61 - LOW GAIN SEL
s 62 - 62 - COMM
N/C - 11 - 11 HI
GARMIN 9 PITCH PTR
- 12 - 12 LOW GAIN SEL
GDU 620 #1 P6201
- 13 - 13 COMM
s s 11
FD ENABLE IN 9 - 47 - 47 +28 FDC VALID
FD ROLL LEFT 34 29 - 29 - ROLL FD COMMAND +

FD ROLL RIGHT 35 30 - 30 - ROLL FD COMMAND -
s
FD PITCH DOWN 16 - 30 - 30 PITCH FD COMMAND +
FD PITCH UP 15 - 31 - 31 PITCH FD COMMAND -
s

Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. V Page F-87
NOTES
EXISTING ACTIVE-HIGH HDG VALID SIGNAL FROM HSI TO FD COMPUTER MUST BE SUPPLIED DIRECTLY
6 FROM DG ONCE EXISTING HSI IS REMOVED.
8 CONNECTED IN PARALLEL TO THIS ADI AND THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR MAY BE ENABLED. THE WIRING TO
9 ENSURE THAT THE PITCH/ROLL STEERING GAIN JUMPERS ARE CONNECTED AS SHOWN.
10 ENSURE THAT THE PITCH/ROLL BIAS OUT OF VIEW JUMPERS ARE CONNECTED AS SHOWN.
11
EXISTING ADI.
12
SECTION 5.5.9.

Sheet 4 of 4

Rev. V Page F-88
METAL AIRCRAFT
5
GAD or
GAD 43/43e ADAPTER GAD A
P431
3 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 49 22 AWG AVIONICS BUS 6 13
3A
AIRCRAFT
4
3 4 5 GAD B
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 50 22 AWG AVIONICS BUS 2
3A
AIRCRAFT
GSU GRS AHRS

75 77
8 P751 P771
ARINC 429 IN A 16 8 12 ARINC 429 OUT 3A
ARINC 429 IN B 32 9 27 ARINC 429 OUT 3B
s s
GDU 620 PFD/MFD

P6203
10
RS-232 IN 17 29 RS-232 OUT 7
RS-232 OUT 33 7 RS-232 IN 7
RS232 GND 46 50 RS-232 GND 7
s s
P432
9
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 43 5 ARINC 429 IN 8A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 44 ARINC 429 IN 8B 11
27
s s s
12
s
GDU 620 #2
P6203 (IF INSTALLED) 10
5 ARINC 429 IN 8A
27 ARINC 429 IN 8B 11
s
GAD 43e only 12
Figure F-27 GAD 43/43e - Power and G500/G600 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. V Page F-89
5
GAD or
GAD 43/43e ADAPTER P431 GAD A
3 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 49 22 AWG AVIONICS BUS 6
F1 3A
TVS1 7
AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 47 22 AWG GROUND 4
3 4 5 GAD B
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 50 22 AWG AVIONICS BUS 2
F1 3A
TVS1 7
AIRCRAFT
GSU GRS AHRS

75 77
8 P751 P771
ARINC 429 IN A 16 8 12 ARINC 429 OUT 3A
ARINC 429 IN B 32 9 27 ARINC 429 OUT 3B
s s
GDU 620 PFD/MFD

P6203
10
RS-232 IN 17 29 RS-232 OUT 7
RS-232 OUT 33 7 RS-232 IN 7
RS232 GND 46 50 RS-232 GND 7
s s
P432
9
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 44 ARINC 429 IN 8B 11
27
s s s
12
s
GDU 620 #2
P6203 (IF INSTALLED) 10
5 ARINC 429 IN 8A
27 ARINC 429 IN 8B 11
s
GAD 43e only 12

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. V Page F-90
NOTES
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 IS INTERNALLY DIODE ISOLATED FROM AIRCRAFT POWER 2. REFER TO SECTION 5.5
3 FOR GDU AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION.
4 CONNECTING A SECOND POWER INPUT IS OPTIONAL.
CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS SHOWN. IF GAD 43 IS FED FROM TWO POWER SOURCES,
5 CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHOULD BE LABELED “GAD A” AND “GAD B.”
6 THE GAD 43 SHOULD BE ON THE SAME POWER BUS AS THE AUTOPILOT.
7 REFER TO TABLE K-2. FOR INFORMATION ON INSTALLING THE TVS/FUSE, REFER TO SECTION 3.4.3.
ALTERNATELY, THE FUSE MAY BE INSTALLED ON THE GROUND SIDE OF THE TVS. CONNECT TVS AT
GAD 43 AS SHOWN.
ARINC 429 CONNECTION IS STILL REQUIRED EVEN IF NOT USING ATTITUDE (GYRO) OR HEADING
8 OUTPUT FUNCTIONS OF GAD 43e.
ARINC 429 CONNECTION ONLY REQUIRED IF ANALOG NAV (VLOC), ANALOG RADAR ALTITUDE, OR
9 SYNCHRO ADF IS CONNECTED TO THE GAD 43E. DO NOT CONNECT IF THESE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT
BEING UTILIZED.
11 (INPUTS 4-8 ONLY) MUST BE ASSIGNED TO THIS FUNCTION. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 FOR DETAILS ON
HOW TO CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429 INPUTS.
CONNECTION FROM GAD 43e CAN BE MADE TO BOTH GDUs AS SHOWN, OR ONLY CONNECTED TO ONE
GDU (EITHER PILOT’S OR CO-PILOT’S) AND GAD 43e NAVIGATION/ADF/RADAR ALTITUDE INFORMATION
12 CROSSFILLED TO THE OTHER GDU. DIRECT CONNECTION TO EACH GDU IS PREFERRED. CROSSFILL
OPTION SHOULD ONLY BE USED IF THERE ARE AN INSUFFICIENT NUMBER OF GDU ARINC 429 INPUTS TO
SUPPORT ALL ARINC 429 INTERFACES IN A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.
13 G600 ONLY: REFER TO APPENDIX P FOR TBM 700/850 AIRCRAFT.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. V Page F-91
AUTOPILOT – Attitude Source Replacement (was 3" ADI)
GARMIN AUTOPILOT
GAD 43 HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING)
4 KAP 100/150 KAP 200
KFC 225 KFC 275
KFC 150 KFC 200
KC 290 KC 295
KC 19X KC 225 KCP 220
MC FC
P431 P19X1 P19X2 P2902 P2952 P2251 P2252 P2201 P2202 P2203
PITCH AC OUT HI 24 Y - - y 50 - 19 - - PITCH ATTITUDE HI
PITCH AC OUT LO 42 - - - - 52 - 1 - - PITCH/ROLL ATTD LO
s
5
ROLL AC OUT HI 23 21 - - CC 51 - 18 - - ROLL ATTITUDE HI
ROLL AC OUT LO 25
s
10VAC REF IN HI 9 - - - w 38 - 43 36 - VG EXCITATION
10VAC REF IN LO 10 - - - s 39 - - 42 - VG REF
either or s
29 21
10VAC REF IN HI 9 - C - - - - - - - VG EXCITATION
10VAC REF IN LO 10 Z - - - - - - - - VG REF
s - 1 - - - - - - - PWR REF
14
- B D - 9 - - 1 - AP DISC
13
6
NO 3
ATTITUDE VALID REFER TO AUTOPILOT IF THE GAD 43 IS UTILIZED TO PROVIDE ATTITUDE INFORMATION TO
NC 4 N/C
RELAY DISCONNECT DIAGRAM THE AUTOPILOT COMPUTER, THE AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT SIGNAL
COM 20 FOR EACH AUTOPILOT MUST GO THROUGH THE GAD 43 TO ALLOW THE GAD 43 TO
MODEL DISCONNECT THE AUTOPILOT WHEN REQUIRED.
Figure F-28 GAD 43/43e Honeywell (Bendix/King) Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 14

Rev. V Page F-92
AUTOPILOT – Attitude Source Replacement (was 3" ADI ) (cont d)
HONEYWELL AUTOPILOT
GARMIN (BENDIX/KING)
GAD 43
KFC 250
4 (w/o KA 141)
KCP 299
w/ 065-5016-XX
Adapter Card
P431 P2991 P2992
PITCH AC OUT HI 24 - y PITCH ATTITUDE HI
PITCH AC OUT LO 42 - s GYRO COMMON
s
5
ROLL AC OUT HI 23 - CC ROLL ATTITUDE HI
ROLL AC OUT LO 25 - HH GYRO COMMON
s
10VAC REF IN HI 9 - w VG EXCITATION
10VAC REF IN LO 10 F - VG (PWR) REF
s
29
- j AP DISC
13
6
NO 3 REFER TO AUTOPILOT IF THE GAD 43 IS UTILIZED TO PROVIDE ATTITUDE INFORMATION TO
ATTITUDE VALID DISCONNECT DIAGRAM THE AUTOPILOT COMPUTER, THE AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT SIGNAL
NC 4 N/C FOR EACH AUTOPILOT MUST GO THROUGH THE GAD 43 TO ALLOW THE GAD 43 TO
RELAY
COM 20 MODEL DISCONNECT THE AUTOPILOT WHEN REQUIRED.

Sheet 2 of 14

Rev. V Page F-93
AUTOPILOT – Attitude Source Replacement (was 3" ADI ) (contd)
GARMIN HONEYWELL AUTOPILOT

(BENDIX/KING) 17
GAD 43
4 KFC 250 (w/ KA 141)
KCP 299 KA 141
w/ 065-5016-XX Autopilot
Adapter Card Monitor
P431 P2991 P2992 P141
PITCH AC OUT HI 24 - - 12 PITCH ATTITUDE HI
PITCH AC OUT LO 42 - - N GYRO COMMON
s - y 13 PITCH GYRO (H) RTN
5 **
- s, HH P PITCH/ROLL REF
ROLL AC OUT HI 23 - - 10 ROLL ATTITUDE HI

ROLL AC OUT LO 25
s - CC 11 ROLL GYRO (H) RTN **
10VAC REF IN HI 9 - w F VG EXCITATION

10VAC REF IN LO 10 F - VG (PWR) REF
s
29
- j - AP DISC
13
6 ** existing wiring (shown for reference only)
NO 3 REFER TO AUTOPILOT
ATTITUDE VALID DISCONNECT DIAGRAM IF THE GAD 43 IS UTILIZED TO PROVIDE ATTITUDE INFORMATION TO
NC 4 N/C FOR EACH AUTOPILOT
RELAY THE AUTOPILOT COMPUTER, THE AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT SIGNAL
COM 20 MODEL MUST GO THROUGH THE GAD 43 TO ALLOW THE GAD 43 TO
DISCONNECT THE AUTOPILOT WHEN REQUIRED.

Sheet 3 of 14

Rev. V Page F-94
AUTOPILOT – Attitude Source Replacement (was 4" ADI / KVG 350)
GARMIN
4 KFC 250
GAD 43 (w/o KA 141) KFC 300 (w/o KA 141) KFC 325
P431 KCP 299 KCP 320 KAC 325 KCP 220
29 TO 115 VAC 400 HZ w/ 065-5015-XX Flight Autopilot Flight
115 VAC REF IN HI 38 AIRCRAFT POWER Adapter Card Computer Computer Computer
16
115 VAC REF IN LO 37
P2991 P2992 J1 J2TP TP P2201 P2203
PITCH AC OUT HI 24 - y 21 - - - 43 PITCH AC HI
PITCH AC OUT LO 42 - s 20 - - - 44 PITCH AC LO
s
ROLL AC OUT HI 23 - CC 23 - - - 37 ROLL AC HI

ROLL AC OUT LO 25 - HH 22 - - - 38 ROLL AC LO
s
26 VAC REF IN HI 39
s
16 26 VAC OUT HI 18 - w 24 - - 43 - 26 VAC REF HI

26 VAC OUT LO 34
24
6 COM 20 BB - - 15 13 - 19 VG VALID
ATTITUDE
NC 4
13 VALID RELAY
NO 3 15
20 +26 VDC OUT 6

FOR THE ABOVE AUTOPILOTS, THERE IS NO NEED TO ROUTE THE AUTOPILOT
DISCONNECT SIGNAL THROUGH THE GAD 43 .

Sheet 4 of 14

Rev. V Page F-95
AUTOPILOT – Attitude Source Replacement (was 4" ADI / KVG 350)
GARMIN HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING) 17 AUTOPILOT

4
GAD 43 KFC 250 (w/ KA 141) KFC 300 (w/ KA 141)
P431 KCP 299 KA 141 KCP 320 KAC 325 KA 141
29 TO 115 VAC 400 HZ w/ 065-5015-XX Autopilot Flight Autopilot Autopilot
115 VAC REF IN HI 38 AIRCRAFT POWER Adapter Card Monitor Computer Computer Monitor
16
115 VAC REF IN LO 37
P2991 P2992 P141 J1 J2TP TP P141
PITCH AC OUT HI 24 - - 12 - - - 12 PITCH AC HI
PITCH AC OUT LO 42 - - R - - - R PITCH AC LO
s - y 13 21 - - 13 PITCH GYRO (H) RTN
- s S 20 - - S PITCH GYRO (C) RTN **
ROLL AC OUT HI 23 - - 10 - - - 10 ROLL AC HI

ROLL AC OUT LO 25 - - N - - - N ROLL AC LO
s - CC 11 23 - - 11 ROLL GYRO (H) RTN
**
- HH P 22 - - P ROLL GYRO (C) RTN
26 VAC OUT HI 18 - w F 24 - - F 26 VAC REF HI

16 26 VAC REF IN HI 39 s
26 VAC OUT LO 34
6 COM 20 BB - - - 15 13 - VG VALID
ATTITUDE
NC 4 N/C
13 VALID RELAY
NO 3
** existing wiring (shown for
20 +26 VDC OUT 6 reference only)
FOR THE ABOVE AUTOPILOTS, THERE IS NO NEED TO ROUTE THE AUTOPILOT
DISCONNECT SIGNAL THROUGH THE GAD 43 .

Sheet 5 of 14

Rev. V Page F-96
AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT – KAP 100 AND KAP/KFC 150
TO A/P C/B TO A/P (TRIM)
A/P DISC RELAY WARNING 11
(EXISTING) SONALERT
NO NC NO NC
TO GAD 43 C/B KC 19X A/P COMPUTER
7
(KAP 100 OR KAP/KFC 150)
A/P DISC SW C C DISENG
(EXISTING)
P19X2
GARMIN 8 28V SWITCHED PWR IN
4
GAD 43 13 P431 ENG
B
(AP DISC)
NO 3
6 ATTITUDE VALID RELAY
COM 20 AP DISC
RELAY
(EXTERNAL)
OR
TO A/P C/B TO A/P (TRIM)
WARNING 11
SONALERT
KC 19X A/P COMPUTER
TO GAD 43 C/B 7 (KAP 100 OR KAP/KFC 150)
A/P DISC / DISENG
TRIM INTR P19X2
GARMIN (EXISTING) 8 28V SWITCHED PWR IN
4
GAD 43 13 P431 ENG
B
(AP DISC)
NO 3
COM 20 AP DISC
RELAY
(EXTERNAL)

Sheet 6 of 14

Rev. V Page F-97
AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT – KAP/KFC 200
TO A/P C/B A/P DISC RELAY
(EXISTING)
NC
C
TO GAD 43 C/B NO KC 290 MODE
7
A/P DISC / C
NO
CONTROLLER
TRIM ARM DISENG NC
(KAP/KFC 200)
(EXISTING)
GARMIN 8 C
NO P2902
4
GAD 43 13 P431 ENG
NC
D AP DISC
NO 3
COM 20
AP DISC
RELAY TO OPTIONAL
(EXTERNAL) YAW AXIS
AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT – KFC 225

TO
TO AUTOPILOT PITCH, ROLL,
SERVOS C/B PITCH TRIM AND
OPTIONAL YAW
SERVOS KC 225 FLIGHT
TO GAD 43 C/B 7 COMPUTER
A/P DISC /TRIM DISENG (KFC 225)
INTER SW P2251
GARMIN (EXISTING) 8
4
GAD 43 13 P431 ENG
9 AP DISC
NO 3
COM 20 AP DISC
RELAY
(EXTERNAL)

Sheet 7 of 14

Rev. V Page F-98
12
TO AUTOPILOT /
FLIGHT DIRECTOR C/B
KCP 220 FLIGHT
TO ELECTRIC
TO GAD 43 C/B
TRIM PWR 7 COMPUTER
A/P DISC/ A/P DISC/ DISENG (KFC 275)
TRIM INTRPT TRIM INTRPT P2202
GARMIN SWITCH SWITCH
4
GAD 43 13 P431 (OPTIONAL) (EXISTING) ENG
1 +28V SWITCHED (AP DISC)
8
NO 3
COM 20 AP DISC
RELAY
(EXTERNAL)
A/P DISC
SWITCH(ES)
(EXISTING)
GAD 43 USED TO REPLACE KI 256 ADI COPILOT
TO AUTOPILOT C/B
KA 136 PILOT
TO GAD 43 C/B TRIM ADAPTER 7
P1362 DISENG 8
GARMIN EMERG AP/YD DISC 6

4
GAD 43 13 P431 ENG
NO 3
COM 20 AP DISC
RELAY
(EXTERNAL)

Sheet 8 of 14

Rev. V Page F-99
AUTOPILOT – Baro-Correction Replacement
AUTOPILOT 19
KAP 140 KAP 150 KFC 225 KFC 275
KFC 150
KC 140
(-7xxx only) KAS 297B KC 225 KAS 297C
GARMIN 4 P1401 P1402 P297B1 P2251 P2252 P297C1
30 GAD 43 P431
N/C 37 4 36 4
18 YAW RATE / BARO CORR. OUT 19 - 16 7 - 35 7 BARO SET (IN)
- BARO/XPDR REFERENCE 10
9 YAW RATE / BARO CORR. GND 40
s
35 3 - 29 3
29
AUTOPILOT – Rate Gyro Replacement (was KRG 331)

AUTOPILOT
KFC 200 KFC 250 KFC 300 KFC 275/325
GARMIN KC 296 KCP 299 KAC 325 KCP 220

4 Yaw Comp Flight Comp Autopilot Comp Autopilot Comp
GAD 43 P431 P2961 P2962 P2991 P2992 TP BP P2202 P2203
YAW RATE / BARO CORR. OUT 19 2 - - X - 43 - 29 YAW RATE (HIGH)
YAW RATE (LO)
18 YAW RATE / BARO CORR. GND 40
s
C - - Z - 44 - 28
29
NO 22 - - - - 10 - 25 - AP INTERLOCK
6 AP INTERLOCK RELAY NC 21 N/C
COM 5
13
HONEYWELL AUTOPILOT
(BENDIX/KING)
KFC 150
GARMIN KC 296 KC 191
4 Yaw CompKC 192
GAD 43
P431 P2961 P2962 P19X1
YAW RATE / BARO CORR. OUT 19 2 - - YAW RATE (HIGH)
YAW RATE (LO)
18 YAW RATE / BARO CORR. GND 40 C - -
s
- 7 - YAW ANNUNCIATE
23
- - 15 YD ANNUNCIATE IN

Sheet 9 of 14

Rev. V Page F-100
AUTOPILOT – KAS 297B Replacement
AUTOPILOT
HONEYWELL ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
(BENDIX/KING)
KFC 150
KA 185
28
P1851
3 SERIAL CLOCK
2 SERIAL DATA
1 STROBE
GARMIN AUTOPILOT
HONEYWELL
GAD 43e (BENDIX/KING)
4 KAP 150
KFC 150
KC 191
KC 192
P19X1
P432
8 STROBE
ALT PRESELECT CLOCK 21 L SERIAL CLOCK
ALT PRESELECT DATA 1 J SERIAL DATA
s
ALT PRESELECT ADDR 0 30 K SERIAL ADDR 0

ALT PRESELECT ADDR 1 31 M SERIAL ADDR 1
s
AUTOPILOT – KAS 297C Replacement HONEYWELL

AUTOPILOT MODE
(BENDIX/KING)
CONTROL PANEL
KFC 275
KFC 325
KMC 221/321
22 P2211/P3211
10 SERIAL CLOCK
30 SERIAL DATA
GARMIN AUTOPILOT
GAD 43e HONEYWELL
4 (BENDIX/KING)
KFC 275
KFC 325
KCP 220
P432 P2201 P2202
ALT PRESELECT CLOCK 21 31 SERIAL CLOCK
ALT PRESELECT DATA 1 47 SERIAL DATA
s
ALT PRESELECT ADDR 0 30 45 COMM ADR 0

ALT PRESELECT ADDR 1 31 44 COMM ADR 1
s
25 12 ALT OSC INPUT

Sheet 10 of 14

Rev. V Page F-101
AUTOPILOT – KAS 297 Replacement (METAL AIRCRAFT ONLY)
GARMIN AUTOPILOT MODE
HONEYWELL CONTROL PANEL
4 KFC 200/250
KC 290
P432 P2901 P2902
ALT SWITCH IN 56 F - ALT SWITCH OUT
FD SWITCH IN 77 C - FD SWITCH OUT
VERT TRIM SWITCH IN 37 - 1 VERT TRIM SWITCH OUT
HONEYWELL
(BENDIX/KING)
KDC 298 ADC
EXISTING AIRCRAFT WIRING (KFC 250 ONLY)
Y VERT TRIM SWITCH IN
AUTOPILOT
HONEYWELL
(BENDIX/KING) 26
TO EXISTING
AIRCRAFT WIRING 27 KFC 200 KFC 250
KC 295 KCP 299
P2951 P2952 J1 J2
ALT LIGHT* 11 d - d - ALT LIGHT
GS LIGHT* 13 j - j - GS LIGHT
VERT TRIM SWITCH OUT 39 a - a - VERT TRIM SWITCH IN

ALT SWITCH OUT 57 x - x - ALT SWITCH IN
FD SWITCH OUT 78 - AA - AA FD SWITCH IN
GO AROUND SWITCH* 14 L - L - GO AROUND SWITCH
GA SW
(EXISTING)

Sheet 11 of 14

Rev. V Page F-102
NOTES
AT GAD 43/43e, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST
4 FOR GAD 43/43e SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.14.
WIRING SHOWN FOR PITCH/ROLL AC AND 10VAC REF IN IS RECOMMENDED. HOWEVER, IT IS

ACCEPTABLE TO USE EXISTING WIRING FROM THE GYRO INSTALLATION (IF EXISTING WIRING IS
5 UTILIZED, PIN TO PIN CONTINUITY SHOULD BE VERIFIED BETWEEN THE GDU 620 AND AUTOPILOT
COMPUTER).
RELAY CONTACTS SUPPORT A MAXIMUM OF 2 AMPERES SWITCHING AND 2 AMPERES CONTINUOUS

6
CURRENT.
INSTALL EXTERNAL AP DISCONNECT RELAY INTO AP DISCONNECT CIRCUIT AS SHOWN. EXTERNAL AP

7 DISC RELAY CONTACTS MUST SUPPORT THE MAXIMUM CURRENT THROUGH THE AP DISCONNECT
WIRING.
ALL WIRES FROM RELAY TO AP DISC INPUT MUST BE OF THE SIZE SPECIFIED IN THE AUTOPILOT
8 INSTALLATION MANUAL TO SUPPORT THE CURRENT LOAD FROM THE DISCONNECT CIRCUIT.
9 THE YAW RATE SETTING MUST BE “NONE” TO SUPPORT BARO CORRECTION OUTPUT.
IF THE ENCODING ALTIMETER IS BEING REPLACED, A BLIND ENCODER MUST BE USED TO SUPPLY GRAY
10
CODE ALTITUDE TO THE AUTOPILOT.
11 POWER TO THE SONALERT MUST NOT BE INTERRUPTED BY THE EXTERNAL GAD 43/43e AP DISC RELAY.
IF DUAL AP DISC/TRIM INTRPT SWITCHES ARE INSTALLED, INSTALL THE GAD 43 EXTERNAL RELAY
12
BETWEEN THE KCP 220 AND FIRST AP DISC/TRIM INTRPT SWITCH.
THE GAD 43/43e INTERNAL RELAY “NO” CONTACT (P431-3 / 22) IS CONNECTED TO THE “COM” CONTACT
13
(P431-20 / 5) WHEN THE GAD 43 ATTITUDE OUTPUT IS VALID AND OPEN OTHERWISE.
IF THE GAD 43/43e IS USED TO REPLACE THE ADI, AND THE WIRING TO THE EXISTING ADI IS REMOVED,
14
ENSURE THAT GROUND REFERENCE PINS REMAIN JUMPERED AS SHOWN.
P431-21 (RELAY CONTACT NC) MAY BE LEFT OPEN WHEN INTERFACING TO THE KFC 250 AUTOPILOT,
15
BUT MUST BE GROUNDED AS SHOWN WHEN INTERFACING TO THE KFC 325.

Sheet 12 of 14

Rev. V Page F-103
NOTES CONTINUED
WHENEVER POSSIBLE, EXISTING SOURCES OF 26 VAC SHOULD BE UTILIZED FOR THIS REFERENCE
16 INPUT. IF IT IS DESIRED TO UTILIZE ANOTHER 26 VAC REFERENCE INSTEAD OF THE GAD 43/43e,
CONNECT AS SHOWN BELOW. THE 26 VAC SOURCE THAT IS UTILIZED MUST PRODUCE A SINUSOIDAL,
LOW-NOISE WAVEFORM – A SQUARE WAVE IS NOT ACCEPTABLE. THE 26 VAC OUTPUT FROM THE
GAD 43/43e CAN SOURCE UP TO 300 MILLIAMPS OF CURRENT.
P431
26 VAC REF HI
26 VAC REF LO
s
TO AIRCRAFT 26 VAC
REFERENCE
or
P431
26 VAC REF HI
s
TO AIRCRAFT 26 VAC
REFERENCE
WHEN INSTALLING THE GAD 43/43e AS AN ATTITUDE SOURCE IN AN INSTALLATION UTILIZING THE KA 141
AUTOPILOT MONITOR, THE GAD 43/43e PITCH AND ROLL OUTPUTS ARE CONNECTED TO THE KA 141 AS
17
SHOWN AND NOT DIRECTLY TO THE FLIGHT COMPUTER. ALL OTHER CONNECTIONS TO THE KA 141 ARE
RETAINED AS-IS.
THIS OUTPUT CAN ONLY BE USED TO PROVIDE BARO-CORRECTION INFORMATION OR YAW RATE
18
INFORMATION, AND NOT BOTH SIMULTANEOUSLY.
IF THE GAD 43/43e IS USED TO PROVIDE BARO-CORRECTION TO THE AUTOPILOT, THE AUTOPILOT MUST
19
BE RECALIBRATED TO THE ALTITUDE SOURCE. REFER TO SECTION 5.7.2.
20 THE 26 VDC OUTPUT FROM THE GAD 43/43e CAN SOURCE UP TO 300 MILLIAMPS OF CURRENT.
THE GROUND REFERENCE AT P2202-42 IS ALSO USED BY THE KDC 222. THE CONNECTION TO THE
21 KDC 222 MUST BE LEFT INTACT AS PART OF THIS MODIFICATION.
THE KA 185A / KAP 315A ANNUNCIATOR PANEL MUST BE REMOVED WHEN THE GDU 620 IS INSTALLED.
22 MODE INFORMATION IS TRANSMITTED FROM THE KCP 220 VIA ARINC 429 AND MUST BE ENABLED FOR
DISPLAY ON THE GDU 620.
WHEN THE KRG 331 RATE GYRO IS REMOVED AND REPLACED BY THE GAD 43/43e, P2962-7 MUST BE
23 CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO P19X1-15 AS SHOWN.
OTHER AUTOPILOT INPUTS USE THE 26 VAC REFERENCE FOR THE COURSE AND HEADING DATUMS.
24 REFER TO FIGURE F-11.
25 ALTITUDE OSCILLATOR SIGNAL TO KCP 220 MUST BE RETAINED.

Sheet 13 of 14

Rev. V Page F-104
NOTES CONTINUED
INSTALLATIONS WITH THE KNS 660 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ARE NOT SUPPORTED. KC 295 FLIGHT
26
CONTROL COMPUTER MUST BE SERIAL NUMBER 4460 OR HIGHER.
EXISTING CONNECTIONS TO AIRCRAFT WIRING MUST BE RETAINED. ENSURE MODE ANNUNCIATIONS

27
ARE STILL DRIVEN BY THE AUTOPILOT.
28 EXISTING CONNECTIONS TO OPTIONAL KA 185 ANNUNCIATOR MUST BE RETAINED (IF INSTALLED).
GAD 43( ) PINS P431-9, -10, -18, -19, -34, -38, -39, AND -40 REQUIRE DOUBLE SHIELDED CABLE PER
MIL-C-27500 WHEN THE GAD 43( ) IS INSTALLED IN A NOSE AVIONICS BAY THAT IS PROTECTED ENTIRELY
BY A FIBERGLASS FAIRING WITH NO METALLIC MESH. THE EXTRA SHIELD IS NOT REQUIRED IF THE
AVIONICS BAY IS PROTECTED BY A CARBON FIBER FAIRING OR METAL STRUCTURE WITH FIBERGLASS
ACCESS PANELS. REFER TO SECTION 2.5.11.9.
29
ALL INDIVIDUAL SHIELDS MUST BE GROUNDED AT BOTH ENDS OF EACH SEGMENT IN THE SAME
MANNER AS A SINGLE SHIELDED WIRE.
IF PINS P431-34 AND P431-37 ARE GROUNDED TO AIRCRAFT GROUND, GROUNDS MUST BE LESS THAN 18
INCHES.
IN ORDER TO UTILIZE THE BARO-CORRECTION OUTPUTS, A GYRO EMULATION TYPE MUST BE

30
CONFIGURED.

Sheet 14 of 14

Rev. V Page F-105
GARMIN AUTOPILOT
GAD 43/43e COLLINS 4
5
APC-65/65E/65H/65J
FGC-65( ), FYD-65
P431
13 J1 J2
6.8mH
PITCH DATA X 31 6.8mH
10 - PITCH DATA II X
PITCH DATA Y 15 38 - PITCH DATA II Y
PITCH DATA Z 45 59 - PITCH DATA II Z
s
- 45 PITCH DATA I X
- 49 PITCH DATA I Y
13
6.8mH
ROLL DATA X 30 2 - ROLL DATA II X
6.8mH
ROLL DATA Y 14 3 - ROLL DATA II Y
ROLL DATA Z 44 23 - ROLL DATA II Z
s
- 50 ROLL DATA I X
- 46 ROLL DATA I Y
14
YAW RATE OUT + 19 - 48 YAW RATE SIG+
8
YAW RATE OUT ‐ 40 - 52 YAW RATE SIG-
s
ATTITUDE VALID OUT 3 13 - GYRO VALID+
22 AWG TO GAD 43/43e C/B
DISENG
22 AWG 17
ENG
22 AWG 15 - COMPASS MONITOR
22 AWG 15
HEADING VALID* 2 22 AWG
COMPASS
VALID RELAY
16
9+26VDC OUT 6
ATTITUDE VALID COMMON 20
TO
GDU 620
- 41 26 VAC 400 HZ REF I

26 VAC REF IN HI 39 26 - 26 VAC 400 HZ REF II
7 -
26 VAC REF IN LO 34 - 26 VAC IN LO
s
AIRCRAFT 26 VAC 400 HZ

REFERENCE VOLTAGE 6 7
ALTITUDE PRESELECT INTERFACE

AUTOPILOT
GARMIN COLLINS 11
GAD 43e APS-65 / FGS-65
5 GAD or APC-65/65A/65E/
P432 GAD A FCP-65 / 65H/65J
10 FCP-65A FGC-65( ), FYD-65
PRESELECT MON+ POWER 58 AVIONICS
3A BUS J1 J1 J2
PRESELECT MON+ OUT 59 - 57 - ALT PRE MON +
ALTITUDE ERROR OUT + 19 WHT - 47 - ALT PRE ERROR +
ALTITUDE ERROR OUT - 20 BLU - 22 - ALT PRE ERROR -
s
DISCRETE OUT #1*
34 37 - - KNOB IN MOTION
(KNOB IN MOTION)
Figure F-29 GAD 43/43e – Collins Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. V Page F-106
NOTES
AT GAD 43/43e, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST
ONLY SPECIFIC APS-65 MODELS WILL ACCEPT ATTITUDE FROM THE GAD 43/43e. REFER TO
4
APPENDIX SECTION E.14 FOR COMPATIBILITY INFORMATION.
FOR GAD 43/43e SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.14. THE YAW RATE SETTING MUST BE
5 200 MV/DEG/SEC TO SUPPORT APS-65.
26 VAC 400HZ REFERENCE POWER FOR THE GAD 43/43e, GDU 620, AND AUTOPILOT MUST BE FROM THE
6
SAME SOURCE AND IN PHASE.
WHENEVER POSSIBLE, EXISTING SOURCES OF 26 VAC SHOULD BE UTILIZED FOR THIS REFERENCE
7 INPUT. THE 26 VAC OUTPUT IS CAPABLE OF SUPPLYING UP TO 300 MA AT 26 VAC (7.8 VA) TO OTHER
EQUIPMENT.
IF THE EXISTING 400 HZ REFERENCE IS BEING REMOVED FROM THE AIRCRAFT, THE GAD 43/43e CAN BE
USED AS THE 26 VAC 400 HZ REFERENCE, AS FOLLOWS:
GAD 43/43e P431

9$&5(),1+,
9$&287+, TO AUTOPILOT, GDU 620 AND OTHER EQUIPMENT
9$&287/2 REQUIRING A 26 VAC REFERENCE
s
9$&5(),1+, AIRCRAFT 115 VAC

9$&5(),1/2 400 HZ POWER
s
IF THE APS-65 HAS A PULSED YAW RATE INPUT (E.G., FROM THE MCS-65) THEN THIS CONNECTION TO
8 THE GAD 43 IS NOT REQUIRED.
9 THE 26 VDC OUTPUT FROM THE GAD 43 CAN SOURCE UP TO 80 MILLI-AMPS OF CURRENT.
10 TO GAD 43e MAIN POWER INPUT (P431-49). REFER TO FIGURE F-27.
THE GAD 43 CANNOT BE USED TO PROVIDE THE ALTITUDE PRESELECTOR FUNCTION WITH ANY APS-65
11 COMPUTER THAT CURRENTLY USES THE PRE-80 ALTITUDE PRESELECTOR.
12 ADDITIONAL INTERFACES TO COLLINS AUTOPILOTS USING THE GAD 43/43e ARE SHOWN IN FIGURE F-29.
INDUCTORS ARE NOT REQUIRED IF EXISTING APS-65 AUTOPILOT SYSTEM PREVIOUSLY INTERFACED
13 WITH DIGITAL AHRS (I.E., AHC-1000A/S OR 3000A/S). REFER TO SECTION 2.4.2.3.2 FOR INDUCTOR
SPECIFICATIONS AND SECTION 3.4.5 FOR INDUCTOR INSTALLATION.

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. V Page F-107
NOTES CONTINUED
GAD 43( ) PINS P431-18, -19, -34, -37, -38, -39, AND -40 REQUIRE DOUBLE SHIELDED CABLE PER
MIL-C-27500 WHEN THE GAD 43( ) IS INSTALLED IN A NOSE AVIONICS BAY THAT IS PROTECTED ENTIRELY
BY A FIBERGLASS FAIRING WITH NO METALLIC MESH. THE EXTRA SHIELD IS NOT REQUIRED IF THE
AVIONICS BAY IS PROTECTED BY A CARBON FIBER FAIRING OR METAL STRUCTURE WITH FIBERGLASS
ACCESS PANELS. REFER TO SECTION 2.5.11.9.
14
IF PINS P431-34 AND P431-37 ARE GROUNDED TO AIRCRAFT GROUND, GROUNDS MUST BE LESS THAN
18 INCHES.
THE COLLINS APC-65 REQUIRES A COMPASS VALID INPUT (+18 VDC TO +30 VDC) INTO J1-15 FOR
15
PROPER OPERATION.
INSTALL COMPASS VALID RELAY AS SHOWN. USE M39016/6-204M OR -207M. THIS RELAY IS ENERGIZED
16 (ENGAGED) WHEN P431-2 ON THE GAD 43/43E IS ACTIVE-LOW. THIS STATE PROVIDES HI SIGNAL TO THE
APC-65 COMPASS MONITOR INPUT.
ALL WIRES FROM THE RELAY TO THE AP COMPASS MONITOR INPUT MUST BE OF THE SIZE SPECIFIED IN
17
THE AUTOPILOT INSTALLATION MANUAL TO SUPPORT THE CURRENT LOAD.
FOR PIAGGIA P.180 AIRCRAFT WITH COLLINS APC-65A, THE EXISTING VERTICAL GYRO MUST BE
RETAINED TO PROVIDE THE AUTOPILOT SYNCHRONOUS PITCH AND ROLL OUTPUT FOR ATTITUDE. THE
18 PITCH DATA, ROLL DATA, AND ATTITUDE VALID OUT DISCRETE MUST BE SUPPLIED BY THE EXISTING
VERTICAL GYRO.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. V Page F-108
HEADING
4
(26VAC REFERENCE IN AIRCRAFT UTILIZED)
GARMIN
GAD 43/43e P431 INTERFACING EQUIPMENT
5
HDG SYNCHRO OUT X 8 X
HDG SYNCHRO OUT Y 7 Y 5
HDG SYNCHRO OUT Z 41 Z
s ARINC 407
SYNCHRO
6 HDG VALID OUT* 2 VALID 7 HEADING IN
26VAC REF IN HI 39 HI 26 VAC
26VAC LO 34 LO REF
s
8 26VAC OUT HI 18 N/C
115VAC REF IN HI 38 N/C
115VAC REF IN LO 37 N/C
REFERENCE VOLTAGE
HEADING
4 (26VAC REFERENCE REMOVED FROM AIRCRAFT)
GARMIN
GAD 43/43e P431 INTERFACING EQUIPMENT
5
HDG SYNCHRO OUT X 8 X
HDG SYNCHRO OUT Y 7 Y
5
HDG SYNCHRO OUT Z 41 Z
s
ARINC 407
6 HDG VALID OUT* 2 VALID 7 SYNCHRO
HEADING IN
26VAC REF IN HI 39
8 26VAC OUT HI 18 HI 26 VAC
26VAC LO 34 LO REF
s
115VAC REF IN HI 38
115VAC REF IN LO 37
s
Figure F-30 GAD 43/43e – Synchro Heading Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-109
NOTES
AT GAD 43, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE
3 LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT A
4 FOR GAD 43/43E SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.14.1.
DEVICES THAT CONNECT TO THE EXISTING HEADING SYNCHRO MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GAD 43
5 HEADING SYNCHRO OUTPUTS. SHIELDED TWISTED TRIPLE/PAIR IS RECOMMENDED, BUT EXISTING
WIRING MAY BE USED.
6 OUTPUT IS GROUNDED WHEN HEADING IS VALID; OPEN OTHERWISE.
OPTIONAL CONNECTION. NOT ALL SYSTEMS THAT UTILIZE SYNCHRO HEADING ACCEPT A HEADING
7
VALID INPUT.
WHENEVER POSSIBLE, EXISTING SOURCES OF 26 VAC SHOULD BE UTILIZED. THE 26 VAC OUTPUT FROM
8 THE GAD 43 CAN SOURCE UP TO 300 mA OF CURRENT.
Figure F-30 GAD 43/43e – Synchro Heading Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-110
AUTOPILOT
Bendix
AUTOPILOT
M-4C 14 M-4D 15
5536E-2 5536F 5485A
GDU 620 Comp. Amp. Comp. Amp. 5487G
P6203 P1 P2 P1 P2 P4
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 6 - - - 6 HDG DAT H’
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 - 34 - 34 - HDG DAT C

s T1
10k:10k 6
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 - 48 - - 8 CRS DAT H’
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 - 29 - 27 - CRS DAT C

s T2
10k:10k 6
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 52 1 - 1 - - VOR/LOC +LT IN
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 53 5 - 5 - - VOR/LOC +RT IN
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 56 34 - 34 - - GS + UP

VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 57 35 - 35 - - GS + DN
s
+28 VDC
N/C
- 51 - 51 - LOC + 28
ILS/GPS APPROACH*
(DISC OUT 8*) 46
17.
7 LOC RELAY
A/P AC REF HI 20
A/P AC REF LO 42
s
16. AIRCRAFT 26 VAC 400 HZ

REFERENCE VOLTAGE
Figure F-31 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect – Bendix

Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. V Page F-111
ADI EXISTING WIRE AND FD SWITCH
(on copilot’s side) (must be retained)
Collins 8 11
OFF
FD-112V
P1 P2 28VDC
OFF MODE + - Z ON
FLIGHT
FD ROLL RIGHT - U DIRECTOR
FD ROLL LEFT - T
(OPTIONAL) 13
FD PITCH UP - F
FD PITCH DOWN - k
AUTOPILOT
Bendix M-4D COMPUTER
5536F w/
GARMIN 4007463-0501
FD Adapter
GDU 620 P6201 P1 P2
FD ENABLE IN 9 39 - FD ENG
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - 35 FD ROLL CMD + RT

FD ROLL LEFT 34 - 36 FD ROLL CMD + LT
s
FD PITCH UP 15 - 38 FD PITCH CMD + UP
FD PITCH DOWN 16 - 37 FD PITCH CMD + DN
s
FLIGHT DIRECTOR – DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS

EXISTING WIRE AND FD SWITCH
(must be retained)
GARMIN OFF
GDU 620 #2 P6201 28VDC
10
FD ENABLE IN 9 ON
9 FLIGHT
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 DIRECTOR
FD ROLL LEFT 34
s 13
FD PITCH UP 15
FD PITCH DOWN 16
s AUTOPILOT
Bendix M-4D
5536F w/
GARMIN 4007463-0501
FD Adapter
GDU 620 #1 P6201 P1 P2
s s
FD ENABLE IN 9 39 - FD ENG
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - 35 FD ROLL CMD + RT

FD ROLL LEFT 34 - 36 FD ROLL CMD + LT
s
FD PITCH UP 15 - 38 FD PITCH CMD + UP

FD PITCH DOWN 16 - 37 FD PITCH CMD + DN
s
12

Sheet 2 of 4

Rev. V Page F-112
NOTES
AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS
SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
USE TRIAD TRANSFORMER P/N TY-141P. IN SOME INSTALLATIONS, EXISTING TRANSFORMERS (COLLINS
6
P/N 677-9020-00) MAY BE USED.
IT IS NECESSARY TO INSTALL A RELAY TO INVERT THE POLARITY OF THE “ILS/GPS APPROACH” SIGNAL
7
FROM ACTIVE-LOW TO ACTIVE-HIGH FOR INPUT INTO THE 5536E/F COMPUTER AMPLIFIER.
LOCATED ON IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 2.5.11.8.
CONNECT GDU 620 TO EXISTING FLIGHT DIRECTOR SWITCH AS SHOWN. GDU 620 FD ENABLE IN IS
9 ACTIVE-HIGH.
10
AUTOPILOT SIGNALS SHOULD BE CONNECTED ONLY TO GDU #1.
12
EXISTING ADI.
13 EXISTING FLIGHT DIRECTOR SWITCH MUST BE RETAINED.
ADDITIONAL DROP DOWN RESISTORS MAY BE REQUIRED TO ENSURE THAT THE HEADING AND COURSE
ERROR SIGNALS TO THE 5536E( ) COMPUTER-AMPLIFIER ARE WITHIN THE CORRECT OPERATING
14
RANGE. REFER TO BENDIX “I.B. 2004 PART 1 INSTALLATION MANUAL M-4C AFCS PARAGRAPH 2-5
“TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES FOR PREFLIGHT CHECKOUT.”

Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. V Page F-113
NOTES CONTINUED
THE AUTOPILOT COMPUTER MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR A COLLINS PN-101 (FD-112C/V) HSI IN ORDER
TO HAVE THE CORRECT HEADING AND COURSE ERROR (DATUM) SIGNALS; OTHERWISE ADDITIONAL
ADJUSTMENTS WILL BE REQUIRED. REFER TO BENDIX “I.B. 20004 M-4D AFCS INSTALLATION MANUAL”
15
SECTION II PARAGRAPH 7 “FLIGHT CHECK AND CALIBRATION” FOR ADJUSTMENTS THAT CAN BE MADE IN
THE 5487G OR 5485A FLIGHT CONTROLLER. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, REFER TO I.B. 20004
PARAGRAPH 5 “POST-INSTALLATION CHECK OUT.”
THE 115VAC 400 Hz EXCITATION FOR THE AUTOPILOT (P2-40), AND THE 26VAC 400 Hz REFERENCE
16 VOLTAGE FOR THE GDU 620 (P6203-20), MUST BE IN PHASE WITH EACH OTHER FOR PROPER FEEDBACK
OF THE HEADING AND COURSE ERRORS TO THE AUTOPILOT COMPUTER.
17
SECTION 5.5.9.

Sheet 4 of 4

Rev. V Page F-114
GARMIN GARMIN
GDU 620 GSR 56
P6201 P561
GSR STATUS IN* 6 31 STATUS DISCRETE* OUT
P6203
4 GSR REMOTE PWR* 47 16 IRIDIUM RMT PWR ON*
RS-232 IN 6 6 12 RS-232 OUT

RS-232 OUT 6 28 13 RS-232 IN
RS-232 GND 6 49 14 SIGNAL GROUND
s s
AUDIO PANEL
5
TEL MIC AUDIO OUT HI 4 GSR 56 AUDIO IN HI
TEL MIC AUDIO OUT LO 5 GSR 56 AUDIO IN LO
(OPTIONAL)
TEL AUDIO IN HI 1 GSR 56 AUDIO OUT HI
TEL AUDIO IN LO 2 GSR 56 AUDIO OUT LO
s
NOTES
3 BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GSR 56 TO ITS CONNECTOR
BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH GSR 56 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
4
DISCRETE OUTPUT. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.9 FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE DISCRETE
OUTPUTS.
5 OPTIONAL AUDIO CONNECTIONS ARE REQUIRED IF THE PHONE FEATURE OF THE GSR 56 IS UTILIZED.
Figure F-32 GSR 56 Iridium Interconnect

Rev. V Page F-115
GARMIN SINGLE RADAR ALTIMETER
GDU 620 #2 6 7
(IF INSTALLED)
P6203
RAD ALT PUSH-TO-TEST 9
n
(DISC OUT N)
9
ARINC 429 IN 8A 5
8 ARINC 429 IN 8B 27 5 RADAR
s
FREE ALTIMETER
GARMIN FLIGHT COLLINS HONEYWELL
GARMIN GRA 55/ RA-4500 RAC 870 KRA 405B
GDU 620 #1 6 7 5500
P6203 P1 P1 P1 P4051
RAD ALT PUSH-TO-TEST* 9
n - - 40 U PUSH-TO-TEST IN
4 (DISC OUT N*)
4 4
9
s
ARINC 429 IN 8A 5 52 12 2 B ARINC 429 OUT A

8 ARINC 429 IN 8B 11 3 C ARINC 429 OUT B
27 55
s
10
DUAL RADAR ALTIMETERS
5 RADAR
FREE ALTIMETER
GARMIN
GDU 620 #2 7 GRA 55/ RA-4500 RAC 870 KRA 405B
5500
P6203 P1 P1 P1 P4051
RAD ALT PUSH-TO-TEST
4 (DISC OUT N) 4 4
8 ARINC 429 IN 8A 5 52 12 2 B ARINC 429 OUT A

ARINC 429 IN 8B 27 55 11 3 C ARINC 429 OUT B
s
10
5 RADAR
FREE ALTIMETER
GARMIN GRA 55/ RA-4500 RAC 870 KRA 405B
GDU 620 #1 7 5500
P6203 P1 P1 P1 P4051
RAD ALT PUSH-TO-TEST*
4 (DISC OUT N*)
4 4
8 ARINC 429 IN 8A 5 52 12 2 B ARINC 429 OUT A

ARINC 429 IN 8B 27 55 11 3 C ARINC 429 OUT B
s
10
Figure F-33 Radar Altimeter (ARINC 429) Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-116
NOTES
4 MUST BE ASSIGNED TO THIS FUNCTION. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.9 FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE
THE DISCRETE OUTPUTS.
5 FREE FLIGHT RA-4500 RADAR ALTIMETER (P/N 84560-X2-XXXX).
6 IF DUAL GDU 620s ARE INSTALLED, THE RADAR ALTIMETER MUST BE ENABLED ON BOTH GDU 620s.
DEFAULT ARINC 429 INPUT SHOWN. OTHER ARINC 429 INPUT (INPUTS 4-8 ONLY) MAY BE USED INSTEAD.
8 REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429 INPUTS.
CONNECTION FROM RADAR ALTIMETER CAN BE MADE TO BOTH GDUS AS SHOWN, OR ONLY
CONNECTED TO ONE GDU (EITHER PILOT’S OR CO-PILOT’S) AND RADAR ALTITUDE INFORMATION AND
9 CONTROL CROSS-FILLED TO THE OTHER GDU. DIRECT CONNECTION TO EACH GDU IS PREFERRED.
CROSS-FILL OPTION SHOULD ONLY BE USED IF THERE ARE AN INSUFFICIENT NUMBER OF GDU ARINC
429 INPUTS TO SUPPORT ALL ARINC 429 INTERFACES IN A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.
THE 429 SPEED SELECT* PROGRAM PIN (P1-10) MUST BE LEFT OPEN FOR A LOW-SPEED ARINC 429
10 OUTPUT. IF HIGH-SPEED OPERATION IS DESIRED, THE CORRESPONDING GDU 620 ARINC 429 INPUT
MUST BE SET TO HIGH-SPEED.
Figure F-33 Radar Altimeter (ARINC 429) Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-117
COMPOSITE VIDEO DEVICE – SINGLE/DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS
4
GARMIN GDU 620 (#1 or #2) CAMERA SYSTEM
Max-Viz
2 P6201 EVS-1500
3 J4
COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 1 (2) 1 (20) RG 179 12 VIDEO OUT
COMPOSITE VIDEO RTN 1 (2) 22 (22) 13 VIDEO RTN
5
NOTES
3 USE RG 179 CABLE, OR EQUIVALENT CABLE WITH 75 OHM CHARACTERISTIC IMPEDANCE.
4 REFER TO APPENDIX SECTION E.16 FOR RESTRICTIONS ON CAMERA INSTALLATION AND LOCATION.
IF THE GDU SYSTEM ID IS ALSO GOING TO PIN P6201-22, GROUND IT TO THE SHIELDBLOCK INSTEAD.
5 REFER TO FIGURE F-2 FOR DETAILS.
Figure F-34 External Video Interconnect

Rev. V Page F-118
DUAL GTN INTERCONNECT – SINGLE GDU
GDU 620 PFD/MFD P1002 GTN 6XX/7XX #1

P6201
5
ETHERNET OUT A ETHERNET IN A 6 7
ETHERNET OUT B ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET IN A 9 10 10 9 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET IN B ETHERNET OUT B
s s
P6202 P1001
RS-232 IN 3 12 7 RS-232 OUT 2
RS-232 GND 3 46 45 RS-232 GND 2
s s
TIME MARK IN 1A 40 3 TIME MARK OUT A
GPS 1
TIME MARK IN 1B 41 22 TIME MARK OUT B
s s

ARINC 429 IN 3B 23 28 ARINC 429 OUT 2B
s s

s s
GTN 6XX/7XX #2
P1001
47 ARINC 429 IN 2A
4 6 7
66 ARINC 429 IN 2B
s
RS-232 IN 4 13 7 RS-232 OUT 2
RS-232 GND 4 47 45 RS-232 GND 2
s s
GPS 2 TIME MARK IN 2A 42 3 TIME MARK OUT A

s s
9 ARINC 429 OUT 2A
11 ARINC 429 IN 5A 8
s s
P6201 P1002
ETHERNET OUT A ETHERNET IN A
s s
s
10 SYSTEM ID PROGRAM*
Figure F-35 GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7XX (Single GDU 620)
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-119
NOTES
4 IF ONLY ONE GTN 6XX/7XX IS INSTALLED, CONNECT AS SHOWN FOR GTN #1.
IF TERRAIN ALERTING OR TAWS B IS ENABLED ON THE GTN 6XX/7XX UNIT INSTALLED, THEN THE GTN
MUST BE CONNECTED AS GTN #1—ONLY TERRAIN ALERTING OR TAWS ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GTN #1
7
ARE DISPLAYED ON THE PFD. IF TWO GTN UNITS WITH TERRAIN ALERTING OR TAWS ENABLED ARE
INSTALLED, THE GTN UNIT THAT IS CONNECTED TO THE AUDIO PANEL MUST BE CONNECTED AS GTN #1.
FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION, REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S

8 DOCUMENTATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
9 REFER TO FIGURE F-37 AND FIGURE F-38 FOR HSDB ARCHITECTURE REQUIREMENTS.
11 ARINC 429 INPUT (INPUTS 4-8 ONLY). REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE
Figure F-35 GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7XX (Single GDU 620)
Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-120
DUAL GTN INTERCONNECT – DUAL GDU
GTN 6XX/7XX #1
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 5 P1002
P6201 6 7
s
s
P6202 P1001

s s
RS232 IN 3 12 7 RS-232 OUT 2
RS232 GND 3 46 45 RS-232 GND 2
s s
GPS 1 TIME MARK IN 1B 41 22 TIME MARK OUT B
s s

s s
RS-232 IN 4 13
RS-232 GND 4 47
s
TIME MARK IN 2A 42
GPS 2 TIME MARK IN 2B 43
s
11 ARINC 429 IN 5A 8
ARINC 429 IN 5B 25
s
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 5 P6202

RS232 IN 3 12
RS232 GND 3 46
s
TIME MARK IN 1A 40
GPS 1
TIME MARK IN 1B 41
s
GTN 6XX/7XX #2
ARINC 429 IN 3A 6 P1001
ARINC 429 IN 3B 23
s 4 6 7
RS-232 IN 4 13 7 RS-232 OUT 2
RS-232 GND 4 47 45 RS-232 GND 2
s s
GPS 2
s s
11
s s

s s
P6201 P1002
s s
s
10 SYSTEM ID PROGRAM*
Figure F-36 GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7XX (Dual GDU 620s)
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-121
NOTES
3 BE LESS THAN 3.0" INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT
FOR INSTALLATIONS WITH DUAL GDUs, TWO SUITABLE GPS SENSORS ARE REQUIRED. IF BOTH ARE NOT
4 GTN NAVIGATORS, THEN THE OTHER GPS NAVIGATOR MAY BE CONNECTED AS GPS #2 WITH THE
CORRESPONDING PINS CONNECTED IN LIEU OF GTN #2.
IF TERRAIN ALERTING OR TAWS B IS ENABLED ON THE GTN 6XX/7XX UNIT INSTALLED, THEN THE GTN
MUST BE CONNECTED AS GTN #1—ONLY TERRAIN ALERTING OR TAWS ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GTN #1
7
ARE DISPLAYED ON THE PFD. IF TWO GTN UNITS WITH TERRAIN ALERTING OR TAWS ENABLED ARE
INSTALLED, THE GTN UNIT THAT IS CONNECTED TO THE AUDIO PANEL MUST BE CONNECTED AS GTN #1.

8 DOCUMENTATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
9 REFER TO FIGURE F-37 AND FIGURE F-38 FOR HSDB ARCHITECTURE REQUIREMENTS.
11 ARINC 429 INPUT (INPUTS 4-8 ONLY). REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE
Figure F-36 GPS Source Interconnect - GTN 6XX/7XX (Dual GDU 620s)
Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-122
HSDB – SINGLE GDU – WITHOUT GTN AND GWX INTERCONNECT
10 10
ADS-B IN SOURCE
GDU 620 PFD/MFD GDL 88 GTX 345
P6201
5 6 P881 P3252
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 51 7 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 52 2 ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 53 6 ETHERNET OUT A
s s 54 1 ETHERNET OUT B
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 P691 GDL 69 SERIES
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 5 6
s 25 ETHERNET OUT 1A
24 ETHERNET OUT 1B
23 ETHERNET IN 1A
GTS 8XX 22 ETHERNET IN 1B
P8001 s
5 6
ETHERNET OUT B 53 26 ETHERNET IN 2B
54 9
ETHERNET IN B 55 s
28 ETHERNET OUT 2B
s
Figure F-37 HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Single GDU 620)

Sheet 1 of 8

Rev. V Page F-123
HSDB – SINGLE GDU – WITHOUT GTN, WITH GWX INTERCONNECT
GARMIN
GWX 68 GWX 70(R) GWX 75 WEATHER RADAR
GDU 620 PFD/MFD
P6201 P400 P751 P27000
5 6
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 34 4 4 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 35 3 3 ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 36 23 23 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 37 22 22 ETHERNET OUT B
s s
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
24 ETHERNET OUT 1B
23 ETHERNET IN 1A
P8001 s
5 6
ETHERNET OUT B 53 26 ETHERNET IN 2B 9
ETHERNET IN A 54 29 ETHERNET OUT 2A
ETHERNET IN B 55 s
28 ETHERNET OUT 2B
s
10 10
ADS-B IN SOURCE GDL 88 GTX 345
P881 P3252
5 6
ETHERNET IN A 51 7 33 ETHERNET OUT 3A
ETHERNET IN B 52 2 32 ETHERNET OUT 3B
ETHERNET OUT A 31 ETHERNET IN 3A 9
53 6
ETHERNET OUT B 54 1 30 ETHERNET IN 3B
s s

Sheet 2 of 8

Rev. V Page F-124
HSDB – SINGLE GDU – WITHOUT GTN, WITH GMC 605
INTERCONNECT
GDU 620 PFD/MFD GMC 605
P6201 P6051
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 44 ETHERNET IN 2A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 45 ETHERNET IN 2B
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 46 ETHERNET OUT 2A
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 47 ETHERNET OUT 2B
s s
5 6
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
24 ETHERNET OUT 1B
23 ETHERNET IN 1A
P8001 s
5 6
ETHERNET OUT A 52 27 ETHERNET IN 2A 9
ETHERNET IN B 55 s
28 ETHERNET OUT 2B
s
10 10
ADS-B IN SOURCE GDL 88 GTX 345
P881 P3252
5 6
ETHERNET IN A 51 7 33 ETHERNET OUT 3A
ETHERNET IN B 52 2 32 ETHERNET OUT 3B
ETHERNET OUT A 53 6 31 ETHERNET IN 3A
ETHERNET OUT B 54 1 30 ETHERNET IN 3B
s s
GARMIN
WEATHER RADAR GWX 68 GWX 70 GWX 75
P400 P751 P27000 5 6
ETHERNET IN A 34 4 4 59 ETHERNET OUT 4A
ETHERNET IN B 35 3 3 58 ETHERNET OUT 4B
ETHERNET OUT A 36 23 23 57 ETHERNET IN 4A
ETHERNET OUT B 37 22 22 56 ETHERNET IN 4B
s s

Sheet 3 of 8

Rev. V Page F-125
HSDB – SINGLE GDU, SINGLE GTN – WITHOUT GWX INTERCONNECT
GDU 620 PFD/MFD GTN 6XX/7XX 7 8 GTS 8XX 8

P6201 P1002 P1002 P8001
5 6
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 15 ETHERNET IN 2A ETHERNET OUT 3A 25 54 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 16 ETHERNET IN 2B ETHERNET OUT 3B 26 55 ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 17 ETHERNET OUT 2A ETHERNET IN 3A 23 52 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 18 ETHERNET OUT 2B ETHERNET IN 3B 24 53 ETHERNET OUT B
s s s s
5 6
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 13 ETHERNET IN 4A ETHERNET OUT 1A 8
ETHERNET IN 2B 31 14 ETHERNET IN 4B ETHERNET OUT 1B 9
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 4 ETHERNET OUT 4A ETHERNET IN 1A 6
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 5 ETHERNET OUT 4B ETHERNET IN 1B 7
s s s
10 10
ADS-B IN SOURCE
GDL 69 SERIES GDL 88 GTX 345
P691 8
5 6 P881 P3252
26 ETHERNET IN 2B 51 7 ETHERNET IN A
27 ETHERNET IN 2A 9 52 2 ETHERNET IN B
28 ETHERNET OUT 2B 53 6 ETHERNET OUT A
29 ETHERNET OUT 2A 54 1 ETHERNET OUT B
s s
25 ETHERNET OUT 1A
24 ETHERNET OUT 1B
23 ETHERNET IN 1A
22 ETHERNET IN 1B
s

Sheet 4 of 8

Rev. V Page F-126
HSDB – SINGLE GDU, SINGLE GTN – WITH GWX INTERCONNECT
GARMIN WEATHER
GWX 68 GWX 70(R) GWX 75 RADAR
GDU 620 PFD/MFD P6201 P400 P751 P27000
5 6
s s
P1002 P691 GDL 69 SERIES

GTN 6XX/7XX 7 P1002
5 6 5 6
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 17 ETHERNET OUT 2A ETHERNET OUT 4A 4 23 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET IN 2B 31 18 ETHERNET OUT 2B ETHERNET OUT 4B 5 22 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 15 ETHERNET IN 2A ETHERNET IN 4A 13 25 ETHERNET OUT 1A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 16 ETHERNET IN 2B ETHERNET IN 4B 14 24 ETHERNET OUT 1B
s s s s
10 10
ADS-B IN SOURCE
GDL 88 GTX 345 GTS 8XX
P8001
P881 P3252 5 6 5 6
ETHERNET IN A 51 7 8 ETHERNET OUT 1A ETHERNET OUT 3A 25 54 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET IN B 52 2 9 ETHERNET OUT 1B ETHERNET OUT 3B 26 55 ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET OUT A 53 6 6 ETHERNET IN 1A ETHERNET IN 3A 23 52 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET OUT B 54 1 7 ETHERNET IN 1B ETHERNET IN 3B 24 53 ETHERNET OUT B
s s s s

Sheet 5 of 8

Rev. V Page F-127
HSDB – SINGLE GDU, SINGLE GTN – WITH GWX AND GMC 605 INTERCONNECT
GDU 620 PFD/MFD P6201 GMC 605

P6051
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 46 ETHERNET OUT 2A GDL 69 SERIES P8001 GTS 8XX
P691 5 6
s s ETHERNET IN 2A 27 54 ETHERNET IN A
9 ETHERNET IN 2B 26 55 ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET OUT 2A 29 52 ETHERNET OUT A
GTN 6XX/7XX ETHERNET OUT 2B 28 53 ETHERNET OUT B
P1002 7 P1002 P691 s s
5 6
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 17 ETHERNET OUT 2A ETHERNET OUT 4A 4 23 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET IN 2B 31 18 ETHERNET OUT 2B ETHERNET OUT 4B 5 22 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 15 ETHERNET IN 2A ETHERNET IN 4A 13 25 ETHERNET OUT 1A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 16 ETHERNET IN 2B ETHERNET IN 4B 14 24 ETHERNET OUT 1B
s s s s
10 10 GARMIN WEATHER
ADS-B IN SOURCE GWX 68 GWX 70 GWX 75 RADAR
GDL 88 GTX 345
5 6 P400 P751 P27000
P881 P3252 5 6 ETHERNET OUT 3A 25 34 4 4 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET IN A 51 7 8 ETHERNET OUT 1A ETHERNET OUT 3B 26 35 3 3 ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET IN B 52 2 9 ETHERNET OUT 1B ETHERNET IN 3A 23 36 23 23 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET OUT A 53 6 6 ETHERNET IN 1A ETHERNET IN 3B 24 37 22 22 ETHERNET OUT B
ETHERNET OUT B 54 1 7 ETHERNET IN 1B s s
s s

Sheet 6 of 8

Rev. V Page F-128
HSDB – SINGLE GDU, DUAL GTN INTERCONNECT
GTN 6XX/7XX (GPS #1) GMC 605
GDU 620 PFD/MFD 7 P1002 P6051
P6201 P1002
25 44 ETHERNET IN 2A
ETHERNET OUT 3A
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 15 ETHERNET IN 2A 26 45 ETHERNET IN 2B
ETHERNET OUT 3B
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 16 ETHERNET IN 2B 23 46 ETHERNET OUT 2A
ETHERNET IN 3A
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 17 ETHERNET OUT 2A 47 ETHERNET OUT 2B
ETHERNET IN 3B 24 s s
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 18 ETHERNET OUT 2B 5 6
s s
5 6 ETHERNET OUT 4A 4
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 8 ETHERNET OUT 1A ETHERNET OUT 4B 5
ETHERNET IN 2B 31 9 ETHERNET OUT 1B ETHERNET IN 4A 13 P691 GDL 69 SERIES
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 6 ETHERNET IN 1A ETHERNET IN 4B 14
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 7 ETHERNET IN 1B s 23 ETHERNET IN 1A
s s 22 ETHERNET IN 1B
25 ETHERNET OUT 1A
24 ETHERNET OUT 1B
s
GTS 8XX 5 6
P8001
s s 9
27 ETHERNET IN 2A
26 ETHERNET IN 2B
P1002 29 ETHERNET OUT 2A
GTN 6XX/7XX (GPS #2) 7 28 ETHERNET OUT 2B
9 ETHERNET OUT 1B s
8 ETHERNET OUT 1A
10 10
7 ETHERNET IN 1B
6 ETHERNET IN 1A GDL 88 GTX 345 ADS-B IN SOURCE
s
P881 P3252
17 ETHERNET OUT 2A 71 4 ETHERNET IN 2B
18 ETHERNET OUT 2B 70 9 ETHERNET IN 2A
15 ETHERNET IN 2A 73 3 ETHERNET OUT 2B
GARMIN 16 ETHERNET IN 2B 72 8 ETHERNET OUT 2A
WEATHER RADAR GWX 68 GWX 70 GWX 75 s P1002 s
P400 P751 P27000 5 6

5 6 ETHERNET OUT 4A 4 51 7 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET IN A 34 4 4 25 ETHERNET OUT 3A ETHERNET OUT 4B 5 52 2 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET IN B 35 3 3 26 ETHERNET OUT 3B ETHERNET IN 4A 13 53 6 ETHERNET OUT 1A
ETHERNET OUT A 36 23 23 23 ETHERNET IN 3A ETHERNET IN 4B 14 54 1 ETHERNET OUT 1B
ETHERNET OUT B 37 22 22 24 ETHERNET IN 3B s s
s s

Sheet 7 of 8

Rev. V Page F-129
NOTES
FOR COMPLETE PIN-OUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION, REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S

4
DOCUMENTATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
5 REFER TO SECTION 2.5.25 FOR HSDB ARCHITECTURE REQUIREMENTS.
HSDB PORT SELECTIONS SHOWN ARE SUGGESTIONS – ANY FREE HSDB PORT ON AN LRU MAY BE USED
7
UNLESS SPECIFICALLY REQUIRED BY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION DOCUMENTATION.
IF A GDL 69 SERIES UNIT IS NOT INSTALLED, THE GTS 8XX SHOULD STILL BE CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO
8 THE GTN 6XX/7XX.
ETHERNET PORT 2, 3, OR 4 MAY BE USED. FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS, REFER TO THE GDL 69
9 INSTALLATION MANUAL.
ANY AVAILABLE ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED. FOR ETHERNET PORT SETTINGS, REFER TO THE LRU
10 TSO INSTALLATION MANUAL.

Sheet 8 of 8

Rev. V Page F-130
HSDB – DUAL GDU, without GTN or GWX INTERCONNECT
11 11
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 ADS-B IN SOURCE
P6201 GDL 88 GTX 345
5 7 P881 P3252
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 51 7 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 52 2 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 53 6 ETHERNET OUT 1A
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 54 1 ETHERNET OUT 1B
s s
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 GDL 69 SERIES

P691
ETHERNET IN 2B 31 5 7
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 ETHERNET OUT 2A 29 70 9 ETHERNET IN 2A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 ETHERNET OUT 2B 28 71 4 ETHERNET IN 2B
s 9 ETHERNET IN 2A 27 72 8 ETHERNET OUT 2A
ETHERNET IN 2B 26 73 3 ETHERNET OUT 2B
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 5 7 s s
P6201
ETHERNET IN 2B GTS 8XX
31 P8001
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 5 7
ETHERNET OUT 3A 33 54 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
ETHERNET OUT 2A ETHERNET OUT 3B 32 55 ETHERNET IN B
32
s 9 ETHERNET IN 3A 31 52 ETHERNET OUT A
P691 ETHERNET IN 3B 30 53 ETHERNET OUT B
5 7 s s
s s
Figure F-38 HSDB Ethernet Interconnect (Dual GDU 620s)

Sheet 1 of 12

Rev. V Page F-131
HSDB – DUAL GDU, without GTN, with GWX – PREFERRED INTERCONNECT 10
GARMIN WEATHER
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 P6201
5 7 P400 P751 P27000
s s
11 11
ADS-B IN SOURCE
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 GDL 88 GTX 345
ETHERNET IN 2B GDL 69 SERIES
31 P691 P881 P3252
5 7
ETHERNET OUT 2B ETHERNET OUT 3A 33
33 52 2 ETHERNET IN 1B
s ETHERNET OUT 3B 32
ETHERNET IN 3A 31 53 6 ETHERNET OUT 1A
9 54 1 ETHERNET OUT 1B
5 7 ETHERNET IN 3B 30
s s
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2
P6201
P8001 GTS 8XX
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 ETHERNET OUT 2A 29 54 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 ETHERNET OUT 2B 28 55 ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
s 9 ETHERNET IN 2A 27 52 ETHERNET OUT A
P691 ETHERNET IN 2B 26 53 ETHERNET OUT B
5 7 s s
s s

Sheet 2 of 12

Rev. V Page F-132
HSDB – DUAL GDU, without GTN, with GWX – ALTERNATE INTERCONNECT
(NOT RECOMMENDED FOR NEW INSTALLATIONS)
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 P6201 P691 GDL 69 SERIES

5 7
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 25 ETHERNET OUT 1A GARMIN
GWX 68 GWX 70(R) GWX 75 WEATHER
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 24 ETHERNET OUT 1B P691
s s 5 7 P400 P751 P27000 RADAR
5 7
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 ETHERNET OUT 3A 33 34 4 4 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET IN 2B 31 ETHERNET OUT 3B 32 35 3 3 ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 9 ETHERNET IN 3A 31 36 23 23 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 ETHERNET IN 3B 30 37 22 22 ETHERNET OUT B
s s s
11 11
ADS-B IN SOURCE
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 GDL 88 GTX 345
P6201
5 7 P881 P3252
ETHERNET IN 2B 31 ETHERNET OUT 4A 59 51 7 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 ETHERNET OUT 4B 58 52 2 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 ETHERNET IN 4A 57 53 6 ETHERNET OUT 1A
9
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 P691 ETHERNET IN 4B 56 54 1 ETHERNET OUT 1B
s
5 7 s s
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 27 ETHERNET IN 2A 9
s s
GTS 8XX P8001 12

5 7
ETHERNET OUT A 52 70 - ETHERNET IN 2A
ETHERNET OUT B 53 71 - ETHERNET IN 2B
ETHERNET IN A 54 72 - ETHERNET OUT 2A
ETHERNET IN B 55 73 - ETHERNET OUT 2B
s s

Sheet 3 of 12

Rev. V Page F-133
HSDB – DUAL GDU, without GTN, with GWX & GMC 605
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 P6201 GMC 605

P6051
5 7
s s 11 11
ADS-B IN SOURCE
GDL 88 GTX 345
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 GDL 69 SERIES P691 P881 P3252
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
ETHERNET OUT 3B 32 52 2 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
s ETHERNET IN 3A 31 53 6 ETHERNET OUT 1A
9 54 1 ETHERNET OUT 1B
ETHERNET IN 3B 30
s s
5 7
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 GARMIN WEATHER
P6201 GWX 68 GWX 70(R) GWX 75 RADAR
ETHERNET IN 2B 31 5 7 P400 P751 P27000
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 ETHERNET OUT 2A 29 34 4 4 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 ETHERNET OUT 2B 28 35 3 3 ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
s 9 ETHERNET IN 2A 27 36 23 23 ETHERNET OUT A
P691 ETHERNET IN 2B 26 37 22 22 ETHERNET OUT B
5 7 s s
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 22 ETHERNET IN 1B P8001 GTS 8XX
s s 5 7
ETHERNET OUT 4A 59 54 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET OUT 4B 58 55 ETHERNET IN B
9 ETHERNET IN 4A 57 52 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET IN 4B 56 53 ETHERNET OUT B
s s

Sheet 4 of 12

Rev. V Page F-134
HSDB – DUAL GDU, SINGLE GTN (GPS #1), without GWX 68/70(R)/75 INTERCONNECT
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 GTN 6XX/7XX (GPS #1) 8 GTS 8XX 6

P6201 P1002 P1002 P8001
5 7
s s s s
5 7
ETHERNET IN 2B ETHERNET OUT 4B 5 11 11
31 7 ETHERNET IN 1B ADS-B IN SOURCE
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 8 ETHERNET OUT 1A ETHERNET IN 4A 13 GDL 88 GTX 345
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 9 ETHERNET OUT 1B ETHERNET IN 4B 14 P881 P3252
s s s
51 7 ETHERNET IN 1A
52 2 ETHERNET IN 1B
53 6 ETHERNET OUT 1A
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 54 1 ETHERNET OUT 1B
P6201 GDL 69 SERIES s
P691 P691
5 7
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
30 ETHERNET IN 3B 9 ETHERNET OUT 2A 29 70 9 ETHERNET IN 2A
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 ETHERNET IN 2B
31 ETHERNET IN 3A ETHERNET OUT 2B 28 71 4
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 ETHERNET OUT 2A
32 ETHERNET OUT 3B ETHERNET IN 2A 27 72 8
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 ETHERNET OUT 2B
s 33 ETHERNET OUT 3A ETHERNET IN 2B 26 73 3
s s

s s

Sheet 5 of 12

Rev. V Page F-135
HSDB – DUAL GDU, SINGLE GTN (GPS #1), with GWX 68/70(R)/75 INTERCONNECT
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 GTN 6XX/7XX (GPS #1) 8 GTS 8XX
P6201 P1002 P1002 P8001
5 7
s s s s
5 7
s s s
51 7 ETHERNET IN 1A
52 2 ETHERNET IN 1B
P6201 GDL 69 SERIES s
P691 5 7
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
22 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
23 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
24 ETHERNET OUT 1B
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
s
GARMIN WEATHER
P400 P751 P27000
5 7
s s

Sheet 6 of 12

Rev. V Page F-136
HSDB – DUAL GDU, SINGLE GTN (GPS #1), with GWX 68/70(R)/75 and GMC 605 INTERCONNECT
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 GTN 6XX/7XX (GPS #1) 8 GMC 605
P6201 P1002 P1002 P6051
5 7
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 15 ETHERNET IN 2A ETHERNET OUT 3A 25 44 ETHERNET IN 2A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 16 ETHERNET IN 2B ETHERNET OUT 3B 26 45 ETHERNET IN 2B
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 17 ETHERNET OUT 2A ETHERNET IN 3A 23 46 ETHERNET OUT 2A
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 18 ETHERNET OUT 2B ETHERNET IN 3B 24 47 ETHERNET OUT 2B
s s s s
5 7
s s s
51 7 ETHERNET IN 1A
52 2 ETHERNET IN 1B
P6201 GDL 69 SERIES P691 s
P691 5 7
ETHERNET IN 2B 31 9
22 ETHERNET IN 1B ETHERNET OUT 2A 29
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
23 ETHERNET IN 1A ETHERNET OUT 2B 28
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
24 ETHERNET OUT 1B ETHERNET IN 2A 27 GTS 8XX
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 P8001
s 25 ETHERNET OUT 1A ETHERNET IN 2B 26
s s 54 ETHERNET IN A
55 ETHERNET IN B
GARMIN WEATHER 52 ETHERNET OUT A
GWX 68 GWX 70(R) GWX 75 RADAR 53 ETHERNET OUT B
P400 P751 P27000 5 7 s
5 7
s s

Sheet 7 of 12

Rev. V Page F-137
HSDB – DUAL GDU, SINGLE GTN (GPS #2), without GWX INTERCONNECT
11 11
ADS-B IN SOURCE
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 GDL 69 SERIES GDL 88 GTX 345
P6201 P691 P691
P881 P3252
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 23 ETHERNET IN 1A ETHERNET OUT 3A 33 70 9 ETHERNET IN 2A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 22 ETHERNET IN 1B ETHERNET OUT 3B 32 71 4 ETHERNET IN 2B
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 25 ETHERNET OUT 1A ETHERNET IN 3A 31 72 8 ETHERNET OUT 2A
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 24 ETHERNET OUT 1B ETHERNET IN 3B 30 73 3 ETHERNET OUT 2B
s s s s
5 7 9 5 7
26 ETHERNET IN 2B 51 7 ETHERNET IN 1A
27 ETHERNET IN 2A ETHERNET IN 1B
52 2
28 ETHERNET OUT 2B 9 53 6 ETHERNET OUT 1A
29 ETHERNET OUT 2A 54 1 ETHERNET OUT 1B
s
s
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
P1002
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 6 GTN 6XX/7XX (GPS #2) 8 P1002
s
13 ETHERNET IN 4A ETHERNET OUT 1A 8
14 ETHERNET IN 4B ETHERNET OUT 1B 9
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 4 ETHERNET OUT 4A ETHERNET IN 1A 6
P6201
5 ETHERNET OUT 4B ETHERNET IN 1B 7
s s
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 GTS 8XX 6
s P8001
5 7 5 7
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 17 ETHERNET OUT 2A ETHERNET OUT 3A 25 54 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 18 ETHERNET OUT 2B ETHERNET OUT 3B 26 55 ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 15 ETHERNET IN 2A ETHERNET IN 3A 23 52 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 16 ETHERNET IN 2B ETHERNET IN 3B 24 53 ETHERNET OUT B
s s s s

Sheet 8 of 12

Rev. V Page F-138
HSDB – DUAL GDU, SINGLE GTN (GPS #2), with GWX INTERCONNECT
GARMIN WEATHER
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1
P6201 P400 P751 P27000
5 7
9 ETHERNET IN 1A 11 36 23 23 ETHERNET OUT A
s s
11 11
GDL 88 GTX 345 ADS-B IN SOURCE
P881 P3252
5 7
51 7 ETHERNET IN 1A
52 2 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
54 1 ETHERNET OUT 1B
ETHERNET IN 2B 31 s
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
P1002
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 8 GTN 6XX/7XX (GPS #2)
P1002 P691
GDL 69 SERIES
s
7 ETHERNET IN 1B ETHERNET OUT 4A 4 23 ETHERNET IN 1A
6 ETHERNET IN 1A ETHERNET OUT 4B 5 22 ETHERNET IN 1B
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 9 ETHERNET OUT 1B ETHERNET IN 4A 13 25 ETHERNET OUT 1A
P6201
8 ETHERNET OUT 1A ETHERNET IN 4B 14 24 ETHERNET OUT 1B
s s s
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 GTS 8XX
s P8001
5 7
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 17 ETHERNET OUT 2A ETHERNET OUT 3A 25 54 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 18 ETHERNET OUT 2B ETHERNET OUT 3B 26 55 ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 15 ETHERNET IN 2A ETHERNET IN 3A 23 52 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 16 ETHERNET IN 2B ETHERNET IN 3B 24 53 ETHERNET OUT B
s s s s

Sheet 9 of 12

Rev. V Page F-139
HSDB – DUAL GDU, SINGLE GTN (GPS #2), with GWX and GMC 605 INTERCONNECT
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 P6201 GMC 605 GTS 8XX P691 GDL 69 SERIES
P6051 P8001 5 7
5 7
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 44 ETHERNET IN 2A ETHERNET IN A 54 33 ETHERNET OUT 3A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 45 ETHERNET IN 2B ETHERNET IN B 55 32 ETHERNET OUT 3B
9 ETHERNET IN 1A 11 46 ETHERNET OUT 2A ETHERNET OUT A 52 31 ETHERNET IN 3A
ETHERNET OUT B 53 30 ETHERNET IN 3B 9
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 47 ETHERNET OUT 2B s
s s s
11 11
ADS-B IN SOURCE
GDL 88 GTX 345
P881 P3252
5 7
51 7 ETHERNET IN 1A
52 2 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
54 1 ETHERNET OUT 1B
ETHERNET IN 2B 31 s
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
P1002
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 8 GTN 6XX/7XX (GPS #2)
s P1002
7 ETHERNET IN 1B ETHERNET OUT 4A 4 23 ETHERNET IN 1A
6 ETHERNET IN 1A ETHERNET OUT 4B 5 22 ETHERNET IN 1B
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 9 ETHERNET OUT 1B ETHERNET IN 4A 13 25 ETHERNET OUT 1A
P6201
8 ETHERNET OUT 1A ETHERNET IN 4B 14 24 ETHERNET OUT 1B
s s s
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 GWX 68 GWX 70(R) GWX 75 GARMIN WEATHER
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 RADAR
s 5 7 P400 P751 P27000
5 7
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 17 ETHERNET OUT 2A ETHERNET OUT 3A 25 34 4 4 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 18 ETHERNET OUT 2B ETHERNET OUT 3B 26 35 3 3 ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 15 ETHERNET IN 2A ETHERNET IN 3A 23 36 23 23 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 16 ETHERNET IN 2B ETHERNET IN 3B 24 37 22 22 ETHERNET OUT B
s s s s

Sheet 10 of 12

Rev. V Page F-140
HSDB – DUAL GDU, DUAL GTN INTERCONNECT
GTN 6XX/7XX (GPS #1) GMC 605

GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 8 P1002 P6051
P6201 P1002
25 44 ETHERNET IN 2A
ETHERNET OUT 3A
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 15 ETHERNET IN 2A 26 45 ETHERNET IN 2B
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 16 ETHERNET IN 2B ETHERNET OUT 3B 46 ETHERNET OUT 2A
ETHERNET IN 3A 23
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 17 ETHERNET OUT 2A 47 ETHERNET OUT 2B
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 18 ETHERNET OUT 2B ETHERNET IN 3B 24 s s
s
5 7
s
5 7 ETHERNET OUT 4A 4
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 8 ETHERNET OUT 1A ETHERNET OUT 4B 5 P691 GDL 69 SERIES
ETHERNET IN 2B 31 9 ETHERNET OUT 1B ETHERNET IN 4A 13 23 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 6 ETHERNET IN 1A ETHERNET IN 4B 14 22 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 7 ETHERNET IN 1B s
25 ETHERNET OUT 1A
s s
24 ETHERNET OUT 1B
s
GTS 8XX P8001 5 7
9
s s
GARMIN WEATHER
RADAR GWX 68GWX 70 GWX 75
P400 P751 P27000 26 ETHERNET IN 2B
5 7 27 ETHERNET IN 2A
ETHERNET IN A 34 4 4 9
28 ETHERNET OUT 2B
ETHERNET IN B 35 3 3 29 ETHERNET OUT 2A
ETHERNET OUT A 36 23 23 s
ETHERNET OUT B 37 22 22
s 11 11
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 GTN 6XX/7XX (GPS #2) ADS-B IN SOURCE
P6201 P1002 8 P1002 GDL 88 GTX 345
P881 P3252
ETHERNET IN 2B 31 9 ETHERNET OUT 1B ETHERNET OUT 4B 5 ETHERNET IN 2A
ETHERNET IN 2A 8 ETHERNET OUT 1A ETHERNET OUT 4A 4 70 9
30 ETHERNET IN 2B
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 7 ETHERNET IN 1B ETHERNET IN 4B 14 71 4
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 6 ETHERNET IN 1A ETHERNET IN 4A 13
s s s 73 3 ETHERNET OUT 2B
s
5 7
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 17 ETHERNET OUT 2A ETHERNET OUT 3A 25 51 7 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 18 ETHERNET OUT 2B ETHERNET OUT 3B 26 52 2 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 15 ETHERNET IN 2A ETHERNET IN 3A 23 53 6 ETHERNET OUT 1A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 s
16 ETHERNET IN 2B ETHERNET IN 3B 24 54 1 ETHERNET OUT 1B
s s s

Sheet 11 of 12

Rev. V Page F-141
NOTES

4
DOCUMENTATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
5 REFER TO SECTION 2.5.25 FOR HSDB ARCHITECTURE REQUIREMENTS.
IF A GDL 69 SERIES LRU IS NOT INSTALLED, THE GTS 8XX AND GWX SHOULD STILL BE CONNECTED
6
DIRECTLY TO THE GTN 6XX/7XX.
HSDB PORT SELECTIONS SHOWN ARE SUGGESTIONS – ANY FREE HSDB PORT ON AN LRU MAY BE USED
8 UNLESS SPECIFICALLY REQUIRED BY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION DOCUMENTATION.
ETHERNET PORT 2, 3, OR 4 MAY BE USED. FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS, REFER TO THE GDL 69
9 INSTALLATION MANUAL
THIS ARCHITECTURE IS PREFERRED BECAUSE THE LOSS OF A SINGLE LRU WILL NOT RESULT IN
10 COMPLETE LOSS OF WEATHER INFORMATION IN THE COCKPIT.
ANY AVAILABLE ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED. FOR ETHERNET PORT SETTINGS, REFER TO THE LRU
11 TSO INSTALLATION MANUAL.
12 THE GTS 8XX MUST NOT BE DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO THE GTX 345.

Sheet 12 of 12

Rev. V Page F-142
$8723,/27±$WWLWXGH6RXUFH5HSODFHPHQW
*$50,1 $8723,/27
*$'H
CENTURY
4 5 Century Century Century Century
21 31 41 2000
3
CD186 CD200 CD184 CD220
3,7&+'&287 - 22 36 32 PITCH SIG

10 52//'&287 11 24 42 44 ROLL SIG
'&5(),1 5 23 27 17 ROLL REF
6
$8723,/27',6&211(&7±&(1785<Z'LVFRQQHFW6ZLWFK
*$50,1 $8723,/27
*$'H CENTURY
4 5 Century
21
3
CD186
7 CD194
NO 22 11 11 4 A/P DISC SW
AP INTERLOCK
NC 21 12 12 6 A/P DISC GND
RELAY COM 5
A/P DISC SW
(OPT. EXISTING)
$8723,/27',6&211(&7±&(1785<ZR'LVFRQQHFW6ZLWFK
*$50,1 $8723,/27
*$'H CENTURY
4 5 Century
21
3
CD186
8 CD194
AP INTERLOCK
RELAY COM 5
Figure F-39 GAD 43/43e – Century Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. V Page F-143
$8723,/27',6&211(&7±&(1785<
*$50,1 $8723,/27
*$'H CENTURY
4 5 Century Century
31 41
3
CD200 CD184
9 CD189
NO 22 3 3 19 38 A/P DISC SW
AP INTERLOCK
NC 21 5 5 28 60 A/P DISC GND
RELAY COM 5
A/P DISC SW
TRIM CMD (OPT. EXIST.)
A/P DISC
$8723,/27',6&211(&7±&(1785<
*$50,1 $8723,/27
*$'H CENTURY
4 5 Century
2000
3
CD221
9 CD189
AP INTERLOCK
RELAY COM 5
A/P DISC SW
TRIM CMD (OPT. EXIST.)
A/P DISC
NOTES
AT GAD 43, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE
3 LESS THAN 3.0" INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH AS SHORT A
4 FOR GAD 43 SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.
5 WHEN INTERFACING WITH CENTURY AUTOPILOTS, GAD 43 P/N 011-01970-00 CANNOT BE USED.
6 EXISTING AUTOPILOT WIRING SHOWN IN WITH DASHED LINES FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. V Page F-144
NOTES CONTINUED
IF OPTIONAL A/P DISC SWITCH IS INSTALLED, REMOVE THE EXISTING CONDUCTOR FROM CD194 - 11 AND
7
CONNECT TO THE GAD 43 INTERLOCK RELAY WIRING AS SHOWN.
IF OPTIONAL A/P DISC SWITCH IS NOT INSTALLED, REMOVE JUMPER BETWEEN CD194 PINS 11 AND 12
8 AND INSTALL WIRING TO THE GAD 43 INTERLOCK RELAY AS SHOWN.
REMOVE THE EXISTING CONDUCTOR FROM CD189 - 3 AND CONNECT TO THE GAD 43 INTERLOCK RELAY
9 AS SHOWN.
GAD 43( ) PINS P431-13, 27, AND -29 REQUIRE DOUBLE SHIELDED CABLE, PER MIL-C-27500, WHEN THE
GAD 43( ) IS INSTALLED IN A NOSE AVIONICS BAY THAT IS PROTECTED ENTIRELY BY A FIBERGLASS
FAIRING WITH NO METALLIC MESH. THE EXTRA SHIELD IS NOT REQUIRED IF THE AVIONICS BAY IS
PROTECTED BY A CARBON FIBER FAIRING OR METAL STRUCTURE WITH FIBERGLASS ACCESS PANELS.
10

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. V Page F-145
Meggitt (S-TEC/Cobham) Engine Instrumentation Display System
GARMIN GDU 620 #1 DATA ACQUISITION UNIT

MEGGITT
2 DAU
3 P6203 J3 J2
ARINC 429 OUT 2A (3A/4A) 1 (2/3) - 4 429 INC A
ARINC 429 OUT 2B (3B/4B) 23 (24/25) - 17 429 INC B
s
4 GPS 1/2 SOURCE* n* 20 - GPS SOURCE SELECT

(DISC OUT N*)
GARMIN GDU 620 #2

2
3 P6203
ARINC 429 OUT 2A (3A/4A) 1 (2/3) 4 - 429 IND A
ARINC 429 OUT 2B (3B/4B) 23 (24/25) 17 - 429 IND B
s
EMCA Stick Pusher and Warntone Generator
GARMIN GDU 620 #1 STALL PROTECTION

EMCA WARNING UNIT #1
2 SPWG
P620x 7 P411
ARINC 429 IN NA x 16 ARINC 429 OUT A (AOA)
6 ARINC 429 IN NB y 17 ARINC 429 OUT B (AOA)
s
s
GARMIN GDU 620 #2

2
P620x 7
ARINC 429 IN NA x
6 ARINC 429 IN NB y
s
Figure F-40 Miscellaneous Equipment Interfaces

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-146
NOTES
2 FOR GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.19.
IF AN AUTOPILOT IS CONNECTED TO ARINC 429 OUT 2, THE WIRING TO THE MEGGITT EIDS MAY NOT BE
3 SPLICED INTO THE ARINC 429 OUT 2 PORT.
NO DISCRETE OUTPUT IS ASSIGNED BY DEFAULT. AN UNUSED ACTIVE-LOW DISCRETE OUTPUT MUST BE

4 CONFIGURED FOR THIS FUNCTION. FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE DISCRETE OUTPUTS,
REFER TO SECTION 5.5.9.
THE GPS 1/2 SOURCE* ACTIVE-LOW DISCRETE, WIRED AS SHOWN, SYNCHRONIZES THE SELECTION OF
NAVIGATION SYSTEM 1 OR 2 ON THE PFD WITH THE DISPLAY OF GPS 1 OR 2 PARAMETERS ON THE EIDS.
5
WIRING FROM THE NAVIGATOR TO THE EIDS FOR GPS DATA IS NOT COVERED UNDER THIS STC.
6 (INPUTS 4-8 ONLY) MUST BE ASSIGNED TO THIS FUNCTION AND SET TO “FAST/SLOW 1, LOW SPEED. FOR
DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429 INPUTS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1.
7 GDU 620 CONNECTORS MUST BE OVERBRAIDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPENDIX SECTION N.2.
Figure F-40 Miscellaneous Equipment Interfaces

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-147
S-TEC
AUTOPILOT
60 PSS 60-2 65 55 55X

GAD 43e PFGC
OPTION
PFGC
OPTION
PFGC
OPTION
P2 P2
P432 CONN. CONN. CONN.
VS CMD 17 - 5 - 5 - 5 22 22 VS CMD
VS SELECT CTRL* 34 54 - 54 - 54 - 21 21 MANUAL / VS SELECT
ALT HOLD* 53 - 7 - 7 - 7 20 20 ALT ENGAGE
- - - - - - 23 23 ALT. SEL JUMPER
3 - - - - - - 42 42 GROUND
4 4 4
EXISTING
AP DISC SW 30
DISC. WIRING
AUTOPILOT
AVIONICS BUS
PILOT 5A
A/P DISC
TRIM INTR.
CO-PILOT SWITCHES
(EXISTING)
NOTES
3 JUMPER MUST BE INSTALLED TO SELECT S-TEC 0140 / 01279PX ALTITUDE/VERTICAL SPEED SELECTOR.
4 OPTION CONNECTOR IS PART OF THE S-TEC AUTOPILOT HARNESS.
Figure F-41 GAD 43e S-TEC Autopilot Interconnect

Rev. V Page F-148
GAD 43e
4 5 P432
HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING) COLLINS VHF NAV RADIO #1
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 43
6
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 44 KN 53 KX 170B
KX 175B KX 155A/165A KX 155/165 VIR-32/33
s
P433 P532 P171 P155A1 P155A2

P165A1 P165A2 P401 P901 P1 P2
VOR/LOC COMPOSITE #1 HI 1 B 3 H - H - - 24 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT

VOR/LOC COMPOSITE #1 LO 2 15 GND GND - GND - - 26 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT LO
s
7 7 7
GLIDESLOPE #1 +UP 6 P - - 15 / S - 15 / S 5 - GS DEVIATION +UP
GLIDESLOPE #1 +DOWN 7 14 - - 16 / T - 16 / T 1 - GS DEVIATION + DOWN
s
9
GLIDESLOPE #1 +FLAG 25 13 - - 17 / U - 17 / U 9 - GS +FLAG
GLIDESLOPE #1 -FLAG 26 R - - 14 / R - 14 / R 13 - GS -FLAG
s
8 8
GLIDESLOPE #1 VALID OUT 21 12 4 8 - 8 - - 40 ILS ENERGIZE
- 19 - - - - - - ILS COMMON
P432
GLIDESLOPE #1 VALID IN 48 10 10 10
ILS ENERGIZE #1 IN* 46
HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING) COLLINS VHF NAV RADIO #2

KN 53 KX 170B
KX 175B KX 155A/165A KX 155/165 VIR-32/33
P433 P532 P171 P155A1 P155A2

P165A1 P165A2 P401 P901 P1 P2
VOR/LOC COMPOSITE #2 HI 3 B 3 H - H - - 24 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT

VOR/LOC COMPOSITE #2 LO 4 15 GND GND - GND - - 26 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT LO
s
7 7 7
GLIDESLOPE #2 +UP 8 P - - 15 / S - 15 / S 5 - GS DEVIATION +UP
GLIDESLOPE #2 +DOWN 9 14 - - 16 / T - 16 / T 1 - GS DEVIATION + DOWN
s
9
GLIDESLOPE #2 +FLAG 23 13 - - 17 / U - 17 / U 9 - GS +FLAG
GLIDESLOPE #2 -FLAG 24 R - - 14 / R - 14 / R 13 - GS -FLAG
s
8 8
GLIDESLOPE #2 VALID OUT 19 12 4 8 - 8 - - 40 ILS ENERGIZE
- 19 - - - - - - ILS COMMON
P432
GLIDESLOPE #2 VALID IN 49 10 10 10
ILS ENERGIZE #2 IN* 47
Figure F-42 GAD 43e Navigation Receiver (Analog) Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-149
NOTES
NO SPECIFIC CONFIGURATION IS REQUIRED FOR THE GAD 43e. HOWEVER, THE GAD 43e MUST BE
4
CALIBRATED TO THE SPECIFIC RECEIVER. FOR MORE INFORMATION, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.14.3.
THE GDU 620 MUST BE CONFIGURED TO USE “GAD 43e” FOR NAV1 AND/OR NAV 2 (AS APPLICABLE). FOR
5 GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.
VHF NAVIGATION INFORMATION IS SENT FROM THE GAD 43e TO THE GDU 620 OVER AN ARINC 429
6 INTERFACE. THIS DATA MAY BE PROVIDED TO ONE OR BOTH GDUs IN A DUAL GDU INSTALLATION. FOR
ARINC 429 WIRING INFORMATION, REFER TO FIGURE F-27.
THE NAV RECEIVER DOES NOT PROVIDE A VLOC COMPOSITE LO PIN. CONNECT THE VLOC COMPOSITE
7
LO WIRE TO GROUND AT THE NAV RECEIVER.
KX155/165 NAV UNITS HAVE DUAL GLIDESLOPE OUTPUTS. USE “NUMBERED” OR LETTERED PINS, NOT
8 BOTH. WHENEVER POSSIBLE, USE AN UNUSED SET OF PINS.
KX 170B / KX 175B DO NOT HAVE A GLIDESLOPE OUTPUT. USE A SEPARATE GLIDESLOPE RECEIVER TO
9 DRIVE THESE INPUTS ON THE GAD 43e.
GLIDESLOPE CONNECTIONS ARE ONLY REQUIRED IF THE NAV RECEIVER CONTAINS THE OPTIONAL
10 GLIDESLOPE RECEIVER.
Figure F-42 GAD 43e Navigation Receiver (Analog) Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-150
GARMIN RADAR ALTIMETER
GAD 43e
HONEYWELL
5 P432 SPERRY (BENDIX/KING) Collins
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 43 AA-100A AA-100 KRA 405 KRA 10/ ALT-50A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 4 AA-200 (RT-100A) (RT-100) KRA 10A ALT-55B
44
s 20J1 A4J1 A4J1 P4051 P1001 P1
RAD ALT VALID IN 9 Y - - S 6 49 RAD ALT VALID
P433
RADAR ALTITUDE IN HI 15 N D D B 2 57 ANALOG RADALT HI
RADAR ALTITUDE IN LO 16 W B H g 12 59 ANALOG RADALT LO
s
9 10
GARMIN
GDU 620 #1 5 6
P6203 11
RAD ALT PUSH-TO-TEST*
n T G G U 7 25 SELF TEST IN
8 (DISC OUT N*)
NC - - - H - - TEST AID
GARMIN
GDU 620 #2 5 6
(IF INSTALLED)
P6203
RAD ALT PUSH-TO-TEST
n
8 (DISC OUT N)
7
Figure F-43 GAD 43e Radar Altimeter (Analog) Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page F-151
NOTES
AT GAD 43E AND GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD
3 LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND
WITH AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
RADAR ALTITUDE INFORMATION IS SENT FROM THE GAD 43e TO THE GDU 620 OVER AN ARINC 429
4 INTERFACE. THIS DATA MAY BE PROVIDED TO ONE OR BOTH GDUs IN A DUAL GDU INSTALLATION. FOR
ARINC 429 WIRING INFORMATION, REFER TO FIGURE F-28.
5 FOR GAD 43E AND GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.
6 IF DUAL GDU 620s ARE INSTALLED, THE RADAR ALTIMETER MUST BE ENABLED ON BOTH GDU 620s.
CONNECTION TO RADAR ALTIMETER CAN BE MADE TO BOTH GDUs, AS SHOWN, OR ONLY CONNECTED
TO ONE GDU (EITHER PILOT’S OR CO-PILOT’S) AND RADAR ALTITUDE SELF-TEST CONTROL
7 CROSSFILLED TO THE OTHER GDU. DIRECT CONNECTION TO EACH GDU IS PREFERRED. CROSSFILL
OPTION SHOULD ONLY BE USED IF THERE ARE AN INSUFFICIENT NUMBER OF GDU ARINC 429 INPUTS TO
SUPPORT ALL ARINC 429 INTERFACES IN A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.
8 MUST BE ASSIGNED TO THIS FUNCTION. FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE DISCRETE
OUTPUTS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.9.
THE HI AND LOW OUTPUTS ARE REVERSED IN ORDER TO ALLOW THE GAD 43e TO CORRECTLY
9 INTERPRET THE ANALOG VOLTAGE BEING OUTPUT BY THE AA-200.
10 A4J1 PIN B IS LOW SIDE OF DH POTENTIOMETER.
11 KRA 405 TEST WILL DISPLAY 25-50 FT.
Figure F-43 GAD 43e Radar Altimeter (Analog) Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page F-152
Honeywell (Bendix King) – Serial Tuning
NAV 1
6
CLOCK BUS
DATA BUS
RNAV CHNL RQST
DME COMMON
NAV 2
6
CLOCK BUS
DATA BUS
RNAV CHNL RQST
DME COMMON
GARMIN DME TRANSCEIVER

GAD 43e KDM 706(A) KN 63
4 P432 P7061 P631
DME CLK HI 60 8 F CLOCK BUS
s
DME DATA HI 62 9 6 DATA BUS
s
DME RNAV RQST 42
s 20 11 POWER ON
DME COM NAV 1* 35
DME COM NAV 2* 36
DME HOLD 52 12 E HOLD
DME RQST HI 40 24 D DME REQ
s
DME CLK LO 61
DME DATA LO 63
DME RQST LO 41
GROUND 64
Figure F-44 GAD 43e DME Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 5

Rev. V Page F-153
Honeywell (Bendix King) – Parallel Tuning
DME TRANSCEIVER
GARMIN KDM 706(A) KN 63
GAD 43e P7061 P631
4 P432 20 11 POWER ON
DME CLK HI 60 8 F CLOCK BUS
s
DME DATA HI 62 9 6 DATA BUS
s
DME RQST HI 40 24 D DME REQ
s
DME HOLD 52 12 E HOLD
DME CLK LO 61
DME DATA LO 63
DME RQST LO 41
GROUND 64 NAV 1
6 7
DME COM NAV 1* 35 DME COMMON
DME EXT TUNE M8/MA/M0 65
DME EXT TUNE M4/ME/M1 66
DME EXT TUNE M2/MC/M2 67
DME EXT TUNE M1/MD/M3 68 SHIFTED BCD, 2x5
DME EXT TUNE K800/KA/K0 69 OR SLIP CODE
DME EXT TUNE K400/KE/K1 70 TUNING FORMAT
DME EXT TUNE K200/KC/K2 71
DME EXT TUNE K100/KD/K3 72
DME EXT TUNE K50 IN 50
10 11 12
11 NAV 2
12
6 7
SHIFTED BCD, 2x5

OR SLIP CODE
TUNING FORMAT
DME COM NAV 2* 36 DME COMMON

Sheet 2 of 5

Rev. V Page F-154
Honeywell (Bendix King) KN 62/64
GARMIN DME
GAD 43e (KN 62/64)
P621/
4 P432 P641
DME CLK HI 60 14 CLOCK BUS
s
DME DATA HI 62 13 DATA BUS

s
DME RQST HI 40 N DME REQ

s
DME CLK LO 61
DME DATA LO 63
DME RQST LO 41
GROUND 64
Collins DME-442/4000
DME
(ARINC 429)
COLLINS
GARMIN 13
DME-442 DME-4000
GAD 43e
P1 P1
4
P432
DME ARINC 429 IN A 23 31/39 1/23 429 SERIAL DATA 1a/1b A
DME ARINC 429 IN B 24 30/38 2/24 429 SERIAL DATA 1a/1b B
s 29/37
Collins DME-42 (CSDB Tuning)

GARMIN DME
GAD 43e (DME-42)
4 P432 P1 8
DME CLK HI 60 23 CLOCK HI

DME CLK LO 61 24 CLOCK LO
s 21 SHIELD
DME DATA HI 62 31 DATA HI
DME DATA LO 63 30 DATA LO
s 29 SHIELD
DME SYNC IN HI 40 39 SYNC HI
DME SYNC IN LO 41 38 SYNC LO
s 37 SHIELD
9 9 CH 1/2 ANALOG 6-WIRE SELECT
7 STRAPPING COMMON
48 SERIAL/PARALLEL TUNE SEL

Sheet 3 of 5

Rev. V Page F-155
Collins DME-42 (Parallel Tuning)
GARMIN DME
GAD 43e (DME-42)
4 P432 P1 8
DME CLK HI 60 23 CLOCK HI

DME CLK LO 61 24 CLOCK LO
s 21 SHIELD
DME DATA HI 62 31 DATA HI
DME DATA LO 63 30 DATA LO
s 29 SHIELD
DME SYNC IN HI 40 39 SYNC HI
DME SYNC IN LO 41 38 SYNC LO
s 37 SHIELD
DME COM NAV 1* 35
11
DME COM NAV 2* 36 42 R/T FREQ COMMON
9 CH 1/2 ANALOG 6-WIRE SELECT
9 7 STRAPPING COMMON
N/C 48 SERIAL/PARALLEL TUNE SEL
NAV 1 52 10 MHZ-A
7 6 51 10 MHZ-E
6 GROUND
DME COMMON
2x5 2x5
TUNING FORMAT TUNING FORMAT
OUTPUT` INPUT
12 11
NAV 2 11
12
7 6
2x5
TUNING FORMAT
OUTPUT
DME COMMON

Sheet 4 of 5

Rev. V Page F-156
NOTES
4 FOR GAD 43e AND GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.14.2.
IF DUAL GDU 620s ARE INSTALLED, ALL CONFIGURATION IS DONE ON GDU 620 #1. DME DATA IS
5 AUTOMATICALLY CROSS-FILLED TO GDU 620 #2.
IF ONLY ONE NAV RADIO IS USED TO TUNE THE DME, THE RADIO MUST BE CONNECTED AS NAV 1 OR
6
NAV 2, AS APPROPRIATE FOR THE INSTALLATION.
7 BOTH NAV RADIOS MUST USE THE SAME PARALLEL TUNING FORMAT.
DME-42 CAN ONLY BE TUNED BY A SINGLE NAV RADIO (NAV 1 OR NAV 2) IF CSDB TUNING IS UTILIZED IN
8 THE INSTALLATION.
LEAVE P1-7 AND P1-9 OPEN IF IT IS DESIRED TO DISPLAY INFORMATION FROM DME CHANNEL 1 (NAV 1).
9 CONNECT P1-7 TO P1-9 IF IT IS DESIRED TO DISPLAY INFORMATION FROM DME CHANNEL 2 (NAV 2).
10 DME EXTERNAL TUNING LABELS ARE ORDERED BCD / 2x5 / SLIP CODE.
11 DIODE TO BE 1N4007.
IF TUNING SOURCE 1 / 2 HAS INTERNAL ISOLATION DIODES, THE EXTERNAL ISOLATION DIODES SHOWN
12 ARE NOT REQUIRED.
13 DME CH 1 MUST BE TUNED BY NAV 1, AND CH 2 MUST BE TUNED BY NAV 2.

Sheet 5 of 5

Rev. V Page F-157
MARKER BEACON
GARMIN HONEYWELL RECEIVER
COLLINS GARMIN PS ENGINEERING
3 VIR-32/33 GMA 340 GMA 35(c) GMA 347 PMA6000 KMA 24

PMA7000 PMA8000 KMA 28 KMA 26
GMA 350(c)
P432 J1 J1 J3501 J3472 Bottom J1 Bottom P261
INNER MKR EXT LAMP IN 8 16 36 36 74 C 36 C 31 INNER MKR LAMP OUT

MIDDLE MKR EXT LAMP IN 7 15 38 38 75 4 38 4 15 MIDDLE MKR LAMP OUT
OUTER MKR EXT LAMP IN 6 12 37 37 76 5 37 5 14 OUTER MKR LAMP OUT
NOTES
NO SPECIFIC CONFIGURATION IS REQUIRED FOR THE GAD 43e IN ORDER TO PROVIDE MARKER BEACON
3 ANNUNCIATIONS ON THE GDU 620.
Figure F-45 GAD 43e Marker Beacon Receiver Interconnect

Rev. V Page F-158
AUTOPILOT – Attitude Source Replacement for Cessna 1000A
Computers -0002, -0102, -0005, -0105
AUTOPILOT
CESSNA 1000A
-0002, -0102 Computers -0005, -0105 Computers
A/P A/P
Cntrl Unit Air Data Cntrl Unit Air Data
Comp. Comp.
GARMIN CA-1050A
C-1050A AC-1050A
CA-1050A
C-1050A AC-1050A
4
GAD 43
J2 J3 J4 J1 J1 J2 J3 J4 J1 J1
P431
PITCH AC OUT HI 24 - - - 11 - - - - 11 - PITCH IN
PITCH AC OUT LO 42 - - - GND - - - - GND -
s
- 16 - 12 - - 16 - 12 - PITCH/ROLL TEST 5
ROLL AC OUT HI 23 - 3 - - - - 3 - - - ROLL IN
ROLL AC OUT LO 25 - GND - - - - GND - - -
s
26 VAC REF IN HI 39 - - - - - - - - - 23 26 V, 400 Hz
26 VAC LO 34 - - - - - - - - - 25 26 V, 400 Hz Rtn
s 11
6 {
10 VAC REF IN HI 9 - - - - 24 - - - - - 10 V, 400 Hz
10 VAC LO 10 - - - - 25 - - - - - 10 V, 400 Hz Rtn
s 11
NO 3 22 AWG 18 - - - - 18 - - - - ENGAGE INTLK
ATTITUDE
VALID RELAY 10
COM 20 22 AWG - - 37 - - - - 37 - - GYRO VALID
Existing
Actuator
Interlock
Circuitry
ENGAGE
INTERLOCKS
Figure F-46 GAD 43/43e Cessna Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 6

Rev. V Page F-159
AUTOPILOT – Attitude Source Replacement for Cessna 1000A
Computers -0001 and -0004
AUTOPILOT
CESSNA 1000A
-0001 Computer -0004 Computer
A/P A/P
Cntrl Unit Air Data Cntrl Unit Air Data
Comp. Comp.
GARMIN CA-1050A
C-1050A AC-1050A
CA-1050A
C-1050A AC-1050A
4
GAD 43
J2 J3 J4 J1 J1 J2 J3 J4 J1 J1
P431
PITCH AC OUT HI 24 - 16 - - - - 16 - - - PITCH IN
PITCH AC OUT LO 42 - GND - - - - GND - - -
s
- 3 - 13 - - 3 - 13 - PITCH/ROLL TEST 5
ROLL AC OUT HI 23 - - - 11 - - - - 11 - ROLL IN
ROLL AC OUT LO 25 - - - GND - - - - GND -
s
26 VAC REF IN HI 39 - - - - - - - - - 23 26 V, 400 Hz
26 VAC LO 34 - - - - - - - - - 25 26 V, 400 Hz Rtn
s 11
6 {
10 VAC REF IN HI 9 - - - - 24 - - - - - 10 V, 400 Hz
10 VAC LO 10 - - - - 25 - - - - - 10 V, 400 Hz Rtn
s 11
NO 3 22 AWG 18 - - - - 18 - - - - ENGAGE INTLK
ATTITUDE
VALID RELAY 10
COM 20 22 AWG - - 37 - - - - 37 - - GYRO VALID
Existing
Actuator
Interlock
Circuitry
ENGAGE
INTERLOCKS

Sheet 2 of 6

Rev. V Page F-160
AUTOPILOT – Attitude Source Replacement
Cessna 300B/400B/800B IFCS (Type IF-550A)
CESSNA AUTOPILOT
300B/400B/
800B IFCS
GARMIN 7 Computer Mode

4 Amplifier Selector
GAD 43 CA-550A/FD S-550A
P431 ATTITUDE
J1 J2 J2
TEST SWITCH
PITCH AC OUT HI 24 C
s NC - 15 - PITCH IN
6
NO
7 - - PITCH/ROLL TEST
ROLL AC OUT HI 23 - 4 - ROLL IN

ROLL AC OUT LO 25
s
10 VAC REF H 9 33 - - 400 HZ REF H
10 VAC REF C 10 19 - - 400 HZ RETURN
s 11
6 {
NO 3 - - 3 A/P DISABLE IN
ATTITUDE
VALID RELAY 8
COM 20 NC - 32 - 400 Hz Ext Osc
EXISTING A/P
DISABLE IN 9

Sheet 3 of 6

Rev. V Page F-161
AUTOPILOT – Attitude Source Replacement
Cessna 400B (Type AF-550A)
CESSNA AUTOPILOT
400B
Computer Control
GARMIN 7 Amplifier Unit
4 CA-550A/FD C-530A
GAD 43
P431 ATTITUDE
TEST SWITCH J1 J2 J1 J2
PITCH AC OUT HI 24 C
s NC - - L - PITCH IN
6
NO
7 - - - PITCH/ROLL TEST
ROLL AC OUT HI 23 - 4 - - ROLL IN

ROLL AC OUT LO 25
s
10 VAC REF H 9 33 - - - 400 HZ REF H

10 VAC REF C 10 19 - - - 400 HZ RETURN
s 11
6 {
NO 3 - - - A A/P DISABLE IN
ATTITUDE
VALID RELAY 8
COM 20 - 32 - - 400 Hz Ext Osc
NC
EXISTING A/P 9
DISABLE IN
Sheet 4 of 6

Rev. V Page F-162
AUTOPILOT – AA-801 Replacement
1000A IFCS
ONLY 6
GARMIN 12 AUTOPILOT
TO EXISTING
GAD 43e AIRCRAFT WIRING
4 23.7 K
Cessna 1000A IFCS Cessna 300B/400B/800B
½ WATT IFCS
C-1050A CA-1050A/FD CA-550/FD S-550A
Control Unit Comp. Amp Comp. Amp Mode Sel
P432 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1
AP 31 4 -- -- 34 -- AP ENG
ALT HOLD ENG* 13 -- 24 23 -- 24 ALT HOLD ENG
FD 30 -- 37 -- 33 19 FD ENG
GA+GS* 48 -- 9 -- -- 15 PSA INHIBIT
ALT PRESELECT ENGAGE 34 -- 29 -- -- 17 PSA ENG
NOTES
AT GAD 43/43e, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD
3 GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
4 FOR GAD 43/43e SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.14.
5 WIRING SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. RETAIN EXISTING TEST WIRING BETWEEN COMPUTER AND CONTROL UNIT AS SHOWN.
6 SPLICE INTO EXISTING AIRCRAFT WIRING AS SHOWN. DASHED LINES SHOW EXISTING WIRING FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

Sheet 5 of 6

Rev. V Page F-163
NOTES CONTINUED
PITCH ATTITUDE TEST SWITCH NOT USED IN ALL INSTALLATIONS. FOR INSTALLATIONS THAT USE AN
7 ACCELERATION SENSOR TEST SWITCH CIRCUIT, THE GAD “PITCH AC OUT HI” PIN MUST BE DIRECTLY
CONNECTED TO THE DEPICTED “PITCH INPUT” PIN ON THE AUTOPILOT.
REMOVE EXISTING WIRING FROM THE “A/P DISABLE IN” PIN AND CONNECT THIS REMOVED WIRING TO
8 THE GAD “ATTITUDE VALID RELAY COM” PIN.
PIN 32 MUST BE UNCONNECTED FOR ALL INSTALLATIONS. IF A G-895A INDICATOR WAS PREVIOUSLY
9 INSTALLED, VERIFY THAT WIRING ON PIN 32 IS REMOVED.
GAD ATTITUDE VALID RELAY BECOMES PART OF EXISTING INTERLOCK CIRCUIT AS DEPICTED. SPLICE
10 INTO EXISTING ACTUATOR INTERLOCK WIRING AS DEPICTED. GAD ATTITUDE VALID RELAY IS REQUIRED
FOR ALL INSTALLATIONS, EVEN IF PREVIOUS GYRO DID NOT UTILIZE GYRO VALID CIRCUIT (E.G.,
G-519/550). TO ENSURE THAT ACTUATOR INTERLOCK CIRCUIT IS PROPERLY RETAINED, REFER TO
AIRCRAFT WIRING DIAGRAMS.
GAD 43( ) P431-9, -10, -34, -37, AND -39 REQUIRE DOUBLE SHIELDED CABLE, PER MIL-C-27500, WHEN THE
GAD 43( ) IS INSTALLED IN A NOSE AVIONICS BAY THAT IS PROTECTED ENTIRELY BY A FIBERGLASS
11 FAIRING WITH NO METALLIC MESH. THE EXTRA SHIELD IS NOT REQUIRED IF THE AVIONICS BAY IS
PROTECTED BY A CARBON FIBER FAIRING OR METAL STRUCTURE WITH FIBERGLASS ACCESS PANELS.
IF PINS P431-34 AND P431-37 ARE GROUNDED TO AIRCRAFT GROUND, GROUNDS MUST BE LESS THAN 18
INCHES.
12 SPLICE PULL-UP RESISTOR TO AIRCRAFT POWER 1. REFER TO FIGURE F-27, P431 PIN 49.

Sheet 6 of 6

Rev. V Page F-164
GDU 620 INTERCONNECT – GFC 600 (GMC 605)
GDU 620 GMC 605
(MODE CONTROLLER)
P6201 P6051
7
5 ETHERNET IN 2B 31 47 ETHERNET OUT 2B HSDB
6 ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 44 ETHERNET IN 2A
s s
AIR DATA
SOURCE GSU 75 GDC 74( )
P751 P741
8
21 29 21 ADC 429 IN 3A
22 30 22 ADC 429 IN 3B
NOTES
CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN
3 3.0 INCHES.
REFER TO GFC 600 AFCS PART 23 AML STC INSTALLATION MANUAL (P/N 190-01937-00) FOR COMPLETE
4 PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
5 ANY AVAILABLE ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED.
CONNECT ONLY ONE UNIT TO THE ETHERNET PORT. IF CONNECTING TO A GTN 6XX/7XX, THE GTN MUST
6 BE THE #1 UNIT.
7 USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. REFER TO SECTION 2.4.2.2 FOR PART NUMBERS.
ANY OTHER AVAILABLE ARINC 429 OUTPUT PORT ON THE SOURCE UNIT MAY BE USED. THE GMC 605
8 PORT 3 (PINS 21/22) MUST BE USED. SPLICE TO EXISTING WIRES IF NECESSARY.
Figure F-47 GDU 620 - GFC 600 (GMC 605) Interconnect

Rev. V Page F-165
GDU 620 INTERCONNECT – SINGLE G5 (ADI)
(AND GFC 500 AUTOPILOT SYSTEM )
GDU 620 PFD/MFD G A D 29(B ) 4
P6203 P292
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 1 23 ARINC 429 RX 1A 5
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 23 11 ARINC 429 RX 1B
s s
ARINC 429 OUT 3A 2 22 ARINC 429 RX 2A

6
ARINC 429 OUT 3B 24 10 ARINC 429 RX 2B
s s
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4 24 ARINC 429 TX 1A

ARINC 429 IN 7B 26 12 ARINC 429 TX 1B
s s
NOTES
CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN
3 3.0 INCHES.
REFER TO THE GARMIN G5 ELECTRONIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENT PART 23 AML STC INSTALLATION MANUAL
4 (P/N 190-01112-10) FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION.
THE GAD 29(B) MUST NOT BE INTERFACED TO A GPS/VHF NAVIGATOR WHEN INTERFACED TO THE
5 GDU 620. THE G5 RS-232 GPS MAPMX INTERFACE MUST BE CONNECTED FOR ATTITUDE AIDING FROM
NAVIGATOR #1.
6 GDU 620 ARINC OUT PORT 3 OR 4 CAN BE USED FOR THE GFC 500 NAV INTERFACE
7 FOR DUAL GDU 620 SYSTEMS, ONLY CONNECT THE GAD 29(B) TO GDU #1.
Figure F-48 Single GDU 620 - G5 (ADI)/GFC 500 Autopilot System

Rev. V Page F-166
APPENDIX G MAGNETIC INTERFERENCE SURVEY
G.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................... G-2

G.1.1 Required Materials ................................................................................................................G-2
G.2 GLS Software Installation Procedure ............................................................................................G-4
G.2.1 New MATLAB Installations ...................................................................................................G-6
G.2.2 Existing MATLAB Installations ..............................................................................................G-6
G.2.3 Completing the GLS Tool Software Installation ...................................................................G-7
G.3 Conducting the GMU 44 Location Survey ....................................................................................G-8
G.3.1 Aircraft and GMU 44 Setup ..................................................................................................G-8
G.3.2 GLS Tool Setup Procedure .................................................................................................G-10
G.3.3 GLS Tool Operation ............................................................................................................G-12
G.3.4 GLS Data Analysis Procedure .............................................................................................G-15

Rev. V Page G-1
G.1 Introduction
The Magnetic Interference Survey is used to identify a location within an aircraft with acceptable levels of
magnetic interference where the GMU 44 can be correctly installed. This appendix describes the materials,
precautions, setup, and procedures required to successfully conduct the magnetic interference survey.
G.1.1 Required Materials

The following items are required to complete the magnetic interference survey.
NOTE
Installation software may require the user to install the latest version of Windows Installer,
which can be downloaded from www.microsoft.com.
Desktop or Laptop PC
A desktop or laptop PC is required to run the GMU 44 Location Survey (GLS) software. This PC must
meet the hardware and software requirements listed in Table G-1.
Table G-1 PC Minimum Requirements
Operating System Windows 2000 SP4 or XP
Processor Speed 850 MHz
Hard Drive Free Memory 500 MB
RAM Memory 256MB
Screen Resolution 1024 x 768
CD-ROM Drive
WinZip (or equivalent file extraction utility)
NOTE
The user must have administrative rights on the PC in order to install the GLS software.
GMU 44 Location Survey Tool Software (P/N 006-A0240-00)

GMU 44 Location Survey Tool software (P/N 006-A0240-00) is required to perform the Magnetic
Interference Survey. This software is supplied as an installation package (P/N 006-A0241-00). Refer to
Appendix Section G.2 for details on installing this software. The installation package can be downloaded
under P/N 006-A0241-00 from the Garmin Dealer Resource Center.
DC Power Supply
A DC power supply capable of supplying 12 VDC/200 mA is required to supply power to the GMU 44
Magnetometer during the magnetic interference survey.
RS-232 to RS-485 Converter

An older model laptop or PC equipped with an RS-232 jack but no RS-485 jack may require a converter to
connect to the GMU 44. A suitable converter is B&B Electronics Model 422LP9R.
Stopwatch (or watch with second hand)

A stopwatch, or watch with a second hand, is required to monitor exercise start and stop times during the
survey sequence.

Rev. V Page G-2
GMU 44 Test Cable
Fabricate a test cable in accordance with either Figure G-1 or Figure G-2. The cable shown in Figure G-1
works in most cases. If the laptop or PC has an RS-232 jack but no RS-485 jack, an R2-232 to RS-485
converter and the cable shown in Figure G-2 are both required.
*08
0$*1(720(7(5
)$%5,&$7('7(67&$%/(
OHQJWKDVUHTXLUHGIWPD[
*$50,1
*08
5(' 9
QF
729'&
56,1
$:*
32:(5
932:(5,1
6833/<
32:(5*5281' $:* %/. *1'
6+,(/'*1'

7256
56287$ QF $:* &203257
56287% $:* 21/$3723
6+,(/'*1' 253&
SLQ
'VXE
- 3 IHPDOH
127(6
3,6*$50,1&211(&725.,731$/7(51$7(/<3&$1%(0$'(86,1*$1$03
&211(&72531
:,5($:*6+2:1,60,1,080:,5($:*&211(&7256:,//$&&2002'$7(8372$:*:,5(
',5(&7&211(&7,2172$/$3723253&0$<127:25.,1$//&$6(6(63(&,$//<:,7+2/'(53&V
,17+,6&$6(86(7+(&$%/(7+$7$//2:6&211(&7,21727+(3&86,1*$1567256
&219(57(5
Figure G-1 Magnetic Interference Survey Setup with Direct Connection to PC
*08
0$*1(720(7(5 )$%5,&$7('7(67&$%/(
OHQJWKDVUHTXLUHGIWPD[
*$50,1
*08
5(' 9 729'&
56,1 QF
$:*
32:(5
932:(5,1
6833/<
32:(5*5281' $:* %/. *1'
6+,(/'*1' QF
56287$
56287% 56567256
6+,(/'*1' &219(57(5
56$ 56 72&20

$:*
56%
325721
- 3 $:*
/$3723
SLQ 253&
'VXE
PDOH
3,1&211(&7,21'(3(1'(1721'(9,&(86('
FRQQHFWLRQVIRU% %/35VKRZQ
127(6
3,6*$50,1&211(&725.,731$/7(51$7(/<3&$1%(0$'(86,1*$1$03
&211(&72531
:,5($:*6+2:1,60,1,080:,5($:*&211(&7256:,//$&&2002'$7(8372$:*:,5(
$68,7$%/(&219(57(5,6% %(/(&7521,&602'(//35
Figure G-2 Magnetic Interference Survey Setup Using RS-232 to RS-485 Converter

Rev. V Page G-3
G.2 GLS Software Installation Procedure
This installation package will install the GMU 44 software on the laptop or PC used to run the GLS
software. To install the software, perform the following steps:
1. Open the folder containing the GLS installation files.
Figure G-3 GLS Tool Install Files
2. To begin the setup process, double-click the “install.bat” file.
NOTE
A DOS window similar to Figure G-4 will open and indicate the progress of the
installation. For some installations, a Windows Installer error message like the one in
Figure G-5 may appear. Before proceeding, the user must install the latest version of
Windows Installer, which can be downloaded from www.microsoft.com.
Figure G-4 Install Progress Window

Rev. V Page G-4
Figure G-5 Windows Installer Error Message
NOTE
The installation of the MATLAB Runtime environment may take several minutes.
If your computer does not already have MATLAB Runtime 7.6 installed, an InstallShield Wizard window
will appear. Proceed to the section that corresponds to the type of installation.
• If the window indicates a new installation, as shown in the green box at left in Figure G-6, proceed
to Appendix Section G.2.1
• If the window indicates modification to an existing installation, as shown in the blue box at right
in Figure G-6, proceed to Appendix Section G.2.2
• If no InstallShield Wizard window appears, proceed to Appendix Section G.2.1
Figure G-6 MATLAB Runtime 7.6 Installation or Modification

Rev. V Page G-5
G.2.1 New MATLAB Installations
For new installations, continue from the InstallShield as follows:
1. Select Next and follow the setup instructions.
NOTE
For some installations, a MATLAB Runtime error message may appear, as shown in
Figure G-7. The Garmin GLS tool does not require the software listed in the error message.
Select OK to continue installation. Select Finish. Proceed to Appendix Section G.2.3.
Figure G-7 .NET Framework Message
G.2.2 Existing MATLAB Installations

For existing installations, continue from the InstallShield as follows:
1. Select Next. The window shown in Figure G-8 will appear. Leave “Modify” selected.
2. Select Next.
3. Select Next.
4. Select Install to install the required components.
NOTE
For some installations, a MATLAB Component Runtime error message shown in
Figure G-7 above may appear. The Garmin GLS tool does not require the software listed
in the error message. Select OK to continue installation. Proceed to
Appendix Section G.2.3.
Figure G-8 Existing MATLAB Modification Window

Rev. V Page G-6
G.2.3 Completing the GLS Tool Software Installation
Figure G-9 GLS Tool Shortcut
The Install Wizard will complete the setup of the MATLAB Runtime. Select Finish and the setup wizard
will continue and install the GMU 44 Location Survey Tool software. Follow the remaining instructions
and select Finish to complete the installation. A shortcut icon similar to the one in Figure G-9 will appear
on your desktop. The GLS Tool software is now ready to use.

Rev. V Page G-7
G.3 Conducting the GMU 44 Location Survey
This section describes the setup and procedure required to successfully complete the GMU 44 Location
Survey using the GLS software tool.
G.3.1 Aircraft and GMU 44 Setup
CAUTION
Do not permanently install the GMU 44 prior to successfully completing the GMU 44
Location Survey. An unsurveyed location may be unsuitable for permanent installation
and cause the GMU 44 to function incorrectly.
NOTE
In rare instances, the GLS Tool Magnetic Survey will pass but the installation will fail the
magnetometer calibration during the post-installation checkout. This is usually due to a
constant magnetic field present in the aircraft (e.g., the aircraft structure is magnetized).
Contact Garmin for assistance if this occurs.
Prepare the aircraft and GMU 44 for the location survey by completing the following steps:
1. Prepare a detailed survey sequence list with start and stop times for exercising all aircraft
components and devices that may affect the operation of the GMU 44 Magnetometer through
movement of ferrous metal parts or electrical inductance. Aircraft components included on the list
will vary depending on aircraft model. An example survey sequence is given in Table G-2.
2. Position the aircraft in a magnetically quiet area. This step may involve repositioning large metal
objects, including aircraft and ground support equipment, away from the survey area.
3. Level the aircraft.
4. Position the GMU 44 in the aircraft location to be surveyed and secure it within ±5º of level about
the aircraft pitch and roll axes using non-ferrous materials. It is preferable (but not required) to
align the GMU 44 forward direction with the aircraft heading.

Rev. V Page G-8
Table G-2 Example Survey Sequence
A/C Reg.: _______________ Survey data file name:___________________________________
Elapsed time Elapsed time
Action
(sec) (min:sec)
0 0:00 Test begins (calibration period – no activity permitted)
20 0:20 Calibration period ends
30 0:30 Aileron full right
40 0:40 Aileron full left
50 0:50 Aileron level
60 1:00 Rudder full right
70 1:10 Rudder full left
80 1:20 Rudder neutral
90 1:30 Elevators full up
100 1:40 Elevators full down
110 1:50 Elevators neutral
120 2:00 Flaps down
140 2:20 Flaps up
160 2:40 Landing gear up
180 3:00 Landing gear down
190 3:10 Speed brake up
200 3:20 Speed brake down
210 3:30 Navigation lights on
220 3:40 Navigation lights off
230 3:50 Landing lights on
240 4:00 Landing lights off
250 4:10 Taxi lights on
260 4:20 Taxi lights off
270 4:30 Air conditioning on
280 4:40 Air conditioning off
290 4:50 Landing lights and taxi lights on
300 5:00 Landing lights and taxi lights off
310 5:10 Strobes on
320 5:20 Strobes off
330 5:30 Recognition lights on
340 5:40 Recognition lights off
350 5:50 Turn on all wingtip lights simultaneously
360 6:00 Turn off all wingtip lights simultaneously
370 6:10 Beacon on
380 6:20 Beacon off
390 6:30 Autopilot engaged in a pitch and roll mode (to engage servo clutches)
400 6:40 Autopilot disengaged.
410 6:50 Pitot heat on
420 7:00 Pitot heat off
430 7:10 End of test

Rev. V Page G-9
G.3.2 GLS Tool Setup Procedure
Set up the GLS hardware and software by completing the following steps:
1. Power up the aircraft with the standard power architecture ON (e.g., master switch, avionics bus,
etc.).
2. Connect the test harness to the correct PC COM port and a 12 VDC, 200 mA limited power supply
as shown in either Figure G-1 or Figure G-2 above.
3. Open the Garmin GLS tool by double-clicking the shortcut. The main GLS tool window, shown in
Figure G-10, will appear.
NOTE
It may be necessary to adjust your screen settings in order to display the tool screen
properly on your laptop or PC. Consult your operating software instruction manual for
instructions on how to change screen settings.
4. Select Sources under the “File” menu.

5. Select the appropriate COM port and select OK. This step is only required for the initial setup and
does not need to be completed for subsequent use of the GLS tool software.
Figure G-10 GLS Tool Main Window and Data Source Window
NOTE
The “Input File” field is a legacy software feature and is not used during normal GLS tool
operation.
6. Select Preferences under the “File” menu. In the window shown, ensure that the appropriate
installation type is selected based on the installed equipment (“Fixed Wing Installation: GRS 77
AHRS” for GRS 77 installations and “Fixed Wing Installation: GSU7X AHRS (see note below)
and GRS7800 AHRS” for GSU 75(B) installations).

Rev. V Page G-10
7. Select OK.
Figure G-11 GLS Preferences Window
NOTE
Installation type must be set appropriately based on the installed equipment. Failure to do
so will cause the GLS Tool to produce erroneous survey results.
When the correct COM port is selected, and power is applied to the GMU 44, the GLS tool will begin
displaying real-time magnetic interference data in a graph set like the one in Figure G-12. The window
displays interference data in two columns. The left column shows all data points after the most recent reset.
The right column displays deviation data points from the past 5 seconds. Percentage and milliGauss value
vertical scales will automatically adjust throughout GLS tool operation.
$5HODWLYHPDJQHWLFLQWHUIHUHQFHDVDSHUFHQWDJHRIPD[LPXPDOORZDEOHLQWHUIHUHQFH
%$EVROXWHPDJQHWLFLQWHUIHUHQFHDERXWWKHDLUFUDIW;<DQG=D[HV
Figure G-12 Real Time Magnetic Interference Graph Set

Rev. V Page G-11
G.3.3 GLS Tool Operation
Before beginning the survey, ensure that all items listed on the test sequence are in their pre-exercise states
(e.g., control surfaces neutral, flaps up, lights off). Perform the survey by completing the following steps:
NOTE
It is recommended that the magnetic interference survey be conducted by a team of two
people. The first person, stationed at the PC, operates the GLS software and calls out
survey sequence exercises. The second person, stationed in the aircraft cockpit, performs
the exercises.
NOTE
Ensure that the aircraft is not disturbed for the first 20 seconds of the Magnetic
Interference Survey. Magnetometer tilt is calibrated during this critical period and
aircraft or operator motion may cause the GLS tool to incorrectly report magnetic
interference or magnetometer tilt.
1. Select F4 Strt Suvy on the left side of the raw data window, or press F4 on the PC keyboard, to
begin recording data. This will initiate a 20-second calibration process accompanied by a count
down timer at the bottom of the raw data window (circled in green on Figure G-13) as well as a
periodic chime sound. As the calibration period ends, upper and lower magnetic interference
threshold lines will appear in each of the graphs, as shown in Figure G-14.
Figure G-13 Survey Initiation

Rev. V Page G-12
,17(5)(5(1&(
7+5(6+2/'
/,1(6
0,1,0,=($,5&5$)7
',6785%$1&(6
'85,1*7+,63(5,2'
Figure G-14 Graphical Display of GMU 44 GLS Calibration Period
2. After the calibration period ends, perform each exercise on the survey sequence sheet.
Perform each exercise at its specified elapsed time and for its specified duration. This will help ensure
correct identification of magnetic field deviation sources after the survey is complete.
3. Monitor the magnetic field deviation on each axis throughout the survey.

Rev. V Page G-13
If relative or absolute deviation levels exceed thresholds, mark the survey sequence exercises during which
these deviations occurred. Interference caused by aircraft component exercises will appear in the real time
data graphs, similar to the example shown in Figure G-15. Acceptable interference examples are circled in
green, while interference that exceeded thresholds is circled in red.
4. When all exercises in the survey sequence have been completed, select F6 Save Data on the left
side of the raw data window, or press F6 on the PC keyboard, to stop recording data.
5. Save the data file when prompted.
6. Record the data file name on the test sequence sheet.
Figure G-15 Real Time Display of Magnetic Interference Events

Rev. V Page G-14
G.3.4 GLS Data Analysis Procedure
To analyze survey data, perform the following steps:
1. Select F11 Rvw Data on the left side of the raw data window or press F11 on the PC keyboard.
2. Select the appropriate file in the window that appears and select Open.
Unless data files are renamed, the most recently saved data file will be the default selection for opening. At
this point, a DOS window like the example in Figure G-16 will appear and remain open while survey
results are viewed.
Figure G-16 Data Review DOS Window
Survey data and results will be displayed in graph format in two windows. The title bars of both windows
will indicate a passed or failed survey. If the magnetic survey fails, then the GMU 44 location under
consideration should be considered unreliable until positional adjustments of the magnetometer or other
aircraft components help to achieve a survey pass. If the survey passes, then the GMU 44 location is under
consideration is suitable for permanent magnetometer installation. When finished reviewing survey data,
select the DOS window and select Enter or close the data review windows individually.

Rev. V Page G-15
G.3.4.1 Magnetic Tilt Display
The magnetic tilt (MagTilt) window, an example of which is shown in Figure G-17, displays GMU 44 tilt
about the X and Y axes during the Magnetic Interference Survey. MagTilt graphs are automatically saved
as bitmap (.bmp) files in the same directory as the source data file, with the same name as the source data
file. Verify that X Tilt (Roll) or Y Tilt (Pit) did not exceed ±5° from calibrated level during the survey. If
tilt exceeded ±5° from level about either axis during the survey, re-level the aircraft and ensure that the
GMU 44 is level and secure in its survey location, then conduct the Magnetic Interference Survey again. If
tilt did not exceed ±5° from level about either axis during the survey, proceed to the next section.
Figure G-17 Magnetic Tilt Display (Survey Passed)
G.3.4.2 Magnetic Field Display

The magnetic field (MagField) display, examples of which are shown in Figure G-18 and Figure G-19,
shows GMU 44 magnetic field deviations about the X, Y, and Z axes. In the case of a passed survey, the
display title bar and graph plot text will indicate passed status, as shown in Figure G-18. In the case of a
failed survey, the MagField display will indicate the axis (or axes) and threshold(s) about which the survey
failed, as well as highlighting the data points that exceeded thresholds in magenta. Examples of failed data
points are circled in red in Figure G-19. To determine which aircraft component exercise may have caused
the survey to fail, follow these steps:
1. Identify the time period during which the failing deviation occurred. An example interference
event is bracketed by dashed blue lines in Figure G-19.
2. Identify the aircraft component exercise performed during this time period on the survey sequence
sheet corresponding to the most recent survey. In the example sheet shown in Table G-2, flap
extension, occurring between 120 seconds and 150 seconds, may have caused the interference
event highlighted in Figure G-19.

Rev. V Page G-16
3. If the magnetic interference cannot be remedied, another GMU 44 location should be selected and
surveyed. Refer to Section 6.1 for additional information on troubleshooting and correcting a
GMU 44 Magnetometer installation.
Figure G-18 Magnetic Field Display (Survey Passed)
Figure G-19 Magnetic Field Display (Survey Failed)

Rev. V Page G-17
APPENDIX H MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTALLATIONS
H.1 Panel Patches for GDU 620 and Accommodation of Oversize Indicators ....................................H-2
H.2 Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments .............................................................................. H-5

Rev. V Page H-1
H.1 Panel Patches for GDU 620 and Accommodation of Oversize Indicators
In some installations, once the cutout is made for the GDU 620, there is insufficient material remaining on
the instrument panel on which to affix nut plates. If at least four nut plates have sufficient material for
attachment directly to the instrument panel, it is acceptable to use patch plates for the remaining one or two
nut plates. Patch plates may be installed as described in Figure H-1.
In some installations, once the cutout is made for the GDU 620, there is no material remaining between
adjacent instrument cutouts. This usually occurs for oversize indicators, such as the King KI 256. If this
occurs for one instrument, it is acceptable to install angle brackets or a custom adapter plate, as described
in Figure H-1.

Rev. V Page H-2
INSTRUMENT PANEL
MODIFIED 115 -01009 -00

TRIM PLATE
EXISTING INSTRUMENT
GDU 620 DISPLAY
NEW LOCATION
FOR KI-256
DESIRED RESULT
INADEQUATE MATERIAL
TO MOUNT CORNER
NUTPLATE FOR GDU 620
DISPLAY
NEW CUTOUT
INSTRUMENT PANEL FOR KI-256
MATERIAL BREAK
FRONT VIEW, CUTOUT EXAMPLE
MS21073 -06 NUTPLATE SEE CORNER NUTPLATE

MS20426AD3 -X RIVET DETAIL
(2X) FARSIDE THRU PANEL
AND ADAPTER MS21071 -06 NUTPLATE
MS20426AD3 -X RIVET (2X)
2X
2 CUSTOM KI -256
ADAPTER PLATE
MS21071 -06 NUTPLATE

MS20426AD3 -X RIVET
(1X) FARSIDE THRU PANEL
AND ADAPTER
REAR VIEW, ADAPTER PLATE EXAMPLE
MS21071 -06 NUTPLATE

MS20426AD3 -X RIVET (2X)
MODIFIED ALUMINUM ANGLE

(SEE ANGLE DETAIL)
MODIFIED ALUMINUM ANGLE
(SEE ANGLE DETAIL)
TWO ANGLES ARE RIVETED TOGETHER 1
(EQUAL GAP DISTANCE)
REAR VIEW, ANGLE SUPPORT EXAMPLE

NOTES:
1. RECOMMENDED RIVET HARDWARE TO MOUNT ANGLES IS MS20426AD3 -X IF FLUSH IS
REQUIRED OR MS204 70AD3 -X IF HEAD CLEARS OTHER ITEMS.
2. FABRICATE CUSTOM ADAPTER PLATE FOR KI -256. PLATE MUST UTILIZE AT LEAST TWO OF THE
GDU 620 MOUNTING LOCATIONS AND HAVE PROVISIONS TO SECURE THE KI -256 TO THE PANEL.
ADDITIONAL ATTACHMENTS TO THE PANEL (I.E. RIVETS) IS RECOMMENDED FOR EASE OF
INSTALLATION . MATERIAL IS 0.125" MIN. THICKNESS 6061-T6 OR 2024-T3 ALUMINUM.
Figure H-1 Instrument Panel Patches

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page H-3
RIVET GAP IS 0.75" ± 0.25"
2 CORNER PATCH PLATE
RIVET (2X) THRU PATCH PLATE AND PANEL 1 2
RIVET (1X) THRU PATCH PLATE AND NUTPLATE
RIVET (1X) THRU PATCH PLATE, NUTPLATE, AND PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL
(VIEW LOOKING AFT)
GDU620 FASTENER
LOCATION (HOLE FOR #6 SCREW)
EXISTING CUTOUT
RIVET GAP IS 0.75" ± 0.25"
INTERIOR EDGE OF
115 -01009 -00
MIN. TO EDGE = 0.25"
TRIM PLATE
TYPICAL
1 NUTPLATE
NEARSIDE CORNER NUTPLATE DETAIL
INTERIOR EDGE OF
115 -01009 -00 115 -01009 -XX
TRIM PLATE TRIM PLATE INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTES: (VIEW LOOKING AFT)
RIVETS MS20426AD3 -X
NUTPLATES STANDARD PART; ANY MS (MILITARY SPECIFICATION) PART NUMBER
2. A PATCH PLATE MAY BE REQUIRED FOR ANY GDU620 FASTENING LOCATION DEPENDING UPON
THE RAW OPENING OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL MATERIAL. THE MATERIAL OF THE PATCH PLATE
SHOULD BE 0.063" MIN. THICKNESS ALUMINUM 2024 -T3. TRIM THE PATCH PLATE TO AVOID
CONTACT WITH EXISTING INSTRUMENTS AND MATCH THE PATCH INNER EDGE TO THE OPENING
OF THE TRIM PLATE. THREE RIVETS SHOULD PENETRATE AND SECURE THE PATCH PLATE TO THE
PANEL. FOLLOW THE DIMENSIONAL GUIDELINES PROVIDED.
3. CORROSION COAT FABRICATED PARTS WITH ZINC CHROMATE PRIMER ALL SURFACES.
0.098 DIA THRU HOLE (FOR EITHER MS20470AD3 -X 0.098 DIA THRU HOLE (FOR EITHER
OR MS20426AD3 -X RIVET) CSK Ø 0.172 X 100°
(FOR MS20426AD3 -X RIVET ONLY) TYPICAL (QTY A/R TO MEET LENGTH)
TYPICAL (QTY A/R TO MEET LENGTH)
DIM. A DIM. A
DIM. A DIM. B DIM. A DIM. B
0.15 MIN. Ø 0.098 THRU HOLE

0.098 DIA HOLE (FOR MOUNTING ANGLE TO PANEL
0.15 MIN. WITH MS20426AD3 -X RIVET)
4X
0.38 MIN.
6061 -T6 ALUMINUM ANGLE

(AND10133 -XXXX) 0.06 THK, NUTPLATE MOUNTING PATTERN
LEG LENGTH MAY VARY 6061 -T6 ALUMINUM ANGLE AND MATERIAL CLEARANCE A/R
(AND10133 -XXXX) 0.06 THK, (FOR #6-32 SCREW)
LEG LENGTH MAY VARY
ANGLE DETAIL ANGLE DETAIL

KI -256 SIDE GDU 620 SIDE

MIN. MAX.
RIVETS 0.25" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
SCREWS 0.30" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
Figure H-1 Instrument Panel Patches

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page H-4
H.2 Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments
In some installations, there is unused space in the bolster immediately below the instrument panel. If the
location meets the requirements for the location of 3 1/8-inch standby instruments (refer to
Section 2.5.11.2), it may be desirable to install one or more standby instruments in the bolster. It is
acceptable to rework the bolster and cut holes in the subpanel as shown in Figure H-2.
AVAILABLE AVAILABLE SUB-PANEL

DRAFT DRAFT
DEPTH OF SUB-PANEL
TO BOLSTER EDGE
DEPTH OF SUB-PANEL
TO BOLSTER EDGE
CLOSEOUT VIEW LOOKING DOWN

DESIRED RESULT
EDGE OF BOLSTER PHYSICAL DISTANCE MAY BE LIMITED

BY ADJACENT EQUIPMENT
LIMITING PHYSICAL
PARAMETERS
FINAL TRIMMED CLOSEOUT

EDGE OF BOLSTER
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD

DESIRED RESULT
NOTES:
1. WHEN A SUB-PANEL IS CREATED FOR USE IN A BOLSTER, TO SUSTAIN ADEQUATE VISIBILITY, IT IS IMPORTANT
TO MAKE THE CUT-OUT ON THE BOLSTER LARGER THAN THE SUB -PANEL SURFACE AREA. THIS WILL CREATE A
DRAFT ANGLE IN THE FIBERGLASS CLOSEOUT PART. ACTUAL PHYSICAL SIZE OF THE CUT -OUT WILL DEPEND UPON
VARIOUS COCKPIT FACTORS, PRIMARILY WHAT OTHER DEVICES ARE ADJACENT TO THE SELECTED LOCATION AND
THE DEPTH DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE SUB -PANEL AND BOLSTER.
FIXTURE PLATE WITH INSTRUMENT

MOUNTING HOLES. SHOWN ON
PACKAGING (RELEASE) TAPE SUB-PANEL.
COATED WITH
MOLD RELEASE WAX.
7.34
2.48 2.48 Ø .151 THRU 8X
EXISTING AIRCRAFT
SUB-PANEL
BEHIND THE 2.48 4.0
BOLSTER. BOLSTER
TRIM LINE ON BOLSTER. R 2.0

(REMOVE MATERIAL TO CREATE 0.94
OPENING FOR CLOSEOUT.)
EXAMPLE FIXTURE PLATE
ISO VIEW MATERIAL: .13" ALUMINUM PLATE OR .38 -.50" PLYWOOD.
(DEVELOPMENT OF CLOSEOUT AND SUB-PANEL) EXAMPLE SHOWN IS FOR TWO 3.125" INSTRUMENTS.
DIMENSIONS SHOWN FOR REF ONLY. ACTUAL
DIMENSIONS WILL DEPEND UPON INSTRUMENTS USED.
NOTES:
1. BOLSTER IS INSTALLED IN AIRCRAFT FOR THIS OPERATION.

2. FABRICATE A FIXTURE PLATE THAT CONTAINS THE MOUNTING HOLE PATTERN(S) FOR THE INSTRU MENT(S) TO BE
MOUNTED IN THE BOLSTER.
3. TRIM BOLSTER TO PROVIDE DESIRED DRAFT ANGLE IN CLOSEOUT PART. TEMPORARILY AFFIX THE FIXTURE
PLATE ONTO THE EXISTING AIRCRAFT SUB -PANEL FORWARD OF THE BOLSTER. CENTRALLY LOCATE THE PLATE TO
THE CUTOUT IN T HE BOLSTER.
4. MATCH DRILL THE INSTRUMENT MOUNTING HOLES FROM THE FIXTURE PLATE ONTO THE SUB -PANEL.
5. REMOVE THE FIXTURE PLATE. ADD RELEASE TAPE AND MOLD RELEASE WAX TO THE SUB -PANEL AND FIXTURE
PLATE.
Figure H-2 Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. V Page H-5
2 OR 3 PLY CLOTH
FOR CLOSEOUT PART
EXISTING AIRCRAFT
SUB-PANEL STRUCTURE
BEHIND THE DASH BOLSTER.
BOLSTER
FIXTURE PLATE
#6 SCREW, NUT
8X
ISO VIEW
(DEVELOPMENT OF CLOSEOUT AND SUB -PANEL)
NOTES:
1. LAY DOWN 2 OR 3 PLY CLOTH IN PLACE. CLOTH ON SUB -PANEL SHOULD BE LYING FLAT. PERFORATE CLOTH AT SUB -PANEL
HOLE LOCATIONS FOR INSTRUMENTS. INSERT FIXTURE PLATE. FASTEN WITH SCREWS THAT ARE PRE -COATED WITH MOLD
RELEASE WAX.
2. TRIM EDGES OF CLOTH S O ONE CAN TAPE THE WET CLOTH DOWN TO THE FIRST TAPE LAYER ON BOLSTER TO PREVENT THE
GLASS CLOTH FROM SAGGING. PULL THE GLASS OUTWARD TO CREATE A GOOD FORM WITHOUT WRINKLES OR SAGS. TAPE
THE RESULTANT CLOTH SECURELY TO HOLD THE SHAPE AS IT CURES. CURE I N PLACE.
FINAL TRIMMED CLOSEOUT
3
ISO VIEW
(DEVELOPMENT OF CLOSEOUT AND SUB -PANEL)
NOTES:
1. USING AIR PRESSURE BETWEEN THE NEW CLOSEOUT AND THE BOLSTER, GENTLY REMOVE THE NEWLY FORMED PART.
2. PEEL OFF ALL THE TAPE FROM THE BOLSTER AND SUB -PANEL. CLEAN ALL PARTS.
3. IN THE SUB-PANEL AND CLOSEOUT PART CUT OUT THE LARGE HOLES REQUIRED FOR EACH INSTRUMENT. TEMPORARIILY INSTALL
THE INSTRUMENTS TO VALIDATE THE OPENINGS ARE SATISFACTORY.
4. USE BODY AND GLAZING PUTTY FOR FILLING SURFACES ON THE CLOSEOUT. FINISH THE SURFACES AND EDGES WITH SAND
PAPER UNTIL A SMOOTH FINISH IS ACCOMPLISHED (WITH 220 GRIT PAPER).
5. PRIME AND PAINT THE CLOSEOUT TO MATCH THE BOLSTER COLOR.
Figure H-2 Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. V Page H-6
APPENDIX J LIGHTNING ZONING
J.1 Purpose ............................................................................................................................................ J-2

J.2 Severity of Lightning Zones ........................................................................................................... J-2
J.3 Aircraft Zoning Diagram ................................................................................................................ J-3
J.3.1 Wings ..................................................................................................................................... J-3
J.3.2 Fuselage .................................................................................................................................. J-7
J.3.3 Empennage ........................................................................................................................... J-17
J.4 Example Lightning Zoning Diagrams .......................................................................................... J-18

Rev. V Page J-1
J.1 Purpose
This appendix provides lightning zoning diagrams for various types of aircraft to facilitate correct
placement of the GMU 44 and GTP 59. Additional restrictions related to the placement of the GMU 44 and
GTP 59 can be found in Section 2.5.11.5 and Section 2.5.11.7, respectively.
J.2 Severity of Lightning Zones

The zoning levels correspond to the severity of lightning strikes and probability of occurrence on the
aircraft. The order of severity starting with the safest zone is Zone 3, 2A, 2B, 1C, and 1A/1B. The
GMU 44 and GTP 59 must not be installed in Zones 1A, 1B, 1C, or 2B.

Rev. V Page J-2
J.3 Aircraft Zoning Diagram
All diagrams in this appendix use the legend shown in
Figure J-1. The zoning described is split into wings,
fuselage, and empennage. For the particular airframe, the
applicable wings, fuselage, and empennage zoning should
be merged to get a complete zonal definition. The zoning
figures applicable to any particular model are found in Figure J-1 Lightning Zoning Legend
Table K-1. If there is a region of overlapping zones, the
more severe zone should always be applied (e.g., if Zone
2A and 1A overlap in a region, then the overlapping region should be considered Zone 1A). For a list of
the order of severity of zones, refer to Appendix Section J.2. Examples of complete lightning zoning
diagrams can be found in Appendix Section J.4.
J.3.1 Wings
The different zoning for wingtips and wings are contained in the following subsections.
J.3.1.1 Wingtips
J.3.1.1.1 Aircraft Not Limited to VFR Operation
NOTE
This zoning section is applicable to those aircraft models that are not limited to VFR
operation only in Table K-1. For zoning of models limited to VFR operation only, refer to
Appendix Section J.3.1.1.2.
Zoning of various types of wingtips is shown in Figure J-2. Figure J-2A shows zoning for straight
wingtips. Figure J-2B shows zoning for curved wingtips. The zones are similar to those of straight
wingtips. The main difference is that Zone 1 extends from the outboard edge of the wing past the tangent
point of the chord and 0.5 meters inboard.
Figure J-2C shows zoning for winglets. Note that the winglet figure shows a flattened winglet. Winglet
classifications are very similar to those of curved wingtips. The main difference is that Zone 1 extends
from the outboard edge of the wing past the tangent point of the winglet and 0.5 meters inboard.
Figure J-2D shows zoning for tip tanks. The rule that applies to tip tanks is very similar to that of the
curved wing. The main difference is that Zone 1 extends 0.5 meters past the inboard edge of the tip tank.

Rev. V Page J-3
A (STRAIGHT WINGTIP) B (CURVED WINGTIP)
C (WINGLET) D (TIP TANKS)
Figure J-2 Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Not Limited to VFR Operation

Rev. V Page J-4
J.3.1.1.2 Aircraft Limited to VFR Operation
This zoning section is applicable to those aircraft models that are limited to VFR operation only in
Table K-1. For zoning of models that are not limited to VFR operation only, refer to
Appendix Section J.3.1.1.1.
NOTE
The aircraft must have a position light in the wingtip area as a prerequisite for this STC.
If there is no position light on the wing, then no Zone 3 exists and the GTP 59 cannot be installed on this
particular aircraft. For those aircraft identified as VFR in Table K-1, the following criteria is used to
determine the Zone 3 area:
• Zone 1A/1B finishes as shown in Figure J-2 or 0.5 meters inboard from the inboard edge of the
position light, whichever is the greater distance from the outboard edge of the wing tip, as shown
in Figure J-3
• Zone 2A/2B extends a total of 2.1meters inboard of zone 1A/1B
• Zone 3 extends inboard of zone 2A/2B from the wingtip and stops at another zone 1A/1B or
2A/2B determined from other areas of Appendix Section J.3.2

Rev. V Page J-5
.
A (STRAIGHT WINGTIP) B (CURVED WINGTIP)
C (WINGLET) D (TIP TANKS)
Figure J-3 Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Limited to VFR Operation

Rev. V Page J-6
J.3.1.2 Landing Gear
The landing gear is considered Zone 1A. The struts that connect the landing gear to the wings are Zone 2A.
Each side of landing gear is zoned individually. If there is a single strut connecting the landing gear to the
wing, then the inboard and outboard edges of the landing gear should be used for zoning instead of using
the connection point of the wing and the strut. In addition to the zoning shown in Figure J-3, the zoning
described for the fuselage and wings also applies. The floats for a float-mounted fuselage have not been
zoned because they do not influence the zoning of the bottom of the fuselage. Neither the GTP 59 nor the
GMU 44 can be mounted on landing gear, including floats, or its struts.
Figure J-4 Zoning for Wings Affected by Landing Gear
J.3.2 Fuselage
This section describes the zoning for several different types of fuselages. Only the fuselage and sometimes
the wings are pictured in these diagrams—the empennage is zoned in Appendix Section J.3.3. Aft of every
Zone 2A is a 0.15 meter Zone 2B (i.e., Zone 2A is followed by a 0.15 meter Zone B). Although these Zone
2B areas are marked on the diagrams, sometimes their widths are not defined (0.15 meters should be used
in these cases). The horizontal stabilizer of the tail is NOT zoned because neither the GTP 59 nor the
GMU 44 can be mounted there. In addition, neither the GTP 59 nor the GMU 44 can be mounted within
0.5 meters of the rear-most point of the fuselage. Appendix Section J.3.3 explains the conditions under
which the GTP 59 or GMU 44 can be mounted on the vertical stabilizer. Although all diagrams show low
wing aircraft, the same zoning can be applied to high wing aircraft. The values d1 and d2 are defined as
follows:
d1 = 1.3m (51.2”)
d2 = 2.6m (102.4”)

Rev. V Page J-7
J.3.2.1 Single Propeller Aircraft
Zoning of low- or high-wing aircraft with single propellers is shown in Figure J-5. The area of the nose
immediately aft of the propeller is Zone 3. The 0.6-meter distance should be measured from the outboard-
most edge of the fuselage or the tip of the propeller, whichever is longer. Figure J-7 shows the case of an
aircraft with a curved fuselage. The portion of the fuselage that extends 1.3 meters aft of the propeller
blades is Zone 1C. However, the bottom centerline is Zone 2A, and it is acceptable to mount the GTP 59
there.
Figure J-5 Zoning for a Single Propeller (Low- or High-Wing)

Rev. V Page J-8
A
Figure J-6 Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Canard with a Rear-Mounted Propeller

Rev. V Page J-9
A
NOTE
The bottom centerline is Zone 2A, and it is acceptable to mount the GTP 59 there.
Figure J-7 Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Aircraft with a Curved Lower Fuselage

Rev. V Page J-10
J.3.2.2 Aircraft with Multiple Propellers
Zoning of low- or high-wing aircraft with twin front-mounted propellers is shown in Figure J-8. The text
below assumes the aircraft fuselage and wing are constructed of metal. Note that Zone 2A can overlap onto
the nacelles if they are within 0.6 meters outboard of the fuselage.
Zoning of low- or high-wing aircraft with rear-mounted twin propellers is shown in Figure J-9. The text
below assumes the aircraft fuselage and wing are constructed of metal.
For an empennage with a third engine, the GTP 59 cannot be located in the empennage. Therefore, the
zoning for this third engine area has been omitted from the diagrams below. The GTP 59 and GMU 44 for
this aircraft should be located in Zone 3 or Zone 2A on the bottom of the fuselage and wings.
B
Figure J-8 Zoning for Front-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing)

Rev. V Page J-11
A
NOTE
Although the engine nacelles are shown as Zone 3, they may be Zone 2A if the engine falls
within the Zone 2 area of the wing (within 0.6 meters outboard from fuselage edge).
Figure J-9 Zoning for Rear-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing)

Rev. V Page J-12
A
NOTE
Nothing can be mounted in the tail boom of the aircraft.
Figure J-10 Zoning for Front- and Rear-Mounted Propellers (Low- or High-Wing)

Rev. V Page J-13
A
B
Figure J-11 Zoning for High-Wing with Front and Rear Propellers Mounted Above
Fuselage

Rev. V Page J-14
A
Figure J-12 Zoning for Low- or High-Wing Canard with Twin Jet Engines

Rev. V Page J-15
J.3.2.3 Biplanes
Figure J-13 shows how biplanes can be classified using the figures from above. The top and bottom of both
wings will be zoned using Figure J-3, while the fuselage and the mid-sections of the wing can be zoned
using Figure J-5.
Figure J-13 Zoning for Single-Propeller Biplane

Rev. V Page J-16
J.3.3 Empennage
If the GTP 59 and GMU 44 cannot be mounted in other areas of the aircraft that are Zone 3 locations, it is
acceptable for metal aircraft with one of the three traditional empennages shown in Figure J-14 to mount
the GTP 59 or GMU 44 in the Zone 2A area of the tail. However, the GTP 59 or GMU 44 cannot be
mounted on/under any non-conducting surfaces. If the complete empennage of the aircraft being
considered does not match those shown in Figure J-14, then it should be mounted in allowed areas defined
for the fuselage and wings. If only portions of the empennage shown below match, then the same rule
applies, and the GTP 59 or GMU 44 cannot be installed in the empennage. Note that it is allowable for
only the horizontal stabilizer tips to differ from those shown in Figure J-14. The GTP 59 cannot be located
in the horizontal stabilizer of the empennage. Neither the GTP 59 nor the GMU 44 can be mounted in the
tail of a composite empennage.
A B C
D (APPLIES TO A) E (APPLIES TO B AND C)
Figure J-14 Zoning for Empennage

Rev. V Page J-17
J.4 Example Lightning Zoning Diagrams
This section contains sample lightning zoning diagrams for typical aircraft.
Figure J-15 Example Lightning Zoning for Single-Engine Aircraft

Rev. V Page J-18
Figure J-16 Example Lightning Zoning for Twin-Engine Aircraft

Rev. V Page J-19
APPENDIX K MODEL-SPECIFIC INFORMATION
Table K-1 Aircraft Model-Specific Information ...................................................................................K-2

Table K-2 Lightning Protection Requirements ...................................................................................K-20
This appendix provides the following information for every model listed on the AML:
1. Whether or not an electric standby attitude indicator or ESIS can be used in a particular aircraft
model.
2. The lightning zoning figures from Appendix J that are applicable to a particular aircraft model.
3. Suitable lightning zones for installation of the GTP 59 temperature probe and GMU 44
Magnetometer in a particular aircraft model. For additional information, refer to Section 2.5.11.5
and Section 2.5.11.7.
4. Any notes related to a particular aircraft model.
In addition, if Table K-1 states that additional lightning protection is required for a particular model, details
of the protection required for each particular aircraft model can be found in Table K-2.
NOTE
Any aircraft model listed in Table K-1 and not explicitly called out as nonmetallic by an
end note should be considered an all-metal aircraft.
NOTE
In Table K-1, aircraft models listed in rows shaded gray are limited to VFR only with the
G500/G600 installed.

Rev. V Page K-1
Table K-1 Aircraft Model-Specific Information
Lightning Zone Type
Aircraft Make Standby (refer to Appendix J)
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
(TCDS Holder) Aircraft Model Designation Indicator Notes
Only Wing Fuselage Empennage Location Location
[common name or previous make] [12]
Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
Aermacchi S.p.A Zone 3, Zone 3,
F.260, F.260B, F.260C, Electric or
(Aermacchi S.p.A) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
F.260D, F.260E, F.260F Pneumatic
[Siai Marchetti] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Aermacchi S.p.A S.205-18/F, S.205-18/R, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Aermacchi S.p.A) S.205-20/F, S.205-20/R, J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Siai Marchetti] S.205-22/R, S.208, S.208A [1] [2] [5] [7]
Aero Commander Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Dynac Aerospace Corp) 10, 10A, 100, 100A, 100-180 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Aero Commander; Volaire] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3,
Aeromere INSTALLATION
Electric or Zone 3 Zone 2A
(Aeromere S.A.) Falco F.8.L J-3, J-4 J-5 J-14 APPROVED FOR VFR
Pneumatic [4] (fuselage
[Falco] OPERATION ONLY. [8]
only) [6]
Aeronautica Macchi Aerfer
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Aeronautica Macchi S.p.A. and Aerfer- Electric or
AM-3 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Industrie Aerospaziali Meridionali S.p.A.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
[LASA]
Aerostar Zone 3, Zone 3, Ensure compliance with
Electric or
(Aerostar Aircraft Corporation) PA-60-700P (Aerostar 700P) J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A AD 74-25-02, if
Pneumatic
[Piper/Smith] [1] [2] [5] [7] applicable.
PA-60-600 (Aerostar 600),
Aerostar Zone 3, Zone 3, Ensure compliance with
PA-60-601 (Aerostar 601), Electric or
(Aerostar Aircraft Corporation) J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A AD 74-25-02, if
PA-60-601P (Aerostar 601P), Pneumatic
[Piper/Smith] [1] [2] [5] [7] applicable.
PA-60-602P (Aerostar 602P)
Alexandria Aircraft
(Alexandria Aircraft LLC) Electric or Not Zone 2A Zone 2A
17-30, 17-31, 17-31TC J-5 J-14 [8] [10]
[Bellanca Aircraft Corp; Viking Aviation, Pneumatic Allowed [1] [3] [5]
Inc.; Bellanca, Inc.]
Alexandria Aircraft
(Alexandria Aircraft LLC) Electric or Not Zone 2A Zone 2A
17-30A, 17-31A, 17-31ATC J-5 J-14 [8] [10]
[Bellanca Aircraft Corp; Viking Aviation, Pneumatic Allowed [1] [3] [5]
Inc.; Bellanca, Inc.]
J-2 Zone 3, Zone 3,
American Champion 7ECA, 7GCAA, 7GCBC, Electric or
J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [9] [10] [19]
(American Champion Aircraft Corporation) 7KCAB, 8KCAB, 8GCBC Pneumatic [20]
[1] [3] [5]
Atlantic Coast Seaplanes LLC
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Atlantic Coast Seaplanes LLC) G-21C, G-21D, G-21E, Electric or
X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[A.G. McKinnon; Viking Air Limited; G-21G Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aero Planes, Inc; Aero Planes, LLC]

Rev. V Page K-2
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
BN-2A-2, BN-2A-3,
BN-2A-6, BN-2A-8,
B-N Group LTD. BN-2A-20, BN-2A-21, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(B-N Group Limited) BN-2A-26, BN-2A-27, X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Pilatus Britten-Norman Limited] BN-2B-20, BN-2B-21, [1] [2] [5] [7]
BN-2B-26, BN-2B-27,
BN-2T, BN-2T-4R
B-N Group LTD. J-8
BN2A MK. III, Zone 3, Zone 3,
(B-N Group Limited) Electric or Bottom
BN2A MK. III-2, X J-2, J-4 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Pilatus Britten-Norman Limited; Pneumatic Fuselage
BN2A MK. III-3 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Britten-Norman (Bembridge) Limited] Only
B-N Group LTD. J-14 Zone 3, Zone 3, BN2A-III cannot mount
Electric or
(B-N Group Limited) BN-2, BN-2A X J-2, J-4 J-8 (refer to note Zone 2A Zone 2A the GTP on the
Pneumatic
[Pilatus Britten-Norman Limited] column) [1] [2] [5] [7] empennage.
Beech
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) Electric or
58PA, 58TCA J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Hawker, Beech Aircraft Company; Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Raytheon Aircraft Company]
Beech
Zone 3, Zone 3,
58P, 58TC J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Hawker, Beech Aircraft Company; Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Boeing
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(The Boeing Company) Electric or
NOMAD NA-260 (T-28A) X J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Rockwell International; North American Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aviation]
BC-1A, AT-6 (SNJ-2),
Boeing AT-6A (SNJ-3), AT-6B,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(The Boeing Company) AT-6C (SNJ-4), Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Rockwell International Corporation; AT-6D (SNJ-5), Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
North American] AT-6F (SNJ-6),
SNJ-7, T-6G
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna 172M, 172N, 172P, 172Q, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [9]
(Cessna Aircraft Company) 172R, 172S Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
172RG, R172K J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [9]
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
177, 177A, 177B J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]

Rev. V Page K-3
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
177RG J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
180, 180A, 180B, 180C, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
180D, 180E, 180F, 180G, J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [9]
180H, 180J, 180K [1] [2] [5] [7]
182, 182A, 182B, 182C,
182D, 182E, 182F, 182G,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna 182H, 182J, 182K, 182L, Electric or
(Cessna Aircraft Company) 182M, 182N, 182P, 182Q, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
182R, 182S, 182T, R182,
T182, TR182, T182T
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna 185, 185A, 185B, 185C, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [9]
(Cessna Aircraft Company) 185D, 185E, A185E Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna 190, 195 (LC-126A, B, C), Electric or
(Cessna Aircraft Company) 195A, 195B Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
206, P206, P206A, P206B,
P206C, P206D, P206E,
TP206A, TP206B, TP206C,
TP206D, TP206E, U206,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna U206A, U206B, U206C, Electric or
(Cessna Aircraft Company) U206D, U206E, U206F, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
U206G, TU206A, TU206B,
TU206C, TU206D, TU206E,
TU206F, TU206G, 206H,
T206H
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
207, 207A, T207, T207A J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
208 (208A), 208B X J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
210, 210A, 210B, 210C,
210D, 210E, 210F, T210F,
210G, T210G, 210H, T210H,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna 210J, T210J, 210K, T210K, Electric or
(Cessna Aircraft Company) 210L, T210L, 210M, T210M, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
210N, P210N, T210N, 210R,
P210R, T210R, 210-5 (205),
210-5A (205A)

Rev. V Page K-4
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
310, 310A (USAF U-3A),
310B, 310C, 310D,
310E (USAF U-3B), 310F, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
310G, 310H, E310H, 310I, J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
310J, 310J-1, E310J, 310K, [1] [2] [5] [7]
310L, 310N, 310P, T310P,
310Q, T310Q, 310R, T310R
320, 320A, 320B, 320C, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
320D, 320E, 320F, 320-1, J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
335, 340, 340A [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
336 J-2, J-4 J-10 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
337, 337A (USAF 02B),
337B, T337B, 337C, 337E,
T337E, T337C, 337D, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
T337D, M337B (USAF 02A), J-2, J-4 J-10 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
337F, T337F, 337G, [1] [2] [5] [7]
T337G,337H, P337H,
T337H, T337H-SP
401, 401A, 401B, 402, 402A,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna 402B, 402C, 411, 411A, 414, Electric or
(Cessna Aircraft Company) 414A, 421, 421A, 421B, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
421C, 425
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
404, 406 X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
441 X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
A185F J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
F172D, F172E, F172F,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna F172G, F172H, F172K, Electric Or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [9]
(Cessna Aircraft Company) F172L, F172M, F172N, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
F172P, FP172D
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric Or
F177RG J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric Or
F182P, F182Q, FR182 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]

Rev. V Page K-5
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
F337E, FT337E, F337F, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
FT337F, F337G, FT337GP, J-2, J-4 J-10 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
F337H, FT337HP [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
FR172K J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Cessna
Electric or
(Cessna Aircraft Company) LC40-550FG, LC41-550FG, Zone 3 Zone 3
Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 [8] [10] [19]
[Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing; LC42-550FG [4] [6]
[13]
The Lancair Company]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Cessna Electric or
T303 (Crusader) J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
J-8 for
tube-and-
T-50 (Army AT-17
Cessna Not fabric; Zone 2A Zone 2A
and UC-78 Series; Pneumatic Not Allowed [8] [10] [14]
(Cessna Aircraft Company) Allowed otherwise, [1] [3] [5]
Navy JRC-1)
not
allowed
For information on
Bolster Modification for
Electric or
Cirrus Design Corporation Zone 3 Zone 3 standby instruments,
SR20, SR22 Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14
(Cirrus Design Corporation) [4] [6] refer to Appendix
[13]
Section H.2.
[8] [10] [19]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
Costruzioni Aeronautiche Tecnam srl P2006T J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
CPAC, Inc.
(CPAC, Inc.) Zone 3, Zone 3,
112, 112TC, 112B, 112TCA, Electric or
[Commander Aircraft Co.; Gulfstream J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
114, 114A, 114B, 114TC Pneumatic
Aerospace; Gulfstream American; [1] [2] [5] [7]
Rockwell Int’l]
Zone 3, Zone 3, INSTALLATION
Cub Crafters Electric or
CC18-180, CC18-180A J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A APPROVED FOR VFR
(Cub Crafters, Inc.) Pneumatic
[1] [3] [5] OPERATION ONLY. [8]
INSTALLATION
Zone 3,
DA 40 , DA 40F APPROVED FOR VFR
Zone 2A
Diamond VFR Version (with no Electric or Zone 3 OPERATION ONLY if
J-3, J-4 J-5 J-14 (fuselage
(Diamond Aircraft Industries GmbH) lightning protection per Pneumatic [4] Diamond SB OSB 40-
only)
SB OSB 40-004/3) 004/3 is not
[6]
incorporated. [8]

Rev. V Page K-6
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
Must have Diamond
Diamond Zone 3 Zone 3 SB OSB 40-004/3
DA 40 , DA 40F Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14
(Diamond Aircraft Industries GmbH) [4] [6] incorporated.
[8] [10] [14] [19]
Zone 3,
Zone 2A INSTALLATION
Diamond Electric or Zone 3
DA 20-A1, DA 20-C1 J-3, J-4 J-5 J-14 (fuselage APPROVED FOR VFR
(Diamond Aircraft Industries Inc.) Pneumatic [4]
only) OPERATION ONLY. [8]
[6]
Zone 3,
Electric or Zone 2A
Diamond Zone 3
DA 42 Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 (fuselage [8] [10] [19]
(Diamond Aircraft Industries Inc.) [4]
[13] only)
[6]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Dornier Electric or
Do 27 Q-6 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Dornier-Werke G.m.b.H.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Dornier Electric or
Do 28 A-1, Do 28 B-1 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Dornier-Werke G.m.b.H.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Dornier Luftfahrt GmbH Electric or
Do 28 D, Do 28 D-1 X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Dornier Luftfahrt GmbH) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3,
Dornier Seastar
Zone 2A INSTALLATION
(Dornier Seastar GmbH & Co KG) Electric or Zone 3
Seastar CD2 X J-3, J-4 J-11 J-14 (fuselage APPROVED FOR VFR
[Dornier Composite Aircraft GmbH & Co. Pneumatic [4]
only) OPERATION ONLY. [8]
KG]
[6]
EADS-PZL “Warszawa-Okęcie” PZL-104 WILGA 80, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(EADS-PZL “Warszawa-Okęcie” S.A.) PZL-104M WILGA 2000, J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Panstwowe Zaklady Lotnicze] PZL-104MA WILGA 2000 [1] [2] [5] [7]
EADS-PZL “Warszawa-Okęcie” Zone 3, Zone 3,
PZL-KOLIBER 150A, Electric or
(EADS-PZL “Warszawa-Okęcie” S.A.) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
PZL-KOLIBER 160A Pneumatic
[Panstwowe Zaklady Lotnicze] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Extra
(Extra Flugzeugproduktions EA-300, EA-300/L, Electric or Not Zone 2A Zone 2A
J-5 J-14 [8] [10]
- und Vertriebs- GmbH) EA-300/S, EA-300/200 Pneumatic Allowed [1] [3] [5]
[Extra Flugzeugbau GmbH]
Extra
(Extra Flugzeugproduktions Electric or Zone 3 Zone 3
EA-400 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 [8] [10] [19]
- und Vertriebs- GmbH) Pneumatic [4] [6]

Rev. V Page K-7
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
Zone 3
INSTALLATION
FFT-GmbH Zone 2A
SC01 B-160 Gyroflug Speed Electric or Zone 3 APPROVED FOR VFR
(FFT Gesellschaft fur Flugzeug J-3, J-4 J-6 Not Allowed (fuselage
Canard Pneumatic [4] OPERATION ONLY.
& Faserverbund-Technologie GmbH) only)
[8] [18]
[6]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Found Aircraft Canada, Inc. Electric or
FBA-2C3 (Expedition E350) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Found Aircraft Canada, Inc.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
FBA-2C, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Found Aircraft Canada, Inc. Electric or
FBA-2C1 (Bush Hawk), J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
FBA-2C2 (Bush Hawk XP) [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Found Brothers Electric or
FBA Centennial “100” J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
GA8 Airvan (Pty) Ltd Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(GA 8 Airvan (Pty) Ltd) GA8, GA8-TC320 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Gippsland Aeronautics Pty. Ltd] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3,
Electric or Zone 2A
GROB Zone 3
G120A Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 (fuselage [8] [10] [19]
(GROB-WERKE) [4]
[13] only)
[6]
Zone 3,
GROB
G115, G115A, G115B, Zone 2A INSTALLATION
(GROB-WERKE) Electric or Zone 3
G115C, G115C2, G115D, J-3, J-4 J-5 J-14 (fuselage APPROVED FOR VFR
[BURKHART GROB Luft- und Raumfahrt Pneumatic [4]
G115D2, G115EG only) OPERATION ONLY. [8]
GmbH & Co. KG] [6]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Grumman Grumman G-21, Electric or
(Gulfstream American Corporation) Grumman G-21A Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Gulfstream American G-44 (Army OA-14, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Gulfstream American Corp) Navy J4F-2), G-44A, J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Grumman] SCAN Type 30 [1] [2] [5] [7]
35-33, 35-A33, 35-B33,
35-C33, 35-C33A, E33,
Hawker Beechcraft
E33A, E33C, F33, F33A, J-14 Zone 3, Zone 3, GMU 44 installation in
F33C, G33, H35, J35, K35, J-2, J-4 J-5 (refer to note Zone 2A Zone 2A empennage not allowed
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon Pneumatic
M35, N35, P35, S35, V35, column) [1] [2] [5] [7] for V-Tail models. [11]
Aircraft Company]
V35A, V35B, 36, A36,
A36TC, B36TC

Rev. V Page K-8
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
F90 X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) 18D, A18A, A18D, S18D, Electric or
X J-2, J-4 J-8 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon SA18A, SA18D Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
95, B95, B95A, D95A, E95,
Hawker Beechcraft 95-55, 95-A55, 95-B55,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) 95-B55A, 95-B55B (T-42), Electric or
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon 95-C55, 95-C55A, D55, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company] D55A, E55, E55A, 56TC,
A56TC, 58, 58A, G58
3N, 3NM, 3TM, JRB-6,
Hawker Beechcraft D18C, D18S, E18S, RC-45J,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) E18S-9700, G18S, H18, Electric or
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon C-45G, C-45H, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company] TC-45G (SNB-5P), TC-45H,
TC-45J, or UC-45J (SNB-5)
Hawker Beechcraft
45 (YT-34), Zone 3, Zone 3,
A45 (T-34A or B-45), J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
D45 (T-34B) [1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
D50, D50A, D50B, D50C, Zone 3, Zone 3,
D50E, E50 (L-23D, RL-23D), X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
F50, G50, H50, J50 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) 50 (L-23A), B50 (L-23B), Electric or
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon C50, D50E-5990 Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft 19A, B19, M19A, 23, A23,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) A23A, A23-19, A23-24, B23, Electric or
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon C23, A24, A24R, B24R, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company] C24R
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
76 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]

Rev. V Page K-9
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
18A, S18A X J-2, J-4 J-8 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) D17S (Army UC43, UC-43B, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-14 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon Navy GB-1, GB-2), SD17S Pneumatic
[1] [3] [5]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
G17S J-2, J-4 J-14 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
[1] [3] [5]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) 35, A35, B35, C35, D35, E35, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A [11]
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon F35, G35 Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
65(L-23F), A65, A-65-8200,
65-80, 65-A80, 65-A80-8800,
65-B80, 65-88, 65-90,
65-A90, 65-A90-1 (JU-21A or
Installation is not
Hawker Beechcraft U-21A or RU-21A or RU-21D
Zone 3, Zone 3, compatible with aircraft
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) or U-21G or RU-21H), Electric or
X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A equipped with Rockwell
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon 65-A90-2 (RU-21B), Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7] Collins ProLine 21
Aircraft Company] 65-A90-3 (RU-21C),
avionics.
65-A90-4 (RU-21E or
RU-21H),70, B90, C90,
C90A, C90GT, C90GTi, E90,
H90 (T-44A)
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
60, A60, B60 X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
99, 99A, 99A(FACH), A99, Zone 3, Zone 3,
A99A, B99, C99, 100, X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Pneumatic
A100 (U-21F), A100A, B100 [1] [2] [5] [7]
A100-1 (U-21J), 200, 200C,
Hawker Beechcraft A200, A200 (C-12A), A200
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) (C-12C), A200C (UC-12B), Electric or
[Beech Aircraft Company; A200CT, B200, B200C, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Raytheon Aircraft Company] B200C (C-12F or UC-12F or
UC-12M or C-12R)

Rev. V Page K-10
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
77 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Beech Aircraft Company; Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Hawker Beechcraft
Zone 3, Zone 3,
T-34C (34C) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft Company]
Helio Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Helio Aircraft, LLC) HST-550, HST-550A J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Alliance] [1] [2] [5] [7]
H-250, H-295 (USAF U-10D),
H-800 only: Neither
Helio HT-295, H-391 (USAF J-2, J-4 Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or GMU 44 nor GTP 59
(Helio Aircraft, LLC) YL-24), H-391B, H-395 (refer to J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic can be mounted on
[Alliance] (USAF L-28A or U-10B), notes) [1] [2] [5] [7]
aircraft wing.
H-395A, H-700, H-800
DGA-15P (Army UC-70,
Howard Zone 3, Zone 3,
Navy GH-1, GH-2, GH-3, Electric or
(Howard Aircraft Foundation) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
NH-1), DGA-15J (Army Pneumatic
[Jobmaster Co] [1] [3] [5]
UC-70B), DGA15W
Interceptor
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Interceptor Aircraft Corporation) 200, 200A, 200B, 200C, Electric or
[Prop-Jets, Inc.; Aero Commander; 200D, 400 Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5 [7]]
Meyers]
JGS Properties, LLC
(JGS Properties, LLC) Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
[Quartz Mountain Aerospace, Inc.; 11E J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
Luscombe Aircraft Corporation; Land-Air [1] [2] [5] [7]
& Leasing, Inc.; Richard S. Kettles]
Electric or
Liberty Not Zone 3 Zone 3
XL-2 Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-14 [8] [10] [18] [19]
(Liberty Aerospace Incorporated) Allowed [4] [6]
[13]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Lockheed 12A (Army UC-40, UC-40A, Electric or
(Lockheed Aircraft Corporation) Navy JO-1, JO-2) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Lovaux Ltd Not
OA7 Optica Series 300 Pneumatic J-2, J-4 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A [14]
(FLS Aerospace Ltd. (Lovaux) Ltd.) Allowed
[1] [2] [5]
M7 Aerospace Zone 3, Zone 3,
SA26-T, SA26-AT, SA226-T, Electric or
(M7 Aerospace LP) X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
SA226-AT, SA226-T(B) Pneumatic
[Fairchild Aircraft Incorporated] [1] [2] [5] [7]

Rev. V Page K-11
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
Limited to non-SFAR 41
M7 Aerospace Zone 3, Zone 3,
SA227-TT, SA226-TC, Electric or aircraft with gross
(M7 Aerospace LP) X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
SA227-AC Pneumatic takeoff weight of
[Fairchild Aircraft Incorporated] [1] [2] [5] [7]
12,500 lbs or less.
Bee Dee M-4, M-4, M-4C,
M-4S,M-4T, M-4-180C,
M-4-180S, M-4-180T,
M-4-210, M-4-210C,
M-4-210S, M-4-210T,
M-4-220, M-4-220C,
M-4-220S, M-4-220T,
M-5-180C, M-5-200,
M-5-210C, M-5-210TC,
M-5-220C, M-5-235C,
M-6-180, M-6-235, M-7-235,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Maule MX-7-235, MX-7-180, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
(Maule Aerospace Technology, Inc.) MX-7-420, MXT-7-180, Pneumatic
[1] [3] [5]
MT-7-235, M-8-235,
MX-7-160, MXT-7-160,
MX-7-180A, MXT-7-180A,
MX-7-180B, M-7-235B,
M-7-235A, M-7-235C,
MX-7-180C, M-7-260,
MT-7-260, M-7-260C,
M-7-420AC, MX-7-160C,
MX-7-180AC, M-7-420A,
MT-7-420, M-4-180V,
M-9-235
Micco Aircraft Co., Inc.
(MICCO Aircraft Company, Inc.)
[Meyers Aircraft Company; Interceptor
Corporation; Interceptor Corporation; Zone 3, Zone 3,
MAC-125C, MAC-145, Electric or
Prop-Jets Incorporated; Nydia Meyers J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
MAC-145A, MAC-145B Pneumatic
Trust; Ralph Haven; [1] [2] [5] [7]
The New Meyers Airplane Company;
Estumkeda, Ltd.; LanShe Aerospace,
LLC; Aero Acquisitions LLC]
MU-2B, MU-2B-10,
MU-2B-20, MU-2B-15, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Mitsubishi Electric or
MU-2B-30, MU-2B-35, X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A TCDS A2PC [15]
(Mitsubishi Heavy Industries, Ltd.) Pneumatic
MU-2B-25, MU-2B-36, [1] [2] [5] [7]
MU-2B-26

Rev. V Page K-12
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
MU-2B-25, MU-2B-35,
Mitsubishi Zone 3, Zone 3,
MU-2B-26, MU-2B-36, Electric or
(Mitsubishi Heavy Industries, Ltd.) X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A TCDS A10SW [15]
MU-2B-26A, MU-2B-36A, Pneumatic
[Mitsubishi Aircraft International Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
MU-2B-40, MU-2B-60
Mooney Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Mooney Aircraft Corporation) M22 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Mooney Airplane Company, Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
M20, M20A, M20B, M20C,
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Mooney M20D, M20E, M20F, M20G, Electric or
(Mooney Airplane Company, Inc.) M20J, M20K, M20L, M20M, Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
M20R, M20S, M20TN
Rallye 100S, Rallye 150ST,
Rallye 150T, Rallye 235E,
Morane Saulnier Zone 3, Zone 3,
Rallye 235C MS880B, Electric or
(S.O.C.A.T.A. - Groupe Aerospatiale) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
MS885, MS894A, MS893A, Pneumatic
[Rallye] [1] [2] [5] [7]
MS892A-150, MS892E-150,
MS893E, MS894E
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Morane Saulnier M.S.760, M.S.760A, Electric or
(S.O.C.A.T.A. - Groupe Aerospatiale) M.S.760B Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Nardi Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Nardi S.A.) FN-333 J-2, J-4 J-7 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Siai Marchetti] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Navion
(Sierra Hotel Aero, Inc.)
[North American Aviation, Inc.; Ryan
Aeronautical Company; Navion, Division
Navion (L-17A),
of Tusco Corporation; Base Industries,
Navion A (L-17B) or (L-17C), Zone 3, Zone 3,
Incorporated; Navion Aircraft Corporation; Electric or
Navion B, Navion D, J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Cedric R. Kotowicz; Navion Rangemaster Pneumatic
Navion E, Navion F, [1] [2] [5] [7]
Corporation; Jimmie Thompson; Charles
Navion G, Navion H
L. Klinger; Diamond Aero Enterprises,
Inc.; Navion Holdings, Inc.; Navion Aircraft
Company, Ltd; Navion Aircraft LLC; Sierra
Hotel Aero, Inc.]
Pacific Aerospace Limited Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Pacific Aerospace Limited) 750XL X J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Pacific Aerospace Corp.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Piaggio Electric or
PIAGGIO P-180 X J-2, J-4 J-13 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Piaggio Aero Industries S.p.A) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]

Rev. V Page K-13
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
Piaggio Zone 3, Zone 3,
P.166, P.166B, P.166C, Electric or
(Industrie Aeronautiche e Meccaniche) X J-2, J-4 J-9 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
P.166 DL3 Pneumatic
[Piaggio & Co.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Piaggio Electric or
P.136-L2 X J-2, J-4 J-9 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Piaggio & C.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Piaggio Electric or
P.136-L, P.136-L1 J-2, J-4 J-9 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Piaggio & C.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
The GDU 620
connector that is directly
Zone 3, Zone 3, connected to the SPWU
Pilatus Electric or
PC-12, PC-12/45 PC-12/47 X J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A must be overbraided in
(Pilatus Aircraft Ltd) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7] accordance with
Appendix Section N.2.
[16]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Pilatus Electric or
PC-6/B2-H4 X J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
PC-6, PC-6-H1, PC-6-H2,
PC-6/350, PC-6/350-H1,
PC-6/350-H2, PC-6/A, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Pilatus Electric or
PC-6/A-H1, PC-6/A-H2, J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
PC-6/B-H2, PC-6/B1-H2, [1] [2] [5] [7]
PC-6/B2-H2, PC-6/C-H2,
PC-6/C1-H2
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Pilatus Electric or
PC-7 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Piper Zone 3, Zone 3,
PA-46-310P, PA-46-350P, Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
PA-46-500TP Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Piper Aircraft, Inc. PA-23, PA-23-160, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) PA-23-235, PA-23-250, J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] PA-E23-250 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Piper Aircraft, Inc. Zone 3, Zone 3,
PA-24, PA-24-250, Electric or
PA-24-260, PA-24-400 Pneumatic
PA-42, PA-42-720, Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
PA-42-1000 Pneumatic

Rev. V Page K-14
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
PA-28-140, PA-28-150,
PA-28-151, PA-28-160,
PA-28-161, PA-28-180,
PA-28-235, PA-28S-160,
PA-28R-180, PA-28S-180, Electric or
PA-28-181, PA-28R-200, Pneumatic
PA-28R-201, PA-28R-201T,
PA-28RT-201,
PA-28RT-201T,
PA-28-201T, PA-28-236
Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) PA-44-180, PA-44-180T J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) PA-30, PA-39, PA-40 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) PA-31-300 X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
PA-31 (-310), PA-31-325, Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
PA-31-350 Pneumatic
Piper Aircraft, Inc. PA-31P, PA-31T, PA-31T1, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) PA-31T2, PA-31T3, X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] PA-31P-350 [1] [2] [5] [7]
PA-32-260, PA-32-300,
PA-32S-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300,
Piper Aircraft, Inc. PA-32RT-300T, Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) PA-32R-301(SP), J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[The New Piper Aircraft, Inc.] PA-32R-301(HP), [1] [2] [5] [7]
PA-32R-301T, PA-32-301,
PA-32-301T, PA-32-301FT,
PA32-301XTC
PA-34-200, PA-34-200T, Electric or
PA-34-220T Pneumatic
Electric or
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) PA-38-112 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
Polskie Zaklady Lotnicze Spolka zo.o Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Polskie Zaklady Lotnicze Spolka zo.o.) PZL M26 01 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[PZL Mielec] [1] [2] [5] [7]

Rev. V Page K-15
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Reims Aviation S.A. Electric or
F406 X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Reims Aviation S.A.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Short Brothers & Harland Ltd. SC-7 Series 2, Electric or
(Short Brothers & Harland Ltd.) SC-7 Series 3 Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Sky International
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Sky International, Inc.) A-1, A-1A, A-1B, A-1C-180, Electric or
J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
[Christen Industries; Aviat, Inc.; White A-1C-200 Pneumatic
[1] [3] [5]
International, LTD.; Pitts]
Zone 3, INSTALLATION
Slingsby Aviation Ltd. Electric or Zone 3 Zone 2A APPROVED FOR VFR
T67M260, T67M260-T3A J-3, J-4 J-5 J-14
(Slingsby Aviation Ltd.) Pneumatic [4] (fuselage OPERATION ONLY.
only) [6] [8] [18]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
SOCATA TB9, TB10, TB20, TB21, Electric or
(SOCATA - Groupe Aerospatiale) TB200 Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
SOCATA Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(SOCATA) TBM 700 (TBM850) X J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [17]
Pneumatic
[EADS SOCATA] [1] [2] [5] [7]
SOCATA, S.A. Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or J-2, J-4
(SOCATA, S.A.) GA-7 (Cougar) J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic [7]
[Grumman] [1] [2] [5] [7]
STOL
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Sky Enterprises, Inc.) Electric or
RC-3 J-2, J-4 J-7 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[Republic; Sol Amphibian; Seabee; Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Trident; TwinBee]
STOL Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(STOL Aircraft Corporation) UC-1 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[United Consultants; Republic; Twin-Bee] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Symphony Aircraft Industries Inc. Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Symphony Aircraft Industries Inc.) OMF-100-160, SA 160 Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10] [14] [18]
[OMF] [1] [2] [5]
TKEF Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(The King’s Engineering Fellowship Model 44 J-2, J-4 J-9 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
(TKEF)) [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Trident Electric or
TR-1 J-2, J-4 J-7 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Viking Air, Ltd) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]

Rev. V Page K-16
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
Triton Aerospace LLC Zone 3,
Electric or
(Triton Aerospace LLC) Zone 3 Zone 2A
A500 X Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-10 Not Allowed [8] [10] [19]
[Triton America LLC; AAI Acquisition, Inc.; [4] (fuselage
[13]
Adam Aircraft] only) [6]
True Flight Holdings LLC
(True Flight Holdings LLC)
[American Aviation Corporation;
Grumman American Aviation Corporation; Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
Gulfstream American Corporation; AA-1, AA-1A, AA-1B, AA-1C J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
Gulfstream Aerospace Corporation; [1] [2] [5] [7]
American General Aircraft Corporation;
American General Aircraft Holding
Company, Inc.; Tiger Aircraft LLC]
True Flight Holdings LLC
(True Flight Holdings LLC)
[American Aviation Corporation;
Grumman American Aviation Corporation; Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
Gulfstream American Corporation; AA-5, AA-5A, AA-5B, AG-5B J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
Gulfstream Aerospace Corporation; [1] [2] [5] [7]
American General Aircraft Corporation;
American General Aircraft Holding
Company, Inc.; Tiger Aircraft LLC]
560-F, 680, 680E, 680F,
680F, 680FL, 680FL(P), Zone 3, Zone 3,
Twin Commander Electric or
680T, 680V, 680W, 681, 685, X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Twin Commander Aircraft LLC) Pneumatic
690, 690A, 690B, 690C, [1] [2] [5] [7]
690D, 695, 695A, 695B, 720
Zone 3, Zone 3,
700 X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Twin Commander Aircraft Corporation) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
500-B, 500-U, 500-S, 560-E X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
500, 500-A, 520, 560, 560-A X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Viking Air Limited
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Viking Air Limited) DHC-6-1, DHC-6-100, Electric or
[Bombardier Inc.; de Havilland Inc.; Twin DHC-6-200, DHC-6-300 Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Otter]
Viking Air Limited Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Viking Air Limited) DHC-3 X J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Bombardier Inc.; de Havilland Inc.; Otter] [1] [2] [5] [7]

Rev. V Page K-17
Lightning Zone Type
G600 GTP 59 GMU 44
Viking Air Limited
(Viking Air Limited) Zone 3, Zone 3,
DHC-2 Mark I, DHC-2 Electric or
[deHavilland Aircraft of Canada, Limited; J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Mark II, DHC-2 Mark III Pneumatic
Boeing of Canada, Ltd. (de Havilland [1] [2] [5] [7]
Div.); deHavilland Inc.; Bombardier Inc.]
Vulcanair S.p.A. Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Vulcanair S.p.A.) AP68TP 600 “Viator” J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Partenavia] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Vulcanair S.p.A. Zone 3, Zone 3,
P68, P68B, P68C, P68C-TC, Electric or
(Vulcanair S.p.A.) J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
AP68TP 300 “Spartacus” Pneumatic
[Partenavia] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Vulcanair S.p.A. P68 “Observer”, Zone 3, Zone 3,
(Vulcanair S.p.A.) P68 TC “Observer”, Pneumatic J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [14]
[Partenavia] P68 “Observer 2” [1] [2] [5] [7]
Vulcan Air S.p.A. Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(Vulcanair S.p.A.) SF600, SF600A X J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Siai Marcheetti S.r.I.] [1] [2] [5] [7]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
WACO Electric or
YMF J-2, J-4 J-14 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
(The WACO Aircraft Company) Pneumatic
[1] [3] [5]
WSK “PZL-MIELEC” OBR
Zone 3, Zone 3,
(WSK PZL MIELEC and OBR SK Electric or
PZL M20 03 J-2, J-4 J-8 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
MIELEC) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
[PZL]
Zone 3, Zone 3,
Zenair Electric or
CH2000 J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
(Zenair Ltd.) Pneumatic
[1] [2] [5] [7]
ZLIN Aircraft a.s. Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(ZLIN Aircraft a.s.) ZLIN 526L J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A [8] [10]
Pneumatic
[Moravan National Corporation] [1] [3] [5]
ZLIN Aircraft a.s. Zone 3, Zone 3,
Electric or
(ZLIN Aircraft a.s.) Z-242L, Z-143L J-2, J-4 J-5 J-14 Zone 2A Zone 2A
Pneumatic
[Moravan a.s.] [1] [2] [5] [7]

Rev. V Page K-18
Notes:
[1] The GTP 59 cannot be installed on Zone 2A composite areas.
[2] The GTP 59 must be bonded to the aluminum skin. For details, refer to Section 3.2.6.1.
[3] The GTP 59 must be bonded to the metallic tube structure. For details, refer to
Section 3.2.6.2.
[4] The GTP 59 must be isolated from the aircraft ground plane. For details, refer to
Section 3.2.6.3.
[5] The GMU 44 must be bonded to the aircraft ground plane. For details, refer to
Section 3.2.4.2.
[6] The GMU 44 must be isolated from the aircraft ground plane. For details, refer to
Section 3.2.4.3.3.
[7] The GMU 44 may be mounted in the wingtip provided that certain criteria are met. For
details, refer to Section 2.5.11.5.2.
[8] Nonmetallic aircraft.
[9] Model may require modifications to fit GDU 620. For information, refer to
Section 2.5.11.3.
[10] Requires lightning protection. For additional details, refer to Table K-2.
[11] For information regarding possible instrument panel replacement, refer to
Section 2.5.11.3.
[12] Aircraft models with “Electric” listed in the Standby Indicator column are eligible to install
the electric indicators specified in Appendix Section E.1, unless otherwise specified in
this table. The Garmin G5 Electronic Attitude Indicator can ONLY be installed as a
standby instrument in Class I aircraft (single reciprocating engine aircraft with a
maximum takeoff weight of 6,000 lbs. or less) as defined in AC 23.1309-1E
Figure 2, listed on the G5 Part 23 AML and G500/G600 Part 23 AML.
[13] Not eligible to use Garmin G5 Attitude Indicator, L3 Communications ESI-1000,
ESI-2000, or MD302 as a standby indicator.
[14] Not eligible for dual G500/G600 installation.
[15] Aircraft checklist must be modified. For additional information, refer to Section 5.11.3.1.
[16] Prior to beginning the installation, contact Garmin regarding the availability of the
ARINC 429 Fast/Slow Enablement Card.
[17] For RVSM eligibility, refer to Appendix P.
[18] Remote LRUs must be installed on existing structure designated by aircraft
manufacturer for avionics installation.
[19] Installation of the GSU 75(B) in composite aircraft requires the installation of a ground
strap. For additional information, refer to Appendix Section N.3.
[20] Only for aluminum wings. Not allowed for wooden wings.

Rev. V Page K-19
A “Y” in an LRU column indicates a TVS and fuse combination is required for that LRU. Consequently,
an “N” indicates the TVS and fuse combination is not required. The interconnect diagrams in Appendix F
describe how the TVS and fuse are connected for a particular LRU.
Approved electromechanical and electronic standby indicators are listed in Appendix Section E.1.
• If an electromechanical standby attitude indicator is utilized, it may require one or two TVS/fuse
combinations, depending upon the aircraft model. The TVS components are listed as TVS1 and
TVS2 and are specified in the interconnect diagrams (Figure F-21 and Figure F-22)
• If an electronic standby indicator is utilized, it may require a TVS/fuse depending on the aircraft
model. Connect the TVS2 assembly at the power bus, similar to Figure F-21
Aircraft models that are limited to VFR operation only are not required to have TVSs and associated fuses
installed. Consequently, these models do not appear in Table K-2.
Table K-2 Lightning Protection Requirements
TVS Required on LRU Power Input?
Electro-
Aircraft Make
Aircraft Model mechanical Electronic
(TCDS Holder) GRS GDC GSU Notes
Designation Standby Standby GDU GAD
[common name or previous make] 77 74( ) 75 (B)
TVS1 TVS2 TVS2

American Champion 7ECA, 7GCAA, 7GCBC,
(American Champion Aircraft 7KCAB, 8KCAB, Y N N N Y Y Y N [1] [2]
Corporation) 8GCBC
Alexandria Aircraft
17-30, 17-31,
(Alexandria Aircraft LLC)
17-31TC, 17-30A, Y N N N Y Y Y N [1] [2]
[Bellanca Aircraft Corp; Viking
17-31A, 17-3A1TC
Aviation, Inc.; Bellanca, Inc.]
Cessna
LC40-550FG,
(Cessna Aircraft Company)
LC41-550FG, Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
[Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing;
LC42-550FG
The Lancair Company]
T-50 (Army AT-17), and
Cessna
UC-78 Series; and Y N N N Y Y Y N [1] [2]
(Cessna Aircraft Company)
Navy JRC-1
Cirrus Design Corporation
SR20, SR22 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
(Cirrus Design Corporation)
Diamond DA 40 ,
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
(Diamond Aircraft Industries GmbH) DA 40F (IFR)
Diamond
DA 42 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
(Diamond Aircraft Industries Inc.)
Extra
EA-300, EA-300/L,
(Extra Flugzeugproduktions- und
EA-300/S, Y N N N Y Y Y N [1] [2]
Vertriebs- GmbH)
EA-300/200
Extra
(Extra Flugzeugproduktions- und
EA-400 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
Vertriebs- GmbH)
GROB
G120A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
(GROB-WERKE)

Rev. V Page K-20
Electro-
Aircraft Make
TVS1 TVS2 TVS2

Hawker Beechcraft
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation) D17S (UC43, UC43B,
Y N N N Y Y Y N [1] [2]
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon GB-1, GB-2), SD17S
Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation)
G17S Y N N N Y Y Y N [1] [2]
[Beech Aircraft Company; Raytheon
Aircraft Company]
DGA-15P (UC-70,
Howard
GH-1, GH-2, GH-3,
(Howard Aircraft Foundation) Y N N N Y Y Y N [1] [2]
NH-1), DGA-15J
[Jobmaster Co]
(UC-70B), DGA-15W
Liberty
XL-2 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
(Liberty Aerospace Incorporated)
Bee Dee M-4, M-4,
M-4C,M-4S, M-4T,
M-4-180C, M-4-180S,
M-4-180T, M-4-210,
M-4-210C, M-4-210S,
M-4-210T,M-4-220,
M-4-220C, M-4-220S,
M-4-220T, M-5-180C,
M-5-200, M-5-210C,
M-5-210TC, M-5-220C,
M-5-235C, M-6-180,
M-6-235, M-7-235,
MX-7-235, MX-7-180,
Maule
MX-7-420, MXT-7-180, Y N N N Y Y Y N [1] [2]
(Maule Aerospace Technology, Inc.)
MT-7-235, M-8-235,
MX-7-160, MXT-7-160,
MX-7-180A,
MXT-7-180A,
MX-7-180B, M-7-235B,
M-7-235A, M-7-235C,
MX-7-180C, M-7-260,
MT-7-260, M-7-260C,
M-7-420AC,
MX-7-160C,
MX-7-180AC,
M-7-420A, MT-7-420,
M-4-180V, M-9-235
Sky International
(Sky International, Inc.) A-1, A-1A, A-1B,
Y N N N Y Y Y N [1] [2]
[Christen Industries; Aviat, Inc.; A-1C-180, A-1C-200
White International, LTD.; Pitts]
Symphony Aircraft Industries Inc.
(Symphony Aircraft Industries Inc.) OMF-100-160, SA 160 Y N N N Y Y Y N [1] [2]
[OMF]

Rev. V Page K-21
Electro-
Aircraft Make
TVS1 TVS2 TVS2

Triton Aerospace LLC
(Triton Aerospace LLC)
A500 Y N Y Y Y Y Y N
[Triton America LLC; AAI
Acquisition, Inc.; Adam Aircraft]
WACO
YMF Y N N N Y Y Y N [1] [2]
(The WACO Aircraft Company)
ZLIN Aircraft a.s.
(ZLIN Aircraft a.s.) ZLIN 526L Y N N N Y Y Y N [1] [2]
[Moravan National Corporation]
Notes:
[1] TVS is not required on GDU 620.
[2] TVS2 is not required for electric standby ADI.

Rev. V Page K-22
APPENDIX L GMU 44 MOUNTING IN NONMETALLIC WINGTIP
L.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ L-2

L.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied ............................................................................................ L-2
L.3 Overbraid Fabrication and Installation .......................................................................................... L-3
L.3.1 Overbraid Termination Methods ........................................................................................... L-3
L.3.2 Overbraid Terminal Bonding ................................................................................................ L-4

Rev. V Page L-1
L.1 Overview
In some installations, it is desirable to mount the GMU 44 Magnetometer in the wingtip of a metal aircraft
that has nonmetallic (e.g., fiberglass) wingtip covers. If this is the case, the following requirements must be
met:
1. The aircraft must have wingtip navigation lights installed.
2. Heavy overbraid must be installed over the wiring from the GMU to the entry into the wing.
3. The overbraid must be terminated at this wing entry point using a #10 terminal lug and stud.
4. The GMU 44 must be mounted to a metal rib that does not enclose a fuel bay.
5. There must be at least one intermediate rib between the rib that encloses the fuel bay and the rib on
which the GMU 44 is installed.
6. The GMU 44 mounting bracket must be electrically bonded to the wing using a minimum of five
fasteners or rivets.
7. The GMU 44 must be electrically bonded to the mounting bracket.
L.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied

The following materials are required to install the GMU 44 in a nonmetallic wingtip:
• Tinned copper flat braid, 3/4", QQB575F36T781 (recommended)
OR
Tinned copper tubular braid, 7/16", QQB575R30T437
• Electrical tie-down strap, adjustable, MS3367-{1, 2, or 7}-X
• Terminal lug, #10, uninsulated, MS20659-130
• Terminal stud, #10

Rev. V Page L-2
L.3 Overbraid Fabrication and Installation
The length of overbraid required is approximately equal to the length of the J441 service loop (measured
from the wing rib to the collar of J441) plus 14 inches.
While completing the following overbraid installation procedure, refer to Figure L-1 and Figure L-2:
1. Disconnect P441 from J441.
2. Slide the overbraid over J441 and its service loop.
3. Reconnect P441 to J441.
4. Pull the braid over the GMU cable, connector, and service loop.
5. Roll back approximately 1.5 inches of the outboard end of the overbraid.
6. Leaving the rolled-back portion free, secure the outboard end of the overbraid around the GMU
cable collar with an electrical tie-down strap.
7. Fold the free overbraid ends back over the tie-down strap and cable and secure them to the cable
with two additional tie-down straps. Refer to Figure L-1.
8. Terminate the inboard end of the overbraid in accordance with one of the two methods in
Appendix Section L.3.1.
9. Secure the overbraid pigtail to a #10 terminal stud. For stud location instructions, refer to
Appendix Section L.3.2.
L.3.1 Overbraid Termination Methods

Overbraid must be terminated with a #10 lug by one of the two following approved methods. Whichever
method is used, overbraid pigtail length must not exceed 2 inches. Refer to Figure L-1.
Method A
1. Carefully separate overbraid wire strands by hand to create an opening in the overbraid for passage
of the GMU 44 connector and cables.
CAUTION
Do not cut an opening in the overbraid strands. Loose overbraid wire ends can chafe the
cable and cause the GMU 44 to malfunction.
2. Trim the overbraid pigtail to a maximum length of 2 inches.

3. Terminate the braid pigtail in a #10 terminal lug.
Method B
1. Comb out a maximum of 2 inches of overbraid pigtail.
2. Twist the pigtail and terminate it in a #10 terminal lug.

Rev. V Page L-3
L.3.2 Overbraid Terminal Bonding
Electrical bond preparation for all aluminum-to-aluminum interfaces must be done in accordance with
SAE ARP1870 Sections 5.1 and 5.5. The overbraid terminal lug must be electrically bonded to a #10 stud
installed in accordance with AC43.13-1B Section 11-189, as well as the following restrictions:
1. If possible, use an existing tooling hole to install the stud.
2. If no suitable tooling hole exists, use an existing fastener (#10 or larger).
3. If there is no suitable fastener, install a new #10 stud as follows:
a. When adding a new stud hole to the rib, the center of the hole must be located a minimum of
1 inch away from any existing, non-stiffened rib hole.
b. The new stud hole must be located such that the terminal lug face, neck, or attaching hardware
will not intrude into the flange bend radius of any rib edge or stiffened rib hole. For terminal
lug dimensions, refer to MS20659.
4. Verify overbraid terminal bonding by checking resistance between the overbraid and the rib.
Resistance should be less than 2.5 mΩ.

Rev. V Page L-4
OVERBRAID
QQB575R30T437
OR
QQB575F36T781

0$;
GMU 44 CONNECTOR P441/J441
OVERBRAID DOUBLED BACK 1
ELECTRICAL TIEDOWN STRAP

MS33367-1-X
3 PLCS
NOTES:
#10 TERMINAL LUG 2
MS20559-130
1 See section L.3 for GMU 44 overbraid instructions.
2 See section L.3.1 for approved overbraid termination methods.
Figure L-1 GMU 44 Overbraid Installation

Rev. V Page L-5
OVERBRAID
GMU 44 MUST BE ELECTRICALLY
BONDED TO MOUNTING BRACKET 3
1 2 4
ISOMETRIC VIEW
MOUNTING BRACKET MUST

VIEW A-A: WINGTIP VIEW BE ELECTRICALLY BONDED
LOOKING INBOARD TO RIB USING AT LEAST FIVE
FASTENERS/RIVETS
A 3
AT LEAST ONE RIB BETWEEN
GMU 44 LOCATION AND FUEL BAY
OVERBRAID (REQUIRED ON ALL GMU 44
CABLING EXTENDING PASSED METAL RIB
THAT IS FURTHEST OUTBOARD).
1 INSTALL #10 GROUNDING HARDWARE IN ACCORDANCE WITH

AC 43.13-1B, SECTION 11-189. IF THERE IS AN EXISTING HOLE LOCATED
IN AN APPROPRIATE AREA IT MAY BE UTILIZED FOR THE GROUNDING
HARDWARE. IF THERE IS NO EXISTING HOLE USABLE FOR THIS
PURPOSE THEN DRILL AND DE-BURR A 0.191"-0.203" HOLE.
A METAL RIB
2 MS20659-130 TERMINAL LUG
3 REFER TO SECTION 3.8.1 FOR ELECTRICAL BONDING REQUIREMENTS.
4 TERMINAL LUG FACE OR CONNECTING HARDWARE MUST NOT

INTERFERE WITH BEND RADIUS OF RIB EDGES OR STIFFENED HOLES.
STUD HOLE MUST BE LOCATED A MINIMUM OF ONE INCH FROM
UNSTIFFENED HOLES. REFER TO MSZ0559 FOR LUG DIMENSIONS.
Figure L-2 GMU 44 Overbraid Termination

Rev. V Page L-6
APPENDIX M ADVANCED AIRSPEED SETTINGS
(GDU 620 SOFTWARE VERSION 5.00 OR LATER)
M.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... M-2
M.2 Configuration Page Layout .......................................................................................................... M-2
M.3 Arc Ranges ................................................................................................................................... M-3
M.3.1 Configuration ....................................................................................................................... M-3
M.3.2 Example ................................................................................................................................ M-5
M.4 Markings and Bugs ...................................................................................................................... M-6
M.5 Overspeeds ................................................................................................................................... M-8
M.5.1 Configuration ....................................................................................................................... M-8
M.5.2 Overspeeds Configuration Examples ................................................................................... M-9
M.6 GDU 620 Airspeed Tape Configuration Examples ................................................................... M-10
M.6.1 Beechcraft Bonanza A36 (example) ................................................................................... M-11
M.6.2 Columbia 400 (example) .................................................................................................... M-12

Rev. V Page M-1
M.1 Overview
The Advanced IAS Tape mode allows the configuration of the Airspeed Tape to match any airspeed
indicator. Color bands, markings, and bugs may all be individually configured. As an additional option,
Vne may be configured as fixed or variable, with up to ten altitude and IAS level pairs entered in variable
mode.
M.2 Configuration Page Layout

In Configuration mode, on the Airframe Configuration page, select the IAS TAPE field, and set the field
value to ADVANCED. This will set the Airspeed Configuration page, shown in Figure M-1, to the
Advanced Configuration mode.
Figure M-1 AIRSPEED CONFIGURATION Page

Rev. V Page M-2
M.3 Arc Ranges
M.3.1 Configuration
The information listed in Table M-1 must be obtained for every installation. Figure M-2 illustrates airspeed
tape arc ranges for the GDU 620. The POH/AFM column lists a suggested location for obtaining this
information. Arc ranges are typically shown on the airspeed indicator being replaced, but should be
checked for accuracy if records indicate it has been replaced. Vne, whether fixed or variable, will be
displayed as the beginning of the red/white striped band (barber pole) on the IAS tape.
Figure M-2 shows a visual correlation between arcs defined in POH/AFM Type data and those configured
in the GDU 620.
NOTE
These ranges must match the Type Data (POH/AFM or aircraft specifications) for the
specific aircraft being modified. The source of the airspeed information should be entered
in the Configuration Checkout Log, Figure 5-81.
NOTE
If the airspeed values are listed in the Type Data (POH/AFM or aircraft specifications) for
both IAS and CAS, use the IAS values.
NOTE
Do not configure two arc ranges to overlap each other in the Configuration page. Gaps
are acceptable between ranges, but overlaps are not acceptable.

Rev. V Page M-3
Table M-1 Advanced Airframe Specific Configuration Data – Arc Ranges
POH/AFM
Arc Color Description Note
Section
If the aircraft has a defined white or green arc, set
the red arc to ON. Set the Max value of the red arc
to the lowest value of the white or green arc (Vso).
RED
Low speed awareness 2 - Limitations A red low-speed awareness arc will appear below
(LOW SPEED)
the lowest marked stall speed.
If the aircraft does not have defined white or green
arc, set the red arc to OFF.
Set the Min value to the bottom of the POH/AFM
defined range.
If WHITE and GREEN arcs overlap, set the Max
value to the beginning of the WHITE/GREEN arc.
If WHITE and GREEN arcs do not overlap, set the
Full flap operational Max value to the top of the POH/AFM or aircraft
WHITE 2 - Limitations specification defined range.
range
If a WHITE arc is not defined by the AFM/POH or
aircraft specifications, set both the MIN and MAX
values to the aircraft stall speed in the landing
configuration (Vs0). This setting will not display
white arc, but the system needs it to characterize
aircraft performance.
If the HALF WHITE arc range is not defined by the
Standard operational AFM/POH or aircraft specification, set to OFF.
HALF WHITE 2 - Limitations
range This may sometimes be called a “narrow WHITE
arc.”
If a WHITE/GREEN arc is not defined by the
Overlap between
AFM/POH or aircraft specification, set to OFF.
WHITE/GREEN standard operational and 2 - Limitations
flaps operational ranges If WHITE and GREEN arcs overlap, configure to
the range they overlap within.
If the GREEN arc is not defined by the AFM/POH
or aircraft specification, set to OFF.
If WHITE and GREEN arcs overlap, set Min value
Standard operational to the Max of WHITE/GREEN.
GREEN 2 - Limitations
range If the YELLOW arc is defined, set to the Min of the
YELLOW arc (Vno).
If the YELLOW arc is NOT defined, set Max value
to Vno/Vne.
If the YELLOW arc is defined by the AFM/POH or
aircraft specification, set to ON with Min value
Caution / smooth air equal to Maximum structural speed (Vno). Max
YELLOW 2 - Limitations
operational range value should be configured to Vne, or the highest
value of Vne, if variable.
If the YELLOW arc is not defined, set to OFF.
Never exceed speed / If defined as a fixed value, set to FXD, and enter
max operating speed / POH/AFM defined Vne/Vmo as the Min value.
Vne/Vmo/Mmo 2 - Limitations
max operating mach If variable with altitude, set to VAR and set over-
number speeds in accordance with Appendix Section M.5.

Rev. V Page M-4
$LUVSHHG7DSH$UF5DQJHV $LUVSHHG7DSH$UF5DQJHV
)RU9QH$LUFUDIW )RU9PR0PR$LUFUDIW
1RWWR6FDOH 1RWWR6FDOH
9QH 9PR
*'8 32+$)0
<(//2: 'HILQHG
$5&5$1*( <HOORZ$UF
9QR
*'8
*5((1
,QFUHDVLQJ,$6
,QFUHDVLQJ,$6
$5&5$1*(
9IH 9IH
32+$)0
'HILQHG
*UHHQ$UF
*'8 *'8 32+$)0
:+,7(*5((1 +$/):+,7( 'HILQHG
$5&5$1*( $5&5$1*( 7KLQ:KLWH$UF
32+$)0
'HILQHG
:KLWH$UF
9V 9V
*'8 *'8 32+$)0

:+,7( :+,7( 'HILQHG
$5&5$1*( $5&5$1*( :KLWH$UF
9V 9V
*'8 *'8
5(' 5('
$5&5$1*( $5&5$1*(
Figure M-2 Airspeed Tape Arc Range Diagrams
M.3.2 Example
For an example, Section 2 (Limitations) of the Beech Bonanza (A36) POH/AFM defines a white arc
(61-124 KIAS), green arc (68-167 KIAS), and a yellow arc (167-205 KIAS). As the white and green arcs
overlap, they must be entered in separately.
• Where there is no overlap in the POH/AFM defined white arc range, configure the WHITE field
to this range (61-68 KIAS)
• Where there is overlap of the POH/AFM defined white and green arcs, configure the
WHITE/GREEN field to this range (68-124 KIAS)
• Where there is no overlap in the POH/AFM defined green arc, configure the GREEN field to this
range (124-167 KIAS)
• As the POH/AFM defined yellow arc does not overlap any other arcs, configure the YELLOW
field to this range (167-205 KIAS)

Rev. V Page M-5
M.4 Markings and Bugs
The information obtained in Table M-2 and Table M-3 must be obtained for each installation. The
POH/AFM column lists a suggested location for obtaining this information. If a marking is not defined for
the aircraft, then it should be set as OFF.
NOTE
These markings must match the Type Data (POH/AFM or aircraft specification) for the
specific aircraft being modified.
NOTE
If the airspeed values are listed in the Type Data (POH/AFM) for both IAS and CAS, use
the IAS values.
Table M-2 Advanced Airframe Specific Configuration Data – Markings
POH/AFM
Marking Description Note
Section
A small white triangle – If defined in POH/AFM, set to
WHITE TRIANGLE 2 - Limitations
meaning varies by airframe. given value. Else, set to OFF.
Typically marks the minimum Lower red radial on ASI of
controllable airspeed for twin- 3 - Emergency light twins.
RED BAR
engine aircraft with only one Procedures Set to 0 Kt (off) for single
engine operational (Vmca). engine aircraft.
Typically marks the single- Blue radial on ASI of light
engine best rate-of-climb 3 - Emergency twins.
BLUE BAR
speed for a twin-engine Procedures Set to 0 Kt (off) for single
aircraft. engine aircraft.
If a fixed Red/White Bar, (not
Varies – sometimes used as a a barber pole) is shown in the
RED/WHITE BAR 2 - Limitations
fixed point Vne marking. POH/AFM, set to given value.
Else, set to OFF.
Maximum landing gear Set to 0 Kt (off) for fixed gear
Vle 2 - Limitations
extended speed. aircraft.

Rev. V Page M-6
Table M-3 Advanced Airframe Specific Configuration Data – Bugs
POH/AFM
Bug Description Note
Section
3 - Emergency Optional.
GLIDE Glide speed
Procedures Set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the POH/AFM.
Optional.
4 - Normal
Vr Rotation airspeed Typically set to rotation speed.
Procedures
Set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the POH/AFM.
Optional.
4 - Normal Set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the POH/AFM.
Vx Best angle-of-climb speed
Procedures If there are two speeds listed (gear up/gear
down), use the speed listed for gear down.
Optional.
4 - Normal Set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the POH/AFM (if
Vy Best rate-of-climb speed
Procedures there are two speeds listed (gear up/gear
down), use the speed listed for gear up).

Rev. V Page M-7
M.5 Overspeeds
NOTE
The OVERSPEEDS window does not appear unless Vne/Vmo/Mmo is set to VAR in the
ARC RANGES window.
M.5.1 Configuration
NOTE
If the POH/AFM defines multiple Vne points, and the last point defines Vne at the aircraft
operating ceiling, the POH/AFM defined points must be used to configure the GDU.
NOTE
If the Vne is defined as varying with altitude, and the Vne at the operating ceiling is not
defined, then the last ALT/IAS point entered must be calculated at the aircraft’s operating
ceiling as a linear line from the last ALT/IAS point. In all cases, the last point entered
must define Vne/Vmo at the operating ceiling.
If the aircraft has a designated Mmo/Mmo level, or is specified as having a Vne / Vmo that varies with
altitude, set the Arc Ranges Vne/Vmo/Mmo field to VAR, and configure the GDU 620 airspeed tape to the
aircraft specifications using the OVERSPEEDS window, shown in Figure M-3. If only the Mmo/Mmo
level or the variable Vne is defined, then those fields that are undefined, respectively, should be set to OFF.
The Mmo and Mmo level fields define a minimum altitude where Mmo is a limiting factor on
performance. Above the Mmo level, Mmo may define the start of the barber pole. The Vne/Vmo altitude
and IAS section defines limitations on IAS at specified altitudes. The first ALT/IAS point entered will
define Vne/Vmo at all altitudes below the altitude specified.
If Vne/Vmo is only defined once, then this single point should be entered with the ALT field being the
aircraft’s operating ceiling.
However, if Vne/Vmo is defined as varying with altitude, then at least two points will be required – the last
two of which will define a linear line for all altitudes past the last point entered. As such, the last point
entered must define Vne/Vmo at the aircraft’s operating ceiling.
These overspeed configurations must match the Type Data (POH/AFM) for the specific aircraft being
modified.
Figure M-3 OVERSPEEDS Window

Rev. V Page M-8
M.5.2 Overspeeds Configuration Examples
Example 1
An example Columbia 400 POH/AFM, in Section 2 Limitations, defines Vne as 230 KIAS and at FL250
as 174 KIAS. As such, the configuration should be entered as follows:
• 12,000FT at 230KT
• 25,000FT at 174KT
Example 2
Hypothetically, if the Vne was not defined at the operating ceiling, the configuration would then rely on the
POH/AFM Section 2 Limitations statement that Vne decreases by 4.4 KT per 1,000 FT of altitude above
12,000 FT. Here, the calculation for Vne at the aircraft operating ceiling would be:
Vne= 230 KT – [(25,000FT – 12,000FT) * 4.4 KT / 1,000 FT] = 172.8 KT.
As such, the configuration entered would be:
• 12,000FT at 230KT
• 25,000FT at 172KT

Rev. V Page M-9
M.6 GDU 620 Airspeed Tape Configuration Examples
This section compares two examples of GDU 620 airspeed tape configuration with their respective
existing ASI configuration and tape definitions.
NOTE
In all cases, the specific aircraft’s Type Data (POH/AFM) must be considered the
definitive source for Arc Range, Marking, and Bug configuration values.
NOTE
While the configuration shown is taken from the POH/AFM defined values, all airspeed
bugs are pilot configurable from the first AUX page on the MFD.

Rev. V Page M-10
M.6.1 Beechcraft Bonanza A36 (example)
AFM Definitions
Marking Value AFM Section
White arc 56-123 KIAS
Green arc 62-166 KIAS
2 - Limitations
Yellow arc 166-204 KIAS
Red line 204 KIAS
Vle 153 KIAS 2 - Limitations
3 - Emergency
Glide 110 KIAS
Procedures
Vr 70 KIAS
4 - Normal
Vx 78 KIAS
Procedures
Vy 96 KIAS
CURRENT ASI
Figure M-4 Current ASI and Tape Markings
Figure M-5 Equivalent IAS Tape and Airspeed Configuration Page

Rev. V Page M-11
M.6.2 Columbia 400 (example)
POH/AFM Definitions
POH/AFM
Marking Value
Section
White arc 60-117 KIAS
Green arc 73-181 KIAS
2 - Limitations
Yellow arc 181-230 KIAS
Red line 230 KIAS
3 - Emergency
Glide 108 KIAS
Procedures
Vr 110 KIAS
4 - Normal
Vx 82 KIAS
Procedures
Vy 110 KIAS
Vne [1] 230 KIAS
2 - Limitations
Vne @ FL250 174 KIAS
[1] Decrease 4.4 knots for each 1000 ft
above 12,000 ft (Press. Alt.)
CURRENT ASI
Figure M-6 Current ASI and Tape Markings
Vne = 230 KT @ FL075
Vne = 213 KT @ FL160
Figure M-7 Equivalent IAS Tape and AIRSPEED CONFIGURATION Page

Rev. V Page M-12
APPENDIX N HIRF AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
N.1 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Interface (Metallic Aircraft Only) ....................................................N-2
N.1.1 Materials Required but Not Supplied ....................................................................................N-2
N.1.2 Overbraid Installation Procedure ...........................................................................................N-2
N.1.3 Overbraid Terminal Bonding ................................................................................................ N-3
N.2 Stick Pusher and Warntone Generator Interface (PC-12) (G600 System Only) ...........................N-6
N.2.1 Materials Required but Not Supplied ....................................................................................N-6
N.2.2 Overbraid Installation Procedure ...........................................................................................N-7
N.3 GSU 75(B) Grounding Strap (Composite Aircraft Only) ............................................................ N-13
N.3.1 Materials Required but Not Supplied ..................................................................................N-13
N.3.2 Grounding Strap Installation Procedure .............................................................................. N-13

Rev. V Page N-1
N.1 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Interface (Metallic Aircraft Only)
When interfacing the GDU 620 to an ARINC 708 weather radar (WXR), additional overbraid is required
over any WXR cabling in the radome area prior to entering the metal fuselage or metal wing. Refer to
Section 2.5.24. Any wiring for weather radar configuration modules does not require overbraid as part of
this STC. This section describes how to install the overbraid for the WXR cabling.
NOTE
To determine if an aircraft model is classified as metal or nonmetallic, refer to
Appendix K.
N.1.1 Materials Required but Not Supplied

The following materials are required to install WXR cabling overbraid in the radome area:
• Tinned copper flat braid, 3/4”, QQB575F36T781 (recommended)
OR
Tinned copper tubular braid, 7/16”, QQB575R30T437
• Electrical tie-down strap, adjustable, MS3367-{1, 2, or 7}-X
• Terminal lug, #10, uninsulated, MS20659-130
• Terminal stud, #10 (not required if existing fastener is used)
N.1.2 Overbraid Installation Procedure

Refer to Figure N-1 and Figure N-2 while completing the following overbraid installation procedure.
NOTE
The length of overbraid required is approximately equal to the length of the WXR cabling
in the radome area (measured from the bulkhead to the WXR R/T connector) plus 6 inches.
NOTE
Figure N-2 shows cable overbraid for a bulkhead-mounted WXR. For a wing pod WXR
installation, WXR cabling must be continuously overbraided from the WXR R/T connector
until it enters the metal wing.
1. Remove the backshell from the WXR R/T connector and save for re-installation. This will reduce
the overall width and allow the overbraid to slide over the cable without the need to unpin the
connector.
2. Slide the overbraid onto the cable from the WXR R/T to the bulkhead.
3. Re-install the WXR R/T connector backshell.
4. Roll back approximately 1.5 inches of the of the overbraid end at the WXR R/T connector.
5. Leaving the rolled back portion free, secure the outboard end of the overbraid around the WXR
connector or cable with an electrical tie-down strap.
6. Fold the free overbraid ends back over the tie-down strap and secure them to the cable with two
additional tie-down straps.
7. At the bulkhead end of the overbraid, comb out a maximum of two inches of braid, twist it, cut to
length if necessary, and terminate it in a #10 terminal lug. Refer to Figure N-1.

Rev. V Page N-2
8. Secure the overbraid pigtail to a #10 terminal stud. Refer to Appendix Section N.1.3 for overbraid
bonding instructions.
N.1.3 Overbraid Terminal Bonding

Electrical bond preparation for all aluminum-to-aluminum interfaces must be done in accordance with
SAE ARP1870, Sections 5.1 and 5.5. The overbraid terminal lug must be electrically bonded to a #10 stud
installed in accordance with AC43.13-1B Section 11-189, as well as the following restrictions:
1. If possible, use an existing tooling hole to install the stud.
2. If no suitable tooling hole exists, use an existing fastener (#10 or larger).
NOTE
Installation of a stud into a pressure bulkhead is not authorized under this STC. If a new
stud must be installed into a pressure bulkhead, additional approval for installation of the
stud will be required.
3. If there is no suitable fastener, install a new #10 stud as follows:

a. When adding a new stud hole to the bulkhead, the center of the hole must be located a
minimum of one inch away from any existing, non-stiffened hole.
b. The new stud hole must be located such that the terminal lug face, neck, or attaching
hardware will not intrude into the flange bend radius of any edge or stiffened hole.
Refer to MS20659 for terminal lug dimensions.
4. Verify overbraid terminal bonding by checking resistance between the overbraid and the bulkhead.
Resistance should be less than 2.5 mΩ.

Rev. V Page N-3
OVERBRAID
QQB575R30T437
OR
QQB575F36T781
0$;
Figure N-1 WXR Cable Overbraid Installation

Rev. V Page N-4
BULKHEAD
1 2
OVERBRAID
WEATHER RADAR R/T MUST BE

ELECTRICALLY BONDED TO BULKHEAD
1. INSTALL #10 GROUNDING HARDWARE IN ACCORDANCE WITH AC 43.13-1B, SECTION 11-189. IF THERE IS AN EXISTING
HOLE LOCATED IN AN APPROPRIATE AREA IT MAY BE UTILIZED FOR THE GROUNDING HARDWARE – OTHERWISE AN
EXISTING FASTER (#10 OR LARGER) MAY BE USED. IF THERE IS NO EXISTING HOLE OR SUITABLE FASTER USABLE
FOR THIS PURPOSE THEN DRILL AND DE-BURR A 0.191"-0.203" HOLE.
2. MS20659-130 TERMINAL LUG
Figure N-2 WXR Overbraid Termination

Rev. V Page N-5
N.2 Stick Pusher and Warntone Generator Interface (PC-12) (G600 System Only)
Each GDU 620 connector that interfaces directly to the Stick Pusher and Warntone Generator (SPWG)
must be terminated and overbraided as described in this section (e.g., Figure F-40, EMCA SWPG).

The following materials are required to install overbraid:
• Tinned copper flat braid, 3/4”, QQB575F36T781 (recommended)
OR
Tinned copper tubular braid, 7/16”, QQB575R30T437
• Shield terminators P/N S03-XX-R-9035-100 (Raychem)
• Silicone fusion tape (Garmin P/N 249-00114-00)
• Hose clamp (MS35842, SAE J1508 (Type F, I or M), or Fed Spec A-A-52506 (Type F, I or M))

Rev. V Page N-6
N.2.2 Overbraid Installation Procedure
1. Cut a piece of overbraid to a length of 12 inches ± 1 inch.
2. Slide this overbraid over the wire bundle and down out of the way of future work.
NOTE
This step may be performed after the wire bundle is terminated to the GDU 620 connector.
3. Terminate the shields as described in Figure 3-102, using the PREFERRED METHOD. Use shield
terminators P/N S03-xx-R-9035-100 (Raychem). These terminators use shield drain wires that are
uninsulated and braided, unlike the terminators that use shield drain wires that are insulated.
4. Insert all of the required wires into the GDU 620 connector. Refer to Figure N-3.
5. Separate the individual wires entering the connector into two halves. Wrap each half in silicone
fusion tape (Garmin P/N 249-00114-00) where the wires will be underneath the strain relief. Refer
to Figure N-3.
6. Wrap bundle with three layers of silicone fusion tape from approximately 3-5 inches from the back
of the connector. Refer to Figure N-3.
GDU 620 3.0

Connector
Shield
Drains Shield
Terminators
Overbraid
Silicone Fusion Tape
Figure N-3 Wire Termination in GDU 620 Connector

Rev. V Page N-7
7. Fold connector end of overbraid out and back so it can be positioned close to the plug, as shown in
Figure N-4. Slide the overbraid back up into its final position and fasten its end to the wire bundle
with three layers of silicone fusion tape. Refer to Figure N-4.
8. Approximately three inches from where the braid is fastened with silicone fusion tape, poke a
series of holes around (circumferentially) the overbraid and pull the individual shield terminations
out. Pull them out so that they are evenly distributed around the bundle. Refer to Figure N-4.
Overbraid
Shield Terminators
3.0
Figure N-4 Shield Termination and Overbraid Preparation

Rev. V Page N-8
9. Cut the braided shield drains to a length of 3 inches ± 0.5 inches. Arrange the individual braids
circumferentially around the bundle. Use three layers of silicone fusion tape to secure them. The
shield braid should be in direct contact with the overbraid. Refer to Figure N-5.
Overbraid
Figure N-5 Shield Termination Placement

Rev. V Page N-9
10. Fold the excess braid back so that the connector strain relief will clamp over the folded end. The
open end must enclose the shield terminations. Trim off any frayed overbraid. Using the three
strain relief screws, fasten the folded end of the braid to the connector strain relief, being careful
not to pinch any wires. The middle screw of the strain relief should go through the overbraid. Refer
to Figure N-6.
Overbraid
Figure N-6 Overbraid Placement

Rev. V Page N-10
11. Secure the end of the fold with three layers of silicone fusion tape and continue to wrap the
overbraid with silicone fusion tape 1.5 inches back from the strain relief. Refer to Figure N-7.
12. Install a hose clamp two inches back from the connector strain relief. Ensure that the hose clamp is
not installed on the shield terminators. The clamp should compress the individual shield drains to
the overbraid. Refer to Figure N-7.
Overbraid
Hose Clamp
1.5
Shield terminators should be

within this area
Figure N-7 Hose Clamp Placement

Rev. V Page N-11
13. Wrap the hose clamp with three layers of silicone fusion tape to prevent chafing against adjacent
harnesses. Refer to Figure N-8.
Overbraid
6.0
Figure N-8 Final Assembly

Rev. V Page N-12
N.3 GSU 75(B) Grounding Strap (Composite Aircraft Only)
The GSU 75(B) requires a grounding strap when installed in composite aircraft. This grounding strap must
be no longer than 10 inches in length and straps the GSU 75(B) unit backshell to the aircraft reference
ground.

The following materials are required to install the ground strap to the GSU 75(B) unit backshell:
• Tinned copper flat braid, 5/8", QQB575F36T375
• Ring terminal, 52263-1 (TE Connectivity AMP Connectors)
• Screw, PHP, 8-32 x 0.312", stainless, MS51957-42
OR
Screw, PHP, 8-32 x 0.312", CAD Plated Steel, MS35206-242
• Split washer, #8, (0.045" compressed thickness) stainless, MS35338-137
OR
Split washer, #8, (0.045" compressed thickness) cad-plated steel, MS35338-42
• Flat washer, stainless, #8, 0.032" thick, 0.174" ID, 0.375" OD, NAS1149CN832R
OR
Flat washer, cad-plated steel, #8, 0.032" thick, 0.174" ID, 0.375" OD, NAS1149FN832P
N.3.2 Grounding Strap Installation Procedure

To build and install the GSU 75(B) grounding strap:
1. Cut the tinned copper flat braid to the desired length (10 inches maximum).
2. Fold each end of the braid such that it can be inserted into the ring terminals.
3. Use a crimping hand tool (69959 - TE Connectivity AMP Connectors) to crimp the ring terminals
to the braid.
4. Secure one end of the ground strap to the GSU 75(B) connector shield block using the screw
specified above.
5. Secure the other end of the ground strap to the aircraft reference ground using the hardware in
Appendix Section N.3.1.

Rev. V Page N-13
APPENDIX P RVSM GROUP AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
FOR TBM 700 SERIES AIRCRAFT (G600 ONLY)
P.1 Group Approval ..............................................................................................................................P-2

P.2 System Description .........................................................................................................................P-3
P.2.1 Architecture 1: G600 & KFC 275/325 ...................................................................................P-3
P.2.2 Architecture 2: G600 & GFC 600 ..........................................................................................P-4
P.2.3 RVSM Required Avionics Check ..........................................................................................P-5
P.2.4 Required Interfaces and Functions for RVSM .......................................................................P-6
P.2.5 AM-250 Implementation ........................................................................................................P-7
P.2.6 Pitot-Static Connections .........................................................................................................P-9
P.2.7 Transponder ..........................................................................................................................P-10
P.3 Checkout .......................................................................................................................................P-11
P.3.1 Electrical System ..................................................................................................................P-11
P.3.2 Pitot-Static Systems ..............................................................................................................P-12
P.3.3 RVSM In-Flight Altitude Hold Check .................................................................................P-14
P.4 Updating Aircraft Documentation ................................................................................................P-15
TBM700 (850) series aircraft that comply with the installation guidance in this appendix are eligible for
RVSM Group approval.

Rev. V Page P-1
P.1 Group Approval
The G600 TBM700 series RVSM Group Approval is applicable to eligible aircraft that are modified in
accordance with this manual. Eligible aircraft for the G600 TBM700 series RVSM Group Approval are
TBM700A, B, C, and N (TBM850) series variants (S/N 014-433). TBM700 series aircraft with G1000
Integrated Flight Decks installed in accordance with Socata Modification Sheet MOD70-0276-00 used for
retrofit of A, B, and C series aircraft and MOD70-0176-00 used for N (TBM850) series aircraft are not
eligible for G600 RVSM group approval.

Rev. V Page P-2
P.2 System Description
Two general architectures are approved for installation that make aircraft modified in accordance with the
requirements of the STC eligible to operate in RVSM airspace. Each architecture has specific prerequisites
and co-requisites that must be met for the aircraft to be eligible for operations in RVSM Airspace.
A G600 system must be installed on the pilot’s side and an AM-250 installed (or retained) on the co-pilot’s
side. The G600 system must use either the GSU 75B or the GDC 74B with the SSEC enabled. In a dual
G600 system, this STC does not approve RVSM enablement on the co-pilot's side G600.
P.2.1 Architecture 1: G600 & KFC 275/325

The following equipment must be previously installed:
• KFC 275 or KFC 325 autopilot
• AM-250 altitude measurement system installed on co-pilot’s side
• A transponder with altitude reporting capability
• Static ports identified in Table P-1 must be installed and comply with the required surface
conditions and alignment tolerances
• The pitot-static systems must pass the required service checks
Installation of this equipment is beyond the scope this document and should be installed in accordance with
manufacturer instructions and Socata SB 70-120-34 or other approved data.
Aircraft modified in accordance with this STC that comply with this appendix qualify for operation in
RVSM airspace as a group in accordance with Title 14 of CFR Part 91, Appendix G Operations in Reduced
Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM) Airspace and FAA AC 91-85 Authorization of Aircraft and
Operators for Flight in Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum Airspace. Data in this appendix takes
precedence over other guidance in this manual. Other features or interfaces not specified this appendix
may be installed in accordance with this manual.
STANDBY
ALTIMETER CO-PILOT
PILOT PFD/MFD DISPLAY ADC 1
ADC 2 ALTIMETER ALT
GDU 620 ADC 2
AM-250
ADC 1
STANDBY
AIRSPEED ALT HOLD XPNDR 2
GSU 75B or GDC 74B OSCILLATOR (OPTIONAL)
ALT
KCP 220
XPNDR 1
AIR DATA &

ACCELERATIONS
ALT PRESELECT VS & ALT CAPTURE
SIGNALS GAD 43e ALT HOLD ENGAGE
Equipment Installed per KDC 222

G600 STC
Existing Equipment
Figure P-1 TBM700 RVSM System Diagram: Architecture 1

Rev. V Page P-3
P.2.2 Architecture 2: G600 & GFC 600
The following equipment must be previously installed:
• GFC 600 autopilot
• AM-250 altitude measurement system installed on co-pilot’s side
• A transponder with altitude reporting capability
• Static ports identified in Table P-1 must be installed and comply with the required surface
conditions and alignment tolerances
• The pitot-static systems must pass the required service checks
Installation of this equipment is beyond the scope this document and should be installed in accordance with
manufacturer instructions and Socata SB 70-120-34 or other approved data.
Aircraft modified in accordance with this STC that comply with this appendix qualify for operation in
RVSM airspace as a group in accordance with Title 14 of CFR Part 91, Appendix G Operations in Reduced
Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM) Airspace and FAA AC 91-85 Authorization of Aircraft and
Operators for Flight in Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum Airspace. Data in this appendix takes
precedence over other guidance in this manual. Other features or interfaces not specified in this appendix
may be installed in accordance with this manual.
STANDBY
ALTIMETER CO-PILOT
PILOT PFD/MFD DISPLAY ADC 1 ALTIMETER
ADC 2 ALT
GDU 620 ADC 2 AM-250
STANDBY ADC
AIRSPEED XPNDR 2
ALT (OPTIONAL)
ADC 1
XPNDR 1 GMC 605 GSU 75B or GDC 74B
Equipment Installed per

G600 STC
GSA 87 SERVOS
Existing Equipment
Other STC Equipment
Figure P-2 TBM700 RVSM System Diagram: Architecture 2

Rev. V Page P-4
P.2.3 RVSM Required Avionics Check
The following avionics and equipment are required for RVSM eligibility.
Table P-1 Required Equipment
Min No. Hardware [1]
Installed Description P/N
1 ADC #1/ADC #2 Switch Refer to Section 2.4.2.2
1 AM-250 70259N01D01
1 GAD 43e [7] 011-02349-00
GSU 75B: 011-03094-40

1 ADC [5]
GDC 74B: 011-01110-01
GSU 75B: 011-03094-40
1 AHRS [5]
GRS 77: 011-00868-10
1 GDU 620 [4] 011-01264-( )
1 GMU 44 011-00870-( )
GMC 605 [6] 011-02967-( )
1 OR
KCP-220 [2] 065-00064-0008
1 Transponder [3]
2 Static Port T700A3415017101
Notes:
[1] Equipment software versions are defined in Equipment List, G500/G600 PFD/MFD
System AML STC, Rev. 8 or later.
[2] Installed as part of the KFC 275 or KFC 325 autopilot system.
[3] Transponder must have altitude reporting capability.
[4] Only one GDU 620 is permitted for RVSM eligible installations.
[5] The GDC 74B and GRS 77 units can be used as alternatives to the GSU 75B. Either the
GSU 75B or the combination of the GDC 74B and GRS 77 must be installed.
[6] Installed as part of the GFC 600 autopilot system.
[7] GAD 43e not required if GFC 600 installed.

Rev. V Page P-5
P.2.4 Required Interfaces and Functions for RVSM
The G600 must display the flight director, provide Altitude Preselect/Vertical Speed functionality, provide
altitude altering, and have the SSEC enabled in accordance with Table P-2, Table P-3, and Table P-4. This
appendix only applies to RVSM specific requirements; other G600 interfaces specified in this manual are
optional for the installation.
Table P-2 RVSM Required Functions

G600 Interfaces Configuration Checkout Notes
Section 5.5.6
Altitude Alerter Section 5.2.6 NORMAL or HIGH PERF
Section 5.10.1
SSEC (TBM700/850) Section 5.5.5.13 Section 5.8.2 Enablement card per Table 2-2
NOTE
The connection of a GDU 620 to an audio panel is required for Altitude Alert tones. Refer
to Appendix Section E.17 for approved audio panels. The audio must be verified as
described in Section 5.5.6.
P.2.4.1 Architecture 1 Interfaces
NOTE
The KAS 297C is removed and the Altitude Preselect function is provided by the GAD 43e.
Table P-3 RVSM Required Interfaces: Architecture 1
G600 Interfaces Interconnect Drawing(s) Configuration Checkout
Section 5.5.13,
Autopilot Flight Director Figure F-11 Appendix Section 5.8.5
Section E.4
Section 5.5.12,
Figure F-27, Sheet 1
GAD 43e for Altitude Preselect Appendix Section 5.8.5
Figure F-28, Sheet 10
Section E.20
P.2.4.2 Architecture 2 Interfaces
Table P-4 RVSM Required Interfaces: Architecture 2

G600 Interfaces Interconnect Drawing Configuration Checkout
Section 5.5.13,
Autopilot Flight Director Figure F-47 Appendix Section 5.8.5
Section E.4

Rev. V Page P-6
P.2.5 AM-250 Implementation
P.2.5.1 Architecture 1 AM-250 Implementation
The AM-250 must be retained or installed on the co-pilot’s side. Installation of the AM-250 is beyond the
scope of this document. Refer to the manufacturer’s instruction and Socata SB 70-120-34. The co-pilot’s
AM-250 altitude hold oscillator signal must be connected to the autopilot computer. The altitude hold
oscillator signal was supplied by the pilot’s AM-250 in a previous RVSM configuration (Ref. 70-120-34).
To connect the co-pilot’s AM-250 as required, remove and stow the previously installed altitude hold
oscillator signal wires from the KCP 220. Connect the co-pilot’s AM-250 plug 1, pins 26 and 34 to the
autopilot computer KCP 220 plug 2, pin 12 (refer to Socata drawing T700 C 34 16 502). Connect the
ADC 1/ADC 2 switch as shown in Figure P-3. In a dual G600 installation, the air data switch must be
connected to the #1 Garmin ADC (pilot side) and the co-pilot's AM-250 (not the #2 Garmin ADC).
PFD 1 AIR DATA
GARMIN ADC #1
GSU GDC
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 P6202 75B 74B
ADC 1 P751 P741
ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 26 A
ARINC 429 OUT 1
ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 2 27 B
s
s
ADC 2
4 5
P2501 AM-250 ADC #2 (M44)

(P1)
P2202 14 A
KCP 220 (A82) ARINC 429 OUT
(P2) 13 B
s
ALT OSCL IN 12 26 AUTO PILOT OUT

3 34 AUTO PILOT RET
N/C 23 LEFT/RIGHT
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
6+,(/'/($'60867%(/(667+$1
672:255(029($//27+(50+]$/7,78'(26&,//$725:,5,1*35(9,286/<&211(&7('72.'&
$05(029('25.$65(029('21/<7+('(3,&7('$/7,78'(26&,//$725:,5,1*
0$<5(0$,1&211(&7('
6:,7&+0867%(02817('$'-$&(1772*'8
6:,7&+0867%(,//80,1$7('$1'/$%(/('$66+2:15()(5726(&7,21)2568,7$%/(
6:,7&+(6
3)'
$,5'$7$
$'& (green)
$'& (amber)
Figure P-3 ADC/AM-250 Interconnect: Architecture 1

Rev. V Page P-7
P.2.5.2 Architecture 2 AM-250 Implementation
The AM-250 must be retained or installed on the co-pilot’s side. Installation of the AM-250 is beyond the
scope of this document. Refer to the manufacturer’s instruction and Socata SB 70-120-34.
PFD 1 AIR DATA
GARMIN ADC #1
GSU GDC
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 P6202 75B 74B
ADC 1 P751 P741
ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 26 A
ARINC 429 OUT 1
ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 2 27 B
s
s
ADC 2
3 4
P2501 AM-250 ADC #2 (M44)

GMC 605 P6051 (P1)
14 A
ARINC 429 OUT
ADC 1 ARINC 429 IN 3A 21 13 B
s
ADC 1 ARINC 429 IN 3B 22
s
127(6
$//:,5(6$:*25/$5*(581/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
6+,(/'/($'60867%(/(667+$1
6:,7&+0867%(02817('$'-$&(1772*'8
6:,7&+0867%(,//80,1$7('$1'/$%(/('$66+2:15()(5726(&7,21)2568,7$%/(
6:,7&+(6
3)'
$,5'$7$
$'& (green)
$'& (amber)
Figure P-4 ADC/AM-250 Interconnect: Architecture 2

Rev. V Page P-8
P.2.6 Pitot-Static Connections
The G600 and standby instruments must be connected in accordance with Section 2.5.5, Section 2.5.11.6,
and Section 3.2.5.2 to the pitot-static systems, as shown in Figure P-5. To supply altimeter data for altitude
display, altitude alerting, and altitude preselect, the ADC must be connected to pitot-static system #1. To
supply altitude hold oscillator data to the autopilot systems, the AM-250 altimeter must be connected to
pitot-static system #2. The standby instruments must be connected to pitot-static system #2.
FORWARD
PRESSURE
BULKHEAD
OUT
(1) (2) (4) #1
EMG
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
(5)
(3)
(1) STANDBY INSTRUMENTS

(2) GDU 620
(3) ADC
(4) AM-250
PITOT 1 (5) EMERGENCY STATIC
SOURCE SELECTOR
PITOT 2
DRAWING
NOT TO SCALE
STATIC 2 STATIC 2
STATIC 1 STATIC 1
EMERGENCY AFT PRESSURE
STATIC BULKHEAD
Figure P-5 G600 RVSM Pitot-Static Connections

Rev. V Page P-9
P.2.7 Transponder
Transponder #1 must be connected to the GDU 620 in accordance with Figure P-6. For additional
transponder setup guidance, refer to Figure F-18 and Figure F-25.
Transponder #2, if installed, must be connected to the AM-250. Refer to Socata SB-70-120 Figure 5 or
other approved data for more information.
NOTE
Do not connect the ADC to either transponder.
GDU 620 PFD/MFD TRANSPONDER #1

RS-232 OUT 8 30 RS 232 IN
RS-232 GND 8 51
s
OR
GDU 620 PFD/MFD P6203 TRANSPONDER #1

ARINC 429 OUT 3A 2 A ARINC 429 IN
(GENERAL PURP) 3B 24 B
s
Figure P-6 RVSM Altitude Interconnect

Rev. V Page P-10
P.3 Checkout
P.3.1 Electrical System
Perform interface and functional check-outs for all relevant G600 electrical loads, interfaces, and functions
installed in accordance with this manual and Table P-3 or Table P-4.
Check the power distribution wiring by selecting EMER using the ESS BUS TIE selector. The primary
flight data displayed on the GDU 620 must remain operational.
NOTE
G600 display of ancillary functions (e.g., Rad Alt, MB, ADF, DME) may be lost when
EMGER is selected.
Verify ADC 1/ADC 2 switch lighting and colors comply with Section 2.4.2.2. When the G600 and
AM-250 are operating normally, and a GPS signal has been established, engage ADC 2 using the
ADC 1/ADC 2 switch. Verify the following annunciations are displayed:
• PFD - OAT Red X
• PFD - TAS Red X
• PFD - CHECK ATTITUDE
• MFD Alert - ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 Altitude Error Correction is unavailable
Engage ADC 1 using the ADC 1/ADC 2 switch. Verify that the annunciations listed above are removed
from the flight displays.

Rev. V Page P-11
P.3.2 Pitot-Static Systems
Pitot-static system #1, pitot-static system #2, and calibration of the AM-250 must meet the criteria in the
following sections. The air data tests and surface checks are required following the initial installation. The
G600 system must be maintained in accordance with G500/G600 PFD/MFD System Instructions for
Continued Airworthiness.
P.3.2.1 Air Data Test

The air data systems must be tested and maintained in accordance with Socata Maintenance Manual,
except as follows.
The following altimeter checks must be used in lieu of the Socata Maintenance Manual 34-11-00,
Table 503 and Section 5.8.2.3, with the following exceptions:
• For paragraph (b)(1)(i) Scale Error, use of Table P-5 instead of 14 CFR 43, Appendix E, Table I
• Do not perform paragraph (b)(1)(iv), Friction
• Do not perform paragraph (b)(1)(vi), Barometric Scale Error
The following Air Data and Altitude Alerter Tests are to be performed in conjunction with any other
regulated tests. The Air Data Test must be performed on both pilot and co-pilot systems with a calibrated
pitot-static test set with a combined accuracy/repeatability specification of less than ±20 feet for the test
altitude range.
NOTE
The standby altimeter is connected to the co-pilot side static system and it is not SSEC
corrected.
1. Connect the pitot-static tester to the aircraft left and right pitot and static ports in accordance with
Socata Maintenance Manual Section 34-11-00.
2. Perform a pitot-static system leak check of each system as described in Socata Maintenance
Manual Section 34-11-00.
3. File the results with the aircraft maintenance records.
4. Verify that the altimeter baro-setting is 29.92 in Hg (1013.25 millibar) on both sides.
5. Verify the Altitude Alerter annunciation and alert tones at test level of 29,000 feet during the Air
Data Test. To set the altitude bug and alerter, press ALT and rotate the lower left knob on the PFD.
6. Simulate the altitudes and airspeeds for each condition shown in Table P-5.
7. Record the altitude displayed on the GDU 620 and AM-250 for each condition on Table P-5.
8. Verify that the indicated altitudes are within allowable tolerances.
9. File the results with the aircraft maintenance records.
If either the pilot or co-pilot air data system does not meet the tolerances specified, maintenance checks
should be performed on the air data system or the pitot-static system.

Rev. V Page P-12
Table P-5 Air Data Test Points
Test Point Altitude Tolerance Range (ft)
Nominal
Altitude Airspeed Altitude Air Data 1 Air Data 2
(ft) (kts) (ft)
GSU 75B GDC 74B AM 250
-20 to 20 -20 to 20 -20 to 20
0 0
0
24 to 64 24 to 64 24 to 64*
150 44*
980 to 1020 980 to 1020 980 to 1020
1000 40 1000
2007 to 2057 2007 to 2057 2007 to 2057
2000 120 2032
4009 to 4059 4009 to 4059 4009 to 4059
4000 120 4034
8008 to 8068 8008 to 8068 8013 to 8063
120 8038
8000 8129 to 8249 8129 to 8249 8194 to 8244
300 8219
10029 to 10089 10029 to 10089 10034 to 10084*
10000 150 10059*
11007 to 11077 11007 to 11077 11012 to 11072
11000 120 11042
13025 to 13105 13025 to 13105 13035 to 13095
13000 150 13065
14027 to 14107 14027 to 14107 14037 to 14097
14000 150 14067
16060 to 16140 16055 to 16145 16070 to 16130
16000 180 16100
18105 to 18185 18100 to 18190 18115 to 18175
18000 210 18145
20016 to 20096 20009 to 20103 20026 to 20086
120 20056
20042 to 20122 20035 to 20129 20052 to 20112*
20000 150 20082*
20284 to 20364 20277 to 20371 20294 to 20354
300 20324
29035 to 29119 29005 to 29149 29042 to 29112
120 29077
29071 to 29155 29041 to 29185 29078 to 29148*
29000 150 29113*
29405 to 29489 29375 to 29519 29412 to 29482
300 29447
33041 to 33139 33018 to 33162 33049 to 33131
120 33090
33082 to 33180 33059 to 33203 33090 to 33172*
33000 150 33131*
33470 to 33568 33447 to 33591 33478 to 33560
300 33519
* Test points and tolerances correspond with Socata Maintenance Manual 34-11-00,
Table 503.

Rev. V Page P-13
P.3.2.2 Surface Checks
The TBM700 series aircraft with RVSM privilege require external checks per Socata Maintenance Manual
05-10-01, ATA 53 for Standard and Progressive inspection intervals. Refer to Socata Maintenance Manual
53-00-00 for fuselage surface check procedures.
P.3.3 RVSM In-Flight Altitude Hold Check

In addition to the autopilot performance checks specified in Section 5.10.2.5, RVSM operation requires
that the autopilot system accurately maintain the acquired altitude during non-turbulent, non-gust cruise
conditions. The autopilot must be shown to meet the performance specification of the following in-flight
altitude hold test.
1. Verify the following conditions (normal RVSM cruise flight):
◦ Altitude FL290 to FL310
◦ Altimeter setting 29.92 in Hg (1013 HPA)
◦ Autopilot altitude hold engaged
◦ Non-turbulent, non-gust conditions
2. Record the data specified in Table P-6 from the primary cockpit displays every 5 minutes for a
minimum flight segment of 30 minutes in length. The maximum altitude deviation shown on the
display throughout the test should not exceed ±65 feet.
If the aircraft fails to hold altitude to this tolerance, repeat the check ensuring that the airspeed remains
constant and the air remains stable during the entire test. If the test still fails, perform maintenance checks
on the G600 system, then repeat the test. RVSM operations are prohibited until the autopilot is capable of
maintaining altitude within ±65 feet of the selected cruise altitude.
Table P-6 Altitude Hold Check Log
Aircraft S/N: Pilot:
Date: En route to:
Pilot Co-pilot
Time (hr:min)
Altitude (ft) Airspeed (kt) Altitude (ft) Airspeed (kt)
0:00
0:05
0:10
0:15
0:20
0:25
0:30
0:35
0:40
0:45
0:50
0:55
1:00

Rev. V Page P-14
P.4 Updating Aircraft Documentation
In the aircraft logbook, make an entry recording installation of the G600 MFD/PFD system in accordance
with P/N 190-00601-06, Appendix P, Airworthiness Approval of TBM700 Series Aircraft in RVSM
Airspace.
Ensure that TBM700/850 RVSM G600 AFMS (P/N 190-00601-34) Revision 4 or later is inserted in the
Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) or Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH).
NOTE
G600 Airplane Flight Manual Supplement (P/N 190-00601-01) must be Revision J or
later.

Rev. V Page P-15

Installation Manual G600

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation Manual G600

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

G500/G600

AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 July 2022 Revision V

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

CURRENT REVISION DESCRIPTION

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

DEFINITIONS OF WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

1.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................................1-2

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Review of AML Section 2 - Pre-installation Considerations and Overview

Section 3 - Detailed Installation Procedures

Section 5 - Configuration and Checkout Procedures

Section 6 - Troubleshooting Procedures and System Alert Definitions

Section 7 - Operational and Installation Limitations

Section 8 - ICA Information

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

1.3.1 Approved Aircraft with Systems Not Covered by the STC

1.3.2 Class I/II Aircraft Not Identified on the AML

1.3.3 Class III Aircraft Not Identified on the AML

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

1.3.5 Required Documentation for All Installations

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

1.4.1 G500/G600 LRU Descriptions

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

1.4.3 Required Standby Instruments

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Equipment Installed per this STC

AHRS / ADC [1]

No. 2 VOR/Localizer/GS Radar Altimeter

Figure 1-1 G500/G600 System Overview - Single Installation

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Figure 1-1 G500/G600 System Overview - Single Installation

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual

GAD 43e only Equipment Installed per this STC

Temperature Probe Temperature Probe

No. 1 GPS/SBAS Navigator Video Source

Standby Instruments Autopilot/Flight Director

Weather Radar ARINC 708 WXR Only

Figure 1-2 G500/G600 System Overview - Dual Installation

190-00601-06 G500/G600 AML STC Installation Manual